JP7469835B1 - Gaming device and gaming system - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming device that can appropriately manage information on gaming machines and gaming devices. [Solution] When the "Start test play" button is touched in the maintenance mode menu, if there is at least one of the balance and owned medals remaining in the rental unit 15024, or if there are stored medals stored in the medal-less machine 15014 corresponding to the rental unit 15024, the rental unit 15024 will not transition to the test play mode. Also, when the "Clear end balls" button is touched in the maintenance mode menu, if there is a predetermined number or more of owned medals remaining in the rental unit 15024, or if there are stored medals stored in the medal-less machine 15014 corresponding to the rental unit 15024, the operation to clear the end balls cannot be performed. [Selected Figure] Fig. 274

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming device and a gaming system.

In recent years, sealed pachinko machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced to the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, Patent Document 1 describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as paper money, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a loan operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

JP 2020-89447 A

However, there is a demand for gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in Patent Document 1) that can more efficiently manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices. There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and game center staff.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming device and a gaming system that are easy to use for players, game parlor staff, and the like.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024) provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (e.g., a medal-less machine 15014),
A value information storage means (e.g., a storage unit 15404) capable of storing value information (e.g., a balance (amount and number of points), a number of medals held, a number of medals saved, etc.);
A storage information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024) capable of acquiring storage information (e.g., the number of medals held, flags, etc.) stored in the gaming machine, which is information related to value information;
A maintenance control means (e.g., the main CPU 15401 of the rental unit 15024) capable of performing operations in a maintenance mode (e.g., operations that can be performed by touching each button displayed on the maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in FIG. 274) in response to operations by users other than players (e.g., staff of an amusement facility);
and a notification means (e.g., a display device (operation unit 15409), a speaker 15411, a lamp (LED unit 15408), etc.) capable of notifying predetermined information,
The maintenance control means includes:
determining whether a predetermined operation can be performed in the maintenance mode based on at least one of the value information stored in the value information storage means and the storage information acquired by the storage information acquisition means;
When a predetermined operation cannot be performed in the maintenance mode, the notification means can be controlled to give a predetermined notification ,
the predetermined operation is a clear operation capable of clearing the value information stored in the value information storage means,
A gaming device characterized in that when a value based on specific value information stored in the value information storage means is a first predetermined value, or when a value calculated based on the accumulated information is a second predetermined value, the device is controlled so that the clear operation cannot be performed .

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A value information storage means capable of storing value information;
A storage information acquisition means for acquiring storage information (number of medals held, no flag) stored in the gaming machine, which is information related to value information;
A maintenance control means capable of performing an operation in a maintenance mode in response to an operation by a user other than a player;
A notification means capable of notifying predetermined information,
The maintenance control means includes:
determining whether a predetermined operation can be performed in the maintenance mode based on at least one of the value information stored in the value information storage means and the storage information acquired by the storage information acquisition means;
When a predetermined operation cannot be performed in the maintenance mode, the notification means can be controlled to give a predetermined notification,
the predetermined operation is a clear operation capable of clearing the value information stored in the value information storage means,
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system 15001) characterized in that when a value based on specific value information stored in the value information storage means is a first predetermined value, or when a value calculated based on the accumulated information is a second predetermined value, the system is controlled so that the clear operation cannot be performed.

According to the present invention, a gaming device and a gaming system that are easy to use for players, game parlor staff, and the like, are provided.

1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. 1 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of a first pachinko game machine. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine; 1 is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a game state. 1 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (estimate) for each setting value in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 1A is an example of a special symbol stopping mode determination table in a first pachinko gaming machine; and FIG. 1B is an example of a decorative symbol stopping mode determination table in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is a modified example of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols of the first pachinko gaming machine. 1 is an example of a normal symbol determination table for a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table for the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table for the first pachinko gaming machine. 1 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a main control process in a first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 4 is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an initial setting process at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving management process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a ceiling counter update process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter determination process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving transition determination process of a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving transition process of a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving setting process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a system timer interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a starting hole winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a sub-variable presentation pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a table for determining a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a winning combination occurs) in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when losing) in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a flowchart showing a process for determining a pre-reading presentation pattern in a first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the jackpot-related look-ahead presentation format changes. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the time-saving hit look-ahead presentation form changes. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the reserved image changes from a common win type look-ahead presentation form to a big win type look-ahead presentation form. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, showing the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern for the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form to a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a timing chart of the signal "prize ball information 1" among the signals outputted to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine depending on the gaming status. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a low start of the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the second pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening preparation process in a third pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a large prize game control process, and shows a case where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a large prize game control process, showing (A) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. FIG. 11 is an overall oblique view showing the external structure of a pachislot machine according to a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachislot machine according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a main control process of the pachislot machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a gaming system including a gaming display device according to a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an overall perspective view of a game display device according to a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming display device according to a third embodiment. 13 is a perspective view showing a screen unit of the gaming display device according to the third embodiment, viewed from the rear side. FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display contents of a gaming display device according to a third embodiment. FIG. 13 is an overall perspective view of a game display device according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a first modified example of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of a game display device according to a second modified example of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a gaming device according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming device according to a sixth embodiment. 13 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device according to the sixth embodiment from the rear side. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device according to the sixth embodiment from the rear side. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an optical path pattern of light from an LED traveling through a light guide plate according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an illumination mode of a light guide plate according to the sixth embodiment. 13 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device according to the sixth embodiment from the rear side. FIG. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a projector housing of a gaming device according to a seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of a projector housing of the gaming device according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a projector housing according to the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a control process executed by a control circuit according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is an oblique view of a data display device and a gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a data display device according to an eighth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine as a pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine as a pachislot machine according to an eighth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a data display device according to an eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a game state determination table related to the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a performance pattern table according to the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of details of the signals transmitted from the external terminal board of an gaming machine such as a pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of details of signals for each terminal transmitted from an external terminal board of a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine according to the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a state transition diagram of the game state of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a presentation display linked to the presentation of the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a performance execution process executed by a control unit according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a lighting state of a top lamp according to a modified example of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a lighting state of a top lamp according to a modified example of the eighth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a performance pattern table related to the 9th embodiment. A figure showing an example of a game state transition table related to the 9th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of a performance execution process according to the 9th embodiment. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a gaming system including a gaming device according to a tenth embodiment. FIG. A block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine as a pachislot machine related to the tenth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming device according to a tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an image sensor unit according to a tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a presentation execution process executed by a control unit of the gaming device according to the tenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of the LED control process executed by the sub-control unit of the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a data receiving process executed by an image sensor unit of the gaming device according to the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a light source detection process executed by an image sensor unit of an amusement device according to a tenth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining a light source exploration process according to a tenth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining a light source exploration process according to a tenth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining a light source exploration process according to a tenth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining a light source exploration process according to a tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a noise removal process performed by an image sensor unit of an amusement device according to a tenth embodiment. 23A to 23D are diagrams for explaining noise removal processing according to the tenth embodiment. 23A to 23D are diagrams for explaining noise removal processing according to the tenth embodiment. 23A to 23D are diagrams for explaining noise removal processing according to the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart of a decoding process executed by an image sensor unit of the gaming device according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining CDMA encoding according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining PSM encoding according to the tenth embodiment. A diagram showing a gaming system according to an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a lighting pattern of a lamp. 11 is a diagram for explaining a model identification pattern. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the menu screen. FIG. 13 shows a character customization screen for customizing a character. 13 is a flowchart showing lamp control processing (when power is turned on) performed in the gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a lamp control process performed in the gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing lamp control processing (at the start of customization) performed in the gaming machine. 10 is a flowchart showing a lighting pattern detection process performed in the data display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a model identification table. A diagram showing a gaming system according to a twelfth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a lighting pattern of a lamp. 13 is a flowchart showing lamp control processing (when a password is entered) performed in the gaming machine. 10 is a flowchart showing a lighting pattern detection process performed in the data display device. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a lighting pattern of a lamp. A figure showing a setting suggestion performance lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process performed in the data display machine when detecting a pattern for presentation during play. 13 is a flowchart showing an illumination unit control process performed in the data display device. A diagram showing a gaming system according to a fourteenth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing lock-related processing performed in the gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel spin start process performed in the gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a reservation lock effect-related process performed in the data display device. A diagram showing a gaming system according to a fifteenth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a gaming system according to a fifteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a pachinko machine related to the 15th embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a sub-control circuit of a pachinko machine related to the 15th embodiment. A figure showing an example of a setting screen displayed in a pachinko machine related to the 15th embodiment. A diagram showing the appearance of the gaming device related to the 15th embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a gaming device according to a fifteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the appearance of a gaming device according to variant 1 of the fifteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a gaming device according to variant 1 of the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen displayed on a gaming device according to variant 1 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an overview of a gaming system related to variant example 2 of the fifteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a card unit related to variant example 2 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an overview of a gaming system related to variant example 3 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an overview of a gaming system related to variant example 3 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an overview of a gaming system related to variant example 4 of the fifteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a gaming device according to variant 4 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a setting screen displayed in a pachinko machine related to variant example 4 of the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen displayed on a gaming device according to variant 4 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an overview of a gaming system related to variant example 5 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an overview of a gaming system related to variant example 6 of the fifteenth embodiment. A diagram showing an overview of the gaming system relating to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view showing a gaming machine equipped with a sandwich device. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an operation unit of the sandwiched device. A block diagram showing the configuration of a sandwiched device in a gaming system according to a sixteenth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a hall computer in a gaming system according to a sixteenth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a member management server in a gaming system according to a sixteenth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a smartphone in a gaming system according to a sixteenth embodiment. A functional block diagram of a sandwiched device in a gaming system according to a sixteenth embodiment. A functional block diagram of a hall computer in a gaming system according to a sixteenth embodiment. A functional block diagram of a member management server in the gaming system according to the sixteenth embodiment. A functional block diagram of a smartphone in a gaming system according to a sixteenth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the table configuration in the gaming system according to the 16th embodiment. A figure showing an example of the table configuration in the gaming system according to the 16th embodiment. A figure for explaining the processing related to the initial membership registration procedure in the gaming system according to the sixteenth embodiment. A figure for explaining the processing related to the initial membership registration procedure in the gaming system according to the sixteenth embodiment. A figure for explaining the processing related to the initial membership registration procedure in the gaming system according to the sixteenth embodiment. A figure for explaining the processing related to the initial membership registration procedure in the gaming system according to the sixteenth embodiment. A figure for explaining the processing related to the initial membership registration procedure in the gaming system according to the sixteenth embodiment. A figure for explaining the processing relating to the second or subsequent membership registration procedures in the gaming system according to the sixteenth embodiment. A figure for explaining the processing relating to the second or subsequent membership registration procedures in the gaming system according to the sixteenth embodiment. A figure for explaining the processing when playing as a global member in the gaming system according to the 16th embodiment. A figure for explaining the processing when playing as a global member in the gaming system according to the 16th embodiment. A diagram to explain the movement of stored balls in the gaming system relating to the 16th embodiment. A figure showing a screen for instructing the movement of stored balls in the gaming system related to the 16th embodiment. A figure showing a screen for instructing the movement of stored balls in the gaming system related to the 16th embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a basic configuration of an enclosed gaming machine. A diagram showing an overview of the gaming system relating to the 17th embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine as an enclosed pachislot machine related to the 17th embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a dedicated unit in the gaming system according to the seventeenth embodiment. A functional block diagram of a dedicated unit in the gaming system according to the seventeenth embodiment. A functional block diagram of a member management server in the gaming system according to the seventeenth embodiment. A figure for explaining the processing related to the initial membership registration procedure in the gaming system according to the seventeenth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a table configuration in a gaming system according to a 17th embodiment. A figure for explaining the payment processing related to the lending of gaming media in the gaming system according to the seventeenth embodiment. A figure for explaining the payment processing related to the lending of gaming media in the gaming system according to the seventeenth embodiment. A figure for explaining the payment processing related to the lending of gaming media in the gaming system according to the seventeenth embodiment. A figure for explaining the payment processing related to the lending of gaming media in the gaming system according to the seventeenth embodiment. A figure to explain a method of storing and managing a user's personal information and game information in the game system according to the seventeenth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a table configuration in a gaming system according to a 17th embodiment. A diagram showing the relationship between data used in the gaming system according to the 17th embodiment. A figure showing an analysis map graph that can be generated from data used in the gaming system according to the seventeenth embodiment. A figure showing an analysis map graph that can be generated from data used in the gaming system according to the seventeenth embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing a gaming system according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a gaming machine (a medal-less machine) according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a perspective view showing a rental unit according to a first embodiment of the present invention; 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a rental unit according to a first embodiment of the present invention; 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a hall computer according to a first embodiment of the present invention; 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a card server according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 2 is a state transition diagram of a rental unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of an operation menu for a rental unit related to the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of an operation menu for a rental unit related to the first embodiment of the present invention. A conceptual diagram showing an overview of the lending/dispensing abnormality control function of the lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A conceptual diagram showing an overview of the lending/dispensing abnormality control function of the lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A conceptual diagram showing an overview of the lending/dispensing abnormality control function of the lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing the processing of a card return control function of a lending unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing of the medal sharing function of a lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing of the medal sharing function of a lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing a screen related to the medal sharing function of a lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing a screen related to the medal sharing function of a lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing the processing of the closing process control function of the rental unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. A conceptual diagram showing an overview of the data update/restoration processing control function of a rental unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing the processing of the data update/restoration processing control function of a rental unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing the processing of the data update/restoration processing control function of a rental unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing a screen related to the rest function of the rental unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing a screen related to the rest function of the rental unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing a screen related to the rest function of the rental unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing the processing of the rest function of the rental unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing the processing of an update function of a rental unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing the processing of an update function of a rental unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing the directory structure etc. related to the update function of the rental unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A diagram for explaining the check function when a card is inserted into the lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A diagram for explaining the check function when a card is inserted into the lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A diagram for explaining the check function when a card is inserted into the lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing the processing of the ticket issuing function of the rental unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an overview of a donation function of a lending unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram showing an overview of a donation function of a lending unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing an overview of the automatic medal replenishment function of the lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing of the automatic medal replenishment function of the lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing an overview of the automatic medal replenishment function of the lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing of the automatic medal replenishment function of the lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing an overview of the business status update function of a rental unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing an overview of the setting update function of a lending unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing a screen related to the linked maintenance function of the rental unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A network diagram related to the linked maintenance function of the rental unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. 11 is a flowchart showing the processing of the linked maintenance function of the rental unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing a screen related to the operation menu GUI control function of the rental unit in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing a screen related to the operation menu GUI control function of the rental unit in the first embodiment of the present invention.

First Embodiment
As examples of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko machine is defined as the front direction, the back side of the pachinko machine is defined as the rear direction, the left side of the pachinko machine when viewed from the front is defined as the left direction, the right side of the pachinko machine when viewed from the front is defined as the right direction, the top of the pachinko machine is defined as the up direction, the bottom side of the pachinko machine is defined as the down direction, the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is defined as the rightward direction, and the conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the leftward direction.

The first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are both so-called type one pachinko gaming machines known as digital pachinko. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. In contrast, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1/2 mixed machine, which is a combination of a type 1 gaming machine called a digital pachinko machine and a type 2 gaming machine called a feather mono. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but this specification describes an example in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. However, this is not intended to exclude type 1/2 mixed pachinko gaming machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In this specification, when the term "special design" is used, it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

In addition, the term "variable display" in this specification includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the pattern is displayed by changing, and "stop display" in which the pattern is displayed by stopping, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display pattern is stopped (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special pattern lottery") and the result of the normal pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "normal pattern lottery") described later are determined. Note that although the pattern appears to be stopped, there are cases where the pattern is displayed in a state where the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined (for example, a state where it is temporarily stopped), and such a state is included in the variable display. Note that even if the pattern is temporarily stopped, for example, the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined at this point, so the pattern can be displayed again by changing.

In addition, in this specification, when explaining the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the case where there are two special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) will be explained as an example. However, for the first pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. The first pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

As for pachinko gaming machines in which the first and second special symbols are not displayed in parallel, but only one of them is displayed, there are pachinko gaming machines in which, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are on hold, the starting conditions of the second special symbol are established with priority over the starting conditions of the first special symbol (hereafter referred to as "priority variable machines"), and pachinko gaming machines in which the starting conditions are established in the order of winning, including the first and second starting holes (hereafter referred to as "sequential variable machines").

In a priority variable machine, the start conditions for the first special symbol are met when certain requirements are met, such as neither the first nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is not on hold, and the variable display of the first special symbol is on hold. Also, in a priority variable machine, the start conditions for the second special symbol are met when certain requirements are met, such as neither the first nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, and the variable display of the second special symbol is on hold.

In a sequential variable machine, the start conditions for the first special symbol are met when at least all of the following are met: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the first special symbol is on hold, and the earliest reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the first special symbol. In a sequential variable machine, the start conditions for the second special symbol are met when at least all of the following are met: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is on hold, and the earliest reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the second special symbol.

The following explains using a priority variable machine as an example.

[1-1. Appearance]
Fig. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the front right. Fig. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the front right. Fig. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the rear right.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), a payout unit, and a payout unit. 8 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 3), a board unit 9 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 3), and a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2). 160 (see FIG. 2). Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the tray unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the dispensing unit 8 and the base unit 9 will be briefly described. The game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described in detail below. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations that are not shown in FIG.

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to an island facility of an amusement park. A hinge (no reference number) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is supported on this hinge. In this way, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward relative to the outer frame 2 with the hinge as an axis.

The outer frame 2 must be strong to support many components, such as the payout unit 8, board unit 9, display device 7, game board unit 10, glass door 4, and tray unit 5, via the base door 3. On the other hand, there is a demand for larger display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and game board unit 10 to enhance the presentation effect. For this reason, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8 and a base unit 9 attached to its back side and supports these.

A game board unit 10 is fitted onto the front side of the base door 3. In addition, hinges (not referenced) are provided at the top end, the middle part below the vertical center, and the bottom end, for example on the front side of the left end of the base door 3, and the glass door 4 is journaled on the hinges at the top end and the middle part, and the plate unit 5 is journaled on the hinges at the middle part and the bottom end. In this way, the glass door 4 and the plate unit 5 can be rotated forward, either together or individually, relative to the base door 3, with the hinges as an axis.

The launcher 6 is fixedly attached, for example, to the lower right side of the front surface of the base door 3, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to the left and right of the upper side. The speakers 32 output, for example, sound effects of characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio notifications, error notifications, and other sound effects.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite the hinge (i.e., the right end). This locking device has the function of locking the base door 3 to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed to the base door 3, the protective glass 43 faces a game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) formed in the game board unit 10. In this way, the game area 105 can be visually confirmed from the front with the glass door 4 closed to the base door 3, and game balls flowing down the game area 105 can be prevented from flying out forward.

The protective glass 43 may be made of multiple pieces of glass (e.g., two pieces) attached with a gap between them, or multiple pieces of glass may be unitized with a gap between them. Furthermore, if the protective glass 43 is unitized, a light guide plate, for example, may be provided between the pieces of glass. The protective glass 43 is not limited to being made of glass, and may be made of, for example, transparent resin.

In addition, an operation unit 66 is provided at the bottom of the glass door 4, which can be operated by, for example, a player to receive a gaming information service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). This operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by an arcade manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

A speaker cover 45 is provided on the top of the glass door 4, located in front of the speaker 32. A large number of LED groups 46 used for light-emitting effects and the like are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 shown in Figs. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for use in light announcements and light-emitting effects in various variations, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects and the like, and may be, for example, liquid crystal or a lamp.

(Dish unit)
The dish unit 5 is a unit consisting of an upper dish 51 and a lower dish 52. The dish unit 5 is located at the front lower part of the base door 3, below the glass door 4. As described above, the dish unit 5 is configured to be rotated relative to the base door 3 to open and close, so that, for example, when balls become jammed, an amusement arcade staff member can clear the jam. Note that the dish unit 5 does not necessarily have to have an upper dish 51 and a lower dish 52, and may be configured as an integrated dish.

The upper tray 51 is provided so that game balls can be stored therein, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described below). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout outlet 53 and a performance button 54. Game balls to be lent out or paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout outlet 53 to the upper tray 51. The performance button 54 is what is called a "CHANCE button" or "push button". The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to an operation function operated by the player. An example of the predetermined performance function is a function to vibrate or protrude upward based on the result of a process to determine whether a special symbol has been hit. It may also serve the function of the operation unit 66.

The lower tray 52 is primarily intended to store game balls that have spilled over from the upper tray 51. The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout outlet 55 that communicates with the upper tray 51, and game balls that have spilled over from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference number) is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to a ball box placed below the lower tray 52. If a so-called individual machine counting system is installed on each machine, not only is the ball box unnecessary, but the game balls counted by the individual machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be used again for play.

(Launch device)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launching device 6 is disposed in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and below the right of the tray unit 5. The launching device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive unit (not shown), and a launching handle 62.

The panel body 61 is arranged so that when the plate unit 5 is closed relative to the base door 3, the plate unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 appear integrated in appearance.

The launch handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is disposed on the front side of the panel body 61. The drive device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 61, and is configured, for example, by a launch solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the launch handle 62, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the launch handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (amount of operation), the stronger the launch strength of the game ball.

The game balls launched from the launching device 6 located at the lower right of the dish unit 5 roll in an arc along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described below) via the launching rail (not shown) and are launched into the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described below). The location of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the dish unit 5, but may be the lower left of the dish unit 5. In this case, the launching rail is not necessary, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, making it possible to increase versatility.

(Display Device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or may be a device that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, an effect identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of a hit determination process of a special pattern, an effect image according to the result of a hit determination process of a special pattern, an effect image during a big win game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of the variable display of a special pattern, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but the display device 7 may be attached to the base door 3 as long as the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided to display the various performance images described above, but multiple display devices (e.g., two) may be provided and the performance images may be displayed using these multiple display devices.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see Figures 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, etc. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see Figures 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When a payout condition is met, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied to the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80, for example, to the upper tray 51. In addition, a power switch 95 is provided on the rear side of the payout unit 8, as shown in Figure 3.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see Figs. 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the board unit 9 is provided with a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described below) is mounted, a sub-control board 92 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described below) is mounted, a payout/launch control board 93 on which a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described below) that controls the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply board on which a power supply circuit 450 (see FIG. 6 described below) that supplies power is mounted.

For the sake of convenience, FIG. 3 shows the main control board 91, sub-control board 92, payout/launch control board 93, and power supply board 94 as reference symbols, but these boards are all housed in a board case.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board on which one control LSI or multiple LSIs are provided). However, this is not limited to this, and the sub-control board 92 may be configured with multiple boards, for example, by making all or part of the display control circuit 304, audio control circuit 305, LED control circuit 306, and role control circuit 307 (all of which are shown in FIG. 6, described below) separate boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine. A game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 10, in which the launched game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 110, a center role 115 located approximately in the center of the game area 105, a first starting hole 120, a general winning hole 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric role unit 130, a second starting hole 140, a normal electric role unit 145, an LED unit 160, an outlet 178, and a back unit (not shown) located behind the game board unit 10. As mentioned above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the gaming area 105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts of the gaming panel 100 where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the gaming panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the rear unit can be seen from the front, but the entire gaming panel 100 may be made transparent, or only a portion of it may be made transparent.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference numbers). The play area 105 is defined by the guide rail 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the play area 105.

(Center role)
The center device 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference number) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko gaming machine, the area of the gaming area 105 to the left of the center role 115 is referred to as the left area 106, and the area to the right of the center role 115 is referred to as the right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for the second and third pachinko gaming machines described below.

A game ball launched by the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107. A game ball flowing down the left area 106 or the right area 107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 100. If the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 (see Figure 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 107.

In this specification, the manner in which the launch handle 62 is operated (hitting style) is referred to as a "left hit" when the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left side area 106, and as a "right hit" when the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right side area 107. In this way, the player can choose to hit the game ball toward either the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

The center device 115 also has a warp entrance 117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 are configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center device 115. The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower edge of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game balls can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 119 are configured to be released directly above the first start entrance 120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start entrance 120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 but do not enter the chance entrance 119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 120, various data related to the first special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as a random number value for determining a big win of the first special symbol, a random number value for the symbol of the first special symbol, a random number value for determining the reach of the first special symbol, and a random number value for selecting the performance of the first special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as the "variation start condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is established, the stored various data is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 120 is referred to as the starting entry of the first special pattern, and various data related to the first special pattern (for example, various random number values such as the random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special pattern, the pattern random number value for the first special pattern, the random number value for determining reach for the first special pattern, and the random number value for selecting effects for the first special pattern) are referred to as the starting information of the first special pattern. In addition, storing the starting information of the first special pattern until the starting conditions are met is referred to as holding. The same applies to the second special pattern.

(General prize entry)
The general winning openings 122 are arranged in a plurality of general winning openings 122 at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The pass gate unit 125 is located in the right area 107 and is a unit that integrates a pass gate 126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a pass gate switch 127 (see Figure 6 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126.

When the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 126, various data related to the normal symbols (e.g., random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are winning) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (e.g., up to four). The stored various data are used in the process of determining whether the normal symbols are winning. Note that even if the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 126, no prize balls are paid out. The passing gate unit 125 may be located in the left area 106 instead of or in addition to the right area 107.

In this specification, the passage of the gaming ball through the passing gate 126 is referred to as a start passing, and various data related to the normal symbol extracted by the passing of the gaming ball through the passing gate 126 (for example, a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol, etc.) is referred to as the start information of the normal symbol. In addition, storing the start information of the normal symbol until the start condition is met is referred to as holding.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric device unit 130 is a unit body that integrates a big winning opening 131, a count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning opening 131, and a special electric device 133. The special electric device unit 130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 125 in the right side area 107.

The large prize opening 131 is arranged so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 131 described above, a large prize opening that can win game balls hit from the left may be arranged, or a large prize opening that can win game balls may be arranged above the center gimmick 115.

The large prize opening 131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) to enter (pass through) when the game is controlled to a large win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134. The special electric device 133, i.e., the special electric shutter 134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for game balls to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 131. In addition, in the big win game state, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big win game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the large prize opening 131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 140 is disposed in the left area 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting hole 120). However, the second starting hole 140 is configured such that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the left to win, for example, due to game pins, etc., and a game ball hit from the right is guided to the vicinity of the second starting hole 140 so that it can win. However, it is not essential to configure the second starting hole 140 in this way, and it may be provided in the right area 107, for example. The second starting hole 140 may also be configured such that a game ball hit from the left can win.

When the second start hole switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 140, various data related to the second special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as a random number value for determining a big win of the second special symbol, a random number value for the symbol of the second special symbol, a random number value for determining the reach of the second special symbol, and a random number value for selecting the performance of the second special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the second special symbol (also referred to as the "variation start condition of the second special symbol" in this specification) is established, the stored various data is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball enters the second start hole 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is disposed in the left area 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting hole 120), and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) the winning hole, a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into the winning hole, and the normal electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second starting hole 140, and the switch is the second starting hole switch 141.

The normal electric device 146 includes a normal power movable member 147, which is a so-called electric chute and is made of, for example, a blade member, and a normal power solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described below) that operates the normal power movable member 147. The normal electric device 146, i.e., the normal power movable member 147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second start hole 140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second start hole 140. The normal power movable member 147 includes blade types, door types, protruding plate types, etc.

(Outlet)
The outlet 178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 105 but have not won any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the big winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 122, so that game balls flowing down the game area 105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is for decorating the game board unit 10, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a group of performance-use props 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as movable props controlled by the sub-control circuit 300. The group of performance-use props 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. At least one of the props or prop-use prop component members constituting the props among the group of performance-use props 58 functions as a performance-use prop that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is disposed in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10, outside the play area 105 (see FIG. 4, for example). The LED unit 160 is a unit body that integrates various display sections.

Figure 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol hold display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, a first special symbol hold display section 165, a second special symbol hold display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, and a time-saving notification display section 168.

(Normal pattern display section)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "normal symbol starting conditions") are met, the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b start to alternately turn on and off to start the variable display of the normal symbol. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the normal symbol started, the variable display of the normal symbol stops, and the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of the lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b turns off. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a miss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a turns off and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b that indicate the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric role 146, and the normal electric movable member 147 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, making it easier for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 140.

(Regular pattern reserved display section)
The reserved display unit 162 for normal symbols displays the number of reserved variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of normal symbols") when the start information of the normal symbols, i.e., the variable display, is reserved, and is equipped with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above "variable display of normal symbols is reserved" refers to the state from when the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are hit, etc.) are extracted until the start condition of the normal symbols is established. The start condition of the normal symbols is established when at least the following is satisfied: the normal symbols are not being variable displayed, and the variable display of the normal symbols is reserved.

The normal symbol reserved display unit 162 displays the number of reserved normal symbols by a combination of the on/off state of the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved normal symbols is one, the normal symbol reserved display LED 162a is lit and the normal symbol reserved display LED 162b is turned off. When the number of reserved normal symbols is two, both the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b are lit. When the number of reserved normal symbols is three, the normal symbol reserved display LED 162a flashes and the normal symbol reserved display LED 162b is lit. When the number of reserved normal symbols is four, both the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b flash. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b, which indicate the number of reserved normal symbols, is not limited to this.

(Special design display section)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the special symbol winning determination process, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. The first special symbol display unit 163 includes a first special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 includes a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the conditions for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "initiation conditions for the first special symbol") are met, the variable display of the first special symbol begins, in which all or some of the eight LEDs 163a-163h that make up the first special symbol display unit 163 alternately or mutually turn on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol began, the variable display of the first special symbol stops, and the result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol is derived.

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of on/off of the eight LEDs 163a-163h that make up the first special symbol display section 163 will be a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is displayed as stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "start condition of the second special pattern") are met, the variable display of the second special pattern is started in which all or some of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h that make up the second special pattern display unit 164 alternately or mutually turn on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the second special pattern was started, the variable display of the second special pattern stops, and the result of the winning determination process for the second special pattern is derived.

If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of on/off of the eight LEDs 164a-164h that make up the second special symbol display section 164 will be a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is displayed as stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reserved display section)
The special pattern reserve display unit displays the number of reserved special pattern variable displays (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of special patterns") when start information for a special pattern, i.e., a variable display, is reserved, and is provided with a first special pattern reserve display unit 165 and a second special pattern reserve display unit 166.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved first special symbols when the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, and is equipped with first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a, 165b. "The variable display of the first special symbol is reserved" refers to the state from when the entry (passage) of the game ball into the first start hole 120 is detected and the start information of the first special symbol is extracted, until the start condition of the first special symbol is established.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of the lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a is lit and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b is extinguished. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is two, both the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is three, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a flashes and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b is lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is four, both the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b flash. However, the display mode of the first special pattern reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b, which indicate the reserved number of first special patterns, is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reserved display unit 166 displays the number of reserved second special symbols when the variable display of the second special symbol is reserved, and is equipped with second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a, 166b. "Variable display of the second special symbol is reserved" refers to the state from when the entry (passage) of the game ball into the second start hole 140 is detected and the start information of the second special symbol is extracted, until the start condition of the second special symbol is established.

The second special symbol reserved display unit 166 displays the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a is lit and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b is extinguished. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is two, both the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is three, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a flashes and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b is lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is four, both the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b flash. However, the display mode of the second special pattern reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b, which indicate the reserved number of second special patterns, is not limited to this.

(Display unit for probability change notification)
The probability change notification display unit 167 can be turned on while the probability change control described below is being executed, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability change notification display unit 167 may be lit while probability change control is being executed, but it may also be configured not to light up so that it is not possible to tell from the outside that probability change control is being executed, thereby concealing the fact that probability change control is being executed.

However, when the power is cut off while the special rate control is being executed, the data indicating that the special rate control is being executed is not lost due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described below. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the special rate control is being executed and then turned on, the special rate notification display unit 167 lights up in a manner that allows the user to know from the outside that the special rate control is being executed.

Even if whether or not the special rate control is being executed is kept secret before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the special rate control display unit 167 is turned on, so that it is possible to know that the special rate control is being executed.

(Time-saving notification display unit)
The time-saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on while the time-saving control described below is being executed, and is configured with, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In this embodiment, the time-saving notification display unit 168 has, for example, a first time-saving notification display unit 168a and a second time-saving notification display unit 168b, but the number of time-saving notification display units 168 is not limited to this.

As will be described in detail later, the time-saving play state includes time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C. And, for example, it is configured so that it is possible to know which time-saving play state is being used by the combination of lighting or extinguishing of the first time-saving notification display unit 168a and the second time-saving notification display unit 168b.

The time-saving notification display unit 168 may light up the first time-saving notification display unit 168a and/or the second time-saving notification display unit 168b depending on the time-saving control being executed, but may be turned on or off in a manner that makes it impossible to know from the outside whether or not time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed (for example, all lights off, all lights on, or a manner unrelated to the time-saving control being executed), thereby concealing the fact that time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed. In particular, while it may be possible to know from the outside whether or not time-saving control is being executed, it may be difficult to know from the outside which time-saving control is being executed, so by concealing the type of time-saving control being executed, it is possible to increase interest.

However, when the power supply is cut off while time-saving control is being executed, due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described below, not only the data indicating that time-saving control is being executed, but also the data indicating the type of time-saving control being executed is not lost. Therefore, if the power supply is cut off while time-saving control is being executed and then the power supply is turned on again, the time-saving notification display unit 168 turns on or off in a manner that allows the user to know from the outside that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed.

Even if the fact that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed are concealed so that they cannot be seen from the outside before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the time-saving notification display unit 168 is configured to turn on and/or turn off in a manner that allows the fact that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed to be seen from the outside.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and is equipped with a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 204, and a backup capacitor 207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected to a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. The main CPU 201 has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors operation and a function for preventing fraud.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 201, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal when necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 200 also includes an I/O port 205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, normal symbol reserved display unit 162, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, first special symbol reserved display unit 165, second special symbol reserved display unit 166, probability change notification display unit 167, time reduction notification display unit 168, normal power solenoid 148, and special power solenoid 135 are connected to the main control circuit 200. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170 and error notification monitor 172 are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, which will be described later. Note that the setting change code may be configured to display a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 200 is also connected to the first start port switch 121, the second start port switch 141, the pass gate switch 127, the count switch 132, and the general winning port switch 123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 200 via the I/O port 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 184 used to transmit data to a hall computer 186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key socket 174 into which a setting key 174a is inserted that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and a RAM clear switch 176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key slot 174 and the RAM clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the arcade manager. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key slot 174 and the RAM clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key slot 174 and the RAM clear switch 176, so that the arcade manager can touch the setting key slot 174 and/or the RAM clear switch 176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the arcade manager to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key slot 174 and the RAM clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 400 or the power supply circuit 450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key slot 174 or the RAM clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 includes a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a role control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in Fig. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to effect buttons 54 (see Fig. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the first pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub-CPU 301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. In response to a sound generation command from the sub-CPU 301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46, which includes decorative LEDs, etc. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, etc.

The reel control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of performance reels 58). The reel control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout/launch control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 200, it sends a specified signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 182. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) and controls the launch of the game ball.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.

The power supply circuit 450 is connected to a power switch 95 and other components. The power switch 95 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of a game flow will be described with reference to Fig. 7 and Fig. 8. Fig. 7 is an example of a game flow. Fig. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a game state. Note that the game flow shown in Fig. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be grasped from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters one of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120, etc.), a payout control process for the game ball is performed. Pachinko games include a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process for a special symbol is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the starting hole 120, 140, and whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state is determined. The normal symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process for a normal symbol is performed based on the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 126, and whether or not to open the winning hole (in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140) by operating the normal electric role 146 is determined. In this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used in a broad sense, and for example, normal symbol games and games with effects that use operation units such as the effect button 54 (see, for example, Figure 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, one special pattern game is defined as the period from when the variable display of the special pattern begins until this variable display ends and the result of the special pattern hit determination process is definitively displayed (derived) (more specifically, until the special pattern determination time has passed). However, if the game is controlled to a big hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the end of the big hit game state. Note that in the first pachinko game machine, small hits are not included in the result of the special pattern hit determination process, but in the pachinko game machine in which small hits are included in the result of the special pattern hit determination process, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the end of the small hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived and the game is controlled to a small hit game state.

When a stop display mode indicating a jackpot in a special symbol game is output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric device 133 is operated to keep the jackpot winning hole 131 open for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30,000 msec), and the possibility of winning in the jackpot winning hole 131 is relatively increased.

In addition, when a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win is output to the normal symbol display unit 161 in a normal symbol game, the normal electric device 146 is activated to open the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole 140 in this embodiment), and the possibility of winning through the second starting hole 140, for example, is relatively increased.

The games that can be played in a pachinko game are not limited to special symbol games and normal symbol games, and new games other than these may also be playable.

The following provides an overview of the game flow for special symbol games and regular symbol games.

[1-3-1. Special symbol game]
As shown in Figure 7, the special pattern game mainly includes a special pattern start winning process which is carried out when there is a winning (passing through) of the first start port 120 or the second start port 140, and a special pattern control process which is carried out based on the establishment of the start conditions for the special pattern.

When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140, a special symbol start winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (e.g., various random number values such as a random number value for determining a jackpot, a random number value for a pattern, a random number value for determining a reach, and a random number value for selecting a performance) are extracted (obtained) from various counters for the special symbol (e.g., a counter for determining a jackpot, a counter for determining a pattern, etc.). Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even when the special symbol control process is being executed.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start conditions for the special symbol are met. When the start conditions for the special symbol are met, a special symbol hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not there is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol's jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine the stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped is determined by referring to the random number value for pattern determination extracted from the special symbol's pattern determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variable flag is on, the probability variable control is executed. In the hit determination process for the special symbol described above, if the probability variable flag is off, it is determined to be a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variable flag is on, it is determined to be a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as the "jackpot probability."

The high probability flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not high probability control is executed. When the high probability flag is on, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, a high probability time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the high probability flag is off, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time-saving game state).

Next, a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern) is determined by referencing the random number, the result of the special symbol winning judgment process described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed as described above. Then, a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined, a presentation pattern determination process is then performed to determine the presentation pattern. Then, based on the results of the presentation pattern determination process, presentation control process is performed for display presentation such as decorative symbols and character presentations displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and sound presentation such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32. The presentation control process is performed by the sub-CPU 301.

Then, when the special pattern variable display control process and presentation control process are completed and a jackpot has been hit, a jackpot game control process is carried out. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the special pattern game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-jackpot game state is carried out. In this case, the game state transitions depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if the jackpot type is one in which both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are set to on, a transition to a high-probability time-saving game state occurs after the jackpot game state ends.

On the other hand, if there is no big win, i.e., if it is a miss, the special symbol game ends. Note that in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but in pachinko gaming machines in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small win, a small win game control process is performed when a small win is won. Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, if there is a time-saving hit, which will be described later, the game will transition to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the conditions for starting the special symbol are met, the various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

If a game ball enters the start hole 120, 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start entry process is executed. In addition, the start information of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the start hole 120, 140 (for example, various data such as random numbers for determining a jackpot, random numbers for the special symbol, random numbers for reaching a jackpot, and random numbers for selecting effects) is held until the start conditions of the special symbol are met.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a maximum of eight pieces of start information for special patterns can be reserved, consisting of four pieces of start information for the first special pattern and four pieces of start information for the second special pattern, but the number of start information for special patterns that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, more start information for the first special pattern may be reserved than start information for the second special pattern, or more start information for the second special pattern may be reserved than start information for the first special pattern.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, a look-ahead determination (see, for example, S396 in FIG. 52 described below) may be made between the start of the special symbol and the establishment of the start condition of the special symbol, to determine whether or not a "jackpot" has been won and the change pattern prior to the hit determination process of the special symbol based on the start information extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the start hole 120, 140, and a look-ahead performance function may be provided to perform a predetermined performance based on the result of this look-ahead determination. Note that the look-ahead determination may be made before or after the start information extracted by the game ball entering the start hole 120, 140 is reserved.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal pattern game mainly includes a normal pattern start passing process which is carried out when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and a normal pattern control process which is carried out based on the establishment of the normal pattern start condition.

When a game ball passes through the passing gate 126, a normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, start information for the normal symbol (e.g., a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit) is extracted (obtained) from the winning determination counter for the normal symbol, and the extracted start information is reserved.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol has been met. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit judgment random number value extracted from the hit judgment counter for the normal symbol, executes the normal symbol hit judgment process to determine whether or not the "normal symbol hit" has occurred, and then executes the variation pattern determination process. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the winning judgment process for the normal symbol and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, and executes a variable display control process that controls the variable display of the normal symbol, and a performance control process that performs a predetermined performance. Note that there are cases in which the performance control process is not executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the performance control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating a "normal winning symbol" has been derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6). When it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol winning game control process. In this normal symbol winning game control process, the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) is operated, and the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)) is opened so that the winning ball can enter (pass through) the winning hole or the opening state is easily opened. On the other hand, when it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a game state where the time-saving control is not executed (for example, a normal game state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win will be derived may be set to 0. The time-saving control corresponds to at least one of the following controls: special symbol shortening control, which shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and electric support control, which operates the normal electric role device 146 to increase the frequency with which the winning port (for example, the second starting port 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment) is opened, compared to when the time-saving control is not executed. This time-saving control may be a control that performs both the special symbol shortening control and the electric support control, or a control that performs only one of the special symbol shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control is a control that improves the time-saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of a "normal pattern hit", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time). The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of a game ball entering a winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), and refers to the winning probability of a "normal pattern hit", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and/or the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.). In addition, improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier for a game ball to enter a winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). In other words, when electric support control is executed, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" increases, the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened, and/or winning is made easier with the normal electric device 146 (increasing the number of times it opens, extending the opening time, shortening the wait time, etc.) compared to when electric support control is not executed.

Then, each time the normal symbol start conditions are met, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

When the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, the start information of the normal symbol (e.g., a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, etc.) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is held until the start condition of the normal symbol is met.

The variable display of normal symbols will start in the order they were reserved, and when the start conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display will be performed for the earliest reserved start information of the reserved normal symbols.

The method for extracting various random numbers (for example, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot, the pattern random number value for the first special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is in reach, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is a jackpot, the pattern random number value for the second special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is in reach, and the random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is in reach, etc.) may be a soft random number method that generates random numbers within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 201, or a hard random number method that extracts random numbers from a counter in a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot game state and a jackpot game state. In the non-jackpot game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when a jackpot is derived as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the game state transitions from the non-jackpot game state to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed even in the jackpot game state. Note that the explanation of the small jackpot game state will be omitted.

Non-jackpot game states can be broadly divided into low-probability states in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and high-probability game states in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high.

The high probability game state includes a high probability time-saving game state (high probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed. Note that, although not included in the high probability game state in the first pachinko game machine, a high probability non-time-saving game state (high probability, low base state) in which time-saving control is not executed may also be included in the high probability game state, as shown in FIG. 8.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability, low base) in which time-saving control is not executed, and a time-saving game state (low probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time-saving play state includes time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C.

The A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a player can transition after a specific jackpot game state ends, and the A time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when a transition to the jackpot game state occurs. When the A time-saving game state ends due to a specified number of special symbol games being played, the game will generally transition to the normal game state.

The B time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a player can enter when, for example, a jackpot game state ends and the variable display of special symbols begins in a non-high probability game state (i.e., a game state in which the probability flag is off), or when the number of times the special symbols are variable displayed (e.g., a ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1,000 times), starting from when the RAM is cleared (described below). The B time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when a transition is made to the jackpot game state. When the B time-saving game state ends as a result of a specified number of special symbol games being played, the game will generally transition to the normal game state.

The time-saving C game state is a time-saving game state that can be entered when the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed in the low probability state is a "time-saving hit" and the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived, and the time-saving C game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games determined by winning the "time-saving hit" are played or when a transition is made to a jackpot game state. When the time-saving C game state ends by playing the specified number of special symbol games, as a general rule, a transition is made to a normal game state. Note that, for example, if multiple time-saving game states overlap, even if the specified number of special symbol games are played, the time-saving C game state continues rather than transitioning to a normal game state.

In this specification, whether or not multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving game states are said to "overlap" when the transition conditions to the time-saving game state are satisfied in the time-saving game state, or when the transition conditions to multiple time-saving game states are satisfied simultaneously. When multiple time-saving game states overlap, the main CPU 201 internally operates all of the overlapping time-saving game states, that is, operates the overlapping time-saving game states internally in parallel, which is called "executing in an overlapping manner." However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes multiple time-saving game states in an overlapping manner, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control that corresponds to one of the time-saving game states. In other words, even when multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the player understands that the game is controlled to one of the multiple time-saving game states.

Next, we will explain how the game state changes.

Even if the game is controlled in the normal game state, the time-saving game state (time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, time-saving game state C), or the high-probability game state (for example, the high-probability time-saving game state), if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a jackpot, the game will transition to the jackpot game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, depending on the game specifications, it is possible to transition to any of the following game states: normal game state, time-saving game state, and high-probability game state (e.g. high-probability time-saving game state). However, the time-saving game state to which you can transition when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled to a high probability game state, there is no transition from the high probability game state to a time-limited game state or a normal game state, except for some pachinko game machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, there is no transition from the time-limited game state or the normal game state to the high probability game state unless the jackpot game state is passed through.

When controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to transition to the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C, but it is not possible to transition to the time-saving game state A without passing through the jackpot game state. However, when a specified number of special symbol games are played in the time-saving game state A, the game transitions to the normal game state, so it is possible to transition from the time-saving game state A to the normal game state. Note that, regardless of whether the game is controlled to the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C, the game transitions to the normal game state when a specified number of special symbol games are played, so it is also possible to transition from the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C to the normal game state.

Next, we will explain how to transition between time-saving play states.

When controlled in the time-saving game state A, the number of time-saving plays that can be performed in the time-saving game state A is set to a number less than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition for the time-saving game state B, so there is no transition from the time-saving game state A to the time-saving game state B. Also, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state B to the time-saving game state A. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the time-saving game state A is a "time-saving hit," the transition condition for the time-saving game state C is met, so the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state C may overlap. However, as described above, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state C to the time-saving game state A.

When controlled to the B time-saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving game state is met, and the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state may overlap. Also, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state may overlap.

When controlled to the C time-saving play state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving play state is met, and the C time-saving play state and the C time-saving play state may overlap.

More details about overlapping time-saving game modes will be provided later.

[1-4. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 9 to FIG.

The first pachinko game machine is provided with a normal game state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-probability time-saving game state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a low-probability time-saving game state in which probability variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in any of these game states. However, the game states progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 are not limited to these.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, hitting to the left is considered to be the regular game mode, and in the high-probability time-saving game state and the low-probability time-saving game state, hitting to the right is considered to be the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the hitting method considered to be the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7. Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to the game mode that is the least disadvantageous to the player (the most advantageous to the player) among multiple game modes (for example, firing modes).

[1-4-1. Jackpot Probability for Each Setting Value]
9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (estimate) for each setting value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 9, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the setting key 174a or the backup clear switch 176 (see Fig. 6) can be used to set one of a number of settings, for example, settings 1 to 6. In the case of such a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting value, and the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol winning judgment process based on the set setting value.

Specifically, the probability of winning in a game state where the probability variable flag is off and the probability variable control is not executed (for example, in the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment), regardless of whether the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, is, for example, about 1 in 319 in setting 1, about 1 in 314 in setting 2, about 1 in 309 in setting 3, about 1 in 304 in setting 4, about 1 in 299 in setting 5, and about 1 in 294 in setting 6. In addition, the probability of winning in a game state where the probability variable flag is on and the probability variable control is executed (for example, in the high probability time-saving game state in this embodiment), is about 1 in 77 in setting 1, about 1 in 76 in setting 2, about 1 in 75 in setting 3, about 1 in 74 in setting 4, about 1 in 73 in setting 5, and about 1 in 72 in setting 6.

The probability of a time-saving hit is the same for all settings, unlike the probability of a jackpot. For example, the probability of a time-saving hit when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed is 1 in 160, and the probability of a time-saving hit when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed is 1 in 240. The probability of a time-saving hit may be different when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed, or it may be the same.

However, even if the probability of a time-saving hit is the same for all setting values, the time-saving continuation rate (e.g., the number of time-saving times set) may be different depending on the setting value. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times may be set to 50 for setting 1, and 100 for setting 6.

In the first pachinko game machine, small wins are not included in the lottery, but small wins may be included in the lottery. When small wins are included in the lottery, the small win probability may be set to a common probability for all setting values. When small wins are included in the lottery, a small win may be won only when a hit determination process for one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (e.g., the second special pattern) is performed. In this case, the hit determination process for the other special pattern (e.g., the first special pattern) may not determine whether or not a small win has been won, or may determine whether or not a small win has been won with the small win probability set to 0.

The probability of winning the time-saving bonus and the probability of winning a small bonus when the bonus is included in the lottery are the same for all setting values as described above, but are not limited to this and may be different depending on the setting value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each setting value, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the jackpot probability may be the same for multiple setting values, such as a common jackpot probability for setting 1 and setting 2, a common jackpot probability for setting 3 and setting 4, and a common jackpot probability for setting 5 and setting 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot differs depending on the setting value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the setting value, the target that differs depending on the setting value is not necessarily limited to the probability of winning a jackpot. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a gaming ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a prize in the specific winning hole may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol winning judgment table]
10 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 10 is an example of the case of setting 1 shown in FIG.

The special symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the winning judgment process for the special symbol, that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "time-saving win", "jackpot", or "miss" is to be obtained based on the random number value for jackpot judgment extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140. In this embodiment, the objects to be selected are "time-saving win", "jackpot", and "miss", and other objects to be selected (e.g., small win) are not included, but other objects to be selected may be determined when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 and/or the second starting hole 140.

As described above, the random number value for determining a jackpot is a random number value used in the process of determining whether or not a special symbol has won. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a jackpot is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. The hit determination table for the first special symbol specifies, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In this specification, when the value of the probability change flag is "0", the probability change flag is off, and when the value of the probability change flag is "1", the probability change flag is on.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, just as in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Also, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

In this embodiment, for example, of the random numbers for determining a jackpot that are generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 for the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and the miss determination value data. Also, the end of the predetermined range (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the miss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the miss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing this, for example, when the probability variable flag goes from off to on (or on to off), it is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the range of other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) by simply narrowing (or widening) the width of the miss determination value data by the amount that the width of the jackpot determination value data is widened (or narrowed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed is made different from the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, thereby adding variety to the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, by making the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed higher than the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become monotonous.

However, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed may be made higher than the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. In this case, for example, by executing the time-saving play state in a overlapping manner when a "time-saving hit" is won during a time-saving play state, if a "time-saving hit" is won just before the end of the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is effectively extended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, a "time-shortened win" can be won whether the special chance flag is on or off. However, when the special chance flag is off (normal game state, time-shortened game state), the main CPU 201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state if the result of the win determination process is a "time-shortened win", but when the special chance flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control the game to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the win determination process is a "time-shortened win".

[1-4-3. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 11 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopped symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 and the aforementioned determination value data. The "select symbol command" is a command for designating the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 10 and 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referenced to determine the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referenced to determine the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, the hit/lose of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
12A is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol to be output to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stopping mode of the special symbol output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of a 1-byte control signal composed of areas 0 to 7, for example. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds one-to-one to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) that compose the first special symbol display unit 163. For example, area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d, area 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, area 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, area 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163g, and area 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each of the areas 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds one-to-one to one of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) that make up the second special symbol display unit 164. For example, area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d, area 4 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164e, area 5 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164f, area 6 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164g, and area 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the display mode (time-saving hit display mode) of the LEDs output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 201 determines to stop displaying the first special symbol display unit 163 by turning on LED 163a corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol and LED 163h corresponding to area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol, the LED 163b corresponding to the area 1 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol, the LED 163c corresponding to the area 2 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0, the LED 164b corresponding to the second special symbol area 1, and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol area 7, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0, the LED 164c corresponding to the second special symbol area 2, and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol area 7, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the display mode (jackpot display mode) of the LEDs output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z3," the main CPU 201 determines that the first special symbol display unit 163 should be displayed in a stopped state such that, of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, LED 163d corresponding to area 3 of the first special symbol, LED 163e corresponding to area 4 of the first special symbol, and LED 163g corresponding to area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3, the LED 163f corresponding to the first special symbol area 5, and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163d corresponding to the first special symbol area 3, the LED 163e corresponding to the first special symbol area 4, the LED 163f corresponding to the first special symbol area 5, and the LED 163g corresponding to the first special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3, the LED 164e corresponding to the second special symbol area 4, and the LED 164g corresponding to the second special symbol area 6, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the LED 164f corresponding to the second special symbol area 5, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "miss," the display mode of the LEDs (miss display mode) output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z6," the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state with only LED 163h corresponding to area 7 of the first special symbol out of the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163 lit and the other LEDs turned off. If the selected symbol command is "z11," the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state with only LED 164h corresponding to area 7 of the second special symbol out of the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164 lit and the other LEDs turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stopping mode of the special pattern based on the result of the special pattern winning judgment process, it outputs a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to each LED constituting the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164, and controls the stopping mode of the special pattern output to the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164.

In FIG. 12(A), for convenience, the display mode of the LEDs led to the first special symbol display unit 163 and the display mode of the LEDs led to the second special symbol display unit 164 are shown in the same table. However, it is preferable that the control signals are transmitted separately for the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164.

Figure 12 (B) is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The decorative symbol stop mode determination table is referenced when determining the stop mode (symbol combination) of the decorative symbols derived when the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the display device 7 stops in response to a symbol designation command. Note that the "Notes" column shown in Figure 12 (B) is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, since only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed, the sub-CPU 1301 controls the display device 7 to perform a display effect for the variably displayed special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, it is preferable for the sub-CPU 301 to perform the display effect in a manner that allows the player to know whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols displayed on the display device 7 are, for example, nine symbols 1 to 9 on the left, ten symbols 1 to 9 and a time-saving symbol on the middle, and nine symbols 1 to 9 on the right. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is displayed as a stop when the game state transitions to a time-saving game state, for example, when the result of a special symbol lottery is a time-saving hit. By displaying the middle symbol as a time-saving symbol, the player can know that he or she has won the time-saving hit. In this embodiment, odd symbols are defined as symbols that are more advantageous to the player than even symbols, but this is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special pattern lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special pattern lottery includes a small win, for example, the patterns that make up the middle pattern may include a small win pattern (a pattern that stops and is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win). In this case, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win, the sub-CPU 301 stops and displays the middle pattern as a small win pattern, so that the player can know that he or she has won a small win.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left and right symbols as even-numbered symbols and stopping the center symbol as a time-saving symbol.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the left and right symbols as odd symbols and stops the center symbol as a time-saving symbol as the stopping mode of the decorative symbols, for example. Note that when the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described below, the number of time-saving times set is greater than when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the selected symbol command is "z0", "z1", or "z7"), and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left symbol, right symbol, and center symbol in a matching odd-numbered pattern (double number).

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the left symbol, right symbol, and center symbol as the stopping mode of the decorative symbols, for example, when the even number symbols are aligned (double number). Note that, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command "zA4" is used, after the end of the jackpot game state, there are cases where the probability variable flag is set on (when the selected symbol command is "z4") and cases where the probability variable flag is not set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub-CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop when the even number symbols are aligned (double number), and in the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion performance indicating that it is a probability variable hit (a hit where the probability variable flag is set on).

Also, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 13 described below, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", the expected value of the probability ...

When the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "miss"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols in a scattered pattern. A scattered pattern corresponds to, for example, a stopping mode in which at least one of the left, right, and center symbols is different from the other symbols.

Figure 12 (B) shows an example of the stopping mode of the decorative pattern according to the pattern designation command (for example, when the pattern designation command is "zA1", the left pattern is "2", the middle pattern is "time saving", and the right pattern is "4"), but the stopping modes shown in the decorative pattern stopping mode column in Figure 12 (B) are merely examples and are not limited to these.

[1-4-5. Winning Type Determination Table]
13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the mode of the big win game state (more specifically, for example, the number of rounds) or/and the mode of the subsequent game state according to the selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. The mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the game state after the big win game state ends. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving hit, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the big win game state, so the mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the C time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 10. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7," the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 50. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8," the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the above-mentioned time-saving hit to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, and then sets the time-saving flag on and the determined number of time-saving times without controlling to the jackpot game state, and can control to the C time-saving game state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state, so the mode of the jackpot game state is not determined. Note that in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times set may be different depending on the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving turns that is set varies depending on the selected symbol command that is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to provide variety to the progress of the game thereafter, and to prevent a decline in interest.

As described above, when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving game state even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit." For example, even if the probability variable flag is on (high probability game state), the main CPU 201 may draw a "time-saving hit" as shown in FIG. 10, and when the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 201 may derive a time-saving hit display mode indicating that a "time-saving hit" has been won on the special pattern display units 163, 164, but may continue the high probability game state without controlling to the C time-saving game state.

The main CPU 201 may also draw a "time-saving hit" when the probability-changing flag is on, and forcibly derive a losing display mode to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit."

Furthermore, when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, i.e., a hit determination process may be performed that does not include "time-saving hit" in the lottery result (the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern). In this case, when the probability variable flag is off, the time-saving hit determination value data is assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, and when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the range of random numbers that was assigned to the time-saving hit determination value data when the probability variable flag is off is assigned to miss determination value data, jackpot determination value data, or both miss determination value data and jackpot determination value data, instead of the time-saving hit determination value data.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is on, the game is configured not to transition to the C time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is off even if the probability variable flag is on, the game may be configured to transition to a high-probability time-saving game state when the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit."

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the winning game state and the subsequent game state are determined as follows:

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 10 rounds. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of high probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 201 controls the game state to a jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the special symbol display units 163 and 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control the game state to a high probability time-saving game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of high probability rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the game state to a jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 163, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it becomes possible to control the game state to a high probability time-saving game state.

Furthermore, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds. Furthermore, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. It also determines that the number of time-saving times to be set is set to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 163, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state.

Furthermore, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 10 rounds. Furthermore, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. It also determines that the number of time-saving times to be set is set to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the second special symbol display unit 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is also the A time-saving game state.

It is preferable that the time-saving performance in the high-probability time-saving game state is the same as the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state, but it may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), the main CPU 201 does not set either the state of the big win game state or the state of the game state thereafter. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the game state up to that point.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set as described above, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 13 to clearly show that neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss".

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of Fig. 10, determines the hit/lose determination value data based on the jackpot determination random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140 (performs a hit/lose determination), and determines the hit/lose ("time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss"). After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of Fig. 11, determines the selected symbol command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the gaming ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140 and the hit/lose determination value data, and determines the type of display mode (type of time-saving hit or type of jackpot) to be derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Note that the above winning/losing judgment and selection of the symbol command are performed when the variable display of the special symbol begins, but this is not intended to exclude the possibility of performing this between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the big win game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5") or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In other words, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state. In this way, the positioning of the "big win" can be increased by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state.

In addition, instead of making the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state may be made higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state. FIG. 14 is a modified example of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13. In this FIG. 14, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In this way, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a long period of time passes without a "jackpot" being won, if a "time-saving hit" is won, the player will be controlled to the relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In this specification, as with the special bonus flag, when the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the time-saving flag is off, and when the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the time-saving flag is on.

The time-saving flag, like the probability change flag, is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute time-saving control.

The number of time-saving times is the number of times that the special symbols can be displayed variably while the time-saving control is being continued. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving times is determined to be "50," and 50 times of variable display of special symbols are performed without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and transitions to a non-time-saving game state (for example, a normal game state).

The "10,000" number of times the special mode and the time-saving mode are shown in FIG. 13 and other figures is intended to allow the special mode control to be continuously executed after the end of the special mode game state, until it is determined that a special mode has occurred (i.e., the next special mode).

[1-4-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 15 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience in order to make it easier to understand. The time-saving hit-type reaches A, B, and C shown in the "Notes" column in FIG. 15 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be both a time-saving hit and a jackpot. Note that FIG. 15 is a variation pattern table of a special symbol when the probability variable flag is off, and the illustration of the variation pattern table of a special symbol when the probability variable flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 140. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 15 is a table that is referenced when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S96 in FIG. 28 described below.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the value of the time-saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, and/or the random number value for performance selection, but is not limited to this and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a look-ahead flag if the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201, performs a look-ahead effect if the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability bonus flag is on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 301 may decide.

The main CPU 201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when the time-saving flag or the probability-change flag is on. The main CPU 201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of changes per unit time for the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined is smaller than when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is on is likely to be shorter than the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is sent from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub-CPU 301 via the command output port 206. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information sent from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol that is determined may be different for each setting value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, when the result of the hit determination process is a miss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined depending on whether the time-saving flag is on or not, regardless of the type of time-saving, but this is not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the number of times the special symbol will be variably displayed per unit time may be made different depending on the type of time-saving. For example, the expected value of the number of times the special symbol will be variably displayed per unit time may be made different between time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C.

[1-4-7. Time-saving game state]
As described above, in this embodiment, the time-saving gaming states are the time-saving gaming state A, the time-saving gaming state B, and the time-saving gaming state C. These time-saving gaming states will be described below.

The A time-saving play state is a time-saving play state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot play state when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". That is, in this embodiment, the condition for transitioning to the A time-saving play state is winning a jackpot (a jackpot with a selected symbol command of "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the condition for transitioning to the A time-saving play state is met, transition to the A time-saving play state is not necessarily made; if a condition that prevents transition to the A time-saving play state is met (for example, if the backup is cleared), transition to the A time-saving play state is not made.

The condition for ending the A time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is initiated, or a variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "A time-saving specified number of times") is executed (see the "Number of time-saving times" column in Figure 13).

The B time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value by updating (adding 1) the ceiling counter, starting, for example, when the jackpot game state ends and the variable display of the special symbol in the non-high probability game state (for example, the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment) begins. That is, the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. The transition to the B time-saving game state may be when the variable display of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (hereinafter referred to as the "ceiling final fluctuation") begins, when the ceiling final fluctuation ends, or when the variable display of the special symbol next to the ceiling final fluctuation begins. That is, the timing of transition to the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the ceiling final fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is "miss", the display mode of miss is derived on the special symbol display section 163, 164, but the game will transition to the B time-saving game state. In this case, the sub-CPU 301 may control the display device 7 to display a display effect (for example, a decorative symbol is stopped with a special symbol, a special effect by a character is performed, or both of these are performed) that indicates to the player that the transition condition to the B time-saving game state has been established (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). Note that even if the transition condition to the B time-saving game state is established, the game will not necessarily transition to the B time-saving game state, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-saving game state is established (for example, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a jackpot, etc.), the game will not transition to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variable flag is on, and when the probability variable flag is off, it is always counted regardless of whether the time-saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is controlled to the B time-saving game state unless the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "big hit". In a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", the B time-saving game state may be started when the display mode of the small hit is derived to the special symbol display unit 163, 164, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the small hit game state ends. In other words, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", only the display mode of the small hit is displayed on the special symbol display unit 163, 164, and no display effect is displayed to indicate to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value as described above. In the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may be different depending on the setting value. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "jackpot," the machine is controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

The ceiling counter is reset when a specific condition is met, such as when the power is turned on, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, when the working area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clearing), when a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174a or a dedicated switch) is operated, or when the high probability of hitting a normal symbol ends in a gaming machine in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol can be changed. When updating of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated each time a variable display of a special symbol is executed. For example, when the probability flag is on, updating of the ceiling counter is not permitted.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the next variable display of the special symbol. The ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined as a value specific to the pachinko game machine rather than being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared due to control to the jackpot gaming state, if the probability variable flag is not on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 201 updates (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern. Also, if the probability variable flag is on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the ceiling counter is not updated even if the variable display of the special pattern is performed, but for example, in the case of an ST machine or a specification that performs a probability variable drop lottery, the ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the probability variable flag is turned off. Note that in the case of a specification that performs a probability variable drop lottery, the probability variable flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, so when updating the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special pattern, if the probability variable flag is off at the end of the variable display of the special pattern, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In the case of a pachinko game machine in which the main CPU 201 performs a lottery for changing into a high probability state, it is preferable that the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving a command sent from the main CPU 201, does not perform any effects suggesting that the lottery for changing into a high probability state has been won or any effects suggesting a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the start point of the count by the ceiling counter, i.e., the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state, based on the display effects displayed on the display device 7, making it possible to provide an interesting game. If it is difficult to grasp the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state, for example, a countdown effect suggesting the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state or a false countdown effect can be displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub-CPU 301, thereby making it possible to further increase interest.

In addition, when a clearing process (backup clearing process) is performed on the working area (volatile area) in RAM 203, the main CPU 201 updates (increments by 1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the clearing process of the working area in RAM 203.

Furthermore, if a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174a or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 updates (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the other switch is operated.

The end condition of the B time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is started, or the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as the "prescribed number of B time-saving times"). One of the end conditions of the B time-saving game state, "the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times for B time-saving", may be when the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time-saving times (hereinafter referred to as the "final variation of B time-saving") is started, or when the final variation of B time-saving is completed. In other words, the end timing of the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final variation of B time-saving and the end of the variable display of the special symbols related to this final variation of B time-saving.

The C time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "time-saving hit". In other words, the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving game state is that a time-saving hit (the selected symbol command is a time-saving hit of "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8") is won, and the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived (determined display) on the special symbol display unit 163, 164. Note that even if the transition condition to the C time-saving game state is met, the game does not necessarily transition to the C time-saving game state. If a condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving game state is met (for example, when the specifications are such that the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is a "time-saving hit", etc.), the game will not transition to the C time-saving game state. In addition, if the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving game state are met but a condition preventing transition to the C time-saving game state is met, the main CPU 201 executes control to derive the display mode of the time-saving win to the special pattern display units 163, 164, even though it does not transition to the C time-saving game state.

The end condition of the C time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is started; or the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "prescribed number of C time-saving times") is executed (see the "number of time-saving times" column in FIG. 13). The prescribed number of C time-saving times, which is one of the end conditions of the C time-saving game state, may be when the variable display of the special symbol for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "final C time-saving change") starts, or when the final C time-saving change ends. In other words, the end timing of the C time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final C time-saving change and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this final C time-saving change.

The time-saving performance may be different between the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state. Also, the time-saving performance of two of the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state may be the same, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving play states may be different from the time-saving performance of the other one of the time-saving play states. Furthermore, the time-saving performance of the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state may be the same.

In addition, the end conditions for the time-saving play state A, the time-saving play state B, and the time-saving play state C may include, in addition to the above, for example, that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed has reached a specified number of times, that the normal electric device 146 has opened a specified number of times, or that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the normal electric device 146. In a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, the above end conditions may include that the number of small hits has reached a specified number of times. Furthermore, the above end conditions may include that a time-saving fall lottery is held and that the time-saving fall lottery is won.

[1-4-8. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, i.e., when determining whether a "normal symbol hit" or "miss" is determined by lottery based on the game state and the normal symbol hit determination random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see Figure 4) (i.e., when executing the normal symbol game determination process of S295 in Figure 43 described below).

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the process of determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number value. The normal symbol hit determination table specifies, for each type of time reduction, the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined to be a "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the normal symbol hit determination random number value determined to be a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving game state (for example, a normal game state), if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the win/loss determination value is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." Also, in a non-time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the win is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 98, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In this way, in this embodiment, the probability of winning on a normal symbol in the time-saving game state A (selection rate (estimated) shown in Figure 16) is the highest among the non-time-saving game state, the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the B time-saving game state (selection rate (estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Similarly, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the C time-saving game state (selection rate (estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of a normal symbol will not change.

The winning probability for a normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the winning probability for a normal symbol does not change, and the ratio of the types of normal symbols described below only needs to be varied for each state, simplifying the control process.

[1-4-9. Normal symbol determination table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" that determines the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the type of time reduction, the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data, and the normal symbol random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). The "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" is a command for specifying the winning normal symbol determined according to the normal symbol winning type when the result of the normal symbol winning determination process is a normal symbol winning symbol. The normal symbol random number value is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when normal symbol winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol winning determination process, for example, the selected symbol command when a normal symbol wins is selected as follows:

For example, in a non-time-saving game state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz0" as the normal symbol hit selection pattern command, regardless of whether the normal symbol random number value is 0 to 99.

In addition, in the A time-saving play state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz1" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz2" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz3" as the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 70 and 99.

In addition, in the B time-saving play state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz4" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz5" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz6" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 70 and 99.

In addition, in the C time-saving play state, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "fz7" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 29, selects "fz8" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 30 and 69, and selects "fz9" as the symbol command to be selected when the normal symbol hits if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 70 and 99.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 16) to determine the winning/losing judgment value data based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 17) to determine the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern based on the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal pattern and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

[1-4-10. Normal pattern type determination table]
18 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko game machine. The normal symbol winning type determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric role 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol winning time selection symbol command determined in response to the normal symbol random number value (i.e., when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric role 146 executed in the variable display start process of the normal symbol in S293 in FIG. 43 described later).

In this embodiment, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, if the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz0", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4), to be a first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. In other words, the opening pattern is determined to be one in which the normal electric device 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the selection pattern command for a normal symbol hit is "fz1", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "fz2" when a normal symbol is hit, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command when a normal symbol is hit is "fz3", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 3000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 3000 msec.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz4" or "fz7", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz5" or "fz8", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz6" or "fz9", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the non-time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) will be the most unfavorable mode among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 146 in the non-time-saving play state, the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 is the degree of ease with which the game ball will enter the second starting hole 140 when the normal electric device 146 is opened.

When the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the A time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) will be the most advantageous pattern among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 146 in the non-time-saving play state, the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the B time-saving play state is a "normal symbol hit" has the same degree of advantage as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the C time-saving play state is a "normal symbol hit", but is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Normal pattern variation table]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko game machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table is referred to when determining the normal symbol variation pattern (i.e., when executing the normal symbol variation pattern determination process executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43 described later). The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). The normal symbol effect selection random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving game state, regardless of whether the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 300,000 msec. The variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state is the longest among the non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, and time-saving game state C.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any value between 0 and 89, the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any value between 90 and 99, the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 40 and 79, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any one between 80 and 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 0 to 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 40 to 79, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec.

In this way, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal pattern per variable display is the shortest among the variable display times of the normal pattern in the non-time-saving game state, the A-time-saving game state, the B-time-saving game state, and the C-time-saving game state. Therefore, the A-time-saving game state has the shortest time until the normal electric device 146 is opened among the non-time-saving game state, the A-time-saving game state, the B-time-saving game state, and the C-time-saving game state.

In addition, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the B time-saving play state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol in the C time-saving play state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time-saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Number of time-saving times set when time-saving hits]
In the above description, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times to be set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" may be determined according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Even in a high probability game state where the probability flag is set to ON, the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include "time-saving hit". In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode of the time-saving hit on the special symbol display section, but does not execute control to transition to the time-saving game state, and continues to control the high probability game state. However, there are known gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines called ST machines, that change the probability flag from ON to OFF when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a prescribed number of times. In such ST machines, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed in the final game in the high probability game state is "time-saving hit", if the process of deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit is later than the process of turning off the probability flag, the main CPU may control to the C time-saving game state after deriving the display mode of the time-saving hit.

[1-5-2. Overlapping of time-saving game states]
When multiple time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time-saving game state, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state will overlap. Also, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state will overlap. When the time-saving game states overlap in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner, or the time-saving game states may not be overlapped (i.e., the "time-saving hit" may be ignored). In order to prevent the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state from overlapping, the A time-saving prescribed number of times, which is the end condition of the A time-saving game state, is specified to be smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving game state.

Below is an explanation of how the time-saving game states overlap when they are executed in a overlapping manner, and how they do not overlap.

[1-5-2-1. Mode of overlapping execution of time-saving gaming state]
Possible modes of overlapping the time-shortened game states when the time-shortened game states overlap include a mode in which the time-shortened game state C is overlapped and executed when a time-shortened prize is won in any one of the time-shortened game states A, B, and C, and a mode in which the time-shortened game state B is overlapped and executed when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-shortened game state C.

[1-5-2-1-1. Mode of executing C time-saving gaming state on one time-saving gaming state]
When a "time-saving win" is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode of the time-saving win on the special symbol display units 163 and 164. In this case, the main CPU 201 adopts, as the number of times of time-saving, the state which has the greater number of variable displays of the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is established, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the one time-saving game state.

For example, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the A time-saving game state, and the remaining number of time-saving plays in the A time-saving game state is greater than the number of time-saving plays that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 will control the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving plays in the A time-saving game state is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won when the remaining number of time-saving plays in the A time-saving game state is 200, and the number of time-saving plays that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is 50, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special pattern display units 163 and 164, but the number of time-saving plays from this point on will be 200, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if a "time-saving hit" is won in one of the time-saving game states A, B, or C, the appearance of the number of time-saving hits and time-saving performance will be the same as if the time-saving game state A had not been won and the game continued.

On the other hand, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the A time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is greater than the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-saving game state until the number of time-saving times set based on the "time-saving hit" is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won when the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state is 20, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is 50, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 50, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special pattern is executed for 20 times, which is the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state, the variable display of the special pattern is then further executed for 30 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-2. Mode in which the time-saving gaming state B is superimposed on the time-saving gaming state C]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value during the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 executes control according to the display mode (i.e., the result of the special pattern hit determination process) output to the special pattern display sections 163, 164 during the final ceiling fluctuation.

Note that in the first pachinko gaming machine, the results of the special symbol hit determination process do not include small hits, but the following explanation also includes cases where the results of the special symbol hit determination process include small hits.

First, we will explain the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process during the final ceiling fluctuation is a "small hit" or "miss."

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C state, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C state is greater than the specified number of time-saving B times, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the time-saving C state and controls the time-saving C state until the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C state is consumed, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving C state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value and the specified number of time-saving B times is 200, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 300, unless a "jackpot" is derived, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the time-saving C state. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C state, the appearance of the number of time-saving times and the time-saving performance is the same as when the time-saving C state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value.

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving C game state, if the B time-saving prescribed number of times is greater than the remaining number of time-saving in the time-saving C game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-saving game state until the B time-saving prescribed number of times is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state is 20 times, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed in the B time-saving game state is 300 times, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 300 times while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special pattern is executed for 20 times, which is the remaining number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state, the variable display of the special pattern is then further executed for 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state.

When the variable display of the special symbol ends during the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode in the special symbol display sections 163, 164 according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", a small hit display mode is derived, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", a miss display mode is derived. When the small hit display mode is derived, control is given to the small hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time-saving flag on even during the small hit game state.

Next, we will explain the case where the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol at the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-shortened hit," that is, the case where the transition condition to the B time-shortened play state and the transition condition to the C time-shortened play state are met at the final ceiling fluctuation. In this case, the main CPU 201 can execute different controls depending on whether it starts control of the B time-shortened play state before the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 or whether it starts control of the B time-shortened play state after the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164.

First, if control of the B time-shortened game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164, the game is already controlled to the B time-shortened game state at the time the display mode of the time-shortened hit is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Therefore, while maintaining the time-shortened performance of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state until the greater of the B time-shortened prescribed number of times or the C time-shortened game state number of times is consumed, unless a "jackpot" is output.

Next, when control of the B time-shortened game state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164, the time-shortened game state is not yet controlled to the B time-shortened game state at the time when the display mode of the time-shortened hit is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Therefore, while maintaining the time-shortened performance of the C time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-shortened game state until the greater of the B time-shortened prescribed number of times and the C time-shortened number of times is consumed, unless the end condition of the time-shortened game state in which the time-shortened performance is maintained or executed is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to end the time-shortened game state when the end condition of the time-shortened game state in which the time-shortened performance is maintained or executed is satisfied.

In addition, when the conditions for transition to the time-saving B game state and the conditions for transition to the time-saving C game state are satisfied at the final change of the ceiling, the sub-CPU 301 may perform a special display effect different from the B time-saving transition display effect performed when only the conditions for transition to the time-saving B game state are satisfied, and the C time-saving transition display effect performed when only the conditions for transition to the time-saving C game state are satisfied. Alternatively, for example, if the time-saving performance of the time-saving B game state is maintained, the B time-saving transition display effect is performed, and if the time-saving performance of the time-saving C game state is maintained, the C time-saving transition display effect is performed, and so on.

In addition, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "jackpot," the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and controls the game state to the jackpot game state without also controlling the game state to the B time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time-saving performance when multiple time-saving game states are executed at the same time]
The above describes a mode in which a time-shortened game state C is superimposed on one time-shortened game state, and a mode in which a time-shortened game state B is superimposed on a time-shortened game state C.

When multiple time-saving game states can be executed in a superimposed manner, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state is maintained. In a pachinko game machine with such specifications, the time-saving performance of the multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a superimposed manner may be different, but it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a superimposed manner the same.

For example, if the specifications allow a time-saving play state C to be overlaid on a time-saving play state, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the time-saving play state C the same as that of the time-saving play state C. Also, if the specifications allow a time-saving play state B to be overlaid on a time-saving play state C, it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the time-saving play state C the same as that of the time-saving play state B.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that is capable of executing multiple time-saving game states in a superimposed manner, a time-saving game state that can be executed later on a previously executed time-saving game state may be provided with, for example, one time-saving performance that is the same as the previously executed time-saving game state, and another time-saving performance that is different from the one time-saving performance. When a time-saving game state is executed in a superimposed manner on a previously executed time-saving game state, the one time-saving performance may be activated, and when a time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner, such as when a time-saving game state is activated in a normal game state, the other time-saving performance may be activated.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that can execute the time-saving gaming state B in a C time-saving gaming state by overlapping it with the time-saving gaming state C, the time-saving performance of the B time-saving gaming state is set to, for example, two time-saving performances, one time-saving performance that is the same as the time-saving gaming state C, and another time-saving performance that is different from the one time-saving performance. Then, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value in the time-saving gaming state C, the one time-saving performance may be activated, and, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value in a normal gaming state that is not one of the time-saving gaming states, the other time-saving performance may be activated.

[1-5-3. Mode in which time-saving gaming states are not executed in succession]
As a mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner, there are a mode in which a hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery object in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which a hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is included in the lottery object in the time-saving game state, and even if the time-saving game state is overlapped, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner (hereinafter referred to as the "latter mode"). As the latter mode, there are two modes in which even if a time-saving hit is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner by ignoring this, and even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving game state C, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner by ignoring this. The above two modes considered as the latter mode will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. Mode in which the C time-saving gaming state is not executed in addition to one time-saving gaming state]
When a "time-saving win" is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 derives the display mode of the time-saving win on the special symbol display units 163 and 164, as described above. However, unless the final variable display of the special symbol in one time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "final time-saving change") is the last, the main CPU 201 does not control the game to the time-saving game state C based on the "time-saving win", but controls the game to the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving plays in the time-saving game state in the time-saving game state is consumed. In this case, being controlled to the time-saving game state (excluding the final time-saving change) is a condition that prevents a transition to the time-saving game state C.

On the other hand, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the final time-saving fluctuation in one time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 can execute different control depending on whether the one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is introduced to the special pattern display units 163, 164 or whether the one time-saving game state ends when the display mode of the time-saving hit is introduced to the special pattern display units 163, 164.

First, if one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special pattern display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 will derive the display mode of the time-saving hit and then start controlling the C time-saving game state.

Next, if one time-shortened game state ends when the display mode of the time-shortened win is derived on the special symbol display units 163, 164, i.e., if the derivation of the display mode of the time-shortened win and the end of one time-shortened game state are performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the C time-shortened game state depending on the program processing. Specifically, if the process of deriving (determined display) the display mode of the time-shortened win is performed before the end process of one time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends one time-shortened game state without controlling it to the C time-shortened game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode of the time-shortened win before the end process of one time-shortened game state is a condition that prevents transition to the C time-shortened game state.

On the other hand, if the process of deriving (determining) the display mode of the time-saving hit is performed after the end process of the first time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state and controls it to the C time-saving game state. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time-saving performance of the first time-saving game state, but sets it to the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. In other words, at the time when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived, if the end process of the first time-saving game state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state without controlling it to the C time-saving game state, and if the end process of the first time-saving game state has already been processed, the main CPU 201 controls it to the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-3-2. Mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is not executed in parallel with the C time-saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value during the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 executes control according to the display mode (i.e., the result of the special pattern hit determination process) output to the special pattern display sections 163, 164 during the final ceiling fluctuation.

First, we will explain the cases where the result of the special symbol hit determination process during the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-saving hit," "small hit," or "miss."

In the C time-saving play state, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-saving hit," "small hit," or "miss," the main CPU 201 controls the game to the C time-saving play state until the remaining number of times the time-saving play in the C time-saving play state is consumed.

However, when the remaining number of time-shortened times in the C time-shortened game state is 0 at the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the B time-shortened game state, depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time-shortened game state is performed before the start processing of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-shortened game state and controls it to the B time-shortened game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time-shortened game state is performed after the start processing of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-shortened game state without controlling it to the B time-shortened game state. In other words, when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time-shortened game state, if the end processing of the C time-shortened game state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-shortened game state without controlling it to the B time-shortened game state, and if the end processing of the C time-shortened game state has already been processed, the main CPU 201 controls it to the B time-shortened game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time-shortened game state after the start processing of the B time-shortened game state is a condition that prevents the transition to the B time-shortened game state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process at the final ceiling fluctuation is a "jackpot," the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and starts control of the jackpot game state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Figures 20 to 23. Figures 20 to 23 are flow charts showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption signal is at a high level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the setting area corresponding to the interrupt prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at a high level (if S11 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at a high level (if S11 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this processing, a process of saving the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174a is performed. In other words, the on/off state of the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this processing, the play permission flag is set to off. After executing the processing of S12, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs a wait process. In this process, the sub-control circuit 300 waits for startup. In this case, the startup wait time (wait period) is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

In addition, while waiting for the sub-control circuit 300 to start up, the main CPU 201 may perform, for example, checking an interrupt request signal, outputting a WDT when an interrupt request signal occurs, and outputting various sensor initialization signals at predetermined timing.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption before startup (the previous time) was normal or not. In this process, it is determined whether the power interruption was normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (if S14 returns NO), the main CPU 201 proceeds to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was normal (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then performs a comparison process of the checksum value of the work area (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the comparison result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, i.e., is normal (if S17 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the process from S22 onwards will be described later.

On the other hand, if the comparison result is determined to be abnormal, i.e., not normal, in S17 (if S17 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 is off. In other words, if both the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the result is NO. If both the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or if either the setting key 174a or the backup clear switch 176 is off, the result is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 is not OFF, i.e., both are ON (if S18 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. The process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 is off (if S18 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets data for displaying an error to the output port of the I/O port 205 that outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170. This causes a specified LED in the performance display monitor 170 to light up, displaying an error. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not normal, or if the checksum value of the working area stored in the main RAM 203 does not match the normal value, the first pachinko game machine will not be able to play the game until it is determined that both the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 are on.

Next, the process of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed upon abnormal startup, and is intended to store again the value indicating a setting change. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing S22, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the current startup state (power outage recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at startup. In this process, a clearing process (e.g., construction of a work area and address setting) is performed on the working area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like. Note that this process is performed both when power is restored after a power outage and when initialization is performed, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initial setting processing. In this processing, the initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (power outage recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Details of the startup initial setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. After executing the processing of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt inhibition processing. After executing the processing of S26, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power cut process. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S28. Details of the power cut process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the initial random numbers. In this process, the initial random numbers of various random number counters (e.g., random number counters for determining whether a special symbol has won) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether play is permitted. This determination is made based on the value of the play permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that play is not permitted (if S29 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that play is permitted (if S29 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onward.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor tabulation calculation process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. This process is also performed using an area separate from (outside) the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the processing of S34, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (if S35 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (if S35 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S37.

In this embodiment, within the main control process, an interrupt prohibition section (processing section S26 to S35) of, for example, 6 msec is provided before various processes related to game control (for example, processes S37 to S44) described below are executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control (described below) are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example has been described in which the interrupt prohibition section is three times the interrupt cycle, but this is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (e.g., 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in a system period management timer area in the working area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, payout control command transmission/reception processing is mainly performed. After executing S38, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After executing the processing of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the processing of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game action display unit control process. In this process, a process for setting the display data to be output to each display section of the LED unit 160 (e.g., the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, control of the external terminal board pulse signal, setting of output data, generation of the test firing signal, etc. are performed. Note that the generation of the test firing signal is performed using an area separate from (outside) the working area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs a port output process. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a status monitoring process. In this process, a launch position determination process, a game abnormality detection determination process, a payout abnormality detection determination process, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (e.g., right hit or left hit), a launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process from S26 onwards.

[1-6-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the startup initial setting process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process to load the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating power recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating power recovery (if S52 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating power recovery (if S52 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup status flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, i.e., is a value indicating RAM clear (if S54 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup status flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (if S54 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described below). After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

[1-6-3. Electrical disconnection processing]
Next, the power cut process performed in S27 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (if S61 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the power cut processing and returns processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (if S61 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a process of calculating a checksum value. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power interruption detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, they are stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access inhibition value setting process (S65). After executing S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S72.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S71, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 also performs a process to check the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. Then, if the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are both "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. Note that the demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S72 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S72 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is not pending (if S73 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is not pending (if S74 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is pending (if S74 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

Returning to S73, if it is determined that the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is pending (if S73 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the processing of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S71 to S75) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the first pachinko gaming machine is described as a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol when the start information of the second special symbol is reserved, but this is not limited to this. For example, the first pachinko gaming machine may be a priority variable machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol when the start information of the first special symbol is reserved, or a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winning in the first start port 120 or the second start port 140.

[1-6-5. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S75 of the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is "0" (when S72 is judged as YES), the special symbol management process processes the second special symbol if S73 is judged as YES, and processes the first special symbol if S74 is judged as YES. Also, when the control state number is not "0" (when S72 is judged as NO), the special symbol management process processes the special symbol currently being executed.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers for the special symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S81).

If it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S81 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S81 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S83. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S83 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This S83 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This S84 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S85 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S86 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S87 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This process in S88 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After completing steps S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S91 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S91 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination table for the special symbol (see FIG. 10) and uses the random number value for the special symbol hit determination to determine whether the special symbol is a hit. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a time-saving hit, and sets the big hit flag to ON if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit. In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, the small hit flag is set to ON if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S94. The time-saving hit flag is turned off when transitioning to the C time-saving game state, and the big hit flag is turned off when the big hit game state begins. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process for a pachinko game machine includes a small hit, the small hit flag is turned off when the small hit game state begins.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, and if this process determines that there is no jackpot, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is a time-saving hit, and if this process determines that there is no time-saving hit, it is determined that there is a miss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol that corresponds to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (e.g., time-saving hit, jackpot, or miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referenced, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command." After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, big win). In this process, the win type determination table (see FIG. 13) is referenced and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S94). In this embodiment, there are multiple types of wins, but there may be only one type of big win, or one type of time-saving hit. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of wins, multiple types of misses may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small win, and multiple types of such small wins may be provided. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, for example, according to the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S93), the value of the time-saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection, etc. Note that the variation pattern table referenced when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may differ depending on the game state, etc. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the change pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referenced, and the change time corresponding to the change pattern determined in the change pattern determination process for the special symbol (S96) is determined as the change time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S84 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In this processing, the main CPU 201 mainly performs update processing of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., probability bonus flag, time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the processing of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S100) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S101)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S111 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S111 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S85 in FIG. 27) is performed after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed. After executing the process of S112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times the special symbol game has been played), and the count value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided for managing the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of remaining times of the special symbol game or the number of remaining times of the time-saving game, or the determined symbol counter may be used to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S121 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S122 that a jackpot has been reached, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S122 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for the jackpot game control processing. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6 for both) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbols that are the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S123, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S124. Note that the signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control in S123, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the special chance flag, special chance counter, time-saving flag, and time-saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 131 can be opened (S125), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S128), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S129). Note that by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127) to switch the control state number, the large prize opening opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 201 completes the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

Returning to S122, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been reached, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S122 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 at S130 in the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving management process (S131). Details of this time-saving management process will be described later with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S131, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S134). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). Then, after processing S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability hit flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[1-6-10. Time-saving management process]
Next, the time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game ending process (see Fig. 31) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a counter update process (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs a counter determination process. Details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update process]
Next, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 during the time-shortening management process (see Fig. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving counter update process (S151). Details of this time-saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process. Details of this ceiling counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time-saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time-saving counter update process]
Next, a time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 during the counter update process (see Fig. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The time-saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process when multiple time-saving game states overlap and multiple time-saving game states are executed at the same time.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, if both the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made, and if either of these conditions is not met, a NO determination is made.

The time-saving flag is set to ON when transitioning to time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, or time-saving play state C. When transitioning to a high probability play state, the probability change flag is set to ON.

The time-saving counter indicates the number of time-saving operations executed in the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, or the C time-saving play state.

When the conditions for transitioning to time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B and/or time-saving play state C are met, the time-saving counter for the time-saving play state for which the transition conditions are met is set.

In this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving game state ends when the time-saving counter reaches 0. However, this is not limited to this, and an addition method may be adopted in which the time-saving counter is added when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving game state ends when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-saving times. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time-saving counter may be updated when the variable display of the special symbol begins, and the time-saving game state may end when the time-saving counter reaches 0 (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-saving times (in the case of the addition method).

If it is determined in S161 that both the time-saving flag is not on and the time-saving counter is not greater than 0 (if S161 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (Figure 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S161 that the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S161), the main CPU 201 performs a process to subtract 1 from the time-saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving mode is 3 and the C time-saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time-saving mode is 3 and the C time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If a YES determination is made in S163, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S164.

The C time-saving counter is a counter that is set when the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving game state are met during the time-saving game state. Although this C time-saving counter is not shown in the flowchart, it is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time-saving counter described below is set.

The time-saving mode is a flag that is set when multiple time-saving game states are executed in overlapping fashion. In this embodiment, the time-saving mode is configured, for example, with 2 bits, and is set to "time-saving mode = 3" when time-saving game state C is executed in overlapping fashion with a previously executed time-saving game state. Also, when time-saving game state B is executed in overlapping fashion with a previously executed time-saving game state, it is set to "time-saving mode = 2."

On the other hand, if it is determined in S163 that both the time-saving mode = 3 and the C time-saving counter is not greater than 0 are not satisfied (if S163 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time-saving counter. This process may also be an addition process instead of a subtraction process. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving mode is 2 and the B time-saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time-saving mode is 2 and the B time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If a YES determination is made in S165, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S166.

The B time-saving counter is a counter that is set when the conditions for transitioning to the B time-saving game state are met during the time-saving game state (in this embodiment, during the C time-saving game state). Although this B time-saving counter is not shown in the flowchart, it is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time-saving counter is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S165 that both the time-saving mode = 2 and the B time-saving counter being greater than 0 are not met (if S165 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time-saving counter. This process may also be an addition process rather than a subtraction process. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, if the C time-saving counter = 0 as a result of processing S164, or if the B time-saving counter = 0 as a result of processing S166, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving mode to off (= 0).

When multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, it is not limited to overlapping two time-saving game states, but three or more time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner. In this case, as described above, the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state do not overlap, so a case in which three or more time-saving game states overlap corresponds to a case in which the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state overlaps with two or more C time-saving game states, and a case in which three or more C time-saving game states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 during the counter update process (see Fig. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability variable flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In other words, when the probability variable flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is saved in the main RAM 203.

The ceiling value is a predetermined value specific to the pachinko game machine as a condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 may perform processing to set the ceiling value when the big win game state ends, when a backup clear process is performed, when a dedicated operation means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (if S171 is judged as NO), i.e., if the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

If the ceiling count prohibition flag is off in S171 (if S171 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter Determination Process]
Next, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 during the time-shortening management process (see Fig. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving transition determination process (S181). Details of this time-saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition process. Details of this time-saving transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter is less than 1.

If it is determined in S183 that the time-saving counter is not less than 1 (NO in S183), i.e., the time-saving counter is 1 or greater, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S185.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S183 that the time-saving counter is less than 1 (YES in S183), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time-saving flag. After executing the process of S184, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S185.

If it is determined in S183 that the time-saving counter is less than 1 (if S183 is judged as YES), both the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter should be less than 1 (i.e., 0). However, in consideration of the possibility that some malfunction may occur in the execution of processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time-saving counter or the time-saving counter is 1 or more despite the YES judgment in S183, an abnormality processing such as outputting an abnormality warning may be executed. Also, instead of or in addition to this abnormality processing, when S183 is judged as YES, not only the time-saving flag may be turned off (see S184), but the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter may be reset to ensure consistency between the time-saving counter, the B time-saving counter, and the C time-saving counter.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition command transmission reservation process (S186). The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). Then, after processing S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time-saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time-saving transition determination process]
Next, the time-saving transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a judgment process for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is performed. Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter judgment process (see Fig. 36) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the special chance flag is off (S191).

If it is determined in S191 that the high probability flag is not OFF (if S191 is a NO determination), i.e., if the high probability flag is ON, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). In other words, if the high probability flag is ON, it is possible to prevent transition to the B time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the special bonus flag is OFF (if S191 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value.

If it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not at the ceiling value (if S192 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (if S192 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag that indicates that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S196, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time-saving transition process]
Next, the time-saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter determination process (see Fig. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the special chance flag is off (S202).

If it is determined in S202 that the high probability flag is not off (if S202 is determined as NO), that is, if the high probability flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36). By doing this, if the high probability flag is on, neither the B time-saving play state nor the C time-saving play state can be started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S202 that the probability of winning is OFF (YES in S202), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not on (if S203 returns a NO judgment), i.e., if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time-saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines the number of time-saving times to be set in the B time-saving counter, whether the time-saving mode is set to 2, and the time-saving performance, etc. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

The number of time-saving times set in the B time-saving counter is a predetermined number. Among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Among the time-saving performances, the opening pattern (number of times opening, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric device 146 is as shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18). Among the time-saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving hit flag is on.

If it is determined in S206 that the time-saving hit flag is not on (if S206 is judged as NO), i.e., if the time-saving hit flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter judgment process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S206 that the time-saving hit flag is on (YES in S206), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time-saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines the number of time-saving times to be set in the C time-saving counter, whether to set the time-saving mode to 3, and the time-saving performance, etc. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

The number of time-saving times set in the C time-saving counter is determined according to the selected symbol command by referring to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 13, for example). Among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Among the time-saving performances, the opening pattern (number of times opened, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric role device 146 is as shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18). Among the time-saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving setting process. Details of this time-saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time-saving setting process]
Next, the time-saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time-saving transition process (see Fig. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time-saving flag is on (S211).

If it is determined in S211 that the time-saving flag is on (if S211 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S212.

When S211 judges YES, this corresponds to the case where the sure-change flag is off and, for example, the time-saving play state B is executed in addition to the time-saving play state C being executed first (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or the time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, or time-saving play state C is executed in addition to the time-saving play state C being executed first (when a "time-saving win" is won).

Although not shown, when the time-saving game state B is executed after the time-saving game state C has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 2" and sets the time-saving counter B determined in S205. When the time-saving game state C is executed after the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time-saving mode = 3" and sets the time-saving counter C determined in S207.

If it is determined in S211 that the time-saving flag is not on (S211 is determined as NO), i.e., the time-saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (the number of remaining time-saving times in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new number of time-saving times (the number of time-saving times determined in S205 or S207), and determines whether the current time-saving counter is smaller than the new number of time-saving times.

If it is determined in S212 that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of time-saving times (if S212 is a NO determination), i.e., if the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of time-saving times, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S212 that the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of time-saving times (if S212 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving counter reset process. In this process, when the time-saving game state B is executed while the time-saving game state C is executed first, or when the time-saving game state C is executed while the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is executed first, the larger of the current time-saving counter value (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times) and the new number of time-saving times is reset as the new time-saving counter. However, even if the time-saving counter reset process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the time-saving counter B and the time-saving counter C. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (FIG. 38).

When the time-saving game state B is executed while the time-saving game state C is executed first, or when the time-saving game state C is executed while the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is executed first, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed first. In other words, the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that was executed first is not changed to the time-saving performance of the new time-saving game state, nor is it changed to the time-saving performance of the time-saving game state that corresponds to the larger of the current time-saving counter and the new number of time-saving times.

As described above, the time-saving performance is the performance that changes the ease with which the game ball can enter the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), and refers to the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and/or the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.).

In this embodiment, the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter are provided to allow management of two overlapping time-saving game states internally. In the above-mentioned time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger of the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-saving times is reset as the new time-saving counter. However, even if two time-saving game states are overlapping internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (that the player can grasp) is only the time-saving performance of one of the two time-saving game states that are overlapping internally. Therefore, when multiple time-saving game states are overlapping without managing the fact that two time-saving game states are overlapping internally (i.e., without providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter), the larger of the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-saving times may be reset as the new time-saving counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving mode setting process. This process is performed when S211 is judged as NO, that is, when a transition is made from a non-time-saving game state to a time-saving B game state (when the ceiling counter = the ceiling value) or when a transition is made from a non-time-saving game state to a time-saving C game state (when a "time-saving hit" is won). In this process, the number of time-saving times and the time-saving performance determined in the time-saving B control mode determination process (S205) or the time-saving C control mode determination process (S207) are set. After executing the process of S214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In this way, in the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the process of transitioning to the B time-saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation has ended. In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the hit determination process includes a small hit, there may be cases in which the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the ceiling final variation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 may perform the process of transitioning to the B time-saving game state based on the end of the small hit game state.

In the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time-saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation ends, but this is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time-saving game state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variable displayed in parallel, it is preferable to perform the transition process to the B time-saving game state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation. This is because, if the transition to the B time-saving game state is made when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation ends, if the variable display of one of the special symbols as the ceiling final variation begins during the variable display of the other special symbol, the benefit of the variable display of the other special symbol as the B time-saving game state cannot be obtained, and there is a risk of reducing interest. In the first pachinko game machine, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed with a long fluctuation of, for example, 600,000 msec. However, in a pachinko game machine in which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed with such a long fluctuation, by performing a transition process to the B time-saving game state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final fluctuation, it is possible to avoid a delay in the start of the B time-saving game state even if the variable display of the special symbol, which is the ceiling final fluctuation, is performed with a long fluctuation.

In addition, in the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time-saving play state is performed with priority over the C time-saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the transition to the C time-saving play state (see S203 to S207 in Figure 38), but this is not limited to this. For example, the C time-saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the transition to the C time-saving play state may be performed with priority over the B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time-saving play state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned ceiling counter update process described with reference to FIG. 35, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not OFF (S171 in FIG. 35 judges NO), the ceiling counter is not updated, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in ST machines and pachinko gaming machines that perform a probability change drop lottery, the ceiling counter may be updated when a variable display of a special pattern is performed even if the probability change flag is ON. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the game may not transition to the B time-shortened game state, but may transition to the B time-shortened game state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter becomes the ceiling value. In this case, the main CPU 201 will not transition to the B time-shortened game state just because the "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but will perform processing to transition to the B time-shortened game state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter becomes the ceiling value.

The ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state, is preferably within a predetermined range of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special symbol flag is off (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times). In this embodiment, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), for example, the jackpot probability when the special symbol flag is off is 1 in 319 (when the setting value is 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319 x 2.5 to 319 x 3.0 (times).

The upper limit of the B time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the B time-saving game state, is preferably set to a specified multiple (e.g., 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number of times, which is the end condition of the C time-saving game state, is preferably set to a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off by a specified number (e.g., up to 3.8 times the denominator of the jackpot probability). In this embodiment, since the jackpot probability when the special probability flag is off is 1 in 319 (when the setting value is 1), it is preferable to set the upper limit of both the B time-saving specified number and the C time-saving specified number to approximately 1212 (319 x 3.8). Note that it is not essential that the upper limit of the B time-saving specified number and the upper limit of the C time-saving specified number be the same value.

In the case of a pachinko machine like the first one, which can be set to any one of a number of settings with different jackpot probabilities, such as settings 1 to 6, the time-saving hit probability is the same for all settings, as described above. In such a case, if the ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state, is set to a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0) regardless of the setting value, the ceiling value will differ depending on the setting value, and there is a risk that the set setting value will be discovered by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is preferable to set the ceiling value to the same value regardless of the setting value, regardless of the set setting value, rather than determining it by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability flag is off) by a specified number.

[1-6-18. Modifications related to time-saving management processing]
In the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figs. 32 to 39 (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management process of this embodiment"), the ceiling counter update process (see Fig. 35) is executed in the special symbol game end process (see Fig. 31). In addition, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving game state is performed with priority over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state. Furthermore, a transition flag (ceiling flag) to the B time-saving game state and a transition flag (time-saving hit flag) to the C time-saving game state are separately provided, and when the ceiling flag is on, the game is transitioned to the B time-saving game state, and when the time-saving hit flag is on, the game is transitioned to the C time-saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time-saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority order between the transition to the B time-saving game state and the transition to the C time-saving game state, and whether the transition flag to the B time-saving game state and the transition flag to the C time-saving game state are separate or common are not limited to the above, and the time-saving management process can be performed with various variations.

For example, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to when the fluctuation stops, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state B, with a transition flag to the time-saving play state B and a transition flag to the time-saving play state C being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the B time-saving play state, with a transition flag to the B time-saving play state and a transition flag to the C time-saving play state being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state C, with a transition flag to the time-saving play state B and a transition flag to the time-saving play state C being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving B play state, and the transition flag to the time-saving B play state and the transition flag to the time-saving C play state may be set as a common flag.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state C, and the transition flag to the time-saving play state B and the transition flag to the time-saving play state C may be set as a common flag.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to when the fluctuation stops, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the C time-saving play state, with a transition flag to the B time-saving play state and a transition flag to the C time-saving play state being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to when the fluctuation stops, and the game may transition to time-saving game state B after confirming that the "time-saving hit" is not a winning combination when the ceiling is reached.

Furthermore, if multiple time-saving game states are not executed at the same time, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0, and does not subtract 1 from the time-saving counter in other cases.

[1-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 40, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S86 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 27) will be described. Fig. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S251 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S251 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in a jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is the upper limit (if S253 is a YES judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S254. On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S253 is a NO judgement), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254), the jackpot end process (see S88 in FIG. 27) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). Then, after processing S256, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing the processing of S257, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 131, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 131 wins, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. In this case, however, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a special prize opening/closing control process. In this process, the main CPU 201 generates data for controlling the opening/closing of the special prize opening 131. After executing S259, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S260) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S87 in FIG. 27) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below). After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 41, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S87 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 27) will be described. Fig. 41 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S271 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S271 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the large prize opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S272 returns NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S273.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S272 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the special prize opening related various setting process (see S258 in FIG. 40) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131 has not elapsed (if S273 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131 has elapsed (if S273 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting the closure of the large prize opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S275) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing S276, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described below) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S277, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Big win end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S281 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S281 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a number of confirmed symbols counter, a round counter, a large prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S282, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited area.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 during the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 43. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 43 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 43 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that, for convenience, each process shown in Figure 43 is not shown as a subroutine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S291).

If it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0 (if S291 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (if S291 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S293. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S293 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for the normal symbol. This S293 processing is performed when the control state number for the normal symbol is "0". In this variable display start processing for the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 performs a win determination process for the normal symbol, a process to determine the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and if the result of the win determination process for the normal symbol is a win for the normal symbol, a process to set the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric role device 146. Note that if the control state number for the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of the normal symbol. This processing of S294 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs various processing when ending the variable display of the normal symbol. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol gameplay determination process. This S295 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol gameplay determination process, a determination process is performed of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss). Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric role release process. This S296 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric role 146 is released in a predetermined manner. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol win end processing. This S297 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol win end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the winning judgment table for normal symbols (see FIG. 16), the random numbers for winning judgment for normal symbols are generated in a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 99, and the winning judgment value data for normal symbols is, for example, 0 to 79 (in the case of a non-time-saving game state). The winning probability of normal symbols is determined by the number of winning judgment value data for normal symbols relative to the total random numbers for winning judgment for normal symbols, so that, for example, the winning probability of normal symbols is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, this winning probability of normal symbols is different when time-saving control is executed and when time-saving control is not executed, but may be the same or approximately the same. In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec, in a non-time-saving game state in which time-saving control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively short time, for example, 1,000 msec, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed. In this way, when time-saving control is executed, the frequency with which the normal electric device opening process is executed, i.e., the frequency with which game balls enter the second starting hole 140, is increased.

[1-7-4. External Maskable Interrupt Processing]
Next, an external maskable interrupt process executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 44. This process is an interrupt process executed in response to an external interrupt request generated, for example, when power is interrupted. Fig. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the external maskable interrupt process in the first pachinko game machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads the state of a specific input port of the I/O port 205. The specific input port is, for example, an input port in which the state of a power interruption detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, a solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. is set. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S303 that a power interruption has not been detected (if S303 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that a power interruption has been detected (if S303 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag that indicates a power outage, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register that was saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt processing.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt period of, for example, 2 msec will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a protection register backup process (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (i.e., a power interruption has been detected) (if S312 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., a power interruption has not been detected) (if S312 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and the process proceeds to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not play is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not play is permitted based on, for example, the value of the startup control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining whether the startup state when the power is turned on is one of power failure recovery, setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. For example, if power failure recovery is selected, it is determined that play is permitted, and if setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. is selected, it is determined that play is not permitted.

The startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 are off, it is determined that power has been restored; if both the setting key 174a and the backup clear switch 176 are on, it is determined that settings have been changed; if the backup clear switch 176 is off and the setting key 174a is on, it is determined that settings have been confirmed; and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174a is off, it is determined that the RAM has been cleared.

If it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (if S315 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at a 2 msec cycle, and are performed when the game is not permitted, i.e., when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. Details of the setting control process of S316 will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

If play is not permitted (if S315 is judged as NO), it is preferable for the main CPU 201 to prohibit the launch of game balls from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6), disable various switches except for specific switches (e.g., setting key 174a, backup clear switch 176, etc.), and prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S315 that play is permitted (if S315 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process to increment the value of the interrupt counter by 1. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited intervals during the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in an interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S319. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the working area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot for a special symbol) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs a switch input detection process. Details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 executes a winning information command setting process. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing S321, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that is scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S322, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S323, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. In this process, game judgment process, prize ball addition judgment process, display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area separate from (outside) the working area in which data necessary for game progress is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up and where the data is not cleared even if, for example, the RAM is cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the protection registers that were saved in S311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control process]
Next, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the launch control flag is a value indicating a setting change (if S331 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S332). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 proceeds to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the launch control flag does not indicate a setting change (if S331 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S333.

At S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S333 that the value of the launch control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (if S333 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S334). Details of this setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the setting confirmation processing (S334), the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating confirmation of the setting, i.e., that the RAM is to be cleared (if S333 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S337.

In S335, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation display process. In this process, the currently set setting value is displayed. After executing S335, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, a command (initialization command, power interruption recovery command, or setting operation command) that is reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), setting confirmation process (S334), or startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing S336, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs a WDT (watchdog timer) output process. In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. Then, after processing of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process, and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process performed in S332 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to Fig. 47. Note that Fig. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (if S341 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (if S341 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs an update process within the range of the set value. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided so that the setting value can be changed by operating this setting switch.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174a has been turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174a has not been turned off (if S343 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174a has been turned off (if S343 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when this first normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing, and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Note that Fig. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174a has been turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the setting change process described above (see FIG. 47).

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174a is not turned off (if S351 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174a has been turned off (if S351 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing (S352). Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when this second normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After the second normal game pre-processing (S352) is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S344 during the setting change processing (see Fig. 47) will be described. Fig. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. Note that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as the initial setting processing when the power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation are not performed in the startup initial setting processing (see Fig. 24), that is, when the RAM is cleared.

The main CPU 201 first performs an initialization RAM setting process (S361). In this process, a clearing process (e.g., construction of a working area and address setting, etc.) of the area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored when power is interrupted (hereinafter referred to as the "backup area") is performed. Note that the area where data is stored in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45) is not cleared. In addition, in this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data is stored in the constructed working area in the main RAM 203. That is, the data backed up when power is interrupted is erased, and it becomes possible to return the game state to the initialized state. Note that, although not shown, in this process, the game state is returned to the initialized state, making it possible to start playing, and the play permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a play permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving transmission of an initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in a presentation control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). When the process of S362 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When this first normal game pre-processing is ended, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted.

[1-7-10. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see Fig. 48) will be described. Fig. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process when the power is restored in the startup initial setting process (see Fig. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 that has been constructed. The above data is, for example, various information required to proceed with the game, such as game status information, the on/off state of the hit flags for special and normal symbols, and reserved number information. In other words, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power loss to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same game status as before the power loss. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same game status as before the power loss, and the game permission flag is set to on, resulting in a game permission state. After executing the RAM setting process when power is restored (S371), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S372.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability of winning is increased or decreased. This process is performed by reading data stored in the working area of the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S372 that the special bonus flag is not on (if S372 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S374.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S372 that the probability of winning is increased (if S372 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the high probability notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the high probability notification flag when power is restored after the power outage. If the high probability notification flag is ON, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a high probability notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to know from the outside whether the high probability flag is ON or not when power is restored after the power outage. After executing the process of S373, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a power interruption recovery command. The power interruption recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in a performance control command transmission process (S336) during the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection process]
Fig. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned system timer interrupt process. As shown in Fig. 51, the main CPU 201 executes the start hole winning detection process (S381). After executing the process of S381, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S382. The start hole winning detection process will be described later with reference to Fig. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a general prize opening passage detection process (S382). In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a large prize opening passage detection process (S383). In the large prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. when a prize is won through the large prize opening 131 is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a ball passage detection process (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random numbers (such as random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol) for normal symbols are extracted based on the detection of the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126 by the pass gate switch 127. The main RAM 203 has a normal pattern start memory area (1) to a normal pattern start memory area (4) in which various random numbers (such as random numbers for determining whether a normal pattern is a winning symbol) extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126 are reserved until the start condition of the normal pattern is satisfied. In addition, in the ball passage detection process, it is also determined whether there is free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4), that is, whether the number of reserved normal symbols extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126 is, for example, less than four. When this process is completed, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Start gate winning detection process]
52 is a flow chart showing an example of the start hole winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The start hole winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned switch input detection process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start switch 121 (S391).

If it is determined that the first start switch 121 has not detected a game ball (if S391 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball has been detected by the first start switch 121 (if S391 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 extracts various random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot, a symbol random number value for the first special symbol, a random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is in a reach state, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the first special symbol, etc.), and performs processing to set payout information according to the winning of the first starting port. After executing processing of S392, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on the winning of the first start hole 120 is, for example, less than four. The main RAM 203 has the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) in which various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball in the first start hole 120 are reserved until the start condition is met, and in this process, it is determined whether there is free space in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4). In addition to the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), the main RAM 203 also has the first special symbol start memory area (0), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than four, i.e., the upper limit of four (if S393 returns NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four (if S393 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process to increment the number of reserved first special symbols by 1. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random number values extracted based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting hole 120 in the main RAM 203 until the condition for starting the variation of the first special symbol is met. As a result, the display of the variation of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the condition for starting the variation is met. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead determination process. This process is a process that uses the random number value extracted in S392 to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and perform a win determination process, etc., prior to the special symbol winning determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28). It also determines whether or not the look-ahead flag is set.

The look-ahead determination process may be performed at any time between the extraction of the random number value in S392 and the execution of the special symbol winning determination process. However, considering that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead performance before the variable display of the special symbol begins, it is preferable to perform the look-ahead determination process, for example, around the time of S395. After executing S396, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a winning command for the first special pattern. The winning command for the first special pattern is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved first special patterns by 1, information on the variation pattern of the first special pattern (i.e., the variation pattern command for the special pattern), etc., and the winning command for the first special pattern reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45). After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start switch 141.

If it is determined that the second start port switch 141 has not detected a game ball (if S398 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the start port winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball has been detected by the second start switch 141 (if S398 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 extracts various random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is a jackpot, a symbol random number value for the second special symbol, a random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is in a reach state, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the second special symbol, etc.), and performs processing to set payout information according to winning the second starting port. After executing processing of S399, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on winning at the second starting hole 140 is, for example, less than four.

The main RAM 203 has second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (4) that reserve various random number values extracted based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 140 until the start condition is met, and in this process, it is determined whether there is free space in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (4). The main RAM 203 also has a second special symbol start memory area (0) in addition to the second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (4), but this will be described later.

If the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than four, i.e., the upper limit of four (if S400 judges NO), the main CPU 201 ends the start hole winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four (if S400 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process to increment the number of reserved second special symbols by 1. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random number values extracted based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 140 in the main RAM 203 until the condition for starting the variation of the second special symbol is met. As a result, the display of the variation of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the condition for starting the variation is met. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a winning command for the second special symbol (S403). The winning command for the second special symbol is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved second special symbols by 1 and information on the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the start hole winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub-control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S502.

The above-mentioned initialization process (S501) is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S502 to S508 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S502, the sub-CPU 301 performs a read process on the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). This process is performed by reading the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) that is set in the command input port 308. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S503.

In S503, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S504.

In S504, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, the display presentation mode to be displayed on the display device 7 (see FIG. 4 and FIG. 6) and the sound presentation mode to be output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) are determined based on the winning command sent from the main CPU 201.

In the performance mode determination process (S504), the sub-CPU 301 generates an animation request including information specifying the performance content, and generates various requests (e.g., a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, and a prop request) for operating various performance devices based on the generated animation request. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S505.

In S505, the sub-CPU 301 executes a drawing control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S506.

In S506, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S507.

In S507, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S508.

In S508, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of the performance mode determination process by the sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs a presentation mode determination process (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command sent from the main control circuit 200.

As one of the various processes performed in the presentation mode determination process, the sub-CPU 301 performs, for example, a sub-variation presentation pattern determination process that determines the presentation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "sub-variation presentation pattern") of the sub-variation presentation corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as the "variation"), and a look-ahead presentation pattern determination process that determines the presentation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "look-ahead presentation pattern") of the look-ahead presentation. In addition, the presentation mode determination process also performs determination processes of various presentation modes related to the progress of the game, such as the presentation mode of a countdown presentation that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, and the presentation mode of a B time-saving play state transition presentation that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value.

The sub-variation presentation pattern determination process is performed based on the results of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation presentation pattern is a presentation pattern (e.g., decorative symbol variation pattern, character presentation pattern, etc.) that is performed by the sub-CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol as a presentation that indicates the expected outcome of the variation.

In the sub-variable performance, depending on the sub-variable performance pattern being executed, it is possible to show that the expectation level for the result of the special symbol winning determination process is maintained or increased as time passes from when the variable display of the special symbol starts to when the special symbol stops.

The sub-variable performance patterns include, for example, time-saving hit type reaches A, B, C, jackpot hit type reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, E, etc., as shown in FIG. 54 described below. As described above, time-saving hit type reaches A, B, C are reach performances that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol (see S93 in FIG. 28) may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Jackpot hit type reaches A, B, C are reach performances that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reaches A, B, C, D, E are reach performances that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

For example, if the timing of executing a countdown effect that indicates the timing of transition to the B time-saving game state overlaps with the timing of executing a reach effect, the sub-CPU 301 may give priority to executing one of the effects.

The pre-reading performance pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, the variation pattern of the special symbol determined as a result of the pre-reading judgment process. The pre-reading performance is a performance pattern performed by the sub-CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 while in a pending state (i.e., after a winning entry into the first starting hole 120, until the starting information such as various random numbers extracted based on this winning entry is provided to the winning judgment process of the special symbol (the variable display of the special symbol begins)) as a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the result of the pre-reading judgment process.

Depending on the look-ahead performance pattern being executed, when in a pending state, the look-ahead performance can show that the expectation level for the result of the look-ahead determination process is maintained or increased as time passes (more specifically, as the variable display of the previously pending start information progresses).

The look-ahead performance is performed, for example, by using a pending image displayed on the display device 7. The pending image is an image that shows the current pending status.

The look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead winning type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving winning or a jackpot) of the look-ahead judgment process, i.e., the special pattern winning judgment process, and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result of the special pattern winning judgment process being a winning (jackpot or time-saving winning). In other words, the look-ahead performance can suggest both or either of the expected value for the result type of the special pattern winning judgment process and the expected value for the result of the special pattern winning judgment process being a winning. In addition, in the look-ahead performance pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described below), a look-ahead winning type performance pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described below) and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern determination process (see S3008, S3009 in FIG. 59 described below) are performed. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern, the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern, the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variable performance pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation presentation pattern determination process will be described. Figure 54 is an example of a sub-variation presentation pattern determination table (detailed description omitted) in a game state where the time-saving flag is off (normal game state). This sub-variation presentation pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 of the first pachinko game machine. The program ROM 302 also stores a sub-variation presentation pattern determination table in a game state where the time-saving flag is on (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), but the description will be omitted here.

The sub-CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation presentation pattern determination table in the normal game state of FIG. 54, and determines the sub-variation presentation pattern (shown as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the display device 7 as the variation presentation pattern corresponding to the variation based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol sent from the main control circuit 200. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-variation presentation patterns include time-saving hit type reaches A, B, and C, big hit type reaches A, B, and C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, and E.

As described above, the time-saving hit system reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate the possibility of a time-saving hit, and are reach effects that allow the player to grasp the possibility of a time-saving hit from the appearance. The time-saving hit system reach A is not displayed if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a miss or a big hit, and is a time-saving hit guaranteed reach effect that is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (see FIG. 15). This time-saving hit system reach A is not a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading target, but is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading mode. The time-saving hit system reach B and the time-saving hit system reach C have the same or approximately the same performance mode in appearance. However, while the time-saving hit system reach B is not a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading target, the time-saving hit system reach C is a sub-variable performance pattern for the pre-reading target (see the "pre-reading flag" column in FIG. 15, FIG. 54, and FIG. 55 described below).

As described above, the jackpot-related reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate the possibility of a jackpot, and can be seen from the outside to indicate the possibility of a jackpot. The jackpot-related reach A is not displayed if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a miss or a "time-saving hit", and is a jackpot-guaranteed reach effect that is displayed only if the result is a "time-saving hit" (see FIG. 15). This jackpot-related reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading, but is not limited to this and may be a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading. The appearance of the jackpot-related reach B and the jackpot-related reach C is the same or approximately the same. However, while the jackpot-related reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading, the jackpot-related reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading (see the "pre-reading flag" column in FIG. 15).

As described above, common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate the possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit, and are reach effect modes that make it difficult to know whether there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot in terms of appearance. Common reach A is a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit) confirmed reach effect that is not displayed if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a miss, and is displayed only if there is a jackpot or a "time-saving hit" (see Figure 15). Common reach B and common reach C have the same or nearly the same appearance effect mode. Furthermore, common reach D is an effect that develops from common reach C to time-saving hit reach C. Furthermore, common reach E is an effect that develops from common reach C to jackpot reach C. Note that common reach A and common reach B are not sub-variable performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading, whereas common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are sub-variable performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading (see the "Pre-reading flag" column in Figure 15).

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 54) and determines the sub-variation performance pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub-CPU 301 controls the display device 7 to display the determined sub-variation performance pattern.

[1-9-2. Pre-reading performance pattern determination process]
Next, a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination process and a pre-reading expected value presentation pattern determination process, which are performed as the pre-reading presentation pattern determination process, will be described.

In addition, the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) is provided with the first sub-reserved area (0), the first sub-reserved area (1), the first sub-reserved area (2), the first sub-reserved area (3), and the first sub-reserved area (4) as areas corresponding to the first special symbol start memory area (0), the first special symbol start memory area (1), the first special symbol start memory area (2), the first special symbol start memory area (3), and the first special symbol start memory area (4) provided in the main RAM 203, respectively. Various reserved information related to the extracted random number value is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) and the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (4). In addition, the first special symbol start memory area (0) and the first sub-reserved area (0) store information corresponding to the fluctuation. When the sub-CPU 301 receives a winning command for the first start port winning, it stores the received information in the first sub-reserve area that corresponds to the current first special symbol start memory area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 is provided with a second sub-reserve area (0), a second sub-reserve area (1), a second sub-reserve area (2), a second sub-reserve area (3), and a second sub-reserve area (4) as areas corresponding to the second special pattern start memory area (0), the second special pattern start memory area (1), the second special pattern start memory area (2), the second special pattern start memory area (3), and the second special pattern start memory area (4) provided in the main RAM 203, respectively.

In this embodiment, the pre-reading performance is performed for the first special symbol in the normal game state, but it is not limited to this and may be performed in other game states (e.g., high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state), or may be performed for the second special symbol.

The pre-reading performance is performed, for example, by using pending images displayed in the display area of the display device 7. The display area of the display device 7 has the following areas for displaying pending images: a zeroth area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (0), a first pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (1), a second pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (2), a third pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (3), and a fourth pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (4).

[1-9-2-1. Tables referenced in the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination process]
First, a table to be referenced in the pre-read winning type presentation pattern determination process will be described.

The reserved image forms in which the pre-reading performance is executed with the determined pre-reading hit type performance pattern include a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit, a jackpot type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot, and a common hit type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of both a time-saving hit and a jackpot.

The predictive hit type presentation pattern is a presentation pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process by changing the form of the reserved image, for example, from a common hit type predictive presentation form to a time-saving hit type predictive presentation form, or from a common hit type predictive presentation form to a jackpot type predictive presentation form.

Figure 55 is an example of a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination table. This Figure 55 shows only the variation patterns that are the pre-reading targets among the variation patterns shown in Figure 54. Also, Figure 56 is an example of a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table. These tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number determination table in FIG. 55, when the sub-CPU 301 receives a fluctuation pattern in which the pre-reading flag is set, the sub-CPU 301 determines the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number, for example, based on the fluctuation pattern and the reserved number. The reserved number here includes the start information to be pre-read. In other words, when the start information extracted based on the winning of the first start port 120 is reserved, the reserved number after the reservation corresponds to the reserved number shown in FIG. 55.

For example, if the fluctuation pattern is "03H" and the reserved number is "3", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is "0EH" and the reserved number is "2", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is determined, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table in FIG. 56 to determine the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern. In more detail, as shown in the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table in FIG. 56, for example, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined based on the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the sub-presentation selection random number value 1.

In FIG. 56, for the sake of convenience, the "pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number" is shown as the "SASPT number" and the "pre-reading winning type presentation pattern" is shown as the "SAS presentation pattern." The random number value 1 for sub-presentation selection is a random number value extracted by the sub-CPU 301 based on a specified trigger, such as when a special symbol variation pattern command is received.

For example, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted random number value 1 for selecting sub-presentation is "55", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "07H". Also, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted random number value 1 for selecting sub-presentation is "77", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the Notes (Reserved) column in Figure 56 indicate the first to fourth reserved areas, respectively.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "A" shown in correspondence with the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be a time-saving hit. When the reserved image is displayed in a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the outside that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "B" shown in correspondence with the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random number value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the outside that there is a possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "C" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a common-hit pre-reading presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in a common-hit pre-reading presentation format, it is difficult to tell from the outside whether there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

For example, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "07H", a common hit type pre-reading presentation form is displayed in the third reserved area, and a common hit type pre-reading presentation form is also displayed in the second reserved area after shifting from the third reserved area. Then, when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area, the common hit type pre-reading presentation form changes to a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form, and a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form of "A" is displayed in the first reserved area.

In addition, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", a "C" common hit type pre-reading presentation form is displayed in the third reserved area. Then, when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area, the common hit type pre-reading presentation form changes to a jackpot type pre-reading presentation form, and a "B" jackpot type pre-reading presentation form is displayed in the second reserved area and in the first reserved area after being shifted from the second reserved area.

That is, the pre-reading hit type performance pattern includes the following patterns A) to E) as shown in Fig. 56. In this embodiment, the pattern of changing from the big hit type pre-reading performance form to the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form and the pattern of changing from the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to the big short hit pre-reading performance form are not included in the pre-reading hit type performance pattern, but these patterns may be included in the pre-reading hit type performance pattern.
(i) A pre-reading time-saving hit presentation pattern in which a pre-reading presentation form for a time-saving hit is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and a pre-reading presentation form for a time-saving hit is displayed (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "09H").
(b) A pre-reading jackpot presentation pattern in which a jackpot-type pre-reading presentation form is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and the jackpot-type pre-reading presentation form is displayed (for example, pre-reading jackpot type presentation pattern "17H").
(c) At the time of being put on hold, a common hit type pre-reading presentation form is displayed, and then it changes to a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form, pre-reading common hit presentation pattern A (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "24H").
ii) When placed on hold, it is displayed in a common win type pre-reading presentation format, and then changes to a jackpot type pre-reading presentation format, a pre-reading common win presentation pattern B (for example, pre-reading win type presentation pattern "12H").
(e) When the ball is put on hold, it is displayed in a common hit type pre-reading presentation format, and the presentation format does not change thereafter, and the common hit type pre-reading presentation format is displayed in a pre-reading common hit presentation pattern C (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination table (see, for example, FIG. 55) and determines the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number (SASPT number) based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of reserved items. Then, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) and determines the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) based on the determined pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the random number value 1 for sub-presentation selection.

In FIG. 56, the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A" is displayed at the time of reservation, and the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern that changes to the jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B" thereafter is not shown, but the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern that changes from the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A" to the jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B" in this manner may be determined by the sub-CPU 301. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest that the pre-reading presentation can provide to the player.

In addition, in Fig. 56, the big win type pre-reading performance form of "B" is a big win type pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a big win (i.e., there is a possibility of a miss), as described above, but in addition to this, a big win confirmation pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big win confirmation may be displayed. In this case, the pre-reading hit type performance pattern determined by the sub-CPU 301 may include any or all of the following pre-reading type performance patterns E) to H).
(e) A pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and the pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form is displayed.
(d) When the ball is put on hold, another pre-reading presentation form (for example, a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A", a jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B", a common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C", etc.) is displayed, and then the pre-reading jackpot confirmation presentation form changes to a jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form, a pre-reading jackpot confirmation presentation pattern B.
(c) At the time of being put on hold, another pre-reading presentation form (for example, a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A", a common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C", etc.) is displayed, and then a jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B" is displayed, and then it changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading presentation form, pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation pattern C.

In addition, in FIG. 56, among the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A", the jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B", and the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C", the display frequency of the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" is the highest at the time of reservation, but this is not limited to this. For example, the display frequency of the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A" may be the highest at the time of reservation, or the display frequency of the jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B" may be the highest at the time of reservation. Furthermore, the display frequency of the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" may be the lowest at the time of reservation.

In addition, in FIG. 56, a random number value of 1 for selecting sub-effects within a predetermined range is assigned to all "pre-reading winning type effect pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)", but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not assign a random number value for selecting sub-effects to only certain SASPT numbers (i.e., the allocation rate for certain SASPT numbers is set to 0 so that they are not selected).

[1-9-2-2. Tables referenced in the process of determining the expected value effect pattern ahead of time]
Next, a table to be referred to in the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination process will be described.

Figure 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) that is referenced when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot." Also, Figure 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss occurs) that is referenced when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss.

The form of the reserved image in which the look-ahead performance is executed in the determined look-ahead expected value performance pattern differs depending on the expected value for a win (time-saving win, jackpot).

When a reserved image is displayed as a time-saving hit-reading performance format, for example, the reserved image, which is usually displayed as a triangle, can be changed in shape to show a change in expected value, such as "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star." In this case, the expected value is lowest when the reserved image is a square, and highest when the image is a star.

In addition, when a reserved image is displayed as a jackpot-type pre-reading performance, for example, the reserved image, which is usually displayed in white, can be changed in color to show a change in expected value, such as "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." In this case, when the reserved image is blue, the expected value is the lowest, and when the reserved image is rainbow, the expected value is the highest.

In addition, although details will be described later, when the reserved image is displayed as a common win type pre-reading presentation format that indicates the possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving win, the reserved image may be displayed, for example, as both a color indicating the expected value level for a jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value level for a time-saving win, or it may be displayed in a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation format.

Although the reserved image for which the look-ahead performance is performed can change from a performance form with a relatively low expected value to a performance form with a relatively high expected value, it is preferable not to change from a performance form with a relatively high expected value to a performance form with a relatively low expected value. Furthermore, when changing the performance form of the reserved image, it is not necessarily necessary to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow", but it may be changed, for example, from "pentagon → circle" or "yellow → rainbow". Furthermore, it is not necessarily necessary to start the reserved image form with a square or blue, which have the lowest expected value, but it may start with a circle or red, for example.

Note that the numbers "1" to "4" shown in the Notes (Reserved) column in Figure 57 indicate the first to fourth reserved areas, respectively, just like in Figure 56.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the remarks (for pending play) in Figure 57, the "0" to "5" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading winning type performance pattern determination table number and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-performance indicates the expected value for a win (time-saving win, big win). For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2", the above-mentioned "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above-mentioned "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above-mentioned "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5".

Hereinafter, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 57, the "0" to "5" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-presentations will be referred to as expected value levels "0" to "5".

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot", the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern is determined based on, for example, the reserved number and the random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect, as shown in the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern determination table (when a hit) in FIG. 57. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern is determined based on, for example, the reserved number and the random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect, as shown in the look-ahead expectation value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss) in FIG. 58. The random number value 2 for selecting the sub-effect is a random number value extracted by the sub-CPU 301 based on a specified trigger, such as when a special symbol change pattern command is received. Note that in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, only the reserved number values of "1" to "3" are illustrated, and the illustration of the reserved number value of "4" is omitted for convenience.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the reserved number is "3", and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-effects is "750", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H". If the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H", for example, the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "3" when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area, and the expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the reserved number is "3", and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-effects is "680", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH". If the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH", for example, the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reserved area, and when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "4".

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss occurs) (see FIG. 58) based on the result of the special pattern hit determination process, and determines the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern based on the number of reserved numbers and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-presentations.

In addition, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot," the allocation rate of each pre-reading expected value presentation pattern is not limited to the allocation rate shown in FIG. 57 and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss," a bias is created by increasing the selection rate of pre-reading expected value presentation patterns with relatively low expected value levels (for example, "01H" or "0BH"), but this is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate, for example by distributing them evenly.

In addition, in Figures 57 and 58, a predetermined range of random number values 2 for selecting sub-effects are assigned to all "look-ahead expected value performance patterns", but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not assign random number values 2 for selecting sub-effects to only certain "look-ahead expected value performance patterns" (i.e., the allocation rate of a certain "look-ahead expected value performance pattern" is set to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Pre-reading performance pattern determination process]
Next, the look-ahead performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to each table of Figures 54 to 58 will be described with reference to Figure 59. Figure 59 is an example of a flowchart showing the look-ahead performance pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance pattern determination process only in a normal game state in which hitting from the left is considered to be a regular game mode, but is not limited to this.

The sub-CPU 301 first determines whether or not a winning command has been received from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If no winning command has been received (if S3001 returns NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning command has been received (if S3001 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether there are currently no pending items to be pre-read, i.e., whether a pre-read performance is being performed for the current pending items. If there are multiple pending items, the pre-read performance may be performed for multiple pending images, but in this embodiment, the pre-read performance is performed for only one pending image.

If a look-ahead performance is being performed for the current hold (if S3002 is judged as NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if a look-ahead performance is not being performed for the current hold (if S3002 returns YES), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the variation pattern information received in the winning command is subject to pre-reading (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received in the winning command is not subject to pre-reading (if S3003 is judged as NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received in the winning command is to be pre-read (if S3003 returns YES), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the upper limit number of reserved balls (e.g., 4 or 8). This process is to avoid a transition to time-saving game state B before the variable display of the special symbol is executed for the reserved ball for which the pre-reading performance has been executed, despite the pre-reading performance having been executed. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the maximum number that can be reserved, but this is not limited to this, and if the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command is a target for pre-reading (if S3003 is determined to be YES), it may be determined whether the difference is greater than the number of reserved balls including the target for pre-reading. In addition, the ceiling value and ceiling counter may receive information as a command from the main CPU 201, or may be managed by the sub-CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub-CPU 301 performs a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination process. In this process, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55) is referenced to determine the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern. In this process, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined by referring to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot". In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command sent from the main CPU 201, and if the result is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot", a YES determination is made. However, this is not limited to this, and a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot" may be determined by sending hit/loss information for the special symbol from the main CPU 201 to the sub-CPU 301.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot" (YES determination in S3007), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3008.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither a "time-saving hit" nor a "jackpot" (S3007 judges NO), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern (when a win occurs). In this process, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) in FIG. 57 to determine a look-ahead presentation pattern (when a win occurs). After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead presentation pattern determination process.

In addition, in S3009, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a look-ahead performance pattern when the result is a loss. In this process, the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (when the result is a loss) in FIG. 58 is referenced, and a look-ahead expected value performance pattern (when the result is a loss) is determined. After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead performance pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effects of pre-reading performance, examples of pre-reading performance extensions]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead performance, not only is it interesting to see whether the reserved image changes into a big win type look-ahead performance form or a time-saving hit type look-ahead performance form, but it is also possible to change the expected value level of a hit (big win, time-saving hit), and it is possible to increase interest by performing a new performance that has never been performed before. Note that the timing for changing the reserved image form is not limited to when the reserved image shifts, and may be during the variable display of the special pattern of the change, for example.

In addition, the form of the reserved image used as a pre-reading effect (for example, the form of the reserved image displayed within the range of the first sub-reserved area (4) to the first sub-reserved area (1)) may be determined at the time of winning at the first starting port 120, and the form of the reserved image in the variable display of the special pattern of the change may be determined at the start of the variable display of the special pattern.

By the way, when comparing the probability of being determined as a variation pattern in which a look-ahead performance is executed in a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54) with the probability of being determined as a variation pattern in which a look-ahead performance is executed in a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54), the former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). In other words, the execution rate of the look-ahead performance is higher in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern than in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko gaming machines in which a look-ahead performance is executed only when there is a possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of a win, and to increase interest.

The execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead time-saving performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead performance is executed, the expected value for a jackpot is higher than the expected value for a time-saving hit, making it possible to increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game state where the probability change flag is off (in this embodiment, the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state), a "time-saving hit" can be won in the hit determination process of the special symbol (see FIG. 10). However, in this embodiment, a pre-reading performance is performed in the normal game state, but not in the low-probability time-saving game state. Even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving game state is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times is unlikely to increase in either the case where the time-saving game state C is superimposed on the time-saving game state A, or the case where the time-saving game state C is not superimposed on the time-saving game state A. Therefore, by making it as much as possible for the player to not know that there is a possibility of winning a "time-saving hit" in the time-saving game state A, it is possible to reduce the disappointment given to the player by winning a "time-saving hit," and to suppress a decrease in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the pre-reading effect from being performed in the low-probability time-saving game state, and the pre-reading effect may be performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability low-time-saving game state. Also, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but it is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect may also be performed for the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, a time-saving hit type reach, a jackpot type reach, or a common reach can be executed as the sub-variation presentation pattern. In this embodiment, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 15 and FIG. 54 to FIG. 56, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead presentation with a look-ahead time-saving hit presentation pattern, it executes a time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variation presentation pattern, and does not execute a jackpot type reach. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead presentation with a look-ahead jackpot presentation pattern, it executes a jackpot type reach as the sub-variation presentation pattern, and does not execute a time-saving hit type reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead performance with a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern or a look-ahead common hit performance pattern, it can execute a time-saving hit type reach as a sub-variable performance pattern. However, when the sub-CPU 301 executes a look-ahead performance with a look-ahead big hit performance pattern, it does not execute a time-saving hit type reach as a sub-variable performance pattern.

In addition, regardless of whether a pre-reading jackpot presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) "37H" shown in FIG. 56), a pre-reading time-saving hit presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "29H" shown in FIG. 56), or a pre-reading common hit presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) "27H" shown in FIG. 56) is executed, the sub-CPU 301 may execute a common reach (for example, the sub-variable presentation patterns "0AH" and "0BH" shown in FIG. 55) as a sub-variable presentation pattern.

Also, a presentation pattern may be set in which a time-saving hit type reach is executed, and after the time-saving hit type reach indicates a miss, a big win type reach is executed. In this case, the player can play with a sense of anticipation until the end, wondering whether or not a high-profit big win type reach will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for start information in which a pre-reading effect has been executed, if a common reach E is executed, an effect common to the common reach C is displayed, and then it is possible to transition to an effect common to the jackpot reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, it will not transition to the jackpot reach C. Similarly, in the target variation, if a common reach E is executed, an effect common to the common reach C is displayed, and then it is possible to transition to an effect common to the time-saving hit reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, it will not transition to the time-saving hit reach C.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead performance is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even if a look-ahead performance mode (hereinafter referred to as a "jackpot look-ahead performance") that indicates that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be a jackpot has already been performed, the sub-CPU 301 will not perform a new look-ahead performance. Note that even in a pachinko gaming machine in which look-ahead performance is performed for multiple reserved images, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead performance if a jackpot look-ahead performance has already been performed.

For example, if there are multiple reserves including one reserve (hereinafter referred to as the "first reserve") and another reserve (hereinafter referred to as the "second reserve") in which the variable display of the special pattern starts after the first reserve, and a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (for example, the look-ahead hit type performance pattern "17H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first reserve, even if a look-ahead performance is executed in the second reserve, the look-ahead performance in the second reserve may be meaningless. In particular, if a jackpot is derived for the first reserve and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to an A time-saving game state after the end of this jackpot game state, even if a "time-saving hit" is derived for the second reserve, the player may not be able to receive the benefit of this "time-saving hit", and in this case, the interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, if a jackpot look-ahead performance has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute a look-ahead performance for a reserve that is consumed after the reserve in which the jackpot look-ahead performance is being executed.

In addition, even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which a jackpot is derived), if a look-ahead performance has not been performed for the first hold, the look-ahead performance may or may not be performed for the second hold.

In addition, even if a false jackpot pre-reading effect (for example, pre-reading jackpot type effect pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to execute the pre-reading effect in the second hold.

However, if a time-saving hit pre-reading effect (for example, the pre-reading hit type effect pattern "05H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, a jackpot pre-reading effect or a time-saving hit pre-reading effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a time-saving hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot that is more profitable than that.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in a pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, even if a small hit pre-reading effect is executed in the first reserve, a big hit pre-reading effect or a time-saving hit pre-reading effect may be executed in the second reserve. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first reserve, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, and a look-ahead performance mode indicating that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol may be a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a "small hit look-ahead performance") is executed in the first hold, a big hit look-ahead performance or a time-saving hit look-ahead performance may be executed in the second hold. This is because, even if a small hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to make the player expect a small hit that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if, for example, a winning ball is entered into the first starting hole 120 during the execution of a jackpot-related reach as a sub-variable performance pattern, and start information is reserved, the sub-CPU 301 will not execute a look-ahead performance for this reservation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance only in the normal game state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the start information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the look-ahead judgment made by the main CPU 201 is reserved (this reservation is referred to as a "specific reservation" in this paragraph), whether the look-ahead performance is executed for this specific reservation or not, the sub-CPU 301 will not execute the look-ahead performance for the specific reservation after the jackpot game state ends unless the normal game state is in effect. However, the sub-CPU 301 may be able to not execute the look-ahead performance for the specific reservation even if the normal game state is in effect after the jackpot game state ends. Furthermore, even in a pachinko game machine that executes a look-ahead performance in a game state other than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state), if there is a specific reserve when the jackpot display mode is derived, the sub-CPU 301 may be able to not execute a look-ahead performance for the specific reserve after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the start information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-reading judgment made by the main CPU 201 is held (this hold is referred to as a "specific hold" in this paragraph), even if this specific hold is a hold for a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 may not be controlled to the C time-saving play state based on the "time-saving hit" after the jackpot game state ends. For example, if the specification is such that multiple time-saving play states are not executed in overlap when the time-saving play states overlap, and the A time-saving play state is executed after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving play state based on the "time-saving hit" even if the specific hold is a hold for a "time-saving hit".

[1-10. Examples of pre-reading performance]
A specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to Figures 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub-CPU 301 is capable of executing the look-ahead effect using a reserved image based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific examples of when a pre-reading performance is performed with a pre-reading jackpot performance pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead winning type performance pattern and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern. First, a specific example of a look-ahead performance in a look-ahead big win performance pattern as the look-ahead winning type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

Figures 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the big win look-ahead presentation form, which indicates the possibility of a big win, changes. Note that the look-ahead hit type presentation patterns shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H", or "78H" in Figure 56. Also, the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted from Figure 57.

As shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f), the first hold area 411 to the fourth hold area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first hold area 411 to the fourth hold area 414 are areas that indicate whether hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area (1) to the first sub-hold area (4), respectively. In addition, the 0th area 410 is an area that corresponds to the first sub-hold area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area, the sub-CPU 301 displays the hold areas 411-414 corresponding to the first sub-hold area in which the hold information is stored with a hold image (hereinafter simply referred to as a "hold image") indicated by a triangle. Also, when no hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area, the sub-CPU 301 does not display a hold image, but displays only the frame of the hold area.

In FIG. 60(a), the first hold area 411 to the third hold area 413 display normal hold images with no pre-reading effect being performed, and the fourth hold area 414 displays only a frame and no hold image. This indicates that hold information is stored in the first sub-hold areas (1) to (3), but no hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), a new pending image is displayed in the fourth pending area 414, which is different from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that new pending information has been stored in the first sub-pending area (4), which is different from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g., colors) depending on the expected value for a jackpot. In this embodiment, with the exception of rainbows, differences in color are illustrated by shades of color.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is blue (expected value level "1").

Figure 60 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (b), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in Figure 60 (b) has changed from blue to yellow (expected value level "2") when it is shifted to the third pending area 413.

Figure 60 (d) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (c), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 60 (c) has changed from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 60 (e) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (d), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in Figure 60 (d) has changed from green to red (expected value level "4") when it is shifted to the first pending area 411.

Figure 60 (f) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (e), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in Figure 60 (e) has changed from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when it is shifted to the zeroth area 410.

In addition, the color (expected value level) of the reserved image indicating the expected value for a jackpot does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change during the variable display of the special pattern for that change, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 60, the jackpot-based pre-reading presentation form is changed to indicate a change in the expected value from which a jackpot is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, a pre-reading presentation that changes from a jackpot-based pre-reading presentation form to a jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before the change to the jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form, the expected value level may also be changed accordingly.

[1-10-2. Specific examples of when pre-reading effects are performed with pre-reading time-saving performance patterns]
Next, a specific example of a pre-reading performance performed with a pre-reading time-saving winning performance pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading winning type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

Figures 61(a) to 61(f) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and are diagrams showing the process by which the time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation form, which indicates the possibility of a time-saving hit, changes. Note that the look-ahead time-saving hit type presentation patterns shown in Figures 61(a) to 61(f) correspond to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH", or "6AH" in Figure 56. Also, the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value presentation patterns shown in Figures 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted from Figure 57.

In FIG. 61(a), the first pending area 411 to the third pending area 413 display normal pending images with no preview performance being performed, and the fourth pending area 414 displays no pending images, only a frame.

In FIG. 61(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). As described above, the sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g. shapes) depending on the expected value for the time reduction.

In this way, in this embodiment, the expected value for a jackpot is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for a time-saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is a triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape of the reserved image shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is a rectangle (expected value level "1").

Figure 61 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (b), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in Figure 61 (b) has changed from a square to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when it is shifted to the third pending area 413.

Figure 61 (d) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (c), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 61 (c) has changed from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 61 (e) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (d), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in Figure 61 (d) has changed from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when it is shifted to the first pending area 411.

Figure 61 (f) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (e), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in Figure 61 (e) has changed from a circle to a star (expected value level "5") when it is shifted to the zeroth area 410.

The shape of the reserved image, which indicates the expected value for the time-saving hit, does not necessarily have to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" and may change, for example, from "pentagon to circle."

In addition, the shape of the reserved image (expected value level) indicating the expected value for the time-saving win does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern for that change.

In addition, in Fig. 61, the time-saving hit system pre-reading performance form is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving hit is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the pre-reading performance shown below may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before changing to the big win confirmation pre-reading performance form, the expected value level may also be changed accordingly.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a guaranteed jackpot pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form.

[1-10-3. Specific examples of when pre-reading effects are performed with pre-reading common winning effects patterns]
Next, a specific example of a pre-reading effect performed with a pre-reading common winning effect pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading winning type effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

Figures 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a common win type look-ahead presentation form, which indicates that there is a possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving win, to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form. Changes in the common win type look-ahead presentation form include a change in the expected value level of a win (time-saving win, jackpot), and a change in the type of win to one that clearly indicates whether it is a jackpot or a time-saving win. The look-ahead type win presentation patterns shown in Figures 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 62(a) to 62(d) corresponds to "43H" in Figure 57.

In this embodiment, a common hit type pre-reading presentation form that indicates the possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit is displayed by displaying both a color that indicates the expected value level for a jackpot and a shape that indicates the expected value level for a time-saving hit.

In FIG. 62(a), the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412 display normal pending images with no preview performance being performed, while the third pending area 413 and the fourth pending area 414 display only frames and no pending images.

In FIG. 62(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). The sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g., color and shape) depending on the expected value for a hit (big hit or short-time hit). In this embodiment, when the pre-reading performance is not executed or the expected value for a hit is the lowest, the reserved image is displayed as a white triangle, and the expected value for a short hit increases in the following order: "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star."

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

Figure 62 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 62 (b), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 62 (b) has changed from a yellow pentagon to a green hexagon (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 62 (d) is an image in which the reserved image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 62 (c), and shows that the shape of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 62 (c) has changed from a green hexagon (a common win-type pre-reading presentation form with an expected value level of "3") to a rainbow triangle (a big win-type pre-reading presentation form with an expected value level of "5") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

In other words, the look-ahead effects shown in Figures 62(b) and 62(c) are effects in which it is difficult to determine from the shape of the reserved image whether the shape of the reserved image indicates the expected value for a jackpot or the expected value for a time-saving hit. In contrast, the look-ahead effect shown in Figure 62(d) is an effect in which it is possible to determine that the shape of the reserved image indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and that the expected value is extremely high (for example, expected value level "5").

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead performance can be executed in one of the following patterns: a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern that indicates the expected value for a time-saving hit, a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern that indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and a look-ahead common hit performance pattern that indicates the expected value for a hit (jackpot or time-saving hit). When the look-ahead performance is executed in the look-ahead common hit performance pattern, the player can enjoy the excitement of wondering whether the reserved image will change to a jackpot-type look-ahead performance form or a time-saving hit-type look-ahead performance form, which can increase the excitement.

The form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a time-saving hit does not necessarily have to change one by one in the order of "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star" and may change, for example, from "yellow pentagon (common hit type pre-reading presentation form) → red triangle (big hit type pre-reading presentation form)" or from "green hexagon (common hit type pre-reading presentation form) → triangular star (time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form)". Also, the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a hit does not necessarily have to start from the blue square which has the lowest expected value and may start from, for example, a red circle.

In addition, the form of the reserved image indicating the expected value for a win does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern for that change.

In addition, in Fig. 62, the common hit system pre-reading performance form is changed to change the expected value derived from any hit (big hit or time-saving hit) or to change the expected hit from an unknown state to a big hit, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the pre-reading performance shown below may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before changing to the big hit confirmed pre-reading performance form, the expected value level may also be changed.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a common hit type pre-reading performance form to a guaranteed jackpot pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a common hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form.

[1-10-4. Modification of common hit type pre-reading performance form]
In addition, the common win type pre-reading presentation form, which indicates the possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving win as the form of the reserved image, is not necessarily limited to a form that is expressed by both a color indicating the expected value for a jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value for a time-saving win. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form may be provided. When a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form is provided, it becomes possible to have a sense of expectation for both a jackpot and a time-saving win, and since the expected values of each are unknown, it becomes possible to play with a sense of expectation for future changes in the presentation form, thereby improving interest.

Figures 63(a) to 63(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win look-ahead presentation to a big win look-ahead presentation. Note that the look-ahead winning type presentation patterns shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(d) corresponds to "31H" in Figure 57 or Figure 58.

Figures 64(a) to 64(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win look-ahead presentation to a time-saving win look-ahead presentation. The look-ahead winning type presentation patterns shown in Figures 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 64(a) to 64(d) corresponds to "31H" in Figure 57 or Figure 58.

In Figures 63(a) and 64(a), the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412 display a normal pending image in which no preview performance is being performed, and the third pending area 413 and the fourth pending area 414 display no pending image, only a frame.

In FIG. 63(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413, following the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both Figures 63(b) and 64(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a dedicated common winning type pre-reading performance form, for example, a shining form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

Figure 63 (c) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 63 (b), and shows that the dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form displayed in the third reserve area 413 in Figure 63 (b) has been shifted in the same form to the second reserve area 412.

Similarly, Figure 64 (c) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 64 (b), and shows that the dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form displayed in the third reserve area 413 in Figure 64 (b) has been shifted in the same form to the second reserve area 412.

Figure 63 (d) is an image in which the reserved position has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 63 (c), and shows that the form of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 63 (c) has changed from a special common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a red triangle (expected value level of a jackpot "4") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

On the other hand, Figure 64 (d) is an image in which the reserved position has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 64 (c), and shows that the form of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 64 (c) has changed from a special common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a white circle (expected value level for time-saving hits of "4") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

In this way, even if the look-ahead presentation form is expressed as a dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form, the player can be entertained by wondering whether the dedicated common win type look-ahead presentation form will change to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form or a time-saving win type look-ahead presentation form, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[1-11. Signals output to outside the device]
Next, a signal output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer (not shown) provided on each island) will be described. Note that, in this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described, but it is also possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, various signals such as "prize ball information 1," "door/frame open," "external information 1" to "external information 8," "prize ball information 2," and "security." However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be other signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, or the machine may be configured so that none of these signals are output.

Figure 65 is a table showing an example of the output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Figure 65, a "prize ball information 1" signal is output from CN1, a "door/frame open" signal is output from CH2, signals for "external information 1" to "external information 8" are output from CH3 to CH10 respectively, a "prize ball information 2" signal is output from CH11, and a "security" signal is output from CH12. The output conditions for signals from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in Figure 65.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained using the "prize ball information 1" signal as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the "prize ball information 1" signal is output for 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out.

Figure 66 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal, one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time a prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large prize opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out, when a game ball enters a start opening (first start opening 120 or second start opening 140 (both see FIG. 4)), for example, 3 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the general prize opening 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, 4 prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs the signal "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the signal "prize ball information 1" for, for example, 120 msec, at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on, starting from the previous output of the signal "prize ball information 1". Note that outputting the signal "prize ball information 1" at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is merely an example, and it may be any time between when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on and when it is turned off. Also, outputting the signal "prize ball information 1" each time 10 prize balls are paid out or for 120 msec is merely an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal "prize ball information 1" can be set appropriately.

Next, we will explain an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside. The "security" signal is a signal that is mainly output when an error occurs.

Figure 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, for each error name, the table shows the trigger for the error in the main control circuit 200, the trigger for the error to be released in the main control circuit 200 (see Figure 6), the output time of the "security" signal (shown as "security signal" in Figure 67), and any notes.

Note that the first pachinko game machine does not have a large prize opening for small wins, but for the sake of convenience, Figure 67 also describes an abnormal prize winning error at the large prize opening for small wins. Also, in Figure 67, the large prize opening 131 is described as a large prize opening for big wins.

The outline of the errors shown in FIG. 67 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 67 may be judged to be errors. Examples of errors that are judged to be errors that are not shown in FIG. 67 include a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined time or more, a large prize opening entry/ejection abnormality error when there are undischarged game balls inside the large prize opening (large prize opening for a large win or large prize opening for a small win) or when a prize is won inside the large prize opening when the large prize opening is not open, and a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined time. In addition, for example, if a specific area is provided within the jackpot large prize opening, and the special probability control is executed after the jackpot game control ends based on the game ball passing through the specific area while the jackpot game control is being executed, it is preferable to configure it so that an error is determined when there is an abnormal passage to the specific area, or when the game ball passes through the specific area even though there are no game balls yet to be discharged inside the jackpot large prize opening.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub-CPU 301, which receives the fraud detection-related command, executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The following briefly explains the control by the main CPU 201 and sub-CPU 301 (see Figure 6 for both), using the example of an abnormal winning error at the big win slot.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, after the initial power is turned on, if one winning is detected before the first big win opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening, and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. It also sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the type of error, so that an external device (e.g., hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or island computer (not shown)) can know that an error has occurred by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot know the content of the error. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, the output time of the "security" signal may be changed depending on the content of the error, so that an external device that receives the "security" signal can know the content of the error.

When the sub-CPU 301 (see Figure 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, an abnormal winning error at the large winning port for a jackpot, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below, and when, for example, 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection-related command, it terminates the notification control shown below.
Notification control for displaying, for example, the text "Abnormal winning error at large prize port" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control to output a voice such as "There is an abnormal winning error at the large prize port" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, Figure 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for lighting up all of the LEDs 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) in red via the LED control circuit 306.

If a power outage occurs, for example, before 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub-CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, if the sub-CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal winning error at the large jackpot winning port while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of an abnormal winning error at the large jackpot winning port, it will re-execute the above-mentioned notification control.

Next, the signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming status will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of the output conditions of signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming status. In FIG. 68, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the signals output vary depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during normal gameplay (other than during a big win or small win, other than during a special probability or time-saving mode), no signals are output, during low-probability time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3" and "External Information 7" are output, and during high-probability time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3", "External Information 5", and "External Information 7" are output. Also, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gameplay state, the signals "External Information 3" and "External Information 6" are output during a high-probability non-time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win).

In this way, by outputting different signals according to the game status controlled by the main CPU 201, devices outside the machine that can receive the signals (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) can grasp the game status of the pachinko game machine that is the source of the external information.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small win game control process (in the normal game state) is the same as the signal output during the normal game state (other than during a big win or small win, other than during a special mode or time-saving mode). Similarly, the signal output during the small win game control process (in the low-probability time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the low-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win), the signal output during the small win game control process (in the high-probability time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win), and the signal output during the small win game control process (in the high-probability non-time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability non-time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win). In other words, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) cannot know whether or not the small win game control process is being executed in the pachinko game machine that sent the external information. However, instead of this, the signal output during the small win game control process may be made different from the signal output when the small win game control process is not being executed, so that an external device capable of receiving the signal can know whether or not the small win game control process is being executed in the pachinko game machine that sent the external information.

Also, during the low-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or a small win), during the high-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or a small win), during small win game control processing (low-probability time-saving game state), and during small win game control processing (high-probability time-saving game state) shown in FIG. 68, the signal is output during execution of time-saving control. In this case, it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when both the electric support control and the special chart shortening control are being executed, or it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when only the electric support control of the electric support control and the special chart shortening control is being executed, or it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when only the special chart shortening control of the electric support control and the special chart shortening control is being executed.

In addition, in the above description of the first pachinko gaming machine, it is assumed that the main CPU can control the time-shortened game state A, the time-shortened game state B, and the time-shortened game state C (the time-shortened game state function A, the time-shortened game state function B, and the time-shortened game state function C are installed), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the pachinko gaming machine may be equipped with only one of the time-shortened game state functions A, B, and C, and not equipped with the other functions (for example, the time-shortened game state function B and the time-shortened game state function C). Also, the pachinko gaming machine may be equipped with only two of the functions of the time-saving play state A, the time-saving play state B, and the time-saving play state C (for example, the time-saving play state A function and the time-saving play state B or the time-saving play state C function), and not equipped with the other functions (for example, the time-saving play state B or the time-saving play state C function).

In addition, for example, in pachinko gaming machines called ST machines, where the probability of ...

[2. The second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be described. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type one pachinko game machine called digital pachinko. However, the second pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in parallel. Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

In the following description of the second pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible the description of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the first pachinko gaming machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 1184 (see FIG. 70 described below) to the outside of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described below) and the island computers (not shown) installed on each island).

In addition, when describing the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, when describing the configuration with reference to new drawings adopted in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has functions and the like in common with the first pachinko gaming machine.

Incidentally, pachinko gaming machines that can changeably display the first and second special symbols in parallel include pachinko gaming machines in which, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are on hold, the start conditions of the second special symbol are established with priority over the start conditions of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "priority change machines"), and pachinko gaming machines in which the start conditions are established in the order of winning, including the first and second start ports (hereinafter referred to as "sequential change machines").

[2-1. Game board unit]
69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 69, the game board unit 1010 has a play area 1105 formed thereon.

Note that the various components (e.g., first starting hole 1120, etc.) arranged in the play area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine (see Figure 4), but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 1110, a center role 1115 located approximately in the center of the game area 1105, a first start port 1120, a general winning port 1122, a passing gate unit 1125, a special electric role unit 1130, a second start port 1140A, 1140B, a normal electric role unit 1145, a small win unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown) located behind the game board unit 1010. Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description of the LED unit 1160 of the second pachinko game machine will be omitted.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. A guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted thereon. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the gaming area 1105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 1105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 1100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 1100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 1100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number). The play area 1105 is defined by the guide rail 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the play area 1105.

(Center role)
The center device 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 1006 toward the game area 1105 flows down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107. A game ball flowing down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 1100. If the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 1106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 1107.

The center device 1115 also has a warp entrance 1117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 1117 are configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center device 1115. The stage 1118 is formed below and in front of the display area of the display device 1007 so that the game balls can roll left and right. The stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 1119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 1118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 1119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 1120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 1119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 1120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 1117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 1117 but do not enter the chance entrance 1119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 1120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 1007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 1120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 1120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 1120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 1120, start information for the first special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, up to four) are held. When the start conditions are met, the held start information is used in the winning determination process for the first special pattern. When a game ball enters the first start hole 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 1120 is not limited to this.

(General Prize Winners)
The general winning openings 1122 are arranged in a plurality of locations on the lower left side of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that game balls hit from the left can win (game balls hit from the right have difficulty or no chance of winning). When a game ball wins in a general winning opening 1122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 1122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 1122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The pass gate unit 1125 is located in the right area 1107 and is a unit that integrates a pass gate 1126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a pass gate switch 1127 (see Figure 70 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 1126.

When the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 1126, the start information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal pattern is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved start information of the normal pattern is used for the winning determination process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 1126, no prize balls are paid out. The passing gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left area 1106 instead of or in addition to the right area 1107.

The pass gate 1126 may also function as a trigger for activating the consecutive operation device of the special feature. In other words, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (such as a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the consecutive operation device of the special feature are activated, but when a stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating a jackpot is derived, the condition device may be activated but the consecutive operation device of the special feature may not be activated. Then, assuming that the condition device is activated, the consecutive operation device of the special feature may be activated when a gaming ball passes through the pass gate 1126, i.e., when a gaming ball is detected by the pass gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described below), thereby transitioning to the jackpot gaming state.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 is a unit body that integrates a big winning hole 1131 for a big winning, a big winning hole count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) for detecting the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning hole 1131 for a big winning, and a special electric accessory 1133. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107.

The big winning opening 1131 for big wins is arranged so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big winning opening 1131 for big wins described above, a big winning opening for big wins that can win game balls hit from the left may be arranged, or a big winning opening for big wins that can win game balls may be arranged above the center device 1115.

The big jackpot winning opening 1131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) to enter (pass through) when the machine is controlled to a big jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the big jackpot winning opening count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 1131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134. The special electric device 1133, i.e., the special electric shutter 1134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) through the big winning opening 1131 for a big win, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter (pass) through the big winning opening 1131 for a big win. The transition from the closed state to the open state of the big winning opening 1131 for a big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big winning game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big winning opening 1131 for a big win transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds.

(Second starting hole)
In this embodiment, the second starting holes 1140A and 1140B are arranged in the game area 1105 as the second starting holes, and both of these second starting holes 1140A and 1140B are designed so that a game ball hit to the right can win (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win the second starting hole 1140A and/or the second starting hole 1140B.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 1140A, it is detected by the second start hole switch 1141A (see FIG. 70 described below). Also, when a game ball enters the second start hole 1140B, it is detected by the second start hole switch 1141B (see FIG. 70 described below). Regardless of whether the game ball enters the second start hole 1140A or 1140B, this triggers the process of determining whether the second special symbol has been won.

When the second start port switches 1141A, 1141B (see FIG. 70 described below) detect the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start port 1140A, 1140B, the start information of the second special pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved start information is used for the winning determination process of the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second start port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 1140A, 1140B is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, two flow paths 1107a, 1107b are formed on the downstream side of the flow direction of the game ball that is hit from the right but does not enter the big winning opening 1131 for the big win. The game ball that is hit from the right and does not enter the big winning opening 1131 for the big win and flows further downstream is sorted by the branching nail 1108 shown in FIG. 69, for example, to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that game balls sorted into the upper flow path 1107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. However, it is not essential to configure most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a to win at the second starting port 1140A. For example, it may be configured so that almost no game balls can be expected to win at the second starting port 1140A, or it may be configured so that a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win. Note that game balls that flow down the upper flow path 1107a but do not win at the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged outside the machine from the outlet 1178.

The second starting hole 1140B is positioned so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can enter, but details will be given later in the explanation of the normal electric role unit 1145.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the lower flow path 1107b side, and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 1140B, and the switch is the second start hole switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the winning hole is the second start hole 1140B, and for example, the first start hole may be the winning hole.

The normal electric device 1146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth, and a normal power solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described later) that operates the normal power shutter 1147. The normal electric device 1146, i.e., the normal power shutter 1147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second starting hole 1140B or is easy, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting hole 1140B or is difficult. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth, a movable member made of, for example, a blade member, known as an electric tulip, may be used. Also, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and may include a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, etc.

(Small hit unit)
The small win unit 1150 is a unitary body that integrates a small win large prize opening 1151, a small win large prize opening count switch 1152 (see Figure 70 described below) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the small win large prize opening 1151, a small win shutter 1153 that can move back and forth, and a small win solenoid 1154 that can operate this small win shutter 1153.

The small win shutter 1153 is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the large winning opening 1151 for small wins, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 1151 for small wins, by moving it back and forth.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening for small wins 1151 when it is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the large prize opening for small wins count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70 described below). When the large prize opening for small wins count switch 1152 detects a game ball, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening for small wins 1151 is not limited to 10.

The small win unit 1150 is located on the lower flow path 1107b downstream of the normal electric role unit 1145. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric role 1146, even if the small win large prize opening 1151 is open, the game ball that flows down the lower flow path 1107b will enter the second starting port 1140B located upstream before reaching the small win large prize opening 1151, making it difficult (or impossible) for the ball to enter the small win large prize opening 1151.

In this embodiment, the large prize opening 1131 for the large prize and the large prize opening 1151 for the small prize are provided separately, but this is not limited to this, and the large prize opening that is opened when the large prize game control process is executed and the large prize opening that is opened when the small prize game control process is executed may be the same large prize opening.

(Outlet)
The outlet 1178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 1105 but have not won any of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 1120, the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B, the big winning hole 1131 for big wins, the general winning hole 1122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 1178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning holes 1122 or between the normal electric role unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, so that game balls flowing down the game area 1105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 as described above. This back unit includes a group of performance-use accessories 1058 such as movable accessories controlled by a sub-control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70 described later). The group of performance-use accessories 1058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, for example. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 1058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but they will be described in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 1400, and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and is equipped with a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, and a backup capacitor 1207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 1201 is connected to the main ROM 1202, the main RAM 1203, the initial reset circuit 1204, etc. The main CPU 1201 has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors operation and a function to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 1201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 1203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 1200 also includes an I/O port 1205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 1300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 1161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 1162, the first special symbol display unit 1163, the second special symbol display unit 1164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 1165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 1166, the sure-change notification display unit 1167, the time-saving notification display unit 1168, the normal power solenoid 1148, the special power solenoid 1135, and the small win solenoid 1154. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 1170 and the error notification monitor 1172. The main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 1172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., for example, in a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function described below. Note that the setting change code may be configured to display a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 1200 is also connected to the first start port switch 1121, the second start port switches 1141A and 1141B, the pass gate switch 1127, the big win large prize port count switch 1132, the general prize port switch 1123, and the small win large prize port count switch 1152. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 1200 via the I/O port 1205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 1184 used to transmit data to a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall, a setting key socket 1174 into which a setting key 1174a is inserted that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and a RAM clear switch 1176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing the setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key slot 1174 and the RAM clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the arcade manager. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key slot 1174 and the RAM clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key slot 1174 and the RAM clear switch 1176, so that the arcade manager can touch the setting key slot 1174 and/or the RAM clear switch 1176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the arcade manager to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key slot 1174 and the RAM clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 1400 or the power supply circuit 1450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key slot 1174 or the RAM clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 1300 includes a sub-CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, a sound control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, a role control circuit 1307, and a command input port 1308. The sub-control circuit 1300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in Fig. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to effect buttons 54 (see Fig. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the second pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 1301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 1301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub-CPU 1301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. In response to a sound generation command from the sub-CPU 1301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 1058). The reel control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 1307 selects one operation pattern from among multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 1301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from among multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 1301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 1082 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 1006 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 1200, it sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 1180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 1182. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

The power supply circuit 1450 is connected to a power switch 1095 and other components. The power switch 1095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 71 to 75. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which neither the probability variable control nor the time-saving control is executed, a high-probability time-saving game state in which both the probability variable control and the time-saving control are executed, a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is executed but the time-saving control is not executed, and a low-probability time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is not executed but the time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 1201 is capable of progressing the game in any of these game states. However, the game states progressed by the control of the main CPU 1201 are not limited to these, and it is also possible to prevent any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state from progressing. For example, it is possible to allow the game to progress in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, and not allow the game to progress in the high-probability non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, hitting to the left is the normal game mode, and in the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, hitting to the right is the normal game mode. The sub-CPU 1301 executes control to display the normal game mode (e.g., whether to hit to the right or left) in, for example, the display area of the display device 1007.

[2-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 71 shows an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the hit determination process for the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78 described later), that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "time-saving hit", "small hit", "big hit" or "miss" is a hit based on a random number value for big hit determination extracted when a game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B. In this embodiment, the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the first special symbol are a "time-saving hit", a "big hit", and a "miss", and a "small hit" is not included in the objects of the lottery. In contrast, the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are a "time-saving hit", a "small hit", a "big hit", and a "miss". However, a "small hit" may be included in the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the random number value for determining a jackpot is a random number value used in the process of determining whether or not a special symbol has won. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a jackpot is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" in the hit determination process for the first special symbol based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. The hit determination table for the first special symbol specifies, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for determining a big hit. In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "small hit" and the corresponding small hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "big hit" and the corresponding big hit determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 0 and 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "time-saving hit" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 409 and 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "jackpot" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Also, if the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 614 and 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability variable flag is off during hit determination processing for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during hit determination processing for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "small hit" and determines the determination value data as "small hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is off during hit determination processing for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability of a big win flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining a big win is any of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

Also, for example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "small hit" and determines the determination value data as "small hit determination value data." Also, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Furthermore, if the probability of a big win flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining a big win is any of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines it as a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In this way, in this embodiment, of the random number values for determining a jackpot that are generated in the range of 0 to 65535, for example, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the hit determination process for the second special symbol) is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and miss determination value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the special bonus flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol) is assigned to miss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and miss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF), it is possible to change the probability of a jackpot without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data) by simply narrowing (or widening) the width of the miss judgment value data by the same amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is widened (or narrowed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed is made different from the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, thereby adding variety to the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, by making the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed higher than the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become monotonous.

However, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed may be made higher than the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving play state when a "time-saving hit" is won during a time-saving play state, if a "time-saving hit" is won just before the end of the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is effectively extended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit" whether the special-hit flag is on or off. However, when the special-hit flag is off (normal game state, time-shortened game state), the main CPU 1201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit", but when the special-hit flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control the game to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit".

[2-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 72 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selected symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopped symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 or the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B and the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data (i.e., when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78 described below). The "selected symbol command" is a command for designating a symbol that is determined according to the result of the special symbol winning/losing determination process, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating a symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 1201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 2 and 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 10 and 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, any value from 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z10" as the selected symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command.

When small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 executes small win game control processing. In the small win game control processing, for example, the small win shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated to execute control so that the small win large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened so that the game ball can enter (pass through) the small win large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) or can be easily opened, and the prize ball can be paid out.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selected symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 30 and 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selected symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected, for example, as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71) is referenced to determine the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referenced to determine the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but this is not limited to this. For example, the hit/lose of the special symbol, the selected symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to a selection symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 derive the display mode of a time-saving hit, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss based on the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 1302 of the sub-control circuit 1300.

[2-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 of the second pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the winning game state and/or the subsequent game state in response to the selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of the special symbol (i.e., when executing the winning type determination process of S1036 in FIG. 78 described later). The winning game state shown in FIG. 73 indicates the big win game state or the small win game state. In addition, the subsequent game state indicates the game state after the winning game state ends. However, if the result of the winning determination process of the special symbol is a time-saving winning, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the winning game state, so that the subsequent game state indicates the C time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 10. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8," the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 50. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z9," the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the above-mentioned time-saving hit to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then sets the time-saving flag on and the determined number of time-saving times without controlling to the big hit game state, and can control to the C time-saving game state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the game is not controlled to the hit game state, so the mode of the hit game state is not determined. In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times set may be different depending on the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving turns that is set varies depending on the selected symbol command that is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to provide variety to the progress of the game thereafter, and to prevent a decline in interest.

As described above, when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving game state even if the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-saving win". For example, even if the probability variable flag is on (high probability game state), the main CPU 1201 performs a lottery for a "time-saving win" as shown in FIG. 72, and when the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won to the special pattern display units 1163 and 1164, but does not control to the C time-saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 may perform a lottery for a "time-saving win" even if the probability variable flag is on, and when the result of the winning judgment process is a "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 may forcibly derive the display mode of a loss to the special pattern display units 1163 and 1164. Furthermore, if the probability of winning flag is on, the random number value for determining a jackpot may not be assigned time-saving hit determination value data, i.e., a win determination process may be performed in which the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery result.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable flag is on, the game is configured not to transition to the C time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the probability variable flag is on but the time-saving flag is off, if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the game may transition to a high-probability time-saving game state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened as one time as the mode of the small hit game state. When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the small hit described above to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then sets the determined number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, and the game state can be controlled to a small hit game state. Note that when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", after the small hit game state ends, the main CPU 1201 does not change either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag, and returns to the game state immediately before being controlled to the small hit game state.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the winning game state and the subsequent game state are determined as follows:

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 10 rounds, and as the mode of the subsequent game state, determines that only the high probability flag out of the high probability flag and the time-saving flag is set to on, and determines that the number of high probability flags is set to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control the game state to a high probability non-time-saving game state.

When the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", or "z12", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10, 4, or 10, respectively, as the mode of the jackpot game state. In addition, in each case, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of probability change rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls it to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to a high-probability time-saving game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and when it is "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. In addition, the number of time-saving times to be set is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 controls the display mode of the above-mentioned jackpot to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls it to the jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it can be controlled to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state. In addition, the mode of time-saving control in the high-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as "time-saving performance") is preferably the same as the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state, but may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the main CPU 1201 does not set either the hit game state or the subsequent game state. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 1201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the previous game state.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), neither the state of the winning game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set as described above, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 73. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 73 to clearly show that, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", neither the state of the winning game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 71, and determines the hit/loss determination value data based on the random number value for jackpot determination extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B (performs hit/loss determination), and determines the hit/loss ("time-saving hit", "small hit", "jackpot", or "miss"). After that, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table in FIG. 72, and determines the selected symbol command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B and the hit/loss determination value data, and determines the type of display mode (for example, the type of time-saving hit, the type of jackpot) to be derived to the special symbol display section 1163, 1164. Note that the above winning/losing judgment and selection of the symbol command are performed when the variable display of the special symbol begins, but this does not exclude the possibility of performing this between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). In other words, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state. In this way, the positioning of the "jackpot" can be increased by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state. For example, even if you win a "jackpot", it will be possible to suppress the decline in interest that may occur when you are at a disadvantage compared to not winning the "jackpot" (winning a "time-saving jackpot").

In addition, instead of making the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving play state higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving play state, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving play state may be made higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving play state. In this way, by making the C time-saving play state more advantageous to the player than the A time-saving play state, the positioning of a "time-saving hit" can be increased. For example, even if a long period of time continues without a "jackpot", if a "time-saving hit" is won, the game will be controlled to the relatively advantageous C time-saving play state, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 74 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. FIG. 75 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start of the second pachinko game machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 of the second pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 is shown for convenience of understanding. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first start hole 1120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second start hole 1140A, 1140B. The variation pattern tables of the special symbols in FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 are tables that are referred to when executing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol in S1037 in FIG. 78 described later.

In normal game mode, where hitting from the left is the normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low starts shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low starts in FIG. 74, the main CPU 1201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 1120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 1301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 1201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 1301 may decide.

On the other hand, in a game state where right-hand play is the normal game mode, i.e., in a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, or a low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table for special symbols for high starts shown in, for example, FIG. 75.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set a look-ahead flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high starts, but this is not limited to this.

As shown in Figures 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value. However, this is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start in FIG. 75, the expected number of times the special symbol is variably displayed per unit time is larger than when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start in FIG. 74. In particular, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely long period of time, for example, approximately 600,000 msec (for example, long fluctuation A to C). On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for only an extremely short period of time, for example, 1,000 msec (for example, super-fast fluctuation).

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub-CPU 1301. The sub-CPU 1301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in Figures 74 and 75, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbols that are determined may be different for each setting value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in a normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a low start (see FIG. 74), and in a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, and a low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a high start (see FIG. 75), but this is not limited to this. For example, as the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a high start, multiple fluctuation pattern tables with different expected values for the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time may be provided, and the table to be referenced when determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern may be different depending on the type of time-saving game state, for example.

In addition, the time-saving hit type reaches A and B shown in the "Notes" column of Figures 74 and 75 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot type reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine will not be described, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 stores a normal symbol winning determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol winning type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 1201 then determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same way as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric device 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the same as those executed by the main CPU 1201 except for the special symbol control process executed in S39 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and the other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will not be described. Note that the special symbol control process in the second pachinko game machine includes the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine (e.g., the jackpot end process (Figs. 42 and 86)), but the special symbol control process will be described again below, including the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine, with the step numbers changed.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 1201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process to check the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. If the reserved number of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and if the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. If the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, and the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol, the sub-CPU 1301 performs a demo display performance.

Although the second pachinko game machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub-CPU 1301 sets one of the first and second special symbols as the main special symbol and the other as the sub-special symbol, and mainly controls the presentation of the main special symbol. In this embodiment, in the normal game state in which left-handed play is the regular game mode, the first special symbol is the main special symbol, and in the game state in which right-handed play is the regular game mode (for example, high-probability time-saving game state, high-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. The sub-CPU 1301 then performs variably displaying decorative symbols and displaying characters, etc., for the main special symbol, as well as sound presentation, etc., for the main special symbol. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub-special symbol is, for example, a jackpot, the main special symbol may be displayed while the sub-special symbol is displayed. In addition, in a low-probability time-saving game state among game states in which right-hitting is the regular game mode, another display image (for example, a countdown display of the remaining number of time-saving turns until the time-saving game state ends) may be displayed instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

If it is determined in S1002 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S1002 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1003. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S1002.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that it is time for the second special symbol to begin to change display (if S1002 returns YES), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1004.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1003, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1004, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

If it is determined in S1005 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S1005 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1006. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1005 that it is time for the first special symbol to begin to change display (if S1005 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1007.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1006, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

If it is determined in S1008 that it is not time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S1008 returns NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S1008 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the second special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1009, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S1010, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

If it is determined in S1011 that it is not time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S1011 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S1011 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the first special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt prohibited period.

In this way, in this embodiment, the special pattern management process described below is executed in the following order of priority: when any process related to the second special pattern is being executed, when any process related to the first special pattern is being executed, when no process related to the second special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started, when no process related to the first special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started.

[2-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1003, S1006, S1009, and S1012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76) will be described with reference to Fig. 77. Fig. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special pattern management process is called and executed in S1003 or S1009 during the special pattern control process, the second special pattern is the target of processing, and if the special pattern management process is called and executed in S1006 or S1012 during the special pattern control process, the first special pattern is the target of processing.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 1201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S1021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S1021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1023. The main CPU 1201 performs the process from S1023 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S1023 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S1024 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to Figures 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S1025 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 81 and 82. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S1026 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. This S1028 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processes of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). If the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004; if it is called in S1006, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1007; if it is called in S1009, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1010; and if it is called in S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described with reference to Fig. 78. Fig. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko game machine.

When the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S1031 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S1031 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so that it does not proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is judged as YES (i.e., even if the start condition of the special symbol is met), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, i.e., it is on (S1032 is judged as NO), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol pause flag is not OFF, i.e., is ON (if S1032 is a NO determination), as described above, the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed, and the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1032 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S1032 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special pattern. After executing the process of S1033, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the hit determination process for the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table for the special symbol (see FIG. 71) and using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is determined to be a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a miss, and the second special symbol is determined to be a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a miss. In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time-saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a time-saving hit, sets the small hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit, and sets the big hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1035. The time-saving hit flag is turned off when transitioning to the C time-saving play state, the small hit flag is turned off when the small hit play state begins, and the big hit flag is turned off when the big hit play state begins.

In the process of determining whether or not the special symbol is a hit (see S1034), first, a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and if this process determines that it is not a big hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit is performed, and if this process determines that it is not a small hit, a process of determining whether or not it is a time-saving hit is performed, and if this process determines that it is not a time-saving hit, it is determined that it is a miss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referenced, and the random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "selection symbol command" or "symbol designation command". In this embodiment, since there is only one type of miss, it is not necessary to determine the stopping symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, but multiple types of misses may be provided and the stopping symbol may be determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is, for example, a win (time-saving win, small win, or big win). In this process, the win type determination table (see FIG. 73) is referenced and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1035). Note that in this embodiment, there are multiple types of wins, but there may be only one type of big win or one type of time-saving win. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of misses may be provided. After executing the process of S1036, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table (see Figs. 74 and 75), for example, according to the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S1034), the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection, etc. In this embodiment, in a normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see Fig. 74), and in a game state in which right-handed hitting is the regular game mode (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, a low-probability time-saving game state), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see Fig. 75). After executing processing of S1037, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see Figures 74 and 75) is referenced, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1037) is determined as the variation time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S1024 in FIG. 77) is performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. After executing the process of S1040, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs game status management processing. In this processing, the main CPU 1201 performs update processing of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., the probability bonus flag, the time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the processing of S1041, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interruption prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game status management process (S1041) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S1042)) within the interruption prohibited section.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 79 and Fig. 80, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1024 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 77) will be described. Fig. 79 and Fig. 80 are a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the second pachinko game machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called at S1024 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called at S1024 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Also, in the special symbol variable display end process described below, the special symbol that is the processing target is simply referred to as the "special symbol," and the special symbol that is not the processing target is referred to as the "other special symbol."

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S1051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S1051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special pattern pause flag is off based on the special pattern pause flag value loaded in S1052.

If it is determined in S1053 that the special pattern pause flag is not off, i.e., is on (if S1053 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern variable display end process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1053 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S1053 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S1025 in FIG. 77) is performed after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed. After executing the process of S1054, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1056.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times the special symbol game has been played), and the count is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided for managing the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of remaining times of the special symbol game or the number of remaining times of the time-saving game, or the determined symbol counter may be used to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state. After executing the process of S1056, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit.

In S1057, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be not a small hit (if S1057 returns a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be a small hit (if S1057 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping while the small win game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S1058, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot.

In S1059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be not a big hit (if S1059 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be a jackpot (if S1059 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting while the jackpot game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (if S1061 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variably display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (if S1061 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 increments the value of the determined symbol number counter by 1. After executing the process of S1062, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, a test firing signal is output to the outside. This test firing signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped as a miss. After executing the process of S1063, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes and sets the hit flag of the other special symbol to a miss. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol being processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped as a miss even if the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the result of the hit determination process for this other special symbol is a jackpot. After executing the process of S1064, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to clear the working area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing processing in S1065, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set a predetermined fixed waiting time on the timer for the other special symbol. In this processing, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a miss. After executing processing in S1066, the main CPU 1201 moves the processing to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2." After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1068, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end processing of this embodiment, if the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol being processed, the result of the hit determination processing for this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot, and the other special symbol is being variable displayed, processing is performed to forcibly change the variable display of the other special symbol to a miss.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to Figures 81 and 82, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1025 during the special symbol management process (see Figure 77) will be described. Figures 81 and 82 are flow charts showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko game machine.

When this special symbol game judgment process is called at S1025 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game judgment process is called at S1025 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S1071 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S1071 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1072.

At S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S1072 that the reel is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S1072 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1072 that the reel is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S1072 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1075.

At S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a small win has occurred, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win.

If it is determined in S1073 that the special symbol is not a small win, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss (if S1073 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1073 that a small win has occurred, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win (if S1073 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing or the small win game control processing. In this processing, signals are generated and updated that are output via the external terminal board 1184 to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 for both) or the island computer (not shown). Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After performing processing in S1075, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the special chance flag, special chance counter, time-saving flag, and time-saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening (for example, the large prize opening for large prizes 1131 for large prizes or the large prize opening for small prizes 1151 for small prizes) to be opened (S1077), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1078), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S1080), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S1081). In addition, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079) to switch the control state number, the large prize opening opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. The main CPU 1201 then ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1074 during the special symbol game determination process (see Figs. 81 and 82) will be described with reference to Fig. 83. Fig. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game end process in the second pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs a time-saving management process (S1091). Details of this time-saving management process are similar to those described with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine, so a detailed description will be omitted. After executing the process of S1091, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed in this manner, the next special symbol game can be played. After executing the process of S1092, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1094, the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 81).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a miss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the sure win flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 84, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 77) will be described. Fig. 84 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S1101 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S1101 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the large prize opening counter value. When a large prize opening counter is being executed, the large prize opening counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds executed in a large prize game state. When a small prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening counter is a counter that counts the number of times a small prize game control process is executed. The count value of the large prize opening counter (large prize opening counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process of S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of times a large prize opening (e.g., the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize or the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize) has been opened is at the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize that is opened in a large prize game state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds, as shown in the prize type determination table (see FIG. 73), for example. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize that is opened in a small prize game state is 1 time, for example.

If it is determined in S1103 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened has reached the upper limit (if S1103 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104), the jackpot end process (see S1028 in FIG. 77) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S1104, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S1103 returns NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large prize opening count counter. After executing the process of S1107, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to open. In this process, if a large prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening for a large prize 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the large prize opening to open, and if a small prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening for a small prize 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process of S1108, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various settings related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize openings (large prize openings for large prizes 1131 for large prizes and large prize openings for small prizes 1151 for small prizes) are opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize openings, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize openings, the number of winning balls when the large prize openings are opened, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize openings are opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the large prize opening control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small prize opening 1151 is opened when the small prize opening control process is executed. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize openings are opened multiple times in one round or small prize opening control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize openings are opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when the small prize game control process is being executed. The maximum number of winning balls entering the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 5 balls when the small prize game control process is being executed. The number of winning balls entering the large prize opening is set to, for example, 10 balls for both the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize opening for a large prize opening for a small prize opening and the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize opening. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the large prize opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the large prize opening. In this process, the process for generating the opening and closing control data for the large prize openings (large prize opening for large wins 1131 and large prize opening for small wins 1151) is performed. After executing the process of S1110, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S1027 in FIG. 77) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S1111, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 85, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 77) will be described. Fig. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the second pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening control process is called in S1027 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening control process is called in S1027 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S1121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S1121 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening for big wins 1131, large prize opening for small wins 1151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening entry counter (for example, the large prize opening count switch for big wins 1132, the large prize opening count switch for small wins 1152 (see FIG. 70 for both)) that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings is the maximum number of winning balls. The large prize opening entry counter value counted by the large prize opening entry counter is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203.

If it is determined in S1122 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large wins, large prize opening 1151 for small wins) is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S1122 returns NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1123.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1122 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large wins, large prize opening 1151 for small wins) is the maximum number of winning balls (if S1122 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large prizes, large prize opening 1151 for small prizes) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various settings process related to the large prize openings (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening (large prize opening for large win 1131, large prize opening for small win 1151) has not elapsed (if S1123 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large prizes, large prize opening 1151 for small prizes) has elapsed (if S1123 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to close the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for a large win, and large prize opening 1151 for a small win). After executing the process of S1124, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1125) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation processing (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed again after this large prize opening control processing is completed. After executing processing of S1125, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1126, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described with reference to Fig. 86. Fig. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the second pachinko game machine.

If this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, if this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

If it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S1131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, it returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S1131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (e.g., high probability flag, time-saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) are set or reset, and the values of various counters (e.g., high probability counter, time-saving counter, number of confirmed symbols counter, number of times large prize openings have been opened counter, large prize opening winning counter, ceiling counter, etc.) are set or reset. The special symbol pause flag and ceiling counter are both reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). In addition, when the high probability flag is set to ON, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to ON. As a result, in a high probability game state where the high probability flag is ON, the ceiling counter is not updated. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 set an interrupt prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited area.

[2-5. Small Hit Rush]
In the second pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small win rush can be realized. The small win rush will be described below.

As described above, the second pachinko game machine has a normal game state, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, and a low-probability time-saving game state, and the main CPU 1201 controls the game state to one of these game states. As described above, in the normal game state, hitting from the left is considered to be the regular game mode, so the first special symbol game based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 1120 is mainly executed. In the other game states (high-probability time-saving game state, high-probability non-time-saving game state, and low-probability time-saving game state), hitting from the right is considered to be the regular game mode, so the second special symbol game based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 1140A, 1140B is mainly executed. In addition, if the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 1145 is set as the first starting hole, the first special symbol game is primarily played in either the normal game state, the high probability time-saving game state, or the low probability time-saving game state, and the second special symbol game is primarily played in the high probability non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state, the frequency with which game balls enter the large winning port 1151 for small wins is increased compared to other game states (e.g., normal game state, high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), resulting in a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of winning balls, etc.) paid out per number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small win rush will be described. First, the game ball hit to the right passes through the passing gate 1126. In the high probability non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that operates the normal electric device 1146 to increase the frequency of opening the winning port (for example, the second start port 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, the big win large winning port 1131 will not be in an open state unless the big win game control process is executed, so the frequency of the second start port 1140B being in an open state in the high probability non-time-saving game state is lower than in the game state in which the time-saving control is executed. Therefore, if the small win large winning port 1151 is open, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win the small win large winning port 1151. When the game ball wins the small win large winning port 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can enter the second start port 1140A. When a game ball enters the second start port 1140A, 1140B, not only is a stop display mode that indicates a small win with a relatively high probability of 1 in 3 (approximately) as shown in the hit determination table for special symbols (see FIG. 71), but also a super-fast fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table for special symbols for high start (see FIG. 75), so that the frequency of game balls entering the large winning port 1151 for small wins is increased compared to other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state), the second start port 1140B is opened by the execution of the electric support control, and most of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b enter the second start port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small win large winning port 1151 is open, the expectation of a game ball entering the small win large winning port 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second start port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a enter the second starting port 1140A. In this way, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of prize balls) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, a left hit is considered to be the normal game mode, but if a right hit is performed, when the game ball hit from the right passes through the passing gate 1126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal pattern win is derived, the normal electric device 1146 is activated, and the game ball enters the second start port 1140B, which may open the large winning port for small wins 1151. However, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special pattern for low start (see FIG. 74), so even if the game ball enters the second start port 1140A, 1140B, the variable display of the second special pattern is performed in one of the long variations A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the large winning port for small wins 1151 is opened is extremely low. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to hit from the right in the normal game state. In addition, if the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the probability of winning a normal symbol in the normal game state may be set to 0, for example, so that there is no practical benefit to hitting to the right. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (e.g., the number of winning balls) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than the game state in which the time-saving control is executed.

In this embodiment, the small win rush occurs in a high probability non-time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the small win rush may occur in a high probability time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of the special symbol without executing electric support control.

[3. The third pachinko game machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, and there are a first route and a second route as routes until the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state. The first route is when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. The second route is when the V attacker is opened by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a "gimmick opening hit", and the game ball that entered the opened V attacker enters the V winning hole in the V attacker.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, it is not limited to this, and may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

In the following explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible explanation of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the first pachinko gaming machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 2184 (see Figure 88 described below) to outside the third pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 2186 (see Figure 88 described below) and the island computers (not shown) installed on each island).

In describing the third pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, the configuration will be described with reference to new drawings used in describing the third pachinko gaming machine, using different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 2010 of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 87. This game board unit 2010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

Note that the various components (e.g., the first starting hole 2120, etc.) arranged in the play area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine, but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 2110, a center role 2115 located approximately in the center of the game area 2105, a first start opening 2120, a second start opening 2140, a general winning opening 2122, a passing gate unit 2125, a special electric role unit 2130, a normal electric role unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 2100, and gaming nails (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the gaming area 2105, collides with the gaming nails, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 2105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is arranged behind the gaming panel 2100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 2100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 2100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number) similar to the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the play area 2105.

(Center role)
The center device 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 2006 towards the game area 2105 flows down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107. A game ball flowing down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 2107.

The center device 2115 also has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 2117 are configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center device 2115. The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower edge of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game balls can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 2119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 2118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 2119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 2120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 2119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 2120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 2117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 2117 but do not enter the chance entrance 2119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 2120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 2007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 2120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 2120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 2120, start information for the first special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, a maximum of four) is reserved. When the start conditions are met, the reserved start information is used in the winning determination process for the first special pattern. When a game ball enters the first start hole 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit from the right can win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or cannot win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit from the left may be able to win in the second starting hole 2140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 2140, it is detected by the second start hole switch 2141. When the second start hole switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 2140, start information for the second special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, up to four) are reserved. The reserved start information is used in the winning determination process for the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start hole 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 2140 is not limited to this.

(General Prize Winners)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 2123 (see Figure 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 2122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 2122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is a unit body that is an integrated unit of a passing gate 2126 that is arranged in the right area 2107 and is configured so that the game ball hit from the right side can pass through, and a passing gate switch 2127 (see FIG. 88 described later) that detects the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 2126. When the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 2126 is detected, the starting information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved various data are used for the winning judgment process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 2126, the prize ball is not paid out. The passing gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left area 2106 instead of or in addition to the right area 2107.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 is a unit body that integrates a large prize opening 2131, a large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. The special electric accessory unit 2130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 2125 in the right side area 2107.

The large prize opening 2131 is positioned so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 2131 described above, a large prize opening that allows game balls hit from the left to win may be arranged, or a large prize opening that allows game balls to win may be arranged above the center gimmick 2115.

The large prize opening 2131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) to enter (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134. The special electric device 2133, i.e., the special electric shutter 2134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the large prize opening 2131 or easily, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large prize opening 2131 or is difficult to enter. The large prize opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state when the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above. When the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the jackpot game state via the first route is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing multiple rounds of round play in which the jackpot opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 2146, and is disposed in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 2140, and the switch is the second start hole switch 2141.

The normal electric device 2146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, and a normal power solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 2147. The normal electric device 2146, i.e., the normal power shutter 2147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 2140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 2140. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, a movable member known as an electric chute may be used.

(V prize device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passing gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 comprises an opening and closing winning port 2151 opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 capable of opening and closing the opening and closing winning port 2151, a V attacker solenoid 2154 which operates the V attacker 2152 to open and close the opening and closing winning port 2151, a V attacker count switch 2153 which detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, a V winning port 2155 through which a game ball which has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass, and a V attacker count switch 2153 which detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, and a V winning port 2155 through which a game ball which has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass. The V winning device 2150 includes a V winning port switch 2156 for detecting that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 has entered (passed) the V winning port 2155, a losing port 2157 through which game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 but have not entered the V winning port 2155 can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 for opening and closing the V winning port 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 for operating the V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning port 2155, and a locking member 2160 for holding only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. The V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passing gate 2126 or in the left area 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arc-shaped member, and is normally in a closed state in which the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode is derived indicating a "hit on the opening of the special device" described below, the V attacker solenoid 2154 (see FIG. 88 described below) is activated to activate the V attacker 2152, for example, once, almost simultaneously with the end of the variable display of the special symbol. When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is in an open state in which it is open for, for example, 1800 msec. Then, while the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is open due to the activation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 per opening is, for example, 10.

The manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when a stop display mode indicating a "hit on the opening of the special feature" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be opened twice for 900 msec, or may be closed when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., one) enter the interior of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150. When the V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and increments the value of the V attacker winning counter, which is a function of the main CPU 2201. When the V attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V attacker 2152 is activated by the V attacker solenoid 2154, and the opening/closing winning port 2151 is closed, even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) that the opening/closing winning port 2151 can be opened has not elapsed.

The V attacker 2152 continues to be controlled to open when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 2155. In other words, the V winning hole 2155 is the winning hole that triggers control to a jackpot game state via the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 opens, it continues to control the opening of the V attacker 2152. In other words, it is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route. When it is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 transitions from a closed state to an open state is played for a predetermined number of rounds.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the first route, a round game is executed in which the large prize winning port 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state, whereas when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state in the first round, but a round game in which, for example, the large prize winning port 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state may be executed midway through the round game.

In addition, for example, by providing a V entry port inside the special electric device 2133 (i.e., the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in the open state), it is possible to have one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "game device open hit" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port 2155 provided inside the special electric device 2133, control is performed to the jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing port 2157 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning port 2155 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the losing port 2157 are discharged outside the machine. Note that if all game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the losing port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends.

The V shutter 2158 constantly operates in a constant manner between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 2155 and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 2155, by the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described below). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly operates in a cycle (period) of 7000 msec, repeating the operation of "closed for 6000 msec -> open for 1000 msec -> closed for 6000 msec".

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning port 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that enter the V winning device 2150. Game balls that enter the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged outside the machine from the losing port 2157. Even if multiple game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged outside the machine from the losing port 2157.

In addition, after a certain time (e.g., 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V attacker 2152 was activated, the locking member 2160 releases the game ball by the activation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball that has been released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning port 2155, and if the V winning port 2155 is open at this time, it enters (passes through) the V winning port 2155, and if the V winning port 2155 is closed at this time, it passes through the losing port 2157. Note that the locking member 2160 may not be provided and game balls that enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning port 2155 or the losing port 2157.

(Outlet)
The outlet 2178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 2105 but have not won or entered any of the various winning ports (for example, the first start port 2120, the second start port 2140, the large winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 2122 or between the special electric role unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, so that game balls flowing down the game area 2105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is used to decorate the game board unit 2010, as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and is provided with a group of performance-use accessories 2058, such as movable accessories, controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 2058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 88. Fig. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but will be described again in detail.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 2300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read-write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 2201 is connected to the main ROM 2202, the main RAM 2203, the initial reset circuit 2204, etc. The main CPU 2201 has built-in functions such as a WDT that monitors operation and a function for preventing fraud.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 2201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 has a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, this is not limited to this, and any readable and writable storage medium will do.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 2200 also includes an I/O port 2205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 2206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 2300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 2300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 2162, the first special symbol display unit 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 2165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 2166, the time-saving notification display unit 2168, the normal power solenoid 2148, the special power solenoid 2135, the V attacker solenoid 2154, and the V shutter solenoid 2159. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 2170 and the error notification monitor 2172. The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the proportion of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 2172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, for example, if the pachinko game machine has a setting function, the error notification monitor 2172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc. Note that the setting change code may be a special symbol that is not normally displayed (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 2200 is also connected to the first start port switch 2121, the second start port switch 2141, the pass gate switch 2127, the large prize port count switch 2132, the V attacker count switch 2153, the V prize port switch 2156, and the general prize port switch 2123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to the main control circuit 2200 via the I/O port 2205.

The main control circuit 2200 is further connected to a calling device (not shown) that has functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 2184 used to transmit data to a hall computer 2186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key socket 2174 into which a setting key 2174a is inserted that is operated to change or check the setting value if the pachinko machine has a setting function, and a RAM clear switch 2176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. Note that if the pachinko machine has a setting function, the RAM clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided.

The setting key insertion port 2174 and the RAM clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the manager of the game arcade. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key insertion port 2174 and the RAM clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key insertion port 2174 and the RAM clear switch 2176, and a case in which the manager of the game arcade can touch the setting key insertion port 2174 and/or the RAM clear switch 2176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game arcade to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key slot 2174 and the RAM clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 2400 or the power supply circuit 2450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the person in charge of the arcade from easily touching the setting key slot 2174 or the RAM clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 2300 includes a sub-CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, a sound control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, a role control circuit 2307, and a command input port 2308. The sub-control circuit 2300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 88, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the third pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 2301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 2301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub-CPU 2301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. In response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub-CPU 2301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 2058). The reel control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 2307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 2301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 2301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls from the pachinko game machine, and is connected to a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a launch device 2006 for launching game balls, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls.

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.

The power supply circuit 2450 is connected to a power switch 2095 and other components. The power switch 2095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 89 to 92. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

The third pachinko gaming machine does not execute the probability bonus control. The third pachinko gaming machine also has a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed, and a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 2201 can proceed with the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, in the normal game mode, left hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game mode, right hitting is the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 2301 executes control to display the hitting method that is the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 89 shows an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball enters (passes) the first starting hole 2120, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random number value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol. Also, when a game ball enters (passes) the second starting hole 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "gimmick release hit" based on the hit determination process for the second special symbol using a random number value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol.

It is not essential that a "hit on the release of the special feature" is not determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if a "hit on the release of the special feature" is determined, it is preferable that the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature" is extremely low compared to when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot"). Also, it is not essential that a "miss" is not determined when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, but if a "miss" is determined, the probability may be higher than the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature" or lower than the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature".

In the hit determination table for the special symbols stored in the main ROM 2202, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "time-saving hit", a "jackpot", or a "miss" and the corresponding determination value data ("time-saving hit determination value data", "jackpot determination value data", "miss determination value data") is specified as data used in the hit determination process for the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first starting hole 2120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "time-saving hit", a "jackpot", or a "gimmick release hit" and the corresponding determination value data ("time-saving hit determination value data", "jackpot determination value data", "gimmick release hit determination value data") is specified as data used in the hit determination process for the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting hole 2140.

In addition, this third pachinko game machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined for a "jackpot," but this is not essential, and the jackpot probability may be increased, for example, by setting a probability-change flag to ON depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

In addition, in this third pachinko gaming machine, the total random number value for the random number value used to determine a jackpot is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for determining a jackpot is generated within the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting, or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the jackpot probability may be set to be higher in the high setting than in the low setting, or the probability of hitting the jackpot may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be higher in the high setting than in the low setting. However, even if the third pachinko machine is a pachinko machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the probability of hitting the time-saving feature to be the same for all settings.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the probability of winning the special feature opening according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate for the V winning device 2150, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 2155, or the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of winning the special feature opening, the opening frequency of the V winning port 2155 (i.e., the operation frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed, the expected value controlled in the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 90 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopping symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the gaming ball enters the starting hole 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data. The "select symbol command" is a command for designating the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 99.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the winning determination process for the second special symbol results in the obtaining of the winning determination value data for the opening of the reel, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the third pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 2163 or the second special symbol display unit 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to a selected symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 2163 and 2164 derive the display mode of the time-saving hit, the display mode of the jackpot, the display mode of the gimmick opening hit, or the display mode of the miss based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub-control circuit 2300.

[3-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 of the third pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the mode of the big win game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the mode of the subsequent game state (more specifically, the time-saving flag and the end condition of the time-saving) according to the selection pattern command determined in response to the pattern random number value of the special pattern. The mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the game state after the big win game state ends. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern is a time-saving hit, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the big win game state. "L" shown in the column of the time-saving end condition in FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display number of the first special pattern and the variable display number of the second special pattern. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable display number of the second special pattern, and "N" indicates the number of times of the opening of the special device. Note that the remarks in the remarks column of FIG. 91 are written for convenience and to make it easier to understand.

In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, and N=3. Also, if the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, and N=3. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state is not determined.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "jackpot", the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state and the mode of the subsequent game state (A time-saving game state) are determined as follows. For example, if the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L = 50, M = 5, N = 2. In addition, if the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag on, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L = 50, M = 5, N = 1. In addition, if the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines not to set the time-saving flag on. Furthermore, if the selected symbol command is "z6," the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, determines to set the time-saving flag to ON, and determines the conditions for ending the time-saving mode to be L=50, M=5, and N=2.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "release of the special feature" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time-saving flag to ON, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L = 50, M = 5, and N = 2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "release of the special feature", if the game state is not controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 not only does not execute the jackpot game state, but also does not set the time-saving flag to ON, and after executing control based on the special feature hit, returns to the game state immediately before the special feature hit.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 does not set either the mode of the big win game state or the mode of the game state thereafter. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 2201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the previous game state.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z4"), as described above, neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 91 to clearly show that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined.

The "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of the time-saving termination conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the game state, but are not limited to this and may be different conditions depending on the game state. For example, all of the termination conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively, or may be different only for one of the time-saving game states among the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. Also, only one of the termination conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively, or may be different only for one of the time-saving game states among the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In other words, at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different in at least one of the time-saving play states A, B, and C.

[3-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
Fig. 92 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols of the third pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in Fig. 92 is shown for convenience. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the winning is based on the winning of a game ball into the first start hole 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the winning is based on the winning of a game ball into the second start hole 2140.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 2140.

As shown in FIG. 92, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "miss," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the time-saving flag, the reach determination random number value and the effect selection random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes) the first starting hole 2120. Note that, since hitting to the right is considered the regular gaming mode in the time-saving gaming state, it is considered that the gaming ball will rarely enter the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the second starting hole 2140.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the second starting hole 2140.

If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit with the release of the special feature" and the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol based on the reach determination random number value and the performance selection random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters the second start hole 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit on the release of the reel" and the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to be a long fluctuation presentation with an extremely long fluctuation time, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the game ball will not basically enter (pass) the second start hole 2140, but even if an unforeseen event occurs and the game ball does enter the second start hole 2140, this is done to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player, but this is not necessarily required.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a look-ahead flag if the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 2120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 2301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 2201, performs a look-ahead effect if the look-ahead flag is set.

For convenience, although it is not shown in the special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 92, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability bonus flag is on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 2301 may decide.

The main CPU 2201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when the time-saving flag or the probability-change flag is on. The main CPU 2201 may also set the look-ahead flag (to perform a look-ahead performance) when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol.

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of changes per unit time for the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined is smaller than when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is on is likely to be shorter than the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub-CPU 2301. The sub-CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

In addition, the time-saving hit type reaches A and B shown in the "Notes" column of Figure 92 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot type reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern may be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

Although the third pachinko gaming machine will not be described, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 stores a normal symbol winning determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol winning type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 2201 then determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the normal electric device 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the same as those executed by the main CPU 2201 except for the special symbol control process executed in S39 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). Therefore, the following will describe the special symbol control process, and will omit a description of the other processes executed by the main CPU 2201. Note that, although some of the processes executed in the special symbol control process in the third pachinko game machine are the same as those executed in the first pachinko game machine (for example, the jackpot end process (Figs. 42 and 103)), the following will describe the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 93. Fig. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 2201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the processing of S2001, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203, etc., in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. Note that the demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demo display performance. Note that the second pachinko game machine is not a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, and therefore does not have the concept of a main special symbol as described in the first pachinko game machine.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state waiting for variable display.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S2002 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S2002 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is not pending (if S2003 returns NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is not pending (if S2004 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is pending (if S2004 returns YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is pending (if S2003 returns YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After executing the processing of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibited period.

Thus, in this embodiment, the third pachinko gaming machine is described as a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when the start information of the second special pattern is reserved, but this is not limited to this. For example, the third pachinko gaming machine may be a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern when the start information of the first special pattern is reserved, or a sequential variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning in the first start port 2120 or the second start port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is judged as YES), the special pattern management process processes the second special pattern if S2003 is judged as YES, and processes the first special pattern if S2004 is judged as YES. Also, when the control state number is not 0 (when S2002 is judged as NO), the special pattern management process processes the special pattern currently being executed.

The numbers ("0" to "7") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 2201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S2011 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S2011 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2013. The main CPU 2201 performs the processes from S2013 onward based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This S2013 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This S2014 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S2015 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. This S2016 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening control process. This S2017 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process in S2018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S2019 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. This S2020 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing steps S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 95. Fig. 95 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko game machine.

Note that if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S2021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S2021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol hit determination process. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referenced, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a miss. Also, if the second special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a role-opening hit. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol that corresponds to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, a time-saving hit, a big hit, a role-opening hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) is referenced, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command." After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot, or special feature release hit). In this process, the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024) by referring to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91). Note that the type of win determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a special feature release hit is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 opened based on the special feature release hit. In addition, in this embodiment, the types of time-saving hit, jackpot, and special feature release hit are all multiple types, but the type of time-saving hit, jackpot, and/or special feature release hit may be one type. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or feature release hits, multiple types of misses may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, for example, according to the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S2023), the value of the time-saving flag, the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the change pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referenced, and the change time corresponding to the change pattern determined in the change pattern determination process for the special symbol (S2026) is determined as the change time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 is performed. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., probability bonus flags, time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S2030, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game status management process (S2030) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the third pachinko game machine.

If the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S2041 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S2041 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. As described above in the explanation of the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of times a special symbol game is remaining or the number of times a time-saving game is remaining. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 97. Fig. 97 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

Note that if this special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the target of processing, the first special symbol is the target of processing. Similarly, if the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the target of processing, the second special symbol is the target of processing.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S2051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S2051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S2052 that the reel is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S2052 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that the reel is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S2052 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2053. Note that if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a win for the release of a special reel, or if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss, then a NO judgment is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing for the jackpot game control processing. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 are generated and updated. Note that the signal that is generated and updated in this processing is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S2053, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2054.

In addition, in the start setting process for jackpot game control in S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 2131 can be opened (S2055), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S2058), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S2059). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), the large prize opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

At S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a special feature has been opened, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a special feature has been opened.

If it is determined in S2060 that the special symbol that has stopped is not a winning combination, i.e., that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination (if S2060 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2060 that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination, i.e., that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination (if S2060 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2061.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing for game control when a special feature is opened. In this processing, signals (e.g., a special feature opening signal, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S2061, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 can be opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 can be opened, set in this process, is, for example, 1 time. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as setting a signal for opening a special device to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), setting a game state designation parameter (S2065), and reserving the transmission of a display command for starting a special device to be opened (S2066). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described with reference to Fig. 98. Fig. 98 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time-saving management processing (S2071). The third pachinko gaming machine, which is called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, so the time-saving management processing executed in the third pachinko gaming machine differs from the processing described with reference to Figures 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, in the first pachinko gaming machine, it was described that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the probability variable flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, but the third pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to a high probability gaming state. Therefore, it differs in that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, instead of being set to on when the probability variable flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. Also, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time-saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), it is determined whether the probability variable flag is off (see S191), and then the process of S192 is performed on the condition that the probability variable flag is off. However, in the third pachinko gaming machine, as described above, it is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, so it differs in that it performs the process of S192 without performing the process of S191. The other processes in the time-saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". By carrying out the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to carry out the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After carrying out the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2074, the main CPU 2201 terminates the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 99, a V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S2081 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S2081 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to a maximum of 1800 msec opening only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, a maximum of 900 msec opening may be performed a maximum of two times per opening, or the first opening may be performed for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second opening may be performed for a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, multiple opening patterns may be provided for each opening of the role within a total time not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec), and one of these multiple opening patterns may be set based on, for example, the random number value of the special pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this processing, processing is performed to generate opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155. After executing the processing of S2083, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084), the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) is performed after the V winning device opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing S2085, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process for the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device open preparation process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 100, a V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S2091 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S2091 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 was opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls that entered the V winning device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

If it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2093.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the maximum opening time of the open/close winning port 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2093 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (if S2093 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the open/close winning port 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V entry has been detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the V entry port 2155 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not detection has occurred by the V entry port switch 2156). Note that the above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of a game ball into the V entry device 2150, and may be, for example, within a specified time from when the V attacker 2152 begins to operate, or within a specified time from when the game ball is released from the engagement by the engagement member 2160, etc.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V win has been detected (if S2095 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for V hit game control. In this process, a signal (e.g., a V hit signal, etc.) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the target of the special symbol game judgment process. When the V hit game control is executed, for example, 15 rounds of round play are executed as shown in the hit type determination table (see FIG. 91), so that the player can win a large number of prize balls as in the case where the jackpot game control process is executed. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V hit game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V hit game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In addition, in the V hit game control start setting process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and time-saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the operation of the V attacker 2152), which was first performed based on the opening of the reel, is processed as the first round of round play. In other words, the V winning game control, which is executed when it is determined that a V winning has been detected (S2095 is determined as YES), will start from the second round of round play. After performing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (i.e., the number of times the V attacker 2152 is operated) (S2099), a process of setting a V hit signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100), a process of setting the control state number of the special pattern to "5" (S2101), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S2102), and a process of reserving the transmission of a V hit start display command (S2103). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special pattern to "5" (S2101), a process of preparing to open the large winning port (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special pattern game judgment process is completed. The main CPU 2201 then ends the special pattern game determination process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined that no V win was detected in S2095 (if S2095 returns NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 101, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 101 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S2111 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S2111 is judged as YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The round counter count value (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened has reached the upper limit (if S2113 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) will be performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S2113 returns NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S2117, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to be opened. In this process, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a big prize, and the stop display mode indicating a big prize is derived (YES judgment is made at S2052 in FIG. 97), and the game control is started by the big prize opening, the large prize opening 2131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit, and the stop display mode indicating the role release is derived (YES judgment is made at S2060 in FIG. 97), and further, the V winning is detected (YES judgment is made at S2095 in FIG. 100), and the game control is started by the V winning, the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the open/close winning opening 2151) is selected as the large prize opening to be opened. After executing processing of S2118, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is won, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing processing of S2119, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2120.

The above "large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150" corresponds to the large prize opening selected in S2118 as the large prize opening to be opened between the large prize opening 2131 and the V prize device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the large prize opening. In this process, the process for generating the opening and closing control data for the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121), the large prize opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 102, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 102 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (if S2131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (if S2131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls in the large prize opening 2131, or the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the V prize device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large prize opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

If it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is not the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2133.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2134.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the large prize opening related various setting process (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2133 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has elapsed (if S2133 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to close the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2135), the large prize opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing S2136, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 103. Fig. 103 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (if S2141 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (if S2141 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a number of confirmed symbols counter, a round counter, a large prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S2142, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the processing returns to the processing from which the jackpot end processing was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 set an interrupt prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited area.

[4. Extension Example]
The following describes an example of an extension common to the first, second, and third pachinko game machines. Since the symbols attached to the components are different depending on the first, second, and third pachinko game machines, the symbols are omitted in the following description except when the description is limited to a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine).

[4-1. Example of extended probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, whether or not to set the special probability flag on is determined depending on the type of jackpot, and when the special probability flag is set on, the number of special probability rounds is determined, but this is not limited to this and may be, for example, in the following manner.

For example, the machine may be a so-called V-type high probability machine that determines whether or not a specific area provided in a large prize opening has been passed during execution of the jackpot game control process, and sets a high probability flag to ON when the jackpot game control process ends if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area. Note that the specific area can be changed between an open state where game balls can or easily pass through and a closed state where game balls cannot or have difficulty entering, for example, by the operation of a movable member during a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process.

In such a V-type high probability machine, for example, the ease with which the game ball passes through the above-mentioned specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, i.e., the probability that the high probability flag will be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process, may be different between when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, as will be described later with reference to Figures 104 to 107.

Figure 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the jackpot opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and shows a case where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through to the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through to the specific area. Note that in the example shown in Figure 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that, although FIG. 104 shows the large prize opening being opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening manner of the large prize opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is open while the large prize opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large prize opening has begun. Therefore, while the jackpot game control process is being executed, it is easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the special probability flag is likely to be set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. However, if no game balls have passed through the specific area despite the specific area being open, the special probability flag is not set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the large prize opening to the end of the long opening of the large prize opening. Therefore, while the jackpot game control process is being executed, it is extremely easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the special probability flag is very easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if the specific area is in an open state but no game balls have passed through the specific area, the special probability flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, the specific area is closed except for the time when the large prize opening is short-open and for a predetermined time after the large prize opening has started to be long-opened (both of these times are short). Therefore, compared to either the first or second opening mode, it is more difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control. In other words, it is difficult for the probability variable flag to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability variable flag will be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In FIG. 104, an example is described in which two opening modes, a first opening mode and a second opening mode, are provided as examples of opening modes of a specific area in which at least one of a plurality of game balls that have entered a large prize opening can easily pass through the specific area during execution of a jackpot game control process. However, the number of opening modes of a specific area in which at least one of a plurality of game balls that have entered a large prize opening can easily pass through the specific area during execution of a jackpot game control process is not limited to two modes, and may be only one mode or three or more modes.

In addition, FIG. 104 describes an example of a third opening mode as an example of a specific area opening mode in which it is difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process. However, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process is not limited to one mode, and two or more modes may be provided.

Figure 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in this Figure 105, when the winning/losing determination value data is "jackpot determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a jackpot), the winning time selection symbol commands for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are selected as follows. That is, when the result of the first special symbol winning determination process is a jackpot, the winning time selection symbol command is, for example, "z0" with a selection rate of 40%, "z1" with a selection rate of 10%, and "z2" with a selection rate of 50%. Also, when the result of the second special symbol winning determination process is a jackpot, the winning time selection symbol command is, for example, "z3" with a selection rate of 15%, "z4" with a selection rate of 50%, and "z5" with a selection rate of 35%.

Figure 106 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in this Figure 106, the type of jackpot (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (3R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the first opening mode (10R certainty jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (10R normal jackpot B). If the symbol command for selecting a winning combination is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode of the winning combination (10R special winning combination B). If the symbol command for selecting a winning combination is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode of the winning combination (10R special winning combination C).

That is, according to the above-mentioned Figs. 104 to 106, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit, the type of the hit is determined to be 3R normal hit A with a selection rate of 40%, 10R normal hit A with a selection rate of 10%, and 10R sure-win A with a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit, the type of the hit is determined to be 10R normal hit B with a selection rate of 15%, 10R sure-win B with a selection rate of 50%, and 10R sure-win C with a selection rate of 35. In this way, it is possible to make the probability that the sure-win flag is set to ON at the end of the hit game control process different between when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit.

In addition, in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to being opened by time control as shown in Figures 104 (A) to (C), but may be opened in response to a game ball entering a jackpot opening, for example, as shown in Figure 107 described below.

Figure 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round of play during execution of the expanded example of the jackpot game control process (an example in which the specific area is controlled to be in an open state based on a win in the large prize opening), showing (A) a case in which the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, and (B) a case in which the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large prize opening is opened, when the first game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area is opened based on this detection until the large prize opening is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the probability variable flag is easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability variable flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the large prize winning hole is opened, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time only when the first game ball enters the large prize winning hole and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize winning hole count switch. Even if the second game ball enters the large prize winning hole and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize winning hole count switch, the specific area does not become open and remains closed until the winning hole is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the large prize game control, it is more difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize winning hole to pass through the specific area compared to the first opening mode. In other words, it is difficult for the probability variable flag to be set to ON at the end of the large prize game control process. However, even in this case, if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area while the jackpot game control is being executed, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability of winning flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

In the above, an example was described in which if the game ball passes through a specific area while the jackpot game control process is being executed, the probability variable flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the game ball passes through a specific area while the jackpot game control process is being executed, the time-saving flag may be set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. This type of specification is particularly effective in the case of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, such as a third type pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the same opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and for example, an opening pattern dedicated to the first special symbol and an opening pattern dedicated to the second special symbol may be set.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the third mode may be determined to be one in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that when the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (e.g. the second special symbol) is a hit, only a mode in which it is easy for at least one game ball to pass through the specific area (the first mode or the second mode) is determined.

Also, in the above, in the third mode in which it is difficult for game balls to pass through to the specific area, the specific area is in an open state twice (both for a short period of time) while the large prize opening is short-open and for a predetermined period of time after the large prize opening starts to be long-opened; however, if it is difficult for game balls to pass through to the specific area, the specific area may be in an open state once or multiple times.

The closure of a specific area may be controlled to occur after a predetermined opening time has elapsed, or after the round in which the specific area is open has ended, or in response to a set number of large prize openings or winnings in the specific area. There may also be one or more combined conditions for closure.

It may also be a so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variable control is executed (for example, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are alternately executed repeatedly until a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as the "limiter number") is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the probability variable control is not executed (for example, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, etc.). At this time, the loop number is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number, or may be determined according to, for example, the random number value of the special pattern, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. In addition, if it is a setting machine, the limiter number may be different depending on the setting value.

In the above, we have described a so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached, but this is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the time-saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine such as the third type pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned V-type high probability machine, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the high probability control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-type high probability machine, if the limiter number is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, and the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the high probability control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although it is not considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, since the game ball has not passed through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the high probability control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which, if a gaming ball passes through a specific area while a jackpot game control process is being executed, the time-saving flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the machine is controlled to a game state (e.g., high probability time-saving game state, high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) in which the probability variable control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played, and when the predetermined number of special symbol games are played, the machine may be a so-called ST machine in which the probability variable control is not executed (e.g., normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.). In such a game machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variable control is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "ST number") may be a fixed number, or may be different each time. In addition, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the ST number may be different depending on the setting value. Furthermore, the machine may be a so-called falling type game machine in which a falling lottery is performed and the probability variable control ends based on the result of the falling lottery, or it may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which the probability variable control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state when the game ball passes through a specific area during the jackpot game state.

[4-2. Example of time-saving control extension]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, the time-saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process is completed, but the time-saving control may also be executed even if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is not a jackpot.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, a time-saving hit/miss determination process may be performed separately from the special symbol hit determination process to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control, using a specific random number value (e.g., a random number value for special symbol hit determination, a pattern random number value of a special symbol, etc.) from among the random number values extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole. When a time-saving hit/miss determination is performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, for example, when the pattern random number value of a special symbol extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole is a specific pattern random number value, it can be determined to be a "time-saving hit" in which time-saving control is executed. Note that the time-saving hit/miss determination process may be performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit.

In addition, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed separately from the special pattern winning/losing determination process, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed prior to the special pattern winning/losing determination process in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is used exclusively for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be generated within a predetermined range, and the random number value for time-saving winning/losing may be extracted based on, for example, the entry of a game ball into the starting hole, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing.

The random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process does not necessarily have to be extracted based on the game ball winning the start port, but may be extracted based on the game ball winning in other areas (for example, the general winning port, the small winning port, the large winning port, etc.). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be provided, and the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be extracted based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area.

For example, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special pattern winning/losing determination process are executed at different times, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed during the variable display of the special pattern, which, when confirmed, derives a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be a "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU may forcibly derive, for example, a display mode indicating a "time-saving losing" even though the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning".

The sub-CPU also preferably controls the display of a performance image (such as a decorative pattern change performance or a character display performance) on the display device that allows or makes it easy to understand from the outside whether the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving miss." In this case, the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special pattern win/loss judgment process, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing" result, it is also possible to execute control to display on the display device an effect image (for example, a decorative pattern change effect or a character display effect, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing" result. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is disclosed.

In addition, in a typical pachinko game machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU controls the display device (e.g., liquid crystal display device) to display, for example, a performance image showing a right-hit instruction as the recommended method of launching game balls in a jackpot game state. In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub-CPU controls the display device to display, for example, a performance image showing a right-hit instruction as the recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed. However, if the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the performance image showing the recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed may be displayed on the display device at all times, or may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time-saving hits set based on the "time-saving hit" is a predetermined number or more (e.g., 2 or more), it may be displayed, but if it is less than the predetermined number (e.g., less than 2), it may not be displayed. Note that the above specific conditions are not limited to the number of time-saving conditions, but can be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving hit/lose determination process is executed before the special pattern hit determination process is executed, the sub-CPU may execute control to display on the display device a performance image that is externally comprehensible or easily comprehensible as to whether or not the special pattern hit determination process will be executed under the "time-saving hit" condition (i.e., under the condition in which the time-saving flag is set to on).

The following is a summary of the processes related to time-saving, such as the type of random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the conditions for judging a time-saving winning/losing in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the execution timing of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the game state in which the time-saving winning/losing judgment process can be executed, the state of the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times set when a time-saving winning/losing is achieved, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the number of time-saving times, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the display of the results of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process.

(Type of random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be any of a plurality of types of random number values, such as a random number value for special symbol winning judgment, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for normal winning judgment, a random number value for normal symbol determination, a random number value for special symbol fall judgment, and a dedicated random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment. In addition, in the case of a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only a random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination), but may be determined using multiple types of random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether a special pattern has been won and a random number value for determining the pattern).

(Timing of extracting random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extraction of the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be any timing, such as when the game ball enters the start gate which triggers the special symbol winning judgment process, when the game ball passes through the pass gate which triggers the execution of the normal symbol winning judgment process, when the game ball passes through a dedicated area which triggers the execution of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, etc. The extraction of the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning gate or the like which has a prize ball payout, or may be performed based on the passing through a specific gate or a specific out-gate which has no prize ball payout.

In addition, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is extracted based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the start port, the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment may be extracted regardless of whether the game ball enters the first start port or the second start port, or the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment may be extracted only when the game ball enters one of the specific start ports.

(Conditions for determining whether a time-saving win has been won in the time-saving winning/losing determination process)
When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment process, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for special pattern winning/losing judgment, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific losing judgment value data, a specific small winning judgment value data, or/and a specific big winning judgment value data. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the pattern random number value of the special pattern, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific losing pattern, a specific small winning pattern, or a specific big winning pattern. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for special pattern falling judgment, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific random number value for special pattern falling judgment. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the changed setting value, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for normal winning judgment or the random number value for normal pattern determination. Furthermore, the conditions for determining the time-saving winning/losing in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process are not limited to the above conditions and can be arbitrarily determined to be various conditions.

In the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss judgment process is a "time-saving hit," if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit to open the special symbol and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened passes through the V winning port 2155, it is preferable to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control and the number of time-saving times according to the type of hit to open the special symbol. And, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a hit to open the special symbol and the V attacker 2152 is opened but the passage of the game ball to the V winning port 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is not executed, if the result of the time-saving hit/loss judgment process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute time-saving control and the number of time-saving times based on the "time-saving hit." However, if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is "time-saving miss," and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit to open the device, and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens does not pass through the V winning port 2155, the time-saving control will not be executed.

(Time-saving winning/losing judgment processing execution timing)
When the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special pattern using a random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination obtained based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting hole, the main CPU may retain the obtained random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination, in the same manner as the start information of the special pattern.

The main CPU may execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (e.g., before it is reserved), or may reserve the extracted random number value and execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process until the variable display of the special pattern begins, or may execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process at the start of the variable display of the special pattern.

(Game state in which time-saving winning/losing judgment processing can be executed)
The time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or may be executed only in a game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, the normal game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). In addition, for example, a condition for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be determined in advance, such as executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process in any game state, or executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process only in a specific game state, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed when the determined condition is satisfied.

(Mode of time-saving control)
The mode of time-saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time-saving control executed according to the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag may be prepared, and when the time-saving control is executed according to the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag may be set to on, and when the time-saving control is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the second time-saving flag may be set to on. In this case, when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, it is preferable to execute time-saving control with different functions. For example, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, both the special chart shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, only one of the special chart shortening control and the electric support control is performed. Also, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, the first time-saving game state is controlled in which only the special chart shortening control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, the second time-saving game state is controlled in which only the electric support control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags is set to on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, for example, or may be determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed.

(Number of time-saving times set when time-saving hits)
It is preferable that the number of time-saving times to be set when the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning/losing", is determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when multiple random numbers for time-saving winning/losing judgment are specified as time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times to be set may be determined according to the extracted random numbers for time-saving winning/losing judgment instead of or in addition to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. For example, when the random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole is the first time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times is determined to be "100", and when it is the second time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times is determined to be "50".

In addition, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed even in a game state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning," the main CPU may set the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" in place of the remaining number of time-saving times (i.e., reset the remaining number of time-saving times). In this case, the degree of benefit to the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time-saving times is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving times, thereby expanding the scope of gameplay, and making the time-saving game state where the time-saving flag is on more interesting and increasing interest.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed even in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may add the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving win" to the remaining number of time-saving times. In this case, the number of time-saving times will never be less than the current remaining number of time-saving times, allowing the player to play with peace of mind in a game state in which time-saving control is executed.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed even in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (e.g., a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may predetermine one of two processes: a process of replacing the remaining number of time-saving wins with the number of time-saving wins determined based on the "time-saving win" and setting it as a new number, or a process of adding the number of time-saving wins determined based on the "time-saving win" to the remaining number of time-saving wins, and set the number of time-saving wins in a manner that satisfies the predetermine condition.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which a time-saving control having a different function is executed when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning", the main CPU may change the process of setting the number of time-saving times depending on whether the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of the same function or different functions. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of the same function, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" may be added to the remaining number of time-saving times, and if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of different functions, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" may be newly set (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times may be reset) instead of the remaining number of time-saving times being executed. In addition, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls with different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" may be executed after all remaining times of the time-saving being executed have been consumed.

When the number of time-saving times is set based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning", the number of time-saving times may be set to "0". In other words, if the number of time-saving times to be set is determined to be "0", the time-saving flag is set to on even though the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning". Also, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed during the execution of time-saving control is "time-saving winning" and the number of time-saving times is set to "0", the time-saving control being executed will end.

(Time-saving control start timing)
The timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process being a "time-saving hit," can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the time-saving control can be started based on the passage of the special symbol determination time during which the special symbol is determined. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

When the start timing of the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process being a "time-saving hit", is the end of the special pattern game, and the time-saving hit/miss determination process is performed prior to the special pattern hit determination process in the same frame, even if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is a "time-saving hit", if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, it is preferable to invalidate the "time-saving hit" (the time-saving flag is not set on based on the "time-saving hit") and set the time-saving flag on based on the hit time selection pattern command (the time-saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of jackpot).

In addition, the start timing of the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process being a "time-saving winning/losing win," is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed prior to the special symbol winning/losing determination process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing determination process is executed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process. In this case, the game state (i.e., whether or not the time-saving control is executed) may differ between the time when the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted and the time when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed, which can increase interest.

Furthermore, the timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process being a "time-saving winning" may be after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning" and before the time-saving control starts, the sub-CPU can execute a teasing performance as to whether or not the time-saving control will start, which can increase interest.

In the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot for which time-saving control is executed), the time-saving control based on the jackpot may be started based on the end of the jackpot game control. Also, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a role-opening hit (a role-opening hit for which time-saving control is executed) and the jackpot game control is executed because the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened, the time-saving control may be started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is a "time-saving hit" and the result of the special pattern hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit to open the special device, and therefore the V attacker 2152 opens, but the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU may start time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" based on the fact that the open/close winning hole 2151 has closed.

(End timing of time-saving game mode)
The timing at which the time-saving game state ends is, for example, "when, in a game state in which time-saving control is being executed, a variable display of a special pattern is executed for a set number of time-saving times,""when, in a game state in which time-saving control is being executed, the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the result of a special pattern hit determination process," or "when the number of time-saving times is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is a time-saving hit," etc.

In addition, if a small win game control process is executed based on the results of the special symbol hit determination process during a game state in which time-saving control is executed, time-saving control will continue to be executed even after the small win game control process ends.

In the third pachinko game machine, if the opening and closing winning hole 2151 is opened when the special symbol hit determination process derives a stopped symbol pattern indicating a jackpot opening hit during the execution of the time-saving control, but the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 opens, and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 continues to execute the time-saving control even after the opening and closing winning hole 2151 is closed.

(Rewrite the number of time-saving times)
A time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (e.g., a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may rewrite the number of time-saving times, or may not rewrite the number of time-saving times (i.e., execute the time-saving control until the number of time-saving times in the currently executing time-saving control has been exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time-saving times, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" when the number of time-saving times in the currently running time-saving control has been consumed, or may set it when the special pattern hit determination process is executed, or may set it when the variable display of the special pattern starts or stops, or may set it during the time-saving hit/loss determination process, and may set it at various times. When setting it during the time-saving hit/loss determination process, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" will overwrite the number of time-saving times in the currently running time-saving control. Also, it may be set in advance to either "rewrite the number of time-saving times" or "add to the previous number of time-saving times," and the number of time-saving times may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Time-saving hit probability)
When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the first start port or the second start port, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed based on the winning of a game ball into the first start port (hereinafter referred to as the "first time-saving winning/losing judgment process") and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed based on the winning of a game ball into the second start port (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving winning/losing judgment process") may have different winning probabilities for time-saving. For example, the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, or the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be the same or approximately the same as the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed.

(Displaying the results of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process)
A time-saving winning/losing judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (whether the time-saving winning/losing is a winning or losing) and/or a winning number of time-saving times display unit that displays the number of time-saving times determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (whether the time-saving winning/losing is a winning) may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing judgment result display unit and/or the winning number of time-saving times display unit may be provided in an LED display group that includes a special pattern display unit or the like, and may be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and/or the number of time-saving times determined based on the winning of the time-saving on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU may make the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving miss." Note that, since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, it is preferable that the sub-CPU displays an effect image indicating a "time-saving hit" on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device until the above-mentioned interval time has elapsed.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a hit to open the special feature and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on this hit to open the special feature, the main CPU 2201 may set the interval time after the end of the operation related to the hit to open the special feature when the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving miss", or may set it to the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Examples of extensions related to management of game media]
The first, second and third pachinko game machines described in this specification can be applied to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a gaming medium and a bonus (e.g., prize balls, prize data, etc.) is awarded based on the result of the game. In other words, not only can the game be played by shooting or inserting a gaming medium (e.g., a gaming ball, a medal, etc.) by a physical action of a player, and the gaming medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit itself can electromagnetically manage the gaming medium held by the player and enable a game to be played by circulating the enclosed gaming balls or a medal-less game. In addition, the electromagnetic management of the gaming medium held by the player can be a gaming medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the gaming medium.

In the case of gaming machines that circulate enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls serving as gaming media are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that when a prize is won, prize ball data is awarded as a gaming medium instead of prize balls being paid out. In this specification, "paid-out gaming value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if 15 prize balls are won in a prize slot, in the case of an enclosed gaming machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is awarded. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be anything equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media are managed by a game media management device connected to the main control circuit, the game media management device is a device having ROM and RAM (or RWM) and installed in the game machine, and is connected to an external game media handling device (not shown) via a specified interface with a two-way communication function, and can perform the operation of lending game media (i.e., the operation of providing the game media required when the player inserts the game media), or the operation of paying out game media when a winning combination related to the payout of game media is won (the winning combination is established) (i.e., the operation of making the player obtain the game media required while paying out the game media), or the operation of electromagnetically recording the game media used for play. In addition, the game media management device can not only manage the actual number of game media, but also, for example, a game media number display device (not shown) that displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko game machine based on the management results of the game media number, and can manage the number of game media displayed on this game media number display device. In other words, the gaming media management device should be able to electromagnetically record and display the total number of gaming media that a player can use for gaming.

In this case, the gaming media management device has the capability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media to an external gaming media handling device, and also has the capability to prevent the number of recorded gaming media from being reduced except by direct operation by the player, and if an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and the external gaming media handling device, it is desirable that the device has the capability to prevent the player from transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a loan operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device may be provided with an insertion slot for valuables such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, and various other operation means such as a loan operation means and a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on the gaming medium handling device side (all not shown).

In this case, the game flow is as follows: the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, subtracts a predetermined amount of value by operating any of the above-mentioned lending operation means, and increases the game media corresponding to the subtracted value from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and repeats the above operation if more game media are required. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of playing, and when the game ends, the player operates any of the return operation means to transmit the number of game media from the game media management device to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media number is transmitted, the game media management device clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for a prize, or moves to another game machine to play based on the game media recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media were sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device may send only the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player may be divided and processed. Also, instead of just discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be dispensed, or the media may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. The game media handling device may also be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the amusement center, and the media may be stored in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

In addition, in the gaming machine or gaming media handling device, a locking operation may be performed to lock the gaming media or valuable data communication to the gaming media handling device or gaming media management device by operating a specified operating means (not shown). In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, and the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the gaming media handling device.

In addition, the above describes the application of the gaming media management device to a pachinko gaming machine, but gaming media management devices can also be installed in pachislot machines, slot machines that use gaming balls, and sealed gaming machines to manage the gaming media of players.

In this way, by providing the gaming medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the number of parts inside the gaming machine compared to when the gaming medium is physically provided for play, and not only can the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine be reduced, but it is also possible to prevent the player from directly touching the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment and reducing noise, and the reduction in parts also reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. It is also possible to prevent fraudulent activities via the gaming medium and the gaming medium insertion and payout slots. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, when the present invention is applied to a gaming system having an enclosed gaming machine configured so that gaming media can be played without being ejected to the outside, and a gaming media management device connected to the gaming machine so that data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media associated with consumption, lending, and dispensing of gaming media can be sent and received by optical signals via a communication cable, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

Second Embodiment
The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches game balls as game media from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the waiting game ball toward the launching platform. This causes the game ball to move to the launching platform. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the waiting position to the launching platform to detect the game ball moving to the launching platform. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by one. In this way, since the game balls as game media are launched from above into the game area, the enclosed game machine can avoid so-called return balls (foul balls). Then, the game balls discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by the ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, but a certain number (for example, 50 balls) of game balls are configured to circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Alternatively, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism that discharges game balls to the outside of the game machine and a take-in mechanism that takes in the game balls polished outside the game machine may be provided. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in the balls from a winning hole provided in the game area.

In an enclosed gaming machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, so there is no upper or lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, the game balls are not actually in the player's hands, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease by playing. In an enclosed gaming machine, the player starts playing after obtaining balls by loaning them from a gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining balls means that the player obtains gaming media for data management purposes. Then, when the game balls are fired from the firing device, the balls are consumed and the number of balls held decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole or the like provided in the playing area, the number of balls is paid out according to the conditions set for each winning hole, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held increases by loaning them from the gaming medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game ends and all or a part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game media management device by liquidating all of the game value (i.e., the balls in hand) stored in the enclosed game machine, or by performing an operation to transmit some of the balls in hand to the game media management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls in hand is reduced. Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in a game machine in which game balls are shot from above the game area, foul balls may occur when game balls are shot from below as in conventional game machines. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls in hand increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball occurs. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to consumption, lending, and payout of balls in hand. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" refers to the increase or decrease in the number of balls in hand due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data regarding the increase and decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to data regarding the decrease in balls held due to game balls being fired, and the increase in balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of gaming balls through each winning hole, etc. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a gaming ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out as a result is added to the number of balls held. Also, when a gaming ball is released, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to a gaming media management device by the player's operation. Also, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests to convert the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device to balls held (ball lending) and to count the number of balls held (return). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the gaming media management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the payout control circuit to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the gaming media management device. Here, "game value" refers to currency/paper money, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the game media management device. In this second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept paper money, prepaid media, etc. Furthermore, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange, etc., in the amusement center where the gaming system is installed.

The enclosed gaming machine also has a backup power supply. This allows the data immediately prior to the power being turned off to be retained even if the power is turned off at night, etc. This backup power supply may also be used to, for example, continue to detect the opening of the door frame using a door opening sensor. This also makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Enclosed gaming machines are only required to be configured so that players cannot touch the gaming balls. For example, machines that do not circulate gaming balls in an island facility but circulate them only in the gaming machine itself, and machines that circulate gaming balls in an island facility but do not allow players to touch them are also included in enclosed gaming machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The gaming media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the gaming machine via the gaming machine connection board. The transmitted and received data is information such as the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine model code. Then, with either the gaming machine or the gaming media management device as the source and the other as the destination, when the source transmits a transmission signal, the destination that receives the transmission signal transmits a confirmation signal that is the same as the transmission signal to the source, and the source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same or not.

In this way, the source of transmission can compare the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal to determine whether they are identical, thereby confirming that the signal sent from the source of transmission has been sent to the source without being tampered with. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities such as tampering with the transmitted and received signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device.

In addition, in the gaming system, the source may have a modulation unit that modulates a signal and transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit as the transmission signal, and the destination may have a demodulation unit that demodulates the signal modulated by the modulation unit.

As a result, even if the signals transmitted between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device are read, it is difficult to decipher these signals, and fraudulent activities such as tampering with the signals transmitted between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be prevented.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the destination receives the transmission signal from the source, the destination may transmit an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, to the source separately from the confirmation signal.

By comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been sent and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been sent and received based on the approval signal, thereby further strengthening the prevention of fraudulent activities. Also, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device for communication, a frame control circuit may be provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit and the gaming media management device may be connected for communication via the frame control circuit. Also, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the firing control circuit and the gaming media management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU performs processing so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not stop at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol.

In more detail, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops in a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the main CPU performs control to forcibly stop the other special symbol in a symbol combination that indicates a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops in a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, as described above, the game transitions from the general game state to the jackpot game state, but in this jackpot game state, neither the start condition for the first special symbol nor the start condition for the second special symbol is met, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the main CPU suspends the measurement of the variable time of the other special symbol based on the transition from the general game state to the small win game state (stopping at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol), and resumes the measurement of the variable time of the other special symbol based on the transition from the small win game state to the general game state (end of the small win game). When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the general game state transitions to the small win game state as described above, but in this small win game state, neither the start condition of the first special symbol nor the start condition of the second special symbol is met, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the main CPU will perform a variable display of the other special symbol that is being displayed in a similar manner to when it is being displayed in a variable manner, consisting of a group of LEDs, but as described above, timing of the variable time will be interrupted.

[4-4. Other extension examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine have been given as examples, but the technology described in this specification can be applied to other gaming machines, such as pachislot machines.

Regardless of whether the technology described in this specification is applied to a pachinko game machine or a pachislot, the effects involving a temporary stop of the symbols may include a temporary stop of the reels. Note that a "stop" of the symbols can be a permanent stop or a temporary stop, and the "stop" can be interpreted in either way. Furthermore, the operation by the player to play the game can be any of the following: operation of a lever, handle, button, etc., touch, etc.

In pachinko machines, the administrator of the machine may set the effects by operating the effect button, and the machine may be operated so that the player starts playing after the settings are made using the effect button. In this case, it is assumed that the operations by the administrator will ultimately be the operations by which the player plays the game. Similarly, in pachislot machines, it is assumed that the administrator plays a 2-bet game, and when the BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game is established, the player plays a 3-bet game. In this case, although the player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game, the administrator of the machine may play the 2-bet game, and therefore the game played by the administrator (e.g., a 2-bet game, etc.) or the selection of the hall menu may be the operations by which the player plays the game.

In a pachinko game machine, the main CPU controls the player to inform them of whether they are hitting from the right or left, thereby managing the player's playing style, and if the player's playing style is not as intended, the sub-CPU may control the player to inform them of the unintended play, such as an error or warning.

In pachislot, the main CPU may control the player's playing method, such as the order in which the buttons are pressed (assist), but if the player's playing method is not as intended, the sub-CPU may control the player to issue an error, warning, or other notification that the play is unintended.

In pachinko machines, the main control board and payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be on a single board. In pachislot machines, the payout control board may not exist, but the payout may be controlled by the main control board, or the board may be separated into the main control board and the payout control board.

Pachislot machines usually have a rectangular cabinet that houses various devices necessary for play, and a door that can be opened and closed relative to the cabinet, but the cabinet in a pachislot machine can be considered as the frame. In contrast, in a pachinko machine, the outer frame can be considered as the cabinet, the outer frame and base door can be considered as the cabinet, or the entire gaming machine consisting of the outer frame, base door, glass door and plate unit can be considered as the cabinet. Note that between the cabinet and the door, or between the frame and the door, there may be a unit with various control boards, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc., and various control boards, display means, decorative parts, gimmicks, etc. may be present in the door, frame, cabinet, etc.

Third Embodiment
First, the structure of a slot machine 4001 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. Fig. 108 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4001 according to this embodiment.

The housing 4060 forming the entirety of the slot machine 1 has a box-shaped cabinet 4061 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 4062a arranged at the upper front part of the cabinet 4061, and a lower door 4062b arranged at the lower front part of the cabinet 4061. The cabinet 4061 houses devices used in games (e.g., reels, etc.). The upper door 4062a and the lower door 4062b are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 4061. The upper door 4062a is provided so as to be able to close the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 4061, and the lower door 4062b is provided so as to be able to close the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 4061.
Since the cabinet 4061 is a member for fixing the upper door 4062a and the lower door 4062b, it may be referred to as a fixed frame, and the upper door 4062a and the lower door 4062b may be referred to as a front door.

The upper door 4062a has a display unit 4100 in the center. The display unit 4100 is an effect device that produces effects according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 4072 described below. Note that the display unit 4100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in this embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used.

A display window 4004 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in the approximate center of the upper part of the lower door 4062b. The display window 4004 constitutes a symbol display means that displays some of the symbols displayed on the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R described below. The display window 4004 displays a cross-up line diagonally upward to the right, a top line in the upper row, a center line in the middle row, a bottom line in the lower row, and a cross-down line diagonally downward to the right.

Although not shown here, the display window 4004 displays three of the multiple symbols displayed on the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R. Therefore, the display window 4004 displays a 3x3 pattern. The five lines displayed in the display window 4004, from the cross-up line to the cross-down line, are lines that linearly connect the 3x3 symbols displayed in the display window 4004.

In this embodiment, the center line of these five lines is the active line, and winning is determined based on the combination of symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the other four lines are pseudo lines that are not used to determine winning.

The active line (center line) is activated by operating the MAX BET button 4011, which will be described later, or by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 4022. Here, operating the MAX BET button 4011 and inserting medals are synonymous. Therefore, for example, when referring to the "number of medals inserted," this includes both the number of medals bet by operating the MAX BET button 4011 described above and the number of medals actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 4022.

In the cabinet 4061, multiple reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R are arranged in a horizontal row so as to be freely rotatable. Each of the reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R has a reel band on its outer periphery on which a row of symbols is drawn as identification information made up of multiple types of symbols required for play. In other words, multiple symbols are displayed on the reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R.

The patterns drawn on each reel band can be seen from outside the pachislot machine 4001 through the display window 4004. In addition, each reel 4003L, 4003C, 4003R rotates at a constant speed (e.g., 80 rotations per minute) and displays a variable row of patterns.

A roughly horizontal base 4010 is formed below the display window 4004. Within the horizontal plane of the base 4010, a medal insertion slot 4022 is provided on the right side, and a MAX BET button 4011 and a 1 BET button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX BET button 4011, there is a BET button LED 4103 (not shown) that lights up when medals can be inserted.

By pressing the MAX BET button 4011, the number of medals (3 medals) used for a unit game (one game) is inserted and the active lines are activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1 BET button is pressed. When the 1 BET button is pressed three times, three medals used for a unit game are inserted and the active lines are activated.

Operation of the MAX BET button 4011, operation of the 1 BET button, and operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 4022 (operation of inserting a medal to play) are referred to as "insertion operations".

An information display 4014 is provided in approximately the center of the horizontal plane of the base 4010. The information display 4014 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up in response to the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter, "inserted number"). The information display 4014 also has a digital display (not shown) that digitally displays to the player information such as the number of medals paid out to the player as a bonus (hereinafter, "paid number") and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 4001 (hereinafter, "credit number").

The information display 4014 is also provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) that notifies the player of the information on the stop operation required to display the combination of symbols corresponding to the role determined as the internal winning role along the pay line. The instruction monitor is, for example, composed of a 7-segment LED, and notifies the player of the information on the stop operation required by lighting or blinking in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified. As will be described later, in this embodiment, a "push order role" is provided, which is a role in which the combination of symbols displayed varies depending on the order of the stop operation (push order). The manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified is, for example, to display "1" when notifying the push order "1st (the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 4003L)", to display "2" when notifying the push order "2nd (the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 4003C)", and to display "3" when notifying the push order "3rd (the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 4003R)".

The information display 4014 is controlled by the main control board 4071 via the door relay terminal board 4460. Here, in the pachislot machine 4001, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 4071, other means controlled by the sub-control board 4072 may be used to notify information on the stop operation, for example, the above-mentioned display unit 4100 may be used to notify information on the stop operation.

In this case, the manner of notification on the instruction monitor and the manner of notification on other means may be different. In other words, the instruction monitor only needs to notify in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to notify the information on the stop operation directly (for example, even if the instruction monitor displays "1", some players may not be able to identify the content of the notification, and it cannot be said to be a direct notification). In contrast, notifications on other means may directly notify the information on the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the instruction monitor may display "1" that uniquely corresponds to the push order to be notified, while other means (display unit 4100) may directly notify that the first stop operation will be performed on the left reel 4003L.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 4001 of this embodiment, necessary information on the stopping operation according to the internal winning combination can be notified not only by control of the sub-control board 4072 but also by control of the main control board 4071. Of course, the notification of information on the stopping operation may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, it is possible to notify information on the stopping operation in the general gaming state (non-ART) but to notify information on the stopping operation in the ART gaming state.

Also, on the left side of the front part of the base part 4010, there is provided a settlement button 4013 that can be pushed to switch between crediting and paying out medals that the player has won in the game. By switching this settlement button 4013, medals are paid out from a medal payout opening 4015 at the bottom of the front part, and the paid out medals are stored in a medal receiving part 4016.

To the right of the settlement button 4013, a start lever 4006 is attached which can be tilted freely within a predetermined angle range as a start operation means for rotating the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R by the player's tilt operation and starting the changing display of the patterns in the display window 4004.

Stop buttons 4007L, 4007C, and 4007R are provided in the approximate center of the front surface of the base 4010 as stop operation means for stopping the rotation of the three reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R when pressed by the player. In this embodiment, one game (unit game) basically starts when the start lever 4006 is operated, and ends when all the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R have stopped.

A first sub-display device 4201 and a second sub-display device 4202 are provided on the front of the upper part of the lower door 4062b. The first sub-display device 4201 and the second sub-display device 4202 are liquid crystal displays or organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) displays, and display various information. The first sub-display device 4201 and the second sub-display device 4202 are provided on the sides of the surface of the front part of the lower door 4062b that stands approximately vertically from the horizontal plane of the base part 4010, with the first sub-display device 4201 provided on the left side (the side of the MAX BET button 4011 and the start lever 4006) and the second sub-display device 4202 provided on the right side (the side of the medal insertion slot 4022).

At least one of the first sub-display device 4201 and the second sub-display device 4202, in this embodiment the first sub-display device 4201, has a touch sensor 4201a on its display surface, and the display can be switched according to the player's operation received via the touch sensor 4201a. The touch sensor 4201a operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives a player's operation, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The first sub-display device 4201 is controlled by the sub-control board 4072 based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 4201a.

On the left and right sides of the lower front of the lower door 4062b are speakers 4009L, 4009R that produce sound effects and voices, and between these speakers 4009L, 4009R is a medal payout outlet 4015 from which medals are paid out. At the bottom of the lower door 4062b is a medal receiver 4016 that stores the paid-out medals.

A waist panel 4025 with a design corresponding to the motif of the machine is attached to the front of the lower part of the lower door 4062b, on the surface sandwiched between the stop buttons 4007L, 4007C, 4007R and the medal receiver 4016. This waist panel 4025 is illuminated by a waist panel illuminator (not shown) installed behind it.

[Control system of pachislot machines]
Next, the control system of the slot machine 4001 will be described with reference to Fig. 109. Fig. 109 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the slot machine 4001 according to the third embodiment.

The slot machine 4001 has a main control board 4071 provided inside the housing 4060, and a sub-control board 4072 provided on the upper door 4062a. The slot machine 4001 also has a reel relay terminal board 4410, a ratio display device 4420, a setting key switch 4430, a cabinet side relay board 4440, and a power supply unit 4450, all of which are connected to the main control board 4071. The slot machine 4001 also has an external centralized terminal board 4073, a hopper device 4040, a medal auxiliary storage switch 4441, and a reset switch 4442, all of which are connected to the main control board 4071 via the cabinet side relay board 4440.

The main control circuit is constituted by a microcomputer 4030 mounted on the main control board 4071. The microcomputer 4030 is constituted by a main CPU 4031, a main ROM 4032, and a main RAM 4033.

The main ROM 4032 stores the control program executed by the main CPU 4031, data tables, data for sending various control commands to the sub-control circuit implemented on the sub-control board 4072, and the like. The main ROM 4032 also stores multiple minimum play times for unit games.

The main RAM 4033 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by execution of the control program.

The main CPU 4031 is connected to a clock pulse generating circuit 4034, a frequency divider 4035, a random number generator 4036, and a sampling circuit 4037. The clock pulse generating circuit 4034 and the frequency divider 4035 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 4031 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulses. The random number generator 4036 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 4037 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The sub-control board 4072 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub-CPU) 4081, a ROM cartridge board 4082, a RAM (hereinafter, sub-RAM) 4083, a rendering processor 4084, a drawing RAM 4085, and a driver 4086.

The sub-CPU 4081 controls the output of video, sound, and light in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 4082 in response to commands sent from the main control board 4071. The ROM cartridge board 4082 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

The program memory area stores various control programs executed by the sub-CPU 4081. The control programs stored in the program memory area include, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 4071, a performance registration task for extracting random numbers for performance and determining and registering performance content (performance data), a drawing control task for controlling the display of images by the display unit 4100 based on the determined performance content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by the various LEDs 4101, and an audio control task for controlling the sound output by the speakers 4009L, 4009R.

The data storage area includes various storage areas, such as a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing performance data constituting various performance contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to the creation of images, a storage area for storing sound data related to background music and sound effects, and a storage area for storing lamp data related to light on/off patterns.

The sub-RAM 4083 has a storage area for registering the determined performance contents and performance data, and a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations transmitted from the main control board 4071.

The external centralized terminal board 4073 receives signals from the main control board 4071, such as the number of medals inserted/paid out, the number of games played, and whether or not a bonus has been activated, and outputs these signals to an external display that displays the number of games played and the number of bonuses activated, and to the host computer of the amusement center. The external display is installed, for example, above the pachinko slot machine 4001, and updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games played and the activation of the bonus, and notifies the user of the bonus activation with a lamp or the like.

The medal insertion signal is a signal that allows the insertion of a medal to be recognized, and is output when the start lever 4006 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that allows the payout or replay of a medal to be recognized, and is output when a medal is paid out (including credit accumulation) or when a replay is activated.

The hopper device 4040 detects medals and checks whether the number of medals dispensed from the hopper device 4040 to the outside has reached the dispensed number.

The reel relay terminal board 4410 is disposed inside the reel body of each of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R. The reel relay terminal board 4410 is electrically connected to the stepping motor (not shown) of each of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R, and relays the signal output from the main control board 4071 to the stepping motor.

The ratio display device 4420 has a ratio display board 4421 connected to the main control board 4071, and a ratio display 4422 and a changeover switch 4423 connected to the ratio display board 4421. The ratio display board 4421 controls the display of the ratio display 4422 based on a signal output from the main control board 4071. The ratio display 4422 displays various ratios such as specific section ratios and role ratios. The changeover switch 4423 switches the display of the ratio display 4422.

The setting key switch 4430 is used when setting one of a number of setting values provided for setting the amount of profit to be given to the player, or when checking the setting value set in the pachislot machine 4001. When the main control board 4071 accepts an operation using the setting key switch 4430, it sets a setting value from the number of setting values according to the content of the operation.

The cabinet side relay board 4440 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 4071 with the external centralized terminal board 4073, the hopper device 4040, the auxiliary medal storage switch 4441, and the reset switch 4442. The auxiliary medal storage switch 4441 detects whether the auxiliary medal storage (not shown) is full of medals. The reset switch 4442 is used to reset (initialize) various data of the pachislot machine 4001.

The power supply device 4450 has a power supply board 4451 connected to the main control board 4071, and a power switch 4452 connected to the power supply board 4451. The power switch 4452 is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachislot machine 4001.

The pachislot machine 4001 also has a door relay terminal board 4460, and a selector 4461, a door opening/closing monitoring switch 4462, a BET switch 4011S, a settlement switch 4013S, a start switch 4006S, a stop switch board 4463, a game operation display board 4470, and a sub-relay board 4075, which are connected to the main control board 4071 via the door relay terminal board 4460.

The selector 4461 is a device that selects whether the material, shape, etc. of a medal is appropriate, and guides appropriate medals inserted into the medal insertion port 4022 to the hopper device 4040. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detection means) that detects the passage of an appropriate medal is provided on the path along which the medal passes within the selector 4461.

The door opening/closing monitoring switch 4462 outputs a security signal to the outside of the slot machine 4001 to notify the opening/closing of the upper door 4062a and the lower door 4062b. The stop switch board 4463 (stop operation detection means) is equipped with a circuit for stopping the spinning reels and a circuit for indicating which reels can be stopped by means of an LED or the like. The stop switch board 4463 is also provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 4007L, 4007C, 4007R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 4470 is connected to the information display 4014, and is a board for displaying the number of inserted medals, etc., on the information display 4014 when medals are inserted, when the three reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R can rotate, when a replay is performed, etc. In addition, the game operation display board 4470 is connected to an LED group 4471, which, for example, lights up a mark indicating the start of a game or a mark indicating a replay based on a signal input from the game operation display board 4470.

The sub-control board 4072 is connected to the main control board 4071 via the door relay terminal board 4460 and the sub-relay board 4075. The slot machine 4001 also has speakers 4009L, 4009R, various LEDs 4101, a touch sensor 4201a, and a display unit 4100, which are connected to the sub-control board 4072 via the sub-relay board 4075.

The pachislot machine 4001 also has a ROM cartridge board 4082 and a liquid crystal relay board 4480 connected to the sub-control board 4072. The ROM cartridge board 4082 and the liquid crystal relay board 4480 are stored in the sub-control board case together with the sub-control board 4072.

The ROM cartridge board 4082 is a board for managing the image (video), audio, light, and communication data for the performance. The LCD relay board 4480 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 4072 and the display unit 4100.

[Main operation processing of pachislots controlled by the main CPU]
Next, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot machine 4001 performed under the control of the main CPU 4031 will be explained with reference to the flowchart shown in Figure 110 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 4001, the main CPU 4031 performs the power-on initialization process (S3501). In this process, it is determined whether the backup was performed normally, whether the settings were changed appropriately, etc., and initialization is performed according to the result of the determination.

The main CPU 4031 then performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S3502). In this initialization process, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 4033 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data needs to be erased for each unit game, such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs a medal acceptance/start check process (S3503). This process checks inputs from the medal sensor 4042S and the start switch 4006S, etc.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs an internal lottery process (S3504). In this process, the main CPU 4031 refers to an internal lottery table (not shown) according to the current game state, and randomly selects a role to be determined as an internal winning role from among a plurality of roles. Next, the main CPU 4031 determines whether or not the roles "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have been determined as internal winning roles in the internal lottery process of S3504 (S3505). If the roles "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have been determined as internal winning roles (YES), the main CPU 4031 then turns on the RT5 game state flag and sets the game state to the inter-flag game state (S3506).

Following the processing of S3506, or if it is determined in S3505 that the roles "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have not been determined as the internal winning roles (NO), the main CPU 4031 then performs state-specific game control processing (which controls various processes according to the current ball output status) (S3507).

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs main-side navigation control processing (S3508). In this processing, the main CPU 4031 sets navigation data according to the current game state and the internal winning combination based on a predetermined correspondence. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub-control board 4072. Furthermore, notifications according to the set navigation data are made at any timing.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S3509). In this processing, reel stop control information to be used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S3505 and the current game state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 4033 and is used in the reel stop control processing of S3512.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs a start command transmission process (S3510). In this process, the main CPU 4031 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 4072. Note that the start command data includes various information necessary for the performance, such as an internal winning combination.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs wait processing and then reel spin start processing (S3511). In this processing, the main CPU 4031 requests all reels to start spinning. Then, when all reels are requested to start spinning, an interrupt process executed at a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec) accelerates each reel until its spinning speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs reel stop control processing (S3512). In this processing, the reel stop control information determined in S3509 is used to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the timing at which the left stop button 4007L, the middle stop button 4007C, and the right stop button 4007R are pressed.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S3513). In this winning determination medal payout process, a benefit according to the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line as a result of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R stopping is awarded, such as a medal payout or replay operation, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line. Next, the main CPU 4031 performs a winning activation command transmission process (S3514). In this process, the main CPU 4031 generates winning activation command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 4072. Note that the winning activation command data includes various information such as the combination of symbols displayed along the winning line.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs a BB check process (S3515). In this process, the main CPU 4031 controls the activation and termination of the bonus state. Then, the main CPU 4031 performs an RT check process (S3516). In this process, the main CPU 4031 controls the transition of the RT gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed.

Then, the main CPU 4031 performs CZ/ART end processing (S3517). In this processing, the main CPU 4031 performs a CZ pullback lottery. After performing CZ/ART end processing, the main CPU 4031 returns the processing to S3502, assuming that one game (unit game) has ended.

Next, a basic overview of a gaming system including a gaming display device 5001 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 111. As shown in the figure, the gaming system according to this embodiment is constructed in an amusement center or arcade, such as a pachinko parlor, and is configured with a gaming display device 5001, a gaming machine 5002, a gaming medium lending device 5003, and a server device 5004, each of which is connected as shown in the figure.

In this embodiment, a card is used as an example of a "storage medium," but this is not limited to this and includes anything that can be applied to the invention according to this embodiment, such as coins and tokens equipped with IC chips, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, paper money is used as an example of "currency," but this is not limited to this and includes all currency that can be applied to the invention according to this embodiment, such as paper money, coins, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the word "card" is simply used, it includes both a membership card lent to a player who has become a member of an amusement establishment, and a counting card (visitor card) temporarily lent by the amusement establishment.

In this embodiment, when the term "held balls" is used, it includes both the saved balls stored in association with the member card and the counted held balls stored in association with the counting card, and when the term "held ball information" is used, it includes both the held ball information indicating the saved balls (hereinafter referred to as "saved ball information") and the held ball information indicating the counted held balls (hereinafter referred to as "counted held ball information"). In addition, information indicating the amount of currency inserted by the player is referred to as "currency information" (or "balance information"), and when specifically indicated, "held ball information" may include "currency information". In addition, the member card is capable of separately storing saved ball information, counted held ball information, and currency information. Furthermore, for convenience of explanation, the term "held balls" is usually used to indicate information about the game balls held by the player, but this is not limited to this, and the "held balls" includes information about the medals held by the player, information about the game value held by the player by electromagnetic means, and all other similar information.

[Gaming display device]
The game display device 5001 will be briefly described with reference to Fig. 111. The detailed configuration of the game display device 5001 will be described later.

The game display device 5001 of this embodiment displays various game information as a projected image using a transparent projector device, and is installed, for example, above each game machine 5002. Game information such as the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired pieces or the number of acquired balls), the number of various games, and game history are displayed as graphs or numbers (see FIG. 115). The game display device 5001 is provided with a plurality of buttons 5014A to 5014F (described later) for the player to operate (see FIG. 115). The game display device 5001 is connected to the game machine 5002, the game media lending device 5003, and the server device 5004, and displays various game information on a screen (projection target) 5110A (described later) based on input signals, received signals, or player operations. The game display device 5001 may be installed on a so-called game island basis.

The gaming display device 5001 includes electrical and optical components such as a projector body 5012 (described later) and a control unit (not shown) for controlling the projector body 5012. The control unit controls the projector body 5012 and communications between the gaming machine 5002, the gaming medium lending device 5003, and the server device 5004. When the control unit detects the operation of buttons 5014A-5014F by a sensor, it controls the display on the screen 5110A in response to the operation. Note that while physical buttons 5014A-5014F are provided in this embodiment, the screen 5110A may be configured as a touch panel, for example, and the control unit may detect operations on the touch panel.

Although not shown, the gaming display device 5001 includes an interface unit for communicating with the gaming machine 5002, the gaming medium lending device 5003, and the server device 5004. This interface unit and an external connection terminal board in the gaming machine 5002, which will be described later, are connected by a contact input method, and one-way communication from the gaming machine 5002 to the gaming display device 5001 is possible. The interface unit and the gaming medium lending device 5003 are connected by a contact input/output method, for example, using a harness, and two-way communication is possible. The interface unit and the server device 5004 are connected by a wired LAN method, for example, using a coaxial cable, and are also connected by a contact output method, for two-way communication. Note that the connection method is not limited to these methods, and for example, a wireless LAN method or an optical communication method using an optical cable may be used for each connection. Furthermore, a combination of these methods may be used.

[Gaming machines]
The gaming machine 5002 will be briefly described with reference to Fig. 111. For example, a pachinko gaming machine 5002a or a pachislot gaming machine 5002b is applied as the gaming machine 5002. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the pachinko gaming machine 5002a and the pachislot gaming machine 5002b will be collectively referred to as the gaming machine 5002.

The pachinko game machine 5002a mainly plays a game in which game balls (game media) are ejected onto the surface of the board, and when a game ball that hits a nail and flows down irregularly enters a specific winning hole, a prize ball is paid out or a score is added. The pachinko game machine 5002a is equipped with a main control unit for controlling the main game device, a sub-control unit for controlling the performance operation related to display and sound output, and a payout control unit for controlling the payout operation of the game balls as prize balls. The payout control unit is connected to the game display device 5001 via an external connection terminal board, and outputs a game information signal, an error signal, etc. to the game display device 5001 after each game or when there is a change in the internal state. In addition, this payout control unit is connected to the game ball lending device 5003a via an external connection terminal board, and outputs a lending request signal or a return request signal based on the player's operation.

The pachislot gaming machine 5002b mainly plays a game in which a player inserts a coin (game medium) and operates a start lever to spin multiple reels with multiple symbols drawn on them, and then stops the reels sequentially by pressing the stop buttons corresponding to each reel, and pays out coins when symbols corresponding to a predetermined role are aligned on an active line. Like the pachinko gaming machine 5002a, the pachislot gaming machine 5002b also includes a main control unit for controlling the main gaming device, a sub-control unit for controlling the performance operations related to display and audio output, and a payout control unit for controlling the coin payout operation. The payout control unit is connected to the gaming display device 5001 via an external connection terminal board, and outputs a game information signal, an error signal, etc. to the gaming display device 5001 after each game or when there is a change in the internal state. This payout control unit is also connected to the medal lending device 5003b via an external connection terminal board, and outputs a lending request signal or a return request signal based on the player's operation.

[Gaming media lending device]
The game media lending device 5003 will be briefly described with reference to Fig. 111. The game media lending device 5003 includes a game ball lending device 5003a installed adjacent to a pachinko game machine 5002a and a medal lending device 5003b installed adjacent to a pachislot game machine 5002b. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the game ball lending device 5003a and the medal lending device 5003b are collectively referred to as the game media lending device 5003.

The game media lending device 5003 is connected to the server device 5004 via, for example, a switching hub or controller (not shown). When a player inserts a card into the game media lending device 5003, the game media lending device 5003 transmits identification information (hereinafter simply referred to as "identification information") such as a card ID or a member ID attached to an IC chip of the card to the server device 5004. The server device 5004 transmits the ball information of the player stored in association with the received identification information to the game media lending device 5003. When a payout instruction is received from the player, the server device 5004 updates the ball information, and the game media lending device 5003 drives a payout device (not shown) to execute payout control of the game media. When a player inserts a bill, the server device 5004 transmits the remaining amount information according to the amount of the bill (the amount inserted). Then, when a payout command is received from the player, the server device 5004 updates the remaining balance information, and the gaming media lending device 5003 similarly controls the payout of gaming media.

When gaming media are inserted into a counting device (not shown) by the player's operation or directly from the gaming machine 5002, the gaming media lending device 5003 counts the number of gaming media inserted and transmits the counting result to the server device 5004 as the player's counted ball information, and the server device 5004 stores the received counted ball information in association with the identification information attached to the card. Also, if no card is inserted, the server device 5004 stores the received counted ball information in association with the identification information previously attached to the counting card stored in the gaming media lending device 5003.

In this embodiment, the server device 5004 manages the ball information and remaining balance information of the player, but this information may also be managed by the game media lending device 5003. Furthermore, in addition to adding identification information to the card, a memory area may also be provided, and this information may be stored in the memory area and managed. Furthermore, the information may be updated by either the server device 5004 or the game media lending device 5003. Furthermore, the ball information may be managed by the game media lending device 5003 or the server device 5004, and the remaining balance information may be stored directly in the memory area of the card.

In addition, in this embodiment, when no card is inserted, the counting ball information and remaining balance information are stored in association with identification information that is pre-added to the counting card stored in the game media lending device 5003, but when a request is made to return the card, the game media lending device 5003 or the server device 5004 may add new identification information to the counting card stored in the game media lending device 5003, and store this newly added identification information in association with the counting ball information or remaining balance information.

In addition, if the gaming machine 5002 is provided with a gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board (hereinafter referred to as the "lending terminal board"), the gaming medium lending device 5003 is also connected to this lending terminal board, and based on receiving a lending request signal, a return request signal, etc. output from the lending terminal board, sends a payout request signal to the gaming machine 5002 or returns a card, etc.

The gaming medium lending device 5003 is also connected to the gaming display device 5001 via a converter or the like, and receives gaming information signals and error signals output from an external connection terminal board provided on the gaming machine 5002, and transmits information about the balls held by the player to the gaming display device 5001.

[Server device]
The server device 5004 will be briefly described with reference to Fig. 111. The server device 5004 is used as a so-called hall computer, and is connected to the game display device 5001 as well as to the game medium lending device 5003. The server device 5004 transmits to the game display device 5001 game result management information (e.g., payout history information including the past few days and fraud detection information) and information about the game parlor (e.g., new machine information, vacant machine information, etc.) that it manages.

The server device 5004 is also connected to an external management device (not shown) managed by a center operator, which is a third party other than the gaming facility, and transmits card identification information, member information, and information on the balls held by the player periodically (e.g., once a day). The external management device backs up the transmitted information. If the server device 5004 loses connection to the external management device for a specified number of days (e.g., 15 days), it stops updating the information on the balls held by the player.

In the gaming system described above, when a player enters an amusement store (amusement hall), he or she first sits down at the desired gaming machine 5002 while looking at various information displayed on the gaming display device 5001. Next, if the player is a member of the amusement store, the player inserts a membership card into the gaming medium lending device 5003, and after identity verification (for example, input of a registered PIN number, etc.), if the ball information is stored in the server device 5004, the player uses the balls, and if the ball information is not stored or the ball information is the number of balls that cannot be lent in the gaming machine 5002, the player inserts a bill, makes a lending request to receive the gaming medium, and inserts the gaming medium into the gaming machine 5002 to start playing. Alternatively, if the player is not a member of the amusement store, the player inserts a bill, makes a lending request to receive the gaming medium, and inserts the gaming medium into the gaming machine 5002 to start playing. At this time, the balls held and remaining balance information stored in the server device 5004 are updated (subtracted) by the amount lent out.

If the player continues playing without being able to receive a payout of gaming media from the gaming machine 5002, the held ball information and remaining balance information stored in the server device 5004 are updated (subtracted) by the amount of the loaned amount each time a loan request is made. On the other hand, if the player is able to receive a payout of gaming media from the gaming machine 5002, when the paid-out gaming media is inserted into the gaming media lending device 5003, the number of inserted gaming media is counted, and the held ball information stored in the server device 5004 is updated (added) based on the counting result.

After that, when the player wishes to finish playing on the gaming machine 5002, the player requests the return of the card. If the membership card is inserted into the gaming medium lending device 5003, the membership card is returned as is after identity verification (for example, entry of a registered PIN number, etc.). If the membership card is not inserted into the gaming medium lending device 5003, and if the server device 5004 stores counting ball information or has remaining balance information, the counting card stored in the gaming medium lending device 5003 is returned (issued). If the server device 5004 does not store counting ball information and there is no remaining amount deposited, the counting card is not returned (issued).

If the counting card is returned (issued) and you wish to play on another gaming machine 5002, you can insert the counting card into the gaming medium lending device 5003 provided for the other gaming machine 5002 to start (replay) the game using the same procedures as for a membership card (except for identity verification). In the above case, replay based on saved ball information is called "saved ball replay," and replay based on counted held ball information is called "held ball replay."

[Configuration of the gaming display device]
Next, the configuration of the game display device 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 113, the gaming display device 5001 has, as basic components, a housing 5010, a screen unit 5011A, a projector body (projection means) 5012, a reflector 5013, and an operation unit 5014. In addition to the projector body 5012, the reflector 5013, and the operation unit 5014, the housing 5010 houses a control unit (not shown) for controlling the overall operation of the gaming display device 5001. The screen unit 5011A is attached so as to cover the opening surface 5010A provided on the front side of the housing 5010. FIGS. 112 to 114 show a standard type screen unit 5011A, and unless otherwise specified, the description will be basically given using this screen unit 5011A, but any screen unit may be used.

As shown in FIG. 113, the housing 5010 is formed in a rectangular box shape having a bottom surface 5010a, left and right side surfaces 5010b, 5010c, a back surface 5010d, a top surface 5010e, and a front opening surface 5010A. A projector body 5012 is installed at the rear of the bottom surface 5010a, and an operation unit 5014 is installed at the front of the bottom surface 5010a. A reflector 5013 is installed at the top of the back surface 5010d.

The screen unit 5011A is formed to have a front part 5011a that covers the opening surface 5010A of the housing 5010, and left and right side parts 5011b, 5011c that are detachably fixed to the side surfaces 5010b, 5010c of the housing 5010. The screen unit 5011A has a screen (projection target part) 5110A provided in the opening 5011aa of the front part 5011a, and LED boards 5111 provided on the left and right sides of the rear surface of the front part 5011a, as shown in FIG. 114.

The front surface 5011a is provided with an opening 5011aa for placing the screen 5110A, as well as light-emitting surfaces 5111a that emit light on the left and right sides of the screen 5110A, and an opening 5112 for exposing the buttons 5014A to 5014F of the operation unit 5014 to the front.

The screen 5110A is a translucent type that displays a projected image projected from behind, and is formed primarily from a light-transmitting glass plate, acrylic plate, or resin film, for example, and is milky white, translucent, or gray when not projecting. The screen 5110A of the screen unit 5011A is formed to have an even thickness over its entire surface. Such a screen 5110A has a uniformly flat rear-side entrance surface 5100 (Figure 114) onto which the light projected from the projector body 5012 enters, and a front-side display surface 5101 (Figure 113) onto which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light that enters the entrance surface 5100.

As shown in Figures 113 and 114, the light-emitting surface 5111a is made of a translucent plate-like member, and an LED board 5111 is provided on the back side of the light-emitting surface 5111a. The LED board 5111 is equipped with a plurality of LEDs (not shown), and is connected to a control unit on the housing 5010 side via a connector 5111A and a cable 5111B. Note that while Figure 114 shows a connector 5111A and a cable 5111B corresponding to one LED board 5111, the other LED board 5111 is also provided with a connector and a cable, and is also connected to the control unit via a connector and a cable.

This control unit causes multiple LEDs on the LED board 5111 to light up or blink, and the light from these LEDs is emitted forward through the light-emitting surface 5111a.

The light-emitting surface 5111a is made of a plate-like material having translucency, but is not limited to this and may be made of a material at least partially having translucency and partially not having translucency.

In addition, in the translucent portion, a decorative sheet may be placed between the LED board and the plate-like member, or the plate-like member itself may be decorated with a translucent colored decoration. In such a case, the LED board functions as a light-emitting means having a light source, while the plate-like member functions as a decorative member decorated by the light-emitting means, and the decorative member may have optical properties such as translucency, diffusion, polarization, refraction, and reflection.

The projector body 5012 projects light to display information related to the game on a screen as a projected image, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal type using a liquid crystal panel, or a DLP (registered trademark: Digital Light Processing) type using a DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) element.

The projector body (projection means) 5012 is connected to a control unit (not shown), and its operation is controlled by this control unit. The projector body 5012 includes an LCD panel or DMD element, an LED or lamp as a light source, a dichroic mirror, a projection lens, and the like. The projection lens can be adjusted in the direction of the optical axis.

The projector body 5012 is arranged so that the light emitted from the projection lens is directed directly to the reflector 5013. When the screen unit 5011A is attached, the focus can be adjusted by finely adjusting the projection lens of the projector body 5012 in the optical axis direction. This allows a sharp, accurately focused projection image to be projected onto the screen 5110A of the screen unit 5011A.

The reflector 5013 is made of a material that reflects light, and is installed on the back surface 5010d at an angle to the opening surface 5010A of the housing 5010 so as to reflect the light incident from the projector body 5012 toward the opening surface 5010A (the entrance surface 5100 of the screen 5110A).

The operation unit 5014 has multiple buttons 5014A-5014F arranged side by side that can be operated by a player or the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 115, the operation unit 5014 is provided with, from the left, a switch button 5014A, a history button 5014B, a call button 5014C, a setting button 5014D, a confirmation button 5014E, and a cross button 5014F. The operation unit 5014 is connected to a control unit (not shown), and when the operation of each of the buttons 5014A-5014F is detected by a switch (not shown), a detection signal is supplied from the switch to the control unit, and the control unit performs display control in accordance with the detection signal.

The switch button 5014A is a button for switching between graph display and numerical display, which will be described later. The history button 5014B is a button for displaying today's gaming history. The call button 5014C is a button for calling an arcade attendant. The setting button 5014D is a button for changing display settings, etc. The confirmation button 5014E is a button for confirming various settings. The cross button 5014F is a button for changing numerical values and scrolling.

As shown in FIG. 115, the projected image V1 on the screen 5110A displays a chart image showing the number of medals won since the start of the game in a line graph. The projected image V2 displays a text image showing the number of bonuses executed today and the cumulative number of games.

Projected image V3 displays a text image showing the number of past bonuses and the cumulative number of games played as history. Note that the surface onto which light enters is the incident surface 5100, but the surface onto which light is projected (display surface) may also include the rear region of the LED board 5111, the regions above and below the incident surface 5100 (such as the front portion 5011a), and even the left and right regions (side portions 5011b, 5011c).

Even if the surface onto which light is projected in this manner is included inside the screen unit, it is sufficient that the projection image can be projected in the area in front of the projector body 5012 or in front of the reflector 5013.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a game display device according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 116 to 117. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those in the previously described embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 116 and 117, the game display device 5501 according to the fourth embodiment has a screen unit 5511D with a concave screen 5610D over the entire front surface, and the entire front surface of the screen 5610D is a gently sloping concave display surface 5601. This game display device 5501 does not have a light-emitting surface or buttons.

Also, as shown in FIG. 117, an LED board 5560 and a reflector 5561 are provided on the outside of the rear surface 5510d of the housing 5510, which is the rear surface side of the reflector 5513. The LED board 5560 is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 5560A positioned in a ring shape with respect to the rear surface 5510d, and the LEDs 5560A are arranged so that light can be irradiated toward the reflector 5561. The light of such LEDs 5560A is reflected by the reflector 5561, thereby illuminating the periphery of the gaming display device 5501 and the periphery of the screen 5610A from behind.

With this type of gaming display device 5501, a projection image can be projected onto the entire display surface 5601 of the screen 5610D, and the decorative effect can be enhanced by the light from behind by the LED 5560A.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the screen 5610D is formed in a concave shape, so that a three-dimensional image with depth can be displayed. This can further enhance the visual effect and decorative effect.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a game display device according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 118 to 120. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those in the above-described embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The fifth embodiment is configured to improve the visual effect and decorativeness by illuminating the upper edge of the concave screen 5610D shown in FIG. 116, for example.

As shown in FIG. 118, the gaming display device 5501 according to the fifth embodiment has a screen 5610D that is composed of an entrance surface 5600 (light guide) having a predetermined thickness and transmitting light, and a display surface 5601 (display) having a predetermined thickness and displaying a projected image. In addition, at least one board (LED board) 5570 is installed on the bottom surface 5510a of the housing 5510 near the lower edge of the screen 5610D, and a diffuse reflection section 5572 consisting of uneven parts that diffusely reflect light is provided on the upper edge of the entrance surface (light guide) 5600 of the screen 5610D.

The diffuse reflection section 5572 is provided over the entire upper edge of the screen 5610D. The base 5570 may be provided over the entire lower edge of the screen 5610D, or may be divided as appropriate. The position and emission angle of one or more light-emitting elements 5571 are appropriately adjusted so that light from the light-emitting elements reaches the diffuse reflection section 5572 uniformly over the entire surface.

This creates a horizontally elongated reflected light that borders the upper edge of the screen 5610D, improving the visual and decorative effects. Note that in the diagram shown in FIG. 118, an LED board 5560 and a reflector 5561 are provided on the back of the reflector 5513, but these can be omitted as appropriate.

In addition, to prevent light from the light-emitting element 5571 from leaking through the gap between the base 5570 and the bottom surface 5510a, a light-shielding member 5573 is installed in the gap to prevent light from leaking into the housing 5510.

Furthermore, a light-shielding member may be provided around the light-emitting element 5571 as appropriate to prevent light from the light-emitting element 5571 from being directed toward the display surface 5601 of the screen 5610D.

According to the fifth embodiment, the light from the light emitting element 5571 of the base 5570 provided near the lower edge of the screen 5610D is emitted so as to border the upper edge of the screen 5610D, thereby improving the visual effect and decorativeness of the gaming display device 5501. Moreover, by preventing the occurrence of leakage light from the light emitting element 5571 into the housing 5510, the irradiation efficiency is increased and the projected image on the screen 5610D is not affected. In addition, the base 5570 may be provided near the upper edge, left edge, and/or right edge of the screen 5610D, and the diffuse reflection section 5572 may be provided at the lower edge, right edge, and/or left edge of the incident surface (light guide section) 5600 in opposition to each of them. This allows each edge (upper edge, lower edge, right edge, and/or left edge) of the screen 5610D to be appropriately illuminated.

(Variation 1)
119, in order to prevent light from the light emitting element 5571 from leaking into the housing 5510 through a gap between the base 5570 and the bottom surface 5510a, the bottom surface 5510a having a light blocking function is modified so as to close the gap. This provides the same effects as the fifth embodiment and reduces the number of parts.

(Variation 2)
120, in the second modification, a board 5570 having a light-shielding function is disposed vertically, and the board 5570 itself prevents light from the light-emitting element from leaking into the housing 5510. This makes it possible to achieve the same effects as those of the fifth embodiment, and also to reduce the number of parts.

In addition, in the present modified examples 1 and 2, the LED board 5560 and the reflector 5561 can be omitted as appropriate.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, a gaming device according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 121 to 127. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those in the above embodiment will be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Figure 121 is a perspective view of a gaming device G1 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in Figure 121, the gaming device G1 has a housing G10 and a screen unit G11 configured with a screen G110 whose entire front surface is concave. The housing G10 has a base G101 and a projector housing G102.

Figure 122 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming device G1. As shown in Figure 122, the base G101 has a flat rear portion G101a and a bottom portion G101b, which respectively form the rear wall and bottom wall of the housing G10. The projector main body 5012 is mounted on the bottom portion G101b. In addition, a reflector 5013 is arranged along the inner wall of the rear portion G101a.

The projector housing G102 is attached to the bottom surface portion G101b so as to cover the projector body G12, thereby housing the projector body G12 in the internal space. The internal space is open at the top, allowing the image light emitted from the projector body G12 to reach the reflector G13 arranged on the back surface portion G101a. The screen unit G11 is attached so as to cover the reflector G13, and is configured so that the image light reflected by the reflector G13 is irradiated onto the screen G110.

In this way, the gaming device G1 of the sixth embodiment is a gaming display device that functions as a transmissive projector device, similar to the above-mentioned embodiments, but is not limited to this. For example, the gaming device may be a gaming display device with a built-in liquid crystal display or organic EL (Electro Luminescence). Furthermore, the gaming device is not limited to a gaming display device, and may be, for example, a gaming medium lending device or a unit for decorating a gaming machine that is installed on the gaming machine.

In the following description of the sixth embodiment, for convenience, the direction perpendicular to the main surface of the rear portion G101a may be referred to as the front-rear direction. In the front-rear direction, the screen unit G11 side of the rear portion G101a may be referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming device G1, and the side opposite the front side may be referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). Furthermore, the right side and left side when viewed from the front side may be referred to as the right side (right direction) and left side (left direction) of the gaming device G1, respectively, and the direction including the right side and left side may be referred to as the left-right direction. Furthermore, the direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction and left-right direction may be referred to as the up-down direction or height direction.

Figure 123 is a perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the rear side. As shown in Figures 121 to 123, a light guide plate G61 is arranged behind the rear portion G101a of the base G101 so as to be parallel to the rear portion G101a. That is, the light guide plate G61 is arranged parallel in the vertical and horizontal directions. The light guide plate G61 is translucent, and is capable of guiding incident light. In the sixth embodiment, the light guide plate G61 is formed as a flat plate having a substantially rectangular shape, but is not limited to this and may be any shape, such as a circle. As shown in Figure 123, the light guide plate G61 is fixed to the base G101 by a rear substrate cover G62.

The gaming device G1 is generally placed above the gaming machine 5002, and the screen G110 is arranged so that it faces the face of the player, with the screen G110 facing in a direction that slopes downward from the front. At this time, it is preferable that the light guide plate G61 is configured in a position and/or size such that the light guide plate G61 can be seen from the player above the screen G110.

Figure 124 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the rear side. As shown in Figure 124, the light guide plate G61 has a circular opening G61a formed to penetrate in the thickness direction. That is, the light guide plate G61 has a circular end face (opening side end face G61b) on the opening G61a side. In other words, the opening side end face G61b forms the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61. In the sixth embodiment, the opening G61a is formed in a circular shape, but is not limited to this and may be a square shape or the like. In addition, a part of the periphery of the opening G61a may coincide with the periphery of the light guide plate G61. That is, the opening G61a may be formed by providing a notch in the light guide plate G61.

The LED substrate G60 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the light guide plate G61 and the base body G101. That is, the LED substrate G60 is provided with the LED substrate G60, which is separate from the light guide plate G61. The LED substrate G60 is equipped with the LED substrate G60 at a position facing the opening side end face G61b on the light guide plate G61 side. More specifically, the LED substrate G60 is arranged at equal intervals along the opening side end face G61b on the LED substrate G60 so as to surround the opening G61a. In addition, when the opening G61a is formed by a notch, the LED substrate G60A is arranged in an arc shape along the notch. Each LED substrate G60A has an exit port in the direction facing the opening side end face G61b. Therefore, the LED substrate G60 radiates light from the LED substrate G60A toward the opening side end face G61b of the light guide plate G61. In addition, the optical axis of the light emitted from the multiple LEDs G60A is parallel to the light guide plate G61, so that the light incident on the light guide plate G61 travels through the light guide plate G61 and can reach the outer end face G61c that constitutes the periphery of the light guide plate G61. The thickness of the light guide plate G61 is set to be longer than the length of the LEDs G60A in the front-to-rear direction. This prevents the rear substrate cover G62 that fixes the light guide plate G61 from contacting the LEDs G60A located in the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61.

In this way, the light from the multiple LEDs G60A arranged in the opening G61a of the light guide plate G61 is incident from the opening side end face G61b of the light guide plate G61, and then guided inside the light guide plate G61, illuminating the entire area of the outer end face G61c of the light guide plate G61. As a result, the light emitted from the multiple LEDs G60A spreads radially inside the light guide plate G61 and reaches the outer end face G61c, making it possible to illuminate the entire periphery of the light guide plate G61 in a ring shape, making the illuminated light guide plate G61 visible from any direction of the gaming device G1, and improving the identifiability of the gaming machine to which the gaming device G1 is attached.

The LED board G60 is capable of individually controlling the lighting of the multiple LEDG60A. The LED board G60 has a memory (not shown) in which multiple lighting patterns are stored, and controls the multiple LEDG60A with a lighting pattern corresponding to an external signal or the like. For example, the LED board G60 selects a lighting pattern corresponding to a signal indicating the game state transmitted from the gaming machine or an operation performed on an input device (not shown) of the gaming device G1, and controls the multiple LEDG60A based on the lighting pattern. For example, by controlling the multiple LEDG60A with a lighting pattern that sequentially lights up in the order of arrangement, a drive performance in which light flows around the periphery of the light guide plate G61 is possible. In addition, by selecting full-color LEDs for the multiple LEDG60A, various notifications can be made, such as lighting up red when a call input is made by the player by operating a touch sensor, which will be described later, or flashing yellow when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine.

The light guide plate G61 is provided with a reflection treatment at multiple locations that reflects a portion of the light from the LED G60A inside the light guide plate G61 in the thickness direction toward the base G101 side. The reflection treatment is applied to the light guide plate G61 to form a shape with design, so that illumination of that shape appears on the main surface of the light guide plate G61. The reflection treatment of the light guide plate G61 will be specifically described below by illustrating the optical path pattern of the light traveling inside the light guide plate G61.

Figures 125A and 125B are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the optical path pattern of light from LED G60A traveling through the light guide plate G61. As shown in Figure 125A, if no reflection processing is applied to the optical path of the light from LED G60A, the light emitted from LED G60A enters the light guide plate G61 from the opening side end face G61b, travels in the surface direction (up and down direction) within the light guide plate G61, and reaches the outer end face G61c. This causes the entire periphery of the light guide plate G61 to be illuminated in a ring shape.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125B, the light guide plate G61 has a reflecting portion G61d that reflects light traveling in the surface direction (up and down direction) of the light guide plate G61. In the sixth embodiment, the reflecting portion G61d is a recess formed on the main surface of the light guide plate G61 opposite the LED substrate G60. The reflecting portion G61d has a reflecting surface whose normal is inclined 45 degrees in the thickness direction (forward direction) with respect to the optical path of the light from the LED G60A, and reflects the light that reaches the reflecting portion G61d toward the LED substrate G60 in the thickness direction (forward direction) of the light guide plate G61. The reflecting portion G61d may be provided inside the light guide plate by processing such as laser processing.

Figure 126 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the illumination mode of the light guide plate G61. As shown in Figure 126, light is emitted radially from the LED G60A (see Figure 124) arranged in the opening G61a, reaches the outer end face G61c, and illuminates the periphery of the light guide plate G61. In addition, a portion of the light from the LED G60A (see Figure 124) is reflected forward by the reflecting portion G61d, forming a bright spot on the main surface of the light guide plate G61. The reflecting portions G61d are arranged in groups to form a design, and the bright spots formed by reflection of the reflecting portions G61d pointillize the design.

Figure 127 is an exploded perspective view showing the gaming device G1 from the rear side. As shown in Figure 127, the multiple LEDs G60A are provided on an LED board G60 that is separate from the light guide plate G61. The LED board G60 and the light guide plate G61 are each provided with an alignment portion G60e and an alignment portion G61e for aligning the multiple LEDs G60A so that they are positioned opposite the opening side end face G61b of the light guide plate G61.

Specifically, the alignment portion G60e is four through holes that penetrate in the front-rear direction provided at the four corners of the light guide plate G61. The alignment portion G61e is four through holes that penetrate in a manner corresponding to the four alignment portions G60e. Similarly, alignment portions G62e are formed on the rear substrate cover G62 that sandwiches the light guide plate G61 with the LED substrate G60.

The rear surface G101a of the base G101 is provided with an alignment member G101e for aligning the LED substrate G60 and the alignment portions G60e, G61e of the light guide plate G61. The alignment member G101e has a cylindrical shape with a cross section that engages with the alignment portions G60e, G61e, G62e, is longer than the combined thickness of the LED substrate G60, the light guide plate G61, and the rear substrate cover G62, and is provided protruding rearward from the base G101.

In this way, the LED board G60, the light guide plate G61, and the rear board cover G62 are detachably arranged on the base G101. The alignment portions G60e, G61e, and G62e of the LED board G60, the light guide plate G61, and the rear board cover G62 are sequentially inserted into the alignment member G101e of the base G101 to align them.

When the light guide plate G61 is aligned, first, the alignment portion G61e of the light guide plate G61 is aligned with and inserted into the protruding end of the alignment member G101e of the base G101. Then, the light guide plate G61 is moved forward while its movement in the up-down and left-right directions is restricted by the alignment member G101e, and is positioned so as to be placed on the LED substrate G60. In this way, the light guide plate G61 is restricted to movement only in the forward-backward direction by the alignment member G101e. This makes it possible to prevent the light guide plate G61 from coming into contact with the LED G60A that is provided to be placed on the LED substrate G60 during alignment.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, a gaming device according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 128 to 131. Components that are the same as or similar to those in the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and will not be described. In the seventh embodiment, a different aspect of the projector housing G102 (see Figs. 122 and 123) described in the sixth embodiment will be described, and other configurations will be omitted as they are the same as those in the sixth embodiment.

Figure 128 is a perspective view of the projector housing F102 of the gaming device F1 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in Figure 128, the projector housing F102 is attached to the base G101 below the screen unit G11 so as to cover the projector body G12 (see Figure 122), thereby housing the projector body G12 in the internal space. As in the sixth embodiment, the internal space is open at the top, allowing the image light emitted from the projector body G12 to reach the reflector G13 arranged on the back part G101a. Furthermore, the projector housing F102 of the seventh embodiment has a function as an input device that accepts input from the player and a function of notifying the player. The projector housing F102 will be described in detail below.

The projector housing F102 has an exterior panel F1021 that forms the front outer shape of the projector housing F102. The exterior panel F1021 has a touch area F1021a, a speaker unit F1021c, and a light receiving unit F1021d.

The touch area F1021a is a rectangular input area set according to the shape of the touch sensor F1022 (see FIG. 129) described later. The touch area F1021a is provided with a light-transmitting portion F1021b having light-transmitting properties, and light irradiated from the back side can be transmitted through the touch area F1021a. In the seventh embodiment, the light-transmitting portion F1021b is composed of, but is not limited to, a rectangular design showing the touch area F1021a, a picture showing a "hand" arranged within the rectangular design, and text showing "CALL". In the seventh embodiment, the exterior panel F1021 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and then printed with non-transmitting ink so as to leave the light-transmitting portion F1021b, but is not limited to this. For example, a light-transmitting material may be provided so as to be flush with the exterior panel F1021, or a through hole may simply penetrate the exterior panel F1021. In addition, the light-transmitting portion F1021b may have a through-hole formed through the exterior panel F1021, and an optical sheet (optical film) for diffusely reflecting light may be provided on the back side.

The speaker unit F1021c is a through hole for outputting sound from the speaker F10253 (see Figures 129 and 130) described below to the outside. The light receiving unit F1021d is an input device for receiving signals from the outside, such as infrared rays.

Figure 129 is an exploded perspective view of the projector housing F102. As shown in Figure 129, the projector housing F102 has the above-mentioned exterior panel F1021, a touch sensor F1022, a light guide plate F1023, an LED array F1024 provided on the upper edge of the light guide plate F1023, a substrate F1025, a frame body F1026, and a housing base F1027.

The housing base F1027, together with the exterior panel F1021, forms the outer shape of the projector housing F102, and houses the touch sensor F1022, light guide plate F1023, LED array F1024, and substrate F1025 between the housing base F1027 and the exterior panel F1021. The housing base F1027 is also provided with the above-mentioned speaker and a light receiving element for the light receiving unit F1021d to receive optical signals from the outside. The projector main body G12 (see FIG. 122) is housed on the opposite side of the housing base F1027 to the exterior panel F1021. The housing base F1027 is also provided with a speaker F10253 on the upper left of the front side for outputting sound from the speaker unit F1021c.

The substrate F1025 has the function of receiving input from the touch sensor F1022 and the light receiving unit F1021d, and the function of controlling the lighting of the LED array F1024.

The LED array F1024 is an LED unit in which multiple full-color LEDs are arranged in parallel, and emits light in a planar manner from the upper edge of the light guide plate F1023 toward the light guide plate F1023. The light guide plate F1023 is provided on the back side of the touch sensor F1022, and reflects the light from the LED array F1024 by a reflective sheet provided on the rear side of the light guide plate F1023 while traveling, and emits the light from a diffusion sheet provided on the front side of the light guide plate F1023. That is, the light guide plate F1023 has the function of guiding the light from the LED array F1024 toward the light-transmitting portion F1021b of the exterior panel F1021 provided on the front side through the touch sensor F1022. This illuminates the light-transmitting portion F1021b, which has light-transmitting properties.

The touch sensor F1022 is translucent and is arranged on the back side of the exterior panel F1021 in correspondence with the touch area F1021a. This allows the touch sensor F1022 to detect touch input to the touch area F1021a by the player.

The touch sensor F1022, the light guide plate F1023 on which the LED array F1024 is arranged, and the substrate F1025 are attached to the frame F1026, and are then attached to the center of the housing base F1027 on the exterior panel F1021 side.

[Configuration of the Seventh Embodiment]
FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the projector container F102. As shown in FIG. 130, the board F1025 has a control circuit F10250, a ROM F10251, a RAM F10252, and a communication interface F10254. The control circuit F10250 has a CPU and circuits for controlling the LED array F1024 and the speaker F10253. The ROM F10251 stores a lighting pattern for controlling the lighting of the LED array. The RAM F10252 temporarily stores input information from the outside. The communication interface F10254 is for communicating with the gaming machine 5002 (see FIG. 111) and, for example, the LED board G60 (see FIG. 124). Note that communication from the gaming machine 5002 may be performed via the LED board G60 or a control board (not shown) that controls the LED board G60. Also, instead of receiving signals directly from the gaming machines, the signals may be received indirectly from other devices, such as a server or controller within the gaming center.

In this way, the substrate F1025 is configured to be able to change the illumination of the light-transmitting portion F1021b based on information from the touch sensor F1022 and the gaming machine 5002. In addition, since it is connected to the LED substrate G60 for illuminating the light guide plate G61 arranged on the rear surface of the gaming device G1, it is possible to perform effects and notifications in which the illumination of the light-transmitting portion F1021b and the illumination of the light guide plate G61 are synchronized, for example.

Figure 131 is a flowchart of the control process executed by the control circuit F10250. The operation of the control circuit F10250 will be explained with reference to Figure 131.

As shown in FIG. 131, first, the control circuit F10250 determines whether or not there is an input (step S4001). Input includes an input to the touch sensor F1022 by the player and an input of a signal indicating the game status from the gaming machine 5002. If there is no input (step S4001: NO), step S4001 is executed again. Note that there may be a control process when there is no input. For example, the light-transmitting portion F1021b (LED array F1024) may continue to be illuminated in a predetermined manner as long as there is no input to the touch sensor F1022.

If there is an input (step S4001: YES), the control circuit F10250 determines the type of input (step S4002). Thereafter, the control circuit F10250 determines the control target (step S4003). That is, the control circuit F10250 selects the actuator to be controlled according to the input type. The actuators include the LED array F1024, the speaker F10253, and the multiple LEDs G60A of the LED board G60. That is, the ROM F10251 stores a data table in which the actuators to be controlled correspond to the input type, and the control circuit F10250 refers to the data table to obtain the actuator corresponding to the input type.

Then, the control circuit F10250 selects a predetermined control pattern for controlling the actuator (step S4004). That is, the ROM F10251 stores a data table in which the control patterns of the actuators correspond to the input types, and the control circuit F10250 refers to the data table to obtain the control pattern for each actuator.

Then, the control circuit F10250 controls the actuator with the selected control pattern (step S4005) and ends the process. Specifically, when there is an input from the player to the touch sensor F1022, the control circuit F10250 controls the illumination state of the light-transmitting portion F1021b (LED array F1024) to change to a predetermined pattern. When controlling multiple LEDG60A in response to the input to the touch sensor F1022, the control circuit F10250 transmits a control signal to the LED board G60 or a control board that controls the LED board G60, and controls the multiple LEDG60A.

When the player touches the touch panel, the control circuit F10250 may instruct the LED board G60 and/or the projector control means to emit light from the LED G60A in a predetermined manner and/or to display a predetermined image on the screen G110. When the control circuit F10250 instructs the LED board G60 to emit light, not only the light-transmitting portion F1021b of the touch area F1021a in front of the player and the screen G110, but also the light guide plate G61, which is larger than the main body and visible from the side of the gaming machine, is lit in a predetermined manner (for example, red light), making it easier for the manager of the gaming facility to identify the gaming machine being called (the gaming machine to which the gaming device G1 to which the player has made the call input is attached). In addition, when the arcade manager arrives at the called gaming machine, he or she usually operates the touch sensor F1022 (touch area F1021a) to turn off the light, but the LED board F1025 may be configured to change the lighting state of the LEDG60A depending on the time from the touch operation. For example, the control circuit F10250 may control the LEDG60A to light up red when the player operates the machine, change it to flashing red 30 seconds after the player operates the machine, and change it to flashing red faster than before after one minute has passed since the player operates the machine. This allows the arcade manager to determine at a glance the time from the player's operation even if he or she is away from the gaming machine, and allows the manager to prioritize the operations even if there are multiple called gaming machines, making it possible to provide appropriate service to the player.

In this way, when there is a touch input to the touch area F1021a, the control circuit F10250 controls to change the lighting state of the LEDG60A, which is a plurality of light sources for the light guide plate G61. In addition, the control circuit F10250 controls to change the lighting state of the plurality of LEDG60A according to the elapsed time from the timing of the touch input to the touch area F1021a. Here, the change in the lighting state includes a change from an unlit state to a lighting state, and a change from a lighting state to a specific lighting state. In addition, the change in the lighting state of the LEDG60A may be an intermittent change at a predetermined timing as described above, or may be a continuous change (gradual change in color, gradual change in blinking interval) according to the elapsed time. In addition, the control of the plurality of LEDG60A based on the touch input to the touch area F1021a is not limited to being performed by sending an instruction signal from the control circuit F10250 to the LED board G60 and/or the projector control means, as described above. For example, the gaming device F1 may be configured so that multiple LEDGs 60A are connected to the control circuit F10250, so that the control circuit F10250 directly controls multiple LEDGs 60A.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, a gaming device according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 132 to 145. Components identical to or similar to those in the above-mentioned embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described. The gaming device according to the eighth embodiment is a gaming display device that functions as a transmissive projector device, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, but is not limited thereto. For example, the gaming device may be a gaming display device with a built-in liquid crystal display or organic EL (Electro Luminescence). In this embodiment, the gaming device is a data display device, but is not limited thereto. For example, the gaming device may be a gaming medium lending device, or a unit for decorating a gaming machine that is provided on the gaming machine.

[Configuration of the eighth embodiment]
Fig. 132 is a perspective view of a data display H1 and a gaming machine H2 according to the eighth embodiment Fig. 133 is a perspective view of the data display H1 according to the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 132, the data display H1 is installed individually above the gaming machine H2 in the gaming arcade. In the present invention, the gaming machine H2 is configured to have different presentation modes depending on the gaming state, and the data display H1 is configured to execute presentation modes corresponding to the presentation modes of the gaming machine H2. In other words, the data display H1 is configured to be able to detect the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 based on the presentation modes of the gaming machine H2.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132, the gaming machine H2 has a main body H32 and a base door H33 pivotally attached to the main body H32 so as to be freely opened and closed. A top lamp H60 is arranged to form the upper end region of the base door H33. The top lamp H60 is an illumination device that has a full-color LED and projects light from the full-color LED onto a translucent member that forms part of the housing of the base door H33 to emit light. As the top lamp H60 is thus arranged to form the upper end region of the base door H33, the light emission mode of the top lamp H60 is visible from the front side, side side, and top side of the gaming machine H2. The top lamp H60 is controlled in the gaming machine H2 to function as a light-emitting means for performance that changes the lighting mode depending on the game state. In addition, the data display H1 has a container H102 having the same function as the projector container G102 of the above-mentioned embodiment, and supports the screen unit H11. Note that FIG. 132 shows an example in which a data display H1 is provided on a pachinko gaming machine as the gaming machine H2, but this is not limited to this and may also be a pachislot gaming machine.

As shown in Figures 132 and 133, the housing H102 has a similar configuration to the projector housing G102 of the above embodiment, and also incorporates a camera unit H12. The camera unit H12 has a CMOS image sensor and a control device that controls the sensor. The camera unit H12 is disposed at the bottom of the housing H102 so that it can capture an image of at least a portion of the top lamp H60. That is, the data display H1 is disposed at the top of the gaming machine H2 so that the top lamp H60 is included in the imaging range of the camera unit H12. For example, the data display H1 is configured as a separate housing from the gaming machine H2, and is held at the top of the gaming machine H2 by a predetermined holding means.

As a result, the camera unit H12 functions as an image acquisition means that captures an image of the top lamp H60 and acquires an image including the lighting state of the top lamp H60. Therefore, the data display H1 can have the function of acquiring continuous images by the camera unit H12, thereby determining the lighting state of the gaming machine H2, and judging the gaming state of the gaming machine H2. In other words, the camera unit H12 functions as a lighting state detection means that detects the lighting state of the top lamp H60. Note that while the camera unit H12 has been given as an example of lighting state detection means, this is not limiting, and any other means that can detect the lighting state of light, such as a sensor, may be used.

In this way, the data display H1 is configured to be able to grasp the gaming status of the gaming machine H2 by detecting the lighting state of the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2. This allows the data display H1 to determine the gaming status of the gaming machine H2 based on the lighting state of the top lamp H60 detected by the camera unit H12. Therefore, the data display H1 can have the function of executing a presentation in a manner corresponding to the lighting state of the top lamp H60 detected by the camera unit H12.

The gaming device of the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, as long as it has a state detection function for detecting the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine has a presentation device for changing the presentation mode according to the gaming state so that the gaming device can detect the gaming state. For example, the gaming machine may be provided with a directional speaker that is oriented in the direction in which the gaming device is installed (the top of the own machine) and output presentation sounds of different patterns according to the gaming state. As a result, the gaming device can detect the gaming state of the gaming machine by the detected sound by having a microphone (sound collection device). In addition, it may determine whether the sound is the own machine's sound based on the volume of the sound detected by the microphone. In addition, by using a directional speaker, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the gaming device in determining whether the sound is from the corresponding gaming machine. In addition, in order to improve accuracy, the gaming device may be provided with a directional microphone that is oriented in the direction of the speaker of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible for the gaming device to determine the gaming state of the gaming machine regardless of the presence or absence of a data communication path by wire or wireless.

[Electrical configuration: gaming machine]
FIG. 134 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine. The gaming machine H2 includes a main control unit H301a for controlling a main device group H303a, a sub-control unit H302a for controlling a sub-device group H304a, and a payout control unit H305 for controlling a payout device group H306. The main control unit H301a is connected to the sub-control unit H302a by one-way communication, and the main control unit H301a and the payout control unit H305 are connected to each other so as to be able to communicate in two directions. In addition, the payout control unit H305 is connected to an external terminal board H308a by one-way communication. The main control unit H301a and the sub-control unit H302a each include a CPU, a ROM in which programs and the like are stored, and a RWM (Read Write Memory) in which information on games and performances is stored.

The main device group H303a is composed of, for example, a start port switch, a count switch, a winning port switch, a normal electric role solenoid, a winning port solenoid, etc., and the main control unit H301a controls the progress of the game in the gaming machine 5002 by controlling these devices. In addition, the main control unit H301a sends commands according to changes in the game state, etc. to the sub-control unit H302a and the payout control unit H305.

The sub-device group H304a has a top lamp H60 and an illumination control circuit H61 that controls the top lamp H60 and other lamps. The sub-device group H304a also has, for example, a liquid crystal module, a performance button sensor, a role control circuit, an illumination control circuit, and a speaker control circuit. The sub-controller H302a controls the performance in the gaming machine 5002 by controlling these devices based on commands sent from the main controller H301a.

The payout device group H306 is composed of, for example, a payout control circuit, a payout ball detection switch, a launch control circuit, a touch switch, etc., and the payout control unit H305 controls these devices based on commands sent from the main control unit H301a, or automatically controls these devices to control the launch and payout of game balls in the gaming machine H2.

Although not shown, the gaming machine H2 has a lending terminal board connected to the payout control unit H305. The gaming machine H2 is connected to the gaming medium lending device 5003 (see FIG. 111) via the lending terminal board, and outputs a lending request signal or a return request signal based on the player's operation.

The payout control unit H305 is also connected to the data display H1 via the external terminal board H308a, and outputs game information signals, error signals, etc. after each game or when there is a change in the internal state.

Referring to FIG. 135, a block diagram showing the configuration of a gaming machine H2 as a pachislot machine is illustrated. The gaming machine H2 includes a main control unit H301b that controls a main device group H303b, and a sub-control unit H302b that controls a sub-device group H304b, and the main control unit H301b is connected to the sub-control unit H302b via one-way communication. An external terminal board H308b is also connected to the main control unit H301b via one-way communication. The main control unit H301b and the sub-control unit H302b each include a CPU, a ROM in which programs and the like are stored, and an RWM in which information related to games and performances is stored.

The main device group H303b is composed of, for example, a reel control circuit, a medal sensor, a start lever sensor, a stop button sensor, a hopper control circuit, etc., and the main control unit H301b controls the progress of the game in the gaming machine H2 by controlling these devices. In addition, the main control unit H301a sends commands to the sub-control unit H302b in response to changes in the game state, etc.

The sub-device group H304b has a top lamp H60 and an illumination control circuit H61 that controls the top lamp H60 and other lamps. The sub-device group H304b is also composed of, for example, a liquid crystal module, a performance button sensor, a role control circuit, an illumination control circuit, a speaker control circuit, etc., and the sub-control unit H302b controls the performance in the gaming machine H2 by controlling these devices based on commands sent from the main control unit H301b.

The main control unit H301b is connected to the data display H1 via the external terminal board H308b, and outputs game information signals, error signals, etc. after each game or when there is a change in the internal state.

In addition, even in the gaming machine H2 as a pachislot machine, the main control unit H301b may be connected to the gaming medium lending device 5003 via a lending terminal board and configured to output a lending request signal or a return request signal based on the player's operation.

[Electrical configuration: data display]
136 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the data display H1. The data display H1 includes a camera unit H12, a projector body 5012, a video display unit H405 such as a screen unit G11, an illumination unit H406 such as an LED G60A, an audio output unit H407 such as a speaker F10253, a sensor group H404, a control unit H401, a ROM H402, and a RAM H403. The control unit H401 includes a CPU and a control circuit board on which the CPU is provided, and drives and controls the devices connected to it.

The ROM H402 stores a control program for implementing the functions of the data display H1. The control unit H401 reads out and executes the control program stored in the ROM H402 to control each component, and realizes functions such as determining the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 and executing a presentation in a manner corresponding to the gaming state (lighting state) of the gaming machine H2. The control unit H401 also controls communications with the server device H4 and the gaming machine H2.

The sensor group H404 includes the touch sensor F1022 (see FIG. 129) of the embodiment described above, and is a plurality of sensors for detecting an external operation on the touch area F1021a (see FIG. 129) of the exterior panel F1021. When an operation is detected by these sensors, the control unit H401 controls the display content on the video display unit H405, the light emission state on the illumination unit H406, and the audio output state on the audio output unit H407 in accordance with the operation. When the display screen of the video display unit H405 is made to function as a touch panel, the sensor group H404 includes a sensor for detecting a touch operation on this touch panel.

The communication interface H410 is an interface for communicating with the server device H4 and the gaming machine H2, and is also a conversion module that converts input information into the most suitable format when outputting it. Although not shown, the communication interface H410 is connected to the gaming medium lending device 5003 (see FIG. 111) by a harness using a contact input/output method, enabling two-way communication. The communication interface H410 and the server device H4 are connected by a coaxial cable using a wired LAN method, and are also connected by a harness using a contact output method, enabling two-way communication. The communication interface H410 and the external terminal board H308 in the gaming machine H2 are connected by a contact input method, providing one-way communication from the gaming machine H2 to the data display H1. The connection method is not limited to these methods, and a wireless LAN method or an optical communication method using an optical cable may be used for each connection. Furthermore, a combination of these methods may be used.

The RAM H403 functions as a storage means for storing various data. For example, the control unit H401 stores the control results of each connected component in the RAM H403. The RAM H403 also stores a data table for determining the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 and a data table for executing a performance according to the gaming state. In this embodiment, the data display H1 is capable of downloading these data tables and video data and audio data used for the performance from the server device H4. That is, the control unit H401 has a function of downloading a data table for determining the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 and a data table for executing a performance according to the gaming state from the server device H4 via the communication interface H410. That is, the server device H4 has a function of distributing a data table for determining the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 and a data table for executing a performance according to the gaming state to the data display H1. However, without being limited thereto, for example, the data display H1 may be configured such that the communication interface H410 has a USB connection terminal and is capable of transferring a data table from an external storage device or the like to the RAM H403. Also, the data display H1 may be configured such that the sensor group H404 has an infrared sensor and the data table can be set using a remote control or the like.

As described above, the camera unit H12 is provided to capture an image of the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2. When an image including the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 is acquired by the camera unit H12, the control unit H401 determines the gaming state based on the image and executes a presentation according to the gaming state. The control unit H401 controls the video display unit H405, the illumination unit H406, and the audio output unit H407 to execute the presentation.

[Electrical configuration: Data display: Data table]
The data tables stored in the RAM H403 of the data display H1 will be described with reference to Fig. 137 and Fig. 138. Fig. 137 is a game state determination table for determining the game state. Fig. 138 is an effect pattern table for executing effects according to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 137, the game status determination table has a lighting mode column and a game status column. The lighting mode of the top lamp H60 is stored in the lighting mode column. The game status column stores the game status corresponding to the lighting pattern. The control unit H401 of the data display H1 determines the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 based on the image acquired by the camera unit H12, and acquires the game status corresponding to the determined lighting mode by referring to the game status determination table.

Here, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 controlled by the sub-controller H302b of the gaming machine H2 will be described. In this embodiment, the sub-controller H302b controls the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 to vary within a range that is difficult for humans to perceive, thereby causing the top lamp H60 to be lit in a mode that corresponds to the gaming state. In this embodiment, the range of the blinking cycle that is difficult for humans to perceive is 50 Hz or more, but is not limited to this.

For example, if the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is 50 Hz, the top lamp H60 repeats a set of turning on and off every 1/50 seconds. That is, the top lamp H60 turns on for 1/100 seconds, turns off for 1/100 seconds, and repeats this cycle. For a top lamp H60 with such a lighting mode, if the frame rate of the camera unit H12 is 100 fps (frames per second), an image in which the top lamp H60 turns on and off alternately frame by frame is acquired. In this case, the control unit H401 determines that the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 is 50 Hz (repeated 1/100 second lighting and 1/100 second off). In this way, the control unit H401 determines the pattern of the lighting and extinguishing of the top lamp H60 by the image recognition program, and identifies the lighting mode (blinking cycle) of the top lamp H60. That is, in this embodiment, the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is stored in the lighting mode column of the game state determination table.

In addition, the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 may be changed while keeping the duration of each blink unchanged, so that the blinking cycle can be determined based on the ratio of the number of images in the lit state to the number of images captured in a specified period.

The lighting mode according to the game status is not limited to being changed by changing the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 in a range that is difficult for people to recognize. For example, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 may have any blinking cycle (e.g., blinking at less than 50 Hz), the game status may be indicated by changing the light emission color, or a combination of these may indicate the game status.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game state is determined using a game state determination table, and then a presentation pattern according to the game state is selected, but this is not limited to this. The presentation pattern may be set in correspondence with the lighting state of the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2. In other words, it is sufficient that the data display H1 is configured to be able to execute presentations according to the game state.

The gaming machine H2 also has a data table similar to the gaming state determination table in a storage unit (not shown). The gaming machine H2 refers to the lighting pattern in the lighting mode column that corresponds to its own gaming state, and controls the top lamp H60 with that lighting pattern.

As shown in FIG. 138, the presentation pattern table has a game status column, a video display column, a sound output column, an illumination column, and a termination condition column. The game status column stores the game status to which the gaming machine H2 can transition. That is, not only the game status determined based on the lighting state of the top lamp H60, but also the game status transmitted directly from the gaming machine H2 via the external terminal board H308 is stored. The video display column stores the video pattern displayed by the video display unit H405 corresponding to the game status. For example, the video pattern indicates the video data or a combination of video data stored in the RAM H403 by the data display H1. The sound output column stores the audio pattern output by the audio output unit H407 corresponding to the game status. For example, the audio pattern indicates the audio data or a combination of audio data stored in the RAM H403 by the data display H1. The illumination column stores the illumination pattern that the illumination unit H406 emits light in response to the game status. For example, the illumination pattern indicates the lighting pattern of each illumination provided on the gaming machine H2.

The end condition column stores the end condition of the presentation corresponding to the game state. For example, this end condition is referenced in an error state in which the lighting state of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected after the presentation on the data display H1 has started, such as when it is blocked by the player's hand or luggage, and if the end condition is met, the presentation is forcibly terminated. Note that if the presentation by the data display H1 corresponds to a game state that can be determined based on information transmitted from the external terminal board H308, there may be no end condition.

A specific example of the termination condition stored in the termination condition column will be described. For example, a case where the gaming state is the BB gaming state described below will be described. Generally, the external terminal board H308 is maintained in the ON state while the gaming machine state is the BB gaming state. Then, when the end state of the BB gaming state is satisfied on the gaming machine H2 side (for example, when the gaming machine H2 has executed a payout of more than 300 coins), the dedicated terminal becomes the OFF state. In other words, the data display H1 is able to recognize the start to end of the BB gaming state from the external terminal board H308. Therefore, the data display H1 only needs to stop the presentation corresponding to the BB gaming state when the signal becomes the OFF state, and there is no need to set a forced termination condition due to an error.

Also, for example, when the game state is a special ART game state described later, the add-on specialization zone described later may start immediately after the game started in the ART game state. Since the add-on specialization zone is confirmed to continue for 1G or more, the forced termination condition of the special ART game state when the start of the special ART game state can be detected is the termination condition for the performance time of one game, which is the minimum number of continuing games. Since the pachislot machine in this embodiment is set to 4.1 seconds between games, if an error state occurs in which the lighting state of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected, the count is started, and if the previous IN (insertion) signal cannot be detected within 4.1 seconds after it is received from the external terminal board H308, the termination condition of the performance is set. Note that it may be set to 4.1 seconds from the OUT (payout) signal, or it may be set to 4.1 seconds from the timing when the start of the special ART game state can be detected, and it may be changed appropriately depending on the corresponding gaming machine. In actual operation, on the gaming machine side, an IN (insertion) signal is sent from the external terminal board H308 based on the start operation performed after placing a bet, and the added specialized zone starts. On the display side, counting begins after receiving the IN signal, and if no state occurs during that time in which the lighting mode cannot be detected, the presentation on the display side is changed when the lighting mode becomes something other than that of the specialized zone after a predetermined number of games (for example, the specialized zone continues for 5G). On the other hand, if an undetectable error occurs 1 second after the first G count, the presentation continues at the time of occurrence, and if the error has not been resolved even after a cumulative 4.1 seconds have passed since the start of the count, the presentation on the display side is changed. If the error is resolved before 4.1 seconds have passed, the presentation related to the specialized zone continues as is.

As such, it is preferable to set the termination condition to a period that will ensure execution even if an error state occurs in which the lighting state of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected. In other words, if the minimum guaranteed number of games for the gaming state is determined, the termination condition is the time obtained by multiplying that number of games by the specified time, and if the gaming state ends with the payout of a specified amount, it is preferable to divide that specified amount by the maximum number of coins payout in one game, subtract the remainder, and use the quotient as the determined number of games, and multiply this by the specified time as the end time.

[Electrical configuration: Data display: External terminal board]
Fig. 139 is a diagram showing an example of the details of signals sent from the external terminal board H308a of the gaming machine H2 in the connection between the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine and the data display H1. Note that Fig. 139 shows only the connection between the gaming machine H2 and the data display H1, and does not show the connection to the other gaming medium lending devices 5003.

As shown in FIG. 139, the following signals are input from the external terminal board H308a in the gaming machine H2 to the communication interface H410 in the data display machine H1: a "prize ball signal" indicating the number of gaming balls paid out to the player, an "external information 1" signal indicating that a jackpot has been hit or is currently hitting the jackpot in the gaming machine H2, an "external information 2" signal indicating that a special game has started in the gaming machine H2 or is currently in a special game, an "external information 3" signal indicating that a special pattern game has started in the gaming machine H2, an "external information 4" signal indicating that a gaming ball fired in the gaming machine H2 has entered the starting hole, a "security signal" indicating that some kind of error (abnormality) has occurred in the gaming machine H2, and a "door/frame open signal" indicating that the base door H33 or glass door (not shown) in the gaming machine H2 is open. In addition, the contents output by the "External Information 1" signal to the "External Information 7" signal can be changed as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine H2, which is the sending side, and the specifications of the data display H1, which is the receiving side.

In addition, an "out ball information" signal indicating that a gaming ball released in gaming machine H2 did not enter any of the winning slots but entered an out slot (not shown) is input from a separate signal line based on the detection results of an out ball sensor in a separate device not shown, but when the out ball sensor is controlled by the gaming machine H2, it may be output from the external terminal board H308a in the gaming machine H2.

In addition, the above-mentioned "out information" based on the "out ball information" signal, "safe information" based on the "prize ball signal", "jackpot information" based on the "external information 1" signal, "probable change information" based on the "external information 2" signal, "start signal" based on the "external information 3" signal, "start gate information" based on the "external information 4" signal, "door opening information" based on the "door/frame opening signal", and "abnormality 1 information" based on the "security signal" are input from the communication interface H410 in the data display H1 to the server device H4. Note that, for the "security signal", if the type of error (abnormality) can be determined from its output time, it may be converted into "abnormality 1 information", "abnormality 2 information", or "abnormality 3 information" according to the type of error (abnormality) and output to the server device H4. Also, as described later, it may be possible to add predetermined information under the control of the control unit H401 and output to the server device H4. In addition, the communication interface H410 may receive each signal input from the external terminal board H308a itself and output each input signal as it is to the server device H4 (through signal).

In addition, examples of types of errors (abnormalities) indicated by the "security signal" in gaming machine H2 include a start port switch error indicating that the start port switch has been turned on due to fraudulent means or other factors even though no gaming ball has entered the game, a count switch error indicating that the count switch has been counted despite the prize port solenoid not being driven (the prize port not being open) due to fraudulent means or other factors, and a sensor detection error (e.g., a magnetic sensor error) indicating that various sensors (e.g., magnetic sensors) installed in gaming machine H2 to prevent fraud have entered a detection state.

Referring to FIG. 140, the connection between the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko slot machine and the data display H1 is illustrated with details of the signals sent from the external terminal board H308b of the gaming machine H2 for each terminal. Note that FIG. 140 only illustrates the connection between the gaming machine H2 and the data display H1, and does not illustrate the connections to the other gaming medium lending devices 5003, etc.

From the external terminal board H308b in the gaming machine H2 to the communication interface H410 in the data display H1, the following signals are input: a "medal insertion signal" indicating the number of medals inserted by the player; a "medal payout signal" indicating the number of medals paid out to the player; an "external signal 2" indicating that a BB has occurred in the gaming machine H2 or that the gaming machine is in a BB; an "external signal 1" indicating that a RB has occurred in the gaming machine H2 or that the gaming machine is in a RB; an "external signal 3" indicating that the gaming machine H2 has entered an ART or is in an ART; and a "security signal" indicating that some error (abnormality) has occurred in the gaming machine H2. In the gaming machine H2, the fact that the front door (not shown) is open is input to the data display H1 by the "security signal", but as in the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine described above, for example, a signal indicating that the front door is open may be output by outputting "external signal 4" separately from the "security signal". In addition, the output contents of "External Signal 1" to "External Signal 4" can be changed as appropriate depending on the specifications of the gaming machine H2, which is the sending side, and the specifications of the data display H1, which is the receiving side.

The communication interface H410 in the data display H1 inputs the above-mentioned "IN information" based on the "medal insertion signal", "OUT information" based on the "medal payout signal", "BB information" based on the "external signal 2", "RB information" based on the "external signal 1", "ART information" based on the "external signal 3", and "error information" based on the "security signal". If the type of error (abnormality) can be determined from the output time of the "security signal", it may be converted into "error information", "abnormality 1 information", "abnormality 2 information", or "abnormality 3 information" according to the type of error (abnormality) and output to the server device 2. As described later, it may also be possible to add predetermined information under the control of the control unit H401 and output to the server device H4. In addition, the communication interface H410 may receive each signal input from the external terminal board H308b and output each input signal as it is to the server device H4 (through signal).

In addition, examples of the types of errors (abnormalities) indicated by the "security signal" in gaming machine H2 include a door open error, which indicates that the front door is open; an RWM error, which indicates that the RWM has not been read or written properly; a selector error, which indicates that the selector is no longer detecting properly due to fraudulent means or other factors (e.g., a medal jam); a hopper error, which indicates that the hopper is no longer paying out properly due to fraudulent means or other factors (e.g., medal empty); and a medal auxiliary store error, which indicates that the medal auxiliary store, which stores surplus medals that cannot be accommodated in the hopper, is full of medals.

In this way, the external terminal board H308 (external terminal boards H308a, H308b) generally employs a parallel transfer method in which one type of signal is sent per terminal, so the number of signals that can be transmitted is limited by the upper limit on the number of terminals on the external terminal board H308. Therefore, it is not possible to transmit all of the game states that the gaming machine H2 can transition to to the data display H1. In other words, the gaming machine H2 is configured to be able to transmit only limited game states among the game states that the gaming machine H2 can transition to (in the above example, jackpot and probability change information for a pachinko machine, and BB, RB, and ART information for a pachislot machine).

Hereinafter, the game state obtained and determined by transmitting via such external terminal board H308 may be referred to as the "first game state". Furthermore, among the game states to which the gaming machine H2 can transition, the game state indicated by the gaming machine H2 based on the lighting state of the top lamp H60 and determined by the data display H1 detecting the lighting state of the top lamp H60 using the camera unit H12 may be referred to as the "second game state". Note that in this embodiment, the "second game state" does not include the "first game state", but the "second game state" may include a part or all of the "first game state".

[Game Status]
The gaming states to which the gaming machine H2 may transition will be described with reference to Fig. 141. Fig. 141 is a diagram showing an example of a state transition diagram of the gaming state of the gaming machine H2. Note that the following mainly describes the case where the gaming machine H2 is a slot machine.

In this embodiment, the transition of the gaming state is mainly controlled by the main control unit H301 (main control unit H301a, main control unit H301b) of the gaming machine H2. The main control unit H301 determines the transition destination based on a lottery for an internal winning role, etc. For example, winning a specific internal winning role a specified number of times, winning a specific internal winning role, playing a specified number of games on the gaming machine H2, winning a lottery for transitioning to a specified gaming state, or displaying a pattern that is predetermined to transition to a specified gaming state.

Conditions for ending a gaming state include winning a specified internal winning role, scoring a specified internal winning role, a specified amount being paid out in the current gaming state, a specified number of games being played in the current gaming state, winning a lottery to transition to a specified gaming state, or the display of a symbol that is predetermined to transition to another gaming state, etc.

As shown in FIG. 141, gaming machine H2 has the following gaming states to which it can transition: normal zone, general gaming state, RT (replay time) gaming state, BB (big bonus) gaming state, advantageous zone 1, AT (assist time) gaming state, CZ (chance zone) gaming state, ART (assist replay time) 1 gaming state, advantageous zone 2, premium BB (big bonus) gaming state, and ART 2 gaming state.

[Game status: normal section]
The normal section is divided into a general gaming state, an RT gaming state, and a BB gaming state. That is, the normal section is a gaming state including the general gaming state, the RT gaming state, and the BB gaming state.

The general gaming state is a gaming state that is not advantageous compared to other gaming states. For example, the general gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of winning a replay as an internal winning role is low (low replay probability) compared to the RT gaming state. The general gaming state transitions to the RT gaming state when a bonus is determined as the internal winning role and is carried over. In other words, the general gaming state includes in its ending conditions that a bonus has been determined as the internal winning role.

The RT gaming state is initiated on the condition that a bonus has been determined as the internal winning role in the general gaming state and has been carried over. The RT gaming state is a gaming state in which there is a higher probability of winning a replay as the internal winning role (high replay probability) compared to the general gaming state. If a bonus is won in the RT gaming state, the game transitions to the BB gaming state. In other words, the RT gaming state is terminated when a bonus is won.

The BB gaming state is initiated by winning a bonus. In the BB gaming state, the RB gaming state (not shown) is repeated a predetermined number of times, and when a predetermined number of payouts are reached, the state transitions to the general gaming state. In other words, the BB gaming state has an ending condition of reaching a predetermined number of payouts. Note that in the RB gaming state, the probability of winning any of the minor winning combinations is set to be high.

[Advantageous Zone]
The gaming machine H2 has advantageous zones, ie, advantageous zone 1 and advantageous zone 2. The advantageous zone is a zone that can have a performance related to an instruction function. The instruction function is a function that notifies the player of the procedure of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the internal winning role is a so-called push order role, and is operated in the AT gaming state and the ART gaming state.

Advantageous Zone 1 is divided into an AT gaming state, a CZ gaming state, and an ART gaming state. In other words, advantageous zone 1 is a gaming state that has a CZ gaming state and an ART gaming state.

The AT game state is entered when the player wins the AT game transition lottery, which is held when a predetermined combination is won in the general game state. That is, the general game state includes winning the AT game transition lottery as an ending condition. Note that the probability of winning the AT game transition lottery is the same for all setting values. The AT game state is entered into the CZ game state after a predetermined number of games have been played. That is, the ending condition for the AT game state is that a predetermined number of games have been played.

The CZ gaming state is a gaming state that can transition to the ART gaming state. The CZ gaming state has a set upper limit on the number of games that can be played, and if a specific role is won within that period, the state transitions to the ART gaming state. If the maximum number of games is played without winning a specific role, the CZ gaming state ends and advantageous zone 1 ends, and the state transitions to the general gaming state of the normal zone. In other words, the conditions for ending the CZ gaming state are winning a specific role and playing the maximum number of games.

The ART gaming state is a gaming state in which the instruction function is enabled in the same way as the AT gaming state, and in which the probability of winning a replay as an internal winning role is higher than in the AT gaming state. The ART gaming state ends when a predetermined number of games have been played, and once the state ends, the game transitions to the general gaming state.

Advantageous Zone 2 is divided into a premium BB gaming state and a special ART gaming state. In other words, advantageous zone 1 is a gaming state that has a premium BB gaming state and a special ART gaming state.

The Premium BB gaming state is initiated by winning a Premium Bonus in the general gaming state. The probability of winning the Premium Bonus is the same for all setting values. Although not shown, if the internal winning combination of the Premium Bonus is carried over, the game state becomes a waiting zone until the Premium Bonus is won, and transition to the advantageous zone 2 is awaited. In the Premium BB gaming state, the RB gaming state (not shown) is repeated a predetermined number of times, and when a predetermined number of payouts are reached, the game state transitions to the special ART gaming state. In other words, the Premium BB gaming state has an end condition of having a predetermined number of payouts reached.

The special ART gaming state is similar to the ART gaming state, but differs in that it has an add-on specialization zone where the number of games played can be added. In the special ART gaming state, if a specific internal winning combination is achieved, the player enters the add-on specialization zone, and a lottery is held for each game in which a predetermined number is added to the default number of games played. When all games including the added number of games in the add-on specialization zone have been played, the special ART gaming state ends and advantageous zone 2 transitions to the general gaming state of the normal zone. In other words, the condition for ending the special ART gaming state is to play all games including the added number of games.

Note that the game state from which the transition is to occur, the game state to which the transition is to occur, the start conditions, and the end conditions are not limited to those described above. For example, they may be as described below.

It may have multiple RT gaming states, and in addition to the RT states described above, it may transition to the RT gaming state when a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed, which is displayed only when one of multiple types of predetermined replay roles is won and the stopping operation is performed in a predetermined push order according to the winning replay symbol. In that case, the RT state with a bonus carried over may be called RT1, and the above-mentioned RT state may be called RT2. The conditions for transitioning to RT2 may be when it is not RT1, when it is not in the BB gaming state, and when a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed.

The advantageous zone includes a normal state during the advantageous zone, an AT game state during the advantageous zone, and an AT+RT game state (ART game state) during the advantageous zone, and the start condition of the advantageous zone is to win the advantageous zone with a probability of no or a set difference that is predetermined in the normal zone, or to start a predetermined bonus, and it may be determined in advance whether to perform the instruction function related to the winning role only once during the advantageous zone, or to perform the game using the instruction function until a termination condition such as the winning of any bonus or the consumption of a specified number of games is satisfied. In that case, if the advantageous zone is won and it is determined that the instruction function related to the winning role is performed only once, the AT state will be entered, but if the instruction function related to the winning role is performed once (for example, the push order bell stop operation navigation), the normal zone will be automatically entered. On the other hand, if a favorable zone is entered and it is decided that the instruction function related to the winning combination will be performed until the end conditions are met, such as playing a specified number of games, the AT state will be entered, and an instruction will be given to display a specific combination of replay symbols, and the ART game state will begin when the specific combination of replay symbols is displayed, and the instruction function may be performed until, for example, 50 games have been played.

By winning a lottery with or without a setting difference before 50 games have been played, or by starting a pre-determined bonus, a special zone for adding extra games may be entered, and the number of games or a set of 50 games may be added. It is also possible to simply add the number of ART games.

The above-mentioned top-up special zone does not send any signal from the external terminal board H308, but by lighting the top lamp H60 in a different manner from the ART state, it becomes possible for the data display H1 to recognize that the top-up special zone has started, and it becomes possible to collect data, such as tallying up the number of times it has started.

In addition, the AT state in which the player has entered a favorable zone and it has been determined that the instruction function related to the winning role will be performed only once, and the AT state (ART state) in which the player has entered a favorable zone and it has been determined that the instruction function related to the winning role will be performed until a termination condition is met, such as playing a specified number of games, are displayed the same on the display device such as the liquid crystal of the gaming machine, and the lighting pattern of the top lamp H60 is made different, so that the player can determine which state it is on the data display H1 side, while remaining unclear to the player whether the function will be performed in one go or multiple times.

Furthermore, in this example, in the AT state where it has been determined that the instruction function for the winning role will continue until the end conditions, such as the specified number of games played, are met after the advantageous zone has been won, the instruction function will notify the player of the stopping sequence in which a specific combination of replay symbols will be displayed when a specific replay role is won. By playing according to that stopping sequence, the player will transition to the ART state in the advantageous zone. When a specific combination of replay symbols is displayed, the external terminal board H308 will turn on an external signal to cause the data display H1 to detect the start of ART, but it is anticipated that, depending on the player's operating mode, a specific combination of replay symbols will be displayed and a signal will be sent from the external terminal board H308 even though no instruction has been given. Even in such a case, if it is decided that the top lamp H60 will continue until an end condition, such as winning an advantageous zone and playing a specified number of games, is met, and a specific combination of replay patterns is displayed, it can be determined whether the specific combination of replay patterns was displayed by chance or in accordance with an instruction by lighting it in a detectable manner, and if the specific combination of replay patterns was displayed by chance, the number of ARTs can be measured accurately on the data display H1 side by not adding the number of ARTs.

In this way, the number of game states to which the gaming machine H2 can transition exceeds the number of "first game states" that can be transmitted from the external terminal board H308. Therefore, the gaming machine H2 displays the CZ game state, the special ART game state, the add-on specialization zone in the special ART game state, and the advantageous zone, etc., excluding the "first game state (in this embodiment, the start of the BB game state, the start of the RB game state, and the ART game state)" as the second game state by the lighting state of the top lamp H60, making it possible for the data display H1 to grasp the second game state.

The second gaming state is not limited to the gaming state determined by the main control unit H301, and may indicate, for example, the state of the main device group H303 whose execution is controlled by the main control unit H301, or the state of the sub-device group H304 whose execution is controlled by the sub-control unit H302. For example, even in the same gaming state, if successively different effects are produced as the number of games increases, these effects can be displayed as different second gaming states by the lighting state of the top lamp H60, making it possible to produce effects on the data display H1 that are linked to the effects on the gaming machine H2.

In addition, in the case of the gaming machine H2 as a pachinko machine, for example, when the reserved lamp includes an emission color with a high reliability of a jackpot or when a relatively longer fluctuation time than other fluctuations is selected at the time of starting winning in a predetermined fluctuation time determination table, the time from this point until the jackpot determination of the reserved lamp is made may be shown as the second gaming state of the look-ahead specialization zone by the lighting state of the top lamp H60. This makes it possible to perform a performance linked to the special performance of the look-ahead specialization zone in the gaming machine H2 in the data display device H1. Similarly, the execution of a specific performance such as a premium reach during the special pattern fluctuation in a special pattern game may be shown as the second gaming state by the lighting state of the top lamp H60.

For example, in gaming machines classified as the second type (so-called pinball machines), the position of the V winning hole, which rotates constantly and results in a jackpot, is changed inside the device located in the center of the game board where the game ball rolls. If the relationship between the timing at which the game ball enters the entrance passage into the device, obtained by the sensor, and the position of the V winning hole at this timing indicates that there is a high possibility of a jackpot being awarded, this may be indicated as the second gaming state by the lighting state of the top lamp H60.

[Example of data display effects]
142 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation display linked to the presentation of the gaming machine H2 by the video display unit H405 when the data display H1 detects the lighting state of the top lamp H60 and determines that the gaming state of the gaming machine H2 is the CZ gaming state. As shown in FIG. 142, in the CZ gaming state in which the gaming machine H2 can be shifted to the ART gaming state, the data display H1 displays an image indicating that the gaming machine H2 can be shifted to the ART gaming state on the video display unit H405, and performs a presentation linked to the presentation (not shown) in the CZ gaming state executed in the gaming machine H2. At that time, the liquid crystal presentation is made equivalent between the ART state and the CZ state on the gaming machine side, and when the lighting state of the top lamp H60 is also different from each other and difficult for the player to recognize, it is possible to create the significance of looking at the display side.

Although not shown, it is desirable to have different display modes for the above-mentioned add-on specialization zone and the ART state, and for the AT state and the ART state, so that the player can distinguish states that are difficult to distinguish based on the presentation mode on the gaming machine by looking at the display mode of the data display H1. Note that the states to be compared are not limited to this, and any two or more gaming states that are difficult for the player to distinguish based on the presentation mode on the gaming machine can be used.

In addition, it is possible to provide the gaming machine with advantageous zones that end only in AT and advantageous zones that are confirmed to transition to ART, and to have the data display determine states that are difficult to distinguish from the gaming machine side using a signal of the second gaming state. Furthermore, it is also possible to have the data display determine, using a signal of the second gaming state, so-called premonition states that are difficult to distinguish from the gaming machine side and that anticipate a transition to an advantageous state over a predetermined number of games, premonitions that assume a transition to an advantageous state (real premonitions) and premonitions that do not confirm a transition to an advantageous state (false premonitions).

In this way, the data display H1 according to the present invention is configured to have a function of performing a specific presentation in conjunction with a specific presentation performed by the gaming machine H2 according to the gaming state, in a specific manner in which the data display H1 is linked to the specific presentation.

[motion]
The effect execution process executed by the control unit H401 of the data display H1 will be described with reference to Fig. 143. First, the control unit H401 judges whether or not a signal indicating a game state is received from the external terminal board H308 of the gaming machine H2 (step S4010). If a signal indicating a game state is received (step S4010: YES), the control unit H401 refers to the effect pattern table (see Fig. 138) to change the effect according to the game state indicated by the received signal, and starts counting according to the effect (step S4011).

After step S4011 is completed, or if a signal indicating the game state is not received in step S4010 (step S4010: NO), the control unit H401 judges whether or not the lighting state is detected from the image of the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 captured by the camera unit H12 (step S4012). If the lighting state is detected (step S4012: YES), the control unit H401 judges whether or not the lighting state has changed since the previous time (step S4013). If the lighting state has changed (step S4013: YES), the control unit H401 changes the presentation according to the lighting state (step S4014) and returns the process to step S4010. On the other hand, if the lighting state has not changed (step S4013: NO), the control unit H401 continues the current presentation (step S4015) and returns the process to step S4010.

In step S4012, if the lighting state is not detected (step S4012: NO), the control unit H401 judges whether or not a specific lighting state is being detected (step S4016). If the specific lighting state is not being detected (step S4016: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S4010. If the specific lighting state is being detected (step S4016: YES), the control unit H401 detects an error state (step S4017). Then, the control unit H401 judges whether or not the count value that started counting in step S4011 satisfies the end condition (step S4018). If the count value satisfies the end condition (step S4018: YES), the control unit H401 stops the performance being executed (step S4019) and returns the process to step S4010. On the other hand, if the count value does not satisfy the end condition (step S4018: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S4010.

(Variation 1)
In variant example 1 of the eighth embodiment, not only is the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 set to a blinking cycle that is difficult for humans to perceive, but when the gaming machine H2 executes a continuous performance consisting of multiple stages in one gaming state, a different blinking cycle is set to correspond to each of the multiple stages in the lighting mode corresponding to this gaming state.

Specifically, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 will be described with reference to FIG. 144. In this modified example, the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 is changed in two stages from 50 Hz to 75 Hz. That is, in this gaming state, the gaming machine H2 changes the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 from 50 Hz to 75 Hz according to each of the consecutive performances that are changed in two stages. In this way, in one gaming state, the performance is configured into multiple blocks and a blinking cycle is set for each block. Even if there is a period during the gaming state when the camera unit H12 cannot detect the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 due to some kind of obstacle (such as the player's hand or belongings being placed on the top lamp H60), when the data display H1 detects the lighting mode again, it is possible to return to the linked performance according to the performance of the corresponding block.

For example, if the gaming machine H2 outputs a song as audio during BB and displays a character that matches the song as a video, and the data display H1 displays lyrics that match the song, the gaming machine H2 divides the song into multiple blocks (e.g., A melody, B melody, etc.) and controls the lighting state of the top lamp H60 by associating a blinking pattern of a different frequency with each block. This allows the data display H1 to select and display a lyric image that corresponds to the blinking pattern of each block, and even if there is a period when the lighting state of the top lamp H60 cannot be detected because it is blocked by the player's hand or luggage, etc., when it becomes detectable again, appropriate lyrics that correspond to the audio on the gaming machine H2 can be displayed, and the linked performance can be performed again.

Here is an example of a performance in which lyrics are displayed on the data display H1 to match the music output by the gaming machine H2 when the gaming machine H2 is in the BB gaming state. The performance on the gaming machine side and the performance on the data display side in the BB gaming state are composed of a series of performance blocks consisting of multiple stages. Here, an example of a performance consisting of three stages, the first performance block to the third performance block, is explained.

The gaming machine H2 associates a series of the first to third performance blocks with the elapsed time of the song. For example, the first performance block is associated with 1st to 30th seconds, the second performance block is associated with 31st to 70th seconds, and the third performance block is associated with 71st to 130th seconds. The gaming machine H2 then controls the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60 to vary according to the elapsed time of the song (each performance block). For example, when the song is the elapsed time of the first performance block, the top lamp H60 is illuminated with a blinking cycle of 50 Hz, when the song is the elapsed time of the second performance block, the top lamp H60 is illuminated with a blinking cycle of 75 Hz, and when the song is the elapsed time of the third performance block, the top lamp H60 is illuminated with a blinking cycle of 80 Hz. That is, the gaming machine H2 stores a pattern table in which the elapsed time and the blinking cycle are associated with each performance block. The data display H1 displays an image in which lyrics are sequentially displayed according to the elapsed time for each performance block of the song output by the gaming machine H2. For example, if the first performance block is the A melody, the data display H1 displays the lyrics of the A melody in the first performance block, if the second performance block is the B melody, the data display H1 displays the lyrics of the B melody in the second performance block, and if the third performance block is the chorus, the data display H1 displays the lyrics of the chorus in the third performance block. That is, the data display H1 stores a pattern table in which the blinking cycle and the image to be displayed are associated with each performance block.

When the gaming machine H2 starts outputting a song in the BB gaming state, it determines which stage of the performance block it is based on the elapsed time of the song, and controls the lighting of the top lamp H60 at a blinking cycle corresponding to the performance block. Specifically, the top lamp H60 is turned on at 50 Hz from 1 to 30 seconds after the song starts, the top lamp H60 is turned on at 75 Hz from 31 to 70 seconds, and the top lamp H60 is turned on at 80 Hz from 71 to 130 seconds. Meanwhile, when the data display H1 receives an ON signal of the BB gaming state from the external terminal board H308, if it detects that the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 is blinking at 50 Hz, it displays the lyrics of the A melody corresponding to the first performance block, and continues to display the lyrics of the A melody while it detects the blinking at 50 Hz. Furthermore, when the data display H1 detects a change in the blinking cycle from 50 Hz to 75 Hz, it assumes that a B-melody has started in the gaming machine H2 and displays the lyrics of the B-melody corresponding to the second performance block, and continues to display the lyrics of the B-melody while it detects the blinking at 75 Hz. Furthermore, when the data display H1 detects a change in the blinking cycle from 75 Hz to 80 Hz, it assumes that a chorus has started in the gaming machine H2 and displays the lyrics of the chorus corresponding to the third performance block, and continues to display the lyrics of the chorus while it detects the blinking at 80 Hz. In this way, the data display H1 detects a change in the blinking cycle to determine the change in performance block, and uses this as an opportunity to perform a performance corresponding to the next performance block.

For example, if a situation occurs during which the data display H1 is displaying the lyrics of the second performance block and the lamp lighting state cannot be recognized due to some kind of failure, the data display H1 will stop displaying the lyrics at that point. Even if the failure is subsequently removed during the performance block and the data display H1 is able to detect the 75 Hz lighting state again, the lyrics of the B melody will not be displayed at that point, and the corresponding lyrics will be displayed the next time the lighting cycle is detected as having been changed. This makes it possible to prevent a discrepancy between the lyrics actually being played on the gaming machine H2 and the lyrics displayed on the data display H1 when the lyrics of the B melody are resumed. Specifically, if the B melody has six lines of lyrics, it is difficult for the data display H1 to determine which line of lyrics is being output on the gaming machine H2 at the timing when the data display H1 is able to detect the 75 Hz lighting state again, and there is a high possibility that a discrepancy will occur with the actual song even if the lyrics of the B melody are displayed sequentially from the beginning. Therefore, by restarting the display of lyrics when the data display H1 detects a change in the blinking cycle, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the music output by the gaming machine and the lyrics displayed, and to execute an accurate linked performance with the gaming machine H2. Note that if the BB signal goes OFF before the camera detects the lamp lighting state again, the lyric display will also stop returning.

In the above example, the series of performance blocks on gaming machine H2 correspond to the elapsed time, but they may change as the game progresses, and the blinking cycle may change accordingly. For example, the A melody may be played for the first 5 games, the B melody may start when the 6th game starts, and if the A melody lyrics finish before the 6th game starts, a loop or an intro may be played.

(Variation 2)
In the second modification of the eighth embodiment, the lighting mode of the top lamp H60 is not only set to a blinking cycle that is difficult for humans to perceive, but also adopts a lighting mode in which multiple emitted colors (rainbow colors) are changed in stages.

Specifically, referring to FIG. 145, the lighting modes of the top lamp H60 corresponding to game states 1 to 3 will be described. In game state 1, the top lamp H60 is set to have a blinking cycle of 50 Hz and a lighting mode in which the luminous color is a single color. In contrast, when the camera unit H12 operating at a frame rate of 100 fps captures an image on a frame-by-frame basis, an image in which a single color is alternately turned on and off will be captured. In game state 2, the top lamp H60 is set to have a blinking cycle of 50 Hz and the luminous color is set to change to five colors in sequence each time it is turned on. In contrast, when the camera unit H12 operating at a frame rate of 100 fps captures an image on a frame-by-frame basis, an image in which a five-color turn-on and turn-off are alternately captured will be captured. That is, the control unit H401 of the data display H1 determines the game state by determining whether the luminous color of the top lamp H60 is equal to or greater than a specific number in addition to the blinking cycle of the top lamp H60. In this way, by adding changes in light color to the lighting state, it is possible to set effects that correspond to different game states even with the same blinking pattern, further increasing the number of effect patterns.

In addition, FIG. 145 shows only one color change pattern, "red → orange → green → blue → purple → red → ...", but is not limited to this. For example, this may be the first color change pattern, and other color change patterns may be provided, such as a second color change pattern (e.g., "red → orange → green → blue → purple → white → red → ...") and a third color change pattern (e.g., "red → orange → blue → purple → green → red → ..."). This allows the data display H1 to be recognized as a different presentation pattern even if the rainbow lighting pattern is similar to the player viewing the gaming machine H2. For example, if the gaming machine H2 has three types of BB (red 7BB, blue 7BB, and white 7BB, which are different flags), these three types can be associated with the first color change pattern, the second color change pattern, and the third color change pattern. The player can recognize that a BB has been established by visually checking the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2, which changes its illumination state to rainbow colors, but it is difficult to distinguish whether a red 7BB, a blue 7BB, or a white 7BB has been established. However, the data display H1 can determine which BB the color change state of the top lamp H60 indicates, and specify the type of BB that has been established. Then, the data display H1 can appropriately notify the player by displaying the type of BB, such as "BB confirmed! This time it's red 7BB," based on the type of BB that it has determined, and can reduce the loss of medals by the player. In this way, by making it possible to distinguish the establishment of a BB flag that cannot be distinguished by a normal data display and its type, it can be given an advantage over other data displays, and it can be given an effect of promoting the introduction of the hall manager. In addition, various conditions such as whether or not to execute the BB type notification may be set. For example, by recognizing a member card inserted into a sandbox or data display, if the player is a member, a notification is always given, and for visiting players, a notification is only given with a certain probability, and by differentiating between the two, it is possible to promote the recruitment of members to the hall where the introduction is being made. It goes without saying that it is possible to set it so that BB during ART is always notified, and BB during normal play is notified with a certain probability. Also, the detection by rainbow colors is not limited to BB, and it may be set for ART with multiple internal advantageous stages, or for pachinko jackpots that do not notify the amount of balls dispensed when won. In the above example, the order of the color components is changed to identify the pattern, but it is also possible to identify the pattern according to the color that is not lit among the five colors. Specifically, patterns that do not include orange (for example, red → green → blue → purple → red → ...), patterns that do not include green (for example, red → orange → blue → purple → red → ...), and patterns that do not include blue (for example, red → orange → green → purple → red → ...) may be provided.

(Variation 3)
A modified example of the light emitting means that changes the lighting state according to the game state will be described. For example, one or more LED lamps may be provided on the top surface of the game machine, and the data display may detect the LED lamps. In this case, the game state may be determined by the blinking pattern as in the eighth embodiment, or the game state may be determined by a combination of the lighting or extinguishing of a plurality of LED lamps. In other words, by providing X LED lamps and turning them on or off, it is possible to determine the Xth power of 2 game state.

When the gaming machine H2 is provided with one predetermined LED and the data display H1 receives the second gaming state through the LED, the data display H1 only needs to capture the LED, and there is no problem if the detection range is narrow. Also, when the gaming machine H2 is provided with multiple predetermined LEDs and the data display H1 receives the second gaming state through the multiple LEDs, as described above, the data display H1 can determine the second gaming state by only detecting the combination of whether the LEDs are lit or not. In this way, the gaming machine H2 may be provided with an LED for communicating the second gaming state that is driven separately from the performance. It is also possible to use any LED of the top lamp instead of a specific LED. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the gaming machine H2 side, and the freedom of arrangement of the data display H1 is increased since it is sufficient that only the top lamp is within the imaging range.

In order to prevent the influence of disturbance light, the light emitting means may be provided on the rear side of the top surface of the gaming machine, and the lighting state detection means may be provided on the rear side of the data display. In addition, it is not limited to the light emitting means to execute different effects according to the gaming state. For example, the gaming state may be displayed by combining the state of the reels in a slot machine. In this case, the camera unit is placed in front of the gaming machine so that the reels are included in the imaging range. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the number of patterns of effects in the data display, for example, in the second modified example, the light emitting means is rainbow-colored and the linked effect is executed only when the reels are performing a freeze effect. The data display determines whether the stopped state of the reels detected by the camera is due to an effect, on the condition that an IN signal is received from the external terminal board. In other words, if the data display receives the IN signal and detects the stopped state of the reels by the camera within a predetermined time, it executes the linked effect of the reel freeze effect.

In addition, when the gaming machine is started, the light emitting means is illuminated in a predetermined manner, and the light emitting means illuminated in the predetermined manner is imaged by a camera unit and analyzed to identify the position of the light emitting means within the imaging range, thereby improving the accuracy of determining the gaming state.

Ninth embodiment
Next, a gaming device according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 146 to 148. Note that components that are the same as or similar to those in the above embodiment will be given the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

[Electrical configuration: Data display: Data table]
146 is a representation of an effect pattern table for executing effects according to the game state. The effect pattern table of this embodiment differs from the effect pattern table of the eighth embodiment in that a priority order is set for each effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 146, the presentation pattern table of this embodiment has the same items as the presentation pattern table of the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 138), and in addition has a priority column. In this embodiment, a priority is set for all presentations in the priority column. For example, based on a signal from the external terminal board H308 and detection of the lighting state of the top lamp H60, if similar game states are obtained from each and different presentation patterns are set for them, which presentation pattern is executed is determined according to the priority that is set. Specifically, if a BB game state is transmitted from the external terminal board H308 and a premium BB game state is detected from the top lamp H60, the premium BB game state is given priority.

However, without being limited to this, the second gaming state may be a gaming state different from the first gaming state. That is, a signal of a restricted first gaming state may be transmitted from the external terminal board H308, and the top lamp H60 may indicate a second gaming state excluding the first gaming state. In this case, for example, when a general gaming state is determined as the first gaming state (no signal from the external terminal board H308) and an advantageous zone is transmitted as the second gaming state, the presentation pattern table may be set so that the advantageous zone of the second gaming state is prioritized. Also, for example, when a BB gaming state is transmitted as the first gaming state and an advantageous zone is transmitted as the second gaming state, the presentation pattern table may be set so that the BB gaming state of the first gaming state is prioritized.

A modified example of the above example will now be described. Presentation patterns that overlap in part may be stored in the presentation mode based on the signal of the first game state from the external terminal board H308 and the presentation mode based on the second game state determined by detecting the lighting state of the top lamp H60. Note that "overlapping" means that it is set for the same element in the elements that make up the presentation. Elements that make up the presentation include, for example, the color of the lamp, the content of the text displayed on the LCD screen, the presence or absence of a character on the LCD screen, the output content from the speaker, etc. For example, if a character is displayed and the text "A" is displayed on the LCD screen in one presentation pattern, and the text "B" is displayed on the LCD screen in another presentation pattern, the content of the text displayed on the LCD screen will overlap, but the presence or absence of a character on the LCD screen will not overlap.

Here, when a signal for the first gaming state and a signal for the second gaming state are output from the gaming machine H2 at the same timing, the presentation mode based on the first gaming state may be prioritized for elements that overlap in the presentation patterns of both, and the presentation mode based on the second gaming state may be executed for non-overlapping parts. For example, a first gaming state signal related to the BB gaming state is associated with a presentation pattern having an element of displaying a "character" on the liquid crystal image and an element of displaying the text "BB in progress!" on the liquid crystal image. Also, a second gaming state signal related to the normal BB gaming state is associated with a presentation pattern having an element of displaying the text "BB in progress!" on the liquid crystal image and an element of lighting a lamp on the outer periphery of the data display H1 (for example, illumination by the light guide plate G61 shown in FIG. 126) in "red". Therefore, if the data display H1 normally receives both the first game state signal and the second game state signal when the gaming machine H2 transitions to the normal BB game state, the presentation based on the first game state signal is given priority, and the LCD image displays the "character" and the text "BB in progress!". However, an element that does not overlap with the presentation pattern based on the first game state, that is, turning on the lamp on the periphery of the data display H1 in "red", becomes effective, and this presentation is executed in addition to the presentation pattern based on the first game state. In this way, in presentation patterns that can be executed under the same conditions and at the same timing, if an element that is not set in a presentation pattern with a high priority is set in a presentation pattern with a low priority, the presentation of the presentation pattern with a low priority may be executed only for that element.

If only the first game state signal cannot be obtained, the presentation pattern associated with the second game state signal (the "BB!" display on the LCD screen and the outer lamps turning "red") is executed. If only the second game state signal cannot be obtained, only the presentation pattern associated with the second game state signal (the "Character + BB in progress!" display on the LCD screen) is executed, and no presentation is performed using the outer lamps. If both the first game state signal and the second game state signal cannot be obtained, the presentation on the data display will naturally be the same as in normal mode, and no special presentation will be performed.

In the above example, the signal of the second gaming state that occurs under the same conditions and at the same timing as the signal of the first gaming state was one-to-one, but this is not limited to this. For example, as the signal of the second gaming state related to the BB gaming state, multiple effects corresponding to two or more types of blinking patterns may be stored. Specifically, there is only one type of signal of the first gaming state as the BB gaming state, but in the gaming machine H2, when there are two types of BB gaming states, a normal BB gaming state and a BB gaming state during a favorable zone, each of them may be distinguished as a signal of the second gaming state. That is, when the normal BB gaming state occurs in the gaming machine H2, the effect pattern associated with the signal of the first gaming state is executed in the data display H1, and the effect of the effect pattern associated with the signal of the second gaming state of the normal BB gaming state is executed in the elements not set in the effect pattern. Furthermore, when a BB gaming state occurs during a favorable zone in gaming machine H2, a presentation pattern associated with a signal of the first gaming state is executed in data display H1, and in elements not set in that presentation pattern, a presentation pattern associated with a signal of the second gaming state of the BB gaming state during the favorable zone is executed.

In addition to the above example, the second gaming state signal in the BB gaming state during the advantageous zone is associated with a presentation pattern having an element of displaying the text "BB during advantageous zone!" on the liquid crystal image and an element of lighting the lamp on the periphery of the data display H1 in "blue". Then, when the gaming machine H2 transitions to the BB gaming state during the advantageous zone, if the data display H1 normally receives both the signal of the first gaming state and the signal of the second gaming state, the presentation based on the signal of the first gaming state is prioritized first, and the "character" and the text "BB in progress!" are displayed on the liquid crystal image. However, the element of lighting the lamp on the periphery of the data display H1 in "blue", which does not overlap with the presentation pattern based on the first gaming state, becomes effective, and this presentation is executed in addition to the presentation pattern based on the first gaming state.

If only the first game state signal cannot be obtained, the presentation pattern associated with the second game state signal (the presentation of "BB in favorable zone!" on the LCD image and the outer lamps turning "blue") is executed. If only the second game state signal cannot be obtained, only the presentation pattern associated with the second game state signal (the presentation of "Character + BB!" on the LCD image) is executed, and no presentation is performed by the outer lamps. If both the first game state signal and the second game state signal cannot be obtained, the presentation on the data display will naturally be the same as in normal mode, and no special presentation will be performed.

Also, the second gaming state signal relating to the BB gaming state during the advantageous zone may exceptionally take precedence over the first gaming state signal. In that case, if both the first gaming state signal and the second gaming state signal relating to the BB gaming state during the advantageous zone are successfully acquired, the presentation based on the second gaming state signal takes precedence, the text "BB during advantageous zone!" is displayed on the LCD image, and the lamp on the periphery of the data display H1 turns "blue." However, an element that does not overlap with the presentation pattern based on the second gaming state relating to the BB gaming state during the advantageous zone, namely, displaying a "character" on the LCD screen of the data display H1, becomes effective, and the presentation is executed in addition to the presentation pattern based on the second gaming state.

In this way, signals related to the second gaming state may not be uniformly assigned a lower priority, but information that is beneficial to the player may be assigned a higher priority than signals related to the first gaming state. Such priorities may be set by the server device H4 that sets the data display H1 from outside, or by the data display H1 itself. In the above example, there are two types of BB gaming states, but it is also possible to add something like a premium BB, which is more advantageous than the BB, and to set priorities by distinguishing between three types in the second gaming state, or to distinguish between more than two types and to set priorities.

In addition, in the presentation pattern table of this embodiment, presentations synchronized with other data displays H1 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as synchronous presentations) can be set. The synchronous presentation is set to a lower priority than presentations based on other game states (first game state and second game state). The synchronous presentation is a presentation executed by multiple data displays H1, and is a presentation executed by treating the video display units H405 of the data displays H1 of multiple game machines grouped in a range (for example, parallel arrangement, island arrangement, etc.) predetermined by a server or main unit as one common screen, for example, a presentation in which a character image or a text image is moved from the rightmost video display unit H405 to the leftmost video display unit H405. The priority order of the synchronous presentation and presentations based on other game states can be determined appropriately. In addition, multiple synchronous presentations may be provided, and the priority order may be set among them. For example, the priority order may be first game state>synchronous presentation 1>second game state>synchronous presentation 2, etc.

Figure 147 is an example of a game state transition table showing the possible destinations of the game state transition. The game state transition table is realized by being stored in the RAM H403 of the data display H1 via a server or a removable ROM that stores such information based on the type of gaming machine installed, or by being accessible to a dedicated ROM. Note that the storage method is not limited to this, and various methods can be applied. As shown in Figure 147, the vertical axis is the game state from which the game state is to be transitioned, and the horizontal axis is the game state to which the game state is to be transitioned, and a circle is stored in the game state to which the game state can be transitioned as the destination. When the data display H1 detects a transition of the game state, it refers to the game state transition table and checks whether the transition of the game state that has been performed is correct.

[motion]
With reference to Fig. 148, the effect execution process executed by the control unit H401 of the data display H1 of this embodiment will be described. First, the control unit H401 judges whether or not a signal indicating a game state is received from the external terminal board H308 of the gaming machine H2 (step S4020). If a signal indicating a game state is received (step S4020: YES), the control unit H401 refers to the effect pattern table (see Fig. 138) to change the effect according to the game state indicated by the received signal, and starts counting according to the effect (step S4021).

After the end of step S4021, or if no signal indicating the game state is received in step S4020 (step S4020: NO), the control unit H401 judges whether or not the lighting state is detected from the image of the top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 captured by the camera unit H12 (step S4022). If the lighting state is detected (step S4022: YES), the control unit H401 judges whether or not the lighting state has changed from the previous time (step S4023). If the lighting state has changed (step S4023: YES), the control unit H401 judges whether or not the destination of the game state is abnormal (step S4024). That is, the control unit H401 refers to the game state transition table (see FIG. 147) and judges whether or not the game state corresponding to the changed performance is abnormal as a destination of the transition from the current game state. If the destination of the game state is abnormal, the control unit H401 detects it as an error (step S4025). If an error is detected, the control unit H401 may send a signal to notify the server device H4 of the error, or may notify the error by displaying a video or outputting a sound on the data display H1. After that, the control unit H401 returns the process to step S4020.

If the destination is not abnormal (step S4024: NO), the control unit H401 judges whether the timing of the effects overlaps (step S4026), including the synchronous effects. If the timing of the effects overlaps (step S4026: YES), the control unit H401 selects the effect to be prioritized (step S4027). The selection method may be a comparison of the effects with each other, or a comparison of the game state related to the effects. If it is determined in step S4026 that the timing of the effects does not overlap, or after step S4027, the effect is changed according to the lighting state (step S4028), and the process returns to step S4020. On the other hand, if the lighting state has not changed in step S4023 (step S4023: NO), the control unit H401 continues the current effect (step S4029) and returns to step S4020.

In step S4022, if the lighting state is not detected (step S4022: NO), the control unit H401 judges whether or not a specific lighting state is being detected (step S4030). If the specific lighting state is not being detected (step S4030: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S4020. If the specific lighting state is being detected (step S4030: YES), the control unit H401 detects an error state (step S4031). Then, the control unit H401 judges whether or not the count value that started counting in step S4021 satisfies the end condition (step S4032). If the count value satisfies the end condition (step S4032: YES), the control unit H401 stops the performance being executed (step S4033) and returns the process to step S4020. On the other hand, if the count value does not satisfy the end condition (step S4032: NO), the control unit H401 returns the process to step S4020.

(Variation 1)
A modified example of the ninth embodiment will be described. For example, if the data display H1 cannot read the lighting state of the top lamp H60 multiple times (or for a predetermined period of time or more), the video display, audio output, and illumination of the data display H1 may be changed to a demonstration pattern.

The light emitting means of the gaming machine H2 is not limited to visible light, and may be, for example, infrared light. This allows the data display H1 to detect the lighting state of the light emitting means using an infrared sensor in the sensor group H404, and also makes it possible to directly specify a presentation pattern.

Furthermore, the priority setting is not limited to the effects, and for example, it may be possible to set a priority for the data screen display (see FIG. 115) that is displayed when the player operates the data display H1. For example, it is preferable to give priority to the data screen display over other effect displays.

In addition, depending on the timing of the blinking of the top lamp H60 and the timing of the image acquisition of the camera unit H12, the image may not include the image of the top lamp H60 when it is lit, and the data display H1 may not accurately receive the second game state. This may be avoided by the following method. That is, when the gaming machine H2 controls the blinking of the top lamp H60, it may blink for a predetermined period of time, wait for a period of time (e.g., a time shorter than the blinking interval) that causes the blinking timing to shift, and then resume the blinking. For example, a blinking pattern of one second may be repeated four times, and then the same pattern may be repeated after waiting for several milliseconds. Similarly, imaging may be waited for a predetermined period of time so that the timing of the image acquisition of the camera on the data display H1 side is shifted. Also, the timing of imaging by the camera unit H12 on the data display H1 may be determined based on a signal from the external terminal board H308.

In the above-mentioned embodiments, a data display device is used as an example of a gaming device, but as long as the gaming device is capable of executing effects equipped with a camera unit or the like that is individually installed on the gaming machine, it is not limited to a data display device installed on the top of the gaming machine. For example, it can be applied to various gaming devices such as a rental device attached to the gaming machine or an inter-machine data display device installed between the machines.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, a gaming system according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 149 to 165.

[Configuration of gaming machine and gaming device]
As shown in FIG. 149, the gaming system PS100 of the present invention includes a gaming machine 3001 and a data display 2501 arranged on the upper part of the gaming machine 3001. The gaming machine 3001 is provided with a lamp 3305 for transmitting data such as a presentation pattern on the upper part, and the data display 2501 receives data such as a game state and a presentation pattern from the gaming machine 3001 by receiving light from the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001. In this way, data such as a game state and a presentation pattern is transmitted from the gaming machine 3001 to the data display 2501 by receiving light from the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 by the data display 2501, so that a lot of information can be transmitted efficiently and with high accuracy. Note that such communication can be said to be a one-way non-contact communication from the gaming machine 3001, which is an external device to the data display 2501, to the data display 2501.

Here, the gaming machine 3001 is, for example, a gaming machine such as the gaming machine 5002 or H2 described above, which includes a pachinko gaming machine 5002a and a pachislot gaming machine 5002b. The data display device 2501 is, for example, similar to the gaming display device 5001 described above, but can be various gaming devices including a gaming medium lending device and a unit for decorating the gaming machine that is provided on the gaming machine.

The data display 2501 shown in FIG. 149 is, for example, a data display called signage. This data display 2501 includes a liquid crystal display 2502, an LED 2503, a speaker 2504, a call button 2505, and an image sensor unit 2811. The call button 2505 is a button for calling a staff member of the arcade, and when the touch sensor detects that the call button 2505 has been pressed, the liquid crystal display 2502, the LED 2503, the speaker 2504, etc. are controlled to output in response to the detection.

The data display 2501 detects light from the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 with the image sensor unit 2811, and based on the detection result, determines the presentation pattern of the gaming machine 3001, etc., and controls the liquid crystal display 2502 to display a corresponding image according to the determined presentation pattern. In addition, if necessary, it controls to output a sound corresponding to the presentation pattern from the speaker and to light up the LED 2503.

The image sensor unit 2811 includes, for example, a CMOS image sensor that captures an image including the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 at a predetermined time interval. This CMOS image sensor is configured to capture images of the lamp 3305 at, for example, 220 fps or 440 fps.

This CMOS image sensor also captures an image of the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 and its surroundings at a predetermined angle of view (e.g., an angle of view of 30° or less) and light source distance (i.e., the distance between the CMOS image sensor and the lamp 3305, e.g., 30 mm to 300 mm). Therefore, the captured image obtained by the CMOS image sensor includes not only the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001, but also the performance lamps of the gaming machine 3001 (e.g., a lamp such as the top lamp H60 of gaming machine H2), light from the adjacent gaming machine 3001, light from the lighting fixtures in the amusement facility, and reflected light from these lights.

In this embodiment, the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 is composed of one or more light output devices such as LEDs, but is not limited to such a configuration. The lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 can function as a dedicated light output device for transmitting data such as the performance pattern of the gaming machine 3001, or can function as a dual-purpose light output device that performs the performance expression of the gaming machine 3001 and transmits data such as the game status and performance pattern. The top lamp H60 of the gaming machine H2 described above is the latter dual-purpose light output device.

Next, referring to FIG. 150, the configuration of the gaming machine 3001 as a pachislot machine will be described. The gaming machine 3001 comprises a main control unit 3301 that controls a main device group 3303, and a sub-control unit 3302 that controls a sub-device group 3304, and the main control unit 3301 is connected to the sub-control unit 3302 via one-way communication. An external terminal board 3308 is also connected to the main control unit 3301 via one-way communication. The main control unit 3301 and the sub-control unit 3302 each comprise a CPU, a ROM in which programs and the like are stored, and an RWM in which information relating to games and presentations is stored.

The main device group 3303 is composed of, for example, a reel control circuit, a medal sensor, a start lever sensor, a stop button sensor, a hopper control circuit, etc., and the main control unit 3301 controls the progress of the game in the gaming machine 3001 by controlling these devices. The main control unit 3301 also transmits commands to the sub-control unit 3302 in response to changes in the game state, etc.

The sub-device group 3304 has a lamp 3305 and a lamp control circuit 3306 that controls the lamp 3305 and other lamps. The sub-device group 3304 is also composed of, for example, a liquid crystal module, a performance button sensor, a role control circuit, an illumination control circuit, a speaker control circuit, and the like, and the sub-control unit 3302 controls the performance in the gaming machine 3001 by controlling these devices based on commands sent from the main control unit 3301.

The main control unit 3301 is connected to the data display 2501 via the external terminal board 3308, and outputs game information signals, error signals, etc. after each game or when there is a change in the internal state. The information input from the external terminal board 3308 is, for example, information including external signals 1 to 4, as shown in FIG. 140.

The sub-controller 3302 controls the light output from the lamp 3305 via the lamp control circuit 3306, thereby transmitting data such as the game status and presentation pattern to the data display 2501 (via non-contact communication). When the lamp 3305 also functions as a presentation lamp, the sub-controller 3302 controls the lamp 3305 via the lamp control circuit 3306 to light up in a specified color in accordance with the presentation.

In FIG. 150, the gaming machine 3001 is described as a pachinko machine, but the data display 2501 is also configured for pachinko machines, with information being input from an external terminal board (see FIG. 139) and lamps in the sub-device group.

Next, the configuration of the data display 2501 will be described with reference to FIG. 151. The data display 2501 includes a video display unit 2805 such as an LCD 2502, an illumination unit 2806 such as an LED 2503, and an audio output unit 2807 such as a speaker 2504 (see FIG. 149). The data display 2501 also includes a sensor group 2804, a control unit 2801, a ROM 2802, and a RAM 2803. The control unit 2801 includes a CPU and a control circuit board on which the CPU is provided, and controls the devices to which it is connected.

The ROM 2802 stores a control program for implementing the functions of the data display 2501. The control unit 2801 reads out and executes the control program stored in the ROM 2802 to control each component and implement functions such as executing presentations in a manner that corresponds to the game state, presentation pattern, etc., of the gaming machine 3001.

The control unit 2801 also controls communications with the gaming machine 3001 and with the server device 3901. The server device 3901 has the same functions as the server device H4 described above.

The sensor group 2804 is a sensor group including a touch sensor that determines whether the call button 2505 shown in FIG. 149 is pressed. When an operation is detected by these sensors, the control unit 2801 controls the display content in the video display unit 2805, the light emission state in the illumination unit 2806, and the audio output state in the audio output unit 2807 in accordance with the operation. When the display screen of the video display unit 2805 is caused to function as a touch panel, the sensor group 2804 includes a sensor for detecting a touch operation on this touch panel.

The communication interface 2810 is an interface for communicating with the gaming machine 3001 and the server device 3901, and is also a conversion module that converts input information into the optimal format when outputting it.

The communication interface 2810 receives information from the gaming machine 3001 in two communication modes. One is the non-contact communication via light as described above, and the other is a one-way communication mode in which the communication interface 2810 is connected to the external terminal board 3308 of the gaming machine 3001 via a contact input method, resulting in one-way communication from the gaming machine 3001 to the data display 2501.

Although not shown, the communication interface 2810 is connected to the game media lending device 5003 (see FIG. 111) by a harness using a contact input/output method, enabling two-way communication. The communication interface 2810 and the server device 3901 are connected by a coaxial cable using a wired LAN method, and are also connected by a harness using a contact output method, enabling two-way communication.

The RAM 2803 functions as a storage means for storing various data. For example, the control unit 2801 stores the control results of each connected component in the RAM 2803. The RAM 2803 also stores a data table (game state determination table) for determining the game state and presentation pattern of the gaming machine 3001, and a data table (presentation pattern table) for executing presentations according to the game state and presentation pattern.

In this embodiment, the data display 2501 can download a game status determination table and a presentation pattern table (including video data and audio data used for presentation) from the server device 3901 via the communication interface 2810.

In addition, data tables for determining the gaming state and presentation pattern of the gaming machine 3001, and data tables for executing presentations according to the gaming state and presentation pattern, etc., may be transferred from an external storage device, etc. to the RAM 2803 via the USB connection terminal of the communication interface 2810, and the above data tables can be transferred by various other methods and routes.

As described above, the image sensor unit 2811 is provided to capture an image of the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001. When the image sensor unit 2811 acquires an image including the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001, it transmits data such as the game status and presentation pattern based on the image to the control unit 2801 of the data display device 2501, and the control unit 2801 then executes presentation according to the data. The control unit 2801 controls the video display unit 2805, the illumination unit 2806, and the audio output unit 2807 to execute the presentation.

Next, the configuration of the image sensor unit 2811 will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the CMOS image sensor 2932 and the control LSI 2934 included in the image sensor unit 2811.

The CMOS image sensor 2932 is, for example, a CMOS image sensor with a resolution of 640 x 240 pixels and a frame rate of 220 fps or 440 fps. Note that in this embodiment, the CMOS image sensor 2932 is used as an imaging device that captures an image of the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 and acquires image data, but other imaging devices such as a CCD image sensor can also be used.

The control LSI 2934 includes a host controller 2941, a DSP (digital signal processor) circuit 2942, a SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 2943 connected to a backup power supply (not shown), a flash memory 2944, an ISP (Image Signal Processing) circuit 2945, and a UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) 2952. These devices constituting the control LSI 2934 are interconnected via a bus, and the control LSI 2934 of this embodiment uses AXI (Advanced eXtensible Interface) as the bus protocol.

The control LSI 2934 also includes an ISI (Image Sensor Interface) circuit 2951. The ISI circuit 2951 is electrically connected to the CMOS image sensor 2932 and the ISP circuit. The ISI circuit 2951 converts image data transmitted from the CMOS image sensor 2932 in the LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) format into an RGB Bayer image and outputs it. At this time, a unique image ID is assigned to the RGB image output from the ISI circuit 2951. This image ID makes it possible to identify each image acquired sequentially over time.

The ISP circuit 2945 inputs the RGB Bayer image from the ISI circuit 2951. Here, the ISP circuit 2945 can be configured to perform lens distortion processing. The lens distortion correction processing is a process for correcting distortion caused by the lens characteristics in the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 2932 in order to improve the accuracy of the processing described below.

Next, the ISP circuit 2945 performs color conversion processing to convert the RGB Bayer image (or the image after lens correction processing, if such processing has been performed) into various formats. In the color conversion processing, the ISP circuit 2945 converts the RGB Bayer image into image data (YUV image data) corresponding to the YUV color space, and stores this YUV image data in the SRAM 2943. Note that the SRAM 2943 is provided with a storage area capable of storing a predetermined number of YUV image data. When the number of YUV image data stored in the SRAM 2943 reaches the upper limit, the oldest YUV image data is overwritten in the stored order.

In addition, when storing YUV image data in the SRAM 2943, the ISP circuit 2945 outputs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt signal to the host controller 2941.

In addition, in the color conversion process, the ISP circuit 2945 can convert the RGB Bayer image into image data (HSV image data) corresponding to a color space (HSV color space) consisting of three components (H: hue, S: saturation, V: brightness) as necessary, and store this HSV image data in the SRAM 2943.

When only RGB image data is used, the ISP circuit 2945 stores the RGB image data directly in the SRAM 2943.

The DSP circuit 2942 performs data reception processing (e.g., light source detection processing, noise removal processing, decoding processing, etc.) in this embodiment under the control of the host controller 2941, and acquires data such as the game status and presentation pattern transmitted by the gaming machine 3001 from the input image data (YUV image data) captured by the CMOS image sensor 2932.

The DSP circuit 2942 performs Fourier transform and inverse Fourier transform as described below in the noise removal process under the control of the host controller 2941, and these processes can also be configured to be performed using dedicated circuits provided in the image sensor unit 2811. Also, when decoding error correction codes, CDMA codes, PSM codes, etc. in the decoding process, these processes can also be configured to be performed using dedicated circuits provided in the image sensor unit 2811.

The UART 2952 is a serial communication device for transmitting data generated by the image sensor unit 2811 (e.g., data on the game status, presentation patterns, etc. transmitted by the gaming machine 3001) to the control unit 2801 of the data display device 2501 via the communication interface 2810.

The host controller 2941 controls each device that constitutes the control LSI 2934, such as the DSP circuit 2942, UART 2952, etc.

In addition, when the host controller 2941 receives a VSYNC interrupt signal from the ISP circuit 2945 (when YUV image data is stored in the SRAM 2943), it instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to perform various processes as necessary in order to perform the data reception process described below.

The flash memory 2944 stores parameters and data required for various processes used by various devices constituting the control LSI 2934, such as the host controller 2941 and the DSP circuit 2942. It also stores the encoding method used in the data reception process of the image sensor unit 2811.

In this embodiment, the ISP circuit 2945 converts the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 2932 into image data corresponding to the YUV color space (YUV image data) and stores the converted data in the SRAM 2943 as input image data (input information), forming an input information generating means.

[Performance execution process in data display device]
Next, a description will be given of the performance execution process executed by the control unit 2801 of the data display 2501 with reference to Fig. 153. This process is basically started when the data display 2501 is powered on, and is executed periodically at a predetermined interval until the power is turned off.

First, the control unit 2801 inputs an output signal output from the external terminal board 3308 of the gaming machine 3001 (step S4050). Next, in step S4051, it is determined whether or not there is a change in any of the external signals 1 to 4. The external signals 1 to 4 are contents that can be appropriately adjusted between the gaming machine 3001 and the data display 2501. For example, as shown in FIG. 140, "external signal 1" can be a signal indicating that an RB has occurred in the gaming machine 3001 or that an RB is in progress, "external signal 2" can be a signal indicating that a BB has occurred in the gaming machine 3001 or that an BB is in progress, "external signal 3" can be a signal indicating that an ART has occurred in the gaming machine 3001 or that an ART is in progress, and "external signal 4" can be a signal indicating that the front door of the gaming machine 3001 is open.

If there is a change in any of the external signals 1 to 4 (step S4051: YES), the control unit 2801 refers to a presentation pattern table such as that shown in FIG. 138, changes the presentation according to the state of the external signals 1 to 4, and starts counting according to that presentation (step S4052).

After step S4052 is completed, or if there is no change in any of the external signals 1 to 4 in step S4051 (step S4051: NO), the control unit 2801 acquires communication data (sent by the gaming machine 3001) from the image sensor unit 2811 (step S4053). This communication data is data generated by the image sensor unit 2811 from an image of the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 through a data reception process described below, and if decoding is successful, it is stored in the communication data storage area of the RAM 2803.

Next, in step S4054, it is determined whether the control unit 2801 has acquired communication data from the gaming machine 3001. If communication data has been acquired (step S4054: YES), the control unit 2801 determines whether the acquired data is a performance instruction command including a performance pattern (step S4055). If the acquired data is a performance instruction command (step S4055: YES), the control unit 2801 refers to the performance pattern table, changes the performance to one corresponding to the performance instruction command (step S4056), and returns to step S4050. On the other hand, if the acquired data is not a performance instruction command (step S4055: NO), the control unit 2801 continues the current performance (step S4057) and returns to step S4050.

If communication data has not been received from the gaming machine 3001 in step S4054 (step S4054: NO), the control unit 2801 detects an error state (step S4058). Next, it is determined whether the count value that started counting in step S4052 satisfies the end condition (step S4059). If the count value satisfies the end condition (step S4059: YES), the control unit 2801 stops the performance being performed (step S4060) and returns processing to step S4050. On the other hand, if the count value does not satisfy the end condition (step S4059: NO), the control unit 2801 returns processing to step S4050.

[LED control process (data transmission process) in gaming machine]
Next, the LED control process executed by the sub-control unit 3302 of the gaming machine 3001 will be described with reference to Fig. 154. This process is basically started when the gaming machine 3001 is powered on, and is executed periodically at a predetermined interval until the power is turned off.

First, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether there is any transmission data to be sent to the data display 2501 due to a change in the game state, etc. (step S4080). If it is determined that there is no transmission data (step S4080: NO), the process ends.

If it is determined that there is data to be transmitted (step S4080: YES), in step S4081, the sub-control unit 3302 performs error coding processing. This error coding processing is, for example, processing to convert 8 bits of original data into a 16-bit error correction code (error correction code (16, 8)).

Next, in step S4082, it is determined whether the encoding is to be CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access). This process is determined, for example, by referring to the encoding method stored in the RWM of the sub-control unit 3302. It is assumed that the encoding method stored in the RWM of the sub-control unit 3302 (of the gaming machine 3001), which is the sender of the communication data, matches the encoding method stored in the flash memory 2944 of the image sensor unit 2811 (of the data display device 2501), which is the receiver of the communication data. In this embodiment, this encoding method is CDMA or PSM (Manchester coding) encoding.

If it is determined that the encoding is CDMA (step S4082: YES), CDMA encoding processing is performed in step S4083. In this processing, the transmission data converted into the error correction code in step S4081 is encoded by CDMA. This CDMA encoding will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 166.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the coding is not CDMA (step S4082: NO), PSM coding processing is performed in step S4084. In this processing, the transmission data converted into an error correcting code in step S4081 is coded by PSM. This PSM coding will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 167.

After step S4083 or after step S4084, in step S4085, the LED performance pattern that is being executed or will be executed is obtained. This process is, for example, a process of extracting an illumination pattern (i.e., an illumination pattern of the LED (lamp 3305)) in a performance pattern that is being executed or will be executed, which is determined based on the performance pattern table shown in FIG. 138. The illumination pattern extracted in this way is expanded, for example, in the RWM of the sub-control unit 3302.

Next, in step S4086, the LED light emission pattern based on the transmission data encoded by CDMA or PSM is synthesized with the LED light emission pattern based on the performance pattern acquired in step S4085. The synthesized LED light emission pattern is then registered as the performance pattern being executed (step S4087), and the process ends. This registration process is realized, for example, by rewriting the LED light emission pattern deployed in the RWM of the sub-controller 3302 to the synthesized light emission pattern. The sub-controller 3302 then controls the lamp control circuit 3306 based on this registered performance pattern, and the lamp control circuit 3306 controls the lighting (brightness and light color) of the lamp 3305 based on this.

When synthesizing an LED lighting pattern based on encoded transmission data with an LED lighting pattern in an active performance pattern, for example, if the bit of the transmission data is "1", the LED is made slightly brighter, and if the bit of the transmission data is "0", the LED is made slightly dimmer, thereby expressing a pulse related to the transmission data. With this synthesis, the player can visually recognize the LED (lamp 3305) that is emitting light due to the performance as a natural lamp performance without realizing that it contains encoded transmission data, and as a result, the transmission data can be transmitted to the data display 2501 without the player being aware of it.

In the example shown in FIG. 154, the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 is configured to function as a dual-purpose light output device that performs the presentation of the gaming machine 3001 and transmits data such as the game status and presentation patterns, but it can also be configured as a dedicated light output device that only transmits data such as the game status and presentation patterns.

When the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 is configured as a dedicated light output device, instead of the processing of steps S4085 to S4087, the light emission mode of the lamp 3305 is controlled based on the transmission data encoded by CDMA or PSM and the LED light emission pattern based on a certain reference brightness value. This is to address the problem that when the brightness of the transmission data itself is weak, the amount of light is too small to capture, and the problem that light emission data in the negative direction cannot be generated when the brightness is 0.

In the example of Fig. 154, when data such as game status and performance pattern is transmitted, for example, error correction information is added by error correction coding, and 8 bits of original data are converted into a 16-bit error correction code, and such coding makes it possible to correct 2-bit random errors and further 3-bit burst errors. The error correction code in this embodiment is, for example, a BCH code, which is a type of cyclic code, and the transmission data is encoded by the generating polynomial shown in the following formula 1.
G(x)= ^x8 + ^x7 + ^x6 + ^x4 + ^x2 +x+1... (Equation 1)

In the example of FIG. 154, CDMA coding and PSM coding are selectively used as coding, but it can also be configured to use other coding.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 3302 that executes the LED control process constitutes a transmission data generating means and an information-attached luminance generating means.

[Data Reception Processing in the Image Sensor Unit of the Data Display]
155, a data reception process controlled by the host controller 2941 of the image sensor unit 2811 will be described. This process is basically started when the data display 2501 is powered on, and is executed periodically at a predetermined interval until the power is turned off.

First, the host controller 2941 receives multiple pieces of image data (YUV image data) of the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 acquired by the ISP circuit 2945, and performs a light source detection process to identify the light source, i.e., the position (area) of the lamp 3305 in the image, from the image data (step S4100). Details of the light source detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the light source has been identified. If the light source has not been identified (step S4101: NO), the process returns to step S4100. On the other hand, if the light source has been identified (step S4101: YES), image data acquisition processing is performed in step S4102. This processing is a processing for sequentially acquiring image data (YUV image data) of the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 acquired by the ISP circuit 2945.

Next, noise removal processing is performed on the received data determined based on the position of the light source determined in step S4100 and the image data acquired in step S4102 (step S4103). Details of the noise removal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 161.

Here, it is determined whether the amount of received data accumulated to enable decoding has not been reached, i.e., whether a delay is occurring (step S4104). Specifically, in the noise removal process of step S4103, if the noise removal process delay counter and the flicker removal delay counter have not reached their prescribed values, it is determined that the decoding process is not yet ready and is therefore delayed.

If it is determined that the image data is being delayed (step S4104: YES), the image data import process of step S4102 is further executed. If it is determined that the image data is not being delayed (step S4104: NO), the decoding process is performed (step S4105). Details of the decoding process will be described later with reference to FIG. 165.

After the decoding process, in step S4106, it is determined whether the decoding is successful. If the decoding is successful (step S4106: YES), an error correction process is performed to convert the error correction code to the original data (step S4107). Next, in step S4108, it is determined whether the error correction in the error correction code process is successful.

If the error correction was successful (step S4108: YES), in step S4109, the decoded data (received data received from the gaming machine 3001) is stored in the communication data storage area of the RAM 2803 of the data display unit 2501. Next, in step S4110, the reception error counter is cleared, and the process returns to the image data import process of step S4102.

If it is determined in step S4106 that the decoding is not successful (step S4106: NO), or if it is determined in step S4108 that the error correction in the error correction code processing is not successful (step S4108: NO), in step S4111, the reception error counter stored in SRAM2943 is updated by 1 (i.e., incremented by 1).

Next, in step S4112, it is determined whether the reception error counter is greater than ERROR_MAX. If it is determined that the reception error counter is not greater than ERROR_MAX (step S4112: NO), the process returns to the image data import process of step S4102. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reception error counter is greater than ERROR_MAX (step S4112: YES), the process clears the reception error counter in step S4113, and sets the noise reduction counter to 0 and the flicker reduction counter to 0 in step S4114. Thereafter, the process returns to the image data import process of step S4102.

In this embodiment, the host controller 2941, the DSP circuit 2942, and the ISP circuit 2945, which extract received data from image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 2932, constitute an information extraction means and a light reception control means.

[Light source detection process in the image sensor unit of the data display device]
Next, with reference to Fig. 156 to Fig. 160, a light source detection process controlled by the host controller 2941 of the image sensor unit 2811 will be described. The light source detection process uses the blinking control characteristics of the LED light source to identify the position of the LED light source in the image captured by the image sensor unit 2811. In this embodiment, the LED light source is analyzed and identified based on four characteristics of the light source, namely, brightness, periodicity, color, and size.

First, the host controller 2941 waits until it receives a VSYNC interrupt signal from the ISP circuit 2945 described above (step S4170). Then, in step S4171, it is determined whether or not the time filter is in progress. If it is determined that the time filter is in progress (step S4171: YES), the process returns to step S4170 and waits for the generation of a VSYNC interrupt signal. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S4171: NO), the process proceeds to step S4172.

Such a time filter is for thinning out YUV image data obtained at, for example, 220 fps or 440 fps, and is a time thinning filter that acquires YUV image data at a rate of, for example, once every 3 to 8 VSYNC interrupt signals. As described above, the time filter of this embodiment simply thins out the YUV image data, but various other time-direction LPFs (Low-pass filters) can also be applied.

If it is determined that the time filter is not in progress (step S4171: NO), the input image data is acquired in step S4172. This process acquires the YUV image data stored in SRAM2943.

Figure 157 shows an example of acquired input image data. The input image data is YUV image data, and is represented as a two-dimensional array consisting of Y, U, and V components. Each element of the two-dimensional array corresponds to each pixel of the captured image, and for convenience, Figure 157 shows the value of each component in a 12 x 12 pixel array. In the image sensor unit 2811 of this embodiment, for example, YUV image data captured at 640 x 240 pixels is provided.

Each component in the YUV image data (i.e., the Y component, U component, and V component) can have an 8-bit value per pixel, in which case the resolution of each component is 256 (tones) from 0 to 255. It is also possible to adopt a different resolution depending on the component; for example, the Y component can be 8 bits, and the U and V components can each be 4 bits. Also, although this embodiment uses YUV image data as the input image data, RGB image data or HSV image data can also be used.

Next, in step S4173, the host controller 2941 instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to perform average image generation processing. The average image generation processing is processing for generating the current average image data from the average image data generated based on the YUV image data, which is the input image data input up to the previous time, and the YUV image data, which is the input image data input this time.

Figure 157 shows an example of the current average image data. Like the input image data, the average image data is YUV image data, and is represented as a two-dimensional array consisting of Y, U, and V components. Like the input image data, each element of the two-dimensional array corresponds to each pixel of the captured image.

The average image data is calculated for each component and for each pixel by the following formula 2. Note that the initial value of the average image data is the first input image data in the monitoring time.
Average image data (x, y) = previous average image data (x, y) + difference * learning coefficient ... (Equation 2)
The "previous average image data" is average image data that is updated every time input image data is acquired from previously input image data. The "difference" is the current input image data (x, y) - the previous average image data (x, y), and the "learning coefficient" is a constant such as "0.91."
Here, if the "learning coefficient" is 0.91, the above formula 2 can be rewritten as the following formula 3.
Average image data (x, y)=previous average image data (x, y)*0.09+current input image data (x, y)*0.91 (Equation 3)
That is, as is clear from Equation 3, this average image data is calculated by taking a weighted average of the previous average image data and the current input image data, and 91% of the elements of the latest input image data are reflected by 9% of the elements of the past input image data.

Next, in step S4174, the host controller 2941 instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to perform a differential image generation process. The differential image generation process is a process in which the difference between the Y component of the input image data and the Y component of the average image data is calculated for each pixel in the same position, and the difference is obtained as differential image data.

Figure 157 shows an example of differential image data. This differential image data shows the difference between the input image data (Y component) shown in Figure 157 and the average image data (Y component). In the example of Figure 157, differences occur for the three pixels surrounded by thick lines, and (if the position of the upper left pixel is represented as (0,0)), pixels (1,7) and (4,6) are assigned a value of "1", and pixel (7,6) is assigned a value of "2".

Next, in step S4175, the host controller 2941 instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to perform cumulative value calculation processing. The cumulative value calculation processing is a process in which, when a value related to a pixel that has become a value other than "0" in the differential image data satisfies a predetermined condition, "1" is added to the pixel at the corresponding position for a certain period of time, and this is calculated as cumulative image data. In this embodiment, in order to efficiently search for a light source, the cumulative image data is calculated by focusing on not only the fluctuation components but also the color components.

For example, for each pixel in the differential image data that has a value other than "0", if both of the following conditions 1 and 2 are met, "1" is added to the position of the corresponding pixel in the accumulated image data.
<Condition 1>
Threshold value 1a≦difference image data (Y component) (x, y)≦threshold value 1b (Equation 4)
<Condition 2>
(threshold value 3≦average image data 1 (x, y)≦threshold value 4) & (threshold value 5≦average image data 2 (x, y)≦threshold value 6) ... (Equation 5)

Equation 4 in condition 1 requires that the fluctuation component (vibration component) is within a specified range (for example, 0.5 to 3.0), and the value of the differential image data (x, y) represents this fluctuation component, which is the difference between the Y component of the input image data and the Y component of the average image data. In addition, because the fluctuation component is small, condition 1 can also be determined using other values calculated based on the value of the differential image data (x, y), such as the value obtained by squaring the value of the differential image data (x, y).

Equation 5 of condition 2 requires that the color components are within a specified range, where "average image data 1 (x, y)" is the value of the corresponding pixel in the (U component) of the average image data shown in FIG. 157, and "average image data 2 (x, y)" is the value of the corresponding pixel in the (V component) of the average image data shown in FIG. 157. Note that other values representing the color components of the average image data can also be used to determine the conditions related to the color components.

Figure 157 shows an example of cumulative image data obtained as a result of performing the above-mentioned cumulative value calculation process for a specified period of time based on data including the average image data and differential image data of Figure 157.

When the cumulative image data is found in step S4175, the host controller 2941 performs light source identification processing in step S4176. In the light source identification processing, an area having an area equal to or greater than a certain area based on the cumulative image data and having the largest sum of cumulative values (values assigned to the pixels of that area in the cumulative image data) is regarded as an LED light source.

In the light source identification process of this embodiment, when a pixel set in which pixels with a cumulative value of 1 or more are adjacently arranged in the cumulative image data is enclosed in a rectangular area, if the area is 3 pixels or more in the x coordinate and 2 pixels or more in the y coordinate (i.e., an area of 3 x 2 (pixels) or more), this area (pixel area) becomes a light source candidate. In this example, even if two pixels with a cumulative value of 1 or more are in a diagonal positional relationship (i.e., diagonally upper left, diagonally upper right, diagonally lower left, diagonally lower right), these pixels are considered to be adjacent, but it is also possible to not consider such diagonal positions as adjacent.

Now, with reference to Figures 158 to 160, the light source identification process for identifying pixel regions that are candidate light sources will be described. Note that the light source identification process described in this embodiment is merely an example, and the pixel regions can be identified by various methods.

To explain an example of the light source identification process according to the present invention, Figs. 158 to 160 show an example of cumulative image data in which cumulative values are arranged in a two-dimensional array. This is similar to the cumulative image data shown in Fig. 157. Here, a two-dimensional array of 9 x 5 pixels consisting of pixels (0, 0) to (8, 4) is shown as an example.

In this two-dimensional array, the search points for searching the cumulative value are detected in order, and labeling and linking are performed according to the cumulative value of the pixel. Finally, pixel regions having an area equal to or greater than the above-mentioned certain area (here, 3 x 2 pixels) are identified as light source candidates. Labeling is a process of provisionally marking pixels in pixel regions that may be identified as light source candidates. From this point on, each pixel of the cumulative image data shown in Figures 158 to 160 will be referred to as a "cell." This cell corresponds to the pixel position of the image data obtained as a result of imaging the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 with the image sensor unit 2811.

In Figures 158 to 160, the current exploration point (the cell being explored) is indicated by vertical hatching, the previous or previous exploration points are indicated by horizontal hatching, and the labeled cells are indicated by diagonal hatching.

Figures 158 to 160 also show search areas indicated by thick lines as P1-1 to P1-8, which are areas that include the search point and four inspection points located to the left, upper left, above, and upper right of the search point. The search area is controlled so that its range is moved sequentially by the search, but at least the accumulated value of this search area is loaded into SRAM 2943 together with the cell position information during the search.

Here, we will explain the process flow for sequentially detecting search points in the accumulated image data shown in Figures 158 to 160, until the area of the light source candidate is finally identified.

First, detection of the search point begins at cell (0,0). The search point detection starts by moving to the right from cell (0,0) to search the first row of the accumulated image data, and then searches the second row below that. That is, in FIG. 158, the search goes from cell (0,0) -> cell (8,0), to cell (0,1) -> cell (4,1). Up to this point, the accumulated values of each cell are all "0", and these cells do not contribute to light source identification, so they are skipped.

When the search point advances to cell (5,1), the accumulated value of this cell (5,1) is "67", and this situation is shown in Figure 158A. As shown above, a search area P1-1 is shown that includes the search point, cell (5,1), and the four inspection points located to the left, upper left, above, and upper right of this search point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158B, the search point advances to cell (6,1), and the cumulative value of this cell (6,1) is "57." At this time, cell (5,1) is recognized as the search point before the previous time.

Here, cell (5,1), which is recognized as the previous search point, is included in search area P1-2, so cell (5,1) is labeled as shown in FIG. 158C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158D, the search point advances to cell (7,1), and the cumulative value of this cell (7,1) is "39." At this time, cell (6,1) is recognized as the search point before the previous time.

Here, cell (6,1), which is recognized as the previous search point, is included in search area P1-3, and cell (6,1) is labeled as shown in FIG. 158E. Also, cell (6,1) is adjacent to cell (5,1), which has already been labeled, so these cells are recognized as connected.

Next, the search continues with cells (8,1), (0,2), and (1,2), but these cells are skipped because their cumulative values are "0". After that, as shown in FIG. 159A, the search point advances to cell (2,2), whose cumulative value is "76". At this time, cell (7,1) is recognized as the search point before the previous time.

Here, cell (7,1), which is recognized as the previous search point, is not included in search area P1-4, so cell (7,1) is not labeled at this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159B, the search point advances to cell (3, 2), and the cumulative value of this cell (3, 2) is "103." At this time, cell (2, 2) is recognized as the search point before the previous time.

Here, cell (7,1), which is recognized as a search point from the previous time or earlier, is still not included in search area P1-5, so cell (7,1) is not labeled at this point. Therefore, cell (7,1) and cell (2,2) are recognized as search points from the previous time or earlier.

Here, as shown in FIG. 159C, cell (2, 2), which is recognized as the previous search point, is included in search area P1-5, and cell (2, 2) is labeled.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159D, the search point advances to cell (4, 2), and the cumulative value of this cell (4, 2) is "141." At this time, cell (3, 2) is recognized as the search point before the previous time.

As shown in FIG. 159E, cell (3, 2), which is recognized as the previous search point, is included in search area P1-6 and is therefore labeled. Also, cell (3, 2) is adjacent to cell (2, 2), which has already been labeled, and so these cells are recognized as being connected.

In addition, cell (7,1), which is recognized as the previous search point, is adjacent to cell (6,1), which is joined to cell (5,1) that is now included in search area P1-6, so it is labeled here, and cells (5,1), (6,1), and (7,1) are recognized as being connected.

Next, the search continues with cells (5,2) through (8,2) and (0,3), but these cells are skipped because their cumulative values are "0". After that, as shown in FIG. 160A, the search point advances to cell (1,3), whose cumulative value is "49". At this time, cell (4,2) is recognized as the search point from before the previous time.

As shown in FIG. 160B, cell (4,2), which is recognized as the previous search point, is adjacent to cell (3,2) which is connected to cell (2,2) which is included in search area P1-7, so it is labeled here. Also, cell (4,2) is adjacent to cell (3,2) which has already been labeled, so cell (2,2), cell (3,2), and cell (4,2) are recognized as connected. Furthermore, these connected cells (2,2), cell (3,2), and cell (4,2) are adjacent to the connected cells (5,1), cell (6,1), and cell (7,1) in the diagonal direction, so cell (2,2), cell (3,2), cell (4,2), cell (5,1), cell (6,1), and cell (7,1) are recognized as connected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160C, the search point advances to cell (2, 3), and the cumulative value of this cell (2, 3) is "4." At this time, cell (1, 3) is recognized as the search point before the previous time.

As shown in FIG. 160D, cell (1,3), which is recognized as the previous search point, is included in search area P1-8 and is therefore labeled. Also, cell (1,3) is adjacent to cell (2,2), which has already been labeled, so it is linked to this cell (2,2) and recognized. Furthermore, cell (2,3), which is the search point, also has a cumulative value of "4" and is adjacent to cell (2,2), so cell (2,3) is also linked to cell (2,2) and recognized. Finally, cell (1,3), cell (2,3), cell (2,2), cell (3,2), cell (4,2), cell (5,1), cell (6,1), and cell (7,1) are all linked and recognized.

Next, the search continues with cells (3,3) through (8,3), and cells (0,4) through (8,4), and because the cumulative values of these cells are "0", they are skipped and all search is completed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 160E, a pixel area P2 consisting of rectangular cells including the combined and recognized cells (i.e., cell (1,3), cell (2,3), cell (2,2), cell (3,2), cell (4,2), cell (5,1), cell (6,1), cell (7,1)) is obtained, and because this pixel area P2 is an area of a certain area or more (here, 3 x 2 pixels), it is finally identified as a light source candidate.

By applying the process described above to the entire accumulated image data, pixel regions consisting of a collection of cells with a non-zero accumulated value can be identified as light source candidates; if there are multiple such collections, multiple light source candidates will be identified.

In this embodiment, the pixel region identified as a light source candidate is a rectangular region that includes a collection of cells whose cumulative value is not zero, but it is also possible to identify the collection of cells whose cumulative value is not zero itself, or an area obtained based on that collection, as the pixel region.

In addition, in this embodiment, when searching for each cell, cells with an accumulated value of zero are skipped so that such cells with an accumulated value of zero are not involved in identifying pixel regions that are candidate light sources. However, it is also possible to skip cells with accumulated values smaller than a predetermined value (for example, a value greater than zero, such as 5 or 10) so that these cells are not involved in identifying pixel regions that are candidate light sources.

When the above light source identification process determines that multiple pixel regions are candidate light sources, the region with the largest sum of accumulated values within that pixel region is identified as the position of the LED light source. Note that in this embodiment, there is one LED light source, and one corresponding pixel region is identified as the position of the LED light source.

For example, taking the cumulative image data shown in Figure 157, pixel region R1 surrounded by a thick line has pixels with a cumulative value of 1 or more arranged in a 2 x 2 (pixel) area, but as mentioned above, it is not an area of 3 x 2 (pixels) or more, so it cannot be a candidate light source.

Furthermore, pixel regions R2 and R3 enclosed by thick lines are both regions of 3 x 2 (pixels) or more with cumulative values of 1 or more, and are candidates for light sources. However, the total cumulative value contained in region R2 is "469," and the total cumulative value contained in region R3 is "162." Ultimately, region R2, which has the larger sum of the cumulative values, is identified as the location of the LED light source.

Next, in the light source identification process of step S4176, it is determined whether or not the position of the LED light source has been identified (step S4177). If the position of the LED light source has been identified (step S4177: NO), the process ends. In this manner, in this embodiment, the input image data and average image data shown in FIG. 157 are updated for each frame (each thinned frame), and the position of the LED light source is identified based on the differential image data and cumulative image data that are updated accordingly.

If the position of the LED light source is not identified (step S4177: YES), in step S4178, it is determined whether or not it is within the monitoring time. In this embodiment, the monitoring time is 2 to 7 seconds. If it is within the monitoring time (step S4178: YES), the process returns to step S4170 and waits for the generation of a VSYNC interrupt signal. If it is not within the monitoring time (step S4178: NO), an initialization process is performed (step S4179). In this initialization process, the average image data of each of the Y, U, and V components is set as the corresponding input image data for each pixel, and the difference image data and accumulated image data are cleared. After step S4179, the process returns to step S4170 and waits for the generation of a VSYNC interrupt signal.

By using the above-described light source detection process, it is possible to effectively find an LED light source. The transmission signal of an LED light source has characteristics in frequency and amplitude, and when the disturbance components are suppressed and the signal is passed through threshold filters for color, amplitude, and periodic components, characteristics appear near the LED light source. In addition, the pulses of the transmission data are spread over a wide band, but by taking the background difference (difference from the average image), it becomes easier to extract the plateau area. Furthermore, disturbance components can be suppressed to some extent by using a time filter. The light source detection process of the present invention is built based on these principles, and this makes it possible to realize effective light source detection.

In this embodiment, the host controller 2941, DSP circuit 2942, and ISP circuit 2945 that execute the light source detection process constitute a light output determination means, the host controller 2941 that instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to execute an average image generation process and generate average image data (average information) constitutes an average information generation means, the host controller 2941 that instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to execute a difference image generation process and generate difference image data (difference information) constitutes a difference information generation means, and the host controller 2941 that instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to execute a cumulative value calculation process and generate cumulative image data (cumulative information) constitutes a cumulative information generation means.

[Noise Removal Processing in the Image Sensor Unit of a Data Display]
161 to 164, a description will be given of the removal process controlled by the host controller 2941 of the image sensor unit 2811. The noise removal process is a process for removing noise such as blinking or flicker of an LED light source for effect.

First, the host controller 2941 determines whether the noise removal delay counter is 10 or greater (step S4130). If the noise removal delay counter is 10 or greater (step S4130: YES), in step S4132, a light source image data acquisition process is performed to obtain time series observation values.

This light source image data acquisition process extracts the Y component value from the pixel area (the position of the LED light source in the YUV image data) identified in the light source identification process (see FIG. 156) of the light source exploration process, and calculates the average. In the example of FIG. 157, pixel area R2 (8×2 (pixels)) is identified as the LED light source, so in the input image data (Y component) obtained sequentially, the Y component values of the pixels corresponding to this area are summed up, and the sum is divided by the number of pixels in pixel area R2, 16. Note that here, the average value of the Y component values corresponding to pixel area R2 is grasped as the observed value, but the observed value may be obtained by other methods. For example, the Y component value may be weighted based on the cumulative value of each pixel in pixel area R2, or the Y component value corresponding to a specific pixel in pixel area R2 or the average value of those, or the average value of a certain area (for example, 3×2 (pixels)) centered on the largest value in pixel area R2 may be used as the observed value.

Next, in step S4133, edge-preserving smoothing filter processing is performed to estimate the performance value of the LED lighting pattern related to the performance. The edge-preserving smoothing filter, also known as a domain transform filter, is a filter that smoothes small edges while preserving large edge signals. This filter makes it possible to estimate and extract the LED lighting pattern related to the performance from the observed value on which the transmission data (data on the game status, performance pattern, etc.) sent from the gaming machine 3001 is superimposed.

Figure 162 is a conceptual diagram showing observed values superimposed with transmission data (data on game status, presentation pattern, etc.) transmitted from the gaming machine 3001. As shown in Figure 162, the value of the Y component at a specific position extracted from the YUV image data varies between the maximum brightness value (e.g., MAX = 255) and the minimum brightness value (e.g., MIN = 0), and the transmission data is superimposed on the LED light emission pattern related to the presentation represented by the thick line. That is, when the LED light emission pattern based on the transmission data is superimposed (combined) on the LED light emission pattern related to the presentation, for example, if the bit of the transmission data is "1", the LED light emission related to the presentation is slightly brighter, and if the bit of the transmission data is "0", the LED light emission related to the presentation is slightly dimmer.

For example, if the LED brightness in the LED lighting pattern for the effect is "128", and the bit in the transmitted data is ON (i.e., "1"), the LED brightness in the combined LED lighting pattern is adjusted to "130", whereas if the bit in the transmitted data is OFF (i.e., "0"), the LED brightness in the combined LED lighting pattern is adjusted to "126". In this way, the fluctuation range of the brightness value superimposed by the transmitted data is "2", which is extremely small compared to the range between the maximum and minimum brightness values as shown in FIG. 162, and is also considerably smaller than the fluctuation range of the LED lighting pattern for the effect represented by the thick line in FIG. 162.

In addition, Figure 162 shows an enlarged view of the left and right ends of the observed values, and as these views show, the period of change in the brightness value superimposed by the transmitted data is significantly shorter than the timing of change in the LED lighting pattern related to the performance, shown by the thick line in Figure 162 (the basic timing of change in LED lighting due to the performance).

Figure 163A shows the observed values superimposed with the transmitted data in a more specific manner. In Figure 163A, each of the continuously captured YUV image data is shown as a frame. This shows that, over time, there is a large fluctuation in the Y component as the LED light emission pattern related to the performance, and in addition, small fluctuations in the Y component related to the transmitted data are superimposed.

Next, in step S4134, a performance light emission removal process is performed. This performance light emission removal process subtracts the performance value extracted in step S4133 (a value corresponding to the LED light emission pattern related to the performance) from the observation value acquired in step S4132 (a value obtained by superimposing the LED light emission pattern related to the performance and the transmission data sent from the gaming machine 3001) to obtain a signal value.

Figure 163B shows an example of the signal value obtained by subtracting the performance value from the observation value.

Note that if the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 is configured as a dedicated light output device that only transmits data such as the game status and presentation pattern, no presentation value is included, so a certain reference brightness value can be subtracted.

Next, the host controller 2941 determines whether the flicker elimination delay counter is equal to or greater than 64 (step S4135). If the flicker elimination delay counter is equal to or greater than 64 (step S4135: YES), then in step S4137, flicker elimination processing is performed to remove the flicker component.

Figure 164 shows the above flicker removal process. In Figure 164A, the signal value after subtraction of the performance value shown in Figure 163B is shown by a dotted line. The result of Fourier transforming the data represented in this way is shown in Figure 164B. At this time, a signal (flicker component) is extracted and suppressed from periodic noise with a frequency of, for example, 100 Hz or 120 Hz caused by disturbances such as fluorescent lights. The suppressed flicker component is shown as a dotted line in Figure 164B.

Next, the host controller 2941 instructs the DSP circuit 2942 to perform an inverse Fourier transform to generate a signal value from which flicker has been removed. The solid line portion shown in FIG. 164A indicates the pulse sequence generated by the inverse Fourier transform. In this way, in the flicker removal process, a signal value from which flicker components have been removed is generated using a Fourier transform and an inverse Fourier transform, as shown in FIG. 164A. Note that the Fourier transform performed in this embodiment employs a discrete Fourier transform (DFT), but other Fourier transforms can also be used depending on the characteristics of the light source, the lens used in the image sensor, and the like.

If the noise removal delay counter is not 10 or more (step S4130: NO), in step S4131, the noise removal delay counter is incremented by 1. If the flicker removal delay counter is not 64 or more (step S4135: NO), the flicker removal delay counter is incremented by 1. As described in the data reception process shown in FIG. 155, if the noise removal process delay counter and the flicker removal delay counter have not reached their specified values, control is performed so that the decoding process is not performed. In this embodiment, however, control is performed so that the noise removal process is delayed by 10 frames in steps S4132 to S4134, and the flicker removal process using Fourier transform in step S4137 is delayed by 64 frames.

After steps S4137, S4131, and S4136, the noise removal process ends.

[Decoding process in the image sensor unit of the data display device]
165, a description will be given of a decoding process controlled by the host controller 2941 of the image sensor unit 2811. The decoding process is a process for obtaining transmission data (data on game status, presentation pattern, etc.) transmitted from the gaming machine 3001 based on a signal value (pulse wave) obtained as a result of the noise removal process.

First, in step S4150, the host controller 2941 determines whether the encoding is CDMA. This process is performed based on, for example, data stored in the flash memory 2944 of the image sensor unit 2811.

If it is determined that the encoding is CDMA (step S4150: YES), then in step S4151, a CDMA decoding process is performed. In this process, the signal value obtained as a result of the noise removal process is decoded by CDMA. The fact that the encoding is CDMA indicates that CDMA encoding was used to encode the transmission data in the LED control process in the gaming machine 3001 shown in FIG. 154. This CDMA decoding will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 166.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the coding is not CDMA (step S4150: NO), PSM decoding processing is performed in step S4152. In this processing, the signal value obtained as a result of the noise removal processing is decoded by PSM. The fact that the coding is PSM indicates that PSM coding was used to code the transmission data in the LED control processing in the gaming machine 3001 shown in FIG. 154. This PSM decoding will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG. 167.

In the example of FIG. 165, CDMA decoding or PSM decoding is used depending on the encoding selection in the LED control processing in the gaming machine 3001 shown in FIG. 154, but if any other encoding is used in the LED control processing in the gaming machine 3001, it can be configured to use the corresponding decoding method accordingly.

[Encoding and Decoding Methods]
As described above, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 3001 encodes transmission data consisting of data on game status, presentation patterns, etc., in units of 1 bit, and transmits the data to the data display 2501 in the form of a pulse wave via the emission of an LED. The data display 2501 receives the data based on an image of the emission of an LED, calculates a correlation value with the code from the received pulse wave, and recognizes a pulse wave with a correlation value equal to or greater than a threshold value as transmission data received from the gaming machine 3001.

For example, if the transmission data is 4-bit data "0011", and bit "1" is assigned a code bit "0101", and bit "0" is assigned a code bit "1010" that is the inverse of the code bit corresponding to bit "1", the transmission data after encoding will be the bit string "1010, 1010, 0101, 0101" (note that the commas in the bits are inserted for convenience to separate the 4 bits of the transmission data for easy understanding).

In such encoded bit strings, the starting position of the code is unclear, and furthermore, when the bit string data is slid to process with a window size of 4 bits, the same code appears in the window, resulting in a high correlation value with the code, which poses problems when decoding.

Therefore, in this embodiment, it is important to select a code whose starting position is easy to understand (i.e., easy to synchronize) and whose autocorrelation and cross-correlation are low. Note that autocorrelation is a measure of how well a signal matches a signal when the signal itself is time-shifted, and cross-correlation is a measure of the similarity between two signals.

To solve the above-mentioned problems during decoding, this embodiment employs a unique spreading code in CDMA encoding. CDMA encoding is a method used to perform two or more communications (multiple access) within the same frequency band.

Here, the CDMA code is set from the following viewpoints.
A. Select a CDMA code with low autocorrelation and cross-correlation. In other words, a spreading code that reduces both the autocorrelation and cross-correlation when inverted and reduces the correlation value when a window (a partition window based on a processing unit, etc.) is slid is used.
B. Two types of 16-bit spreading codes are prepared. That is, the two spreading codes are arranged so that the correlation value becomes low when the window is slid.
C. A 32-bit spreading code is associated with only the first bit of the transmission data, and a 16-bit spreading code is associated with the remaining bits. By configuring in this way, the start position of the transmission data can be clearly grasped.

Figure 166 shows an example of CDMA encoding using the above spreading code. Figure 166A shows (in hexadecimal) the leading 32-bit code set according to the bits of the transmission data, and two 16-bit codes (16-bit code (1) and 16-bit code (2)). When the leading bit of the transmission data is "1", the leading 32-bit code associated with it is "36553cca", and when it is "0", it is "c9aac335". When a bit other than the leading bit of the transmission data is "1", the 16-bit code (1) associated with it is "3c35", and the 16-bit code (2) is "91da". When a bit other than the leading bit of the transmission data is "0", the 16-bit code (1) associated with it is "c3ca", and the 16-bit code (2) is "6e25".

When the transmitted data bit is "1", the leading 32-bit code, 16-bit code (1), and 16-bit code (2) are the inverted values of bit "0" and bit "1" when the transmitted data bit is "0".

For example, the 16-bit code (1) when the corresponding bit in the transmitted data is "1" is "3c35" as shown in FIG. 166A, and is expressed in binary as "0011110000110101". On the other hand, the 16-bit code (1) when the corresponding bit in the transmitted data is "0" is "c3ca" as shown in FIG. 166A, and is expressed in binary as "1100001111001010". Comparing the two binary representations, it can be seen that the bit "1" and the bit "0" are inverted in each corresponding digit.

Figure 166B shows what code sequences are associated with the transmission data. The leading 32-bit code, 16-bit code (1), and 16-bit code (2) are shown as "leading", "(1)", and "(2)", respectively. Here, the transmission data is shown as 2 bytes of data. The leading 32-bit code is placed in the first bit (first bit) of the transmission data, and if this bit is "1", the leading 32-bit code "36553cca" corresponding to bit "1" shown in Figure 166A is associated, and if this bit is "0", the leading 32-bit code "c9aac335" corresponding to bit "0" shown in Figure 166A is associated.

A 16-bit code (1) is placed in the second bit of the transmission data, and if that bit is "1", the 16-bit code (1) "3c35" corresponding to the bit "1" shown in FIG. 166A is associated with it, and if that bit is "0", the 16-bit code (1) "c3ca" corresponding to the bit "0" shown in FIG. 166A is associated with it. Furthermore, a 16-bit code (2) is placed in the third bit of the transmission data, and if that bit is "1", the 16-bit code (2) "91da" corresponding to the bit "1" shown in FIG. 166A is associated with it, and if that bit is "0", the 16-bit code (2) "6e25" corresponding to the bit "0" shown in FIG. 166A is associated with it. Thereafter, the transmission data is similarly encoded according to the sequence of codes shown in FIG. 166B and the contents of the corresponding bits.

The results of encoding using the above method are shown in Figure 166C. In Example 1 of Figure 166C, the transmission data (2-byte error correction code "c53a" (hexadecimal) that has been error encoded) is converted using the above encoding to obtain the CDMA encoded data shown in the bottom row. Note that this CDMA encoded data is expressed in hexadecimal, and ultimately becomes 34 bytes (272 bits) long.

For example, in the case of Example 1, the first bit (B0) is a "1", so it is associated with the leading 32-bit code "36553cca" which corresponds to the bit "1", the second bit (B1) is a "1", so it is associated with the 16-bit code (1) "3c35" which corresponds to the bit "1", the third bit (B2) is a "0", so it is associated with the 16-bit code (2) "6e25" which corresponds to the bit "0", and so on.

Example 2 in Figure 166C shows an example of encoding different transmission data. Here, the 2-byte error correction code "453a" (hexadecimal) that has been subjected to error encoding processing is converted by the above-mentioned encoding to obtain the CDMA encoded data shown in the bottom row. Note that this CDMA encoded data is expressed in hexadecimal, and ultimately becomes 34 bytes (272 bits) long data.

When comparing the bit order of the transmission data in Example 2 (error correction code "453a") with the transmission data in Example 1 (error correction code "c53a"), only the first bit is different. Therefore, the first bit (B0) is assigned the leading 32-bit code "c9aac335" which corresponds to bit "0", and the remaining bits are encoded in the same way as in Example 1.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 166A, the leading 32-bit code and two 16-bit codes (16-bit code (1) and 16-bit code (2)) are defined according to the bit contents of the transmission data, but the values of each code are not limited to these, and the effects of the present application can be achieved by using a combination of codes composed of other values.

In addition, the code sequence shown in FIG. 166B can be modified to achieve the effects of the present application by using various other patterns. In addition, in the encoding process for generating CDMA encoded data as shown in FIG. 166C, the sequence of the transmission data (error correction code) may be rearranged in bit units or other units before the encoding process is performed.

By using such CDMA encoded data, the start position of the code becomes clear, and favorable encoding is achieved in which the correlation value becomes small when the delimiter window is slid.

CDMA decoding is ideal for recovering the original transmitted data by reversing the encoding process described above.

Next, we will explain how this embodiment deals with solving the above-mentioned problems that occur when decoding PSM coding. PSM coding uses Manchester coding, and in this Manchester coding, the bit "0" is represented by a transition from low level to high level, and the bit "1" is represented by a transition from high level to low level, respectively (they may also be set in the opposite correspondence).

Here, the Manchester code is set from the following viewpoints.
A. One bit of transmission data is expressed by two bits. This configuration prevents the code from becoming monotonous and prevents noise from being recognized as a code.
B. Introducing a preamble (synchronization signal). That is, a 32-bit preamble is introduced into one transmission data, and the preamble is made complex. By configuring it in this way, the start position of the signal becomes clear, and the identification rate during decoding can be improved.

In this embodiment, Manchester code is used, in which the bit "1" of the transmitted data is coded to two bits "01" and the bit "0" of the transmitted data is coded to two bits "10".

Figure 167 shows an example of PSM encoding using the Manchester code. Figure 167A shows an example of transmission data (error correction code). This transmission data is the same 2-byte data "c53a" (hexadecimal) as the error correction code shown in Figure 166C.

Figure 167B shows an example of encoding the transmission data "c53a" shown in Figure 167A. As a result of the encoding process, a bit string consisting of 2 bits of "10" repeated 15 times and then 2 bits of "01" added once is placed at the beginning of the data as a preamble. This is followed by a Manchester code corresponding to each bit of the transmission data. The resulting PSM encoded data is 8 bytes (64 bits) long.

This type of encoding makes the coded data more complex, preventing noise from being recognized as a code, and the preamble makes the start of the signal clearer, improving the recognition rate during decoding.

PSM decoding advantageously recovers the original transmitted data by reversing the encoding process described above.

Although the gaming system according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment. Moreover, the present invention can be applied to the embodiments and modified examples described in the third to ninth embodiments. Furthermore, the data display 2501 may be the gaming device or gaming display device shown in the third to ninth embodiments, and further, it can be various gaming devices including a gaming medium lending device and a unit for decorating a gaming machine that is provided on the gaming machine.

In addition, with regard to the gaming display device, a different screen unit may be applied to each gaming machine, or the same type of screen unit may be applied to each so-called island.

The gaming display device may be configured as a transmissive projector device and may be configured to be replaceable with a screen unit having a different screen shape. For example, the projector body may be installed on the top or side of the housing. Also, for example, the light projected from the projector body may be directly incident on the entrance surface on the rear side of the screen without using a reflector.

The number of replaceable types of screen units is not limited to the three types in the above embodiment, but may be two or four or more types as long as the screen shapes are different. Also, the screen shapes are not limited, and the materials of the screens may be different.

The location of the light-emitting surface is not limited to the left and right ends of the front surface, but may be, for example, the top or bottom of the front surface, or a side surface.

The second display surface is not limited to the shape described above, and may be, for example, a parallelogram, diamond, or circle, as long as it has a thickness in front of the first display surface.

The operation unit including the buttons may be provided integrally with the screen unit.

When replacing a screen unit, it may be necessary to change the projection data corresponding to the projected image or to optically correct the projected image because the screen shape and characteristics differ. To deal with such cases, the control unit of the gaming display device may store in advance setting information related to the projection image data and optical correction data corresponding to the shape of each screen, and may call up and apply the corresponding setting information for each screen.

In addition, to realize a configuration that can apply corresponding setting information when replacing a screen unit, (1) a process can be provided in which the control unit determines whether or not the LED board (cable) is connected, (2) a separate control device can be provided in the screen unit, and when the control unit of the housing is started after replacing the screen unit, the control device can send a specific command to the control unit, and the control unit can determine which control device of which screen unit is connected, or (3) a setting screen can be displayed by operating a button on the operation unit, and an administrator can input the type of the replaced screen unit as setting information on this setting screen.

Such setting information can be said to be information that determines the projection method (method) by which a certain image data is to be projected. Furthermore, the setting information may be changeable from a server device acting as a hall computer, or may be configured in a master-slave manner so that when the setting information is changed in one gaming display device, it is similarly changed in other gaming display devices.

[Scalability of gaming machines]
In the gaming machines of the third to tenth embodiments, a game is started when the player inserts a medal (i.e., inserting a medal that the player has in hand into the medal insertion port, or inserting a credited medal by operating the MAX BET button or 1 BET button), and if a medal is to be paid out when the game ends, the hopper device is driven to pay out or credit the medal from the medal payout port, but this is not limited to the above.

For example, the present invention can be applied to all formats in which a player inserts gaming media required for a game, plays the game based on that, and a bonus is awarded (for example, medals are paid out) based on the results of the game. In other words, not only are gaming media inserted (bet) and gaming media paid out by the physical actions of the player, but the main control circuit (main control board) itself may electromagnetically manage the gaming media held by the player, allowing for medal-free play. Furthermore, the device that electromagnetically manages the gaming media held by the player may be a gaming media management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit (main control board) and manages the gaming media.

In this case, the gaming media management device is a device having a ROM and a RWM (or a RAM) and installed in the gaming machine, and is connected to an external gaming media handling device (not shown) via a specified interface for two-way communication, and can perform the operation of lending gaming media (i.e., the operation of providing gaming media necessary for the player to insert gaming media), or the operation of paying out gaming media when a winning combination related to the payout of gaming media is won (the winning combination is established) (i.e., the operation of making the player acquire the gaming media necessary for the payout of gaming media), or the operation of electromagnetically recording the gaming media used for play. In addition, the gaming media management device may not only manage the actual number of gaming media, but may also, for example, be provided with a held gaming media number display device (not shown) on the front of the gaming machine that displays the number of held gaming media based on the results of the management of the number of gaming media, and manage the number of gaming media displayed on this held gaming media number display device. In other words, the gaming media management device should be able to electromagnetically record and display the total number of gaming media that a player can use for gaming.

In this case, the gaming media management device should have the capability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media to an external gaming media handling device, and should also have the capability to prevent the number of recorded gaming media from being reduced except by direct operation by the player, and if an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and the external gaming media handling device, it is desirable that the device should have the capability to prevent the player from transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a loan operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device may be provided with an insertion slot for valuables such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, and various other operation means such as a loan operation means and a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on the gaming medium handling device side (all not shown).

In this case, the game flow is as follows: the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, subtracts a predetermined amount of value by operating any of the above-mentioned lending operation means, and increases the game media corresponding to the subtracted value from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and repeats the above operation if more game media are required. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of playing, and when the game ends, the player operates any of the return operation means to transmit the number of game media from the game media management device to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media number is transmitted, the game media management device clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player then takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for a prize, or moves to another game machine to play based on the game media recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media were sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device may send only the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player may be divided and processed. Also, instead of just discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be dispensed, or the media may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Also, the game media handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the amusement center, and the member recording medium may be stored so that it can be played again at a later date.

In addition, in the gaming machine or gaming media handling device, a locking operation may be performed to lock the gaming media or data communication of valuables to the gaming media handling device or gaming media management device by operating a specified operating means (not shown). In this case, information known only to the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be stored using an imaging means provided in the gaming machine or gaming media handling device.

As described above, this gaming media management device may be one that allows only medal-less play, or one that allows play in both forms, where gaming media are inserted (bets) and gaming media are paid out by the physical action of the player, and one that allows medal-less play. In this case, the gaming media management device may adopt a system in which the above-mentioned selector 4461 and hopper device 4040 are directly controlled, or a system in which these are controlled by a main control circuit (main control board) and the total number of gaming media that the player can use for play is recorded by an electromagnetic method based on the control results transmitted, allowing control to be performed to display the information.

In addition, the above describes the case where the gaming media management device is applied to a pachislot gaming machine, but the gaming media management device can also be installed in slot machines and sealed gaming machines that use the gaming balls mentioned above, so that the gaming media of the players can be managed.

In this way, by providing the gaming medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors and hopper devices inside the gaming machine compared to when gaming media are physically provided for play, which not only reduces the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine, but also prevents players from directly touching the gaming media, improving the gaming environment and reducing noise, and reducing the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of devices. It is also possible to prevent fraudulent activities via the gaming media and the gaming media insertion and payout ports. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

Eleventh Embodiment
The first to tenth embodiments have been described above. An eleventh embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the gaming system PS100 according to the eleventh embodiment is the same as that of the gaming system PS100 according to the tenth embodiment. In the following, components that are the same as those of the gaming system PS100 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, descriptions of portions that apply to the eleventh embodiment from the first to tenth embodiments will be omitted.

[Gaming System PS100]
Figure 168 is a diagram showing a gaming system according to the eleventh embodiment.

The gaming system PS100 includes a gaming machine 3001, a data display 2501, and a management server 3905. As in the tenth embodiment, the data display 2501 is disposed above the gaming machine 3001. The data display 2501 is also configured to be able to communicate with the management server 3905.

In the tenth embodiment, the gaming machine 3001 is described as having a lamp 3305 on its upper portion (see FIG. 149). In contrast, as shown in FIG. 168, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 3001 is provided with lamps 3305a and 3305b on its upper portion as the lamps 3305.

As in the tenth embodiment, in this embodiment, the data display 2501 also includes an image sensor unit 2811. The image sensor unit 2811 includes a CMOS image sensor and is capable of capturing an image including the lamps 3305a and 3305b at a predetermined time interval.

Lamps 3305a and 3305b are each configured with a full-color LED and are capable of emitting multiple colors including white, red, yellow, yellow-green, green, cyan, blue, purple, magenta, and pink.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 3001 is configured to be able to light up the lamps 3305a and 3305b in colors that correspond to the state of the gaming machine 3001. That is, the combination of the light color of the lamps 3305a and 3305b corresponds to the state of the gaming machine 3001 (see FIG. 169). In this specification, the "combination of the light color of the lamps 3305a and 3305b" is also referred to as the lighting pattern of the lamps 3305.

The data display 2501 can recognize the light color of the lamp 3305a and the light color of the lamp 3305b by capturing images of the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b with a CMOS image sensor. This allows the data display 2501 to control the liquid crystal display 2502, the LED 2503, the speaker 2504, etc., and to communicate with the management server 3905 in a manner that corresponds to the lighting pattern of the lamp 3305 in the gaming machine 3001 (the state of the gaming machine 3001).

[Lighting pattern of lamp 3305]
FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining the lighting pattern of the lamp.

There are many lighting patterns for the lamp 3305, but FIG. 169 shows only some of the lighting patterns. In the figure, "LED Left" indicates lamp 3305a, and "LED Right" indicates lamp 3305b.

In "Pattern 1", the lamp 3305a emits red light, and the lamp 3305b emits blue-green light. "Pattern 1" is a lighting pattern that appears when the power is turned off and it is detected that the front door has been opened. The gaming machine 3001 according to this embodiment can adopt a configuration similar to that of the slot machine 4001 according to the third embodiment, and in this case, the front door is the upper door 5062a or the lower door 5062b (see FIG. 108). Note that while the lamps 3305a and 3305b cannot be lit when the power is turned off, when the power is turned on and the door monitoring unit, which is constantly monitoring (always monitoring the open/closed state of the door), receives information that the above detection has been made, the lamps 3305a and 3305b will light up in this pattern at a predetermined timing after the power is turned on.

In "Pattern 2," lamp 3305a emits red light and lamp 3305b emits green light. "Pattern 2" is a lighting pattern that appears when it is detected that a setting change or confirmation may have been performed with the front door closed.

To change settings on the pachislot machine 4001, first (1) update the power supply to OFF, and after the power supply is OFF, (2) use a specified key to set the setting key switch 4430 to ON. After that, (3) turn the power supply back ON, (4) perform a specified operation to change the settings, and finally (5) use a specified key to return the setting key switch 4430 to OFF. In this way, when changing settings on the pachislot machine 4001, it is necessary to first turn the power supply OFF before operating the setting key switch 4430. Note that operating the setting key switch 4430 with the power supply still ON becomes a setting confirmation operation to confirm the current setting value.

In "Pattern 3", lamp 3305a emits red light, and lamp 3305b emits magenta light. "Pattern 3" is a lighting pattern that appears when it is detected that the hopper is empty. As explained in the second embodiment, the hopper is empty when the medals in the hopper device run out.

In "Pattern 4", lamp 3305a emits red light, and lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. "Pattern 4" is a lighting pattern that appears when it is detected that a medal overflow has occurred. As explained in the second embodiment, medal overflow refers to the auxiliary medal storage becoming full.

"Pattern 1" to "Pattern 4" are each an example of an "error pattern." An error pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when an abnormality (error) is detected in the gaming machine 3001.

In "Pattern 10", lamp 3305a emits a yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits a red light. "Pattern 10" is a lighting pattern that appears when custom play with character A begins. In "Pattern 11", lamp 3305a emits a yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits a yellow-green light. "Pattern 11" is a lighting pattern that appears when custom play with character B begins. In "Pattern 12", lamp 3305a emits a yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits a green light. "Pattern 12" is a lighting pattern that appears when custom play with character C begins.

"Pattern 10" to "Pattern 12" are each an example of a "custom start pattern." A custom start pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when custom play has begun (when a custom start operation has been performed). Custom play (character customization) will be explained later using Figures 171 and 172.

In "Pattern 20," lamp 3305a emits yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits pink light. "Pattern 20" is a lighting pattern (custom end pattern) that appears when custom play ends (when a custom end operation is performed).

In "Pattern 30", the lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light, and the lamp 3305b emits pink light. "Pattern 30" is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT and when custom play is not being performed. In "Pattern 31", the lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light, and the lamp 3305b emits green light. "Pattern 31" is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT and when custom play is being performed by character A. In "Pattern 32", the lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light, and the lamp 3305b emits blue-green light. "Pattern 32" is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT and when custom play is being performed by character B. In "Pattern 33", the lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light, and the lamp 3305b emits blue light. "Pattern 33" is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT and when custom play is being performed by character C.

"Pattern 30" to "Pattern 33" are each an example of a "pattern for use during the AT." A pattern for use during the AT is a lighting pattern that appears during the AT. A pattern for use during the AT is an example of a pattern for effects during play (lighting patterns corresponding to effects performed during play). Note that during the AT, a specified effect is performed by a liquid crystal display device, speaker, etc., so a pattern for use during the AT can also be said to be a lighting pattern that appears when the specified effect is performed.

In "Pattern 40", the lamp 3305a emits green light, and the lamp 3305b emits pink light. "Pattern 40" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts in a state where custom play is not being performed. In "Pattern 41", the lamp 3305a emits green light, and the lamp 3305b emits red light. "Pattern 41" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts in a state where custom play is being performed by character A. In "Pattern 42", the lamp 3305a emits green light, and the lamp 3305b emits yellow light. "Pattern 42" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts in a state where custom play is being performed by character B. In "Pattern 43", the lamp 3305a emits green light, and the lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. "Pattern 43" is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts in a state where custom play is being performed by character C.

"Pattern 40" to "Pattern 43" are each an example of an "AT start pattern." An AT start pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when the AT starts (entering the AT). An AT start pattern is an example of a pattern for effects during play. Note that when the AT starts, a specified effect is performed by a liquid crystal display device, speaker, etc., so an AT start pattern can also be said to be a lighting pattern that appears when the specified effect is performed.

In "Pattern 50", lamp 3305a emits a reddish purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a red light. "Pattern 50" is a lighting pattern that appears when performance A is performed. In "Pattern 51", lamp 3305a emits a reddish purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a yellow light. "Pattern 51" is a lighting pattern that appears when performance B is performed. In "Pattern 52", lamp 3305a emits a reddish purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a yellow-green light. "Pattern 52" is a lighting pattern that appears when performance C is performed.

"Pattern 50" to "Pattern 52" are each an example of a "pattern for effects during play." Effects A to C are effects that are performed based on the type of internal winning role when the start lever is operated. Effects A to C can be, for example, effects that are performed when a role that determines a transition to the AT, a rare role, a bonus role, etc. is determined as the internal winning role.

As explained above, the in-game presentation patterns include lighting patterns that appear during a specific game state (e.g., AT, ART, BB, etc.), lighting patterns that appear when a specific game state (e.g., AT, ART, BB, etc.) starts, lighting patterns that appear when the start lever is operated, lighting patterns that appear when a specific game state (e.g., AT, ART, BB, etc.) ends, lighting patterns that appear when a combination of symbols is displayed stationary along an active line, etc.

The in-play performance patterns include a lighting pattern in which the state in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color occurs during one unit game (this state is not carried over to the next unit game), and a lighting pattern in which the state in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color continues over multiple unit games. For example, "Pattern 50" to "Pattern 52" are lighting patterns in which the state in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color occurs during one unit game, and in "Pattern 50," after lamp 3305a emits a magenta light and lamp 3305b emits a red light in response to the operation of the start lever, lamp 3305a stops emitting magenta light and lamp 3305b stops emitting red light by the time the unit game ends. Additionally, "Pattern 30" to "Pattern 33" are lighting patterns in which lamps 3305a and 3305b remain lit in a predetermined color for multiple unit games, and in "Pattern 30," lamp 3305a continues to emit a yellow-green light and lamp 3305b continues to emit a pink light until the AT ends.

Although not shown, when a demo screen is displayed or during normal non-customization (when character customization is not performed and no special effects occur), lamps 3305a and 3305b both emit white light. The special effects are effects that trigger the lighting of lamps 3305a and 3305b in the pattern shown in FIG. 169 (causes changes in the lighting pattern). In other words, when custom gameplay is not being performed, lamps 3305a and 3305b will both basically be lit in white.

[Model identification pattern]
FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining the model identification pattern.

In addition to the lighting patterns described using FIG. 169, the lamp 3305 also has a model identification pattern shown in FIG. 170. The model identification pattern is a lighting pattern that corresponds to the model to which the gaming machine 3001 belongs, and is used to allow the data display 2501 or management server 3905 to recognize the model.

After the power is turned on in the gaming machine 3001 and a predetermined initialization process is performed, the lamps 3305a and 3305b light up in the pattern shown in FIG. 170. Normally, in a parlor (game establishment), it is common to start up the gaming machines and peripheral devices on an island-by-island basis all at once. As a result, the initialization process on the peripheral device (data display 2501) side is completed before the initialization process on the gaming machine (gaming machine 3001) side, and when the lamps 3305a and 3305b light up, the camera (CMOS image sensor) of the data display 2501 is in a started-up state. Therefore, the data display 2501 can recognize the model identification pattern shown in FIG. 170 without missing any.

Specifically, in the model identification pattern, first, as a first step, lamp 3305a emits white light and lamp 3305b emits white light, and this state continues for 10 seconds. Next, as a second step, lamp 3305a emits blue-green light and lamp 3305b emits blue-green light, and this state continues for 1 second. Similarly, as a third step, lamp 3305a emits pink light and lamp 3305b emits pink light, and this state continues for 1 second. As a fourth step, lamp 3305a emits green light and lamp 3305b emits green light, and this state continues for 1 second. As a fifth step, lamp 3305a emits red-purple light and lamp 3305b emits red-purple light, and this state continues for 1 second. As a sixth step, lamp 3305a emits yellow-green light, and In the seventh step, lamp 3305a lights up and lamp 3305b emits a yellow-green light, and this state continues for one second; in the seventh step, lamp 3305a emits purple light and lamp 3305b emits purple light, and this state continues for one second; in the eighth step, lamp 3305a emits yellow light and lamp 3305b emits yellow light, and this state continues for one second; in the ninth step, lamp 3305a emits blue light and lamp 3305b emits blue light, and this state continues for one second; in the tenth step, lamp 3305a emits red light and lamp 3305b emits red light, and this state continues for one second.

Next, in the 11th step, lamp 3305a emits blue light and lamp 3305b emits blue light, and this state continues for one second; in the 12th step, lamp 3305a emits red light and lamp 3305b emits blue light, and this state continues for one second; and in the 13th step, lamp 3305a emits blue light and lamp 3305b emits red light, and this state continues for one second.

The lighting pattern in the 11th step corresponds to the manufacturer (manufacturer information) that manufactured the gaming machine 3001. For example, in the 11th step, the lamp 3305a lights up in blue and the lamp 3305b lights up in blue, which indicates that the gaming machine 3001 is a product of gaming machine manufacturer X. In addition, the lighting patterns in the 12th and 13th steps correspond to the model (model information) to which the gaming machine 3001 belongs. For example, in the 12th step, the lamp 3305a lights up in red and the lamp 3305b lights up in blue, and in the 13th step, the lamp 3305a lights up in blue and the lamp 3305b lights up in red, which indicates that the gaming machine 3001 belongs to model A.

In addition, lamps 3305a and 3305b are configured to light up in a predetermined pattern (learning pattern) in steps 1 to 10 before lighting up in a pattern according to manufacturer information and model information in steps 11 to 13.

[Character Customization]
Fig. 171(A) is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device, Fig. 171(B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the menu screen, and Fig. 172 is a diagram showing a character customization screen for customizing a character.

When the decision button of the operation buttons is operated when no game is being played, the sub-control unit 3302 (see FIG. 150) calls up the menu screen shown in FIG. 171 (A) and displays it on the liquid crystal display device. Although not shown, the operation buttons include a cross key and a decision button, and when the player operates the cross key, the selection cursor moves in the direction of the operation, and when the player operates the decision button, the item pointed to by the selection cursor is selected (decided). The liquid crystal display device is included in the sub-device group 3304 (see FIG. 150). Note that the screens shown in FIGS. 171 and 172 (including the character customization screen) may be displayed on a dedicated touch panel liquid crystal provided separately from the liquid crystal display device.

As shown in FIG. 171(B), the menu screen has main menus such as "Custom Game," "Volume Adjustment," "Game Data," "Payments/Layout," and "Special Site," and some main menus have more detailed submenus. For example, the main menu "Custom Game" has submenus such as "Character Selection," "Easy Start," "Enter Password," "View Intermediate Record," "Record and Finish," and "Member Registration."

The "Character Selection" submenu is a menu for customizing the characters used in the performances on the LCD display device.

The submenus "Easy Start" to "Member Registration" are menus used for registering a player's game. In recent years, by registering a player who plays a slot machine, a special bonus that does not affect the number of balls won may be given to a player who does not register. Specifically, when a player is registered, the sub-controller 3302 manages the game history after registration (for example, the game history such as the number of bonuses and the probability of winning a small role, as well as the performance history of the performances that have been performed) and grants a certain special bonus based on this history. This game history can include not only the current game, but also the previous game. Specifically, the game history for each player is managed on the server, and when playing a game, the game history is notified to the gaming machine from the server via a mobile phone or the like, so that the previous game history can be inherited and played.

The submenu "Easy Start" is a menu operated when only storing the history of the current game without carrying over the history of the previous game, i.e., when performing a simplified login. The submenu "Enter Password" is a menu operated when storing the history of the current game while carrying over the history of the previous game, i.e., when performing a formal login. Here, a simplified login is completed by simply operating the submenu "Easy Start", whereas a formal login is performed by registering as a member and then entering a password into the gaming machine 3001. Therefore, when comparing a simplified login with a formal login, it can be said that the registration procedure for the simplified login is simpler than that of the formal login, and conversely, it can be said that the formal login is a more complicated registration procedure than that of the simplified login.

The submenu "View Interim Records" is a menu operated when logging in (simple or formal) and wanting to check the interim records of the game history accumulated up to that point. The submenu "Record and Exit" is a menu operated when logging in (simple or formal) and wanting to record the game history accumulated up to that point on the server. When the submenus "View Interim Records" and "Record and Exit" are operated, the accumulated game history is read from the gaming machine 3001 onto the player's mobile phone or the server. The submenu "Member Registration" is a menu operated to perform the initial registration of the player on the server.

The character customization screen shown in FIG. 172 has a "Character" selection field, a "Costume" selection field, a "Pose" selection field, and an "Accessory" selection field, and each selection field has a number of selectable icons. In the gaming machine 3001, the character is customized based on the icon content selected in each selection field at the time the confirm icon is operated.

The "Character" selection field is used to select a character, and the sub-control unit 3302 determines one character selected in the "Character" selection field from among multiple types of characters. The "Costume" selection field is used to select a costume for the character, the "Pose" selection field is used to select a pose for the character, and the "Accessory" selection field is used to select an accessory for the character. The "Costume" selection field to the "Accessory" selection field are each used to customize the display mode (costume, pose, accessories) of the character. The sub-control unit 3302 determines one display mode selected in the selection field from multiple display modes corresponding to the corresponding selection field.

On this character customization screen, the player can customize the character by performing touch operations on the touch panel provided on the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device, or by performing button operations using the operation buttons. When the character is customized, the sub-control unit 3302 displays on the liquid crystal display device the character selected in the "Character" selection field wearing the costume selected in the "Costume" selection field and the accessory selected in the "Accessory" selection field, in the pose selected in the "Pose" selection field.

In custom play, effects are created using characters that correspond to the content of the customization. Custom play begins when the confirm icon is operated (a customization start operation is performed) and ends when the end icon (not shown) is operated (a customization end operation is performed).

Character customization may be performed by operating a portable terminal device (e.g., the portable terminal device 3950 shown in FIG. 178) owned by the player. For example, a player who has registered as a member in a predetermined manner may have a character customization screen (similar to that shown in FIG. 172) displayed on the portable terminal device while a predetermined application is running on the portable terminal device, and may customize a character by performing touch operations or button operations on the character customization screen on the portable terminal device. In this case, the content of the customization may be configured to be transmittable to the gaming machine 3001 via the management server 3905, or may be configured to be transmittable directly from the portable terminal device to the gaming machine 3001 by non-contact short-range communication (NFC communication) or the like.

[Lamp control process (when power is turned on)]
Figure 173 is a flowchart showing the lamp control processing (when power is turned on) performed in the gaming machine.

The lamp control process (when power is turned on) shown in FIG. 173 is a process performed by the sub-control unit 3302 when power is turned on to the gaming machine 3001.

In the lamp control process (when the power is turned on), the sub-controller 3302 first determines whether the front door (upper door 4062a or lower door 4062b) is opened while the power is turned off (during power cut) (step S4201). The gaming machine 3001 according to this embodiment can be configured in the same manner as the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, and the door open/close monitoring switch 4462 (see FIG. 109) is connected to the main controller 3301 (see FIG. 150) via the door relay terminal board 4460. The door open/close monitoring switch 4462 constitutes a 24H door monitoring unit capable of monitoring the open/close state of the front door when the power is turned off, and when the front door is opened, this is stored. Information indicating the open/close state of the front door is sent as a command from the main controller 3301 to the sub-controller 3302, and the sub-controller 3302 can recognize the open/close state of the front door when the power is turned off.

If it is determined that the front door has been opened while the power is OFF, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 (see FIG. 150) to illuminate lamps 3305a and 3305b according to "Pattern 1" shown in FIG. 169 (step S4202). This causes lamp 3305a to emit red light and lamp 3305b to emit blue-green light. After executing the process of step S4202, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

If the front door is opened while the power is OFF, there is a possibility that cheating (e.g., unauthorized setting changes) has occurred. The open/closed state of the front door while the power is OFF can be displayed on the LCD display device in the hall menu by performing a specific operation, allowing arcade staff to confirm whether the front door was opened while the power was OFF. In contrast, the illumination control of lamps 3305a and 3305b according to "Pattern 1" is performed automatically when the power is turned on, without requiring any special operation. This makes it possible to more reliably and quickly discover cheating, thereby enhancing security.

Here, in step S4201, it is determined whether the front door has been opened (at least once) while the power is OFF, but the number of times the front door has been opened (monitoring number) can be designed as appropriate, and it may be determined whether the front door has been opened a predetermined number of times (twice) or more while the power is OFF. The predetermined number (monitoring number) may be configured to be set by the gaming establishment. In gaming establishments where the power is turned on manually, the front door is always opened once while the power is OFF, and by adopting this configuration, it is possible to adapt to the circumstances of such gaming establishments. Note that by executing the processing of step S4202, lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in pattern 1 for a predetermined time, and then other processing (processing of steps S4203 to S4207) may be executed.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the power is OFF and the front door is not open, the sub-controller 3302 determines whether the setting key switch 4430 (see FIG. 109) is set ON with the front door closed (step S4203). The setting key switch 4430 is connected to the main controller 3301, and when the setting key switch 4430 is set ON, information indicating this is sent as a command from the main controller 3301 to the sub-controller 3302. This allows the sub-controller 3302 to recognize whether the setting key switch 4430 is set ON.

When it is determined that the setting key switch 4430 is set to ON while the front door is closed, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to illuminate lamps 3305a and 3305b according to "Pattern 2" shown in FIG. 169 (step S4204). This causes lamp 3305a to emit red light and lamp 3305b to emit green light. After executing the process of step S4204, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

As described above, in order to perform the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation, the setting key switch 4430 needs to be set to ON. However, since the setting key switch 4430 is provided inside the cabinet 4061 (see FIG. 108), the front door needs to be opened in order to set the setting key switch 4430 to ON. If the setting key switch 4430 is set to ON with the front door closed, there is a possibility that an unauthorized setting change operation has been performed. In this embodiment, the possibility that an unauthorized setting change operation has been performed can be detected by executing the process of step S4203. Note that the method of detecting the possibility that an unauthorized setting change operation has been performed is not limited to this example, and various other methods may be used to detect the possibility that an unauthorized setting change operation has been performed.

In addition, in pachinko gaming machines, the setting change switch is located on the back (rear side) of the main body, and since people are generally not allowed to enter the island, it is necessary to rotate the frame using a key in order to operate the back of the main body (the setting change switch housed in a circuit board case or the like arranged on the back). Such frame rotation may be configured to be detectable, and if the setting change switch is set to ON when the frame is not rotating (a state in which frame rotation is not detected), a YES determination may be made in step S4203.

If it is determined in step S4203 that the setting key switch 4430 is not set to ON with the front door closed, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether any other error (other than the front door being opened with the power OFF, or the setting key switch 4430 being set to ON with the front door closed) has occurred (step S4205).

Examples of errors include "abnormalities strongly suggestive of fraudulent activity" as described in the second embodiment (for example, detection of RAM clear, inability to read and write RAM, RAM software abnormality, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, communication abnormality, internal voltage abnormality, winning abnormality in which a symbol related to a role that has not been internally won is displayed on an active line, detection of a payout at a timing when a payout should not be made, when a set value shows a value other than the six levels, etc.), and "abnormalities occurring during normal play" (for example, hopper empty in which the medals in the hopper device run out, detection of a medal jam at the payout outlet of the hopper device, medal overflow in which the auxiliary medal storage becomes full, detection of a medal jam or medal backflow when medals are inserted, detection of an abnormal number of medals inserted such as four medals, door open error due to the hall staff opening the front door (upper door 4062a or lower door 4062b) for medal refilling, detection of a hopper wiring coming loose when medals are refilled, etc.) are the errors that may occur when the power is turned on. In step S4205, the errors that may occur when the power is turned on are the ones to be judged.

If it is determined that another error has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to make the lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light in a lighting pattern according to the type of error (step S4206). For example, if it is determined that a hopper empty has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to make the lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light in "pattern 3" shown in FIG. 169. As a result, the lamp 3305a emits red light, and the lamp 3305b emits reddish purple light. Also, if it is determined that a medal overflow has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to make the lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light in "pattern 4" shown in FIG. 169. As a result, the lamp 3305a emits red light, and the lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. After executing the process of step S4206, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

When the lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a lighting pattern (see FIG. 169) corresponding to such an error pattern and the lighting pattern is detected by the data display 2501, for example, an image corresponding to the type of error is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502 (see step S4307 in FIG. 176). Also, as described in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to light up (blink) the LED 2503 in a manner corresponding to the type of error (see step S4512 in FIG. 185). As a result, for example, when a hopper empty error occurs during normal play, which is a common error (such as the above-mentioned "abnormality occurring during normal play"), or a selector error (see step S4212 in FIG. 174), which occurs frequently, the type of error that has occurred can be identified through the liquid crystal display 2502 (liquid crystal display) or LED 2503 (illuminated display), which are easily visible from the outside, and the type of error can be notified to a staff member at the gaming facility (gaming center manager), allowing an appropriate and prompt response to the circumstances of the error to be made, even if the staff member does not come to the gaming machine 3001.

When multiple errors occur at the same time, it is predefined which lighting pattern should be given priority when illuminating lamps 3305a and 3305b. Specifically, the lighting pattern (pattern 1) corresponding to the front door being opened with the power OFF is given the highest priority, followed by the lighting pattern (pattern 2) corresponding to the front door being closed and the setting key switch 4430 being set to ON. In addition, lighting patterns corresponding to "abnormalities highly suspected of cheating" are generally given priority over lighting patterns corresponding to "abnormalities occurring during normal play". Even when an error occurs, if an error with a higher priority occurs at the same time, the lighting pattern corresponding to that error does not appear immediately (it appears after the error with the higher priority is resolved).

If it is determined in step S4205 that no other errors have occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to cause the lamps 3305a and 3305b to emit light in the model identification pattern (step S4207). As a result, the lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light in the pattern shown in FIG. 170. After executing the process of step S4207, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

In the "model identification pattern", the illumination control of lamps 3305a and 3305b is repeated in the first to thirteenth steps shown in FIG. 170. That is, when the illumination control of lamps 3305a and 3305b in the first to thirteenth steps is completed, the illumination control of lamps 3305a and 3305b in the first to thirteenth steps is performed again. In this specification, one cycle of illumination control of lamps 3305a and 3305b in the first to thirteenth steps is also referred to as one "loop". The "loop" continues until a factor that changes the illumination pattern occurs (for example, operation of the start lever or customization start operation).

Alternatively, the light emission control of lamps 3305a and 3305b in steps 1 to 13 may be performed only once (no "loop" may be performed). In this case, after the light emission control of lamps 3305a and 3305b in steps 1 to 13 is performed once, both lamps 3305a and 3305b may be made to emit white light. The state in which lamps 3305a and 3305b emit white light may be continued until the next occurrence of a factor for changing the lighting pattern (the condition for changing the light emission color of lamp 3305 is satisfied). Furthermore, the light emission control of lamps 3305a and 3305b using the "model identification pattern" (processing of step S4207) may be performed before the processing of step S4201, and the processing of step S4201 may be executed after the light emission control (steps 1 to 13) is completed.

Furthermore, if an error occurs, the lighting pattern corresponding to the error takes priority, and the lighting control of lamps 3305a and 3305b using the "model identification pattern" is performed after the error is resolved. After the error is resolved, the "loop" continues as described above until a factor that changes the lighting pattern occurs. Alternatively, after the error is resolved and lighting control of lamps 3305a and 3305b has been performed once in steps 1 to 13, lamps 3305a and 3305b may be left emitting white light while waiting for a factor that changes the lighting pattern to occur.

[Lamp control process]
Figure 174 is a flowchart showing the lamp control processing performed in the gaming machine.

The lamp control process shown in FIG. 174 is a process that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing by the sub-control unit 3302 after the processes of steps S4201 to S4207 in FIG. 173 are completed.

In the lamp control process, first, the sub-control unit 3302 judges whether an error has occurred (step S4211). Examples of errors include the above-mentioned "abnormalities that are highly suspected to be fraudulent activities" and "abnormalities that occur during normal play." In step S4211, a judgment is also made as to "whether the setting key switch 4430 has been set to ON with the front door closed" (a judgment similar to step S4203 in FIG. 173).

If it is determined that an error has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to cause the lamps 3305a and 3305b to emit light in a lighting pattern according to the type of error (step S4212). The sub-control unit 3302 then ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no error has occurred, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether or not a game is being played (step S4213). Here, "a game is being played" refers to a state in which the main control unit 3301 is not performing game processing (i.e., one game has ended and the game is not waiting for a BET operation or a start lever operation). The game processing is, for example, processing related to a game performed between a BET operation (start lever operation) and the dispensing of medals. "A game is being played" may refer to a state in which a demo screen is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The demo screen is a screen to which a game is transitioned when it is determined that a game is not being played (a customer waiting state). As a condition for transitioning to the demo screen, a conventionally known condition can be appropriately adopted, and for example, the demo screen can be configured to be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed without a BET being performed after a medal has been dispensing. For example, when a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed without a bet being placed after a medal has been paid out, the main control unit 3301 may be configured to send a demo transition command to the sub-control unit 3302. This allows the sub-control unit 3302 to recognize that the conditions for transitioning to the demo screen have been met.

If it is determined that a game is being played, the sub-control unit 3302 determines whether at least one "loop" has been completed in controlling the illumination of lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern (step S4214).

When it is determined that at least one "loop" has been completed, the sub-controller 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to make the lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light in a lighting pattern corresponding to the effect performed during play (step S4215). The "lighting pattern corresponding to the effect performed during play" is the above-mentioned "pattern for effect during play" (see FIG. 169). The "effect performed during play" is an effect performed by a liquid crystal display device, speaker, etc. according to the game situation (effect generally performed in a pachislot machine). The sub-controller 3302 determines the "effect performed during play" based on information corresponding to the type of internal winning combination and the game state contained in the start command data (see step S3510 in FIG. 110) and information corresponding to the combination (combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the winning line) contained in the winning operation command data (see step S3514 in FIG. 110).

A data table (a table corresponding to FIG. 169) in which such "effects performed during play" (for example, effects A to C shown in FIG. 169) are associated with "lighting patterns" is stored in a storage device such as a ROM, and in the processing of step S4215, the sub-control unit 3302 refers to the table to cause lamps 3305a and 3305b to light up in a "lighting pattern" corresponding to the "effects performed during play." After executing the processing of step S4215, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

As an "effect performed during a game", an effect triggered by a BET operation may be provided, and the lighting pattern of lamps 3305a and 3305b may be changed based on this effect. For example, when lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined pattern in association with a victory effect being performed as an effect in one game (unit game), a confirmation effect is performed in response to a BET operation to start the next game (unit game), and the lighting pattern of lamps 3305a and 3305b may be changed to a lighting pattern corresponding to the confirmation effect.

If it is determined in step S4213 that a game is not being played, or if it is determined in step S4214 that one "loop" has not yet ended, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to make the lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light using the model identification pattern (step S4216). As a result, if the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern is in progress, the sub-control unit 3302 continues the light emission control (continues the ongoing step among the first step to the thirteenth step). On the other hand, if the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern is not being performed, the sub-control unit 3302 starts the light emission control from the first step. After executing the process of step S4216, the sub-control unit 3302 ends this subroutine.

Because of the above configuration, for example, if the start lever is operated before one "loop" ends as the light emission control of lamps 3305a and 3305b based on the model identification pattern after the power is turned on, the "loop" will continue. In other words, the light emission control based on the lighting pattern corresponding to the performance performed by operating the start lever is not performed (the lighting pattern is discarded). As described above, the in-play performance patterns include a lighting pattern that occurs during one unit game in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color, and a lighting pattern that continues over multiple unit games in which lamps 3305a and 3305b are lit in a predetermined color. If an effect corresponding to the former lighting pattern occurs before one "loop" is completed as the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b according to the model identification pattern, the lighting pattern may be discarded, while if an effect corresponding to the latter lighting pattern occurs, the lamps 3305a and 3305b may be made to light up according to the latter lighting pattern after one "loop" is completed. Also, even if an effect corresponding to the former lighting pattern occurs before one "loop" is completed as the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b according to the model identification pattern, if the one "loop" is completed before the unit game is completed, the process of step S4215 may be continued. This allows the lamps 3305a and 3305b to light up in a pattern corresponding to the effect without missing any of the effects in the unit game.

[Lamp control process (custom start)]
Figure 175 is a flowchart showing the lamp control processing (at the start of customization) performed in the gaming machine.

The lamp control process (at the start of customization) shown in FIG. 175 is a process that is performed in the sub-control unit 3302 when a customization start operation is performed.

During the lamp control process (at the start of customization), the sub-control unit 3302 first determines whether at least one "loop" has been completed for controlling the illumination of lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern (step S4221).

When it is determined that at least one "loop" has been completed, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to illuminate the lamps 3305a and 3305b with a lighting pattern according to the content of the customization (step S4222). The lighting pattern is the above-mentioned "customization start pattern" (see FIG. 169), and is a lighting pattern according to the type of character selected by the customization start operation. As a result, for example, when character A is selected by the customization start operation, lighting control is performed according to "pattern 10" shown in FIG. 169, when character B is selected by the customization start operation, lighting control is performed according to "pattern 11", and when character C is selected by the customization start operation, lighting control is performed according to "pattern 12".

After executing the processing of step S4222, the sub-control unit 3302 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4221 that one "loop" has not yet ended, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to cause the lamps 3305a and 3305b to emit light using the model identification pattern (step S4223). As a result, if the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern is in progress, the sub-control unit 3302 continues the light emission control (continues the ongoing step among the first to thirteenth steps).

Next, the sub-control unit 3302 sets the customization standby flag to ON (step S4224). The customization standby flag is a flag indicating that the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b according to the customization start pattern is on hold. When one "loop" of the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b according to the model identification pattern is completed, if the customization standby flag is set to ON, the sub-control unit 3302 causes the lamps 3305a and 3305b to light up according to a lighting pattern that corresponds to the type of character selected by the customization start operation.

After executing the processing of step S4224, the sub-control unit 3302 terminates this subroutine.

[Lighting pattern detection process]
Fig. 176 is a flow chart showing the lighting pattern detection process carried out in the data display unit, and Fig. 177 is a diagram showing a model identification table.

The lighting pattern detection process shown in FIG. 176 is a process that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing by the control unit 2801 (see FIG. 151) of the data display device 2501. As described in the ninth embodiment, the image sensor unit 2811 (see FIG. 152) is capable of detecting the light source (the positions of lamps 3305a and 3305b) while eliminating the effects of ambient light, and this enables the control unit 2801 to identify the light emission color of lamp 3305a and the light emission color of lamp 3305b (detect the lighting pattern of lamp 3305).

In the lighting pattern detection process, first, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not the combination of the light color of the lamp 3305a and the light color of the lamp 3305b is a lighting pattern that corresponds to a model identification pattern (see step S4207 in FIG. 173 and step S4216 in FIG. 174) (step S4301). Specifically, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not the lighting pattern in the 11th to 13th steps shown in FIG. 170 has been detected as a combination of the light color of the lamp 3305a and the light color of the lamp 3305b.

If it is determined that the lighting patterns in the 11th to 13th steps of the model identification pattern have been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to the learning pattern has been detected as a combination of the light color of the lamp 3305a and the light color of the lamp 3305b (step S4302). As described above, the learning pattern is a lighting pattern that appears before the lamps 3305a and 3305b light up in a pattern corresponding to the manufacturer information and model information (the lighting pattern in the 1st to 10th steps shown in FIG. 170). In the process of step S4302, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not the lighting pattern in the 1st to 10th steps has been detected for a predetermined time (19 seconds) before the lighting pattern in the 11th step is detected. Note that the combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b in the model identification pattern (each lighting pattern in steps 1 to 13) may be the same as the combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b in any of the lighting patterns shown in FIG. 169. Even if these combinations are the same, by varying the lighting time, control unit 2801 can determine the type of lighting pattern and recognize the model identification pattern by detecting the combination of light colors and the lighting time.

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to the learning pattern has not been detected, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to the learning pattern has been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether data for the model corresponding to the lighting pattern in steps 11 to 13 has been stored (step S4303).

Prior to performing the processing of step S4303, the control unit 2801 detects the lighting pattern in steps 11 to 13. The control unit 2801 identifies the model that corresponds to the lighting pattern in steps 11 to 13 by referring to a model identification table (see FIG. 177) stored in a storage device such as the ROM 2802 (see FIG. 151).

In the model identification table shown in FIG. 177, three lighting patterns (in the figure, "11", "12", and "13") are associated with one model and one manufacturer. "11", "12", and "13" respectively indicate the 11th, 12th, and 13th steps in the model identification pattern. The control unit 2801 identifies the model corresponding to the three detected lighting patterns (steps 11 to 13) based on the model identification table. For example, if the three most recently detected lighting patterns are a pattern in which the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light, a pattern in which the lamp 3305a emits red light and the lamp 3305b emits blue light, and a pattern in which the lamp 3305a emits blue light and the lamp 3305b emits red light, the control unit 2801 identifies model A.

In the process of step S4303, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not data for the identified model (the model corresponding to the lighting patterns in steps 11 to 13) is stored in a storage device such as the RAM 2803 (see FIG. 151). "Data for the model" is performance data for producing a performance according to the identified model. As will be described later, the performance data is configured to be downloaded from the management server 3905, and therefore the process of step S4303 can also be rephrased as a process for determining whether or not performance data according to the identified model has been downloaded.

If it is determined that the performance data for the identified model has already been downloaded, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the performance data corresponding to the identified model has not been downloaded, the control unit 2801 requests the management server 3905 to transmit the performance data corresponding to that model (step S4304). The control unit 2801 then receives the performance data corresponding to that model from the management server 3905 (step S4305).

In the process of step S4304, the control unit 2801 transmits a performance data request signal including information (model information) indicating the identified model to the management server 3905. In the management server 3905, performance data corresponding to a plurality of models including models A to F shown in FIG. 177 is stored in a storage device such as a hard disk drive. Upon receiving the performance data request signal, the management server 3905 transmits performance data corresponding to one model indicated by the model information included in the performance data request signal to the data display 2501. This allows the data display 2501 to download performance data corresponding to the model to which the gaming machine 3001 belongs from the management server 3905. In the process of step S4305, the control unit 2801 stores the downloaded performance data in a storage device such as the RAM 2803.

After executing the processing of step S4305, the control unit 2801 terminates this subroutine.

In this embodiment, the model is identified by the data display 2501, but the model may be identified by the management server 3905. In this case, for example, a model identification table may be stored in the management server 3905, and information indicating the model identification pattern detected by the data display 2501 may be transmitted to the management server 3905.

Although it has been described that the performance data corresponding to the model is stored in the management server 3905, the performance data may not be stored in the management server 3905. In this case, the management server 3905 may be configured to download performance data from an external device each time a performance data request signal is received, and transmit the downloaded performance data to the data display 2501. Furthermore, in the data display 2501, each time performance data is downloaded from the management server 3905, the old performance data may be deleted and replaced with new performance data as the performance data stored in the storage device, or performance data corresponding to a predetermined number of models (for example, the performance data for the three most recently downloaded models) may be stored.

When it is determined in step S4301 that the lighting patterns in steps 11 to 13 have not been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to an error pattern (see steps S4202, S4204, and S4206 in FIG. 173, and step S4212 in FIG. 174) has been detected as a combination of the light color of the lamp 3305a and the light color of the lamp 3305b (step S4306). As described above, an error pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when an abnormality (error) is detected in the gaming machine 3001 (see FIG. 169). Note that a data table (a table corresponding to FIG. 169) in which lighting patterns are associated with pattern types (error patterns, custom start patterns, custom end patterns, patterns for effects during play, etc.) is stored in a storage device such as the ROM 2802, and the control unit 2801 can recognize the pattern type by referring to the data table.

When it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to an error pattern has been detected, the control unit 2801 notifies the occurrence of an error (step S4307). Specifically, the control unit 2801 controls the video display unit 2805 and the audio output unit 2807 (see FIG. 151) to cause an image notifying the occurrence of an error to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502, or to cause a sound notifying the occurrence of an error to be output from the speaker 2504. At that time, the control unit 2801 changes the notification mode depending on the type of error corresponding to the detected error pattern.

Then, the control unit 2801 sends an error signal indicating that an error has occurred to the management server 3905 (hall computer) (step S4308). The error signal includes information indicating the type of error. After executing the process of step S4308, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4306 that a lighting pattern corresponding to an error pattern has not been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to a custom start pattern (see step S4222 in FIG. 175) has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S4309). As described above, a custom start pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a custom game is started (a custom start operation is performed) (see FIG. 169).

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to a custom start pattern has been detected, the control unit 2801 executes a custom start effect (step S4310). The custom start effect is an effect indicating that custom play is about to begin, and is an effect according to the type of character corresponding to the detected custom start pattern. This causes an image corresponding to the character selected by the custom start operation to be displayed on the LCD display 2502, and/or a sound corresponding to that character to be output from the speaker 2504. After executing the process of step S4310, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4309 that a lighting pattern corresponding to the custom start pattern has not been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to the custom end pattern has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S4311). As described above, the custom end pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a custom game is ended (a custom end operation is performed) (see FIG. 169). In other words, when a custom end operation is performed, lamps 3305a and 3305b emit light according to lighting pattern 20 (custom end pattern) shown in FIG. 169.

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to a custom end pattern has been detected, the control unit 2801 executes a custom end effect (step S4312). The custom end effect is an effect that indicates the end of custom play, and an image corresponding to the character selected by customization is displayed on the LCD display 2502, and a sound corresponding to that character is output from the speaker 2504. After executing the process of step S4312, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4311 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a custom end pattern has not been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern for during play (see step S4215 in FIG. 174) has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S4313). As described above, a pattern for during play is a lighting pattern corresponding to a performance performed during play (a performance generally performed in a slot machine) (see FIG. 169).

When it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern for in-play effects has been detected, the control unit 2801 executes an in-play effect (step S4314). The in-play effect is an effect according to the type of the detected in-play effect pattern (an effect corresponding to an effect performed during play on the gaming machine 3001), and an image according to the game status is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502, and a sound according to the game status is output from the speaker 2504. This allows the effects performed on the gaming machine 3001 to be linked with the effects performed on the data display 2501. Also, during the period when a custom game is being played (the period from when a custom start operation is performed to when a custom end operation is performed), an effect according to the content of the customization and the game status may be performed.

If it is determined in step S4313 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern for in-game effects has not been detected, or after executing the processing of step S4314, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

The gaming system PS100, gaming machine 3001, and data display 2501 according to the 11th embodiment have been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Twelfth embodiment>
The first to eleventh embodiments have been described above. The twelfth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the gaming system PS100 according to the twelfth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming system PS100 according to the eleventh embodiment. In the following, components that are the same as those of the gaming system PS100 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, descriptions of portions that apply to the twelfth embodiment from the first to eleventh embodiments will be omitted.

[Gaming system PS100]
Figure 178 is a diagram showing a gaming system according to the twelfth embodiment.

The gaming system PS100 includes a gaming machine 3001, a data display 2501, a management server 3910, and a portable terminal 3950. The portable terminal 3950 and the management server 3910 can exchange data with each other by communicating via the Internet. Although not shown, the gaming system PS100 also includes the management server 3905 described in the eleventh embodiment.

Prior to starting a game, the player, with a specified application running on his/her mobile terminal 3950, receives a password from the management server 3910. The password is an encrypted version of the game history played up to that point. The management server 3910 stores game history information indicating the game history played up to that point, and the management server 3910 converts the game history into a symbol string consisting of multiple symbols (including letters and numbers). The password is a symbol string corresponding to this game history. The player can display the password on the mobile terminal 3950 by performing a specified operation.

Thereafter, to start playing, the player operates the operation buttons on the gaming machine 3001 to display a menu screen (see FIG. 171(A)) on the liquid crystal display device, and selects the main menu "Custom Game" on the menu screen. This causes a sub-menu screen (see FIG. 171(B)) for selecting one of "Character Selection," "Easy Start," "Enter Password," "View Intermediate Record," "Record and Finish," and "Member Registration" to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

Then, the player selects the submenu "Enter password" on the submenu screen. This causes a screen for entering a password (password entry screen) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The player can officially log in by performing a touch operation on the touch panel or a button operation using the operation buttons on the password entry screen to enter the password issued by the management server 3910. This allows the history of the current game to be accumulated while carrying over the history of previous games.

The game history (game history) includes the total number of games played, the number of times a game state advantageous to the player (specific game state) occurred (for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, etc.), the number of times each role won and the probability of winning, the number of game media inserted and the number of game media paid out, as well as the history of the effects that were executed (effect history). The effect history includes the number of times various effects occurred, as well as history related to custom games (character customization). Examples of custom game history include the number of times various characters were selected, and game history for each type of custom game (type of selected character). Examples of game history for each type of selected character include the number of games played when various characters were customized (for example, the number of games played when character A was selected, and the number of games played when character B was selected), and the number of times a specific game state (for example, bonuses, ARTs, etc.) occurred when various characters were customized (for example, the number of times a specific game state occurred when character A was selected, and the number of times a specific game state occurred when character B was selected).

The management server 3910 manages such game play history in association with a member ID assigned to each player who has registered as a member. For example, the management server 3910 stores the number of games played by one player with character A selected and the number of games played by one player with character B selected, and also stores the number of games played by other players with character A selected and the number of games played by other players with character B selected. This allows the management server 3910 to compare the game play history of each player.

The password also contains the encrypted results of the comparison of the gaming histories of each player (ranking determined by a specified method). The gaming machine 3001 has a table or other configuration for identifying information encrypted by the password, and is capable of decrypting the information. The technology related to decrypting passwords is well known in the gaming machine field (see, for example, JP 2013-081521 A), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the player wishes to end the game, he or she selects the submenu "Record and End" on the submenu screen. This causes a two-dimensional code to be displayed on the liquid crystal display. This two-dimensional code is a coded version of the address information of the management server 3910 and the game history information stored in the gaming machine 3001. The player can capture the two-dimensional code using the camera of the portable terminal device 3950. The portable terminal device 3950 recognizes the two-dimensional code from the image data obtained when the camera captures the two-dimensional code, and generates address information for the management server 3910 from the recognized two-dimensional code. As a result, it becomes possible to access the management server 3910. In addition, the game history information is transmitted from the portable terminal device 3950 to the management server 3910. This causes the game history to be managed by the management server 3910.

[Lighting pattern of lamp 3305]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining the lighting pattern of the lamp.

Figure 179 shows the "password pattern" among the lighting patterns of lamp 3305. The password pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a password is entered on the password entry screen. As in Figure 169, "LED left" in the figure indicates lamp 3305a, and "LED right" indicates lamp 3305b.

In "Pattern 50", lamp 3305a lights up blue and lamp 3305b lights up green. "Pattern 50" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played in history is number one in the nation. In "Pattern 51", lamp 3305a lights up blue and lamp 3305b lights up blue-green. "Pattern 51" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played in history is number two in the nation. In "Pattern 52", lamp 3305a lights up blue and lamp 3305b lights up purple. "Pattern 52" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played in history is number three in the nation.

In "Pattern 53", lamp 3305a lights up blue, and lamp 3305b lights up magenta. "Pattern 53" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played on the previous day is number one in the nation. In "Pattern 54", lamp 3305a lights up blue, and lamp 3305b lights up pink. "Pattern 54" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played on a weekly basis is number one in the nation. In "Pattern 55", lamp 3305a lights up purple, and lamp 3305b lights up red. "Pattern 55" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played on a monthly basis is number one in the nation.

In "Pattern 60", lamp 3305a emits yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits yellow-green light. "Pattern 60" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected is the highest in the nation of all time. In "Pattern 61", lamp 3305a emits yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits green light. "Pattern 61" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected is the second highest in the nation of all time. In "Pattern 62", lamp 3305a emits yellow light, and lamp 3305b emits blue-green light. "Pattern 62" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected is the third highest in the nation of all time.

In "Pattern 63", lamp 3305a lights up in yellow, and lamp 3305b lights up in blue. "Pattern 63" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected was number one in the nation on the previous day. In "Pattern 64", lamp 3305a lights up in yellow, and lamp 3305b lights up in purple. "Pattern 64" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected was number one in the nation for the week. In "Pattern 65", lamp 3305a lights up in yellow, and lamp 3305b lights up in reddish purple. "Pattern 65" is a lighting pattern that appears when the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected was number one in the nation for the month.

Similarly, "Pattern 70" to "Pattern 75" are lighting patterns that appear when the password contains information indicating the ranking of the number of games played with character B selected. Furthermore, "Pattern 80" to "Pattern 85" are lighting patterns that appear when the password contains information indicating the ranking of the number of games played with character C selected.

The management server 3910 is configured to update the above rankings (comparison results of the game history of each player) at a predetermined timing. Any timing can be used as the predetermined timing, and the rankings may be updated once a day (e.g., at a predetermined time), once a week (e.g., on a predetermined day of the week (Monday, etc.)), or in real time (e.g., every predetermined seconds or minutes).

[Lamp control process (when password is entered)]
Figure 180 is a flowchart showing the lamp control processing (when a password is entered) performed in a gaming machine.

The lamp control process (when a password is entered) shown in FIG. 180 is a process that is performed by the sub-control unit 3302 when the password input operation is completed.

In the lamp control process (when a password is entered), the sub-control unit 3302 first determines whether at least one "loop" has been completed for controlling the illumination of lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern (see FIG. 170) (step S4401).

When it is determined that at least one "loop" has been completed, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to illuminate the lamps 3305a and 3305b in a lighting pattern corresponding to the game history (step S4402). The lighting pattern is the above-mentioned "password pattern" (see FIG. 179), and is a lighting pattern corresponding to the game history information included in the password. As a result, for example, if the password contains information indicating that the total number of games played in history is number one in the country, lighting control is performed using "pattern 50" shown in FIG. 179, and if the password contains information indicating that the number of games played with character A selected is number one in the country, lighting control is performed using "pattern 60".

After executing the processing of step S4402, the sub-control unit 3302 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4401 that one "loop" has not yet ended, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to cause the lamps 3305a and 3305b to emit light using the model identification pattern (step S4403). As a result, if the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b using the model identification pattern is in progress, the sub-control unit 3302 continues the light emission control (continues the ongoing step among the first to thirteenth steps).

Next, the sub-control unit 3302 sets the password illumination standby flag to ON (step S4404). The password illumination standby flag is a flag indicating that the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b according to the password pattern is on hold. When one "loop" of the light emission control of the lamps 3305a and 3305b according to the model identification pattern is completed, if the password illumination standby flag is set to ON, the sub-control unit 3302 causes the lamps 3305a and 3305b to illuminate according to a lighting pattern corresponding to the game history information included in the password.

After executing the processing of step S4404, the sub-control unit 3302 terminates this subroutine.

[Lighting pattern detection process]
FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the lighting pattern detection process carried out in the data display.

The lighting pattern detection process shown in FIG. 181 is a process that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing by the control unit 2801 (see FIG. 151) of the data display device 2501. As in the eleventh embodiment, the image sensor unit 2811 (see FIG. 152) is capable of detecting the light source (the positions of lamps 3305a and 3305b) while eliminating the effects of ambient light, and this enables the control unit 2801 to identify the light emission color of lamp 3305a and the light emission color of lamp 3305b (detect the lighting pattern of lamp 3305).

In the lighting pattern detection process, the control unit 2801 executes steps S4451 to S4464, but because these steps are similar to steps S4301 to S4314 in FIG. 176, a description of these steps will be omitted here.

If it is determined in step S4463 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern for in-game effects has not been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to a password pattern (see step S4402 in FIG. 180) has been detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S4465). As described above, a password pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a password is entered on the password entry screen (see FIG. 179).

When it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to a password pattern has been detected, the control unit 2801 displays information about the game history corresponding to the detected password pattern (step S4466). Specifically, the control unit 2801 controls the video display unit 2805 (see FIG. 151) to display an image about the game history corresponding to the detected password pattern on the liquid crystal display 2502. As a result, for example, if the detected password pattern is pattern 50 shown in FIG. 179, a text image corresponding to the content "Number 1 in the nation for total number of games played by all time" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502, and if the detected password pattern is pattern 60 shown in FIG. 179, a text image corresponding to the content "Number 1 in the nation for number of games played by character A" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502.

If it is determined in step S4465 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a password pattern has not been detected, or after executing the processing of step S4466, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

The gaming system PS100, gaming machine 3001, and data display 2501 according to the 12th embodiment have been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

Thirteenth Embodiment
The first to twelfth embodiments have been described above. The thirteenth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the gaming system PS100 according to the thirteenth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming system PS100 according to the twelfth embodiment. In the following, components that are the same as those of the gaming system PS100 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, where the description of the first to twelfth embodiments is applicable to the thirteenth embodiment, the description will be omitted.

[Lighting pattern of lamp 3305]
FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining the lighting pattern of the lamp.

As explained using FIG. 169, there are many lighting patterns for lamp 3305, but FIG. 182 shows only some of the lighting patterns. In the figure, "LED Left" indicates lamp 3305a, and "LED Right" indicates lamp 3305b. Of the lighting patterns shown in FIG. 182, "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 52" are the same as "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 52" shown in FIG. 169.

In "Pattern 90", lamp 3305a emits a purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a yellow light. "Pattern 90" is a lighting pattern that appears when setting suggestion presentation I occurs. In "Pattern 91", lamp 3305a emits a purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a green light. "Pattern 91" is a lighting pattern that appears when setting suggestion presentation II occurs. In "Pattern 92", lamp 3305a emits a purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a blue light. "Pattern 92" is a lighting pattern that appears when setting suggestion presentation III occurs.

In "Pattern 93", lamp 3305a emits a purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a reddish purple light. "Pattern 93" is a lighting pattern that appears when setting suggestion effect IV occurs. In "Pattern 94", lamp 3305a emits a purple light, and lamp 3305b emits a pink light. "Pattern 94" is a lighting pattern that appears when setting suggestion effect V occurs. In "Pattern 99", lamp 3305a emits a pink light, and lamp 3305b emits a purple light. "Pattern 99" is a lighting pattern that appears when a reservation lock is established.

"Pattern 90" to "Pattern 94" are each an example of a "setting suggestion presentation pattern." A setting suggestion presentation pattern is an example of a pattern for presentation during play (a lighting pattern corresponding to a presentation performed during play), and is a lighting pattern that appears when a setting suggestion presentation occurs. Setting suggestion presentations are explained using Figure 183.

"Pattern 99" is an example of a "reservation lock pattern." A reservation lock pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when reservation lock is established. Reservation lock will be explained in the 14th embodiment.

[Setting suggestion]
Figure 183 shows a setting suggestion performance lottery table.

In the setting suggestion effect lottery table shown in FIG. 183, lottery values are associated with each setting value for each of setting suggestion effects I, II, III, IV, and V. As a result, FIG. 183 specifies the selection probability of setting suggestion effects I to V for each setting value.

Specifically, when the setting value is 1, setting suggestion effect IV is selected with a probability of 256/256. When the setting value is 2, setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 128/256, and setting suggestion effect V is selected with a probability of 128/256. When the setting value is 3, setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 96/256, and setting suggestion effect IV is selected with a probability of 160/256. When the setting value is 4, setting suggestion effect II is selected with a probability of 32/256, setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 96/256, and setting suggestion effect V is selected with a probability of 128/256. When the setting value is 5, setting suggestion effect II is selected with a probability of 32/256, setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 96/256, and setting suggestion effect IV is selected with a probability of 128/256. When the setting value is 6, setting suggestion effect I is selected with a probability of 8/256, setting suggestion effect II is selected with a probability of 24/256, setting suggestion effect III is selected with a probability of 96/256, and setting suggestion effect V is selected with a probability of 128/256.

As a result, the setting suggestion effect I can only be selected when the setting value is 6. The "6 confirmed" in "Pattern 90" shown in FIG. 182 indicates this. The setting suggestion effect II can only be selected when the setting value is any of 4 to 6. The "4 to 6 confirmed" in "Pattern 91" shown in FIG. 182 indicates this. The setting suggestion effect III cannot be selected when the setting value is 1. The "1 not confirmed" in "Pattern 92" shown in FIG. 182 indicates this. The setting suggestion effect IV can only be selected when the setting value is odd (1, 3, or 5). The "odd confirmed" in "Pattern 93" shown in FIG. 182 indicates this. The setting suggestion effect V can only be selected when the setting value is even (2, 4, or 6). The "even confirmed" in "Pattern 94" shown in FIG. 182 indicates this.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be suggested using the setting suggestion effects I to V. Specifically, in each setting suggestion effect, an image (setting suggestion image) for suggesting the setting value is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. For example, in setting suggestion effect I, an image including a number corresponding to "666" (for example, a text image such as "You have defeated 666 enemies") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, thereby suggesting that the setting value is 6. In setting suggestion effect II, an image including a number corresponding to "456" (for example, a text image such as "You have defeated 456 enemies") is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, thereby suggesting that the setting value is one of 4 to 6. Similarly, in setting suggestion effect III, an image suggesting that the setting value is not 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, in setting suggestion effect IV, an image suggesting that the setting value is an odd number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, and in setting suggestion effect V, an image suggesting that the setting value is an even number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

When a predetermined condition for performing a setting suggestion effect is met, the sub-control unit 3302 of the gaming machine 3001 refers to the setting suggestion effect lottery table, and selects one setting suggestion effect from among setting suggestion effects I, II, III, IV, and V based on the extracted random number value and the currently set setting value. As a result, a setting suggestion image corresponding to the selected setting suggestion effect (any of setting suggestion effects I to V) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The player can obtain information about the setting value by visually checking the setting suggestion image. Note that the setting suggestion effect (display of the setting suggestion image) is performed for only a very short time (for example, within one second), and when a setting suggestion effect is started in one unit game, the setting suggestion effect is completed by the end of that unit game (the state in which the setting suggestion image is displayed ends immediately and is not carried over to the next unit game). Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect ends when the start lever is operated to start the next unit game.

The predetermined conditions for performing the setting suggestion effect are not particularly limited, but may include, for example, a condition that a predetermined role is determined as the internal winning role, a condition that a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed along an active line, and a condition that the current game state is a predetermined game state. These conditions may be used alone or in combination. When multiple conditions are used in combination as the predetermined conditions for performing the setting suggestion effect, the probability of selecting setting suggestion effects I to V may be made different depending on each condition (a setting suggestion effect lottery table may be provided according to each condition). For example, when a setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that a predetermined role is determined as the internal winning role, and multiple types of roles are provided as the predetermined roles, a setting suggestion effect lottery table may be provided in which the probability of selecting setting suggestion effects I to V varies depending on the type of role determined as the internal winning role.

Note that each setting suggestion effect may be an effect that occurs only when a specified setting value is present (determining that the specified setting value is present), or it may be an effect that suggests that there is a high probability that the specified setting value is present. For example, unlike FIG. 183, setting suggestion effect I is associated with a lottery value of "2" when the setting value is 5 (other setting values are associated with the same lottery value as in FIG. 183). In this example, it can be said that setting suggestion effect I is an effect that suggests with an 80% probability that the setting value is 6 (there is an 80% probability that the setting value is 6 when this effect appears).

The sub-control unit 3302 selects one setting suggestion effect by referring to the setting suggestion effect lottery table based on information corresponding to the type of internal winning role and game status included in the start command data (see step S3510 in FIG. 110) and information corresponding to the combination (combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the winning line) included in the winning activation command data (see step S3514 in FIG. 110). At that time, even if a specified condition is met, there may be cases where the setting suggestion effect is not performed. The setting suggestion effect lottery table is stored in a storage device such as a ROM.

When a setting suggestion effect is selected (executed) in the manner described above, the sub-controller 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 (see FIG. 150) to cause the lamps 3305a and 3305b to emit light in a lighting pattern corresponding to the setting suggestion effect. The lighting pattern is the "setting suggestion effect pattern" (see FIG. 182) described above. As a result, for example, when setting suggestion effect I is selected, the lighting is controlled by "pattern 90" shown in FIG. 182, when setting suggestion effect II is selected, the lighting is controlled by "pattern 91", when setting suggestion effect III is selected, the lighting is controlled by "pattern 92", when setting suggestion effect IV is selected, the lighting is controlled by "pattern 93", and when setting suggestion effect V is selected, the lighting is controlled by "pattern 94".

The lamps 3305a and 3305b are illuminated by the setting suggestion performance pattern for a predetermined period of time. The timing of the start of the illumination may be when the setting suggestion performance starts, during the setting suggestion performance, after the setting suggestion performance ends (for example, when the start lever is operated to start the next unit game), or before the setting suggestion performance starts. The timing of the end of the illumination may be appropriately selected when a factor that changes the lighting pattern of the lamps 3305a and 3305b occurs. For example, the lamps 3305a and 3305b may start illuminating by the setting suggestion performance pattern when the setting suggestion performance starts, and the illumination may end when the start lever is operated to start the next unit game. Also, the lamps 3305a and 3305b may start illuminating by the setting suggestion performance pattern when the start lever is operated to start the next unit game, and the illumination may end when a factor that changes the lighting pattern (any of the "game machine states" shown in FIG. 182) occurs.

[Processing when detecting a pattern for performance during gameplay]
Figure 184 is a flowchart showing the processing performed in the data display machine when detecting a pattern for presentation during play.

The process for detecting a pattern for in-game effects shown in FIG. 184 is performed when the control unit 2801 (see FIG. 151) of the data display device 2501 determines in step S4463 of FIG. 181 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a pattern for in-game effects has been detected.

In the process of detecting a pattern for in-play effects, the control unit 2801 first determines whether the detected pattern for in-play effects is a pattern for setting suggestion effects (step S4501). As described above, a pattern for setting suggestion effects is a lighting pattern that appears when a setting suggestion effect occurs (see FIG. 182).

If it is determined that the detected in-game presentation pattern is a setting suggestion presentation pattern, the control unit 2801 executes a setting suggestion presentation (step S4502). In this process, the control unit 2801 controls the video display unit 2805, the audio output unit 2807, and the illumination unit 2806 (see FIG. 151) to display an image suggesting a setting value on the liquid crystal display 2502, output a sound suggesting a setting value from the speaker 2504, and output a light suggesting a setting value from the LED 2503 (see FIG. 149). In this case, the control unit 2801 changes the output mode of the image, sound, or light depending on the type of setting suggestion presentation corresponding to the detected setting suggestion presentation pattern. As a result, for example, when pattern 90 shown in FIG. 182 is detected, when pattern 91 is detected, when pattern 92 is detected, when pattern 93 is detected, and when pattern 94 is detected, different images (for example, images similar to the images displayed on the gaming machine 3001 in setting suggestion presentations I to V) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502, or the LED 2503 is lit in different ways.

Here, LED2503 is configured with multiple full-color LEDs and can emit multiple colors including red, blue, and green. This allows, for example, LED2503 to be illuminated in rainbow colors (including the seven colors of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple) when pattern 90 is detected, LED2503 to be illuminated in orange when pattern 91 is detected, LED2503 to be illuminated in yellow when pattern 92 is detected, LED2503 to be illuminated in indigo when pattern 93 is detected, and LED2503 to be illuminated in purple when pattern 94 is detected.

After executing the process of step S4502, the control unit 2801 sets the setting suggestion flag to ON (step S4503). The setting suggestion flag is a flag that indicates that the conditions for lighting the LED 2503 in a manner that can suggest a setting value have been met (see step S4513 in FIG. 185). After executing the process of step S4503, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

The processing of steps S4502 and S4503 may be configured to be executed only when some of the lighting patterns (e.g., patterns 90 and 91) among the multiple setting suggestion patterns (patterns 90 to 94) are detected. In this case, for example, when setting suggestion I is selected and when setting suggestion II is selected, a presentation to suggest the setting value is performed on both the gaming machine 3001 and the data display 2501, whereas when any of setting suggestion presentations III to V is selected, a presentation to suggest the setting value is performed only on the gaming machine 3001 (no presentation to suggest the setting value is performed on the data display 2501).

In addition, the setting suggestion effect (see step S4502) generated on the data display 2501 side may be configured to be executed for a longer period of time than the setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 183) generated on the gaming machine 3001 side. For example, in the setting suggestion effect performed on the gaming machine 3001 side, the setting suggestion image may be displayed for only one second (the image disappears by the time the unit game ends), while in the setting suggestion effect performed on the data display 2501 side, the setting suggestion image may be continued to be displayed until the next unit game starts. This can improve the advantage of the gaming machine 3001 with the data display 2501 installed when comparing the gaming machine 3001 with the gaming machine 3001 without the data display 2501 installed.

In addition, when the setting suggestion flag is set to on (see step S4503), as described below, it is possible to continue lighting the LED 2503 (setting suggestion LED display) according to the type of setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effects I to V) performed on the gaming machine 3001 side until the power of the data display 2501 is turned off (see FIG. 185). Such setting suggestion LED display may be executed only when a specified operation is performed on the data display 2501. In addition, when the setting suggestion flag is set to on (when a pattern for setting suggestion effect is detected), a lottery may be performed on the data display 2501 side, and the setting suggestion LED display may be continued only if the lottery is won. Whether or not such setting suggestion LED display is performed (continued) may be configured to be arbitrarily set by the gaming facility side or the player side.

If it is determined in step S4501 that the detected in-play presentation pattern is not a setting suggestion presentation pattern, the control unit 2801 executes an in-play presentation (step S4504). The in-play presentation is a presentation according to the type of the detected in-play presentation pattern (a presentation corresponding to a presentation performed during play in the gaming machine 3001), and an image according to the game status is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2502, and a sound according to the game status is output from the speaker 2504. This in-play presentation is the same as the in-play presentation described in step S4314 of FIG. 176. After executing the process of step S4504, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

[Illumination control process]
Figure 185 is a flowchart showing the illumination section control processing performed in the data display device.

The illumination unit control process shown in FIG. 185 is a process that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing by the control unit 2801.

In the illumination control process, the control unit 2801 first determines whether the error flag is set to ON (step S4511). Although not shown, the error flag is set to ON when an error occurs in the gaming machine 3001, and is set to OFF when the error is resolved in the gaming machine 3001. The control unit 2801 can recognize that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 3001 by detecting a lighting pattern corresponding to an error pattern (see step S4456 in FIG. 181). Also, although not shown, when an error is resolved in the gaming machine 3001, the sub-control unit 3302 (see FIG. 150) of the gaming machine 3001 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 to light up the lamp 3305a and the lamp 3305b according to the error resolution pattern (for example, to light up the lamp 3305a in red and the lamp 3305b in pink). The control unit 2801 can recognize that an error has been resolved in the gaming machine 3001 by detecting a lighting pattern that corresponds to an error resolution pattern as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b.

If it is determined that the error flag is set to ON, the control unit 2801 controls the illumination unit 2806 to light (blink) the LED 2503 in a manner corresponding to the type of error (step S4512). The error flag is managed in association with the type of error corresponding to the error pattern detected in step S4456 of FIG. 181, and the control unit 2801 can recognize the type of error. As a result, for example, when a hopper empty occurs, the LED 2503 lights (blinks) blue, and when another error occurs (for example, a selector error in which normal detection is no longer performed in the selector that guides medals that are determined to be appropriate to the hopper), the LED 2503 lights (blinks) red. The lighting (blinking) of the LED 2503 according to the type of error continues until the error is resolved. Also, as described above, when an error occurs, an image according to the type of error (an image notifying the user that an error has occurred) is displayed on the LCD display 2502 (see step S4307 in FIG. 176). In this embodiment, this error notification on the LCD display 2502 continues until the error is resolved.

As described in the tenth embodiment, the external terminal board 3308 is connected to the main control unit 3301 of the gaming machine 3001 (see FIG. 150). When an error occurs in the gaming machine 3001, information indicating the occurrence of the error is transmitted from the gaming machine 3001 to the data display 2501 via the external terminal board 3308. However, information indicating the type of the error that has occurred is not transmitted to the data display 2501 via the external terminal board 3308. In this regard, the data display 2501 can recognize the type of error through the light emission state of the lamps 3305a and 3305b, and can turn on (blink) the LED 2503 (display an image on the liquid crystal display 2502) in a state corresponding to the type of error. Therefore, it is possible to notify the type of error to the staff of the gaming establishment through the light emission (blink) state of the LED 2503 (display state of the image on the liquid crystal display 2502), and to take appropriate and prompt action according to the occurrence of the error.

After executing the processing of step S4512, the control unit 2801 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4511 that the error flag is not set to on, the control unit 2801 determines whether the setting suggestion flag (see step S4503 in FIG. 184) is set to on (step S4513).

If it is determined that the setting suggestion flag is set to on, the control unit 2801 controls the illumination unit 2806 to light the LED 2503 in a manner corresponding to the type of setting suggestion effect (step S4514). The setting suggestion flag is managed in association with the type of setting suggestion effect pattern (type of setting suggestion effect) detected in step S4501 of FIG. 184. As a result, for example, when pattern 90 shown in FIG. 182 is detected (when setting suggestion presentation I occurs), LED 2503 lights up in rainbow colors (including the seven colors of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple); when pattern 91 is detected (when setting suggestion presentation II occurs), LED 2503 lights up orange; when pattern 92 is detected (when setting suggestion presentation III occurs), LED 2503 lights up yellow; when pattern 93 is detected (when setting suggestion presentation IV occurs), LED 2503 lights up indigo; and when pattern 94 is detected (when setting suggestion presentation V occurs), LED 2503 lights up purple.

The lighting of the LED2503 corresponding to the type of setting suggestion presentation (setting suggestion presentation I to V) basically continues until the power of the data display 2501 is turned off. However, if an error occurs, the LED2503 lights (blinks) in a manner corresponding to the type of error until the error is resolved (see step S4512), during which the lighting of the LED2503 corresponding to the type of setting suggestion presentation (setting suggestion presentation I to V) is suspended. After the error is resolved, the lighting of the LED2503 corresponding to the type of setting suggestion presentation (setting suggestion presentation I to V) resumes. In contrast, if a factor that changes the lighting pattern other than an error (any of the "game machine states" shown in FIG. 182) occurs, the lighting of the LED2503 corresponding to the type of setting suggestion presentation (setting suggestion presentation I to V) continues uninterrupted.

In addition, when a setting suggestion effect (e.g., setting suggestion effect II) occurs and LED2503 is lit in a manner corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, if a setting suggestion effect (e.g., setting suggestion effect I) occurs that may suggest information that is more advantageous to the player than the setting suggestion effect, the lighting mode of LED2503 may be switched to a mode corresponding to the setting suggestion effect (e.g., setting suggestion effect I) that may suggest the more advantageous information. On the other hand, when a setting suggestion effect (e.g., setting suggestion effect II) occurs and LED2503 is lit in a manner corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, if a setting suggestion effect (e.g., setting suggestion effect III) occurs that may not suggest information that is more advantageous to the player than the setting suggestion effect, the lighting mode of LED2503 may not be switched.

If it is determined in step S4513 that the setting suggestion flag is not set to on, or after executing the processing of step S4514, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

The gaming system PS100, gaming machine 3001, and data display 2501 according to the 13th embodiment have been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
The first to thirteenth embodiments have been described above. The fourteenth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the gaming system PS100 according to the fourteenth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming system PS100 according to the thirteenth embodiment. In the following description, components that are the same as those of the gaming system PS100 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals. Furthermore, descriptions of portions that apply to the fourteenth embodiment from the first to thirteenth embodiments will be omitted.

[Gaming system PS100]
FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a gaming system according to the fourteenth embodiment.

As described in the eleventh embodiment, the gaming system PS100 includes a gaming machine 3001, a data display 2501, and a management server 3910. As shown in FIG. 186, the gaming system PS100 according to this embodiment includes a plurality of gaming machines 3001 (gaming machine 3001a, gaming machine 3001b, gaming machine 3001c, and gaming machine 3001d) and a plurality of data displays 2501 (data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d).

The multiple gaming machines 3001 and the multiple data displays 2501 are in one-to-one correspondence, and each data display 2501 (data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) is positioned above each gaming machine 3001 (gaming machine 3001a, gaming machine 3001b, gaming machine 3001c, and gaming machine 3001d).

Each gaming machine 3001 (gaming machine 3001a, gaming machine 3001b, gaming machine 3001c, and gaming machine 3001d) and each data display 2501 (data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) has the same configuration as the gaming machine 3001 and data display 2501 in the above-mentioned embodiment. In addition, each data display 2501 (data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) is capable of communicating with the management server 3910. The communication between each data display 2501 and the management server 3910 may be performed directly or indirectly via an island computer.

As a result, each data display 2501 (data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) can recognize the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b by capturing images of lamp 3305a and lamp 3305b provided on the corresponding gaming machine 3001 (gaming machine 3001a, gaming machine 3001b, gaming machine 3001c, and gaming machine 3001d) using a CMOS image sensor. Each data display 2501 (data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) controls the liquid crystal display 2502, LED 2503, speaker 2504, etc., and communicates with the management server 3910 in a manner that corresponds to the lighting pattern of the lamp 3305 (state of the gaming machine 3001) of the corresponding gaming machine 3001 (gaming machine 3001a, gaming machine 3001b, gaming machine 3001c, and gaming machine 3001d).

[Lock-related processing]
Figure 187 is a flowchart showing the lock-related processing performed in the gaming machine.

The lock-related process shown in FIG. 187 is a process performed in the main control unit 3301 (see FIG. 150) of the gaming machine 3001 after the process (internal lottery process) of step S3504 in FIG. 110 is executed. As in the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 3001 according to this embodiment can adopt a configuration similar to that of the slot machine 4001 according to the third embodiment, and the gaming machine 3001 has the configuration shown in FIG. 108. The main control unit 3301 and the sub-control unit 3302 (see FIG. 150) correspond to the main control board 4071 (main control circuit) and the sub-control board 4072 (sub-control circuit) described in relation to FIG. 108, respectively.

In the lock-related processing, the main control unit 3301 first determines whether the reservation lock flag is set to ON (step S4601). The reservation lock flag is a flag that indicates that a game lock has been reserved (see step S4610), and is used to perform a game lock after a predetermined number (three) of unit games have been played (after the reserved number of games has elapsed).

The game lock is a presentation that disables the operation by the player for a predetermined time. In this embodiment, the game lock (freeze) may be performed before the first stop operation is performed as a stop operation for each reel 4003L, 4003C, 4003R (see FIG. 109). When the freeze is performed, all reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R are locked (all reels locked), and the operation by the player (for example, the operation of the stop buttons 4007L, 4007C, 4007R) is disabled until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the start lever 4006 (see FIG. 108) is operated. In addition to disabling the operation by the player, a predetermined reel action (for example, slow rotation, high-speed rotation, reverse rotation, etc.) may be performed. Also, unlike this embodiment, the game lock may be performed after all or some of the reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R have stopped rotating.

The freeze is a lock effect that can occur only when a specific role (see step S4606) is determined as the internal winning role, and when the freeze occurs, the player is definitively notified that the specific role has been internally won. As described later, while the freeze occurs, the effect (freeze effect) is also performed on the liquid crystal display device. As the specific role, a role that is advantageous to the player (for example, a role that determines the transition to the AT, a rare role, a bonus role, etc.) can be adopted. In this embodiment, multiple predetermined roles are provided as roles that determine the start of the AT after a predetermined number (three) of unit games have been played (after the premonition game has been played), and some of the multiple predetermined roles are adopted as the above-mentioned specific roles. In other words, when some of the predetermined roles are determined as the internal winning roles, the reservation lock flag may be set to on.

If it is determined that the reservation lock flag is set to ON, the main control unit 3301 subtracts 1 from the reservation lock game number counter (step S4602). The reservation lock game number counter value indicates the remaining number of unit games to be played before the game is locked (freezed), and is stored in the main RAM 4033.

Next, the main control unit 3301 determines whether the value of the reserved lock game number counter is 0 (step S4603). If it is determined that the value of the reserved lock game number counter is not 0, the main control unit 3301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main control unit 3301 determines that the value of the reserved lock game number counter is 0, it sets the lock activation flag to ON (step S4604). The lock activation flag is a flag that indicates that a game lock can be activated, and this results in a game lock (freeze) (see FIG. 188).

In this embodiment, if the reservation lock lottery is not won, the game is locked (freezed) without waiting for a predetermined number (three) of unit games to be played (in the unit game in which a specific role has been determined as the internal winning role) (see step S4609). However, if the reservation lock lottery is not won, the game is not locked (freezed) in the unit game, and after a predetermined number (three) of unit games have been played, it may be notified (by a presentation other than the game lock (such as a liquid crystal presentation)) that the AT has been won (the AT will start).

Then, the main control unit 3301 sets the reservation lock flag to off (step S4605) and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the reservation lock flag is not set to on, the main control unit 3301 determines whether or not a specific role has been determined as the internal winning role (step S4606). If it is determined that a specific role has not been determined as the internal winning role, the main control unit 3301 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a specific role has been determined as the internal winning role, the main control unit 3301 executes a reservation lock lottery (step S4607). In this process, the main control unit 3301 determines whether the lottery will be a winning lottery or not by performing a lottery based on a random number value. For example, the main control unit 3301 determines a winning lottery with a 10% probability and a non-winning lottery with a 90% probability.

Next, the main control unit 3301 determines whether the reservation lock lottery has been won (step S4608). If it is determined that the reservation lock lottery has not been won, the main control unit 3301 sets the lock activation flag to ON (step S4609). As a result, if the reservation lock lottery has not been won, the game will be locked (freezed) without waiting for a predetermined number (three) of unit games to be played (in the unit game in which a specific role has been determined as the internal winning role) (see FIG. 188).

After executing the processing of step S4609, the main control unit 3301 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4608 that the reservation lock lottery has been won, the main control unit 3301 sets the reservation lock flag to on (step S4610) and sets the reservation lock game count counter to "3" (step S4611).

Next, the main control unit 3301 generates reservation lock command data and transmits the generated reservation lock command data to the sub-control unit 3302 (step S4612). This allows the sub-control unit 3302 to recognize that a game lock will occur after the reserved number of games has elapsed (reservation lock has been established). Then, upon receiving the reservation lock command data, the sub-control unit 3302 controls the lamp control circuit 3306 (see FIG. 150) to cause the lamps 3305a and 3305b to emit light in a lighting pattern corresponding to the "reservation lock pattern" (see FIG. 182). This causes light emission control in accordance with "pattern 99" shown in FIG. 182 to be performed. As described above, the reservation lock pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a reservation lock is established.

After executing the processing of step S4612, the main control unit 3301 terminates this subroutine.

[Reel spin start process]
Figure 188 is a flowchart showing the reel spin start processing performed in the gaming machine.

The reel spin start processing shown in FIG. 188 is processing performed by the main control unit 3301 in step S3511 of FIG. 110.

In the reel spin start process, first, the main control unit 3301 determines whether the lock activation flag (see steps S4604 and S4609 in FIG. 187) is set to on (step S4621).

If it is determined that the lock activation flag is set to on, the main control unit 3301 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) in the lock timer (step S4622). Although not shown, the lock timer is updated by a timer update process executed in the interrupt process. The interrupt process is executed at a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec).

Next, the main control unit 3301 determines whether the lock timer is 0 (step S4623). If it is determined that the lock timer is not 0, the main control unit 3301 returns the process to step S4623. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock timer is 0, the main control unit 3301 sets the lock activation flag to off (step S4624).

This causes the game to be locked (freezed), all reels 4003L, 4003C, 4003R to be locked (all reels locked), and operations by the player (e.g., operation of stop buttons 4007L, 4007C, 4007R) are disabled until a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed after the start lever 4006 is operated.

Although not shown, after executing the process of step S4622, the main control unit 3301 generates lock command data and transmits the generated lock command data to the sub-control unit 3302. This allows the sub-control unit 3302 to recognize that a game lock (freeze) has occurred. Then, upon receiving the lock command data, the sub-control unit 3302 sets effect data corresponding to the effect (freeze effect) that is performed while the freeze is occurring. As a result, an effect such as the screen of the liquid crystal display going dark is performed as the freeze effect.

If it is determined in step S4621 that the lock activation flag is not set to ON, or after executing the process of step S4624, the main control unit 3301 executes normal acceleration processing (step S4625). In this processing, the main control unit 3301 requests the start of rotation of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R. When the start of rotation of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R is requested, the drive of the stepping motors 4049L, 4049C, and 4049R is controlled by the interrupt processing described above, and each of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R starts to rotate. Then, each of the reels 4003L, 4003C, and 4003R is accelerated until its rotation reaches a constant speed, and is then controlled to maintain the constant speed.

After executing the processing of step S4625, the main control unit 3301 terminates this subroutine.

[Reservation lock effect related processing]
FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the reservation lock effect-related processing performed in the data display device.

The reservation lock effect-related processing shown in FIG. 189 is processing that is repeatedly performed at a predetermined timing in the control unit 2801 (see FIG. 151) of the data display device 2501.

In the reservation lock effect-related processing, first, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a lighting pattern corresponding to a reservation lock pattern (see step S4612 in FIG. 187) is detected as a combination of the light color of lamp 3305a and the light color of lamp 3305b (step S4651). As described above, the reservation lock pattern is a lighting pattern that appears when a reservation lock is established (see FIG. 182).

If it is determined that a lighting pattern corresponding to a reservation lock pattern has been detected, the control unit 2801 transmits a reservation lock detection signal to the management server 3910 (step S4652). The reservation lock detection signal is a signal indicating that a reservation lock has been established in the gaming machine 3001 associated with the data display 2501 that transmitted the signal.

In this embodiment, the multiple data display devices 2501 installed in the gaming center are classified into multiple groups (group I, group II, group III, etc.) and are managed by the management server 3910 on a group basis. Specifically, a group identification number (I, II, III, etc.) is associated with each data display device 2501. For example, if group identification number I is associated with one data display device 2501, the data display device 2501 belongs to group I, and if group identification number II is associated with one data display device 2501, the data display device 2501 belongs to group II.

When the group identification numbers associated with one data display 2501 and another data display 2501 are the same, the management server 3910 can treat these data displays 2501 as belonging to the same group. Data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d shown in FIG. 186 are all associated with the same group identification number (I), and these data displays 2501 belong to the same group (group I). Note that multiple data displays 2501 belonging to the same group are installed on the same island.

When the management server 3910 receives the reservation lock detection signal transmitted from the data display 2501 in step S4652, the management server 3910 transmits a reservation lock effect execution signal to all data display devices 2501 (e.g., data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) that belong to the same group as the data display device 2501 (e.g., data display 2501a) that transmitted the reservation lock detection signal. Since the reservation lock detection signal contains information indicating the group identification number associated with the data display device 2501 that transmitted the signal, the management server 3910 can recognize the group to which the data display device 2501 belongs. The reservation lock effect execution signal is a signal indicating that a reservation lock has been established in one gaming machine 3001 (e.g., gaming machine 3001a) that is associated with one data display 2501 (e.g., data display 2501a) that belongs to the same group as the data display device 2501 that transmitted the signal.

In addition, when the management server 3910 receives a reservation lock detection signal transmitted from the data display 2501 in step S4652, the management server 3910 may transmit a reservation lock performance execution signal to all data display devices 2501 (e.g., data display 2501a, data display 2501b, data display 2501c, and data display 2501d) belonging to the same group as the data display device 2501 (e.g., data display 2501a) that transmitted the reservation lock detection signal, other than the data display device 2501 that transmitted the reservation lock detection signal. In other words, since the data display 2501 (e.g., data display 2501a) that is the sender of the reservation lock detection signal can recognize that a reservation lock has been established in the gaming machine 3001 (e.g., gaming machine 3001a) associated with the data display 2501 (see step S4651), it is possible not to send a reservation lock effect execution signal to the data display 2501.

If it is determined in step S4651 that a lighting pattern corresponding to a reservation lock pattern has not been detected, the control unit 2801 determines whether or not a reservation lock performance execution signal has been received from the management server 3910 (step S4653).

After executing the process of step S4652, or when it is determined that the reservation lock effect execution signal has been received in step S4653, the control unit 2801 executes the reservation lock effect (step S4654). The reservation lock effect is an effect that suggests that the reservation lock has been established, and is performed on a grand scale using images, sounds, lights, etc., thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation. In the process of step S4654, the control unit 2801 controls the image display unit 2805, the audio output unit 2807, and the illumination unit 2806 (see FIG. 151) to output images, sounds, and lights that will lift the player's spirits from the liquid crystal display 2502, the speaker 2504, and the LED 2503, respectively. Note that if the LED 2503 is lit in a manner that suggests a set value (see step S4514 in FIG. 185), the control unit 2801 executes the reservation lock effect with priority.

Such reservation lock effects are executed simultaneously on all data displays 2501 belonging to one group. This makes it possible to link the reservation lock effects executed on each data display 2501, and to realize an attractive effect in the group. The execution of the reservation lock effect means that a reservation lock has been established on one gaming machine 3001 associated with one data display 2501 belonging to the group, and this can heighten the player's anticipation for the possibility that a game lock (freeze) will occur on the gaming machine 3001 on which the player is playing after the number of reserved games has elapsed. This allows the player to play with excitement during the reservation period (until the number of reserved games has elapsed), and this period can be a great pleasure in the gaming system PS100.

If it is determined in step S4653 that the reservation lock performance execution signal has not been received, or after executing the processing of step S4654, the control unit 2801 ends this subroutine.

The gaming system PS100, gaming machine 3001, and data display 2501 according to the 14th embodiment have been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of a gaming system PS200 according to a fifteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

The gaming system PS200 of the present application is configured to include a pachinko machine 6001 and a gaming device 7001, as shown in FIG. 190(A). In FIG. 190(A), the pachinko machine 6001 has the same configuration as the first pachinko machine in the first embodiment, but may be the second pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the third pachinko machine, or a pachinko machine according to other embodiments. In addition, in this embodiment, the machine is not limited to a pachinko machine, and may be a pachislot machine, which is mainly described in the third to fourteenth embodiments. In addition, the machine may be an enclosed gaming machine described in the second embodiment, etc. (i.e., a gaming machine in which the main control circuit itself electromagnetically manages the gaming medium held by the player, and allows games to be played by circulating enclosed gaming balls, or games to be played without medals).

[External appearance of pachinko machine]
Fig. 190(A) is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko machine 6001 when viewed from the front right upper side. As shown in Fig. 190(A), the pachinko machine 6001 includes an outer frame 6002, a base door 6003, a glass door 6004, a tray unit 6005, a launching device 6006, a display device 6007 (see Fig. 192), a payout unit 6008 (not shown), a board unit 6009 (not shown), and a game board unit 6010 (not shown). Furthermore, an LED unit 6160 (not shown) is provided at the lower right of the game board unit 6010. Here, the outer frame 6002, the base door 6003, the glass door 6004, the tray unit 6005, the launching device 6006, the display device 6007, the payout unit 6008, and the board unit 6009 will be briefly described.

The outer frame 6002 is a generally rectangular frame body when viewed from the front, and has an opening 6021 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction. This outer frame 6002 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the amusement park. A hinge (no reference number) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end of the outer frame 6002, and the base door 6003 is supported on this hinge. In this way, it is possible to rotate the base door 6003 forward relative to the outer frame 6002, using the hinge as an axis.

The outer frame 6002 must be strong to support a large number of components, such as the payout unit 6008, the base unit 6009, the display device 6007, the game board unit 6010, the glass door 6004, and the tray unit 6005, which will be described later, via the base door 6003. On the other hand, there is a demand for larger display devices 6007 and game board units 6010, for example, in order to enhance the presentation effect. For this reason, by constructing the outer frame 6002 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 6007 and the game board unit 6010 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 6002 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

The base door 6003 has, for example, a dispensing unit 6008 and a base unit 6009 attached to its back side and supports these.

A game board unit 6010 is fitted onto the front side of the base door 6003. In addition, hinges (without reference numbers) are provided at the top end, the middle part below the vertical center, and the bottom end of the base door 6003, for example at the front left end, and the glass door 6004 is supported by the hinges at the top end and the middle part, and the plate unit 6005 is supported by the hinges at the middle part and the bottom end. In this way, the glass door 6004 and the plate unit 6005 can be rotated forward together or individually relative to the base door 6003, with the hinges as axes.

A launching device 6006 is fixedly attached to the front side of the base door 6003, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 6032 are fixedly attached, for example, on the left and right sides of the upper side. The speakers 6032 output, for example, sound effects such as voice performances of characters displayed on the display device 6007, music, sound effects, audio notifications, error notifications, and other performance sounds.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side opposite the hinge of the base door 6003 (i.e., the right end). This locking device has the function of locking the base door 6003 to the outer frame 6002 and locking the glass door 6004 to the base door 6003.

The glass door 6004 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 6041 is formed. A transparent protective glass 6043 is attached to this opening 6041 from the rear side. When the glass door 6004 is closed to the base door 6003, the play area 6105 (not shown) formed in the game board unit 6010 and the protective glass 6043 face each other. In this way, with the glass door 6004 closed to the base door 6003, the play area 6105 can be viewed from the front, and game balls flowing down the play area 6105 can be prevented from flying out forward.

The protective glass 6043 may be made of multiple pieces of glass (e.g., two pieces) attached with a gap between them, or multiple pieces of glass may be unitized to have a gap between them. Furthermore, if the protective glass is unitized, a light guide plate, for example, may be provided between the pieces of glass. The protective glass 6043 is not limited to being made of glass, and may be made of, for example, transparent resin.

In addition, an operation unit 6066 is provided at the bottom of the glass door 6004, which can be operated by, for example, a player to receive a gaming information service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). This operation unit 6066 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by an arcade manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

A speaker cover is provided on the top of the glass door 6004, located in front of the speaker 6032 described above. Furthermore, a large number of LED groups 6046 used for light-emitting effects and the like are arranged around the periphery of the opening 6041 of the glass door 6004, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 6046. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 6046 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as the LED group 6046. The LED group 6046 is, for example, a light-emitting means for use in light announcements and light-emitting effects in various variations, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects and the like, and may be, for example, liquid crystal or a lamp.

The tray unit 6005 is a unit consisting of an upper tray 6051 and a lower tray 6052. The tray unit 6005 is located at the front lower part of the base door 6003, below the glass door 6004. As described above, the tray unit 6005 is configured to be rotated relative to the base door 6003 to open and close, so that, for example, when balls become jammed, an arcade attendant can clear the jam. Note that the tray unit 6005 does not necessarily need to have an upper tray 6051 and a lower tray 6052, and may be configured as an integrated tray.

The upper tray 6051 is provided so that game balls can be stored therein, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 6051 are launched from the launching device 6006 toward the game area 6105. The upper tray 6051 is provided with a payout outlet 6053 and a performance button 6054. Game balls to be lent out or paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout outlet 6053 to the upper tray 6051. The performance button 6054 is what is called a "CHANCE button" or "push button". The performance button 6054 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to an operation function operated by a player. The predetermined performance function may be, for example, a function to vibrate or protrude upward based on the result of a hit determination process for a special symbol. It may also serve the function of the operation unit 6066.

The lower tray 6052 is primarily intended to store game balls that have overflowed from the upper tray 6051. The lower tray 6052 is provided with a payout outlet 6055 that communicates with the upper tray 6051, and game balls that have overflowed from the upper tray 6051 are paid out from the payout outlet 6055 to the lower tray 6052.

An opening (no reference number) is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 6052, which can be opened and closed by the player. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 6052 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 6052 can be transferred to a ball box placed below the lower tray 6052. If a so-called per-machine counting system is installed on each machine, not only is the ball box unnecessary, but the game balls counted by the per-machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be used again for play.

The launching device 6006 is for launching game balls stored in the upper tray 6051 toward the game area 6105. The launching device 6006 is located at the lower right front of the base door 6003, and at the lower right of the tray unit 6005. The launching device 6006 includes a panel body 6061, a drive unit (not shown), and a launching handle 6062.

The panel body 6061 is arranged so that when the tray unit 6005 is closed relative to the base door 6003, the tray unit 6005 and the launching device 6006 fixedly attached to the base door 6003 appear integrated in appearance.

The launch handle 6062 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is disposed on the front side of the panel body 6061. The drive device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 6061, and is configured, for example, by a launch solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the launch handle 6062, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the launch handle 6062, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (amount of operation), the stronger the launch strength of the game ball.

The game ball launched from the launching device 6006 located at the lower right of the tray unit 6005 rolls in an arc along the guide rail 6110 (not shown) via the launching rail (not shown) and is launched into the game area 6105 (not shown). The location of the launching device 6006 is not limited to the lower right of the tray unit 6005, but may be the lower left of the tray unit 6005. In this case, the launching rail is not necessary, and the area below the glass door 6004 can be effectively utilized, making it possible to increase versatility.

The display device 6007 has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 6100. The display device 6007 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or may project an image using a projection device such as a projector. In the display area of the display device 6007, for example, an effect identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern, an effect image according to the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern, an effect image during a big win game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of the variable display of the special pattern, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 6007 is attached to the game board unit 6010, but the display device 6007 may be attached to the base door 6003 as long as the display area of the display device 6007 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 6100.

In this embodiment, one display device 6007 is provided to display the various performance images described above, but multiple display devices (e.g., two) may be provided and the performance images may be displayed using these multiple display devices.

The payout unit 6008 (not shown) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 6003, and is composed of a ball passage 6081, a payout device 6082, etc. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 6081 from a storage tank 6080 (not shown). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 6080 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is met, the payout device 6082 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied to the ball passage 6081 from the storage tank 6080, for example, to the upper tray 6051. In addition, a power switch 6095 (see FIG. 192) is provided on the rear side of the payout unit 6008.

The board unit 6009 (not shown) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 6003. The board unit 6009 is provided with various control boards, etc.

Specifically, the board unit 6009 is provided with a main control board 6091 on which a main control circuit 6200 (see FIG. 192) is mounted, a sub-control board 6092 on which a sub-control circuit 6300 (see FIG. 192) is mounted, a payout/launch control board 6093 on which a payout/launch control circuit 6400 (see FIG. 192) that controls the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply board on which a power supply circuit 6450 (see FIG. 192) that supplies power is mounted.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 6092 is configured as a one-board board (a board on which one control LSI or multiple LSIs are provided). However, this is not limited to this, and the sub-control board 6092 may be configured with multiple boards, for example, by making all or part of the display control circuit 6304, audio/LED control circuit 6305, and role control circuit 6307 (all of which are shown in FIG. 192 and described below) separate boards.

[Outline of the gaming device]
The gaming device 7001 is a device in a separate housing from the pachinko machine 6001 that receives light output (emitted) from the pachinko machine 6001. Figure 190 (A) shows the state of the gaming device 7001 when actually playing a game. In this example, the gaming device 7001 is fixedly attached near the middle of the right side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 6001.

Here, the pachinko machine 6001 outputs sounds related to the effects of the gaming machine to the outside, for example, by optical communication, and the gaming device 7001 receives the light output from the pachinko machine 6001 and generates sounds (sounds related to the effects of the gaming machine and other sounds such as warning sounds) based on the received light, and outputs the generated sounds to the connected wired audio device 8001 and wireless audio device 8002. The wired audio device 8001 is, for example, headphones or earphones connected to the gaming device 7001 by an audio cable, and the player can use these devices to hear the sounds related to the effects of the gaming machine.

In the following explanation, headphones and earphones will be assumed to be owned and worn by the player, but these audio devices can also be rented out by the gaming establishment to anyone who wishes to use them.

The wireless audio device 8002 is, for example, a headphone or earphone wirelessly connected to the gaming device 7001 by wireless communication (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)). In this case, the sound related to the effects of the pachinko machine 6001 is not output from the speaker of the pachinko machine 6001 or is suppressed to a predetermined low volume. Note that in FIG. 190(A), headphones are illustrated as the wired audio device 8001 and earphones are illustrated as the wireless audio device 8002, but this is merely an example, and headphones and earphones can be used for both the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 (the same applies to the following drawings). Even audio devices that do not belong to the category of headphones or earphones can be used as the audio device of the present application as long as the player can hear the sound by wearing them.

This configuration of the present application realizes one-way non-contact communication from the pachinko machine 6001 to the gaming device 7001, completely preventing information from flowing into or electrical connection to the pachinko machine 6001, and does not increase the risk of fraudulent activities, etc.

Furthermore, the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 allow the player to reliably hear the sounds related to the effects of the gaming machine at the desired volume. Furthermore, in recent years, noise canceling technology has improved in audio devices, and since outside sounds are largely blocked out, players are hardly bothered by surrounding noise. Some headphones also have ear pads that completely cover the ears, and this type of headphone, in combination with the noise canceling function described above, can effectively block out outside sounds.

In addition, because this creates an environment where sound can be reliably delivered to the player's ears and outside noise can be effectively blocked out, it becomes easier to provide binaural sound to the player, making it possible to reproduce terrifying sound effects and rich, immersive sounds in the performance of the pachinko machine 6001.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 6001, the sounds related to the effects are not output from the speakers or are suppressed to a low volume, which results in the volume level being suppressed throughout the gaming facility, providing a higher quality gaming environment even for players who do not use sound equipment.

Figure 190 (B) shows the gaming device 7001 temporarily removed from the pachinko machine 6001, and at the position of the pachinko machine 6001 corresponding to the position where the gaming device 7001 was fixed, light-emitting units for emitting light to the gaming device 7001 (i.e., two audio output LEDs 6045 (audio output LED-A 6045a, audio output LED-B 6045b)) are shown.

Figure 191 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the present application described above. Figure 191 (A) shows how light (e.g., infrared light) is output (emitted) from the light-emitting unit (two sound output LEDs 6045) of the pachinko machine 6001, and how that light is received by the light-receiving unit of the gaming device 7001. Note that here, the shape of the pachinko machine 6001 is shown in a simplified form, and the position of the gaming device 7001 is conveniently displayed at a position separate from the pachinko machine 6001 so that the output state of infrared light can be seen.

Also, unlike FIG. 190, the position of the sound output LED 6045 and the corresponding gaming device 7001 are fixedly attached near the upper left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 6001 (similar to FIG. 191(B)). In this way, the gaming device 7001 can be placed anywhere as long as it is a position where it can receive the light output from the pachinko machine 6001.

Figure 191 (B) shows the state of the gaming device 7001 when a game is actually being played, and in this positional relationship, the light emitted from the light-emitting unit of the pachinko machine 6001 is received by the light-receiving unit of the gaming device 7001. The gaming device 7001 is also provided with an audio output terminal 7006 into which the plug of the audio cable of the wired audio device 8001 is inserted.

The player can listen to the sounds related to the effects of the pachinko machine 6001 through the audio device by inserting the audio cable (plug) of the wired audio device 8001 into the audio output terminal 7006 of the gaming device 7001, or by configuring the wireless audio device 8002 to connect to the gaming device 7001. Depending on the configuration of the gaming device 7001, it is also possible to listen to the sounds related to the effects of the gaming machine using both the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002.

[Electrical configuration of pachinko machine]
Next, the configuration of a pachinko machine 6001 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 192. The pachinko machine 1 basically has the same configuration as the first pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment shown in Fig. 6. Fig. 192 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the pachinko machine 6001.

As shown in FIG. 192, the pachinko machine 6001 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 6200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 6300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 6400, and a power supply circuit 6450.

The main control circuit 6200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and includes a main CPU 6201, a main ROM 6202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 6203 (read-write memory), an initial reset circuit 6204, and a backup capacitor 6207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 6201 is connected to the main ROM 6202, the main RAM 6203, the initial reset circuit 6204, etc. The main CPU 6201 has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors operation and a function to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 6202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 6201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 6201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 6202.

The main RAM 6203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 6203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 6201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 6201, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 6204 monitors the main CPU 6201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 6207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 6203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 6200 also includes an I/O port 6205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 6206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 6300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 6300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 6200. For example, the main control circuit 6200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 6161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 6162, the first special symbol display unit 6163, the second special symbol display unit 6164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 6165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 6166, the probability change notification display unit 6167, the time reduction notification display unit 6168, the normal power solenoid 6148, and the special power solenoid 6135. In addition to these, the main control circuit 6200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 6170 and the error notification monitor 6172. The main control circuit 6200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 6205.

The performance display monitor 6170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 6201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 6172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the error notification monitor 6172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc. Note that the setting change code may be a special symbol that is not normally displayed (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 6200 is also connected to the first start port switch 6121, the second start port switch 6141, the pass gate switch 6127, the count switch 6132, and the general winning port switch 6123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 6200 via the I/O port 6205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 6200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 6184 used to send data to a hall computer 6186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key socket 6174 into which a setting key 6174a is inserted that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function, and a RAM clear switch 6176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 6203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. The RAM clear switch 6176 can also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key slot 6174 and the RAM clear switch 6176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the manager of the game arcade. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key slot 6174 and the RAM clear switch 6176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key slot 6174 and the RAM clear switch 6176, so that the manager of the game arcade can touch the setting key slot 6174 and/or the RAM clear switch 6176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game arcade to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key slot 6174 and the RAM clear switch 6176 are connected to the main control circuit 6200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 6400 or the power supply circuit 6450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key slot 6174 or the RAM clear switch 6176.

The sub-control circuit 6300 includes a sub-CPU 6301, a program ROM 6302, a work RAM 6303, a display control circuit 6304, a sound/LED control circuit 6305, a role control circuit 6307, and a command input port 6308. The sub-control circuit 6300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 6200. Although not shown in FIG. 192, effect buttons that can be operated by the player are also connected to the sub-control circuit 6300.

The program ROM 6302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the pachinko machine 6001 by the sub-CPU 6301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 6301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 6302. In particular, the sub-CPU 6301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 6200.

The work RAM 6303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 6301.

The display control circuit 6304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 6007. The display control circuit 6304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 6304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 6007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 6301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 6007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 6304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 6007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 6007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 6007. In this way, the display control circuit 6304 can control the display device 6007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio/LED control circuit 6305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 6032. The audio/LED control circuit 6305 includes an audio controller for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier for amplifying the audio signal (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The audio controller controls the audio output from the speaker 6032. In response to an audio generation command from the sub-CPU 6301, the audio controller selects one piece of audio data from multiple pieces of audio data stored in the audio data ROM. The audio controller also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a specified audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 6032.

The audio/LED control circuit 6305 also controls the audio output LED 6045, which outputs light toward the gaming device 7001. The audio/LED control circuit 6305 includes a drive circuit (LED driver) for supplying an LED control signal to the audio output LED 6045, a D/A converter for converting audio data into a signal for outputting light, and the like.

The audio/LED control circuit 6305 controls the group of performance LEDs 6046, which includes decorative LEDs. The audio/LED control circuit 6305 includes a lamp controller that generates LED control signals for the group of performance LEDs 6046 in accordance with the timing of the performance, a drive circuit (LED driver) for supplying the generated LED control signals, and a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 6307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 6058). The reel control circuit 6307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 6307 selects one operation pattern from among the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 6301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from among the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 6301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 6308 is connected to the command output port 6206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 6200.

The payout/launch control circuit 6400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 6082 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6006 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 6180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 6400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 6200, it sends a specified signal to the payout device 6082 and controls the payout device 6082 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 6180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 6182. The ball lending operation panel 6182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 6180. The payout/launch control circuit 6400 controls the payout device 6082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 6180. The ball lending operation panel 6182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 6180 side.

In addition, when the launch device 6006 (e.g., the launch handle) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 6400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 6450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 6200, the sub control circuit 6300, the payout/launch control circuit 6400, etc.

The power supply circuit 6450 is connected to a power switch 6095 and other components. The power switch 6095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 6200, the sub control circuit 6300, the payout/launch control circuit 6400, etc.).

[Configuration of sub-control circuit]
Next, referring to FIG. 193, the detailed configuration of the sub-control circuit 6300 of the pachinko machine 6001 according to this embodiment will be described.

Figure 193 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the sub-control circuit 6300. As described with reference to Figure 192, the sub-control circuit 6300 includes a sub-CPU 6301, an audio/LED control circuit 6305, etc., but here, the audio/LED control circuit 6305 will be described, focusing on the configuration for outputting audio related to effects and the like as light.

The audio controller 6305a of the audio/LED control circuit 6305 reads multiple pieces of audio data stored in the audio data ROM 6310 in response to an audio generation command from the sub-CPU 6301. The audio generation command from the sub-CPU 6301 is a command corresponding to a command related to a performance (performance instruction command) received from the main CPU 6201.

Then, the audio controller 6305a synthesizes audio data related to the performance based on the read audio data, converts the audio data into a specified audio signal, and sends it to the IS2 interface 6311. In addition, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 6001 or an alarm is required, the audio controller 6305a converts the corresponding audio data into an audio signal and sends it to the IS2 interface 6311.

At this time, the audio controller 6305a controls the converted audio signal to be provided to either the AMP 6312 or the D/A converter 6311, depending on the output destination stored in the work RAM 6303 of the sub-control circuit 6300.

In this embodiment, if "headphone/earphone output" is not specified, the output destination is the speaker 6032, in which case the audio signal is provided to the AMP 6312. On the other hand, if "headphone/earphone output" is specified, the output destination is the audio output LED 6045, in which case the audio signal is provided to the D/A converter 6313.

When an audio signal is provided to the AMP 6312, volume information of the audio signal is also provided to the AMP 6312 according to the "volume value" stored in the work RAM 6303. However, such volume information may be provided directly to the AMP 6312, or the amplified audio signal output from the AMP 6312 may be adjusted according to the volume information.

As described above, the work RAM 6303 stores whether or not "headphone/earphone output" is specified, and the "volume value", and these settings are performed by the player via the menu screen 6501 and the volume adjustment screen 6502 described below (see FIG. 194). In addition, the whether or not "headphone/earphone output" is specified, and the "volume value" stored in the work RAM 6303 are returned to default values (for example, no "headphone/earphone output" is specified, and "volume value" = 5) depending on predetermined conditions.

The above settings stored in the work RAM 6303 are reset to the default values when an event that could be considered a change of player is detected, such as when the power to the pachinko machine 6001 is turned on, when the player has not played for a specified period of time, when a ball loan card or other return operation is performed in the card unit 6180, or when an instruction is given to count gaming media (when a machine-specific counting system is installed in each machine).

In the above configuration, the audio signal is controlled to be provided to either the AMP 6312 or the D/A converter 6311 depending on the output destination stored in the work RAM 6303. However, if "headphone/earphone output" is specified as the output destination, it is possible that the speaker 6032 will also reduce the volume of the sound related to the performance (for example, set the volume to 0 or output at a specified low volume) (for example, mute or lower the volume in the AMP 6312), in which case the audio signal will be provided to both the AMP 6312 and the D/A converter 6311.

On the other hand, even if "headphone/earphone output" is not specified as the output destination, it is also possible to control the audio signal to be provided to the D/A converter 6311.

When the AMP 6312 receives an audio signal from the audio controller 6305a via the IS2 interface 6311, it amplifies the audio signal and transmits it to the speaker 6032. As a result, audio related to the performance, etc. is output from the speaker 6032. If the audio is related to the performance, it is output from the speaker 6032 in conjunction with the display of the performance image on the display device 6007, for example.

The audio controller 6305a can handle audio data from multiple channels, and the AMP 6312 can amplify the audio signal associated with each piece of audio data and output it to the corresponding speaker 6032 for each channel (for example, the right and left speakers dedicated to the low-frequency range, and the right and left speakers other than those).

When the D/A converter 6311 receives an audio signal (L signal and R signal) from the audio controller 6305a via the IS2 interface 6311, it converts the audio signal into an analog signal and transmits it to the infrared transmission control unit 6314. At this time, the analog signal is also converted for each L/R according to the L/R of the audio signal. As described above, the audio controller 6305a can handle audio data across multiple channels, but when transmitting an audio signal to the D/A converter 6311, it downmixes these multiple channel audio data into two channels, the L signal and the R signal, and transmits them. For example, it performs PCM calculations on the L signal and the R signal to synthesize the waveforms, and adjusts the peak value as necessary.

The infrared transmission control unit 6314 is, for example, an FM modulation circuit for audio signals. FM (Frequency Modulation) is a modulation method in which an analog signal is transmitted by changing the frequency of a carrier wave.

In this embodiment, when the infrared transmission control unit 6314 transmits the input analog signal L+R as a main channel signal to the LED driver 6315, the LED driver 6315 causes the audio output LED-A 6045a to emit light (emission of infrared rays) in response to the main channel signal (basic carrier wave). Similarly, when the infrared transmission control unit 6314 transmits the analog signal L-R as a sub-channel signal to the LED driver 6315, the LED driver 6315 causes the audio output LED-B 6045b to emit light (emission of infrared rays) in response to the sub-channel signal (sub-carrier wave).

The method of transmitting an analog signal using the main channel signal and the sub-channel signal as described above is similar to the method used in FM broadcasting, for example. With this mechanism, even if the receiving side only supports monaural playback, monaural audio can be reproduced by demodulating the main channel signal. However, in this embodiment, if there is no need to reproduce monaural audio on the receiving side (gaming device 7001), such a method does not necessarily have to be adopted. For example, the infrared transmission control unit 6314 may generate an L channel signal based on the L signal of an analog signal, and an R channel signal based on the R signal of an analog signal, and the receiving side gaming device 7001 may demodulate the audio signals of the L signal and the R signal from the L channel signal and the R channel signal, respectively.

As described above, the LED driver 6315 illuminates the audio output LED-A 6045a and the audio output LED-B 6045b based on the received analog signal, and this specification is based on, for example, the standard for analog audio transmission systems using infrared as a medium (JEITA CP-1208). This standard is a standard in which each carrier is FM-modulated by an audio signal (20 Hz to 20 kHz) (carriers of different frequencies are assigned to eight channels (H1 to H8)), and the FM-modulated carrier signal is used to brightness-modulate an infrared carrier (using an infrared carrier of 800 nm to 900 nm).

In this embodiment, for example, the above-mentioned H1 and H2 channels are used to transmit the main channel signal and the sub-channel signal, respectively (by infrared carrier waves). This type of transmission uses an analog carrier wave, so there is less delay than with methods of transmitting digital audio data (digital transmission requires time for codec processing (encoding before transmission and decoding after reception)), and because it does not use radio wave bands, there is no risk of crosstalk.

In this embodiment, for example, an infrared LED with a peak wavelength of 850 nm or an infrared LED with a peak wavelength of 940 nm is used as the audio output LED-A 6045a and the audio output LED-B 6045b. Note that while infrared rays are classified as invisible light, an infrared LED with a peak wavelength of 850 nm can actually be recognized as red by the human eye. Also, it is possible to use a single-color LED or full-color LED that outputs visible light as the audio output LED in this embodiment.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light from the two infrared LEDs (sound output LED-A 6045a, sound output LED-B 6045b) is received by two corresponding infrared receiving units (see FIG. 196), but it is also possible to provide multiple sets of these. For example, by providing four sets of two infrared LEDs and two infrared receiving units, and using each set to send and receive the same audio information, even if one of these sets stops functioning, it is possible to maintain normal reception of audio information using the functioning set (i.e., using the infrared receiving unit that is receiving signals normally).

The lamp controller 6305b of the sound/LED control circuit 6305 references multiple types of LED decoration patterns stored in the decoration data ROM 6316, generates an LED control signal in accordance with the timing of the performance, and transmits the LED control signal to the LED driver 6317 to cause the performance LED group 6046 to emit light.

In this embodiment, as described above, the sound of the pachinko machine 6001 is sent to the outside using infrared rays, but if an FM modulated carrier wave is used, the sound can also be sent in the same way using an FM transmitter. However, when performing such communication using radio waves, a conformity test related to the weak radio equipment registration system (weak radio conformity mark (ELP mark)) stipulated by the Radio Law is required, which requires time and costs for the examination. In contrast, the configuration of this embodiment uses only "light" to send the sound of the gaming machine, and does not require the above-mentioned examination. In consideration of the number of gaming machines sold and the development cycle, adopting the configuration of this embodiment has a great advantage in this respect as well.

[How to specify audio output destination]
Next, referring to Figure 194, a method in which a player specifies the audio output destination in the pachinko machine 6001 according to this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 194(A) shows a menu screen 6501 displayed on the display device 6007 by the player's operation. The menu screen 6501 is displayed on the display device 6007 when the player presses (or presses and holds) one of the predetermined buttons (e.g., the performance button 6054 or the operation unit 6066) of the pachinko machine 6001. The menu screen 6501 has "volume adjustment" and "return to play" as selection items. When the player operates a predetermined button of the pachinko machine 6001 to select "volume adjustment" and give an instruction to confirm, the display of the display device 6007 transitions to the volume adjustment screen 6502 shown in FIG. 194(B). When the player selects "return to play" and gives an instruction to confirm, the display of the menu screen 6501 is controlled to disappear. Note that the menu screen 6501 is shown in a simplified form here, but the selection items of the menu screen 6501 may be, for example, each item of the menu screen shown in FIG. 171(A).

On the volume adjustment screen 6502 shown in FIG. 194 (B), the player can adjust the volume of the pachinko machine 6001 and specify whether or not to enable headphone/earphone output (specify whether or not to enable headphone/earphone output).

If the checkbox specifying whether or not to output to headphones/earphones is not checked, the sound from the pachinko machine 6001 will be output to the speaker 6032, and the volume can be adjusted here. The volume can be adjusted to seven levels by operating the button associated with "+" or the button associated with "-", for example, and this allows the volume of the sound output to the speaker 6032 of the pachinko machine 6001 to be adjusted. Here, the leftmost volume value is "0", and with this setting, no sound is output from the speaker 6032. However, in this embodiment, error sounds and warning sounds other than those for the effects are controlled to be output from the speaker 6032 at a volume above a certain value, regardless of the volume value of the volume adjustment.

When the headphone/earphone output checkbox is checked, sounds related to the effects of the pachinko machine 6001, as well as error sounds, warning sounds, and other sounds other than effects, are not output from the speaker 6032, but are instead output to the player's headphones or earphones via the gaming device 7001. Also, at this time, the volume of the sound output to the speaker 6032 of the pachinko machine 6001 is reduced (for example, the volume setting of the volume adjustment on the volume adjustment screen 6502 is automatically set to 0), and cannot be changed while the headphone/earphone output checkbox is checked.

After that, by operating a specific button, selecting "OK" on the volume adjustment screen 6502 and giving an instruction to confirm, the volume adjustment and the settings for headphone/earphone output are confirmed, and then selecting "Return to menu screen" and giving an instruction to confirm will return to the menu screen 6501 in FIG. 194 (A).

In the above example, when the checkbox for headphone/earphone output is checked, the volume of the sound output to the speaker 6032 of the pachinko machine 6001 is set to 0, and nothing is output from the speaker 6032. In this case, however, the volume of the sound output to the speaker 6032 may be set to a low volume such as "1" or "2."

In this way, by operating the pachinko machine 6001 that the player is using to play, the player can specify whether the sound output to the speaker 6032 is to be output directly to the speaker 6032 or to be heard through headphones or earphones.

In this embodiment, as described above, the menu screen 6501, etc. is displayed on the display device 6007 by the player's operation, and the screen is operated by pressing a specific button on the pachinko machine 6001. However, for example, in the pachinko slot machine 4001 according to the third embodiment, the menu screen 6501, etc. can be displayed on the first sub-display device 4201, and the screen can be operated by the player's touch operation.

[Configuration of the gaming device]
Fig. 195 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a gaming device 7001. The gaming device 7001 shown in Fig. 195 is, for example, the gaming device 7001 of the type shown in Fig. 191.

As in the case shown in FIG. 191, the gaming device 7001 has a pachinko machine 6001 placed on the left side, and as shown, infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED 6045 of the pachinko machine 6001 are received by an infrared receiving unit 7011 placed on the left side of the gaming device 7001. More specifically, infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED-A 6045a of the pachinko machine 6001 are received by infrared receiving unit A 7011a, and infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED-B 6045b are received by infrared receiving unit B 7011b.

The infrared receiving unit A7011a and the infrared receiving unit B7011b are composed of, for example, a photodiode or a phototransistor, and can amplify and extract the current generated by the emitted light. As described above, the infrared light emitted from the sound output LED-A6045a and the infrared light emitted from the sound output LED-B6045b output carrier waves of different frequencies, so the infrared receiving unit 7011 can extract audio information from the corresponding sound output LED 6045 due to this difference in frequency. Also, if the pachinko machine 6001 has three or more sound output LEDs 6045, corresponding infrared receiving units can be provided according to the number.

The gaming device 7001 in FIG. 195 also has a shielding section 7012, which blocks the intrusion of light between the pachinko machine 6001 and the gaming device 7001, and prevents the infrared receiving section 7011 from receiving disturbances (noise). However, generally, lighting in gaming establishments and LEDs in the pachinko machine 6001 have different frequencies from the infrared LEDs of this embodiment and are therefore not affected. In such cases, such shielding section 7012 can be omitted and the gaming device 7001 can be placed at a certain distance from the pachinko machine 6001.

The gaming device 7001 in FIG. 195 is provided with an audio output terminal 7006 (so-called earphone jack) for inserting the plug of an audio cable for wired headphones or earphones. The gaming device 7001 is also provided with a volume operation unit 7005 (volume knob) for adjusting the volume of the audio when using wired headphones or earphones.

The gaming device 7001 in FIG. 195 is also provided with four buttons 7008 that are used when using wireless headphones or earphones. The first button 7008a is a button that turns on the power to the circuit that performs wireless output (wireless output control unit 7007, described later). When pressed, the power to the circuit is turned on, and then the device automatically transitions to a pairing mode in which pairing is performed to establish a session with the headphones or earphones to be connected.

Pressing and holding the second button 7008b pairs the device with the headphones or earphones to be connected. Pressing and holding the third button 7008c decreases the volume, and pressing and holding the fourth button 7008d increases the volume.

Up to this point, we have explained the configuration of the gaming device 7001, but this configuration is merely an example, and gaming devices that achieve similar functions with various other appearances and circuit configurations can be conceived.

Next, the configuration of the gaming device 7001 will be described with reference to FIG. 196. The gaming device 7001 includes two infrared receiving units 7011 (infrared receiving unit A 7011a and infrared receiving unit B 7011b), an infrared reception control unit 7002, a headphone amplifier 7003, a volume circuit 7004, a volume operation unit 7005, an audio output terminal 7006, a wireless output control unit 7007, a button 7008, an antenna 7009, and a power management unit 7010.

As described above, the two infrared receiving units 7011 are circuits including photodiodes and phototransistors that receive infrared light emitted from the audio output LED 6045 of the opposing pachinko machine 6001, amplify and extract the current generated by the emitted light, and transmit the value to the connected infrared reception control unit 7002.

The two infrared receiving units 7011 are each associated with one audio output LED 6045, with the infrared receiving unit A 7011a configured to receive infrared light emitted from the audio output LED-A 6045a and the infrared receiving unit B 7011b configured to receive infrared light emitted from the audio output LED-B 6045b.

The infrared reception control unit 7002 is a circuit that generates a digital audio signal based on data received from the two infrared receiving units 7011, and transmits the digital audio signal to the headphone amplifier 7003 and the wireless output control unit 7007. The infrared reception control unit 7002 also receives, for example, an L+R analog signal (main channel signal) from the infrared receiving unit A 7011a, and an L-R analog signal (sub-channel signal) from the infrared receiving unit B 7011b, and generates a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from these signals. This specification is based on, for example, the standard (JEITA CP-1208) for analog audio transmission systems using infrared as a medium.

The headphone amplifier 7003 is a circuit that receives a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from the infrared reception control unit 7002, converts these audio signals into analog signals, amplifies them, and provides them to the audio output terminal 7006. The audio output terminal 7006 is a so-called earphone jack, and by connecting an audio cable for wired headphones or earphones to this terminal (i.e., inserting the plug of the audio cable into the earphone jack), the player can listen to the sound output from the pachinko machine 6001 through the wired headphones or earphones.

The volume of the audio signal (L/R) output from the headphone amplifier 7003 is adjusted by a volume circuit 7004 (e.g., a circuit including a variable resistor), and the volume value is adjusted by the player operating the volume control unit 7005 (e.g., a volume knob as shown in FIG. 195).

The wireless output control unit 7007 is a circuit that receives a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from the infrared reception control unit 7002, compresses (encodes) these audio signals, and controls the wireless transmission of the compressed data from the antenna 7009.

Buttons 7008 are buttons 7008a to 7008d as shown in FIG. 195, and as described above, these buttons are used to turn on the power, perform pairing, and increase/decrease the volume.

The wireless headphones or earphones paired with the wireless output control unit 7007 decode the data (compressed data) received via wireless communication and play the audio, allowing the player to listen to the audio output from the pachinko machine 6001 using the wireless headphones or earphones.

The power management unit 7010 is a circuit that provides power to each of the above circuits. The power management unit 7010 can use, for example, a lithium ion polymer battery built into the gaming device 7001 as its power source. It can also be configured to take power via a USB cable or charge a built-in battery such as a lithium ion polymer battery. A USB terminal into which the terminal of a USB cable can be inserted is arranged, for example, in the card unit 6180 or in island equipment related to an "island" where multiple pachinko machines 6001 are arranged, and power can be supplied from these.

(Variation 1)
Next, a gaming device 7201 which is a modified example of the gaming device 7001 will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 197 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the gaming device 7201. Like the gaming device 7001, the gaming device 7201 shown in Figure 197 is also a gaming device of the type shown in Figure 191.

As in the case shown in FIG. 191, the gaming device 7201 has a pachinko machine 6001 placed on the left side, and although not shown, infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED 6045 of the pachinko machine 6001 are received by an infrared receiving unit 7211 placed on the left side of the gaming device 7201.

The gaming device 7201 in FIG. 197 is also provided with an audio output terminal 7206 (so-called earphone jack) for inserting the plug of an audio cable for wired headphones or earphones. The gaming device 7201 is also provided with a power button 7213 and a touch panel display unit 7224.

Next, the configuration of the gaming device 7201 will be described with reference to FIG. 198. The gaming device 7201 is configured as one computer system, and includes a CPU 7221, a ROM 7222, a RAM 7223, a touch panel display unit 7224, two infrared receiving units 7211 (infrared receiving unit A 7211a, infrared receiving unit B 7211b), an infrared reception control unit 7202, a headphone amplifier 7203, an audio output terminal 7206, a wireless output control unit 7207, an antenna 7209, a power management unit 7210, and a power button 7213.

The CPU 7221 executes the programs stored in the ROM 7222 and controls each component of the gaming device 7201. The RAM 7223 temporarily stores data generated during execution of the programs. It also continuously holds setting information related to audio output.

The infrared receiving unit 7211 (infrared receiving unit A 7211a, infrared receiving unit B 7211b) is configured to include, for example, a photodiode or a phototransistor, and can amplify and extract the current generated by the emitted light. Since the infrared rays emitted from the two corresponding audio output LEDs output carrier waves of different frequencies, the infrared receiving unit 7211 can extract audio information from the corresponding audio output LED due to this difference in frequency.

Under the control of the CPU 7221, the infrared reception control unit 7202 generates a digital audio signal based on the data received from the two infrared receiving units 7211, and transmits the digital audio signal to the headphone amplifier 7203 and the wireless output control unit 7207. The operation of the infrared reception control unit 7202 is similar to that of the infrared reception control unit 7002 of the gaming device 7001 described above, and for example receives an L+R analog signal (main channel signal) from the infrared receiving unit A 7211a, receives an L-R analog signal (sub-channel signal) from the infrared receiving unit B 7211b, and generates a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from these signals.

Under the control of the CPU 7221, the headphone amplifier 7203 receives a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from the infrared reception control unit 7202, converts these audio signals to analog signals, amplifies them, and provides them to the audio output terminal 7206. The audio output terminal 7206 is a so-called earphone jack, and by connecting an audio cable for wired headphones or earphones to this terminal, the player can listen to the sound output from the pachinko machine 6001 through the wired headphones or earphones.

Under the control of the CPU 7221, the wireless output control unit 7207 receives a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from the infrared reception control unit 7202, compresses (encodes) these audio signals, and controls the compressed data to be wirelessly transmitted from the antenna 7209.

When the power management unit 7210 detects that the power button 7213 has been pressed, it provides power to each component.

The touch panel display unit 7224 is a display device that can be operated by the player through touch, and displays a setting screen and the like under the control of the CPU 7221, and the contents set therein are stored in the RAM 7223 (e.g., flash memory). On the setting screen, it is possible to set the volume when outputting sound to the wired sound device 8001 and the volume when outputting sound to the wireless sound device 8002. The CPU 7221 refers to the volume value set on such a setting screen, and instructs the headphone amplifier 7203 to output sound from the wired sound device 8001 at the specified volume, and instructs the wireless output control unit 7207 to output sound from the wireless sound device 8002 at the specified volume.

The setting screen displayed on the touch panel display unit 7224 also displays information related to pairing when the wireless output control unit 7207 and the wireless audio device 8002 are paired.

Figure 199 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on the touch panel display unit 7224. Figure 199 (A) shows a menu screen 7305, and Figure 199 (B) shows a volume adjustment screen 7306.

The menu screen 7305 in FIG. 199(A) is displayed, for example, when the player touches the touch panel display unit 7224, and the menu screen 7305 displays options for selecting which settings to make. In this example, one of "volume adjustment," "pairing," and "clear settings" can be selected by touch operation.

When the "Volume Adjustment" selection item is touched on the menu screen 7305, the display on the touch panel display unit 7224 transitions to a volume adjustment screen 7306 as shown in FIG. 199 (B). On the volume adjustment screen 7306, the output volume can be adjusted for each of the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002. For the wired audio device 8001, the volume can be adjusted to seven levels by touching the "+" or "-" to the right of the "Wired headphones/earphones" display, thereby adjusting the volume of the sound output to the wired audio device 8001. Here, the volume value on the far left is "0", and with this setting, no sound is output from the wired audio device 8001.

Similarly, for the wireless audio device 8002, the volume can be adjusted to seven different volume values by touching the "+" or "-" to the right of the "wireless headphones/earphones" display, thereby adjusting the volume of the sound output to the wireless audio device 8002. Here, the leftmost volume value is "0," and with this setting, no sound is output from the wireless audio device 8002.

In this embodiment, when the cable of the wired audio device 8001 is connected to the audio output terminal 7206, audio is output from the wired audio device 8001. In this case, the volume setting of the wireless audio device 8002 is irrelevant and any value may be set. Similarly, when pairing is performed for the wireless audio device 8002 and the gaming device 7201 is connected, audio is output from the wireless audio device 8002. In this case, the volume setting of the wired audio device 8001 is irrelevant and any value may be set. In other words, in the gaming device 7201, the digital audio signal from the infrared reception control unit 7202 is output to both the headphone amplifier 7203 and the wireless output control unit 7207, regardless of which audio device actually outputs the audio, and the audio signal is processed there.

However, the volume adjustment screen 7306 can be used to allow the player to specify whether the audio device to be used is a wired audio device 8001 or a wireless audio device 8002, and for audio devices that are not being used, the infrared reception control unit 7202 can be controlled not to send digital audio signals to the associated audio transmission unit (i.e., the headphone amplifier 7203 or wireless output control unit 7207) so that processing by that audio transmission unit is not performed.

After setting the volume on the volume adjustment screen 7306, touch "OK" to confirm the volume adjustment settings, and then touch "Return to menu screen" to return to the menu screen 7305 in FIG. 199 (A).

Touching "Pairing" on the menu screen 7305 in FIG. 199(A) performs pairing to connect the wireless audio device 8002 to the wireless output control unit 7207 of the gaming device 7201. Although not shown here, for example, when the wireless audio device 8002 receives audio signals via Bluetooth (registered trademark), touching "Pairing" displays a list of wireless devices including the player's wireless audio device 8002, and the player selects his/her own wireless audio device 8002 from the list to establish a connection.

When "Clear Settings" is touched on the menu screen 7305 in FIG. 199 (A), the volume value previously set is reset to the default value and the pairing settings are cleared.

Up to this point, we have explained the configuration of the gaming device 7201, but this configuration is merely an example, and gaming devices that achieve similar functions with various other appearances and system configurations can be conceived.

(Variation 2)
Next, the gaming system PS210 will be described with reference to Fig. 200 and Fig. 201. The gaming system PS210 has a pachinko machine 6601 which is basically configured similarly to the pachinko machine 6001 but which emits infrared rays in a different direction, and a card unit 6700 which is essentially configured by incorporating a gaming device 7201 into a card unit 6180 (see Fig. 192). Note that the internal configuration of the pachinko machine 6601 will be indicated by the same reference numerals as those of the pachinko machine 6001.

Figure 200 (A) is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine 6601 and a card unit 6700. Here, the pachinko machine 6601 and the card unit 6700 are spaced apart to clearly show the direction of the infrared rays emitted from the pachinko machine 6601, but in reality, the two are placed close to each other, as shown in Figure 200 (B).

As can be seen from Fig. 200(A) and Fig. 200(B), the pachinko machine 6601 has two sound output LEDs 6045 (sound output LED-A 6045a, sound output LED-B 6045b) located at the top of the left side as viewed from the front, and emits infrared rays to the left as viewed from the front. The card unit 6700 is placed close to the right side of the pachinko machine 6601, receives infrared rays emitted from the pachinko machine 6601 with two infrared receivers 6711 located at the top of the right side as viewed from the front, and outputs sound to the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 based on the received light.

The audio cable of the wired audio device 8001 is connected to an audio output terminal 6706 provided at the bottom of the front of the card unit 6700.

Figure 201 is a diagram showing the configuration of the card unit 6700. As described above, this card unit 6700 is the card unit 6180 shown in Figure 192 with the gaming device 7201 shown in Figure 198 incorporated into it.

As shown in FIG. 201, the card unit 6700 includes a CPU 6721, a ROM 6722, a RAM 6723, a card reader/writer 6731, a bill identification device 6732, a coin insertion sensor 6733, an interface 6735, a touch panel display unit 6724, two infrared receiving units 6711 (infrared receiving unit A 6711a and infrared receiving unit B 6711b), an infrared reception control unit 6702, a headphone amplifier 6703, an audio output terminal 6706, a wireless output control unit 6707, an antenna 6709, a power management unit 6710, and a power button 6713.

The CPU 6721 executes the programs stored in the ROM 6722 and controls each component of the card unit 6700. The RAM 6723 temporarily stores data generated during execution of the programs. It also continuously holds certain information related to the game and setting information related to audio output.

The card reader/writer 6731 is, for example, a non-contact IC card reader/writer that reads information from a player's card (for example, a ball loan card, etc.), the bill identification device 6732 determines the type and authenticity of bills inserted through the bill insertion slot, and the coin insertion sensor 6733 determines the type and authenticity of coins inserted through the coin insertion slot. The CPU 6721 controls the lending of gaming media (gaming balls and medals) according to the player's card, inserted bills, and inserted coins.

The touch panel display unit 6724 is a display device that can be operated by the player through touch, and includes, for example, the functions of the ball lending operation panel 6182 of the card unit 6180. Under the control of the CPU 6721, the touch panel display unit 6724 displays screens for instructing processes related to the lending and paying out of gaming media, settlement, counting, etc., and setting screens for adjusting the volume of the sound output to the audio device, etc.

Each component of the card unit 6700, which will be described below, basically has the same function as the components of the gaming device 7201.

The infrared receiving unit 6711 (infrared receiving unit A 6711a, infrared receiving unit B 6711b) is configured to include, for example, a photodiode or phototransistor, and can amplify and extract the current generated by the emitted light. Since the infrared rays emitted from the two corresponding sound output LEDs (sound output LED-A 6045a, sound output LED-B 6045b) output carrier waves of different frequencies, the infrared receiving unit 6711 can extract audio information from the corresponding sound output LED due to this difference in frequency. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 6601 has three or more sound output LEDs 6045, corresponding infrared receiving units can be provided according to the number.

Under the control of the CPU 6721, the infrared reception control unit 6702 generates a digital audio signal based on the data received from the two infrared receiving units 6711, and transmits the digital audio signal to the headphone amplifier 6703 and the wireless output control unit 6707. The infrared reception control unit 6702 also receives, for example, an L+R analog signal (main channel signal) from the infrared receiving unit A 6711a, and an L-R analog signal (sub-channel signal) from the infrared receiving unit B 6711b, and generates a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from these signals.

Under the control of the CPU 6721, the headphone amplifier 6703 receives a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from the infrared reception control unit 6702, converts these audio signals to analog signals, amplifies them, and provides them to the audio output terminal 6706. The audio output terminal 6706 is a so-called earphone jack, and by connecting an audio cable for wired headphones or earphones to this terminal, the player can listen to the sound output from the pachinko machine 6601 through the wired headphones or earphones.

Under the control of the CPU 6721, the wireless output control unit 6707 receives a digital audio signal (L) and a digital audio signal (R) from the infrared reception control unit 6702, compresses (encodes) these audio signals, and controls the compressed data to be wirelessly transmitted from the antenna 6709.

When the power management unit 6710 detects that the power button 6713 has been pressed, it provides power to each component.

In particular, the contents set on the setting screen are stored in RAM 6723 (e.g., flash memory). On the setting screen, it is possible to set the volume when outputting audio to wired audio device 8001 and the volume when outputting audio to wireless audio device 8002. The CPU 6721 refers to the volume value set on such a setting screen and instructs the headphone amplifier 6703 to output audio from wired audio device 8001 at the specified volume, and instructs the wireless output control unit 6707 to output audio from wireless audio device 8002 at the specified volume.

The setting screen displayed on the touch panel display unit 6724 also displays information related to pairing when the wireless output control unit 6707 and the wireless audio device 8002 are paired.

Up to this point, the configuration of the card unit 6700 has been described, but this configuration is merely an example, and gaming devices that achieve similar functions with various other appearances and system configurations can be considered. In addition, there are various other configurations (for example, configurations related to the lending and dispensing of gaming media) other than the main configuration of the present application, which is to receive infrared light and output sound to an audio device.

(Variation 3)
Next, the gaming system PS220 will be described with reference to Fig. 202 and Fig. 203. The gaming system PS220 includes a pachinko machine 6701 and a data display device 6801, and is, for example, a gaming system PS100 of the tenth embodiment to which the one-way non-contact voice communication function of the present application has been added. Note that, here, the internal configuration of the pachinko machine 6701 will be indicated by the same reference numerals as those of the pachinko machine 6001.

The gaming system PS100 of the tenth embodiment includes a gaming machine 3001 and a data display 2501. The light output from the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001 is captured by the image sensor unit 2811 of the data display 2501 mounted on the top of the gaming machine 3001. The data display 2501 determines the presentation pattern of the gaming machine 3001 from the captured image, and controls the liquid crystal display 2502 of the data display 2501 to display a corresponding image according to the presentation pattern thus determined (see FIG. 149). The data display 2501 also has a call button 2505 for calling a member of staff at the gaming facility.

The pachinko machine 6701 shown in FIG. 202 corresponds to the gaming machine 3001 described above, and like the gaming machine 3001, has a lamp 6804 (corresponding to the lamp 3305 of the gaming machine 3001). Also, the data display 6801 shown in FIG. 202 corresponds to the data display 2501 described above, and the image sensor unit 6831, liquid crystal display 6824, and call button 6832 respectively correspond to the image sensor unit 2811, liquid crystal display 2502, and call button 2505 of the gaming machine 3001 described above. That is, the image sensor unit 6831 of the data display 6801 captures visible light from the lamp 6804 of the pachinko machine 6701 to grasp the performance pattern of the pachinko machine 6701, etc.

The pachinko machine 6701 in FIG. 202 is also equipped with two audio output LEDs (audio output LED-A 6045a and audio output LED-B 6045b) that each emit infrared light in order to realize the one-way non-contact audio communication function of the present application. On the other hand, the data display 6801 (not shown in FIG. 202) has an infrared receiving unit 6811 at its bottom for receiving infrared light emitted from the audio output LED 6045 of the pachinko machine 6701.

The data display 6801 includes a configuration similar to that of the gaming device 7201 of the present application described above (see FIG. 198), and audio is provided to the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 based on infrared rays received by the infrared receiving unit 6811. In addition, the audio cable of the wired audio device 8001 is connected to an audio output terminal 6806 provided at the bottom of the side of the data display 6801.

In FIG. 202, the pachinko machine 6701 and the data display 6801 are spaced apart to clearly show the direction of the infrared rays emitted from the pachinko machine 6701, but in reality, as shown in FIG. 203, the two are placed close to each other (for example, the data display 6801 is placed (fixedly if necessary) on top of the pachinko machine 6701).

Up to this point, we have described the configuration of the present application applied to the configuration of the gaming system PS100 of the tenth embodiment, but this configuration is merely an example, and gaming systems that realize the functions of the present application can be conceived using various other system configurations. For example, the configuration of the gaming system PS100 (the configuration of capturing an image of the light output from the lamp of the pachinko machine with the image sensor unit of the data display device and determining the presentation pattern of the pachinko machine from that image) can be deleted.

(Variation 4)
Next, the gaming system PS230 will be described with reference to Fig. 204(A). The gaming system PS230 includes a pachinko machine 6001a which is an improvement over the pachinko machine 6001 (see Figs. 192 and 193) of the gaming system PS200, and a gaming device 7301 which is an improvement over the gaming device 7201 (see Fig. 198).

Similar to the gaming system PS200, the gaming system PS230 receives infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a with an infrared receiving unit of the gaming device 7301, generates an audio signal based on the light received by the infrared receiving unit, and outputs it to the wired audio device 8001, etc.

In the gaming system PS200, the sounds output to the wired audio device 8001 and the like are sounds that should be output to the speakers of the gaming machine, such as sounds related to the game presentation, error sounds and warning sounds related to the gaming machine. However, in the gaming system PS230, in addition to the sounds that should be output to the speakers of the gaming machine, sounds generated by playing on the gaming machine (such as the rolling sounds of game balls, the payout sounds of medals, the movement sounds of role-playing objects, etc.), emergency broadcasts by the gaming establishment in the event of a disaster (notification of the occurrence of a disaster and evacuation guidance), advertising and guidance broadcasts at the gaming establishment, and background music at the gaming establishment are output to the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 along with the sounds output to the speakers of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the gaming system PS230, the sound output to the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 has the characteristic of being almost completely free of surrounding sounds, including sounds from other gaming machines, making it suitable for recording as content to be distributed to SNS (social networking services) and video posting sites. In light of this, it is possible to control the replacement of the sounds (music) related to the effects of the gaming machines and the background music in the gaming establishment with content that can be distributed without problems (i.e., content that will not cause copyright issues when distributed).

In addition, in the gaming system PS230, when the pachinko machine 6001a outputs sounds generated by playing on the gaming machine (for example, the sounds of the game balls rolling, the sounds of medals being paid out, the sounds of props moving, etc.), the sound is acquired using a built-in microphone (preferably a directional microphone), the acquired sound is synthesized with the sound to be output to the speaker of the gaming machine, and based on the synthesized sound, corresponding infrared rays are emitted from the sound output LED. Also, sounds generated by playing on the gaming machine may be synthesized with pre-stored pseudo sounds in accordance with the timing of the effects, etc., without being acquired by the built-in microphone. Such pseudo sounds may be stored, for example, in a storage means corresponding to the sound data ROM 6310 shown in FIG. 193.

The gaming system PS230 also includes a hall computer 6186a which is an improved version of the hall computer 6186 shown in FIG. 192, and this hall computer 6186a provides emergency broadcasts (disaster alerts and evacuation guidance) from the gaming establishment in the event of a disaster, advertising and information broadcasts from the gaming establishment, and background music from the gaming establishment to the gaming establishment as required, as specified by the gaming device 7301. It is also possible to set it to output audio for distribution at this time.

Here, the hall computer 6186a provides the above-mentioned sound to the gaming device 7301 via a wireless LAN antenna (access point) placed on the ceiling or the like of the gaming parlor, as shown in FIG. 204, and the gaming device 7301 synthesizes the sound from the pachinko machine 6001a (i.e., the sound generated by light received by an infrared receiving unit) with the sound from the hall computer 6186a (i.e., the sound received by wireless LAN), and outputs the synthesized sound to a wired audio device 8001, etc.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned standard (JEITA CP-1208), carrier waves of different frequencies are assigned to eight channels (H1 to H8). For example, sounds related to the effects of games and error and warning sounds related to the gaming machine can be assigned to channels H1 and H2, sounds generated by games played on the gaming machine (for example, the rolling sounds of game balls, the payout sounds of medals, the movement sounds of role-playing objects, etc.) can be assigned to channels H3 and H4, emergency broadcasts by the gaming establishment in the event of a disaster (disaster notification and evacuation guidance) can be assigned to channels H5 and H6, and advertising and information broadcasts at the gaming establishment and background music at the gaming establishment can be assigned to channels H7 and H8, and these can be provided to the gaming device 7301.

In this modified example, the sound from the hall computer 6186a is transmitted to the gaming device 7301 via wireless LAN, but similar to the mechanism by which sound from the pachinko machine 6001a is provided to the gaming device 7301, sound data relating to the sound can also be transmitted using infrared rays. In this case, sound output LEDs are provided on the ceiling of the gaming establishment, and the gaming device 7301 is provided with a dedicated infrared receiving unit that receives infrared rays from the sound output LEDs.

Figure 204 (B) shows a gaming system PS240 including a pachinko machine 6601a which is an improved version of the pachinko machine 6601 (see Figure 200) of the gaming system PS210, and a card unit 6700a which is an improved version of the card unit 6700.

In this gaming system PS240, like the gaming system PS230, not only the sounds to be output to the speakers of the gaming machines, but also sounds generated by playing on the gaming machines (for example, the sounds of game balls rolling, the sounds of medals being paid out, the sounds of reels moving, etc.), emergency broadcasts from the gaming establishment in the event of a disaster (notification of the occurrence of a disaster and evacuation guidance), advertising and information broadcasts from the gaming establishment, background music from the gaming establishment, etc. are output to the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002 along with the sounds to be output to the speakers of the gaming machines.

For this reason, in the gaming system PS240, a configuration similar to that of the pachinko machine 6001a of the gaming system PS230 described above is added to the pachinko machine 6601a. Also, a configuration similar to that of the gaming device 7301 of the gaming system PS230 described above is added to the card unit 6700a. However, in this example, the sound provided by the hall computer 6186b is transmitted to the card unit 6700a via a wired LAN connection between the hall computer 6186b and the card unit 6700a.

Figure 205 is a diagram showing the configuration of the gaming device 7301 described in Figure 204 (A). As described above, the gaming device 7301 is an improved version of the gaming device 7201 (see Figure 198), so similar components are given the same reference numerals as the gaming device 7201 and descriptions are omitted.

Compared to the gaming device 7201, the gaming device 7301 shown in FIG. 205 has been added with a wireless communication control unit 7231 and a voice synthesis unit 7232. The wireless communication control unit 7231 establishes a wireless LAN communication connection with the hall computer 6186a, and controls the reception of the above-mentioned voice data (i.e., emergency broadcasts from the gaming establishment in the event of a disaster (notification of the occurrence of a disaster and evacuation guidance), advertising and guidance broadcasts at the gaming establishment, background music at the gaming establishment, etc.) from the hall computer 6186a. This wireless LAN communication is based on a communication standard such as IEEE802.11n.

The voice synthesis unit 7232 synthesizes the voice data (digital voice signal) received by the wireless communication control unit 7231 from the hall computer 6186a with the voice data (digital voice signal) generated by the infrared reception control unit 7202 based on infrared rays from the pachinko machine 6001a, and transmits the synthesized digital voice signal to the headphone amplifier 7203 and the wireless output control unit 7207. Note that in this embodiment, the voice synthesis unit 7232 performs the synthesis process of the voice data, but the synthesis process of the voice data may be performed by other functional units such as the wireless communication control unit 7231 and the infrared reception control unit 7202.

The configuration of the card unit 6700a described in FIG. 204(B) will not be described here, but similar to the gaming device 7301 shown in FIG. 205, the communication control unit receives audio data such as the emergency broadcasts of the gaming parlor in the event of a disaster, as described above, from the hall computer 6186b (connected via a wired LAN), and the audio synthesis unit synthesizes the audio data (digital audio signal) received by the communication control unit from the hall computer 6186b with the audio data (digital audio signal) generated by the infrared reception control unit 6702 based on infrared rays from the pachinko machine 6601a, and transmits the synthesized digital audio signal to the headphone amplifier 6703 and the wireless output control unit 6707.

Figure 206 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on the display device of the pachinko machine 6001a shown in Figure 204 (A) or the pachinko machine 6601a shown in Figure 204 (B) (a display device corresponding to the display device 6007 of the pachinko machine 6001). Figure 206 (A) shows a menu screen 6511 displayed on the display device by the player's operation. The menu screen 6511 is displayed on the display device when the player presses (or presses and holds) a specific button on the pachinko machine 6001a or the pachinko machine 6601a.

Menu screen 6511 has options such as "volume adjustment," "headphone/earphone output," and "return to play." By operating a specific button on the pachinko machine to select "volume adjustment" and giving an instruction to confirm, the screen will transition to volume adjustment screen 6502 as shown in FIG. 194 (B), for example, where the volume of the pachinko machine is adjusted (however, this screen does not specify whether or not to use headphone/earphone output, as in volume adjustment screen 6502).

Figure 206 (B) shows a headphone/earphone output instruction screen 6512 that is displayed when "Headphone/earphone output" is selected on the menu screen 6511 and a confirmation instruction is given.

In this headphone/earphone output instruction screen 6512, the player can operate a specific button on the pachinko machine to specify whether or not to output to headphones/earphones (whether or not to output to headphones/earphones). If the check box for specifying whether or not to output to headphones/earphones is checked here, the volume of the sound from the pachinko machine is reduced (for example, the volume value is automatically changed to 0 or a specific small value) regardless of the volume adjustment specified via the menu screen 6511, and it is controlled so that it cannot be changed until the check box for specifying whether or not to output to headphones/earphones is unchecked.

The pachinko machine player can also select the content of the audio to be output to the headphones or earphones on the headphone/earphone output instruction screen 6512 in FIG. 206 (B). In this example, the items "Game machine audio," "Game machine live audio," and "For distribution" are listed, with check boxes set for each.

The "Game Machine Sound" check box is shown checked and hatched, meaning that it must be checked and cannot be unchecked. Additionally, the volume of each item can be adjusted individually (not shown).

In the above items, "gaming machine sound" is sound to be output from the gaming machine's speaker, such as sounds related to the game's presentation, error sounds related to the gaming machine, warning sounds, etc. "Gaming machine live sound" is live sound generated by playing on the gaming machine, such as the rolling sounds of gaming balls, the payout sounds of medals, the movement sounds of role-playing objects, etc. This sound data is acquired by a microphone built into the gaming machine, or provided as simulated sounds, and then synthesized with the gaming machine sound described above, and the synthesized sound data is emitted from the sound output LED as infrared rays corresponding to this sound data.

The "for distribution" designation is a designation to mute or replace the audio in order to avoid copyright issues when the audio output from the wired audio device 8001 or the wireless audio device 8002 is recorded or directly uploaded and provided to SNS or video distribution sites. Such adjustments to the content of the audio are related to the "game machine audio" item, for example.

After checking the checkboxes for each item indicating the content of the audio to be output to the headphones or earphones, the specified content is confirmed by selecting "Confirm", and then, by selecting "Return to menu screen" and issuing a confirmation command, the screen returns to the menu screen 6511 in FIG. 206 (A).

The contents of the designation specified via the menu screen 6511 and the headphone/earphone output instruction screen 6512, etc., are stored in the pachinko machine 6001a or the RAM of the pachinko machine 6601a (for example, a storage area corresponding to the work RAM 6303 of the pachinko machine 6001, etc.). The designation stored in this way is returned to the default value when an event that is considered to be a change of player is detected (for example, when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, when the player has not played for a specified period of time, when a return operation of a ball loan card or the like is performed in the card unit, when counting of game media is instructed (when a counting system for each machine is provided for each machine), etc.).

Figure 207 shows an example of a setting screen displayed on the touch panel display unit of the gaming device 7301 shown in Figure 204 (A) or the card unit 6700a shown in Figure 204 (B) (a display device corresponding to the touch panel display unit 7224 of the gaming device 7201 or the touch panel display unit 6724 of the card unit 6700). Figure 207 (A) shows a menu screen 7305, Figure 207 (B) shows a volume adjustment screen 7306, and Figure 207 (C) shows a headphone/earphone output instruction screen.

The menu screen 7311 in FIG. 207(A) is displayed, for example, when the player touches the touch panel display unit, and the menu screen 7311 displays options for selecting which settings to make. In this example, one of "volume adjustment," "headphone/earphone output," "pairing," and "clear settings" can be selected by touch operation.

When the "Volume Adjustment" selection item is touched on the menu screen 7311, the display on the touch panel display unit transitions to the volume adjustment screen 7312 shown in FIG. 207 (B). On the volume adjustment screen 7312, the output volume can be adjusted for each of the wired audio device 8001 and the wireless audio device 8002. For the wired audio device 8001, the volume can be adjusted to seven levels by touching the "+" or "-" to the right of the "Wired headphones/earphones" display, thereby adjusting the volume of the sound output to the wired audio device 8001. Here, the volume value on the far left is "0", and with this setting, no sound is output from the wired audio device 8001.

Similarly, for the wireless audio device 8002, the volume can be adjusted to seven different volume values by touching the "+" or "-" to the right of the "wireless headphones/earphones" display, thereby adjusting the volume of the sound output to the wireless audio device 8002. Here, the leftmost volume value is "0," and with this setting, no sound is output from the wireless audio device 8002.

After setting the volume on the volume adjustment screen 7312, touch "OK" to confirm the volume adjustment settings, and then touch "Return to menu screen" to return to the menu screen 7305 in FIG. 207 (A).

When the "Headphone/earphone output" selection item is touched on the menu screen 7311, the display on the touch panel display unit transitions to the headphone/earphone output instruction screen 7313 shown in FIG. 207 (C), where the user can specify whether or not to enable headphone/earphone output (whether or not to enable headphone/earphone output).

On the headphone/earphone output instruction screen 6512 of FIG. 206(B) shown on the display device of the pachinko machine, the player can select "game machine sound", "game machine live sound", or "for distribution" as the content of the sound to be output to the headphones or earphones. Here, however, the items "in-store emergency broadcast", "in-store advertising/guide broadcast", "in-store BGM 1", and "in-store BGM 2" are further listed, and from these, the player can select the sound to be output to the headphones or earphones. The above list also includes the item "for distribution", just like the headphone/earphone output instruction screen 6512 of FIG. 206(B). A check box is set for each item in order to select each item.

An "in-store emergency broadcast" is an emergency broadcast made by an amusement establishment in the event of a disaster, and includes disaster occurrence notification and evacuation guidance. An "in-store advertising and information broadcast" is, for example, advertising for specific products and services at the amusement establishment, and information about events, etc. This content does not have to be content that is actually broadcast in real time at the amusement establishment, and may include, for example, targeted advertising in line with the tendencies of players who use headphones/earphones. "In-store BGM 1" and "In-store BGM 2" are background music provided by the amusement establishment, but do not have to be background music that is actually broadcast in real time at the amusement establishment.

The "In-store emergency announcement" check box is checked and hatched, indicating that due to the importance of the "In-store emergency announcement," it cannot be unchecked.

The "for distribution" designation is a designation to mute or replace the audio in order to avoid copyright issues when the audio output from the wired audio device 8001 or the wireless audio device 8002 is recorded or directly uploaded and provided to SNS or video distribution sites. Such adjustments to the content of the audio relate to the items "in-store BGM 1" and "in-store BGM 2", for example.

The overall volume can be set on the volume adjustment screen 7312 in FIG. 207(B), but the volume can also be set for each item (not shown). However, the volume for the "in-store emergency broadcast" cannot be set below a certain volume value.

After checking the checkboxes for each item indicating the content of the audio to be output to the headphones or earphones, the specified content is confirmed by selecting "Confirm", and then, by touching "Return to menu screen", the user returns to the menu screen 7311 in FIG. 207 (A).

The contents specified via the menu screen 7311, the volume adjustment screen 7312, the headphone/earphone output instruction screen 7313, etc. are stored in the RAM of the gaming device 7301 and the card unit 6700a. The contents thus stored can be reset to the default values by touching the "Clear Settings" item on the menu screen 7311 and performing a specified operation.

The behavior when "Pairing" is selected on menu screen 7311 is the same as when "Pairing" is selected on menu screen 7305 in FIG. 199 (A), so a description of this will be omitted here.

In this case, for each of the items "in-store emergency broadcast", "in-store advertising/guidance broadcast", "in-store BGM 1", and "in-store BGM 2", the gaming device 7301 and card unit 6700a receive these audio data from the hall computer 6186a etc., and then synthesize only the designated audio with the audio from the pachinko machine 6001a and pachinko machine 6601a. Alternatively, the gaming device 7301 and card unit 6700a may be configured to first transmit the designated item to the hall computer 6186a etc., and then receive only the audio data related to the designated item from the hall computer 6186a etc.

The gaming device 7301 and the card unit 6700a can also be configured to have a light-emitting unit that flashes visible light to the outside when audio data related to an "in-store emergency broadcast" is received from the hall computer 6186a or the like. With this configuration, the player can be made aware of an emergency not only by sound but also by sight.

Note that the "in-store advertising/information broadcasts," "in-store BGM 1," and "in-store BGM 2" transmitted from the hall computer 6186a, etc. may be different from what is actually being broadcast in the store.

So far, we have described gaming system PS230 and gaming system PS240 relating to variant example 4 with reference to Figures 204 to 207, but these configurations are merely examples, and the functions of the present application can be realized by various other configurations.

(Variation 5)
Next, the gaming system PS250 will be described with reference to Fig. 208. The gaming system PS250 includes the pachinko machine 6001a and the gaming device 7301 which are improved from the gaming device 7301 of the gaming system PS230, and further includes a hall computer 6186c which is an improved version of the hall computer 6186a, and a smartphone 5801 of a player.

Unlike the gaming device 7301, the gaming device 7301a does not receive audio data from the hall computer. Also, like the gaming device 7301, the gaming device 7301a receives infrared rays emitted from the audio output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a with an infrared receiving unit, generates an audio signal based on the light received by the infrared receiving unit, and outputs the digital audio data as a wireless signal (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)). However, in this case, the smartphone 5801 receives this digital audio data instead of the wireless audio device 8002 (the smartphone 5801 is paired with the wireless audio device). The digital audio data received by the smartphone 5801 may include "gaming machine audio" and "gaming machine live audio" as in the gaming system PS230.

The hall computer 6186c also transmits digital audio data related to "in-store emergency broadcasts," "in-store advertising and information broadcasts," "in-store BGM 1," "in-store BGM 2," etc., to the smartphone 5801, for example, via wireless LAN, in accordance with the content specified by the player via the application 5802 on the smartphone 5801. The hall computer 6186c may also transmit these sounds to the gaming device 7301a via optical communication using infrared rays (optical communication similar to the infrared transmission from the pachinko machine 6001a to the gaming device 7301a).

The application 5802 executed on the smartphone 5801 receives digital audio data related to "gaming machine sound" and "gaming machine live sound" from the gaming device 7301a via the wireless communication described above, as described above, and receives digital audio data related to "in-store emergency broadcasts," "in-store advertising and information broadcasts," "in-store BGM 1," "in-store BGM 2," etc., from the hall computer 6186c via wireless LAN. Furthermore, if music or the like is being played on the smartphone 5801, the application 5802 synthesizes all of the digital audio data and transmits the digital audio data to the wireless audio device 8002 paired (wirelessly connected) with the smartphone 5801.

With this configuration, the player can listen to the music being played on his or her smartphone 5801 while also listening to the audio from the pachinko machine 6001a, and can also listen to "in-store emergency broadcasts," "in-store advertising and information broadcasts," and the like, transmitted from the hall computer 6186c.

In addition, if music is not being played on the user's own smartphone 5801, the user can listen to background music provided by the arcade ("In-store BGM 1", "In-store BGM 2") from the hall computer 6186c.

In addition, the player can specify which sounds to listen to and the volume of each sound from the setting screen of the pachinko machine 6001a and the gaming device 7301, as in the gaming system PS230 and gaming system PS240. In addition, the settings made on the gaming device 7301, etc. using the menu screen 7311, volume adjustment screen 7312, and headphone/earphone output instruction screen 7313 in FIG. 207 can also be made using the application 5802 on the smartphone 5801.

Note that here, the final voice synthesis process including the music being played is performed by the application 5802 on the player's smartphone 5801, but the device that executes such processing is not limited to a smartphone and may be any other portable music playback device.

So far, we have described the gaming system PS250 relating to variant example 5 with reference to FIG. 208, but this configuration is merely an example, and the functions of the present application can be realized by various other configurations.

(Variation 6)
Next, the gaming system PS260 will be described with reference to Fig. 209. The gaming system PS260 includes the pachinko machine 6001a and the gaming device 7301b which is an improved version of the gaming device 7301 of the gaming system PS230, and further includes a chair 5201 used by the player when playing the game.

Like the gaming device 7301, the gaming device 7301b receives infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a with an infrared receiving unit of the gaming device 7301b, generates an audio signal based on the light received by the infrared receiving unit, and outputs digital audio data to the wired audio device 8001, etc. The chair 5201 receives infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a with an infrared receiving unit 5202 provided in the chair 5201, and controls it to vibrate based on the received light, so that the player is given vibrations synchronized with the sound of the pachinko machine 6001a.

To achieve this configuration, the infrared receiving unit of the chair 5201 is placed in a position where it can receive the sound output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a, and the gaming device 7301b is configured to have a transparent resin housing, for example, so that the infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a can be transmitted in the direction of the chair 5201, as shown in FIG. 209.

The infrared receiving unit 5202 of the chair 5201 has the same configuration as the infrared receiving unit of the gaming device 7301b (i.e., the same configuration as the infrared receiving unit 7211 of the gaming device 7201), and an infrared reception control unit (e.g., corresponding to the infrared receiving control unit 7202 of the gaming device 7201) connected to the infrared receiving unit 5202 activates a vibration device (e.g., a vibration motor) arranged on the seat or backrest of the chair 5201 according to the size and amplitude of the generated audio signal, and gives the player vibrations that change according to the audio from the pachinko machine 6001a. The so-called "Bodysonic" technologies can be introduced into such a configuration of the present application.

In the example shown in FIG. 209, the gaming device 7301b is attached to (or placed close to) the pachinko machine 6001a, but the gaming device 7301b can also be attached to or incorporated into the backrest of the chair 5201, receive infrared rays emitted from the sound output LED of the pachinko machine 6001a, and connect the infrared reception control unit of the gaming device 7301b to the vibration device of the chair 5201 to vibrate the chair 5201 in accordance with the sound. In this case, there is no need to provide the infrared reception unit 5202 or the infrared reception control unit on the chair 5201. In addition, the audio cable of the wired audio device 8001 is inserted into the sound output terminal of the gaming device 7301b attached to the chair 5201, so that the view of the player's hands and the area around the game board of the pachinko machine 6001a can be clear.

The vibration device can also be configured to be incorporated into the chair cover or cushion rather than into the body of the chair 5201.

So far, we have described the gaming system PS260 relating to variant example 6 with reference to FIG. 209, but this configuration is merely an example, and the functions of the present application can be realized by various other configurations.

(Other Modifications)
In this embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine is equipped with an audio output LED that emits infrared rays corresponding to audio signals, and the light is received by the gaming device or card unit, but the infrared rays emitted from the pachinko machine can also be directly received by so-called infrared wireless headphones. In this case, the audio output LED can be provided to limit the irradiation angle so that the light emitted from the audio output LED is not widely irradiated. In addition, it is also possible to control the reach of the infrared rays irradiated by the audio output LED so that the infrared rays reach the infrared wireless headphones or their dedicated receivers appropriately (so that the infrared rays do not reach the headphones of players at other seats).

The configuration of gaming device 7001 or gaming device 7201 can also be incorporated inside the pachinko machine.

Furthermore, the gaming device 7001 etc. can capture the light-emitting parts of the pachinko machine (for example, the light-emitting parts corresponding to the group of LEDs for effects 6046 shown in FIG. 192) with an imaging device such as a CCD camera, determine the effect pattern and the status of the pachinko machine from the light emission pattern, and output sound related to the effects etc. to the wired audio device 8001 or the wireless audio device 8002 depending on the determination result.

With this configuration, even for existing pachinko machines that do not have sound output LEDs, the gaming device of the present application can be used to listen to the sound of the gaming machine through headphones or earphones.

In addition, after taking certain measures to prevent unauthorized signals from being input to the pachinko machine, an audio output terminal can be placed on the pachinko machine and the audio cable of the wired audio device 8001 can be connected to it.

Up to this point, the gaming system according to the 15th embodiment and its modified examples have been described with reference to Figures 190 to 209, but the configuration of each device is merely an example, and the technical idea of the present application can be realized by various other configurations. In addition, it is possible to construct a new gaming system by appropriately combining each device (including modified examples) according to the 15th embodiment that has been described up to this point. Furthermore, the gaming system according to the 15th embodiment and its modified examples can be appropriately applied to the above-mentioned first to fourteenth embodiments.

The following describes the configuration of the gaming machine according to the 15th embodiment described above and the effects of that configuration.

<Appendix A-1>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a gaming ball passes through a passing area provided in a gaming area in which the launched gaming ball can roll, control is executed to variably display a pattern as identification information on the display area of the image display device, and control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed pattern, and when the derively displayed pattern forms a predetermined combination (a specific display form), a transition to a jackpot gaming state which is advantageous to the player is provided.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to perform various effects is known, and in this gaming machine, the volume of the sound output during the effects (effect volume) can be adjusted, for example, in seven stages (for example, JP 2021-178254 A).

In recent years, gaming establishments have been increasingly moving toward self-regulation to reduce the volume of sounds output from gaming machines as much as possible so that players can play in a comfortable environment. If the volume of the sound effects on gaming machines like those mentioned above could be set low, players would be able to play in a relatively quiet environment.

However, if the volume of the gaming machine is turned down, the sense of realism and impact will be lost, and it will be impossible to fully enjoy each performance. Furthermore, if an adjacent gaming machine is outputting a loud sound, players will have no choice but to turn up the volume of their own gaming machine, and as a result, it will be difficult for the entire gaming facility to create a comfortable environment where players can play at a moderate volume.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming system that can provide sounds related to the effects of gaming machines to players at an appropriate volume without emitting them to the outside (or at an extremely low volume).

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(A-1-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A control means for performing various controls related to the game (for example, a sound/LED control circuit 6305 of a sub-control circuit 6300 of the pachinko machine 6001 that outputs sound effects and error/warning sounds);
a sound output means (e.g., a speaker 6032 of the pachinko machine 6001) capable of outputting sound corresponding to sound information (e.g., an analog signal from the AMP 6312 including sound related to the performance controlled by the sub-control circuit 6300) according to the control by the control means;
A light-emitting means (e.g., a sound output LED 6045 of the pachinko machine 6001) capable of emitting light corresponding to sound information (e.g., an analog signal from the infrared transmission control unit 6314 including sound related to the performance controlled by the sub-control circuit 6300) in accordance with the control by the control means toward the outside;
a light receiving means (e.g., an infrared light receiving unit 7011 of the gaming device 7001) for receiving light emitted by the light emitting means;
a sound information generating means (e.g., an infrared receiving control unit 7002 of the gaming device 7001) that generates sound information (e.g., a digital signal including sound related to the performance controlled by the sub-control circuit 6300) from the light received by the light receiving means;
a sound output control means (e.g., a headphone amplifier 7003 or a wireless output control unit 7007 of the gaming device 7001) for controlling a connected audio device (e.g., headphones or earphones) to output a sound corresponding to the sound information generated by the sound information generating means;
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system PS200) comprising:

According to this configuration of the present invention, the device is provided with an audio output means (e.g., a speaker) that outputs audio corresponding to audio information related to the game, and the audio information related to the game is emitted to the outside as light, and audio corresponding to the audio information based on that light is output to an audio device (e.g., headphones or earphones), allowing the player to hear the audio related to the game through at least two different routes.

(A-1-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
When an input means capable of designating an audio output method is used to designate an audio output method so that audio can be output to the audio device, the volume of the audio output by the audio output means is reduced.

According to the configuration of the present invention, the player can specify the output method of the sound related to the game, for example, whether to listen to it through a speaker or through headphones or earphones. When the sound output method is specified as listening to it through headphones or earphones, the sound from other gaming machines can be significantly reduced, and the sound of the effects related to the player's own gaming machine can be reliably heard at an appropriate volume. In addition, by specifying this method, the volume of the sound output means (for example, a speaker) is kept low, and if an increase in players specifies this method, the noise in the gaming facility will be reduced as a result. In addition, as described above, by reducing the noise in the gaming facility, even players who do not use headphones or earphones can easily hear emergency warnings and evacuation guidance announced in the gaming facility. Furthermore, when the volume of the gaming machine is kept low, the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced, and this type of usage is promoted, which ultimately results in effective power saving in the gaming facility as a whole.

(A-1-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The audio information generating means is capable of acquiring additional audio information (e.g., audio of announcements within the gaming facility) from an external means (e.g., a hall computer 6186) different from the control means,
The audio device is configured to be able to output audio in response to either audio information corresponding to the light received by the light receiving means or audio information corresponding to the additional audio information.

With this configuration of the present invention, if a player can reliably hear audio through headphones or earphones, emergency alerts and evacuation guidance in the event of an emergency such as a fire can be output to the headphones or earphones, making it possible to convey this information to the player in clear sound.

(A-1-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A control means for performing various controls related to games;
a voice output means capable of outputting a voice corresponding to voice information according to the control of the control means;
a light emitting means capable of emitting light corresponding to audio information in response to control by the control means toward the outside,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko machine 6001) characterized in that sound corresponding to the sound information generated from the light can be output by an external audio device.

According to this configuration of the present invention, the device is provided with an audio output means (e.g., a speaker) that outputs audio corresponding to audio information related to the game, and the audio information related to the game is emitted to the outside as light, so that the audio corresponding to the audio information generated from the light can be output by an external audio device (e.g., headphones or earphones), allowing the player to hear the audio related to the game by at least two different routes.

(A-1-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A light receiving means for receiving light emitted by an external light emitting means (e.g., an LED 6045 for audio output of a pachinko machine 6001);
a sound information generating means for generating sound information from the light received by the light receiving means;
a sound output control means for controlling a connected audio device to output a sound corresponding to the sound information generated by the sound information generating means;
A gaming device (e.g., gaming device 7001) comprising:

According to this configuration of the present invention, sound corresponding to audio information generated from external light can be output from a connected audio device (e.g., headphones or earphones), and the player can hear the sound corresponding to the audio information from an external device equipped with a light-emitting means (e.g., a pachinko machine 6001) via an optical signal.

According to the invention of the fifteenth embodiment described above, sounds and other sounds related to the effects of the gaming machine can be provided to the player at an appropriate volume without being emitted to the outside (or at an extremely low volume).

In addition, according to the invention, the sound output from the gaming machine is provided to the player through headphones or earphones, so the volume of the gaming machine is kept low, and by promoting this type of usage, noise levels within the gaming facility are reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, an environment is created in which players can reliably hear audio through headphones or earphones, and emergency alerts and evacuation guidance in the event of an emergency such as a fire can be output to the headphones or earphones, making it possible to convey this information to players in clear sound. Also, as described above, by reducing noise in the gaming establishment, even players who are not using headphones or earphones can more easily hear emergency alerts and evacuation guidance announced within the gaming establishment.

In addition, according to the invention, the sound output from the gaming machine is provided to the player through headphones or earphones, so the volume of the gaming machine is kept low, which reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. By promoting this type of usage, effective energy conservation is ultimately achieved throughout the gaming facility.

<16th embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the gaming system PS300 according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 210 to 223.

As shown in FIG. 210, the gaming system PS300 of the present application is configured to include a hall computer 9100 installed in the gaming facility, and a member management server 9700 of a global member management system. Note that the gaming system PS300 basically includes hall computers 9100 related to multiple gaming facilities.

In addition, the hall computer 9100 has a hall DB 9150 for storing information about hall members, and the member management server 9700 has a member management DB 9750 for storing information about global members, etc.

Furthermore, each gaming establishment is equipped with gaming machines 9010 connected to a hall computer 9100, a sandwich device 9020, an island end counting device 9400, a POS terminal 9500, and a hall terminal 9600.

In the gaming system PS300 of the present application, when a user (individual) registers as a member, the global member ID (or storage medium identifier) stored in the smartphone 9900 or member card 9920 that the user can own is stored in the hall DB 9150 or member management DB 9750, where it is associated with information about the user, etc. In this embodiment, when the term "member card" or "member card 9920" is used, it refers to a member card that can be used at multiple gaming establishments and is managed by the global member management system, and is different from a member card issued independently by each gaming establishment.

In this embodiment, users of the gaming system PS300 are referred to as users (or individuals). In other words, the concept of a user (individual) includes those who have not yet played games on the gaming machines 9010 at a gaming establishment and therefore cannot be called players, and those who have only completed membership registration without visiting a gaming establishment.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the global member ID stored in the smartphone 9900, the member card 9920, etc. can be used at multiple gaming facilities, regardless of whether the multiple gaming facilities belong to the same chain. The global member ID can be commonly used between multiple gaming facilities that are in different chains.

When a user completes the membership registration procedure, a new global membership ID is stored in the member management DB 9750 of the member management server 9700, and the user can use this global membership ID to play as a member at multiple gaming facilities. Once the user completes the membership registration procedure once at one gaming facility, the user can complete the membership registration procedure (second and subsequent membership registration procedures) at other gaming facilities extremely easily.

In addition, users can also complete the membership registration procedure without going through the procedures at the gaming establishment (i.e., without actually going to the gaming establishment), in which case the user can complete the membership registration procedure at the gaming establishment (first and subsequent membership registration procedures) extremely easily.

When a user performs the member registration procedure without going through the procedures at an amusement facility, it means, for example, that the user accesses the global member management system using a smartphone 9900 or a PC (personal computer) at home and performs the member registration procedure in advance, or that the user accesses the global member management system using a smartphone 9900 or a PC at home via the amusement facility's hall computer 9100 or other related computers (web servers, etc.) and performs the member registration procedure in advance. The member management server 9700 and hall computer 9100 are connected via a network 9050 including, for example, the Internet, as shown in FIG. 210.

The hall computer 9100 of each gaming facility stores personal information such as the names and addresses of registered users (hall members), and accumulates and manages gaming information of users who play games using gaming machines 9010 at the gaming facility. For example, it manages gaming media acquired by users as saved balls or saved medals (or owned balls or medals), and manages operating information for each gaming machine 9010. Furthermore, the hall computer 9100 controls devices such as the POS terminal 9500 so that players can exchange the gaming media they have acquired for the prizes they desire, depending on the value of the gaming media.

As described above, the hall computer 9100 is equipped with a hall DB 9150, which stores tables containing various data necessary for the management and operation of the gaming facility.

The gaming machine 9010 is, for example, a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, and a user acquires gaming media (pachinko balls or medals) by playing using these. In this specification, for convenience, either type of gaming machine may be described, and in that case, the gaming media corresponding to the gaming machine will be described, but even in such a case, the present invention is not limited to either type of gaming machine. In addition, the gaming machine 9010 may have a configuration similar to the first pachinko machine, the second pachinko machine, the third pachinko machine of the first embodiment, and the pachinko machines according to other embodiments. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, it may be a pachislot machine, for example, it may be a pachislot machine mainly described in the description of the third embodiment to the fifteenth embodiment. It can also be an enclosed gaming machine as described in the second embodiment (i.e., a gaming machine in which the main control circuit itself electromagnetically manages the gaming media held by the player, and allows games to be played by circulating enclosed gaming balls, or games to be played without medals).

The gaming machine 9010 is also connected to the hall computer 9100, and as described above, transmits information regarding the game status and the number of gaming media to the hall computer 9100. The sandwiched device 9020 is also connected to the hall computer 9100, and in response to user operations, lends gaming media via the smartphone 9900 or membership card 9920, controls the balls/medals held and saved balls/medals, and controls counting.

In this embodiment, one gaming machine 9010 is associated with one sandwiched device 9020, and each is connected to the hall computer 9100, but it can also be configured so that information sent from the gaming machine 9010 to the hall computer 9100 is sent via the sandwiched device 9020, for example.

The island-end counting device 9400 is a device that counts the number of balls (medals) won by a user, and is placed at the end of an "island" where multiple gaming machines 9010 are arranged together. In addition to this type of island-end counting device 9400, counting devices can be placed in various locations within the gaming establishment as sandwich devices with counting functions for each machine or other counting devices. In this embodiment, the counting devices are incorporated into each sandwich device 9020 and are placed as island-end counting devices 9400.

The POS terminal 9500 is installed at a counter or the like of an amusement facility, and the staff of the amusement facility operates this POS terminal 9500 to respond to users' prize exchanges, etc. For example, the staff of the amusement facility may receive a receipt issued by the above-mentioned island end counting device 9400 from the user and have this read into the POS terminal 9500 (or read out the game medium count value, number of balls held/number of medals held, number of balls saved/number of medals saved sent from the sandwiched device 9020 using a membership card or the like presented by the user), and provide the user with a prize of the corresponding value.

In this way, at the amusement store, the POS terminal 9500 functions to exchange the prizes for in-store prizes (general prizes) and special prizes displayed in the in-store prize display corner of the amusement store.

The hall terminal 9600 is placed in the amusement facility and allows users of the amusement facility to perform certain operations.

In addition, in this embodiment, a smartphone 9900 that can be owned by a user is shown as a device for performing the member registration procedure or a storage medium for storing a member ID, but other mobile terminals such as a mobile phone, PDA, feature phone, tablet terminal, or mobile PC may also be used. Furthermore, an IC card such as a member card 9920 is shown as a storage medium for storing a member ID, but this may also be various types of storage media, including magnetic cards, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned smartphone 9900 and member card 9920 are equipped with, for example, a contactless IC chip based on the near field communication standard (NFC), and the sandwiched device 9020 and POS terminal 9500 can read information stored in the smartphone 9900 and member card 9920 (including, for example, the unique ID of the contactless IC card) using a contactless IC card reader or the like.

Note that the configuration of the gaming system PS300 shown in FIG. 210 is merely an example, and similar systems can be constructed with various other configurations. For example, the hall computer 9100 and the member management server 9700 can be divided into multiple computers according to their functions, etc. Furthermore, the hall computer 9100 and the member management server 9700 can each be configured to cooperate with other computers to transmit or receive specified information.

In addition, the multiple gaming establishments shown in FIG. 210 do not have to be affiliated establishments, as described above, and can be configured as a collection of gaming establishments that are not necessarily operated by the same entity, and are not necessarily operated by the same entity.

Next, with reference to Fig. 211 and Fig. 212, the gaming machine 9010 and the sandwiched device 9020 used in the gaming system PS300 according to this embodiment will be described. Fig. 211 is a front view showing the gaming machine 9010 equipped with the sandwiched device 9020. Fig. 212 is a perspective view showing the sandwiched device 9020. Also, in Fig. 211, the gaming machine 9010a is shown as a pachislot machine, and the gaming machine 9010b is shown as a pachinko machine.

As shown in FIG. 211, a sandwiched device 9020a is provided to the right of the gaming machine 9010a, and a sandwiched device 9020b is provided to the right of the gaming machine 9010b. Each sandwiched device 9020 (9020a, 9020b) is installed corresponding to the adjacent gaming machine 9010 (9010a, 9010b). Each gaming machine 9010 and sandwiched device 9020 are also communicatively connected to a hall computer 9100, which manages the system of the entire gaming facility and manages sales and playing status.

In the following, the gaming machine 9010a and the sandwiched device 9020a will be described, and the gaming machine 9010b and the sandwiched device 9020b will not be described. As shown in Figs. 211 and 212, the front part 9021 of the sandwiched device 9020a is provided with an LED (light-emitting diode) part 9031, a card insertion slot 9032, a bill insertion slot 9033 into which bills can be inserted, an operation unit 9034 consisting of a touch panel LCD (liquid crystal display), a camera 9035, a non-contact IC card reader/writer 9036, a medal (game medium) payout tray 9037, a speaker cover 9038, a medal (game medium) counting slot 9039, and the like.

The card insertion slot 9032 is an insertion slot that can accept, for example, an information card issued by a card issuing machine (not shown) at an amusement arcade, or an information card that is newly issued and ejected from the card insertion slot 9032 (after inserting a bill and playing a game). The LED section 9031 is composed of a full-color LED 9031A and an infrared LED (infrared light-emitting diode) 9031B.

When a user inserts a bill of a predetermined amount into the bill insertion slot 9033, the user can receive a loan of medals as a gaming medium required for playing the game based on the predetermined amount. Also, when an information card is inserted into the card insertion slot 9032, if there is a balance on the information card, the user can receive a loan of medals as a gaming medium required for playing the game based on the balance. Furthermore, the user can hold the smartphone 9900 that functions as a membership card or the membership card 9920 that is a non-contact IC card over the non-contact IC card reader/writer 9036 to read the balance data stored in the hall DB 9150, and can receive a loan of medals required for playing the game based on the balance data. In this embodiment, the storage medium such as the smartphone 9900 or the membership card 9920 does not store the balance data, the number of medals held, or the number of medals saved, but these data may be stored in the storage medium.

When an information card or banknote is inserted, or a smartphone 9900 or a membership card 9920 is presented, the sandwiched device 9020a counts the number of medals according to the value of the inserted value medium using a payout hopper installed inside, and pays out the number of medals from a medal payout tray 9037.

When the sandwiched device 9020a determines the number of available medals (the number of medals held or saved) from an information card, smartphone 9900, membership card 9920, etc., it counts the number of medals according to the number of medals in accordance with the user's operation using a payout hopper provided inside and pays out a number of medals from a medal payout tray 9037. The user can play on the gaming machine 9010 by inserting the medals paid out from the medal payout tray 9037 into the medal insertion port 9011 of the gaming machine 9010a.

Here, the storage media that function as a membership card and are read by the contactless IC card reader/writer 9023 include the above-mentioned smartphone 9900 and membership card 9920, as well as other portable terminal devices such as mobile phones, PDAs, feature phones, tablet terminals, and mobile PCs that have built-in contactless IC chips.

In addition, in the gaming machine 9010a, medals are paid out to a medal payout tray 9012 according to the results of the game. The user can scoop up the medals from the medal payout tray 9012 and insert them into the medal counting slot 9039 of the sandwiched device 9020a, causing the sandwiched device 9020a to count the medals. The sandwiched device 9020a counts the medals inserted through the medal counting slot 9039 using a counting hopper provided inside. In this way, the sandwiched device 9020a is attached to the gaming machine 9010a and has the function of counting the medals paid out from the gaming machine 9010a according to the results of the game, and is therefore also called a per-machine counting device.

In the case of the gaming machine 9010b (pachinko machine), the pachinko balls are introduced into a counting slot in the sandwiched device 9020b. For example, when a user performs a predetermined operation to drop the pachinko balls paid out onto the upper tray as a result of playing the game into the lower tray, the pachinko balls fall into a guide tray attached below the lower tray. The guide tray guides the pachinko balls that have fallen from the lower tray into a counting slot provided in the sandwiched device 9020b. The pachinko balls introduced into the counting slot are counted by a counting unit provided inside the sandwiched device 9020b.

The counting result (number of medals) is recorded or added as the number of medals held on the information card inserted through the card insertion slot 9032. Also, when the balance data, number of medals held, and number of saved medals on the smartphone 9900 or member card 9920 are read by the non-contact IC card reader/writer 9036 and a game is being played, the number of medals held is added to the smartphone 9900 or member card 9920. In this embodiment, the number of medals held is stored in the hall DB 9150 of the gaming facility in association with a storage medium identifier (or global member ID) that can uniquely identify the smartphone 9900 or member card 9920, and the current number of medals is added to that number.

The medals counted in the counting hopper are discharged from a discharge outlet provided on the bottom surface of the sandwiched device 9020a onto a transport conveyor and collected. Note that in places where a transport conveyor is not provided, a storage box for storing medals may be installed below the sandwiched device 9020a, and the medals may be discharged into this storage box.

In the case of the gaming machine 10b (pachinko machine), the pachinko balls counted in the counting section are discharged from an outlet provided on the back of the sandwiched device 20b and collected. Apart from the counting path for the pachinko balls inserted from the counting inlet, a fractional supply section is provided on the back of the sandwiched device 20b to receive fractional pachinko balls from the outside. This supply section keeps a constant amount of fractional pachinko balls stored, and they are paid out from the fractional payout outlet to the guide tray as needed.

Next, the operation unit 9034 of the sandwiched device 9020a will be described with reference to FIG. 213. The operation unit 9034 includes a display 9034a and touch panel operation buttons 9034b. The operation buttons 9034b are displayed as images imitating various buttons, and accept user operations according to the images. Specifically, the operation buttons 9034b are displayed as images imitating operation buttons 9034b corresponding to various processes such as "return", "loan", "start counting", "pay out balls held", "stop counting", "save balls", "service", and "pay out saved balls". The user can execute the desired process by touching the operation button 9034b corresponding to the process.

For example, the "Lend" operation button 9034b is operated when inserting an information card into the card insertion slot 9032, holding the smartphone 9900 or member card 9920 over the non-contact IC card reader/writer 9036, or inserting cash into the bill insertion slot 9033, and then wishing to lend medals from the balance, medals held, and medals saved that have been determined as a result. The "Start counting" operation button 9034b is operated when inserting medals into the medal counting slot 9039 and counting them. The "Stop counting" operation button 9034b is operated to stop counting medals after counting has started. The "Return" operation button 9034b is operated to return the inserted information card. At this time, the balance data, number of medals held, and (if it is a member card) number of medals saved are written into the information card. When a loan is made using a smartphone 9900 or a membership card 9920, the balance data, number of medals held, and number of medals saved are stored in the arcade's hall DB 9150 in association with the storage medium identifier (or global membership ID) related to these storage media, as described above.

The user can receive a loan of medals as a gaming medium required for playing the game by inserting an information card or a prescribed amount of bills into the card insertion slot 9032 or bill insertion slot 9033. The user can also receive a loan of medals required for playing the game by holding a membership card 9920 or a smartphone 9900 over a non-contact IC card reader/writer 9036.

Next, the configuration of the sandwiched device 9020a will be described with reference to FIG. 214. FIG. 214 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sandwiched device 9020a. A main CPU (central processing unit) 9040 reads out a control program stored in a ROM (read only memory) 9041 and executes processes such as medal lending. Various data related to the processes are stored in a RAM (random access memory) 9042.

The main CPU 9040 stores the amount data received from the hall DB 9150 as balance data in the RAM 9042 based on the amount data read from the information card via the information card reader/writer 9022, or the storage medium identifier read from the smartphone 9900 or the member card 9920 via the non-contact IC card reader/writer 9023. If the amount specified by the user is smaller than the balance data based on this balance data and the operation result output from the operation unit 9034, the main CPU 9040 counts and pays out medals of the specified amount in the payout hopper 9045, and updates the balance data by subtracting the amount of the paid out medals from the balance data. Note that the corresponding number of medals can be paid out from the held medals and saved medals grasped based on the information card, smartphone 9900, and member card 9920. The main CPU 9040 can drive the payout hopper 9045 by controlling the drive circuit 9043.

The operation unit 9034 also displays a button for returning the information card, and when the user operates this operation button, the main CPU 9040 returns the information card inserted into the information card reader/writer 9022 from the card insertion slot 9032 (corresponding to the card insertion slot 9032 shown in FIG. 212).

The main CPU 9040 also stores the bill identification results output from the bill validator (bill validator) 9024 in the RAM 9042 as balance data. If the amount specified by the user is smaller than the balance data based on this balance data and the operation results output from the operation unit 9034, the main CPU 9040 counts and pays out medals of the specified amount in the payout hopper 9045, and updates the balance data by subtracting the amount of medals paid out from the balance data. The main CPU 9040 can drive the payout hopper 9045 by controlling the drive circuit 9043.

The main CPU 9040 also uses the infrared LED 9031B of the LED unit 9031 as a monitoring light source, reflects infrared light from the infrared LED 9031B off the user, and captures it with the camera 9035. The main CPU 9040 stores the image captured by the camera 9035 in the RAM 9042, and detects the presence or change of users based on this image. This detection process is performed at all times. If the user's status changes to a non-detection (absent) state and the information card inserted from the card insertion slot 9032 remains inserted, or if there is a balance in the amount data of the bill inserted from the bill insertion slot 9033 (corresponding to the bill insertion slot 9033 shown in FIG. 212), the main CPU 9040 can alert the user who is about to leave the seat by issuing a warning sound or warning voice via the speaker 9048. The warning voice may be something like "You have left your card."

The main CPU 9040 counts the number of medals according to the amount data corresponding to the storage medium identifier read from the smartphone 9900 or the membership card 9920 via the non-contact IC card reader/writer 9023 using the payout hopper 9045, pays them out from the medal payout tray 9037 (corresponding to the medal payout tray 9037 shown in FIG. 212), and rewrites the balance data on the membership card 9920 or the smartphone 9900.

The main CPU 9040 also communicates with the hall computer 9100 via the interface 9047, and periodically transmits to the hall computer 9100 the number of pachinko balls and medals paid out by the information card, smartphone 9900, or member card 9920, as well as the number of pachinko balls and medals stored in association with the information card, smartphone 9900, or member card 9920.

The main CPU 9040 also periodically captures a facial image of the user via the camera 9035 and stores it as facial data in the RAM 9042. If the previously stored facial image is compared with the currently stored facial image and it is determined that the image is not the same person, the main CPU 9040 determines that the user has changed and performs processing accordingly.

As described above, the gaming machine 9010 is connected to the hall computer 9100 so as to be able to transmit predetermined information, and the sandwiched device 9020 is connected so as to be able to transmit and receive predetermined information to and from the hall computer 9100. The hall computer 9100 receives accumulated information (information on the number of inserted and paid-out gaming media) related to the number of gaming media, such as information on the insertion and pay-out of pachinko balls and medals, from the gaming machine 9010, and further receives winning information indicating the winning status and operation information related to the operation of the gaming machine. In addition, the hall computer 9100 receives information (information on the number of moved gaming media) related to the movement of pachinko balls and medals between the information card and the non-contact IC card from the sandwiched device 9020, and further receives, in some cases, face image information consisting of a user's face image acquired by the camera 9035 and the results of face image analysis.

Next, the configuration of the hall computer 9100 will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the hall computer 9100.

The hall computer 9100 includes a main CPU 9101, a ROM 9102, a RAM 9103, an external storage device 9104, a display 9105, and an interface 9106.

The main CPU 9101 reads and executes control programs stored in the ROM 9102 and the RAM 9103. For example, the main CPU 9101 manages information about hall members related to the hall member ID corresponding to the global member ID, manages the number of medals and balls saved as gaming media and medals and balls held for each hall member, executes processing to manage the playing status of each hall member, and controls the display 9105. The main CPU 9101 also executes processing for member registration instructed from the smartphone 9900, PC, etc.

The display 9105 displays game data managed by the hall computer 9100, or notifies the occurrence of fraud or abnormalities. This display 9105 is realized, for example, by a liquid crystal display device.

The hall computer 9100 is communicatively connected to the gaming machine 9010, the sandwich device 9020, the island end counting device 9400, and the POS terminal 9500 via the interface 9106. The control program for implementing the present invention is stored, for example, in the external storage device 9104 and loaded into the RAM 9103. The control program can also be provided from another device via the interface 9106, or from another external device via a network including the Internet.

The external storage device 9104 stores the hall DB 9150, which stores information about hall members, saved medals and balls, etc.

Next, the configuration of the member management server 9700 of the global member management system will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the member management server 9700.

The member management server 9700 includes a main CPU 9701, a ROM 9702, a RAM 9703, an external storage device 9704, and an interface 9706.

The main CPU 9701 reads and executes the control programs stored in the ROM 9702 and the RAM 9703. For example, the main CPU 9701 manages the correspondence between the global member ID and the hall member ID, and executes the member registration process instructed from the smartphone 9900, PC, etc.

The member management server 9700 is communicatively connected to the hall computer 9100 via an interface 9706. A control program for implementing the present invention is stored, for example, in an external storage device 9704 and loaded into the RAM 9703. The control program can also be provided from another device via the interface 9706, or from another external device via a network including the Internet.

The external storage device 9704 stores a member management DB 9750, which stores information about global members, etc.

Next, the configuration of the smartphone 9900 will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the smartphone 9900. The smartphone 9900 includes a main CPU 9901, a ROM 9902, a RAM 9903, a camera 9904, a wireless communication antenna 9905, a GPS antenna 9906, a display 9907, a microphone 9908, a speaker 9909, a sensor 9910, and a non-contact IC chip 9911.

The main CPU 9901 reads and executes the control programs stored in the ROM 9902. For example, the main CPU 9901 executes applications and a web browser downloaded via an external network, exchanges data with the hall computer 9100 and the member management server 9700 via the network, and executes the various functions of the gaming system PS300 of this embodiment. Note that here, a flash memory, which is a non-volatile readable and writable semiconductor memory, is used as the ROM 9902, and can essentially record and hold data.

The camera 9904 is, for example, a small imaging device built into the smartphone 9900, and the imaging element is composed of a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or the like. Images (video or still images) captured by the camera 9904 in response to operation by the hall member are stored in the RAM 9903 or the like under the control of the main CPU 9901, and are used by the program as necessary.

The main CPU 9901 communicates with a mobile phone base station via the wireless communication antenna 9905, and controls the sending and receiving of call data for making calls with other devices, browsing web pages provided by other terminals via the Internet, and the sending and receiving of data related to SNS communication. The main CPU 9901 also uses the wireless communication antenna 9905 to realize wireless LAN communication with a wireless LAN access point, and sends and receives data via the Internet (the antenna used for wireless LAN communication is basically a different antenna from the antenna used for communication with a mobile phone base station, but here they are collectively referred to as "wireless communication antenna").

The main CPU 9901 also receives signals from multiple GPS (Global Positioning Systems) via the GPS antenna 9906, and detects the position of the smartphone 9900. The position information obtained by such detection processing is stored in the RAM 9903 or the like under the control of the main CPU 9901, and is used by the program as necessary.

The display 9907 is, for example, a touch panel LCD, and displays various screens that allow the user to instruct the smartphone 9900 to execute certain functions and input necessary information.

The microphone 9908 and speaker 9909 input and output audio under the control of the main CPU 9901, and perform audio signal processing under the control of the main CPU 9901 to enable voice calls via mobile phone.

The sensor 9910 is an acceleration sensor, a light sensor, a proximity sensor, etc. For example, an acceleration sensor can detect the tilt and movement of the smartphone 9900.

The smartphone 9900 is also configured to incorporate a contactless IC chip 9911. The data inside the contactless IC chip 9911 is read by a reader such as a contactless IC card reader/writer. For example, a unique ID (IDm) that can identify the contactless IC chip 9911 and data written in the memory area of the contactless IC chip 9911 can be read out contactlessly. Furthermore, data can be written contactlessly to the memory area of the contactless IC chip 9911 as necessary.

We will not go into the details of the configuration of other mobile terminal devices such as mobile phones, PDAs, feature phones, tablet terminals, and mobile PCs, but they basically have the same configuration as the smartphone 9900 described above.

In this specification, detailed description of the configuration of the POS terminal 9500 and the hall terminal 9600 is omitted, but at least, like the sandwiched device 9020 shown in FIG. 214, they are equipped with a main CPU, ROM, RAM, and a contactless IC card reader/writer, and further equipped with a display consisting of a touch panel or the like. In addition, when a storage medium such as a smartphone 9900 or a member card 9920 is held over the contactless IC card reader/writer, it is possible to read (and write) information stored in the storage medium (for example, the global member ID stored in the global member ID storage area 9951, the storage medium identifier of the smartphone 9900 (for example, application ID, device ID, serial number, MAC address, telephone number, etc.), and the storage medium identifier of the member card 9920 (for example, IDm)).

[Functions of each device]
Next, a functional overview of the sandwiched device 9020 will be described with reference to Fig. 218. Fig. 218 is a functional block diagram of the sandwiched device 9020.

The sandwiched device 9020 includes a storage medium control unit 9051, a loan control unit 9052, a counting management unit 9053, a ball holding management unit 9054, a ball storage management unit 9055, a screen input/output control unit 9056, and a network I/F unit 9057. Note that in the example of FIG. 218, the main functional units in the sandwiched device 9020 and the functional units related to the present invention are shown, and notation and explanations of other functional units are omitted as appropriate.

When an information card is inserted into the card insertion port 9032, the storage medium control unit 9051 reads the information stored in the information card (balance data, number of balls/medals held, number of saved balls/medals, etc.), and when an identifier is read from the smartphone 9900 or the membership card 9920 by the non-contact IC card reader/writer 9023, the storage medium control unit 9051 obtains information corresponding to the identifier (balance data, number of balls/medals held, number of saved balls/medals, etc.) and controls the storage in the RAM 9042. Also, when the user operates the "return" operation button 9034b of the operation unit 9034, if an information card is inserted into the card insertion port 9032, the information card inserted into the card insertion port 9032 is ejected, and the balance data, etc. stored in the RAM 9042 at this time is stored (updated) in the information card. If an information card is not inserted, a new information card is issued, and the balance data, etc. stored in the RAM 9042 is stored (updated) in the information card. If the balance data and medal count on the information card are both 0 and it is a visitor card (non-member card), the information card is imported into the sandwiched device 9020.

When a user operates the "rent" operation button 9034b on the operation unit 9034, the lending control unit 9052 controls the information card to pay out medals to be used in the game from the balance data, etc. stored in the RAM 9042, and then subtracts the corresponding balance data, etc. in the RAM 9042. When a user operates the "rent" operation button 9034b on the operation unit 9034, the lending control unit 9052 controls the information card to pay out medals to be used in the game from the balance data, etc. stored in the RAM 9042, and then subtracts the corresponding balance data, etc. stored ... smartphone 9900 or member card 9920 from the balance data, etc. stored in the hall DB 9150 of the gaming facility.

When the user operates the "start counting" operation button 9034b of the operation unit 9034, the counting management unit 9053 starts counting the medals, etc. inserted into the medal counting slot 9039. When the user operates the "stop counting" operation button 9034b of the operation unit 9034, the counting management unit 9053 stops counting the medals, etc., and for the information card, the counting result is reflected in the number of held balls/medals in the RAM 9042. At this time, in the case of the smartphone 9900 or member card 9920, the information on the number of held balls/medals stored in the hall DB 9150 of the amusement facility is updated.

When a user operates the "pay out held balls" operation button 9034b of the operation unit 9034, the held ball management unit 9054 controls the information card so that a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the medal payout tray 9037 based on the number of held medals in the RAM 9042. The user can play on the gaming machine 9010 with the medals paid out in this way. At this time, in the case of a smartphone 9900 or a membership card 9920, the number of held medals stored in the gaming facility's hall DB 9150 is subtracted according to the number of medals paid out.

When the user operates the "pay out saved balls" operation button 9034b of the operation unit 9034, the saved ball management unit 9055 controls the smartphone 9900 or the member card 9920 to pay out a predetermined number of medals from the medal payout tray 9037 based on the number of saved medals stored in the hall DB 9150 of the gaming establishment. The user can play the gaming machine 9010 with the medals paid out in this way. At this time, the saved medal number stored in the hall DB 9150 of the gaming establishment is subtracted according to the number of paid out medals. When the user operates the "pay out saved balls" operation button 9034b of the operation unit 9034 (in this case, for the smartphone 9900 or the member card 9920), the saved medal number stored in the hall DB 9150 of the gaming establishment is updated based on the counted number of held medals.

When the user performs a touch operation on the operation unit 9034, the screen input/output control unit 9056 transmits a command based on the operation to the main CPU 9040, and the main CPU 9040 controls each functional unit of the sandwiched device 9020 to execute a predetermined process based on the received command. The screen input/output control unit 9056 controls each functional unit to display the processing results on the operation unit 9034 according to the control of the main CPU 9040.

The network I/F (interface) unit 9057 connects to a network and controls data transmission and reception with the other computer. Here, the network may be configured as a network including the Internet or a wireless network (the same applies to the network I/F units of other devices, so further explanation of the network I/F units will be omitted).

Next, referring to FIG. 219, an overview of the functions of the hall computer 9100 will be described. FIG. 219 is a functional block diagram of the hall computer 9100. The hall computer 9100 includes a hall member management unit 9111, a ball storage management unit 9112, a ball holding management unit 9113, a game information management unit 9114, a member registration control unit 9115, an application control unit 9116, a web control unit 9117, an email control unit 9118, and a network I/F unit 9119. The hall computer 9100 has the functions of a conventional hall computer, such as prize exchange processing and inventory management, but the example of FIG. 219 shows the main functional units of the hall computer 9100 and the functional units related to the present invention, and the notation and description of the other functional units are omitted as appropriate.

The hall computer 9100 also stores a hall DB 9150 in the external storage device 9104. The hall DB 9150 includes a hall member information table 9151 that stores information about the hall members of the amusement parlor, a saved ball management table 9152 that manages the number of game media held by hall members when they instruct them to save medals or balls, a ball management table 9153 that manages the medals and balls held by hall members, and a game information management table 9154 that stores the playing status of each game machine.

The hall member management unit 9111 assigns a hall member ID to each new hall member. It also manages information about the hall members of the amusement facility, receives the storage medium identifier of the user's smartphone 9900 or member card 9920 read by the non-contact IC card reader/writer 9023 of the sandwiched device 9020, and determines whether the user playing the game is a hall member.

When a hall member instructs that gaming media acquired by playing on a gaming machine be held as saved balls, the saved ball management unit 9112 updates the held ball management table 9153, and updates the saved ball management table 9152 by moving the number of gaming media stored in the held ball management table 9153 to the saved ball management table 9152 at a specified time, for example, after the closing of business on that day, and manages the number of these gaming media for each hall member and each lending rate.

The ball holding management unit 9113 stores the gaming media acquired by hall members through playing on gaming machines in the ball holding management table 9153. The number of these gaming media is managed for each hall member and for each lending rate.

The gaming information management unit 9114 stores the gaming status of each gaming machine in a gaming information management table 9154 based on the number of inserted and paid-out gaming media information received from the gaming machine 9010 and the sandwiched device 9020, operation information related to the operation of the gaming machine, and the like. If the user is a hall member, gaming information is stored for each hall member ID. If the user is not a hall member (a visitor), gaming information can be stored in association with facial data of the user captured by the camera 9035 of the sandwiched device 9020 or the surveillance camera of the gaming facility, or the identifier (e.g., card number) of the information card inserted into the information card reader/writer 9022.

When a user performs the membership registration procedure from a smartphone 9900 owned by the user, a PC at home, a hall terminal 9600 at an amusement parlor, a POS terminal 9500, etc., the member registration control unit 9115 transmits the assigned hall member ID to the member management server 9700 of the global member management system, and also controls the transmission of information about the user provided during the initial member registration procedure to the member management server 9700 or the reception of the information from the member management server 9700, depending on the method of member registration. The information about the user registered here includes personal information such as name and address, and is stored in the hall member information table 9151 of the amusement parlor.

In addition, when the member registration control unit 9115 receives information about a user that is entered by the amusement facility staff operating the amusement facility's hall terminal 9600, POS terminal 9500, etc. based on the user's member registration application documents, it controls the transmission of the assigned hall member ID to the member management server 9700 of the global member management system.

When a member registration procedure is performed from an application executed on a smartphone 9900 or the like owned by a user, the application control unit 9116 controls data exchange with the smartphone 9900 or the like, and ultimately receives a member registration request and information about the user from the smartphone 9900 or the like, and transmits this data to the above-mentioned member registration control unit 9115 to register the user as a member.

When a user performs the membership registration procedure from a smartphone 9900 owned by the user, a PC at home, a hall terminal 9600 at the amusement arcade, a POS terminal 9500, etc., via a website operated by the amusement arcade, the WEB control unit 9117 controls data exchange with the above terminals, and ultimately receives a membership registration request and information about the user from the terminal, and transmits this data to the above-mentioned membership registration control unit 9115 to register the user as a member. The WEB control unit 9117 is a functional unit that functions as a so-called WEB server.

When a user performs the membership registration procedure by sending an email to the gaming establishment's email address from the user's smartphone 9900, home PC, etc., the email control unit 9118 receives email data (including information about the user, etc.) from the above terminal and sends the data to the above-mentioned membership registration control unit 9115 to register the user as a member. The email control unit 9118 is a functional unit that functions as a so-called email server.

The hall computer 9100 described with reference to FIG. 219 is merely one example, and each gaming establishment can have a different type of hall computer 9100 that has substantially the above-mentioned functions. The hall computer 9100 can also be placed anywhere other than the gaming establishment, and specific functional units can also be implemented in a different computer. For example, among the functional units of the hall computer 9100 shown in FIG. 219, the application control unit 9116, the web control unit 9117, and the mail control unit 9118 can be separated to configure an application server, a web server, and a mail server, respectively, and connected to a hall computer having the remaining functions via a network and placed in a different location.

Next, a functional overview of the member management server 9700 will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a functional block diagram of the member management server 9700. The member management server 9700 includes a global member management unit 9711, a member registration control unit 9712, an application control unit 9713, a web control unit 9714, an email control unit 9715, and a network I/F unit 9716.

In addition, the member management server 9700 stores a member management DB 9750 in the external storage device 9704, and the member management DB 9750 includes a global member information table 9751 that stores information about global members, and an ID correspondence table 9752 that manages the correspondence between global member IDs and hall member IDs.

In response to an inquiry from the hall computer 9100, the global member management unit 9711 replies with the hall member ID of the gaming facility that corresponds to the global member ID. Such a hall member ID that corresponds to the global member ID is part of the "information about the user." At this time, if necessary, information about the user provided during the membership registration procedure is also obtained from the global member information table 9751 and sent to the hall computer 9100.

When a user performs a membership registration procedure from a smartphone 9900 owned by the user, a PC at home, etc., the membership registration control unit 9712 assigns a global membership ID and stores information about the user provided during the membership registration procedure in a global membership information table 9751 in association with the global membership ID. Also, when the user plays at an amusement facility, in response to an inquiry from the hall computer 9100 of the amusement facility, the membership registration control unit 9712 obtains the hall member ID of the amusement facility corresponding to the received global membership ID from the ID correspondence table 9752 and transmits it to the hall computer 9100.

In response to an inquiry from the hall computer 9100, information about the user corresponding to the received global membership ID is obtained from the global membership information table 9751 and transmitted to the hall computer 9100 together with the hall membership ID of that gaming facility.

When a member registration procedure is performed from an application executed on a smartphone 9900 or the like owned by a user, the application control unit 9713 controls data exchange with the smartphone 9900 or the like, and ultimately receives a member registration request and information about the user from the smartphone 9900 or the like, and transmits this data to the above-mentioned member registration control unit 9712 to register the user as a member.

When a user performs the membership registration procedure from a smartphone 9900 owned by the user, a PC at home, a hall terminal 9600 at the amusement arcade, a POS terminal 9500, etc., via a website operated by the amusement arcade, the WEB control unit 9714 controls data exchange with the above terminals, and ultimately receives a membership registration request and information about the user from the terminal, and transmits this data to the above-mentioned membership registration control unit 9712 to register the user as a member. The WEB control unit 9714 is a functional unit that functions as a so-called WEB server.

When a user performs the membership registration procedure by sending an email to the gaming establishment's email address from the user's smartphone 9900, home PC, etc., the email control unit 9715 receives email data (including information about the user, etc.) from the above terminal and sends the data to the above-mentioned membership registration control unit 9712 to register the user as a member. The email control unit 9715 is a functional unit that functions as a so-called email server.

The member management server 9700 described with reference to FIG. 220 is merely one example, and a member management server 9700 having substantially the above-mentioned functions can be configured with various other configurations. In addition, the member management server 9700 can be configured as an application server, a web server, and a mail server, respectively, by separating, for example, the application control unit 9713, the web control unit 9714, and the mail control unit 9715 from among the functional units of the member management server 9700 shown in FIG. 220, and connected to a member management server having the remaining functions via a network and located in a different location.

Next, a functional overview of the smartphone 9900 will be described with reference to FIG. 221. FIG. 221 is a functional block diagram of the smartphone 9900, and mainly shows the functions related to this embodiment.

The smartphone 9900 includes a member registration control unit 9921 and a server communication unit 9922 as application function units realized by the app (application) according to the present invention. These application function units are realized, for example, by a program downloaded from another server or the like via a network and installed.

The smartphone 9900 also includes a web control unit 9931, an email control unit 9932, a display control unit 9933, and a network I/F unit 9934.

When the user of the smartphone 9900 instructs the member registration procedure (to the hall computer 9100 or the member management server 9700), the member registration control unit 9921 transmits information about the user entered by the user to the computer to which the user is to be registered. If necessary, the member registration control unit 9921 also performs authentication based on the user's identity card. The member registration control unit 9921 also receives a global member ID from the hall computer 9100 or the member management server 9700 as a result of the member registration procedure, and stores this ID in the global member ID memory area 9951 in the memory area of the contactless IC chip 9911 described above.

The same configuration as the global member ID storage area 9951 is also provided in the member card 9920 configured as an IC card, and the global member ID is stored in this area.

When a user of the smartphone 9900 performs a membership registration procedure, the server communication unit 9922 accesses the hall computer 9100 or the member management server 9700 according to the user's selection, etc., and exchanges specified data with that computer.

The app on the smartphone 9900 (membership registration control unit 9921) may automatically decide which gaming parlor's hall computer 9100 or member management server 9700 to register with (determining the registration destination), or the user may select it. For example, the smartphone 9900 may perform the member registration procedure with the hall computer 9100 of the gaming parlor that is closest within a specified range from the current location of the smartphone 9900 based on location information acquired via the GPS antenna 9906, and if there is no gaming parlor within the specified range from the current location, the smartphone 9900 may perform the member registration procedure with the member management server 9700.

The WEB control unit 9931 is realized by a general WEB browsing application, and controls the display of the website of a specified gaming facility or the like in response to user operation, so that predetermined information can be input to the website. Here, when a user of the smartphone 9900 instructs the member registration procedure (to the hall computer 9100 or the member management server 9700), the information about the user input by the user is sent to the registration destination computer via the WEB site. Also, if necessary, a copy of the user's identification card is sent via the WEB site. In this case, the user is usually provided with a member card 9920 that stores a global member ID, but the global member ID may be received from the hall computer 9100 or the member management server 9700 and stored in the global member ID storage area 9951.

The email control unit 9932 is realized by a general email application, and controls the sending of emails to the email address of a specified gaming parlor, etc., in response to user operation. Here, when the user of the smartphone 9900 instructs the member registration procedure (to the hall computer 9100 or member management server 9700), information about the user entered by the user is sent by email to the registration destination computer. Also, if necessary, a copy of the user's identification card is attached to the email and sent. In this case, a member card 9920 storing the global member ID is provided to the user.

The display control unit 9933 controls each function of the application function unit (member registration control unit 9921, server communication unit 9922), WEB control unit 9931, email control unit 9932, and display control unit 9933 to display on the display 9707 of the smartphone 9900 a screen on which the user of the smartphone 9900 inputs specified information, a screen on which specified instructions can be given, and a screen that displays information received from the hall computer 9100 or the member management server 9700.

The functions of the POS terminal 9500 and hall terminal 9600 installed in the gaming establishment are omitted, but in the present invention, at least the user can access a website related to the gaming establishment or global member management system by operation (for example, a function similar to that of the WEB control unit 9931 of the smartphone 9900), and execute the member registration procedure by sending the information about the user input by the user to the registration destination computer via the WEB site. In this case, a member card 9920 storing the global member ID is provided to the user. It also has a function similar to that of the display control unit 9933 of the smartphone 9900, and controls the display of the POS terminal 9500 and hall terminal 9600 to display input/instruction screens sent from the WEB site and screens displaying information received from the hall computer 9100 and member management server 9700.

[Table configuration]
222(A) stores information about the hall members of the gaming establishment. In this example, the information stored includes the hall member ID, storage medium identifier, name, address, date of birth, gender, login password, email address, and telephone number.

Here, the hall member ID is an ID assigned by the gaming establishment separately from the global member ID described above, but it is also possible to use the same ID as the global member ID. The storage medium identifier is an identifier that can uniquely identify the storage medium (such as the smartphone 9900 or the membership card 9920) in which the global member ID is stored. For example, in the case of the smartphone 9900, it is a terminal-specific ID (app ID, device ID, serial number, MAC address, telephone number, etc.), and in the case of the membership card 9920, it is a unique ID (IDm, etc.). The name, address, date of birth, and gender are personal information obtained by the user's input or from the description on the identification card. The login password is a password that is required to be input in order to make available the balance information, the number of balls/medals held, and the number of balls/medals saved that are stored (or linked) in the storage medium at the gaming establishment. The email address and telephone number are obtained from information entered by the user or information indicated during the membership registration procedure.

It is also possible to store the personal number of the identification card, a photo of the person on the identification card (image data in GIF or JPEG format), etc. Identification cards include, for example, My Number cards, driver's licenses, passports, and insurance cards.

The saved ball management table 9152 shown in FIG. 222(B) manages the number of game media held by a user who is a hall member by operating the operation unit 9034 (see FIG. 214) of the sandwiched device 9020 (for example, by touching the operation button 34b corresponding to the "save ball" process) during business hours prior to the current day. In this example, the saved ball management table 9152 stores the hall member ID, and further stores the quantity for each lending rate. In this example, there are four lending rates: pachinko (4 yen lending, 1 yen lending) and slots (20 yen lending, 5 yen lending).

In this example, the stored ball management table 9152 stores the quantity of gaming media for each hall member in each of the areas corresponding to the four lending rates, but stored balls can be managed in various other ways, such as using a different table for each lending rate.

As shown in FIG. 219, the hall computer 9100 has a hall member information table 9151, a ball storage management table 9152, a ball holding management table 9153, and a game information management table 9154. Here, the ball holding management table 9153 and the game information management table 9154 are not shown, but the ball holding management table 9153 manages the number of game media held by a hall member user operating the operation unit 9034 (see FIG. 214) of the sandwiched device 9020 during business hours on the day (for example, touching the operation button 9034b corresponding to the "counting start" process and then touching the operation button 9034b corresponding to the "counting stop" process). In this example, the ball holding management table 9153 stores the hall member ID and further stores the quantity for each lending rate. In this example, there are four lending rates: pachinko (4 yen lending, 1 yen lending) and slots (20 yen lending, 5 yen lending).

The gaming information management table 9154 also stores the gaming history of users who are hall members in association with their hall member ID. For example, gaming information such as the start date and time of play, playing time, gaming machine number, number of in coins and number of out coins (out balls and safe balls) is stored for each hall member.

The global member information table 9751 shown in FIG. 223 (A) stores information about global members of the global member management system. In this example, it stores the global member ID, name, address, date of birth, gender, email address, telephone number, etc. Note that it may also store a storage medium identifier that can identify the smartphone 9900 or member card 9920 of the user corresponding to the global member ID.

In this example, if the initial membership registration procedure is performed at an amusement facility (including not only when the membership registration procedure is performed at the amusement facility, but also when the membership registration procedure is performed via the amusement facility's hall computer 9100), the global member ID is suffixed with the amusement facility ID that identifies the amusement facility, and if the initial membership registration procedure is performed directly with the global member management system without going through the amusement facility, a "G" is suffixed to represent the global member management system.

For example, as shown in FIG. 222 (B), a member with a global member ID of "0101G" does not perform the initial membership registration procedure at the amusement facility, but rather through the global member management system, so the end of the global member ID is appended with "G," which is the amusement facility ID of the global member management system.

After this, the member with global member ID = "0101G" performs the simplified member registration procedure for the second time at amusement facility A, at which time a hall member ID = "0001" is assigned at amusement facility A, and as a result, the global member ID = "0101G" and hall member ID = "0001" are associated and stored, and further, to indicate that this hall member ID belongs to amusement facility A, the hall member ID = "0001" and amusement facility ID = "A" are associated and stored.

On the other hand, a member with a global member ID of "0002A" completes the initial member registration procedure at amusement facility A, and the global member ID is suffixed with "A", which is the amusement facility ID of amusement facility A. After this, the member completes the simplified member registration procedure for the second time at amusement facility B, at which time a hall member ID of "U004" is assigned at amusement facility B, and as a result, the global member ID of "0002A" and the hall member ID of "U004" are stored in association with each other, and further, to indicate that this hall member ID belongs to amusement facility B, the hall member ID of "U004" and the amusement facility ID of "B" are stored in association with each other.

Note that this correspondence between global member IDs and hall member IDs, and the configuration of the ID correspondence table 9752 are merely examples, and the gaming system PS300 of the present invention can be realized using various other methods and table configurations. For example, in the ID correspondence table 9752 shown in FIG. 223(B), the row data for gaming facility ID = "G" can be omitted (because the global member ID ends with G).

[Membership registration procedure pattern]
Next, an overview of the member registration procedure will be described with reference to Figures 224 to 230. In the gaming system PS300 according to the present invention, the initial member registration procedure can be performed either directly via the global member management system without going through the gaming establishment, or via the gaming establishment. In the initial member registration procedure, information such as the user's name and address is registered, and the user's identity and age are verified using an identification card. By performing this initial member registration procedure, the second time the member registration procedure is performed at the gaming establishment, the member registration procedure can be completed in a simple manner.

[First-time membership registration procedure (Pattern 1-1)]
224 shows pattern 1-1 in which the user's smartphone 9900 on which the app is installed performs the membership registration procedure directly to the global membership management system via a network, without going through the arcade's hall computer 9100. In this way, because the membership registration procedure is performed via a network using the smartphone 9900, the user can avoid going to the arcade to perform the membership registration procedure, or wasting unnecessary time waiting for their turn to complete the membership registration procedure or waiting for the arcade's staff to complete the work.

In FIG. 224, first, the user operates the smartphone 9900 on which the app is installed, inputs a phone number, email address, etc. into an input screen displayed on the display 9907 of the smartphone 9900, and then causes information stored in an identification card configured as an IC card to be read, for example, by NFC communication or the like (note that in FIG. 224, user actions such as "input" and "read" are indicated by oval frames, and computer actions are indicated by rectangular frames. The same applies to the following figures). In this example, the identification card is a My Number card, and the name, address, date of birth, and gender information are read from the My Number card. The user also inputs the My Number card password into the input screen.

Next, when the user instructs the smartphone 9900 to register as a member, the app on the smartphone 9900 accesses an authentication server (e.g., a public authentication server that authenticates My Number cards) via a wireless network and performs identity authentication based on information obtained from the My Number card and the entered password.

If the result of the identity authentication is not correct, an error message is displayed on the input screen of the smartphone 9900, and if the result is correct, information about the user is sent to the member management server 9700 via the wireless network, and the user is registered as a global member.

Furthermore, in recent years, there has been a movement to incorporate the contents and functions of My Number cards into smartphones 9900, and to use the smartphones 9900 themselves as My Number cards. If such a configuration were to be realized, there would be no need to read My Number cards via NFC communication or the like.

If the identification card is something other than a My Number card and information about the user such as name and address cannot be obtained as data, the user can input the relevant items into the input screen of the smartphone 9900, and the input data can be used to authenticate the user with a specified authentication server. Also, here, the identification card such as a My Number card is used to authenticate the user and confirm the user's age, but it is also possible to use other methods or to omit these steps.

When the member management server 9700 receives information about the user from the smartphone 9900, it assigns a global member ID (for example, global member ID = "0101G") and associates the received information about the user with this global member ID and stores it in the global member information table 9751 (see FIG. 223 (A)). It also associates this global member ID with the gaming store ID (in this case, for convenience, let it be "G" corresponding to the global member management system) and stores it in the ID correspondence table 9752 (see FIG. 223 (B)).

The member management server 9700 then transmits the assigned global member ID to the smartphone 9900, and the smartphone 9900's app receives the global member ID and stores it in the global member ID storage area 9951. Note that in this example, the member management server 9700 assigns the global member ID, but it is also possible to design the system so that the personal number on the My Number card received from the smartphone 9900 is used as the global member ID.

In addition, in this example, the smartphone 9900 app is configured to store the global member ID received from the member management server 9700 in the global member ID memory area 9951; however, if the member management server 9700 receives a storage medium identifier that can uniquely identify the smartphone 9900 and stores it in the global member information table 9751, the smartphone 9900 can be uniquely identified by the member management server 9700, so there is no need for the smartphone 9900 to store the global member ID in the global member ID memory area 9951; it is also possible to design the smartphone 9900 to use the storage medium identifier as the global member ID (the same applies below to the case where the member registration procedure is performed using the smartphone 9900).

[First-time membership registration procedure (Pattern 1-2)]
225 shows pattern 1-2 in which the user's smartphone 9900 on which the app is installed performs the membership registration procedure directly to the global membership management system via a network, without going through the arcade's hall computer 9100. In this way, because the membership registration procedure is performed via a network using the smartphone 9900, the user can avoid having to go to the arcade to perform the membership registration procedure, or wasting unnecessary time waiting for their turn to complete the membership registration procedure or waiting for the arcade's staff to complete the work.

In FIG. 225, unlike the pattern shown in FIG. 224, an image of a My Number card is captured as identification by an app on the smartphone 9900. The user also inputs their name, address, date of birth, gender, telephone number, email address, etc. into an input screen displayed on the display 9907 of the smartphone 9900. Information about the user and image data of the identification card are then sent to the member management server 9700 via a wireless network, and the user is registered as a global member.

Even if the identity card used is something other than a My Number card, identity authentication can be carried out in the same way. It is also possible to omit identity authentication.

When the member management server 9700 receives information about the user and image data of the identification card from the smartphone 9900, a person in charge of the global member management system verifies the user's identity from the information about the user and the image data of the identification card, and if the identity verification result is abnormal, the member management server 9700 controls the display of an error message on the input screen of the smartphone 9900. Note that in this example, identity verification is basically performed visually by a person in charge of the global member management system, so that such error messages are not displayed in real time.

If the identity verification is successful, the member management server 9700 assigns a global member ID (for example, global member ID = "0101G"), associates the received information about the user with this global member ID, and stores it in the global member information table 9751 (see FIG. 223 (A)). In addition, the member management server 9700 associates this global member ID with the gaming facility ID (in this case, "G") and stores it in the ID correspondence table 9752 (see FIG. 223 (B)).

The member management server 9700 then transmits the assigned global member ID to the smartphone 9900, and the smartphone 9900's app receives the ID and stores it in the global member ID storage area 9951. Note that in this example, the member management server 9700 assigns the global member ID, but it is also possible to design the system so that a personal number is used as the global member ID based on the image data of the My Number card received from the smartphone 9900.

[First-time membership registration procedure (Pattern 1-3)]
226 shows pattern 1-3 in which the member registration procedure is performed directly to the global member management system via a network using the user's smartphone 9900 or a PC (personal computer) at home, without going through the arcade's hall computer 9100. In this way, since the member registration procedure is performed via a network using the smartphone 9900, the user can avoid going to the arcade to perform the member registration procedure, or wasting unnecessary time waiting for their turn to complete the member registration procedure or waiting for the arcade's staff to complete the procedure.

226, unlike the pattern shown in FIG. 225, an image of a My Number card or the like is captured by the smartphone 9900 or a PC as a personal identification card without using an app on the smartphone 9900. The user also inputs his/her name, address, date of birth, sex, telephone number, email address, etc., into an input screen displayed on the display 9907 of the smartphone 9900. Thereafter, information about the user and image data of the personal identification card are sent to the member management server 9700 via a wireless network, and the user is registered as a global member. Here, the information about the user and image data of the personal identification card are sent to the member management server 9700 by accessing a website related to the global member management system by the smartphone 9900 or the like, or by sending to an email address related to the global member management system. In the example of FIG. 226, a copy of the My Number card or the like may be mailed to the global member management system.

Even if the identity card used is something other than a My Number card, identity authentication can be carried out in the same way. It is also possible to omit identity authentication.

When the member management server 9700 receives information about the user and image data (or a copy) of the identification card from the smartphone 9900, a person in charge of the global member management system verifies the user's identity from the information about the user and the image data of the identification card, and if the identity verification result is abnormal, the member management server 9700 controls the display of an error message on the input screen of the smartphone 9900. Note that in this example, identity verification is basically performed visually by the person in charge, so the display of such an error message is not done in real time.

If the identity verification is successful, the member management server 9700 assigns a global member ID (for example, global member ID = "0101G"), associates the received information about the user with this global member ID, and stores it in the global member information table 9751 (see FIG. 223 (A)). In addition, the member management server 9700 associates this global member ID with the gaming facility ID (in this case, "G") and stores it in the ID correspondence table 9752 (see FIG. 223 (B)).

Then, the global member management system issues a member card 9920 that stores the assigned global member ID, and mails the member card 9920 to the user's address. Note that at this point, the created member card may be determined as the member card 9920 to be issued to the user, and the ID stored in the member card 9920 may be set as the global member ID.

In addition, when a user is performing the member registration procedure using the smartphone 9900, the member management server 9700 may transmit the assigned global member ID to the smartphone 9900, and the smartphone 9900 may receive the ID and store it in the global member ID storage area 9951. In addition, when the global member ID is assigned by the member management server 9700, it is also possible to design it so that a personal number is used as the global member ID based on the image data of the My Number card received from the smartphone 9900.

[First-time membership registration procedure (Pattern 1-4)]
227 shows pattern 1-4 in which the user's smartphone 9900 on which the app is installed performs the membership registration procedure with the arcade computer 9100 and the global membership management system via the network. In this method, the membership registration procedure is performed via the arcade computer 9100, but because it is a network-based membership registration procedure, the user can avoid going to the arcade to perform the membership registration procedure, or wasting extra time waiting for their turn to complete the membership registration procedure or waiting for the arcade staff to complete the procedure.

In FIG. 227, first, the user operates the smartphone 9900 on which the app is installed, inputs a phone number, email address, etc. into an input screen displayed on the display 9907 of the smartphone 9900, and then causes information stored in an identification card configured as an IC card to be read, for example, by NFC communication. In this example, the identification card is a My Number card, and the name, address, date of birth, and gender information are read from the My Number card. The user also inputs the My Number card password into the input screen.

Next, when the user instructs the smartphone 9900 to register as a member, the app on the smartphone 9900 accesses an authentication server (e.g., a public authentication server that authenticates My Number cards) via a wireless network and performs identity authentication based on information obtained from the My Number card and the entered password. Note that an image of an identity card such as a My Number card may be captured by the app on the smartphone 9900, and the image data may be checked by a staff member of amusement facility A or a person in charge of the global member management system.

If the result of the identity authentication is not normal, an error message is displayed on the input screen of the smartphone 9900, and if it is normal, information about the user is sent to the hall computer 9100 of amusement facility A via the wireless network. Note that when a staff member of amusement facility A or a person in charge of the global member management system checks the identity card, the result of the identity authentication is not provided in real time, but is provided to the smartphone 9900 after a predetermined time has passed, for example.

When the hall computer 9100 of amusement parlor A receives information about the user from the smartphone 9900, it assigns a hall member ID (for example, hall member ID = "0002") and sends this hall member ID, amusement parlor ID = "A", and the information about the user received from the smartphone 9900 to the member management server 9700, and registers the user as a global member. In addition, the hall computer 9100 of amusement parlor A stores the hall member ID and information about the user in the hall member information table 9151.

In this example, the app on the smartphone 9900 accesses the authentication server to perform identity authentication, but the hall computer 9100, which receives the information stored on the My Number card and the My Number card password from the smartphone 9900, may also access the authentication server to perform identity authentication (see the dotted arrow in Figure 227).

When the member management server 9700 receives information about the user from the hall computer 9100, it assigns a global member ID (for example, global member ID = "0002A") and associates the received information about the user with this global member ID and stores it in the global member information table 9751 (see FIG. 223 (A)). It also associates this global member ID with the hall member ID and the amusement facility ID (in this case, "A") and stores them in the ID correspondence table 9752 (see FIG. 223 (B)). Note that in this example, the initial member registration procedure is performed via the hall computer 9100 of amusement facility A, and the hall member ID is assigned first, so the global member ID is assigned in the form of the hall member ID (of amusement facility A) + amusement facility ID.

The member management server 9700 then transmits the assigned global member ID to the smartphone 9900 (via the hall computer 9100), and the smartphone 9900's app receives the global member ID and stores it in the global member ID memory area 9951. Note that in this example, the member management server 9700 assigns the global member ID, but it is also possible to design the system so that the personal number on the My Number card received from the smartphone 9900 is used.

Here, the user can also set a login password for using the smartphone 9900 at amusement parlor A via the smartphone 9900 app, and this login password is stored in the hall member information table 9151.

[First-time membership registration procedure (Pattern 1-5)]
FIG. 228 shows a pattern 1-5 in which a member registration procedure is performed on a user's smartphone 9900, a PC (personal computer) at home, a POS terminal 9500 at amusement facility A, a hall terminal 9600, etc., to a hall computer 9100 at amusement facility A, and to a global member management system via a network. This member registration procedure is basically assumed to be performed by the user visiting amusement facility A. Although such a member registration procedure requires a visit to amusement facility A, since the member registration procedure (second and subsequent member registration procedures) at other amusement facilities can be easily completed, the user can avoid wasting extra time waiting in line or waiting for the staff at the amusement facility to complete the second member registration procedure.

In FIG. 228, a My Number card or similar is presented as identification to a staff member of amusement facility A, who then performs identity verification and inputs the results into the hall computer 9100. If the identity verification is not successful, the procedure is interrupted, for example, by the staff member.

Furthermore, when the user inputs his/her name, address, date of birth, gender, telephone number, email address, etc. into an input screen displayed on the display of the smartphone 9900, PC, etc., and instructs membership registration, information about the user is sent via the network to the hall computer 9100 of amusement facility A. Here, the information about the user is sent to the hall computer 9100 from the smartphone 9900 or PC by accessing a website related to amusement facility A or by sending to an email address related to amusement facility A, and is sent from the POS terminal 9500 and hall terminal 9600 of amusement facility A to the hall computer 9100 connected via the network using a specified protocol.

Also, as shown in the dotted rectangle in FIG. 228, a user may handwrite an application form for membership registration, which may then be entered by a staff member of amusement facility A into the hall computer 9100 (e.g., via the POS terminal 9500 or hall terminal 9600).

When the hall computer 9100 of amusement parlor A receives information about the user from the smartphone 9900, PC, etc., it assigns a hall member ID (for example, hall member ID = "0002") and sends this hall member ID, amusement parlor ID = "A", and the information about the user received from the smartphone 9900, PC, etc. to the member management server 9700, and registers the user as a global member. In addition, the hall computer 9100 of amusement parlor A stores the hall member ID and information about the user in the hall member information table 9151.

When the member management server 9700 receives information about the user from the hall computer 9100, it assigns a global member ID (for example, global member ID = "0002A") and associates the received information about the user with this global member ID and stores it in the global member information table 9751 (see FIG. 223 (A)). It also associates this global member ID with the hall member ID and the amusement facility ID (in this case, "A") and stores them in the ID correspondence table 9752 (see FIG. 223 (B)). Note that in this example, the initial member registration procedure is performed via the hall computer 9100 of amusement facility A, and the hall member ID is assigned first, so the global member ID is assigned in the form of the hall member ID (of amusement facility A) + amusement facility ID.

Then, the global member management system or member management server 9700 issues a member card 9920 that stores the assigned global member ID, and mails the member card 9920 to amusement store A. Then, a staff member of amusement store A who receives the member card 9920 hands it over to the user at the store in exchange for the user presenting identification such as a My Number card. Note that at this point, the global member management system may determine that the created member card is the member card 9920 to be issued to the user, and the ID stored in the member card 9920 may be input into the member management server 9700 and used as the global member ID.

In addition, the hall computer 9100 of amusement facility A may receive from the member management server 9700 the global member ID assigned by the member management server 9700, and a member card 9920 storing the global member ID may be issued at amusement facility A, and the member card 9920 may be delivered to the user at amusement facility A. With this configuration, amusement facility A may issue a member card 9920 to a user who has completed the member registration procedure on the same day.

Furthermore, the hall computer 9100 of amusement facility A may determine the created membership card as the membership card 9920 to be issued to the user, and amusement facility A may issue the membership card 9920 to the user. The ID stored in the membership card 9920 is transmitted from the hall computer 9100 to the member management server 9700 as a global membership ID. With this configuration, amusement facility A can issue the membership card 9920 to a user who has completed the membership registration procedure on the same day.

Here, the user can also set a login password for using the smartphone 9900 at amusement parlor A via the user's smartphone 9900, a PC at home, a POS terminal 9500 at amusement parlor A, a hall terminal 9600, etc., and this login password is stored in the hall member information table 9151.

[Second and subsequent membership registration procedures (Pattern 2-1)]
Figure 229 shows pattern 2-1 for performing the second or subsequent membership registration procedures when the initial membership registration procedure is performed on a user's smartphone 9900 on which the app is installed, directly to the global membership management system via a network, without going through the gaming facility's hall computer 9100 (patterns 1-1, 1-2).

During the initial membership registration process, the user does not register as a member through the gaming facility, but is already registered as a member in the global membership management system. Now, when the user actually wishes to play at gaming facility A, he or she must register as a member at gaming facility A. However, as shown below, the user can easily complete the membership registration process at gaming facility A by simply holding the smartphone 9900 over a designated terminal, and the staff at gaming facility A are not required to do any special work for this membership registration process.

As shown in FIG. 229(A), the user first holds his/her smartphone 9900 over a hall terminal 9600 or the like at amusement facility A, and has the hall terminal 9600 or the like read (via NFC communication) the global member ID stored in the global member ID memory area 9951 of the smartphone 9900.

The hall terminal 9600 etc. that reads the global member ID from the user's smartphone 9900 informs the hall computer 9100 that the member registration procedure will be carried out, and also transmits the read global member ID. The hall computer 9100 that receives the global member ID inquires of the member management server 9700 of the global member management system whether the global member ID has already been registered and has not yet been registered at amusement parlor A.

The member management server 9700, which receives this inquiry, refers to the global member information table 9751 to determine whether the global member ID has been registered but is not yet registered at amusement facility A, and transmits the determination result to the hall computer 9100. If the hall computer 9100 receives a determination result that the global member ID has not been registered, it controls the display of the hall terminal 9600, etc. to display an error message to that effect. If the hall computer 9100 receives a determination result that the global member ID has been registered and is also registered at amusement facility A, the member registration procedure at amusement facility A has been completed, so it causes a message to that effect to be displayed on the display of the hall terminal 9600, etc.

If the hall computer 9100 receives a determination result that the global member ID has already been registered but has not yet been registered at amusement parlor A, it assigns a new hall member ID and transmits that hall member ID and amusement parlor ID to the member management server 9700. When the member management server 9700 receives the hall member ID and amusement parlor ID from the hall computer 9100, it stores the global member ID, hall member ID, and amusement parlor ID in the ID correspondence table 9752 in association with each other.

For example, in this situation, for the global member ID "0101G" shown in FIG. 223(B), the contents stored in the first line are those stored when the user performs the initial member registration procedure (member registration procedure not via an amusement facility), and the contents stored in the second line are those stored when the user performs the second member registration procedure (member registration procedure via an amusement facility). In the second line, the hall member ID "0001" assigned by amusement facility A and the amusement facility ID "A" corresponding to amusement facility A are stored in association with the global member ID "0101G".

Then, the member management server 9700 refers to the global member information table 9751 and transmits information about the user corresponding to that global member ID (such as name and address) to the hall computer 9100. When the hall computer 9100 receives the information about the user, it associates the assigned hall member ID with the information about that user and stores it in the hall member information table 9151.

By completing this second membership registration procedure, the user can essentially skip the membership registration procedure, and the gaming establishment can register the user as a member without authenticating or verifying the user's identity or inputting information about the user.

Here, the user can also set a login password for using the smartphone 9900 at gaming facility A, and this login password is stored in the hall member information table 9151.

The hall terminal 9600 over which the user holds the smartphone 9900 may include computers such as a POS terminal 9500 and a sandwiched device 9020. In the case of a sandwiched device 9020, the user can complete the membership registration procedure at the gaming establishment by simply holding the smartphone 9900 over the sandwiched device 9020 next to the gaming machine 9010 after sitting in front of the gaming machine 9010 just before starting to play.

In addition, in this example, the smartphone 9900 is configured to store the global member ID in the global member ID memory area 9951, but if the member management server 9700 receives a storage medium identifier that can uniquely identify the smartphone 9900 and stores it in the global member information table 9751, the smartphone 9900 can be uniquely identified by the member management server 9700, so there is no need for the smartphone 9900 to store the global member ID in the global member ID memory area 9951 (the same applies below to the case where the second or subsequent member registration procedure is performed using the smartphone 9900).

Next, as shown in FIG. 229(B), a case will be described in which a user performs a membership registration procedure (third membership registration procedure) at amusement facility B after performing the membership registration procedure at amusement facility A as shown in FIG. 229(A). As in the case of amusement facility A, the user holds his/her smartphone 9900 over a hall terminal 9600 or the like at amusement facility B, and has the hall terminal 9600 or the like read (via NFC communication) the global member ID stored in the global member ID memory area 9951 of the smartphone 9900.

The hall terminal 9600 etc. that reads the global member ID from the user's smartphone 9900 informs the hall computer 9100 that the member registration procedure will be carried out, and also transmits the read global member ID. The hall computer 9100 that receives the global member ID inquires of the member management server 9700 of the global member management system whether the global member ID has already been registered and has not yet been registered at amusement parlor B.

The member management server 9700, which receives this inquiry, refers to the global member information table 9751 to determine whether the global member ID has been registered but is not yet registered at amusement facility B, and transmits the determination result to the hall computer 9100. If the hall computer 9100 receives a determination result that the global member ID has not been registered, it controls the display of the hall terminal 9600 to display an error message to that effect. If the hall computer 9100 receives a determination result that the global member ID has been registered and is also registered at amusement facility B, the member registration procedure at amusement facility B has been completed, so it causes a message to that effect to be displayed on the display of the hall terminal 9600, etc.

If the hall computer 9100 receives a determination result that the global member ID has already been registered but has not been registered at amusement parlor B, it assigns a new hall member ID and transmits that hall member ID and amusement parlor ID to the member management server 9700. When the member management server 9700 receives the hall member ID and amusement parlor ID from the hall computer 9100, it stores the global member ID, hall member ID, and amusement parlor ID in the ID correspondence table 9752 in association with each other.

For example, in this situation, for the global member ID "0101G" shown in FIG. 223(B), the contents stored in the first line are those stored when the user performs the initial member registration procedure (membership registration procedure not via an amusement facility), the contents stored in the second line are those stored in the second member registration procedure as described above, and the contents stored in the third line are those stored in the third member registration procedure (membership registration procedure via an amusement facility this time). In the third line, the hall member ID "U0008" assigned by amusement facility B and the amusement facility ID "B" corresponding to amusement facility B are stored in association with the global member ID "0101G".

Then, the member management server 9700 refers to the global member information table 9751 and transmits information about the user corresponding to that global member ID (such as name and address) to the hall computer 9100. When the hall computer 9100 receives the information about the user, it associates the assigned hall member ID with the information about that user and stores it in the hall member information table 9151.

Even in this third member registration procedure, the user can essentially skip the member registration procedure, and the gaming establishment can register the user without authenticating the user or inputting information about the user. Furthermore, in the fourth and subsequent member registration procedures at other gaming establishments, simple member registration can be performed in a similar manner.

Here, the user can also set a login password for using the smartphone 9900 at amusement facility B, and this login password is stored in the hall member information table 9151.

The hall terminal 9600 over which the user holds the smartphone 9900 may include computers such as a POS terminal 9500 and a sandwiched device 9020. In the case of a sandwiched device 9020, the user can complete the membership registration procedure at the gaming establishment by simply holding the smartphone 9900 over the sandwiched device 9020 next to the gaming machine 9010 after sitting in front of the gaming machine 9010 just before starting to play.

[Second and subsequent membership registration procedures (Pattern 2-2)]
The example in Fig. 229 shows pattern 2-1 in which the second and subsequent membership registration procedures are performed when the initial membership registration procedure is performed directly to the global membership management system via a network without going through the gaming establishment's hall computer 9100 on the user's smartphone 9900 on which the app is installed (patterns 1-1 and 1-2), but here we will explain pattern 2-2 in which the second and subsequent membership registration procedures are performed when the initial membership registration procedure is performed without going through the gaming establishment's hall computer 9100 and a membership card 9920 is received (pattern 1-3). The drawings are omitted.

In pattern 2-1, the user holds the smartphone 9900 over a hall terminal 9600 or the like to register as a member at amusement parlor A or B, but in pattern 2-2, instead of the smartphone 9900, the user can hold the membership card 9920 over a hall terminal 9600 or the like to register as a member at amusement parlor A or B, and the procedure and the processing of the hall computers 9100 at amusement parlor A and B, and the member management server 9700 of the global member management system are the same as in pattern 2-2.

[Second and subsequent membership registration procedures (Pattern 2-3)]
The example of Figure 229 shows pattern 2-1, in which the second or subsequent membership registration procedures are performed when the initial membership registration procedure is performed on a user's smartphone 9900 on which the app is installed, directly to the global membership management system via a network without going through the amusement arcade's hall computer 9100 (patterns 1-1, 1-2).The example of Figure 230 explains pattern 2-3, in which the second or subsequent membership registration procedures are performed when the initial membership registration procedure is performed on a user's smartphone 9900 on which the app is installed, via the amusement arcade's hall computer 9100 (pattern 1-4).

In pattern 2-1, the user holds the smartphone 9900 over a hall terminal 9600 or the like to complete the membership registration procedure at amusement parlor A and amusement parlor B. In pattern 2-3, the user can also hold the smartphone 9900 over a hall terminal 9600 or the like to complete the membership registration procedure, and the procedure and the processing of the hall computer 9100 and the member management server 9700 of the global member management system are the same as in pattern 2-1.

However, in pattern 2-3, since the member registration procedure has already been completed at amusement facility A, the hall computer 9100 that received the global member ID inquires of the member management server 9700 of the global member management system whether the global member ID has been registered and is not yet registered at amusement facility A. The member management server 9700 refers to the global member information table 9751 and transmits to the hall computer 9100 a determination result that the global member ID has been registered and has also been registered at amusement facility A. If a determination result that the global member ID has been registered and has also been registered at amusement facility A is received, the member registration procedure at amusement facility A has been completed, so a message to that effect (for example, "Member registration has already been completed at amusement facility A") is displayed on the display of the hall terminal 9600, etc. (see FIG. 230 (A)). In this case, the user can play at amusement facility A directly using the smartphone 9900.

At this time, for example, the global member ID is "0002A", and in the ID correspondence table 9752 of the global member management system, the hall member ID "0002" assigned by amusement facility A and the amusement facility ID "A" corresponding to amusement facility A are stored in association with the global member ID "0002A" (fourth row of the ID correspondence table 9752). Also, the hall member information table 9151 of the hall computer 9100 stores information about the user in association with the hall member ID "0002".

Then, in this state, when the user moves to amusement facility B and performs the membership registration procedure there (i.e., the second membership registration procedure), the user holds his/her smartphone 9900 over amusement facility B's hall terminal 9600 or the like, and has the hall terminal 9600 or the like read (via NFC communication) the global membership ID stored in the global membership ID memory area 9951 of the smartphone 9900.

The hall terminal 9600 etc. that reads the global member ID from the user's smartphone 9900 informs the hall computer 9100 that the member registration procedure will be carried out, and also transmits the read global member ID. The hall computer 9100 that receives the global member ID inquires of the member management server 9700 of the global member management system whether the global member ID has already been registered and has not yet been registered at amusement parlor B.

The member management server 9700, which receives this inquiry, refers to the global member information table 9751 to determine whether the global member ID has been registered but is not yet registered at amusement facility B, and transmits the determination result to the hall computer 9100. If the hall computer 9100 receives a determination result that the global member ID has not been registered, it controls the display of the hall terminal 9600 to display an error message to that effect. If the hall computer 9100 receives a determination result that the global member ID has been registered and is also registered at amusement facility B, the member registration procedure at amusement facility B has been completed, so it causes a message to that effect to be displayed on the display of the hall terminal 9600, etc.

In this example, the hall computer 9100 receives a determination result that the global member ID has already been registered but has not been registered at amusement parlor B, so it assigns a new hall member ID and transmits that hall member ID and amusement parlor ID to the member management server 9700. Upon receiving the hall member ID and amusement parlor ID from the hall computer 9100, the member management server 9700 stores the global member ID, hall member ID, and amusement parlor ID in association with each other in the ID correspondence table 9752.

The situation after this processing is as follows: for example, for the global member ID "0002A" shown in FIG. 223(B), the contents stored in the fourth line are those stored during the user's first membership registration procedure (membership registration procedure at amusement facility A) as described above, and the contents stored in the fifth line are those stored during the second membership registration procedure (membership registration procedure at amusement facility B). In this fifth line, the hall member ID "U0004" assigned at amusement facility B and the amusement facility ID "B" corresponding to amusement facility B are stored in association with the global member ID "0002A".

Then, the member management server 9700 refers to the global member information table 9751 and transmits information about the user corresponding to that global member ID (such as name and address) to the hall computer 9100. When the hall computer 9100 receives the information about the user, it associates the assigned hall member ID with the information about that user and stores it in the hall member information table 9151.

In this second member registration procedure, the user can essentially skip the member registration procedure, and the gaming establishment can register the user without authenticating the user or inputting information about the user. Furthermore, the same method can be used to easily register the user for the third or subsequent member registration procedures at other gaming establishments.

Here, the user can also set a login password for using the smartphone 9900 at amusement facility B, and this login password is stored in the hall member information table 9151.

[Second and subsequent membership registration procedures (Pattern 2-4)]
The example in Fig. 230 shows pattern 2-3 in which the second or subsequent membership registration procedures are performed after the initial membership registration procedures have been performed in the global membership management system via the gaming establishment's hall computer 9100 on the user's smartphone 9900 on which the app is installed (pattern 1-4), but here we will explain pattern 2-4 in which the second or subsequent membership registration procedures are performed after the initial membership registration procedures have been performed via the gaming establishment's hall computer 9100 and a membership card 9920 has been received (pattern 1-5). The drawings are omitted.

In pattern 2-3, the user holds the smartphone 9900 over a hall terminal 9600 or the like to register as a member at amusement parlor B (the user is already registered as a member at amusement parlor A, resulting in an error), but in pattern 2-4, instead of the smartphone 9900, the user can hold the membership card 9920 over a hall terminal 9600 or the like to register as a member at amusement parlor B, and the procedure and the processing of each hall computer 9100 at amusement parlor B and the member management server 9700 of the global member management system are the same as in pattern 2-3.

[Playing with smartphones and membership cards]
Next, referring to FIG. 231, the processing procedure when using the smartphone 9900 and the membership card 9920 at the gaming facility where the member initially registered will be described.

In FIG. 231, first, when a user holds a storage medium (smartphone 9900 or membership card 9920) owned by the user over the sandwiched device 9020 of amusement facility A, the sandwiched device 9020 reads the global membership ID stored in the storage medium (e.g., by NFC communication) and transmits the global membership ID to the hall computer 9100 of amusement facility A. Note that here, the global membership ID is assumed to be the global membership ID "0002A" stored in the ID correspondence table 9752 in FIG. 223 (B), and this global membership ID is assumed to be the one used for the initial membership registration procedure at amusement facility A where the user is currently playing.

When the hall computer 9100 of amusement facility A receives the global member ID from the sandwiched device 9020, it determines that the initial membership registration procedure for this global member ID was performed at amusement facility A because the global member ID ends with "A."

Then, "0002" without the last digit of the global member ID is recognized as the hall member ID at amusement facility A, and based on this hall member ID, the saved ball management table 9152 is referenced to obtain the saved ball information of the user. After the user logs in by holding the storage medium over the sandwiched device 9020, if the user has saved balls, the user can start playing on the gaming machine 9010 by operating, for example, the "saved ball payout" operation button 9034b of the sandwiched device 9020.

Similarly, the hall computer 9100 of gaming facility A sends and receives data based on the hall member ID and references and updates various tables in response to user operations and gameplay status.

In this example, the global member ID is sent to the member management server 9700 of the global member management system, and an inquiry is made as to whether the global member ID has already been registered and whether it has already been registered at amusement facility A, but this can be omitted.

The member management server 9700 refers to the ID correspondence table 9752, and if the received global member ID has a corresponding amusement facility ID "A" in the ID correspondence table 9752, it notifies the hall computer 9100 that the global member ID can be used at amusement facility A.

When the hall computer 9100 confirms that the global membership ID can be used at gaming facility A, it enables operation of the sandwiched device 9020, allowing the user to play on the gaming machine 9010.

In the example shown in FIG. 231, the hall computer 9100 accesses the ID correspondence table 9752 of the member management server 9700 based on the global member ID provided by the sandwiched device 9020, and references information about the user associated with that global member ID. In addition to the hall computer 9100, computers that can use such user information include various devices (amusement store devices) located in the amusement store, such as the sandwiched device 9020, the POS terminal 9500, and the hall terminal 9600.

Next, referring to FIG. 232, the processing procedure when using the smartphone 9900 or the membership card 9920 at an amusement facility other than the one where the member was initially registered will be described.

In FIG. 232, first, when a user holds a storage medium (smartphone 9900 or membership card 9920) owned by the user over the sandwiched device 9020 of amusement facility A, the sandwiched device 9020 reads the global membership ID stored in the storage medium (e.g., by NFC communication) and transmits the global membership ID to the hall computer 9100 of amusement facility B. Note that here, the global membership ID is assumed to be the global membership ID "0002A" stored in the ID correspondence table 9752 in FIG. 223 (B), and this global membership ID is assumed to be the one used for the initial membership registration procedure at amusement facility A, which is different from amusement facility B where the user is currently playing.

When the hall computer 9100 of amusement facility B receives the global member ID from the sandwiched device 9020, it determines that the initial membership registration procedure for this global member ID was performed at amusement facility A because the global member ID ends with "A."

In this case, since amusement facility B does not know the hall member ID of amusement facility B that corresponds to the global member ID, it checks the validity of the global member ID with the member management server 9700 of the global member management system and obtains the hall member ID.

That is, first, the global member ID and amusement facility ID are sent to the member management server 9700 of the global member management system, and an inquiry is made as to whether the global member ID has already been registered and whether it has already been registered at amusement facility B.

The member management server 9700 refers to the ID correspondence table 9752, and if the received global member ID has a corresponding amusement facility ID of "B" in the ID correspondence table 9752, it notifies the hall computer 9100 that the global member ID can be used at amusement facility A. In this case, amusement facility B exists as the amusement facility corresponding to the global member ID "0002A" stored in the ID correspondence table 9752 in FIG. 223 (B) (line 5).

Next, the hall computer 9100 requests the member management server 9700 to return the hall member ID of amusement parlor B that corresponds to the global member ID. The member management server 9700 then refers to the ID correspondence table 9752, obtains the hall member ID item for the received global member ID where the corresponding amusement parlor ID is "B", and sends this to the hall computer 9100. For example, the hall member ID that corresponds to amusement parlor B with the above global member ID = "0002A" is "U0004".

When the hall computer 9100 receives the hall member ID of gaming parlor B from the member management server 9700, it references the saved ball management table 9152 based on the hall member ID to obtain the saved ball information of the user. After the user logs in by holding a storage medium over the sandwiched device 9020, if the user has saved balls, the user can start playing on the gaming machine 9010 by operating, for example, the "saved ball payout" operation button 9034b on the sandwiched device 9020.

Similarly, the hall computer 9100 of gaming facility B sends and receives data based on the hall member ID and references and updates various tables in response to user operations and gameplay status.

In the example shown in FIG. 232, the hall computer 9100 accesses the ID correspondence table 9752 of the member management server 9700 based on the global member ID provided by the sandwiched device 9020, and references information about the user associated with that global member ID. In addition to the hall computer 9100, computers that can use such user information include various devices (amusement store devices) located in the amusement store, such as the sandwiched device 9020, the POS terminal 9500, and the hall terminal 9600.

[Transfer of balls in the global membership management system]
As described above, the member management server 9700 of the global member management system stores and manages global member IDs in a global member information table 9751, and by associating information about the user with the global member ID, controls the storage medium (e.g., smartphone 9900 or member card 9920) storing the global member ID so that it can be used as a member card at multiple gaming establishments, and also controls the storage medium so that it can be used as a member card at gaming establishments where the member registration procedure has not been completed.

In such a member management server 9700, it is also possible to manage the number of saved balls for each user for each global member ID. For example, in case a gaming establishment goes bankrupt and is unable to refund a user's saved balls/medals, each gaming establishment can join a saved ball compensation fund and provide a certain amount of compensation to users. For this purpose, a designated center operator stores the number of saved balls/medals sent from each gaming establishment one by one and manages them in association with the user's personal information. The number of saved balls/medals for each gaming establishment is managed in a saved ball management table 9152 as shown in FIG. 222 (B).

If the center operator involved in such a saved ball compensation fund operates the above-mentioned global member management system (member management server 9700), or is able to obtain the number of saved balls/medals and personal information of users from the center operator into the global member management system (member management server 9700), then the member management server 9700 can build a global saved ball management table 9753, as shown in FIG. 233 (A), that can manage the saved balls/medals of each gaming parlor across the board. Such a global saved ball management table 9753 can be stored in the member management DB 9750 of the member management server 9700.

In addition, even if there is no background related to the saved ball compensation fund as described above, each gaming establishment may construct a global saved ball management table 9753 by sending data on the number of saved balls/coins linked to the hall member ID and the gaming establishment ID to the global member management system (member management server 9700).

The global member ID and the game store ID in the global ball management table 9753 correspond to the global member ID and the game store ID stored in the ID correspondence table 9752 in FIG. 223(B). As can be seen from the ID correspondence table 9752, the global member ID of the game store A, "0101G", corresponds to the hall member ID of the game store A, "0001", and the number of balls/medals saved by this user matches the number of balls/medals saved for the hall member ID, "0001", in the ball management table 9152 in FIG. 222(B). In this embodiment, the type of each saved ball/medal is represented by a lending rate, such as "4 yen (pachinko)" or "20 yen (slot machine)", and this is referred to as the "ball type".

Furthermore, as can be seen from ID correspondence table 9752, amusement store A's global member ID = "0002A" corresponds to amusement store A's hall member ID = "0002", and the number of saved balls/medals of this user matches the number of saved balls/medals of hall member ID = "0002" in saved ball management table 9152. Furthermore, as can be seen from ID correspondence table 9752, amusement store A's global member ID = "0003A" corresponds to amusement store A's hall member ID = "0003", and the number of saved balls/medals of this user matches the number of saved balls/medals of hall member ID = "0003" in saved ball management table 9152.

Figure 233 (B) shows the number of saved balls/medals for the user with global member ID = "0101G" extracted for convenience from the global saved ball management table 9753 shown in Figure 233 (A). As shown in Figure 233 (B), for example, this user has saved balls/medals in each of amusement parlors A and B, and in this example, 20,000 balls with a lending rate of 1 yen (pachinko) at amusement parlor B are to be moved to amusement parlor A with a lending rate of 4 yen (pachinko). Then, the number of saved balls for this user with a lending rate of 4 yen (pachinko) at amusement parlor A is 9,000 + 20,000/4 = 14,000 balls.

In this embodiment, the transfer of saved balls/medals by a user to another place is referred to as "transfer". For example, the process of transferring saved balls/medals between different lending rates at the same gaming establishment, the process of transferring saved balls/medals between the same or different lending rates at different gaming establishments, the process of transferring saved balls/medals to the same or different lending rates of another person at the same gaming establishment, and the process of transferring saved balls/medals to the same or different lending rates of another person at different gaming establishments are all included in the concept of "transfer".

When there is a change in the number of stored balls/medals in the stored ball management table 9152, the member management server 9700 transmits the data on the new number of stored balls/medals to the gaming facility involved in the change, together with the hall member ID corresponding to the global member ID. When the hall computer 9100 of each gaming facility receives this data, it updates the stored ball management table 9152 according to the change in the number of stored balls/medals for the corresponding hall member ID.

Here, the number of balls/medals is converted and transferred between different gaming parlors based on the lending rate at the user's instruction, but conditions for transferring balls/medals may be determined individually between gaming parlors. Various conditions can be set as transfer conditions, such as the relationship between the lending rate of the transferred balls/medals (for example, transfer from 4 yen (pachinko) to 1 yen (pachinko) is possible, but not the reverse, transfer between pachinko and slots is not possible, etc.), the quantity to be transferred (for example, unit of transfer quantity, minimum quantity, maximum quantity, etc.), and the conversion rate of the quantity to be transferred (for example, adopting an exchange rate that takes into account other factors (exchange rate, etc.) in addition to the lending rate).

Figure 234 shows a ball transfer designation screen 11001 that is displayed on the display of a user's smartphone 9900 or the like and that designates the transfer of the number of balls/medals related to the user. The user logs into the global member management system (member management server 9700) (for example, using a password set in advance) and designates the source gaming facility and ball type in the source designation area 11002 of the ball transfer designation screen 11001. This displays the remaining number of balls/medals at the designated gaming facility that corresponds to the designated ball type of the user's global member ID, and the user then designates the number of balls/medals to be transferred in the transfer quantity field of the source designation area 11002. At this time, the display of the remaining number of balls/medals changes depending on the designation of the transfer quantity.

Next, the user specifies the destination gaming facility and ball type in the destination designation area 11003 of the ball transfer designation screen 11001. The remaining number of balls/medals at the specified gaming facility that corresponds to the designated ball type of the user's global membership ID is then displayed as the "quantity before transfer", and this quantity is added to the quantity calculated based on the transfer quantity specified in the transfer quantity in the source designation area 11002 and displayed as the "quantity after transfer". The transfer quantity specified in the transfer quantity in the source designation area 11002 is converted based on the transfer conditions described above and added to the quantity before transfer. Furthermore, if the contents specified in the source designation area 11002 and destination designation area 11003 do not satisfy the transfer conditions, an error message is displayed and corrections are requested.

Such instructions to move the saved balls correspond to the movement indicated by the arrows in FIG. 233 (B). Finally, when the user presses the Confirm button 11004, the instruction to move the saved balls is confirmed, and the global saved ball management table 9753 is updated based on the contents specified on the saved ball transfer specification screen 11001, and in response to this update, the saved ball management table 9152 of the corresponding gaming facility is updated in sync.

Figure 235 shows a ball transfer designation screen 11011 that is displayed on the display of the user's smartphone 9900 or the like and that designates the transfer of balls/medals to another user. The user logs in to the global member management system (member management server 9700) (for example, using a password set in advance) and designates the originating gaming establishment and ball type in the originating designation area 11012 of the ball transfer designation screen 11011. This displays the remaining number of balls/medals at the designated gaming establishment that corresponds to the designated ball type of the user's global member ID, and the user then designates the number of balls/medals to be transferred in the transfer quantity field of the origin designation area 11012. At this time, the display of the remaining number of balls/medals changes depending on the designated transfer quantity.

Next, the user specifies the global membership ID, game establishment, and ball type of the destination user in the destination designation area 11013 of the ball transfer designation screen 11011. The remaining number of balls/medals at the specified game establishment that corresponds to the designated ball type of the destination user's global membership ID is then displayed as the "quantity before transfer", and this quantity is added to the quantity calculated based on the transfer quantity specified in the transfer quantity in the source designation area 11012 and displayed as the "quantity after transfer". The transfer quantity specified in the transfer quantity in the source designation area 11012 is converted based on the transfer conditions described above and added to the quantity before transfer. Furthermore, if the contents specified in the source designation area 11012 and destination designation area 11013 do not satisfy the transfer conditions, an error message is displayed and corrections are requested.

The ball transfer designation screen 11011 shown in FIG. 235 is for transferring one's own balls/medals to another user, so in the destination designation area 11013, it is possible to display only the transfer quantity converted under specified transfer conditions, without displaying the transferred quantity and pre-transfer quantity of balls/medals related to another user. Also, the transfer conditions described above can be different for transfers of balls/medals when the same user and when different users.

Finally, when the user presses the Confirm button 11014, the instruction to transfer the saved balls is confirmed, and the global saved ball management table 9753 is updated based on the contents specified on the saved ball transfer specification screen 11011, and in response to this update, the saved ball management table 9152 of the corresponding gaming facility is updated synchronously.

In addition, when one user instructs another user to transfer saved balls/medals, the other user can use a smartphone or the like of the one user to obtain consent to accept the saved balls/medals from the one user. Conversely, one user can make a request to the other user to transfer saved balls/medals (to receive the transfer of saved balls/medals), which can be displayed on the smartphone or the like of the other user, and if permission is obtained from the other user, the other user's saved balls/medals can be moved to the one user.

[Provision of personal information to third parties]
In this embodiment, when a user performs a membership registration procedure, information about the user, such as the name, address, date of birth, and gender, is stored and managed in the hall member information table 9151 of each gaming facility, the global member information table 9751 of the global member management system, etc. Such information about the user is information that can identify a specific individual, and corresponds to "personal information." Meanwhile, a business that puts personal information into a database and uses it is a "personal information handling business," and in this case, each gaming facility, the operator of the global member management system, etc., fall into this category.

In the Personal Information Protection Act, which regulates the handling of personal information, two basic rules are closely related to this embodiment.

The first basic rule is related to the acquisition and use of personal information. When acquiring personal information, it is necessary to specify the purpose of use as much as possible and to notify and publicize the purpose. In this regard, in this embodiment, when a user performs a membership registration procedure, the membership terms and conditions are presented, and only users who agree to these can register as members. The membership terms and conditions include a privacy policy, and the purpose of use of personal information is clearly stated in this privacy policy. A user performs the membership registration procedure by operating a computer (a smartphone 9900, a home PC, a POS terminal 9500 at an amusement parlor, or a hall terminal 9600). When starting the membership registration procedure, for example, the membership terms and conditions can be displayed on the display of the computer, and if the user checks a checkbox indicating consent (if the user agrees), the membership registration procedure can proceed. If the user does not agree, the membership registration is not performed, or the use of the personal information described in the membership terms and conditions is restricted.

For example, in the above-mentioned initial member registration procedures, pattern 1-1 (Fig. 224), pattern 1-2 (Fig. 225), and pattern 1-3 (Fig. 226), the business that acquires the personal information is the operator of the global member management system, etc., and when the user performs the member registration procedure, the member terms and conditions of this business are displayed on the display, etc., of the computer operated by the user. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned initial member registration procedures, pattern 1-4 (Fig. 227) and pattern 1-5 (Fig. 228), the business that acquires the personal information is each gaming facility and the operator of the global member management system, etc., and when the user performs the member registration procedure, the member terms and conditions of all of these businesses are displayed on the display, etc., of the computer operated by the user.

In addition, in the case of the second or subsequent membership registration procedures, pattern 2-1 (Fig. 229) and pattern 2-3 (only the pattern shown in Fig. 230(B)), the business that acquires new personal information is each gaming establishment, so when the user performs the membership registration procedure, the membership terms and conditions of that gaming establishment are displayed on the display, etc., of the computer operated by the user.

Furthermore, if personal information is to be used for purposes beyond those stated in the above membership terms and conditions, the user's consent will be required again at that point. Such new purposes of use will also be displayed on the display of the computer, such as the smartphone 9900, operated by the user, and if the user agrees to it, the user's data can be used for the new purpose of use.

Furthermore, when the user starts playing, the consent to the above-mentioned membership terms and conditions and the user's re-consent can be obtained by, for example, displaying a confirmation screen on the display (operation unit 9034) of the sandwiched device 9020 and having the user operate a specified operation button 9034b to confirm consent. If consent is not obtained, the use of the personal information described in the membership terms and conditions will be restricted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned enclosed gaming machine, a dedicated unit that allows the lending of electromagnetic gaming media (gaming balls and medals) using cash, and allows balls to be saved and replayed using an IC card, is placed (next to the gaming machine). In this case, when a user tries to start playing using cash or an IC card, a confirmation screen can be displayed on the display device of the dedicated unit, and the player can be configured to confirm their agreement to the above-mentioned membership terms and conditions and their re-confirmation of their agreement.

The second basic rule concerns the provision of personal information to third parties. Personal information is information that can identify a specific individual, so it can only be provided to third parties if it is handled in accordance with strict rules. Such provision of personal information to third parties can only be done with the consent of the user in question.

In this embodiment, for example, in the above-mentioned initial member registration procedure, pattern 1-4 (FIG. 227) and pattern 1-5 (FIG. 228), information about the user (e.g., information including personal information such as the user's name and address) is first sent to the hall computer 9100 of each gaming facility, where it is stored and managed, and then the personal information is sent to the member management server 9700. Therefore, the transmission of personal information from the hall computer 9100 to the member management server 9700 may be considered "provision to a third party." In that case, a confirmation screen for consent to such provision to a third party is displayed, for example, on the display of a computer operated by the user to perform the member registration procedure. In addition, such a confirmation screen is displayed, for example, by a third party who uses the personal information (such as the operator of the global member management system), and the presence or absence of the user's consent is confirmed there.

In addition, in the above-mentioned enclosed gaming machine, a dedicated unit that allows the lending of electromagnetic gaming media (gaming balls and medals) using cash and the saving and replay of balls using an IC card is placed (next to the gaming machine). In this case, when a user tries to start playing using cash or a storage medium (e.g., a smartphone or IC card), the above-mentioned confirmation screen can be displayed on the display device of the dedicated unit, and the player can be configured to confirm his/her consent to the provision of personal information to a third party.

[Provision of personal information to third parties]
The Personal Information Protection Law requires the consent of the person in question when providing personal information related to a living individual that is not classified as personal information (cannot identify an individual) to a third party. In this embodiment, for example, when an information card inserted into the card insertion slot 9032 of the sandwiched device 9020 or an IC card whose information is read by the non-contact IC card reader/writer 9036 of the sandwiched device 9020 is a so-called "visitor card" that is used without membership registration, facial data captured by the camera 9035 of the sandwiched device 9020 or a surveillance camera of the gaming facility by a player (visitor) who has not completed the membership registration procedure and uses the visitor card can be associated with game information (including, for example, game start time, game time, game machine number, number of in coins and number of out coins (out balls and safe balls), etc.) and stored in the hall computer 9100 as visitor data.

This visitor data is information related to a living individual, and can be interpreted as personal information that does not correspond to personal information (cannot identify an individual). For example, such visitor data alone does not allow for the identification of an individual, but by matching the visitor data with face photo data held by other businesses in which face photos are associated with names and addresses, it is possible to use the visitor data as personal data. Note that the above visitor data is merely an example of data that can be obtained by the gaming system PS300 of this embodiment, and various other personal information can be obtained by the gaming system PS300.

When the above-mentioned personal information is provided to a third party, for example, the business to which the personal information is provided can obtain the player's consent by, for example, displaying a confirmation screen on the display (operation unit 9034) of the sandwiched device 9020 when the player starts playing, and having the player operate a specified operation button 9034b to confirm consent. If consent is not obtained, the personal information is controlled so that it is not provided to a third party.

In addition, in the above-mentioned enclosed gaming machine, a dedicated unit is placed (next to the gaming machine) that allows for the lending of electromagnetic gaming media (gaming balls and medals) using cash or a storage medium (e.g., a smartphone or IC card), and for saving and replaying balls using an IC card. In this case, when a player tries to start playing using cash or a storage medium, the above-mentioned confirmation screen is displayed on the display device of the dedicated unit, and the player can be configured to confirm his or her consent to the provision of personal information to a third party.

[Personal information and information related to enclosed gaming machines]
Next, referring to FIG. 236, an example of the basic configuration of an enclosed gaming machine and the flow of information from the enclosed gaming machine will be described.

Each of the enclosed gaming machines installed in each gaming facility is equipped with a main control board, and this main control board is equipped with a main control unit as a gaming control means (gaming control unit) that controls the progress of the game. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine in which a game is played by circulating enclosed gaming balls, the main control board is connected to a medal count control board that serves as a gaming value control means (gaming value control unit) that controls the management of the gaming value. On the other hand, in the case of a gaming machine that allows for medal-less play, the main control board is connected to a frame control board that serves as a gaming value control means (gaming value control unit) that controls the management of the gaming value.

The medal count control board and frame control board are connected to the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board, which is connected to a dedicated unit (game ball etc. lending device) outside the enclosed game machine.

As described above, the dedicated unit enables the lending of electromagnetic gaming media (game balls and medals) using cash or storage media (e.g., smartphones and IC cards), and allows balls to be saved and replayed using IC cards. It also transmits game information sent from the enclosed gaming machine via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board to the hall computer of the gaming facility. The dedicated unit also transmits game information sent from the enclosed gaming machine via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal board, as well as the user's personal information and saved ball information, to the center computer via the management computer.

When the hall computer receives game information from the dedicated unit, it stores this information (along with the member ID if the player is a hall member) in a game information management table or the like as needed. Note that the game information that can be obtained from the dedicated unit here includes, for example, operation information including out/safe sales information, information on held balls/medals, and information on saved balls/medals.

The center computer is, for example, a computer operated by a business (manufacturer) that provides the dedicated unit, and when it receives game information from the dedicated unit, it transmits this information to a gaming machine information center that centrally manages ball payout information. In this case, the game information, in the case of a gaming machine that circulates enclosed game balls to play, is, for example, the total number of game balls fired in one business day, the total number of game balls acquired, the payout rate, the ratio of special features, the number of jackpots, etc., and in the case of a gaming machine that allows medal-less play, is, for example, the total number of coins inserted in one business day, the total number of coins paid out, the total number of special feature payouts, the number of games played, the total cumulative special feature ratio, the consecutive special feature ratio, the advantageous zone ratio, etc.

When the central computer receives personal information and saved ball information from the dedicated unit, it also transmits this information to the server of the saved ball compensation fund. The saved ball compensation fund is a fund (general incorporated association) that is set up in case an amusement facility goes bankrupt and is unable to refund saved balls/medals. Note that this information from the dedicated unit is not transmitted if the amusement facility is not a member of this saved ball compensation fund.

In this way, the center computer receives game information, personal information, and ball information from the dedicated unit via the management computer, and can generate game data that associates these pieces of information. By storing and accumulating this game data, it is possible to grasp an individual's game status and the status of balls/medals saved over a long period of time. Since such game data corresponds to personal information as described above, it is necessary to display the member terms and conditions regarding the acquisition and use of personal information, for example, on the display device of the dedicated unit and obtain the player's consent. Note that if the center computer and the global member management system (member management server 9700) of this embodiment are run by the same company, there is no need to send personal information or ball information to the servers of multiple companies, reducing the risk of information leakage and promoting more efficient use of data.

Furthermore, if a player is not registered as a member, the dedicated unit does not send personal information or ball information to the central computer, but does send gaming information for non-members. Therefore, the dedicated unit can send facial data of the player captured by a built-in camera, for example, along with this gaming information to the central computer, which then generates gaming data that associates the player's facial data with the gaming information. By storing and accumulating this gaming data, it is possible to grasp an individual's gaming status over a long period of time.

This type of gaming data is interpreted as personal information because, for example, when compared with data in which personal information and facial data are associated, it is possible to identify an individual. Also, if corresponding data between a player's facial data and gaming machine numbers is provided from video footage from a gaming parlor's surveillance camera, data in which gaming information and facial data are associated can be obtained.

In this case, if the transmission of data from the dedicated unit of the gaming facility to the central computer constitutes provision to a third party, the player's consent is also required for such provision to a third party; for example, a notice to the effect that consent is required for the provision of personal information to a third party may be displayed on the display device of the dedicated unit, and the player's consent may be obtained there. Even if the central computer is operated by the manufacturer of the dedicated unit of the gaming facility, as long as the dedicated unit is purchased and operated by the gaming facility, the transmission of personal information as described above is basically considered to be provision to a third party.

[Modification to which the configuration of the fifteenth embodiment is applied]
The gaming system PS300 according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention can be combined with the gaming system according to the fifteenth embodiment described above to create a new modified example.

For example, in the gaming system PS230 shown in FIG. 204(A), the gaming device 7301 synthesizes the sound from the pachinko machine 6001a (sound generated by light received by an infrared receiving unit) with the sound from the hall computer 6186a (sound received via wireless LAN), and outputs the synthesized sound to a wired audio device 8001, etc.

If the hall computer 6186a of this gaming facility, like the hall computer 9100 of this embodiment, can obtain the global member ID stored in a storage medium (smartphone 9900 or member card 9920) when starting play and can access the member management server 9700 of the global member management system, then even if the player moves to another gaming facility, the hall computer 6186a of that gaming facility can obtain the global member ID from the member management server 9700 and determine that the player is the same player (across gaming facilities).

The hall computer 6186a can adjust the audio provided, assuming that the player is the same. For example, the advertisements and information broadcast at the amusement facility can be controlled to be the same as or related to the advertisements and information of the amusement facility previously visited, or to match the player's playing tendencies (for example, tendencies in the location of the amusement facility where the player plays, frequency of play, ball payout situation, etc.), and the background music of the amusement facility can be the same genre as or related to the background music of the amusement facility previously visited.

The member management server 9700 also stores information about the user (e.g., personal information including the user's name and address, and information about related gaming facilities) associated with the global member ID (global member information table 9751), and can be configured to acquire and generate related audio based on this information and transmit it to the gaming device 7301.

In addition, in the gaming system PS240 shown in FIG. 204(B), the card unit 6700a synthesizes the sound from the pachinko machine 6601a (sound generated by light received by an infrared receiving unit) with the sound from the hall computer 6186b (sound received via the LAN), and outputs the synthesized sound to a wired audio device 8001, etc.

Again, if the hall computer 6186b of this gaming facility, like the hall computer 9100 of this embodiment, can obtain the global member ID stored in a storage medium (smartphone 9900 or member card 9920) when starting play and can access the member management server 9700 of the global member management system, then even if the player moves to another gaming facility, the hall computer 6186b of that gaming facility can obtain the global member ID from the member management server 9700 and determine that the player is the same player (across gaming facilities), and thus, as in the case of FIG. 204(A), the hall computer 6186b can adjust the audio it provides on the assumption that the player is the same player.

The member management server 9700 also stores information about the user (e.g., personal information including the user's name and address, and information about related gaming establishments) associated with the global member ID (global member information table 9751), and can be configured to acquire and generate related audio based on this information and transmit it to the card unit 6700a.

Furthermore, in the gaming system PS250 shown in FIG. 208, the gaming device 7301a receives sound (sound generated by light received by an infrared receiving unit) from the pachinko machine 6001a and transmits it to the player's smartphone 5801 via wireless communication. The app 5802 of the smartphone 5801 synthesizes the sound received from the gaming device 7301a with the sound received from the hall computer 6186c (sound received via wireless LAN), and outputs the synthesized sound to the wireless audio device 8002 connected to the smartphone 5801.

Here too, if the hall computer 6186c of this gaming facility, like the hall computer 9100 of this embodiment, can obtain the global member ID stored in a storage medium (smartphone 9900 (smartphone 5801) or member card 9920) when starting play and can access the member management server 9700 of the global member management system, then even if the player moves to another gaming facility, the hall computer 6186c of that gaming facility can obtain the global member ID from the member management server 9700 and determine that the player is the same player (across gaming facilities), and thus, as in the case of FIG. 204(A), the hall computer 6186c can adjust the audio it provides on the assumption that the player is the same player.

The member management server 9700 also stores information about the user (e.g., personal information including the user's name and address, and information about related gaming facilities) associated with the global member ID (global member information table 9751), and can be configured to acquire and generate related audio based on this information and transmit it to the gaming device 7301a.

[Preventing the issuance of visitor cards in sealed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines)]
In conventional pachislot machines, there are models that require three medals to play one round, and when there are only one or two medals remaining, the player has no choice but to give up on a new game unless he or she borrows another medal. Such models also exist in medal-less gaming machines that allow gaming without medals. In medal-less gaming machines, the number of medals held is stored in a game medal number display device, and when the counting button is pressed, the medals stored in the game medal number display device are data-transferred to a dedicated unit. For example, when the counting button is pressed briefly, one medal is transferred at a time, and when the counting button is pressed long, 50 medals are transferred at a time.

Regarding conventional pachislot machines, that is, gaming machines in which medals are actually discharged into a medal discharge tray, the above-mentioned gaming machine 9010a and sandwiched device 9020a will be explained as an example. When a visitor player who does not have a visitor card that can be used on the day first inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 9033 of the sandwiched device 9020a, balance data according to the amount of the bill is displayed on a specified display unit of the gaming machine 9010a. For example, when a 10,000 yen bill is inserted, the number of points displayed is "100".

When the "Lending" operation button 9034b of the sandwiched device 9020a is operated, if the lending rate is 20 yen (slot), 1000 yen, i.e. 50 medals, are discharged to the medal payout tray 9037, and the balance data display is updated to "90" points.

After this, when the lent medals are used up and the "return" operation button 9034b of the sandwiched device 9020a is operated, a new visitor card with a stored balance data of "90" (9,000 yen) is ejected from the card insertion port 9032 of the sandwiched device 9020a. Also, if the "90" points of the balance data are all used up, the visitor card will not be ejected even if the "return" operation button 9034b is operated.

When a player wins medals on the gaming machine 9010a, if the player has medals remaining in the credit, the player presses the settlement button to pay out the medals to the medal payout tray 9012, then inserts the medals from the medal payout tray 9012 into the medal counting slot 9039, operates the "start counting" operation button 9034b, and when counting is complete, operates the "stop counting" operation button 9034b. After that, when the "return" operation button 9034b is operated, a visitor card with the counted medal count stored as the number of held medals is ejected from the card insertion slot 9032 of the sandwiched device 9020a. Also, if both the balance data and the number of held medals are 0, the visitor card will not be ejected even if the "return" operation button 9034b is operated.

In conventional gaming machines 9010a, the visitor card is used in this manner, and when a visitor decides not to play any more and is playing on a gaming machine 9010 that does not allow play with less than three medals, he or she often leaves the medals on the credit or in the medal payout tray 9012. For a visitor, even if he or she is not going to play any more, there is no point in paying out one or two medals to the medal payout tray 9012 with the settlement button, inserting the medals into the medal counting slot 9039 of the sandwiched device 9020a, and then operating the "count start" operation button 9034b, the "count stop" operation button 9034b, and the "return" operation button 9034b to issue a new visitor card (of course, the medals stored in the visitor card can only be used on the day).

On the other hand, in medalless gaming machines where play is not possible with fewer than three medals, if a visitor who has decided not to play any more plays on the medalless gaming machine and ends up with one or two medals remaining in the credits, this number is displayed on the credit counter, and if the counting button on the medalless gaming machine is operated at this time, one or two medals are transferred from the credits to a dedicated unit, and if the return button on the dedicated unit is then operated, a visitor card that stores the one or two medals held is issued and discharged, even if there is no balance data at this point.

However, such a visitor card that stores one or two medals valid only for that day is meaningless to a visitor who has decided not to play any more, and so there is basically no motivation for the visitor to operate the return button. However, it is expected that there will be a certain number of visitors who will try to clear the medals remaining in the credit counter or dedicated unit of the gaming machine 9010a at the end. In this regard, with the conventional gaming machine 9010a, the medals can be left as they are in the medal payout tray 9012, in which case there is no incomplete data remaining in the sandwich device 9020a or the gaming machine 9010, and it is thought that it will not be a nuisance for the next player to use it, so the motivation for the player to forcefully issue a visitor card is smaller than with a medal-less gaming machine.

As a result, medal-less gaming machines may issue more visitor cards that will clearly never be used, and these visitor cards may end up being discarded unused. This situation is not desirable for gaming establishments, as it means they have to pay the costs of issuing unnecessary visitor cards (IC cards).

In this embodiment, therefore, to prevent visitor cards from being inadvertently issued, the visitor card (IC card) is not read into the dedicated unit, and in a medalless gaming machine in which play cannot be performed with less than three medals, if there are one or two medals in the credit counter, the medal number is controlled so that it is not transferred to the dedicated unit even if the settlement button of the medalless gaming machine is operated.

This type of configuration is basically realized by the medalless gaming machine (gaming machine 9010a) and the dedicated unit working together, but the medalless gaming machine may be controlled to limit the function of the settlement button, and the dedicated unit may be controlled not to accept one or two medals in a situation where a visitor card can be issued (a situation where the IC card has not been read).

By using the above-mentioned configuration of the medalless gaming machine and dedicated unit, or by using either the above-mentioned configuration of the medalless gaming machine and dedicated unit, the issuance of unnecessary visitor cards is prevented, and as a result, the costs associated with issuing visitor cards consisting of IC cards can be reduced.

Up to this point, the gaming system according to the 16th embodiment and its modified examples have been described with reference to Figures 210 to 236, but the configuration of each device is merely an example, and the technical idea of the present application can be realized by various other configurations. In addition, it is possible to construct a new gaming system by appropriately combining each device (including modified examples) according to the 16th embodiment that has been described up to this point. Furthermore, the gaming system according to the 16th embodiment and its modified examples can be appropriately applied to the above-mentioned first to fifteenth embodiments.

The following describes the configuration of the gaming system according to the 16th embodiment described above and the effects of that configuration.

<Appendix B-1>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a gaming ball passes through a passing area provided in a gaming area in which the launched gaming ball can roll, control is executed to variably display a pattern as identification information on the display area of the image display device, and control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed pattern, and when the derively displayed pattern forms a predetermined combination (a specific display form), a transition to a jackpot gaming state which is advantageous to the player is provided.

In gaming establishments where games are played using such gaming machines, in order to manage players and provide certain services, personal information such as name and address is accepted, members are registered, and a membership card is issued to each member.

For example, in a management system such as that shown in JP 2018-68653 A, when a user of the system registers as a member, the personal information of each user (e.g., name, address, email address, etc.) is stored in the hall member information table.

However, in existing gaming systems that include a management system such as that described in Patent Document 1, user membership registration is done independently for each gaming establishment, so users must register membership information such as their name and address for each gaming establishment where they wish to play. Correspondingly, the staff at each gaming establishment must also complete the membership registration procedures for each establishment, and various pieces of information must be handled appropriately.

In addition, when a user registers as a member, they must go to the gaming establishment and complete the required procedures with the gaming establishment's staff, and various pieces of information must be handled appropriately.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming system that can appropriately handle various types of information.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(B-1-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A user information server (e.g., a member management server 9700) that stores information about users (e.g., personal information including the user's name and address, and information about related gaming establishments);
and a gaming facility device (e.g., a hall computer 9100, a sandwich device 9020, a POS terminal 9500, a hall terminal 9600, etc., and other devices disposed in the gaming facility);
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system PS300) characterized in that in each of the specified gaming establishments, the gaming establishment devices are controlled so that information about the user can be used (e.g., when a user performs a membership registration procedure at the gaming establishment or when the user is about to start playing, information about the user registered through a previous membership registration procedure can be referenced).

This configuration of the present invention makes it possible to appropriately handle various types of information, and once a user has registered as a member once, that user's membership information is shared by each gaming establishment, allowing the user to play as a member at multiple gaming establishments with a single membership registration procedure, and the second and subsequent membership registration procedures at each gaming establishment can be completed extremely simply, thereby reducing the burden on the user and the gaming establishment staff. In addition, because the second and subsequent membership registration procedures are simple for the user, this effectively encourages users to register as members at the second and subsequent gaming establishments.

(B-1-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
a user information server that stores information about users;
and a gaming store device,
A gaming system characterized in that when information about the user is stored in the user information server without going through a procedure at the gaming establishment (for example, a procedure in which the user goes to the gaming establishment and uses the user's smartphone 9900, etc. to store information about the user in the member management server 9700) (for example, when information about the user is stored in the member management server 9700 via a network during a membership registration procedure using the user's smartphone 9900, PC, etc.), the gaming establishment devices are controlled so that the information about the user is available in at least one specified gaming establishment.

This configuration of the present invention makes it possible to appropriately handle various types of information, and since information about the user is registered without going through the member registration procedure at the gaming establishment, the user does not have to take the trouble to visit the gaming establishment, and can complete the member registration procedure without meeting the user in person. And because the member registration procedure can be completed without meeting the user in person, member registration is effectively promoted.

In addition, once a user has registered as a member once, that user's membership information is shared among each gaming establishment, so the user can complete the membership registration procedures at gaming establishments from the first time onwards extremely easily, which results in a reduction in the burden on the user and gaming establishment staff. In particular, the burden on gaming establishment staff is reduced at every gaming establishment. In addition, because the membership registration procedures for the user from the first time onwards are simple, this effectively promotes the user's membership registration at gaming establishments from the first onwards.

(B-1-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
a user information server that stores information about users;
and a gaming store device,
A gaming system characterized in that when information about the user is stored in the user information server through a procedure at one gaming establishment (for example, a procedure in which the user goes to the gaming establishment and uses the user's smartphone 9900 or the like to store information about the user in the member management server 9700, or a procedure in which the hall computer 9100 of a specified gaming establishment is accessed via a network and information about the user is stored), the gaming establishment devices are controlled so that the information about the user can be used at another specified gaming establishment.

This configuration of the present invention makes it possible to appropriately handle various types of information, and once a user has registered as a member once, that user's membership information is shared by each gaming establishment, allowing the user to play as a member at multiple gaming establishments with a single membership registration procedure, and the second and subsequent membership registration procedures at each gaming establishment can be completed extremely simply, thereby reducing the burden on the user and the gaming establishment staff. In addition, because the second and subsequent membership registration procedures are simple for the user, this effectively encourages users to register as members at the second and subsequent gaming establishments.

(B-1-4) The fourth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to third aspects.
The gaming store device is configured to be controlled so that information about the user stored in the user information server is made available based on user-specific information capable of identifying the user (e.g., a global member ID or a storage medium identifier capable of uniquely identifying a storage medium such as a smartphone 9900) read from a storage medium that the user can possess (e.g., a smartphone 9900 or a membership card 9920).

This configuration of the present invention makes it possible to appropriately handle various types of information, and once a user has registered as a member once, that user's membership information is shared at each gaming establishment, allowing the user to play as a member at multiple gaming establishments with a single membership registration procedure, and making it extremely easy to complete subsequent membership registration procedures at each gaming establishment, ultimately reducing the burden on the user and the gaming establishment's staff. In addition, the hall membership ID of each gaming establishment is stored in association with the global membership ID assigned by the user when he or she registered as a member for the first time, so that any gaming establishment can easily find out the hall membership ID of the user by simply obtaining the global membership ID.

In addition, since it is only necessary to store the global membership ID and the like in a single storage medium such as the smartphone 9900 or the membership card 9920, the membership card is unified and user management becomes easier, which effectively encourages the user to register as a member at the second or subsequent gaming facility.

In addition, as the use of smartphones 9900 is becoming more widespread, the number of member cards 9920, which are IC cards, that need to be issued is being reduced, allowing gaming establishments to reduce the costs of issuing IC cards for members.

(B-1-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.
The amusement store device is configured to be controlled based on the user identification information so that the user's saved ball information corresponding to the user identification information (for example, the corresponding amusement store's hall member ID is obtained based on user identification information such as a global member ID or smartphone 9900, and the user's saved ball number/medal number stored in the amusement store's hall computer based on the hall member ID) is made available.

According to the configuration of the present invention, various information can be appropriately handled, and once a user has registered as a member once, the user's membership information is shared at each gaming establishment, so that the user can play as a member at multiple gaming establishments with a single membership registration procedure, and the second and subsequent membership registration procedures at each gaming establishment can be completed extremely easily, thereby reducing the burden on the user and the gaming establishment staff. In addition, since the hall member ID of each gaming establishment is stored in association with the global member ID assigned by the user when he or she registered as a member for the first time, any gaming establishment can know the hall member ID of the user simply by obtaining the global member ID, and as a result, the ball information of the user stored at the gaming establishment in association with the hall member ID can be easily obtained.

(B-1-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.
The gaming store device (e.g., hall computer 9100) is configured to be controlled based on the user identification information so as to be able to update the ball storage information of users at multiple gaming stores that corresponds to the user identification information (e.g., so as to enable the transfer of balls between the same user or different users at two gaming stores).

According to the configuration of the present invention, various information can be appropriately handled, and once a user has registered as a member once, the user's membership information is shared at each gaming establishment, so the user can play as a member at multiple gaming establishments with a single membership registration procedure, and the second and subsequent membership registration procedures at each gaming establishment can be completed extremely easily, resulting in a reduction in the burden on the user and the gaming establishment staff. In addition, the hall member ID of each gaming establishment is stored in association with the global member ID assigned by the user when he or she registered as a member for the first time, so that any gaming establishment can grasp the hall member ID of the user simply by acquiring the global member ID. As a result, the user's saved ball information stored at each gaming establishment in association with the hall member ID can be easily acquired, and saved balls/medals can be easily exchanged between the same user or different users.

(B-1-7) The seventh aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth aspect.
The gaming establishment device (e.g., hall computer 9100) is controlled to determine a sound corresponding to the user identification information based on the user identification information, and to provide the determined sound to the same user across multiple gaming establishments (e.g., to provide a sound related to the sound provided to the user from the hall computer in gaming establishment A to the same user who has moved to gaming establishment B),
Furthermore, the determined sound is synthesized with a sound generated based on information transmitted from a gaming machine at the gaming facility (for example, light information corresponding to sounds related to the effects of the gaming machine) and is configured to be provided to the same user.

According to the configuration of the present invention, various information can be appropriately handled, and once a user has registered as a member once, the user's membership information is shared at each gaming establishment, so that the user can play as a member at multiple gaming establishments with a single membership registration procedure, and the second and subsequent membership registration procedures at each gaming establishment can be completed extremely easily, thereby reducing the burden on the user and the gaming establishment staff. In addition, the hall member ID of each gaming establishment is stored in association with the global member ID assigned by the user when he or she registered as a member for the first time, so that any gaming establishment can know the hall member ID of the user simply by acquiring the global member ID, and as a result, by linking the hall computers of each gaming establishment, audio related to the user can be continuously provided no matter which gaming establishment the user is at.

According to the present invention, a gaming system capable of appropriately handling various types of information is provided. Furthermore, in the gaming system of the present invention, once a user has registered as a member once, that user's membership information is shared among each gaming establishment, allowing the user to play as a member at multiple gaming establishments with a single membership registration procedure, and the second and subsequent membership registration procedures at each gaming establishment can be completed extremely simply, ultimately reducing the burden on users and gaming establishment staff.

In addition, according to the present invention, since the membership registration procedure can be completed without going to the gaming establishment, the user can complete the membership registration procedure at the gaming establishment extremely easily, which results in a reduction in the burden on the user and the gaming establishment staff. In addition, in this case, the membership registration procedure can be completed without meeting face-to-face (without meeting the gaming establishment staff), which makes it possible to effectively guide users to register as members.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, a storage medium such as a mobile terminal or IC card that a user can own can be used as a common membership card, so that the user can easily manage membership cards from multiple gaming establishments since they can be stored in one place, while gaming establishments can save on IC card issuance costs due to the increasing use of mobile terminals due to the widespread use of mobile terminals, and even if IC cards are issued, the overall number of cards issued can be reduced.

Seventeenth Embodiment
Next, the configuration of the gaming system PS400 according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 237, the gaming system PS400 of the present application is configured to include at least a dedicated unit 10020 that is individually connected to the gaming machines 10010 installed in the gaming establishment, and a member management server 10700 of a global member management system. Note that the gaming system PS400 basically includes a dedicated unit 10020 that is connected to the gaming machines 10010 installed in each of multiple gaming establishments.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine 10010 is, for example, a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, and here, as described in the second embodiment, etc., it is an enclosed pachinko machine (i.e., a gaming machine in which the main control circuit itself electromagnetically manages the gaming media held by the player and allows play by circulating enclosed gaming balls) or an enclosed pachislot machine (i.e., a medalless gaming machine in which the main control circuit itself electromagnetically manages the gaming media held by the player and allows play without medals).

With regard to enclosed pachislot machines, if the "game medium" had a physical form, it would not exist in itself; however, in this embodiment, even objects that are electromagnetically managed are expressed as "game medium" as described above. For example, expressions such as lending game media to an enclosed pachislot machine represent sending data corresponding to the value of the game medium to the enclosed pachislot machine, and controlling the enclosed pachislot machine to play the game based on the value of the received data. Conversely, data corresponding to the value of the game medium acquired on the enclosed pachislot machine is sent to the dedicated unit 10020 by the settlement (counting) button of the enclosed pachislot machine, etc., and is treated in the dedicated unit 10020 as a quantity of game medium according to the value of the received data.

In addition, each gaming facility is equipped with a hall computer 10130, which has a hall DB 10150 for storing information about hall members, and the member management server 10700 has a member management DB 10750 for storing information about global members, etc.

A dedicated unit 10020 is connected to the hall computer 10130 installed in each gaming facility, and information on the corresponding gaming machine 10010 is transmitted to the hall computer 10130 via the dedicated unit 10020. In addition, as in the 16th embodiment, the hall computer 10130 is connected to a POS terminal 10500 and a hall terminal 10600, etc., installed in each gaming facility.

In the gaming system PS400 of the present application, as shown in the 16th embodiment, a user (individual) registers as a global member. Through this procedure for registering as a global member, the global member ID (or storage medium identifier) stored in the smartphone 10900 or member card 10920 that the user can own is stored in the member management DB 10750, where information about the user is associated with the global member ID. In addition, the hall DB 10150 of the hall computer 10130 stores a hall member information table (not shown) as in the 16th embodiment, which stores information about the member associated with the hall member ID numbered at the gaming facility, and the correspondence between the global member ID, hall member ID, and gaming facility ID is stored in the ID correspondence table 10752 (not shown), as in the 16th embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the term "member card" or "member card 10920" is used, it refers to a member card that can be used at multiple gaming establishments and is managed by a global member management system, and is different from a member card issued independently by each gaming establishment.

In this embodiment, the term "user" includes a user (individual) of the gaming system PS400 of this embodiment, and this concept of user (individual) also includes a person who has not yet played on the gaming machine 10010 at a gaming establishment and cannot be called a player, and a person who has only completed membership registration without visiting a gaming establishment. In addition, for example, when using the test mode or maintenance mode of a dedicated unit, there is a possibility that a gaming medium may be lent to the gaming machine by a user who is not a player, so that administrators and inspectors other than the above players and pre-playing persons may also be included in the term "user."

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the global member ID stored in the smartphone 10900, the member card 10920, etc. can be used at multiple gaming facilities, regardless of whether the multiple gaming facilities belong to the same chain. The global member ID can be used in common between multiple gaming facilities that are in different chains.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a user completes the membership registration procedure (for a global member), a new global member ID is stored in the member management DB 10750 of the member management server 10700, and by using this common global member ID at multiple gaming establishments, the user can play at those multiple gaming establishments as the same user (global member). Once a user completes the membership registration procedure once at one gaming establishment, they can very easily complete the membership registration procedure (second and subsequent membership registration procedures) at other gaming establishments.

In addition, users can also complete the membership registration procedure without going through the procedures at the gaming establishment (i.e., without actually going to the gaming establishment), in which case the user can complete the membership registration procedure at the gaming establishment (first and subsequent membership registration procedures) extremely easily.

When a user performs the member registration procedure without going through the procedure at an amusement facility, it means, for example, that the user accesses the global member management system using a smartphone 10900 or a PC (personal computer) at home and performs the member registration procedure in advance, or that the user accesses the global member management system using a smartphone 10900 or a PC at home via the hall computer 10130 at the amusement facility or other related computers (web servers, etc.) and performs the member registration procedure in advance. In addition, the member management server 10700 and the hall computer 10130 are connected via a network including, for example, the Internet. The convenience of the member registration procedure for such global members is the same as that of the 16th embodiment described above.

As described above, the hall computer 10130 is equipped with a hall DB 10150, which stores tables containing various data necessary for the management and operation of the gaming facility.

The hall computer 10130 of each gaming facility stores personal information such as the name and address of users who have been registered as global members in a hall member information table in the hall DB 10150, in association with the hall member ID managed by the gaming facility. In addition, the hall computer 10130 obtains information about users who play games using the gaming machines 10010, for example by receiving consumption information and operation information from the dedicated unit 10020, and accumulates and manages this data in the hall DB 10150.

Here, "consumption information" includes not only information regarding consumption behavior grasped by a user through operation of the dedicated unit 10020 (for example, information regarding the lending of gaming media using a specified payment method), but also information regarding operations for managing the number of gaming media acquired by a user through play as saved balls or saved medals (or held balls or medals).

The "operation information" also includes ball information, which is the result of playing on the gaming machine 10010. Here, the ball information directly means the number of gaming media paid out (electromagnetically), but in this embodiment, the concept also includes the degree of the privilege given to the player, such as the difference (net increase) between the number of paid out minus the number of medals bet or the number of game balls inserted (for example, the degree to which the player gained (the degree to which the gaming establishment lost) or the degree to which the player lost (the degree to which the gaming establishment gained), the degree of continuity of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, or a series of advantageous zones, etc.), or the degree of gambling assumed by a combination of these. In addition to the performance information as described above, the ball information also includes installation information, fraud/error information, etc.

Therefore, for example, by receiving consumption information, the hall computer 10130 can grasp the situation in which the user lent game media to the game machine 10010 (e.g., the lending of game media via the smartphone 10900 or member card 10920, the payment method, etc.), the number of game media acquired by the user, and how the number of game media acquired by the user was saved as balls or medals (or held balls or medals). In addition, by receiving operation information, it is possible to manage ball information for each game machine 10010. Furthermore, the hall computer 10130 controls devices such as the POS terminal 10500 so that the player can exchange the game media acquired by the user for the prize of his or her choice according to the value of the game media.

The hall computer 10130 is also connected to the member management server 10700 of the global member management system, and receives personal information (such as name and address) of global members from the member management server 10700 and transmits it to the member management server 10700.

Communication between the hall computer 10130 and the member management server 10700 is carried out using an encrypted network (e.g., a VPN (Virtual Private Network)) or encrypted data, etc.

As described above, the dedicated unit 10020 is connected to the hall computer 10130 and transmits consumption information and operation information related to the connected gaming machine 10010 to the hall computer 10130. Furthermore, the dedicated unit 10020 is connected to a management computer 10200 located in the gaming facility, and transmits consumption information and operation information (e.g., in close to real time) to a member management server 10700 of the global member management system via the management computer 10200 and a specified network (e.g., a network including the Internet, etc.). Note that communication between the management computer 10200 and the member management server 10700 is performed using an encrypted network (e.g., a VPN (Virtual Private Network)) or encrypted data, etc.

The dedicated unit 10020 also provides the gaming value required for play to the gaming machine 10010 through operation by the player, and the gaming machine 10010 manages the gaming value electromagnetically. The player plays on the gaming machine 10010 based on the gaming value, and is awarded a privilege based on the results of the game (e.g., gaming value is awarded).

The gaming value held by the player is electromagnetically managed by a gaming value management device (e.g., a frame control unit or a medal count control unit) connected to the main control board of the gaming machine 10010, but the main control board may be configured to perform this management (see Figures 236 and 238).

The POS terminal 10500 is installed at a counter or the like of an amusement facility, and the staff of the amusement facility operate this POS terminal 10500 to respond to users' prize exchanges, etc. For example, the smartphone 10900 or member card 10920 or the like presented by the user is read with a contactless card reader or the like, the number of balls/medals held and the number of balls/medals saved associated with the smartphone 10900 or member card 10920 or the like are ascertained, and a prize of the corresponding value is provided to the user.

In this way, at the amusement store, the POS terminal 10500 functions to exchange the prizes for in-store prizes (general prizes) and special prizes displayed in the in-store prize display corner of the amusement store.

The hall terminal 10600 is placed in the amusement facility and allows predetermined operations to be performed by users of the amusement facility, the amusement facility's staff, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, a smartphone 10900 that can be owned by a user is shown as a device for performing the membership registration procedure as a global member, or as a storage medium for storing a global member ID, but other mobile terminals such as mobile phones, PDAs, feature phones, tablet terminals, and mobile PCs may also be used. Furthermore, an IC card such as a membership card 10920 is shown as a storage medium for storing a global member ID, but this may also be various types of storage media, including magnetic cards, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned smartphone 10900 and member card 10920 are equipped with, for example, a contactless IC chip based on the near field communication standard (NFC), and the dedicated unit 10020 and POS terminal 10500 can read information stored in the smartphone 10900 and member card 10920 (including, for example, a global member ID and a unique ID of the contactless IC card, etc.) using a contactless IC card reader or the like.

The member management server 10700 stores personal information of global members, such as their names and addresses, in the member management DB 10750. As described above, gaming information based on rentals and game results on the gaming machine 10010 is obtained, for example, by receiving consumption information and operation information from the dedicated unit 10020, and this data is accumulated and managed in the member management DB 10750.

Furthermore, when a user (global member) uses the dedicated unit 10020 to instruct a payment (e.g., a payment related to the lending of gaming media), the member management server 10700 transmits a message to execute the payment to the external payment server 10800. When lending gaming media to the gaming machine 10010 (i.e., providing gaming value), the user can operate the dedicated unit 10020 to instruct cashless payment and purchase gaming value. In this case, data for authentication and payment procedures may be sent and received between the dedicated unit 10020 and the corresponding payment server 10800 via the member management server 10700.

Note that there are various patterns for cashless payment, and data transmission for authentication and payment procedures does not necessarily take place between the computers mentioned above. This is merely one example of data transmission related to cashless payment.

The member management server 10700 also transmits predetermined operation information regarding each gaming machine to the external gaming machine information server 10810. Such transmission of information corresponds to the transmission from the center computer to the gaming machine information center described in relation to FIG. 236 in the 16th embodiment. That is, the center computer and gaming machine information center in FIG. 236 correspond to the member management server 10700 and gaming machine information server 10810 in FIG. 237, respectively. In addition, in the description of FIG. 236, the gaming information transmitted from the center computer to the gaming machine information center corresponds to the operation information of this embodiment, and in the case of an enclosed pachinko machine, for example, includes the total number of game balls fired, the total number of game balls acquired, the payout rate, the ratio of special features, the number of jackpots, etc., and in the case of an enclosed pachislot machine, for example, includes the total number of coins inserted, the total number of coins paid out, the total number of special features paid out, the number of games played, etc., as well as the total cumulative special feature ratio, the consecutive special feature ratio, the advantageous zone ratio, etc.

Furthermore, in order to compensate the global member for the saved balls, the member management server 10700 transmits the personal information of the global member and the saved ball information to the saved ball compensation fund's saved ball information server 10820 for the saved ball compensation fund for gaming establishments that are members of the saved ball compensation fund. Such transmission of information corresponds to the transmission from the center computer to the saved ball compensation fund described with reference to FIG. 236 in the 16th embodiment. That is, the center computer and the saved ball compensation fund in FIG. 236 correspond to the member management server 10700 and the saved ball information server 10820 in FIG. 237, respectively. The information transmitted from the member management server 10700 to the saved ball information server 10820 is, for example, the personal information of the global member (name, address, etc.) and the saved ball information, and the saved ball information is based on the consumption information received by the member management server 10700 from the dedicated unit 10020. For example, if an arcade goes bankrupt and is unable to refund saved balls/medals, the saved ball compensation fund will notify users of how to receive compensation for the value of their saved balls based on their saved ball information.

Note that the configuration of the gaming system PS400 shown in FIG. 237 is merely an example, and similar systems can be constructed with various other configurations. For example, the hall computer 10130 and the member management server 10700 can be divided into multiple computers depending on the functions, etc. Also, the hall computer 10130 and the member management server 10700 can each be configured to cooperate with other computers to transmit or receive specified information. Also, the dedicated unit 10020 can transmit consumption information and operation information to the member management server 10700 of the global member management system without going through the management computer 10200 or through other computers, etc.

In addition, the multiple gaming establishments shown in FIG. 237 do not have to be affiliated establishments, as described above, and can be configured as a collection of gaming establishments that are not necessarily operated by the same entity, and are not necessarily operated by the same entity.

[Configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the configuration of the gaming machine 10010 will be described with reference to Fig. 238. The gaming machine 10010 described here is an enclosed type pachislot machine (a medalless gaming machine).

Figure 238 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine 10010 equipped with the main control board 10011.

The gaming machine 10010 is configured to be able to execute games by having various components shown in FIG. 238. The dedicated unit 10020 is connected to the gaming center's management computer 10200, for example, via a LAN line, as shown in FIG. 237, and is configured to be able to transmit data to the management computer 10200.

The dedicated unit 10020 is also connected to the main control board 10011 via the game ball connection terminal board 10043 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally with the main control board 10011. The dedicated unit 10020 performs the necessary communication with the main control board 10011 to perform operations such as lending game value (i.e., providing game value required for a player to perform a betting operation for game value), granting game value (i.e., providing the granted game value to a player when a winning combination related to the grant of game value is won (the combination is established)), and electromagnetically recording the game value provided by these operations.

The dedicated unit 10020 is also configured to be able to transmit operation information, including ball payout information, and consumption information, including information related to the lending of gaming value, to an external management computer 10200 via a communication device.

The gaming machine 10010 has a main control board 10011, a sub-control board 10012, a door relay board 10013, and a sub-relay board 10014. The main control board 10011 and the door relay board 10013, the door relay board 10013 and the sub-relay board 10014, and the sub-relay board 10014 and the sub-control board 10012 are electrically connected to each other. In addition, the main control board 10011 and the sub-control board 10012 are electrically connected to each other so that one-way serial communication is possible from the main control board 10011 to the sub-control board 10012 via the door relay board 10013 and the sub-relay board 10014.

The main control board 10011 has a main control unit 10011a as a game control means (game control unit) that controls the progress of the game, and a medal count control unit 10011b as a game value management device (game value control unit) that controls the management of the game value.

Here, in FIG. 238, the main control unit 10011a and the medal count control unit 10011b are mounted on the same main control board 10011, but they may be mounted on separate boards (configured as separate boards) and electrically connected to each other so that they perform the same functions.

The sub-control board 10012 is a performance control board that controls performances, and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The door relay board 10013 is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board for relaying between various devices and the main control board 10011, and between the main control board 10011 and the sub-control board 10012. The sub-relay board 10014 is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board for relaying between various devices connected to the sub-relay board 10014 and the sub-control board 10012.

The gaming machine 10010 also has a power supply unit 10015 including a power supply board 10015a and a power switch 10015b.

The gaming machine 10010 also has a reel unit 10021, a reset switch 10022, a setting key switch 10023, and an adjustment switch 10024, which are electrically connected to the main control unit 10011a. These may also be connected to the main control unit 10011a via a door relay board 10013. As long as control is performed smoothly, they may also be connected to the medal count control unit 10011b.

The reel unit 10021 is mainly composed of three reels: 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrical reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the periphery of the reel body, and a plurality of (for example, 20) patterns are drawn on the reel band at a predetermined interval along the rotation direction of the reel. The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each can rotate vertically at a constant speed. The reset switch 10022 can detect a reset operation by the manager of the gaming facility. The reset operation is an operation for releasing various error states. The setting key switch 10023 is used when changing the setting value of the gaming machine 10010 (for example, six levels of setting 1 to setting 6) (setting change) or when checking the setting of the gaming machine 10010 (setting check). Additionally, the settlement switch 10024 detects the pressing of a settlement button (not shown) that accepts settlement operations to return (settle) credited medals.

However, since the gaming machine 10010 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine, when the settlement switch 10024 detects that the corresponding settlement button (not shown) has been pressed, data indicating the number of credited medals is sent to the dedicated unit 10020 via the gaming ball etc. connection terminal board 10043 (credit settlement is performed).

The gaming machine 10010 also has a start switch 10031, a return switch 10032, a 1BET switch 10033, a MAXBET switch 10034, a stop switch board 10035, a door opening/closing switch 10036, and a game information display unit 10037, which are electrically connected to the main control unit 10011a via the door relay board 10013. These may also be connected directly to the main control unit 10011a without going through the door relay board 10013. As long as control is performed smoothly, they may also be connected to the medal count control unit 10011b.

The start switch 10031 detects the operation of the start lever to start the game. The 1BET switch 10033 detects the pressing of the 1BET button, and the MAXBET switch 10034 detects the pressing of the MAXBET button. The stop switch board 10035 is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and detects the stop operation of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R to stop the rotation of each reel. The door opening/closing switch 10036 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, and monitors the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD by turning on when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state and turning off when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state.

The return switch 10032 and the corresponding return button (not shown) are configured as a return operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the player's return operation, and when the return switch 10032 detects that the corresponding return button has been pressed, the number of medals bet is returned as credits (bet settlement is performed).

The gaming machine 10010 also has a medal count display unit 10041, a medal lending display unit 10042 including a medal lending operation board 10042a, a lending switch 10042b, and a return switch 10042c, a game ball etc. connection terminal board 10043, and a medal count clear switch 10044, all of which are electrically connected to the medal count control unit 10011b. These may also be connected to the medal count control unit 10011b via the door relay board 10013. As long as control is performed smoothly, they may also be connected to the main control unit 10011a.

The game ball etc. connection terminal board 10043 outputs operation information (e.g., medal insertion signal, medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, security signal, etc.) to the outside. The game ball etc. connection terminal board 10043 is equipped with a connection mechanism (not shown) for connecting the dedicated unit 10020 and the medal count control unit 10011b.

The medal count clear switch 10044 is a switch that can detect an initialization operation (e.g., a press operation) when an administrator at the gaming facility clears (initializes) the number of medals credited in the gaming machine 10010, and when a press operation is performed on the medal count clear switch 10044, it outputs a detection signal (medal count clear signal) to the medal count control unit 10011b. In this case, the medal count control unit 10011b controls the medal count display unit 10041 based on the medal count clear signal so that the display of the 5-digit 7-segment LED for credit display provided in the medal count display unit 10041 becomes "00000" (number of credits = 0).

The gaming machine 10010 also has a display device 10051, which is electrically connected to the sub-control board 10012. The display device 10051 may be connected to the sub-control board 10012 via the sub-relay board 10014. Here, the display device 10051 is a main display device or a sub-display device that displays performance images, etc.

The gaming machine 10010 also has a speaker group 10052, an LED drive board 10053, a performance switch 10054, and an operation switch 10055, which are electrically connected to the sub-control board 10012 via the sub-relay board 10014. Note that these may also be directly connected to the sub-control board 10012 without going through the sub-relay board 10014.

The speaker group 10052 is a speaker that outputs sounds such as sound effects and background music. The LED drive board 10053 is a board on which the drive circuits for each LED board 10056 are mounted, and each LED board 10056 is a group of lamps and LEDs that output light related to effects and the like. The effect switch 10054 and the operation switch 10055 detect the pressing of the effect button and operation button operated by the player for effects.

The game information display unit 10037 described above is configured to be able to display various game information, and its display operation is controlled by a main control microprocessor (main control circuit) in the main control unit 10011a. The game information display unit 10037 can be installed in any position as long as it is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be installed on the base of the front door of the gaming machine 10010.

The gaming information display unit 10037 is provided with a payout display section for displaying information on the number of gaming media paid out (the amount of gaming value awarded), for example. The payout display section is composed of a two-digit seven-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player.

In addition, the game information display unit 10037 is provided with LEDs for displaying the number of bets, labeled "START," "REPLAY," "1 BET," "2 BET," and "3 BET," as lamps that indicate game operation information.

For example, when the number of gaming media bets (number of inserted coins) is 0 (all line LEDs are off), pressing the 1 BET button lights up the "1 BET" line LED, and when the 1 BET button is pressed again, the "1 BET" and "2 BET" line LEDs light up, and when the 1 BET button is pressed again, all the line LEDs from "1 BET" to "3 BET" light up and the "START" line LED lights up. At this time, each time the 1 BET button is pressed, the value of the number of gaming media stored (number of credits) displayed by the 5-digit 7-segment LED in the medal count display unit 10041 described below is decremented by 1.

For example, when the number of gaming media bets (number of inserted coins) is 0 (all line LEDs are off), pressing the MAX BET button 6a will light up all of the line LEDs for "1 BET" to "3 BET" and also light up the "START" line LED. At this time, with one bet operation, the value of the number of gaming media stored (number of credits) displayed on the 5-digit 7-segment LED is reduced by 3.

Furthermore, for example, if a replay role is won in the previous game, the "START" and "REPLAY" line LEDs will light up. At this time, the value of the number of game media stored (number of credits) displayed on the 5-digit 7-segment LED will not be subtracted.

The game information display unit 10037 is also provided with an instruction display section for displaying information on the stop operation to be notified to the player in a situation where the information on the stop operation is notified to the player (for example, in an AT state). The instruction display section is composed of a three-digit seven-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player.

The gaming machine 10010 of this embodiment may also be an enclosed pachinko machine, but a detailed description of the configuration of this gaming machine will be omitted here. A frame control unit is arranged on the main control board of the enclosed pachinko machine as a gaming value management device, and this gaming value management device controls the management of the gaming value. In addition, operation information including ball output information is transmitted from the main control board to the dedicated unit 10020 via a gaming ball etc. connection terminal board.

[Dedicated unit configuration]
Next, the configuration of the dedicated unit 10020 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 239. Fig. 239 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the dedicated unit 10020.

The main CPU (central processing unit) 12040 reads out the control program stored in the ROM (read only memory) 12041 and executes processes such as medal lending. Various data related to the processes are stored in the RAM (random access memory) 12042.

The main CPU 12040 stores the balance data read from the information card via the information card reader/writer 12022 in the RAM 12042. In addition, based on the storage medium identifier read from the smartphone 10900 or the member card 10920 via the non-contact IC card reader/writer 12023, the main CPU 12040 accesses the member management DB 10750 (balance management table (not shown)) of the member management server 10700 to grasp the balance data of the global member.

When a user operates the "loan" operation button on the operation unit 12034, the main CPU 12040 loans gaming media for the specified amount to the gaming machine 10010 and updates the balance data by subtracting the amount of the loaned gaming media from the balance data. Gaming media can be loaned to the gaming machine 10010 from the balls/medals held or saved balls/medals kept track of based on the information card, smartphone 10900, and membership card 10920.

When the user operates the "return" operation button on the operation unit 12034, the main CPU 12040 ejects the information card inserted into the information card reader/writer 12022 from the card insertion slot 12032 (not shown). At this time, if the held balls/medals and balance data are stored in the RAM 12042, this data is written to the information card.

When a user inserts a bill into the bill validator 12024, the main CPU 12040 stores the bill recognition result as balance data in the RAM 12042. When the "loan" button is operated on the operation unit 12034, if the amount specified by the user is smaller than the balance data, the main CPU 12040 loans gaming media of the specified amount to the gaming machine 10010 and updates the balance data by subtracting the amount of the loaned gaming media from the balance data.

When a user who has logged in using the smartphone 10900 or member card 10920 operates the operation unit 12034 to press the "Payment" button to instruct cashless payment, the main CPU 12040 makes the payment of the specified payment amount, and if the payment is completed successfully, for example, adds the balance data to the balance management table of the member management DB 10750. Here, when the "Lend" button is operated on the operation unit 12034, if the amount specified by the user is smaller than the balance data, gaming media for the specified amount is lent to the gaming machine 10010, and the balance data is updated by subtracting the amount of the lent gaming media from the balance data.

In addition, if the user has balance data of a predetermined amount or more at the time of logging in with the smartphone 10900 or the member card 10920, when the user operates the operation unit 12034 to press the "loan" button, the main CPU 12040 loans gaming media worth the predetermined amount to the gaming machine 10010. The main CPU 12040 then updates the balance data by subtracting the amount of the loaned gaming media from the balance data (for example, updating the balance data stored in the balance management table of the member management DB 10750).

In addition, when the settlement (counting) button or the like is pressed on the gaming machine 10010 and the main CPU 12040 receives data indicating the number (value) of gaming media managed by the gaming machine 10010, if the user is logged in as a global member using the smartphone 10900 or membership card 10920, the main CPU 12040 stores the number of gaming media as held balls/medals in the hall DB 10150 of the hall computer 10130.

In addition, if the user is not a global member and has not inserted an information card into the card insertion slot 12032, the number of game media is stored in RAM 12042 as the balls/medals held, and when the return button is pressed, the number of game media is written as the balls/medals held on a new information card, which is then ejected from the card insertion slot 12032.

When a user operates the "Saved Balls" button on the operation unit 12034 while holding balls/medals, if the user is logged in as a global member using the smartphone 10900 or membership card 10920, the main CPU 12040 stores the number of game media as saved balls/medals in the hall DB 10150 of the hall computer 10130. In this case, the main CPU 12040 also transmits the number of saved game media to the member management server 10700 together with personal information such as the global member ID.

In addition, when a user operates the "pay out held balls" button on the operation unit 12034 while holding held balls/medals, the main CPU 12040 controls the gaming machine 10010 to lend out a specified number of game media from the number of held balls/medals.

In addition, when a user operates the "Saved Ball Payout" button on the operation unit 12034 while holding saved balls/medals, the main CPU 12040 controls the gaming machine 10010 to lend out a specified number of game media stored as saved balls/medals.

The main CPU 12040 also uses the infrared LED 12031B of the LED unit 12031 as a monitoring light source, reflects infrared light from the infrared LED 10031B off the user, and captures it with the camera 12035. The main CPU 12040 stores the image captured by the camera 12035 in the RAM 12042, and detects the presence or change of users based on this image. This detection process is performed at all times. If the user's status changes to a non-detection (absent) state and the information card inserted from the card insertion slot 12032 remains inserted, or if the amount data of the bill inserted from the bill insertion slot 12033 has a balance, the main CPU 12040 can alert the user who is about to leave by issuing a warning sound or warning voice via the speaker 12048. The warning voice may be something like "You have left your card."

When there is balance data corresponding to the storage medium identifier read from the smartphone 10900 or the member card 10920 via the non-contact IC card reader/writer 12023, if the user operates the operation unit 12034 (for example, by operating the "loan" button), the main CPU 12040 loans the specified amount of gaming media corresponding to this operation to the gaming machine 10010, and updates the balance data, for example, by subtracting the amount of the gaming media paid out from the balance data stored in the balance management table of the member management DB 10750.

The main CPU 12040 also communicates with the hall computer 10130 via the interface 12047, and the hall computer 10130 manages the balls/medals held and balance data on information cards (non-member cards), as well as information on hall members.

The main CPU 12040 also communicates with the gaming machine 10010 via the interface 12047, and transmits and receives data related to the lending of gaming media and the movement of held balls (when gaming media acquired on the gaming machine 10010 are settled (counted), they are returned from the gaming machine 10010 to the dedicated unit 10020). It also receives operation information from the gaming machine 10010.

Furthermore, the main CPU 12040 communicates with the gaming machine 10010 and with the management computer 10200 via the interface 12047, and transmits to the management computer 10200 operation information received from the gaming machine 10010 and consumption information including information related to the lending of gaming media, receipt of held balls, saving balls, paying out held balls, and paying out saved balls.

The main CPU 12040 also periodically captures facial images of the user via the camera 12035 and stores them as facial data in the RAM 12042. If the previously stored facial image is compared with the currently stored facial image and it is determined that they are not the same person, the main CPU 12040 determines that the user has changed and performs processing accordingly.

[Configuration of smartphones, etc.]
The configurations of the smartphone 10900 and the member card 10920 according to this embodiment are similar to those of the smartphone 9900 and the member card 9920 according to the sixteenth embodiment. The configuration of the hall computer 10130 is also generally the same as that of the hall computer 9100 according to the sixteenth embodiment, but differs from the hall computer 9100 according to the sixteenth embodiment in that the present embodiment also receives information from the gaming machine 10010 via a dedicated unit 10020.

[Functions of the dedicated unit]
Next, a functional overview of the dedicated unit 10020 will be described with reference to Fig. 240. Fig. 240 is a functional block diagram of the dedicated unit 10020.

The dedicated unit 10020 includes a storage medium control unit 12051, a lending control unit 12052, a settlement control unit 12053, a ball holding management unit 12054, a ball storage management unit 12055, a screen input/output control unit 12056, a data transmission/reception control unit 12057, and a network I/F unit 12058. Note that in the example of FIG. 240, the main functional units in the dedicated unit 10020 and the functional units related to the present invention are shown, and notation and explanations of other functional units are omitted as appropriate.

When an information card is inserted into the card insertion slot 12032, the storage medium control unit 12051 reads the information stored in the information card (balance data, number of balls/medals held, etc.) and stores the information in the RAM 12042. When a global member ID or the like is read from the smartphone 10900 or the member card 10920 by the non-contact IC card reader/writer 12023, the storage medium control unit 12051 obtains information corresponding to the global member ID or the like (balance data, number of balls/medals held, number of saved balls/medals, etc.). When the user operates the "return" operation button of the operation unit 12034, if an information card is inserted into the card insertion slot 12032, the information card inserted into the card insertion slot 12032 is ejected, and at this time, the balance data or the like stored in the RAM 12042 is stored (updated) on the information card. If no information card is inserted, a new information card is issued and the balance data, etc. stored in RAM 12042 is stored (updated) on the information card. Note that if the balance data and number of game media on the information card are both 0 and it is a visitor card (non-member card), the information card is taken into the dedicated unit 10020.

When a user operates the "loan" operation button on the operation unit 12034, the loan control unit 12052 controls the information card to loan the gaming medium to the gaming machine 10010 from the balance data, etc. stored in the RAM 12042, and then subtracts the corresponding balance data, etc. in the RAM 12042. ... balance management table of the member management DB 10750, for example.

When a user presses a settlement (counting) button or the like on the gaming machine 10010, the settlement control unit 12053 receives data from the gaming machine 10010 indicating the number (value) of gaming media managed by the gaming machine 10010, and reflects this in the number of balls/medals held in the RAM 12042. At this time, the smartphone 10900 or member card 10920 is also read, and if the user has logged in as a global member, the settlement control unit 12053 updates the information on the number of balls/medals held stored in the gaming facility's hall DB 10150.

When a user operates the "pay out held balls" operation button on the operation unit 12034, the held ball management unit 12054 controls the information card so that a predetermined number of gaming media is loaned to the gaming machine 10010 based on the number of held balls/medals in the RAM 12042. The user can play on the gaming machine 10010 using the gaming media thus (electromagnetically) loaned. Also, at this time, if the smartphone 10900 or member card 10920 is read and the user is logged in as a global member, the number of held balls/medals stored in the gaming facility's hall DB 10150 is deducted according to the quantity of loaned gaming media.

When the user operates the "Saved Ball Payout" operation button on the operation unit 12034, and the smartphone 10900 or member card 10920 is read and the user is logged in as a global member, the saved ball management unit 12055 controls the loaning of a predetermined number of gaming media to the gaming machine 10010 based on the number of saved balls/medals stored in the gaming establishment's hall DB 10150. The user can play on the gaming machine 10010 using the gaming media thus (electromagnetically) loaned. At this time, the number of saved balls/medals stored in the gaming establishment's hall DB 10150 is also deducted according to the quantity of loaned gaming media. Furthermore, when the user operates the "save balls" operation button on the operation unit 12034 (in this case, logging in is performed using the smartphone 10900 or the member card 10920), the saved ball management unit 12055 updates the number of saved balls/medals stored in the arcade DB 10150 of the gaming facility based on the specified number of held balls/medals. The saved ball management unit 12055 also updates the saved ball management table 10756 in the member management DB 10750 in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of saved balls/medals.

When the user performs a touch operation on the operation unit 12034, the screen input/output control unit 12056 transmits a command based on the operation to the main CPU 12040, and the main CPU 12040 controls each functional unit of the dedicated unit 10020 to execute a predetermined process based on the received command. The screen input/output control unit 12056 controls each functional unit to display the processing results on the operation unit 12034 according to the control of the main CPU 12040.

The data transmission/reception control unit 12057 is connected to the gaming machine 10010, and transmits and receives data related to the lending of (electromagnetic) gaming media and the settlement of gaming media from the gaming machine 10010 between the dedicated unit 10020 and the gaming machine 10010, and further receives data related to operation information from the gaming machine 10010. The data transmission/reception control unit 12057 also transmits consumption information including information related to the lending of gaming media from the dedicated unit 10020, the settlement of gaming media from the gaming machine 10010, lending of held balls/held medals, saved balls/medals, lending of saved balls/medals, etc., to the management computer 10200 for transmission to the member management server 10700.

The data transmission/reception control unit 12057 also transmits the operation information received from the gaming machine to the management computer 10200 for transmission to the member management server 10700. The data transmission/reception control unit 12057 also transmits information regarding the addition of saved balls/medals by global members (hall members) and the consumption of saved balls/medals (consumption for the lending of gaming media) to the hall computer 10130, and also transmits information regarding the addition of held balls/medals and the subtraction for the lending of gaming media to the hall computer 10130. Furthermore, the data transmission/reception control unit 12057 also transmits operation information received from the gaming machine to the hall computer 10130 as necessary.

The network I/F (interface) unit 12058 connects to a network and controls data transmission and reception with the other computer. Here, the network may be configured as a network including the Internet or a wireless network (the same applies to the network I/F units of other devices, so further explanation of the network I/F units will be omitted).

[Membership management server functions]
Next, a functional overview of the member management server 10700 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 241. Fig. 241 is a functional block diagram of the member management server 10700. The member management server 10700 includes a global member management unit 10711, a member registration control unit 10712, an application control unit 10713, a payment management unit 10714, an operation information management unit 10715, a consumption information management unit 10716, a web control unit 10717, an email control unit 10718, and a network I/F unit 10719.

The member management server 10700 also stores a member management DB 10750, which includes a global member information table 10751 that stores information about global members, an ID correspondence table 10752 that manages the correspondence between global member IDs and hall member IDs, a payment information table 10753 that stores information about payments made by global members, a consumption history table 10754 that accumulates and stores consumption information, an operation information table 10755 that stores operation information from the gaming machine 10010, and a saved ball management table 10756 that stores information about saved balls for global members. In addition, a payment terms management table, a balance management table, etc. are stored in the member management DB 10750.

In response to an inquiry from the hall computer 10130, the global member management unit 10711 replies with the hall member ID of that amusement facility that corresponds to the global member ID. Such a hall member ID that corresponds to the global member ID is part of the "information about the user." At this time, if necessary, the global member management unit 10711 also retrieves information about the user provided during the member registration procedure from the global member information table 10751 and transmits it to the hall computer 10130. In response to an inquiry from the dedicated unit 10020, the global member ID authentication result is also returned.

When a user performs a membership registration procedure from a smartphone 10900 owned by the user, a PC at home, etc., the membership registration control unit 10712 assigns a global membership ID and stores information about the user provided during the membership registration procedure in a global membership information table 10751 in association with the global membership ID. Also, when the user plays at an amusement facility, in response to an inquiry from the hall computer 10130 of the amusement facility, the membership registration control unit 10712 obtains the hall member ID of the amusement facility corresponding to the received global membership ID from the ID correspondence table 10752 and transmits it to the hall computer 10130.

In response to an inquiry from the hall computer 10130, information about the user corresponding to the received global membership ID is obtained from the global membership information table 10751 and transmitted to the hall computer 10130 together with the hall membership ID of that gaming facility.

In addition, when the user performs the membership registration procedure from the user's smartphone 10900, home PC, etc., or at a later time, the registration procedure for information related to the user's payment (payment for lending gaming media) is controlled, and the payment information is stored in the payment information table 10753.

When a member registration procedure is performed from an application executed on a smartphone 10900 or the like owned by a user, the application control unit 10713 controls data exchange with the smartphone 10900 or the like, and ultimately receives a member registration request and information about the user from the smartphone 10900 or the like, and transmits this data to the above-mentioned member registration control unit 10712 to register the user as a member.

When a payment instruction is issued from an app running on a smartphone 10900 or the like owned by the user, the payment management unit 10714 receives the information via the dedicated unit 10020, executes payment to the payment server 10800 in accordance with the payment instruction, and sends a payment response back to the app on the smartphone 10900 or the like.

The operation information management unit 10715 accumulates the operation information received from the gaming machine 10010 via the dedicated unit 10020, for example, at a predetermined timing, and stores it in the operation information table 10755 for each global member and gaming facility.

The consumption information management unit 10716 stores the consumption information received from the dedicated unit 10020 in a consumption history table 10754 for each global member and each gaming facility. In addition, the current number of saved balls for the global member is stored in a saved ball management table 10756 from information regarding the addition of saved balls/medals and the consumption of saved balls/medals contained in the consumption information received from the dedicated unit 10020.

When a user performs a membership registration procedure from a smartphone 10900 owned by the user, a PC at home, a hall terminal 10600 at an amusement parlor, a POS terminal 10500, etc., the WEB control unit 10717 controls data exchange with the above terminals, and ultimately receives a membership registration request and information about the user from the terminal, and transmits this data to the above-mentioned membership registration control unit 10712 to register the user as a member. The WEB control unit 10717 also accepts payment instructions from the smartphone 10900 owned by the user, etc., and notifies the payment management unit 10714 of the contents of the payment instructions. The WEB control unit 10717 is a functional unit that functions as a so-called WEB server.

When a user performs the membership registration procedure by sending an email to the gaming establishment's email address from the user's smartphone 10900, home PC, etc., the email control unit 10718 receives email data (including information about the user, etc.) from the above terminal and sends the data to the above-mentioned membership registration control unit 10712 to register the user as a member. The email control unit 10718 is a functional unit that functions as a so-called email server.

The member management server 10700 described with reference to FIG. 241 is merely one example, and a member management server 10700 having substantially the above-mentioned functions can be configured with various other configurations. In addition, the member management server 10700 can be configured as an application server, a web server, and a mail server, respectively, by separating, for example, the application control unit 10713, the web control unit 10717, and the mail control unit 10718 from among the functional units of the member management server 10700 shown in FIG. 241, and connected to a member management server having the remaining functions via a network and located in a different location.

[Payment information registration]
Fig. 242 shows the process of a user performing (initial) membership registration procedure for a global membership using a smartphone 10900. In Fig. 242, user actions such as "input" and "read" are indicated by oval frames, and computer actions and information are indicated by rectangular frames. The same applies to the subsequent Figs. 244 to 248.

The user uses an app (application) on the smartphone 10900 to input the user's personal information (e.g., name, address, date of birth, gender, etc.), and after identity authentication using an identification card (e.g., My Number card), the input information is sent to the member management server 10700 of the global member management system, which then carries out the membership registration procedure for the global member. Note that in this embodiment, the app on the smartphone 10900 includes various applications, such as a dedicated app installed on the smartphone 10900 and a web app consisting of a program using HTML language, JavaScript (registered trademark), etc.

The personal information entered by the user is stored in a global member information table 10751 of the member management DB 10750 of the member management server 10700. At this time, the global member ID assigned by the member management server 10700 is also stored in this global member information table 10751. The global member ID is also transmitted to the smartphone 10900, and this global member ID is stored in the smartphone 10900.

The (initial) membership registration procedure for a global member using such a smartphone 10900 is similar to the form shown in FIG. 224 of the 16th embodiment (however, in FIG. 242, the process related to user identity authentication is omitted).

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, various variations are shown for the method of identity authentication, the computer that performs the membership registration (such as a smartphone or PC), the computer that accepts the membership registration (for example, at an amusement facility or directly to the global membership management system), and the storage medium used as the membership card (such as a smartphone or IC card) (for example, the methods shown in Figures 225 to 228), but in this embodiment, too, global membership registration can be performed using these various membership registration methods. Furthermore, registration is not limited to these membership registration methods, and various other methods are possible for global membership registration.

Note that it is possible to omit the identity authentication process when registering as a member. Also, instead of assigning a global member ID, the storage medium identifier of the smartphone 10900 or the member card 10920 may be used as the global member ID.

The global member information table 10751 shown in FIG. 243 (A) stores information about global members of the global member management system. In this example, the global member ID, name, address, date of birth, gender, email address, telephone number, etc. are stored. The personal information of the global member stored in this manner can be adjusted as appropriate. Note that a storage medium identifier capable of identifying the smartphone 10900 or member card 10920 of the user corresponding to the global member ID may also be stored here. The configuration of such a global member information table 10751 is similar to that of the global member information table 9751 of the 16th embodiment.

Note that the above-mentioned storage medium identifier is, for example, an app ID, a device ID, a serial number, a MAC address, a telephone number, etc. in the smartphone 10900, and is, for example, IDm, etc. in the membership card 10920.

In this embodiment, an ID correspondence table 10752 is also provided to grasp the correspondence between global member IDs, hall member IDs, and gaming facilities, but since it has the same configuration as the ID correspondence table 9752 in the 16th embodiment, it is not illustrated here.

In this example, if the initial membership registration procedure is performed at an amusement facility (including not only when the membership registration procedure is performed at the amusement facility, but also when the membership registration procedure is performed via the amusement facility's hall computer 10130), the global member ID is suffixed with the amusement facility ID that identifies the amusement facility, and if the initial membership registration procedure is performed directly with the global member management system without going through the amusement facility, a "G" is suffixed to represent the global member management system.

In this embodiment, when registering such a global member, payment information related to cashless payment can be registered (see FIG. 242). For example, when accessing a specific website using an app on the smartphone 10900 or a PC, a personal information input screen (not shown) for inputting the user's own personal information (e.g., name, address, date of birth, gender, etc.) is displayed on the display of the smartphone 10900 or a display device connected to the PC, and when inputting the above personal information, the user can also input payment information used to rent out gaming media (purchase gaming value) and register. After that, for example, when the user presses the register button on the personal information input screen, the personal information is stored in the above global member information table 10751 and the payment information is stored in the payment information table 10753.

In addition, here, payment information is entered on the personal information input screen, but payment information may also be entered and registered on a payment information input screen (not shown) that is displayed in association with the personal information input screen.

Figure 243 (B) shows an example of a payment information table 10753. In this example, multiple payment methods can be registered as payment information for one user. For example, a global member with a global member ID of "0101G" has registered payment information for credit card payments (e.g., credit card name, credit card number, expiration date, security code, etc.) and payment information for debit card payments (e.g., debit card name, debit card number, expiration date, security code, etc.).

In this way, in this embodiment, multiple payment methods can be registered for each global member, and when the user has the dedicated unit 10020 read the global member ID, etc. stored on the smartphone 10900 or the member card 10920, a payment method selection screen is displayed on the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020 (if multiple payment methods are registered), allowing the user to specify which of the multiple payment methods to select, and when the user selects the desired payment method, the gaming medium is loaned (the gaming value is purchased) using the selected payment method.

In the example of FIG. 243(B), payment information relating to credit cards and debit cards is stored, but it is also possible to configure the system to store multiple pieces of payment information relating to credit cards and debit cards, and it is also possible to store payment information relating to other payment methods.

When making a payment using a credit card or debit card, personal authentication (e.g., a personal authentication service such as "3D Secure") may be required during the payment process. In such a case, for example, a screen for inputting an authentication code is displayed on the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020, and if the user enters the correct authentication code, the payment process will continue.

As shown in the example of FIG. 243(B), if payment information is registered in advance for credit cards and debit cards, payment can be made without having the dedicated unit 10020 read the credit card or debit card. However, in this embodiment, cashless payment can also be made without registering such payment information.

For example, in a payment method such as code payment, the payment is executed by having the camera 12035 of the dedicated unit 10020 read a code displayed on a code payment app installed on the smartphone 10900. In this case, the payment information table 10753 registers that the payment method will be used, but more detailed payment information is not required. However, the ID of the user related to the code payment may be stored in the payment information table 10753, and the dedicated unit 10020 may be controlled so that code payments other than those for that ID cannot be made.

In addition, for some electronic money, the contactless IC card reader/writer 12023 of the dedicated unit 10020 can read the information of the electronic money and execute the payment by using the smartphone payment service app (e.g., Apple Pay (registered trademark) or Google Pay (registered trademark)) installed on the smartphone 10900 and the NFC (near field communication) function of the smartphone 10900. Note that some credit cards can be registered in the smartphone payment service app, so if the credit card is registered in the smartphone payment service app, credit card payment can be executed by simply holding the smartphone 10900 over the dedicated unit 10020. Therefore, in this case, the payment information table 10753 registers that the payment method is to be used, but more detailed payment information is not required. However, the ID of the user related to the electronic money used in the smartphone payment service app may be stored in the payment information table 10753, and the dedicated unit 10020 may be controlled so that smartphone payments other than that ID cannot be executed.

Furthermore, if a specific electronic money is linked to an IC card, the contactless IC card reader/writer 12023 of the dedicated unit 10020 can read the information on this IC card and the balance of the linked electronic money can be used for payment. Therefore, in this case too, the payment information table 10753 registers that the payment method will be used, but more detailed payment information is not necessary. However, the ID of the user related to the electronic money may be stored in the payment information table 10753, and the dedicated unit 10020 may be controlled so that IC card payments other than that ID cannot be made.

In the example of FIG. 243(B), in the payment information table 10753, each of the payment types, credit card payment, debit card payment, code payment, smartphone payment, and IC card payment, can be registered as payment method 1 to payment method 5, respectively. However, this configuration is for convenience, and multiple payment methods can be registered for one payment type. For example, two or more credit cards can be registered as credit card payment.

With this configuration of the payment information table 10753, when a user logs in by holding the smartphone 10900 over the dedicated unit 10020, the contactless IC card reader/writer 12023 of the dedicated unit 10020 reads the global member ID and other information stored in the smartphone 10900, and finds the payment method corresponding to that global member ID from the payment information table 10753 of the member management server 10700. A payment selection screen that allows the user to select which payment method to use is then displayed on the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020.

Here, the user selects the desired payment method from those displayed on the operation unit 12034 and executes the payment. For example, if "credit card" or "debit card" is selected, the payment is executed directly using the pre-registered payment information, and if code payment is selected, the user operates the smartphone 10900 to display a code on the code payment app, and then executes the payment by having the camera 12035 of the dedicated unit 10020 read the code.

When "smartphone payment" is selected as the payment method, the user operates the smartphone 10900 to make the desired payment method available in the smartphone payment service app, and then holds the smartphone 10900 over the dedicated unit 10020 (to allow communication using the NFC function) to make the payment. When "IC card payment" is selected, the user holds their own IC card over the dedicated unit 10020 (to allow communication using the NFC function) to make the payment.

Note that the operation patterns for each of these payment methods are just examples, and payments can be made using these payment methods using various other methods and procedures. Also, the payment methods shown in payment information table 10753 are just examples, and various other payment methods can be registered in various formats.

In addition, when registering a payment method in such a payment information table 10753, a payment method can also be set for each gaming establishment. By registering available payment methods in advance for each gaming establishment, the dedicated unit 10020 can control the user to select only payment methods available at that gaming establishment (regardless of whether the payment method is registered by the user) when selecting a payment method in the dedicated unit 10020 of the gaming establishment. In addition, when a user registers a payment method at a gaming establishment or by specifying a gaming establishment, it is also possible to prevent the user from selecting a payment method that is not available at that gaming establishment from the start. In addition, it is also possible to register different payment methods to be used for each gaming establishment depending on the user's own circumstances.

When a user makes a cashless payment as described above, the dedicated unit 10020 transmits consumption information including this payment information to the member management server 10700, and the member management server 10700 then stores the consumption history in the consumption history table 10754 from the consumption information. An example of the consumption history table 10754 is shown in FIG. 243 (C). In this example, the consumption history table 10754 stores the global member ID, the date and time of the payment, the store ID of the gaming facility where the payment was made, the payment amount, the payment method (type of payment method corresponding to credit card payment or code payment (for example, "1" to "5" corresponding to payment method 1 to payment method 5 in the payment information table 10753)), etc.

In this embodiment, the dedicated unit 10020 also transmits information on cash payments as consumption information to the member management server 10700, so the history of cash payments is also stored in the consumption history table 10754. The contents stored in the consumption history table 10754 can store information about which gaming establishment a user used to make a payment related to the rental of gaming media, when and by what method, and can also store information about the timing of the rental of gaming media after payment.

Here, the consumption history table 10754 stores the payment amount for the lending of gaming media and subsequent lending operations, but the member management server 10700 may also store the type of gaming media (gaming balls (4 yen lending, 1 yen lending), medals (20 yen lending, 5 yen lending)) and the amount lent (number of balls, number of medals) based on the consumption information received from the dedicated unit 10020.

In addition, in this embodiment, an upper limit can be set for payments related to the lending of gaming media by users and for the lending quantity (lending amount) related to subsequent lending operations. This upper limit is, for example, the upper limit of the amount that can be paid in a specified period of time or the upper limit of the lending quantity, and can be applied to payments including not only cashless payments but also payments by cash. This setting can be made individually for each gaming establishment, for each specified gaming establishment group, and for each payment method, for example. Furthermore, such an upper limit can be set by the user himself when setting the payment information described above, or it can be set by the member management system, or it can be set independently by the gaming establishment.

For example, when a user attempts to make a payment for the lending of gaming media or to perform a subsequent lending operation on the dedicated unit 10020, the payment amount and lending quantity for a specified period are checked (e.g., by the member management server 10700) based on the setting of the upper limit amount described above, and if the conditions are not met, the lending operation is canceled and a message to the effect that lending is not possible is displayed on the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020.

In addition, the upper limit amount and time period of use can be set according to the time period of use, the type of gaming machine, the rental rate of gaming media, the payment method, etc. (or a combination of these).

In addition, in this embodiment, the global member ID can be used to grasp the payment amount and loan quantity across all gaming establishments where the user has registered as a member, making it possible to determine whether the user's payment amount and loan quantity at all gaming establishments exceed the set upper limit, and in this case too, the upper limit amount and usage time period can be set according to the usage time period, type of gaming machine, rental rate of gaming media, payment method, etc. (or a combination of these). This configuration of the present embodiment makes it possible to manage individual consumption, and also makes it possible to use this information for addiction management. For example, if a user exceeds the upper limit for payment at one gaming establishment, it is possible to monitor the user's actions, such as attempting to make a new payment at another gaming establishment.

The payment and rental conditions, including the maximum amount and the time period of use, are stored in the payment conditions management table of the member management DB 10750, but the payment conditions management table is not shown here.

As described above, in this embodiment, the member management server 10700 receives payments related to the lending of gaming media and subsequent lending operations as consumption information from the dedicated unit 10020 (see FIG. 237), and controls to limit operations on the dedicated unit 10020 by the user (e.g., payment and lending operations) based on such consumption information. It can also control to limit operations on the dedicated unit 10020 by the user based on operation information received from the dedicated unit 10020. For example, it can grasp the extent to which a user has become negative (or positive) over a specified period from the operation information, estimate the user's psychological state, and control to limit operations on the dedicated unit 10020 by the user based on that psychological state.

In addition, here, the payment method is registered during the initial membership registration process, but it may be registered during the second or subsequent membership registration processes, or it may be registered thereafter immediately before using cashless payment.

In addition, if payment information is set for each gaming establishment, it may be possible to set it when actually completing the membership registration procedure (either the first time or the simplified second or subsequent time) at that gaming establishment.

In addition, in this embodiment, when making a payment for the rental of game media, the user holds the smartphone 10900 over the dedicated unit 10020 to log in as described above, but if a membership card 10920 has been obtained during the global membership registration procedure, the above login can also be performed using the membership card 10920.

In addition, in this embodiment, when making a payment for lending game media, the user holds the smartphone 10900 over the dedicated unit 10020 to log in as described above, and then, as necessary, information is displayed on the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020 and the user can operate it. However, after the login is successfully performed, the app of the smartphone 10900 displays a payment selection screen on the display of the smartphone 10900 to allow the user to make a selection, and may also display a specified message related to the payment on the display of the smartphone 10900.

At this time, the smartphone 10900 app may be, for example, a smartphone-specific app or a web app configured with a program using HTML language, JavaScript (registered trademark), etc., and transmits and receives data via a network (for example, a network including the Internet) between the member management server 10700 or a computer related to the member management server 10700. In addition, such processing may be realized by the smartphone 10900 app transmitting and receiving data via a network (for example, a network including the Internet) between the dedicated unit 10020 of the gaming facility or another computer of the gaming facility.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the payment for lending of gaming media, various payment methods other than cash can be used, such as credit card payment, debit card payment, code payment, smartphone payment, and IC card payment. However, the payment method is not limited to these, and cashless payment can be made using other electromagnetically managed values. For example, it is also possible to make a payment using "points," "scores," "items," etc. managed by a specified institution or organization such as an amusement facility or a membership management system.

[Payment for lending of gaming media]
Next, with reference to Figures 244 to 247, a typical settlement method for lending game media will be described.

(Credit card payment)
Fig. 244 is a diagram showing an outline of the above-mentioned credit card payment process. Note that the same process is carried out for debit card payments.

When a user first goes to an amusement facility to play on the gaming machine 10010, the user holds the smartphone 10900 or the membership card 10920 over the dedicated unit 10020 connected to the gaming machine 10010 to be played on, thereby "logging in" as a global member. Specifically, the contactless IC card reader/writer 12023 of the dedicated unit 10020 reads the global member ID (or a storage medium identifier such as an app ID) stored in the smartphone 10900 by using NFC on the smartphone 10900. In the case of the membership card 10920, the contactless IC card reader/writer 12023 of the dedicated unit 10020 reads the global member ID (or a storage medium identifier such as IDm) stored in the membership card 10920 by using NFC on the membership card 10920.

When the dedicated unit 10020 reads the global member ID from the smartphone 10900 or member card 10920, it performs member authentication to determine whether or not the person logging in is a legitimate member. That is, the dedicated unit 10020 accesses the member management server 10700, references the global member information table 10751, and determines whether or not the corresponding global member ID is registered, and if it is registered (i.e., the login is successful), it proceeds to the next process. On the other hand, if it is not registered (i.e., the login of a global member), it returns a response to that effect to the dedicated unit 10020, and the dedicated unit 10020 displays, for example, an error message on the operation unit 12034 indicating that the member is not registered.

Similarly, when another storage medium identifier is read from the smartphone 10900 or the membership card 10920, the dedicated unit 10020 refers to the global membership information table 10751 to determine whether or not a corresponding storage medium identifier is registered.

When the login is successfully accepted, the user operates the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020 to specify the quantity or amount of gaming media to be loaned (loan specification), and then selects a payment method. At this time, a list of payment methods selectable by the user is displayed on the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020, which is displayed according to the corresponding user's payment method by referring to the payment information table 10753 of the member management server 10700.

At this time, for example, the payment amount may be preset to a minimum exchange unit such as 500 yen (125 balls) in the case of a 4 yen loan (pachinko), or a predetermined exchange unit such as 1000 yen (250 balls), and the user may select the desired amount from these to make the payment. Alternatively, the user may specify an amount such as 1000 yen, 2000 yen, or 5000 yen (or select from a pattern of amounts set in advance), make the payment, and perform a "loan" operation on the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020 to loan gaming media in the minimum exchange unit from the amount of the payment (the remaining amount is managed as balance data). Various other patterns can be used as variations of such payment amounts and loan units. Furthermore, such patterns can be used in various payment methods described below.

When the dedicated unit 10020 receives from the user the amount for the rental of the gaming medium (if a quantity is specified, it is converted to an amount) and the payment method (credit card payment specified by the user), it sends these as a payment instruction to the member management server 10700. When the member management server 10700 receives a payment instruction from the dedicated unit 10020, it sends the payment instruction to the payment server 10800 (the payment server of the credit card company corresponding to the payment method).

Although not shown in FIG. 244, the member management server 10700 checks whether the payment instruction received from the dedicated unit 10020 meets the conditions such as the upper limit amount by referring to the consumption history table 10754 and the payment conditions management table, and if there is no problem, sends the payment instruction to the payment server 10800. On the other hand, if it is determined that the payment instruction does not meet the conditions, the member management server 10700 returns a response to that effect to the dedicated unit 10020, and the dedicated unit 10020 displays an error message on the operation unit 12034, for example, indicating that payment cannot be made due to restrictions such as the upper limit amount.

When the payment server 10800 receives the payment instruction, it performs the required checks of the credit card company, then performs the credit card payment and sends a payment response (indicating that the payment was made correctly) to the member management server 10700. The member management server 10700, which has received the payment response, sends it to the dedicated unit 10020.

When the dedicated unit 10020 receives the payment response, the dedicated unit 10020, for example, displays on the operation unit 12034 that the credit card payment has been completed, and lends out the gaming medium (i.e., electronically provides the gaming value to the gaming machine 10010).

Also, as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 244, when the credit card company performs additional identity authentication (e.g., 3D Secure), it sends a request for additional authentication to the member management server 10700, and the member management server 10700, which receives the request for additional authentication, sends the request for additional authentication to the dedicated unit 10020. When the dedicated unit 10020 receives the request for additional authentication, it displays a password input screen related to the additional authentication of the credit card on the operation unit 12034. When the user enters a password, the password is sent to the payment server 10800 via the dedicated unit 10020 and the member management server 10700, and if the password is determined to be correct, the credit card payment is made, and then, as described above, a payment response is sent to the dedicated unit 10020. Note that this password may be registered in advance in the global member information table 10751.

When a user logs in using smartphone 10900, at least one of the screens related to specifying a loan, selecting a payment method, displaying completion of payment, inputting a password for additional authentication, and displaying various errors may be displayed on the display of smartphone 10900 so that the user can operate or view the screen on smartphone 10900. In this case, data transmission and reception is performed, for example, between smartphone 10900 and member management server 10700 (or a computer related to member management server 10700) via a network (for example, a network including the Internet).

(Code payment)
Fig. 245 is a diagram showing an outline of the code payment process. In code payment, a code (e.g., a barcode or two-dimensional code) displayed on the display of the smartphone 10900 is read by the dedicated unit 10020 to perform payment, so that the membership card 10920 cannot be used for this payment. In addition, the app of the smartphone 10900 cooperates with the app for code payment to send payment instructions and receive payment responses, which will be described later.

When a user first goes to an amusement facility to play on the gaming machine 10010, the user holds the smartphone 10900 over the dedicated unit 10020 connected to the gaming machine 10010 to be played on, and "logs in" as a global member. Specifically, the contactless IC card reader/writer 12023 of the dedicated unit 10020 uses NFC on the smartphone 10900 to read the global member ID (or a storage medium identifier such as an app ID) stored in the smartphone 10900.

When the dedicated unit 10020 reads the global member ID from the smartphone 10900, it performs member authentication to determine whether or not the person logging in is a legitimate member. That is, the dedicated unit 10020 accesses the member management server 10700, references the global member information table 10751, and determines whether or not the corresponding global member ID is registered, and if it is registered (i.e., the login is successful), it proceeds to the next process. On the other hand, if it is not registered (i.e., the login of a global member), it returns a response to that effect to the dedicated unit 10020, and the dedicated unit 10020 displays, for example, an error message on the operation unit 12034 indicating that the member is not registered.

Similarly, when another storage medium identifier is read from the smartphone 10900, the dedicated unit 10020 refers to the global member information table 10751 to determine whether a corresponding storage medium identifier is registered.

When the login is successfully accepted, the user operates the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020 to specify the quantity or amount of gaming media to be loaned (loan specification), and then selects a payment method. At this time, a list of payment methods selectable by the user is displayed on the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020, which is displayed according to the corresponding user's payment method by referring to the payment information table 10753 of the member management server 10700.

When the dedicated unit 10020 receives from the user the amount for the rental of game media (if a quantity is specified, it is converted to an amount) and the payment method (code payment specified by the user), it transitions to a mode for photographing the code payment code. The dedicated unit 10020 displays a message on the operation unit 12034, causes the user's smartphone 10900 to display the code payment code, and instructs the user to present it to the camera 12035 of the dedicated unit 10020.

When the user operates the code payment app running on the smartphone 10900 to display the code payment code on the display and presents it to the camera 12035 of the dedicated unit 10020, the camera 12035 of the dedicated unit 10020 photographs the code and transmits the decoded data of the code and the amount related to the rental of the gaming medium as a payment instruction to the member management server 10700. When the member management server 10700 receives the payment instruction from the dedicated unit 10020, it transmits the payment instruction to the payment server 10800 (the payment server of the code payment company corresponding to the payment method).

Although not shown in FIG. 245, the member management server 10700 checks whether the payment instruction received from the dedicated unit 10020 meets the conditions such as the upper limit amount by referring to the consumption history table 10754 and the payment conditions management table, and if there is no problem, sends the payment instruction to the payment server 10800. On the other hand, if it is determined that the payment instruction does not meet the conditions, the member management server 10700 returns a response to that effect to the dedicated unit 10020, and the dedicated unit 10020 displays an error message on the operation unit 12034, for example, indicating that payment cannot be made due to restrictions such as the upper limit amount.

When the payment server 10800 receives the payment instruction, it performs the code payment after performing the required checks of the code payment company, and then transmits a payment response (indicating that the payment was made correctly) to the member management server 10700. The member management server 10700, which has received the payment response, transmits the payment response to the dedicated unit 10020.

When the dedicated unit 10020 receives the payment response, the dedicated unit 10020, for example, displays on the operation unit 12034 that the code payment has been completed and lends out the gaming medium (i.e., electronically provides the gaming value to the gaming machine 10010).

In addition, at least one of the screens for specifying the loan, selecting the payment method, and displaying various errors may be displayed on the display of the smartphone 10900 so that the user can operate or view the screen on the smartphone 10900. In this case, data transmission and reception is performed, for example, between the smartphone 10900 and the member management server 10700 (or a computer related to the member management server 10700) via a network (for example, a network including the Internet).

The payment response is also received via a network (e.g., a network including the Internet) by the code payment app launched on the smartphone 10900, and the smartphone 10900 display shows that the payment has been completed.

Generally, code payments are classified into a customer-presented type, in which a code displayed on the display of the smartphone 10900 is read by a payment terminal at the gaming establishment, and a store-presented type, in which a code presented at the gaming establishment is read by a code payment app launched on the smartphone 10900. Since the store-presented type requires staff to confirm the amount, this embodiment uses the customer-presented type, but payment using the store-presented type can also be adopted.

(Smartphone payment)
FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an outline of the smartphone payment process. Note that, since the smartphone payment is performed using a smartphone payment service app (e.g., a smartphone payment app such as Apple Pay (registered trademark) or Google Pay (registered trademark)) of the smartphone 10900, the membership card 10920 cannot be used for this payment. Here, the app of the smartphone 10900 cooperates with the smartphone payment service app to send payment instructions and receive payment responses, which will be described later.

When a user first goes to an amusement facility to play on the gaming machine 10010, the user holds the smartphone 10900 over the dedicated unit 10020 connected to the gaming machine 10010 to be played on, and "logs in" as a global member. Specifically, the contactless IC card reader/writer 12023 of the dedicated unit 10020 uses NFC on the smartphone 10900 to read the global member ID (or a storage medium identifier such as an app ID) stored in the smartphone 10900.

When the dedicated unit 10020 reads the global member ID from the smartphone 10900, it performs member authentication to determine whether or not the person logging in is a legitimate member. That is, the dedicated unit 10020 accesses the member management server 10700, references the global member information table 10751, and determines whether or not the corresponding global member ID is registered, and if it is registered (i.e., the login is successful), it proceeds to the next process. On the other hand, if it is not registered (i.e., the login of a global member), it returns a response to that effect to the dedicated unit 10020, and the dedicated unit 10020 displays, for example, an error message on the operation unit 12034 indicating that the member is not registered.

Similarly, when another storage medium identifier is read from the smartphone 10900, the dedicated unit 10020 refers to the global member information table 10751 to determine whether a corresponding storage medium identifier is registered.

When the login is successfully accepted, the user operates the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020 to specify the quantity or amount of gaming media to be loaned (loan specification), and then selects a payment method. At this time, a list of payment methods selectable by the user is displayed on the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020, which is displayed according to the corresponding user's payment method by referring to the payment information table 10753 of the member management server 10700.

When the dedicated unit 10020 receives from the user the amount for the rental of game media (if a quantity is specified, it is converted to an amount) and the payment method (smartphone payment specified by the user), it transitions to a mode in which payment can be made by IC card or credit card using NFC in the smartphone payment app. The dedicated unit 10020 selects the payment method in the smartphone payment app, and displays a message on the operation unit 12034 instructing the user to hold the smartphone over the dedicated unit 10020 (touch the smartphone).

When the user selects a payment method using a smartphone payment app and holds it over the dedicated unit 10020, the contactless IC card reader/writer 12023 of the dedicated unit 10020 reads it and transmits information about the selected payment method (e.g., information about the IC card or credit card used to make the payment) and the amount related to the rental of the gaming medium as a payment instruction to the member management server 10700. When the member management server 10700 receives the payment instruction from the dedicated unit 10020, it transmits the payment instruction to the payment server 10800 (a payment server of a credit card company or the like that corresponds to the payment method).

Although not shown in FIG. 246, the member management server 10700 checks whether the payment instruction received from the dedicated unit 10020 meets the conditions such as the upper limit amount by referring to the consumption history table 10754 and the payment conditions management table, and if there is no problem, sends the payment instruction to the payment server 10800. On the other hand, if it is determined that the payment instruction does not meet the conditions, the member management server 10700 returns a response to that effect to the dedicated unit 10020, and the dedicated unit 10020 displays an error message on the operation unit 12034, for example, indicating that payment cannot be made due to restrictions such as the upper limit amount.

When the payment server 10800 receives the payment instruction, it performs a prescribed check, then performs the code payment and sends a payment response (indicating that the payment was made correctly) to the member management server 10700. The member management server 10700, which has received the payment response, sends it to the dedicated unit 10020.

When the dedicated unit 10020 receives the payment response, for example, it displays on the operation unit 12034 a message indicating that the code payment has been completed, and lends out the gaming medium (i.e., it electronically provides the gaming value to the gaming machine 10010).

In addition, at least one of the screens for specifying the loan, selecting the payment method, and displaying various errors may be displayed on the display of the smartphone 10900 so that the user can operate or view the screen on the smartphone 10900. In this case, data transmission and reception is performed, for example, between the smartphone 10900 and the member management server 10700 (or a computer related to the member management server 10700) via a network (for example, a network including the Internet).

The payment response is also received via a network (e.g., a network including the Internet) by a smartphone payment app launched on the smartphone 10900, and the smartphone 10900 display shows that the payment has been completed.

For smartphone payments, IC cards capable of handling credit cards and electronic money are generally registered, and a payment method can be selected from among them when making a payment. Therefore, for the credit card used in the credit card payment shown in FIG. 244 (as long as the credit card is compatible with the smartphone payment app), payment can be made using this smartphone payment configuration. With this method, it is basically not necessary to register credit card payment information related to credit card payment as shown in payment information table 10753 in FIG. 243 (B). Also, for IC card payments, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 247 (as long as the IC card is compatible with the smartphone payment app), payment can be made using this smartphone payment configuration.

With smartphone payments, like credit card payments shown in Figure 244, there is no need to carry an actual credit card or IC card.

(IC card payment)
Fig. 247 is a diagram showing an overview of the IC card payment process. In this embodiment, it is referred to as "IC card payment", but in reality, it includes not only IC cards but also magnetic cards and various other storage media capable of managing electronic money. IC cards include credit cards, debit cards, and other IC cards related to electronic money payment. In this IC card payment, the IC card or the like is read by the dedicated unit 10020, so it is necessary to carry the actual IC card or the like.

When a user first goes to an amusement facility to play on the gaming machine 10010, the user holds the smartphone 10900 or the membership card 10920 over the dedicated unit 10020 connected to the gaming machine 10010 to be played on, thereby "logging in" as a global member. Specifically, the contactless IC card reader/writer 12023 of the dedicated unit 10020 reads the global member ID (or a storage medium identifier such as an app ID) stored in the smartphone 10900 by using NFC on the smartphone 10900. In the case of the membership card 10920, the contactless IC card reader/writer 12023 of the dedicated unit 10020 reads the global member ID (or a storage medium identifier such as IDm) stored in the membership card 10920 by using NFC on the membership card 10920.

When the dedicated unit 10020 reads the global member ID from the smartphone 10900 or member card 10920, it performs member authentication to determine whether or not the person logging in is a legitimate member. That is, the dedicated unit 10020 accesses the member management server 10700, references the global member information table 10751, and determines whether or not the corresponding global member ID is registered, and if it is registered (i.e., the login is successful), it proceeds to the next process. On the other hand, if it is not registered (i.e., the login of a global member), it returns a response to that effect to the dedicated unit 10020, and the dedicated unit 10020 displays, for example, an error message on the operation unit 12034 indicating that the member is not registered.

Similarly, when another storage medium identifier is read from the smartphone 10900 or the membership card 10920, the dedicated unit 10020 refers to the global membership information table 10751 to determine whether or not a corresponding storage medium identifier is registered.

When the login is successfully accepted, the user operates the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020 to specify the quantity or amount of gaming media to be loaned (loan specification), and then selects a payment method. At this time, a list of payment methods selectable by the user is displayed on the operation unit 12034 of the dedicated unit 10020, which is displayed according to the corresponding user's payment method by referring to the payment information table 10753 of the member management server 10700.

When the dedicated unit 10020 receives from the user the amount for the rental of game media (if a quantity is specified, it is converted to an amount) and the payment method (IC card payment specified by the user), it transitions to a mode for reading an IC card. For example, the dedicated unit 10020 displays a message on the operation unit 12034 instructing the user to hold (touch) the IC card over the dedicated unit 10020.

When the user holds the IC card over the dedicated unit 10020, the non-contact IC card reader/writer 12023 of the dedicated unit 10020 reads it and transmits the read IC card information and the amount related to the rental of the gaming medium as a payment instruction to the member management server 10700. When the member management server 10700 receives the payment instruction from the dedicated unit 10020, it transmits the payment instruction to the payment server 10800 (a payment server of a company, etc. that supports the IC card payment method).

Although not shown in FIG. 247, the member management server 10700 checks whether the payment instruction received from the dedicated unit 10020 meets the conditions such as the upper limit amount by referring to the consumption history table 10754 and the payment conditions management table, and if there is no problem, sends the payment instruction to the payment server 10800. On the other hand, if it is determined that the payment instruction does not meet the conditions, the member management server 10700 returns a response to that effect to the dedicated unit 10020, and the dedicated unit 10020 displays an error message on the operation unit 12034, for example, indicating that payment cannot be made due to restrictions such as the upper limit amount.

When the payment server 10800 receives the payment instruction, it performs the company's required checks, makes the payment, and sends a payment response (indicating that the payment was made correctly) to the member management server 10700. The member management server 10700, which has received the payment response, sends it to the dedicated unit 10020.

When the dedicated unit 10020 receives the payment response, for example, it displays on the operation unit 12034 a message indicating that payment via IC card has been completed, and lends out gaming media (i.e., it electronically provides gaming value to the gaming machine 10010).

In addition, in this example, as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 244, if the IC card is a credit card and the credit card company performs additional personal authentication (e.g., 3D Secure), additional authentication processing similar to that in FIG. 244 is performed.

When the user is using the smartphone 10900, at least one of the screens relating to the specification of the loan, the selection of the payment method, the display of the completion of the payment, the password input for additional authentication, and the display of various errors may be displayed on the display of the smartphone 10900 so that the user can operate or view the screen on the smartphone 10900. In this case, data transmission and reception is performed, for example, between the smartphone 10900 and the member management server 10700 (or a computer related to the member management server 10700) via a network (for example, a network including the Internet).

Also, FIG. 247 shows an example of making a payment using an IC card in addition to the smartphone 10900 or the membership card 10920, but if a magnetic card is used instead of an IC card, the dedicated unit 10020 is configured to have a magnetic card reader, and the user inserts (or slides, etc.) the magnetic card into the magnetic card reader to read the information on the magnetic card. Similarly, when another storage medium is used, the dedicated unit 10020 is configured to have a corresponding storage medium reader, and the user makes the payment by having the reader read the information on the storage medium.

Unlike the credit card payment shown in FIG. 244, IC card payment requires the user to carry an actual IC card (e.g., a credit card), but there is no need to register credit card payment information related to credit card payment as shown in payment information table 10753 in FIG. 243 (B).

Although several payment methods have been described so far, they are not limited to these methods and various other payment methods can be used. For example, in the dedicated unit 10020, a barcode or two-dimensional code can be displayed on the operation unit 12034 or the like, and when the code is read by the user's smartphone 10900, payment can be made on the member management server 10700 or another computer (or the user can be guided to a specific site to make the payment manually), and the payment results can be displayed on the operation unit 12034 or the like.

In addition, with regard to payment, it is possible to instruct the lending of gaming media in the following order: cash -> virtual currency -> loan, virtual currency -> cash -> loan, virtual currency -> loan, and the portion that holds value as the virtual currency can be handled cashlessly on the user's smartphone 10900, etc.

The various servers, such as the member management server and hall computer, described above, can be provided as apps on portable terminals (tablet terminals, laptops, etc.) at gaming parlors, etc., or can be deployed on the cloud. These servers can also be provided as physical tower-type servers.

[Understanding personal information and game information in gaming systems]
Next, a method for storing and managing personal information and game information of a user (player) in the gaming system PS400 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 248. Note that the game information includes operation information obtainable from the gaming machine 10010 and consumption information obtainable from the dedicated unit 10020.

(personal information)
In this embodiment, personal information about the user is obtained through the membership registration procedure for the global member, and is stored in a global member information table 10751 (see FIG. 243(A)). In the global member information table 10751 of this embodiment, the user's name, address, date of birth, gender, etc. (such information is referred to as "basic information") are stored in association with the global member ID and storage medium identifier.

In addition, the user's payment information related to the rental of gaming media is stored in the payment information table 10753 (see FIG. 243 (B)) through the initial global membership registration procedure or the subsequent payment information registration procedure, and such payment information can also be considered personal information.

The above-mentioned personal information (basic information and payment information) is stored in the global member information table 10751 and the payment information table 10753 by various member registration methods, as described in relation to FIG. 242. Note that in FIG. 248, the description of these various member registration methods is omitted.

(Operation information)
In this embodiment, operation information obtainable from the gaming machine 10010 is transmitted to the member management server 10700 via the dedicated unit 10020 at a predetermined timing in association with the play of the user (player), and is stored in the operation information table 10755. Here, the operation information is data associated with the global member ID and the gaming store ID, and includes ball payout information, which is the result of the game on the gaming machine 10010, as described above. Here, the ball payout information includes, for example, the number of gaming media electromagnetically paid out (payout number), as well as the number of medals bet, the number of game balls inserted, the number of jackpots, and other quantities that indicate the degree of gambling. In addition to the performance information as described above, the ball payout information also includes installation information, fraud/error information, and the like.

249(A) shows an example of the operation information table 10755. The operation information table 10755 stores, in association with the global member ID, the game store ID, which is an identifier for identifying the game store, the game machine number, which specifies the game machine at the game store, the date and time related to the game machine, IN (for example, out balls for an enclosed pachinko machine, and the number of in-sheets for an enclosed pachislot machine), OUT (for example, safe balls for an enclosed pachinko machine, and the number of out-sheets for an enclosed pachislot machine), the number of jackpots, and the like. Here, for example, the operation information is accumulated every minute from the game machine 10010 via the dedicated unit 10020, and the member management server 10700 cumulatively stores this operation information in the operation information table 10755 each time.

This configuration allows the progress of gaming activity for a user with a specific global membership ID to be tracked every minute. In this example, the operation information is sent every minute, but it can be sent at shorter or longer intervals.

It should be noted that such performance information can also be obtained for players who are not global members and stored in the performance information table 10755, but unlike global members, it cannot be linked to personal information by referencing the global member information table 10751. However, for example, if the player's face can be photographed with the camera 12035 of the dedicated unit 10020, the facial data obtained there can be associated with this performance information and stored in the performance information table 10755. If an individual can be identified by comparing the facial data with specified facial image data, it will ultimately be possible to link the personal information with the performance information.

Furthermore, if a player who is not a global member has registered as a member at an amusement facility, the resulting personal information (for example, hall member information table 9151 as shown in FIG. 222 of the 16th embodiment) can be linked to the operating information. Furthermore, for players who are not global members, the operating information may be linked to a non-member card that can store the balls/medals held by tracking the playing information of the gaming machine, so if the player exchanges for prizes using the non-member card, the player's personal information can ultimately be linked to the operating information.

(Consumption information)
In this embodiment, in response to operation of the dedicated unit 10020 or the gaming machine 10010 by the user (player), consumption information is transmitted from the dedicated unit 10020 to the member management server 10700, and the information is stored in the consumption history table 10754 or the stored ball management table 10756.

Regarding consumption information, for example, when a user operates the dedicated unit 10020 to give a payment instruction, the payment amount and payment method are transmitted from the dedicated unit 10020 to the member management server 10700 along with the global member ID, the payment date and time, and the gaming store ID, and the information (payment information) is stored in the consumption history table 10754 (see FIG. 243 (C)). At the same time, a loan of gaming media corresponding to a predetermined amount is also performed (the gaming value is transferred to the gaming machine 10010), and the usage amount related to the loan is transmitted from the dedicated unit 10020 to the member management server 10700 along with the global member ID, the payment date and time, and the gaming store ID, and the information (loan information) is stored in the consumption history table 10754.

Furthermore, when a user performs a loan operation while the balance resulting from the above payment is stored (for example, the balance data is stored in the balance management table of the member management DB 10750), the amount used for the loan is transmitted from the dedicated unit 10020 to the member management server 10700 together with the global member ID, the date and time of payment, and the gaming facility ID, and this information (loan information) is stored in the consumption history table 10754.

For example, in the example of consumption history table 10754 shown in FIG. 243(C), it is stored that a user with global member ID = "0101G" first made a payment (10,000 yen) for the loan of gaming media at gaming establishment A using payment method = 1 (payment method 1 (credit card payment) defined in payment information table 10753 in FIG. 243(B)) based on the above payment information, and at the same time, it is stored that a loan of 500 yen was made with consumption type = "loan" based on the above loan information. After that, it is stored that three consecutive loans were made at gaming establishment A with consumption type = "loan" and amount used = "500 yen" based on the above loan information.

At this point, the balance of the user with global member ID = "0101G" at arcade ID = "A" is 8,000 yen, and this amount is stored in the balance management table of member management DB 10750 and is updated as needed.

For example, when a user operates the dedicated unit 10020 to save or pay out saved balls, the quantity and type of gaming media are sent from the dedicated unit 10020 to the member management server 10700 along with the global member ID, the operation date and time, and the gaming facility ID, and this information (saved ball information) is stored in the consumption history table 10754, and the number of saved balls as a result of the save or pay out operation is stored in the saved ball management table 10756. However, such transfers of saved balls are also stored (for each gaming facility) in the saved ball management table of the hall computer 10130.

Here, FIG. 249(B) shows an example of a stored ball management table 10756, which has a similar configuration to the stored ball management table 9152 in the 16th embodiment (see FIG. 222(B)). In the stored ball management table 10756, like the stored ball management table 9152, the number of stored balls is stored for each type of gaming medium classified by gaming medium (gaming balls, medals) and lending rate, and each number of stored balls is associated with a global member ID instead of a hall member ID. Also, a gaming facility ID is stored so that it can be identified which gaming facility the stored balls belong to.

Furthermore, for example, when a user operates the gaming machine 10010 to perform a counting operation, the value of the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine 10010 is transferred to the dedicated unit 10020, and at this time, the quantity and type of gaming media, together with the global member ID, the operation date and time, and the gaming store ID, are transmitted from the dedicated unit 10020 to the member management server 10700, and the information (counting information) is stored in the consumption history table 10754.

For example, in the example of the consumption history table 10754 shown in FIG. 243(C), based on the above payment information, it is stored that a user with global member ID = "0101G" made an initial payment (10,000 yen) for the loan of gaming media at amusement store B with a payment method = "cash" (not defined in the payment information table 10753 in FIG. 243(B)), and at the same time, based on the above loan information, it is stored that a loan of 500 yen was made with a consumption type = "loan". At this point, the balance of the user with global member ID = "0101G" at amusement store ID = "B" is 9,500 yen, but this amount is stored in the balance management table of the member management DB 10750 and is updated as needed.

After that, when a user at amusement facility B performs a counting operation on gaming machine 10010, based on the above counting information, it is stored in consumption history table 10754 that a user with global member ID = "0101G" at amusement facility B has transferred 689 balls of gaming medium type = "4 yen loan (pachinko)" with consumption type = "counting" to dedicated unit 10020. At this time, the gaming medium type = "4 yen loan (pachinko)" and the quantity (689 balls) are stored in the ball holding management table (not shown) of the hall computer 10130 of amusement facility B for the user with global member ID = "0101G".

Afterwards, when a user at amusement facility B operates the dedicated unit 10020 to save balls, based on the above saved ball information, the consumption history table 10754 stores the fact that 689 balls have been saved with a consumption type of "Saved Balls" and a gaming medium type of "4 yen loan (pachinko)." Also, at this time, for the user with global member ID = "0101G", the quantity (689 balls) is subtracted for this gaming medium type = "4 yen loan (pachinko)" in the ball holding management table of the hall computer 10130 of amusement facility B, and in the saved ball management table 10756 of the member management DB 10750 (see Figure 249), the quantity for the gaming medium type = "4 yen loan (pachinko)" of amusement facility B for the user with global member ID = "0101G" is configured to 689, and further, this saved ball quantity (689 balls) is stored in the saved ball management table of the corresponding amusement facility B's hall computer 10130.

After that, when a user at amusement facility B performs a saved ball payout operation on the dedicated unit 10020, it is stored in the consumption history table 10754 that 300 balls of the game medium type = "4 yen loan (pachinko)" have been provided from the saved balls to the gaming machine 10010 with the consumption type = "saved ball payout" based on the saved ball information described above. Furthermore, when a user at amusement facility B performs a saved ball payout operation on the dedicated unit 10020, it is stored in the consumption history table 10754 that 300 balls of the game medium type = "4 yen loan (pachinko)" have been provided from the saved balls to the gaming machine 10010 with the consumption type = "saved ball payout" based on the saved ball information described above.

Finally, the user with global member ID "0101G" has 89 balls in the game medium type "4 yen loan (pachinko)" at amusement parlor B, and the ball management table 10756 shown in FIG. 249 is updated to reflect this situation. Similarly, the ball management table in the hall computer 10130 of amusement parlor B is also updated.

It is also possible to obtain such consumption information for players who are not global members and store it in the consumption history table 10754, but unlike global members, it is not possible to link it to personal information by referencing the global member information table 10751. However, for example, if the player's face can be photographed with the camera 12035 of the dedicated unit 10020, the facial data obtained there can be associated with this consumption information and stored in the consumption history table 10754. If an individual can be identified by comparing that facial data with specified facial image data, it will ultimately be possible to link the personal information with the consumption information.

Furthermore, if a player who is not a global member has registered as a member at an amusement facility, the personal information obtained through this (for example, hall member information table 9151 as shown in FIG. 222 of the 16th embodiment) can be linked to consumption information. Furthermore, for players who are not global members, the consumption information may be linked to a non-member card that can store the balls/medals held by tracking the consumption information of the gaming machine, so if the player is able to exchange the balls/medals for prizes using the non-member card, the personal information of the player can ultimately be linked to the consumption information.

As described above, it is possible to link a player's personal information with performance information, and similarly, it is possible to link a player's personal information with consumption information. As a result, it is possible to associate both performance information and consumption information with personal information, and the information obtained in this way can be used for various analyses and research.

Figure 250 shows the main relationships between the data stored in this embodiment. In the gaming system PS400 of this embodiment, the dedicated unit 10020 makes it possible to grasp consumption information and operation information, and furthermore, by logging in, linking, and managing with a global member ID, it becomes possible to grasp this information in a unified manner across multiple gaming facilities.

In the gaming system PS400, the data in the global member information table 751, the consumption history table 10754, and the operation information table 10755 can be associated with each other using the "global member ID," making it possible to effectively grasp the type of consumption and gaming behavior of each individual.

In addition, the consumption history table 10754 and the operation information table 10755 contain information on the date, time, and game store (game store ID) regarding the consumption behavior and gaming behavior of each individual, so it is possible to grasp the relationship between behavior, time, and location for each individual. For example, it is possible to grasp when and at which game store a user corresponding to a global member ID rented out gaming media (made a payment), how the saved balls and held balls were used, and further, what the gaming results were (for example, how many INs and OUTs were there on which game machine). In addition, if the operation information is sent immediately (for example, at a relatively short interval such as 100 milliseconds), it is possible to grasp the changes in the user's gaming media acquisition status in almost real time, and to grasp the changes in the user's psychological state at any time.

Figures 251 and 252 show examples of analysis map graphs that can be generated from the data sets of the gaming system PS400 described above.

The map in Figure 251 (A) analyzes the address of members and frequency of use of gaming establishments, and shows how many times a user with global member ID "001" has used each gaming establishment on a map, along with the address of the user and the address of each gaming establishment, with the size of the black circle representing the frequency of use of the gaming establishment. This type of analysis shows that users do not necessarily tend to use gaming establishments that are close to their home (albeit in a straight line).

The map in Figure 251(B) analyzes the relationship between members in a specific area and frequency of use of gaming establishments, expanding the target users in Figure 251(A) to a specific area, and the target users are users (105 people) who live at a specific address (within the town: hatched area). This type of analysis makes it possible to grasp the overall trends in gaming establishment selection by multiple users.

The map in Figure 252 (A) is a customer address analysis of amusement store A, and shows how many users in the vicinity of amusement store A visit the store. In Figure 252 (A), customers who play at amusement store A are counted by address inside the outermost circle (for example, a circle with a radius of 4 km centered on the address of amusement store A (shown with a ◆)). The locations of amusement stores B and C are also shown with "■". For example, during a specified period, 2,822 players whose addresses are outside the outermost circle visited amusement store A, and the number of players is displayed for each divided area inside the circle, with areas with a large number of players (100 or more) shown with cross-hatching, areas with a small number of players (less than 50 people) shown with "white (no hatching)", and areas with an intermediate number of players (50 to 99 people) shown with hatching. This type of analysis allows for behavioral analysis of surrounding users and is also useful information for considering competing stores.

The graph in Figure 252 (B) analyzes the store satisfaction of members, showing how many times a user with global member ID = "001" used which amusement store, as well as the playing time and difference in number of coins (the number of coins bet or the number of game balls inserted minus the number of coins paid out) at that time. From this analysis, for example, in this example, it can be seen that the frequency of use of the amusement store and playing time are not simply proportional to the difference in number of coins.

The analyses using the maps and graphs in Figures 251 and 252 as described above are possible in this embodiment because user consumption information and operation information can be obtained for multiple gaming facilities, but these analyses are merely examples, and various analyses can be performed based on the data obtained in this embodiment.

For example, it is possible to use AI (Artificial Intelligence) to analyze user behavior, and AI-based services can be provided on the cloud. In this case, it is also possible to issue volume licenses for multiple gaming facilities, and it is also possible to provide a global membership ID to group companies, and it is also possible to provide a global membership ID for administrators.

Facial data can also be used to identify and link users, making it possible to apply the system to people who have not registered as members.

Up to this point, the gaming system according to the 17th embodiment has been described with reference to Figures 237 to 252, but the configuration of each device is merely an example, and the technical idea of the present application can be realized by various other configurations. In addition, it is possible to construct a new gaming system by appropriately combining each device according to the 17th embodiment that has been described up to this point. Furthermore, the gaming system according to the 17th embodiment can be appropriately applied to the above-mentioned first to sixteenth embodiments.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is assumed that each gaming establishment will have an enclosed pachinko machine and an enclosed pachislot machine, and that a dedicated unit will be connected to each of these gaming machines. However, even in gaming establishments that also have existing gaming machines (i.e., conventional pachinko machines and pachislot machines that are not enclosed), a sandwich device or the like connected to the existing gaming machine can be configured to transmit the consumption information according to this embodiment to the member management server 10700, and furthermore, the operating information can be obtained by the member management server 10700, for example, by linking with the hall computer of the gaming establishment.

The following describes the configuration of the gaming system according to the seventeenth embodiment described above, and the effects of that configuration.

<Appendix C-1>
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a gaming ball passes through a passing area provided in a gaming area in which the launched gaming ball can roll, control is executed to variably display a pattern as identification information on the display area of the image display device, and control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed pattern, and when the derively displayed pattern forms a predetermined combination (a specific display form), a transition to a jackpot gaming state which is advantageous to the player is provided.

To play on such a gaming machine, a player inserts bills into the sandwich device, which dispenses gaming media, and then the player begins playing using the gaming media.

For example, in a management system such as that disclosed in JP 2020-103619 A, a player operates a sandwich device to receive loaned game balls in exchange for money, inserts the game balls into the upper tray of the pachinko machine, and then uses a launch handle to launch the game balls to play the game.

However, existing gaming systems that include a management system like that of Patent Document 1 can grasp the status of gaming media rentals and game results on gaming machines for each player, but cannot grasp what kind of games the player is playing at other gaming facilities.

In addition, when playing, players must prepare cash, insert it into the sandwich device, and receive gaming media before playing. This means that if a player does not have cash on hand, he or she cannot play. In addition, if a player does not have small denomination bills on hand, he or she may insert large denomination bills and end up spending too much.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming system that can grasp the status of gaming media rentals and game results on gaming machines across multiple gaming facilities.

Another object of the present invention is to provide a gaming system that allows players to easily start playing.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming system.

(C-1-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming system (e.g., a gaming system PS400) capable of grasping operation information (e.g., ball output information of the gaming machine 10010) of a gaming machine and consumption information (e.g., payment information relating to the lending of a gaming medium in a cashless manner) including information on a gaming value lent to the gaming machine by a user from a gaming device (e.g., a dedicated unit 10020),
The system has an operation/consumption information storage means (e.g., an operation information table 10755, a consumption history table 10754) for storing the operation information and the consumption information,
A gaming system in which, in each of predetermined gaming establishments, gaming devices are controlled so as to be capable of transmitting the operation information and the consumption information.

(C-1-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The operation/consumption information storage means is configured to store the operation information and the consumption information in association with a user identifier for identifying the user and an amusement facility identifier for identifying the amusement facility in which the gaming machine is located.

(C-1-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.
the gaming device is controllable to lend information of the gaming value to the gaming machine without accepting cash from the user;
Based on the operation information or the consumption information, the device is configured to control the user's operation of the gaming device (for example, to display a message or suspend lending depending on the user's level of gaming or consumption to prevent overspending or addiction).

According to the present invention, it is possible to grasp the status of rental of gaming media and the results of gaming on gaming machines across multiple gaming establishments, and such data can be used to prevent users from becoming addicted to gaming, analyze their behavior, and motivate them to visit gaming establishments.

The present invention also allows players to easily start playing. For example, because cashless payment is possible without using currency, players can easily play even if they do not have cash on hand. Cashless payment also makes it possible to avoid overspending or becoming addicted to gaming by inserting large denomination bills. On the other hand, gaming establishments can provide players with opportunities to play without discouraging their desire to play.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
The gaming system according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko machine is defined as the front direction, the back side of the pachinko machine is defined as the rear direction, the left side of the pachinko machine when viewed from the front is defined as the left direction, the right side of the pachinko machine when viewed from the front is defined as the right direction, the top of the pachinko machine is defined as the up direction, the bottom side of the pachinko machine is defined as the down direction, the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is defined as the rightward direction, and the conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the leftward direction.

The first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are both so-called type one pachinko gaming machines known as digital pachinko. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. In contrast, the second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1/2 mixed machine, which is a combination of a type 1 gaming machine called a digital pachinko machine and a type 2 gaming machine called a feather mono. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but this specification describes an example in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. However, this is not intended to exclude type 1/2 mixed pachinko gaming machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In this specification, when the term "special design" is used, it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

In addition, the term "variable display" in this specification includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the pattern is displayed by changing, and "stop display" in which the pattern is displayed by stopping, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display pattern is stopped (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special pattern lottery") and the result of the normal pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "normal pattern lottery") described later are determined. Note that although the pattern appears to be stopped, there are cases where the pattern is displayed in a state where the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined (for example, a state where it is temporarily stopped), and such a state is included in the variable display. Note that even if the pattern is temporarily stopped, for example, the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined at this point, so the pattern can be displayed again by changing.

[1-1. Configuration of gaming system]
When describing the configuration of the gaming system 15001 of this embodiment shown in Fig. 253, the front-rear direction is defined as the front side and the back side as viewed from the player of the gaming machine 15010. Also, the left-right direction is defined as the left side and the right-hand side as viewed from the player of the gaming machine 15010.

The gaming system 15001 in FIG. 253 is capable of managing information relating to games played in a pachinko parlor. The gaming system 15001 has a gaming machine 15010, a rental unit 15020, a machine controller 15030, a data lamp 15040, an HCBOX (hall control box) 15050, a pulse processor 15060, a hall computer 15070, a settlement machine (card settlement machine) 15080, a ball handling machine (ball and card handling machine) 15090, a card server 15100, and a member server 15110. The gaming system 15001 is also connected to various external servers.

The gaming system 15001 according to this embodiment is connected to, for example, a third-party management server 15120 in a company A data center (which is a data center of a specified company A), a central management server 15130, and a gaming machine information processing server 15140. The gaming machine information processing server 15140 is further connected to a gaming machine information management server 15150 of a specified organization (for example, organization A), and a gaming machine information management server 15160 of a specified organization (for example, organization B).

The gaming machines 15010 are installed in the store. The gaming machines include, for example, pachinko machines 15011, pachislot machines 15012, managed gaming machines 15013, and medalless machines 15014, but in this specification, the term "gaming machines 15010" is used to refer to these collectively. In FIG. 253, the pachinko machines 15011, pachislot machines 15012, managed gaming machines 15013, and medalless machines 15014 are each installed on separate islands in the store.

The pachinko machine 15011 is a gaming machine into which a player can insert gaming balls. The player can play with the pachinko machine 15011 by shooting the inserted gaming balls into the gaming area. During the game, the gaming balls are paid out from the pachinko machine 15011 as appropriate.

The pachislot machine 15012 is a gaming machine into which a player can insert gaming medals. By inserting gaming medals into the pachislot machine 15012, a player can play on the pachislot machine 15012. During play, gaming medals are paid out from the pachislot machine 15012 as appropriate.

The managed gaming machine 15013 is an enclosed gaming machine in which a certain number of gaming balls are enclosed and the gaming balls are circulated during play. In the managed gaming machine 15013, the gaming balls are managed by data. However, it may also be configured so that the enclosed gaming balls circulate around the island.

The medal-less machine 15014 is a slot machine that does not require the insertion of gaming medals to play. In the medal-less machine 15014, gaming medals are managed by data.

The lending unit 15020 is for lending out gaming media. Gaming media includes gaming balls, gaming medals, gaming balls converted into electronic data, and gaming medals converted into electronic data.

The managed gaming machine 15013 described above has a certain number of gaming balls sealed inside, and with regard to these physically existing gaming balls, the number of gaming balls provided to the managed gaming machine 15013 and the number of gaming balls acquired from the managed gaming machine 15013 are electronically managed as the number of gaming media. On the other hand, in the medal-less machine 15014 described above, no medals physically exist, and the number of virtual medals provided to the medal-less machine 15014 and the number of virtual medals acquired from the medal-less machine 15014 are electronically managed as the number of gaming media.

The lending unit 15020 is installed adjacent to the gaming machine 15010. The lending unit 15020 is configured to be able to lend gaming media based on information read from bills and cards (visitor cards and member cards) inserted by the player. If a member card is not inserted, and the player finishes playing with a balance or playable gaming media remaining, the lending unit 15020 returns or issues a visitor card to the player that records information indicating the balance and the number of gaming media. The lending unit 15020 includes a gaming ball lending unit 15021, a gaming medal lending unit 15022, a managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023, and a medalless machine compatible lending unit 15024.

As described above, the lending unit 15020 manages and displays the balance and the number of playable gaming media (e.g., the number of medals held), but with regard to the balance, not only is the amount based on the deposited amount used as the unit, but also "points" may be used as the unit of paid information corresponding to the deposited amount. However, for the sake of convenience in this specification, the balance is managed and displayed as a unit of amount.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, a player's card (visitor card and member card) consisting of an IC card is inserted into a storage medium insertion port (for example, card insertion port 15321 described below) of the lending unit, and the information read there provides the lending unit with information regarding the balance, held medals, saved medals, held balls, and saved balls (in terms of the information flow, quantitative information regarding these is moved from the card, or set from a server, etc. based on the information on the card). In addition to the quantitative information related to the game as described above, other information can also be read from the player's card and provided to the lending unit.

However, this form of accepting storage media is merely one example, and for example, a storage medium such as a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or another IC card may be accepted (for example, brought close to (or touched) near the touch guide mark 15304 described below), and information read by the non-contact IC card RW15406 may provide information regarding the balance, held medals, saved medals, held balls, saved balls, and other information to the lending unit. In addition, various types of storage media may be accepted in their respective corresponding forms, and the information stored in or associated with the storage media may be configured to be provided to the lending unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, under certain conditions, information regarding the balance, possessed medals, saved medals, possessed balls, saved balls, and other information is written onto the player's card (visitor card and member card), and is configured to be ejected, for example, from the card insertion port 15321 described below. Also, if the player's card is not inserted, the information regarding the balance, possessed medals, saved medals, possessed balls, saved balls, and other information may be stored on a new card that is issued and stored inside the lending unit, and then ejected.

However, the form of writing information to such a storage medium and ejecting it (returning it to a state that the player can use) is merely an example, and for example, this information can be written to a storage medium such as a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or another IC card. For example, by bringing a smartphone or the like close to (or touching) the vicinity of the touch guide mark 15304 described later, information on the balance, held medals, saved medals, held balls, saved balls, and other information is written to the recording section of the storage medium in the non-contact IC card RW15406. The writing is completed instantly, but a GUI can be provided that displays, for example, on the operation unit 15409 of the rental unit described later that the writing has been completed successfully, or that allows the player to touch a button displayed on the operation unit 15409 to inform the rental unit that the player has understood the contents of the writing. In addition, information can be written to various types of storage media in a corresponding form.

The game ball lending unit 15021 is for lending out game balls. The game ball lending unit 15021 is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 15011. The game medal lending unit 15022 is for lending out game medals. The game medal lending unit 15022 is installed adjacent to the pachislot machine 15012. The managed game machine compatible lending unit 15023 is for lending out game balls that have been converted into electronic data. The managed game machine compatible lending unit 15023 is installed adjacent to the managed game machine 15013. The medalless machine compatible lending unit 15024 is for lending out game medals that have been converted into electronic data. The medalless machine compatible lending unit 15024 is installed adjacent to the medalless machine 15014.

One machine controller 15030 is installed for each of the pachinko machine 15011, the pachislot machine 15012, and the pulse processor 15060. The machine controller 15030 is connected to the game ball lending unit 15021, the game medal lending unit 15022, and the hall computer 15070. The machine controller 15030 is also connected to the pachinko machine 15011 and the pachislot machine 15012 via the data lamp 15040. The machine controller 15030 collects information on the operating status of the game machine 15010 from the pachinko machine 15011, etc., and outputs the information to the hall computer 15070, etc.

The data lamp 15040 is a data display device that displays gaming information (e.g., the number of jackpots on the day or in the past) of the corresponding pachinko machine 15011, pachislot machine 15012, managed gaming machine 15013, medal-less machine 15014, etc., and is, for example, a device having an LCD screen or the like for displaying the gaming information.

The HCBOX 15050 is for outputting various information to the hall computer 15070, etc. One HCBOX 15050 is installed for each managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023 and medalless machine compatible lending unit 15024. The HCBOX 15050 is connected to the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023 and medalless machine compatible lending unit 15024, and outputs information from the lending units to the hall computer 15070, etc.

In addition, information from the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023 and the medalless machine compatible lending unit 15024 is output to the gaming machine information management servers 15150 and 15160 of the gaming machine information center via the card server 15100 and the gaming machine information processing server 15140 of the A company data center. The gaming machine information center outputs information to the gaming machine information management server 15150 of the gaming machine information center (organization A) and the gaming machine information management server 15160 of the gaming machine information center (organization B).

The pulse processor 15060 notifies the hall computer 15070, etc. of information from the lending unit 15020 (e.g., the count and the number of balls dispensed, etc.) by outputting a pulse. The pulse processor 15060 is installed, for example, on each island. The pulse processor 15060 is connected to the lending unit 15020 and the hall computer 15070 via the table controller 15030, etc. The pulse processor 15060 is also connected to the card server 15100 via the island hub H1, floor hub H2, and office hub H4, and is configured to be able to output a pulse to the card server 15100 as well.

The hall computer 15070 is used to manage game results, deposits, sales, and settlements. The hall computer 15070 is installed in the office. Game results of the pachinko machine 15011 and the pachislot machine 15012 are input to the hall computer 15070 via the machine controller 15030. In addition, game results of the managed gaming machine 15013 and the medalless machine 15014 are input to the hall computer 15070 via the HCBOX 15050.

The settlement machine 15080 is used to settle card balances, etc. The settlement machine 15080 is connected to the card server 15100 via the floor hub H2 and the office hub H4. The settlement machine 15080 is configured to allow insertion of cards returned from the rental unit 15020, and when a card that stores a balance is inserted, it dispenses cash according to the balance. At this time, the settlement machine 15080 transmits specified information to the card server 15100. The settlement machine 15080 is also connected to the hall computer 15070 via a specified hub, and transmits specified information to the hall computer 15070 when it dispenses cash.

The ball handling machine 15090 is for transmitting card information to the prize exchange POS (not shown). The ball handling machine is installed at the prize counter in the store and is connected to the prize exchange POS. The ball handling machine 15090 is connected to the card server 15100 via the counter hub H3, the floor hub H2, and the office hub H4. The ball handling machine 15090 is configured to be able to insert cards returned or issued from the lending unit 15020. When a card that stores balls or a card associated with saved balls is inserted, the ball handling machine 15090 notifies the prize exchange POS of the number of balls held or the number of saved balls corresponding to the card. After that, when the prize exchange POS requests a change in the number of balls held or the number of saved balls depending on the result of the prize exchange, the ball handling machine 15090 updates the memory contents of the card as necessary and transmits the specified information to the card server 15100.

The card server 15100 is used to manage sales, balances, and ball information on the system. The card server 15100 has a database for the information it manages. The card server 15100 is installed in an office and is connected to the member server 15110. The card server 15100 is also connected to a server in Company A's data center via an office hub H4 and a router R. The card server 15100 accepts requests linked to card transactions performed in the lending unit 15020, settlement machine 15080, and ball processing machine 15090. The card server 15100 updates the database in response to the request, and transfers the request to the member server 15110 or the gaming machine information center depending on the type of request. When transferring the request, the card server 15100 transfers the request to the gaming machine information center via the gaming machine information processing server 15140 in Company A's data center. Additionally, the card server 15100 aggregates card sales data to generate aggregated data.

The member server 15110 is used to manage information related to the member card (e.g., member identification information and number of balls stored). The member server 15110 is installed in the office. The member server 15110 responds appropriately to requests from the card server 15100.

The third-party management server 15120 in Company A's data center is used to accumulate and manage sales data from all stores. The third-party management server 15120 is installed in a third-party institution other than the amusement facility (Company A, the card company in Figure 253), and is connected to the card server 15100 via a router R or the like. Aggregated data is input to the third-party management server 15120 from the card server 15100.

The central management server 15130 in Company A's data center is used to manage the status of all stores, detect abnormalities, and send notifications. The central management server 15130 is installed in Company A's data center and is connected to the equipment in the store (rental unit 15020, pulse processor 15060, card server 15100, etc.) via router R, etc. The central management server 15130 can also be configured to distribute files for updating applications and programs of the equipment in the store. The central management server 15130 monitors the connection status with the card server 15100, etc., and sends appropriate notifications if an abnormality is detected.

The gaming machine information processing server 15140 in Company A's data center processes information on the managed gaming machines 15013 and the medalless machines 15014. The gaming machine information processing server 15140 is installed in Company A's data center and is connected to the equipment in the store via a router R or the like. Information on the managed gaming machines 15013 and the medalless machines 15014 is input to the gaming machine information processing server 15140 from the equipment in the store as appropriate. Note that in this specification, the term "management computer" is used to collectively refer to the computers in Company A's data center (the third-party management server 15120, the central management server 15130, and the gaming machine information processing server 15140).

The lending units 15020 (e.g., the game ball lending unit 15021, the game medal lending unit 15022, the managed game machine compatible lending unit 15023, and the medalless machine compatible lending unit 15024) can be configured to allow deposits of electronic money, etc., in addition to paper money, and can be equipped with, for example, a contactless IC card reader (e.g., the contactless IC card RW15406 shown in FIG. 256) that reads and writes information on an IC card for depositing electronic money, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, information regarding the balance, held medals (held balls), and saved medals (saved balls) can be exchanged between the rental unit 15020 using a storage medium (portable storage medium) consisting of an IC card such as a visitor card or a member card, and an IC card reader (for example, IC card RW15405 shown in FIG. 256) is provided to read and write information from these IC cards, but these IC cards may be configured to be read and written using a non-contact IC card reader such as the one described above, or a storage medium other than an IC card (for example, a smartphone or other portable storage medium) may be used, and a device that can read and write information from these storage media may be provided.

[1-2. Configuration of medal-less machine]
Next, the configuration of the medal-less machine 15014 included in the gaming system 15001 of the present application will be described with reference to Fig. 254. Fig. 254 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the medal-less machine of the present application.

The medalless machine 15014 is configured to be able to play games by having various components as shown in FIG. 254. In FIG. 254, the medalless machine 15014 is shown as being connected to a medalless machine compatible lending unit 15024, but hereafter in this specification, including the notation in FIG. 254, this medalless machine compatible lending unit 15024 will simply be referred to as the "lending unit 15024."

As shown in FIG. 253, the rental unit 15024 is connected to the arcade's hall computer 15070, for example, via a LAN line, and is configured to be able to transmit data to the hall computer 15070.

The lending unit 15024 is also connected to the main control board 15211 via the game ball connection terminal board 15243 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. The lending unit 15024 performs the necessary communication with the main control board 15211 to perform lending operations (i.e., operations to provide medals necessary for the player to perform betting operations), granting operations (i.e., operations to grant medals to the player when a combination related to the award of medals is won (the combination is established), etc.), and operations to electronically record the number of medals provided by these operations, etc.

In this embodiment, "value information" refers to information indicating the quantity of value that can be used as a source of funds for play, such as not only cash but also owned medals, owned balls, saved medals, and saved balls, which can be accepted by the lending unit 15024, etc. For example, for cash, this value information corresponds to an amount such as a balance or a quantity such as a degree, for owned medals, the number of owned medals, for owned balls, the number of saved medals, and for saved balls, the number of saved balls.

Each piece of information, i.e., balance/points, number of medals held, number of balls held, number of medals saved, and number of balls saved, can be identified as a "type" of value information. In addition to the above, value information can also include information on various types of value, such as the amount and points charged with electronic money or web money. Electronic money, web money, etc. can be managed as such a type, or it can be added (charged) to the above-mentioned cash (balance) and managed as a type called cash (balance/points) in the lending unit 15024, etc.

When such value information is accepted by the lending unit 15024, etc., it is stored in the storage means of the lending unit 15024, etc., as "value information" related to the value information, or as "specific information" for each type. More specifically, by accepting "cash" (for example, inserting bills or depositing electronic money by touching a mobile terminal, etc.), the amount and frequency are stored as value information and specific information. Also, by accepting "held medals" and "held balls" (for example, inserting a membership card or visitor card, or moving held medals by touching a mobile terminal such as a smartphone), the number of held medals and the number of held balls are stored as value information and specific information, respectively. Similarly, by accepting "saved medals" and "saved balls" (for example, inserting a membership card or moving saved medals by touching a mobile terminal such as a smartphone), the number of saved medals and the number of saved balls are stored as value information and specific information, respectively.

In addition, the "predetermined information" related to the above-mentioned "value information" is provided, for example, from the lending unit 15024 to the medalless machine 15014. For example, based on the amount and frequency stored in the lending unit 15024, the number of medals and the number of balls corresponding to a predetermined amount and a predetermined frequency are lent to the gaming machine. In this case, the "predetermined information" corresponds to the number of medals and the number of balls lent to the gaming machine. In addition, based on the number of held medals and the number of held balls stored in the lending unit 15024, at least a part of the number of medals and the number of balls are paid out to the gaming machine. In this case, the "predetermined information" corresponds to the number of medals and the number of balls paid out to the gaming machine. Furthermore, based on the number of saved medals and the number of saved balls stored in the lending unit 15024 (or obtained from a predetermined server), at least a part of the number of medals and the number of balls are provided to the gaming machine by specifying a replay. In this case, the "predetermined information" corresponds to the number of medals and the number of balls provided to the gaming machine.

The number of medals and balls, which decrease as they are used in games and increase as they are won through winning in games, are stored in the memory means of the gaming machine, and this number of medals and balls is "storage information" related to "value information." "Storage information" is, for example, value information managed as electronic data, and the above-mentioned number of medals and number of balls are managed as electronic data. For example, the lending unit 15024 can obtain "storage information" stored in the medal-less machine 15014, and here, the "storage information" may include, in addition to the number of medals and balls stored in the gaming machine, a flag that is set to a predetermined value when the number of stored medals or number of balls meets a predetermined condition, and other related information.

In addition, electronic money, web money, etc. may be stored or associated with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or an IC card (not issued by an amusement parlor) and accepted by a lending unit 15024, etc. For example, various cases can be considered, such as: (1) an amount based on electronic money, web money, etc. is stored in or associated with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, while value information such as the number of medals and balls held is stored in an IC card (visitor card or member card) or the like; (2) an amount based on electronic money, web money, etc. is stored in or associated with an IC card (visitor card or member card) or the like, while value information such as the number of medals and balls held is stored in or associated with a mobile terminal or the like; (3) in addition to an amount based on electronic money, web money, etc., value information such as the number of medals and balls held is stored in or associated with a mobile terminal or the like; and (4) an amount based on electronic money, web money, etc., value information such as the number of medals and balls held is stored in or associated with an IC card (visitor card or member card) or the like. In this embodiment, the use of IC cards (visitor cards, membership cards) as storage media in which such value information is stored or associated is mainly described, but in each function of this embodiment described below, value information can be accepted in various storage media with the various storage modes described above.

The lending unit 15024 is also configured to be capable of transmitting operation information, including ball payout information, and consumption information, including information related to the lending of gaming media, to an external hall computer 15070 or the like, via a communication device.

The medal-less machine 15014 has a main control board 15211, a sub-control board 15212, a door relay board 15213, and a sub-relay board 15214. The main control board 15211 and the door relay board 15213, the door relay board 15213 and the sub-relay board 15214, and the sub-relay board 15214 and the sub-control board 15212 are electrically connected to each other. In addition, the main control board 15211 and the sub-control board 15212 are electrically connected to each other so that one-way serial communication is possible from the main control board 15211 to the sub-control board 15212 via the door relay board 15213 and the sub-relay board 15214.

The main control board 15211 has a main control unit 15211a as a game control means (game control unit) that controls the progress of the game, and a medal count control unit 15211b as a game media management device (game media control unit) that controls the management of the game media. A main CPU and main RAM are mounted (connected) on the main control board 15211.

Here, in FIG. 254, the main control unit 15211a and the medal count control unit 15211b are mounted on the same main control board 15211, but they may be mounted on separate boards (configured as separate boards) and electrically connected to perform the same functions. In that case, the main control unit 15211a is mounted on the main control board, and the medal count control unit 15211b is mounted on the medal count control board.

The sub-control board 15212 is a performance control board that controls the performance, and is housed in a plastic sub-control board case (not shown). A sub-CPU is mounted (connected) on the sub-control board 15212.

The door relay board 15213 is attached to a specific position within cabinet G (for example, the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board for relaying between various devices and the main control board 15211, and between the main control board 15211 and the sub-control board 15212. The sub-relay board 15214 is attached to a specific position within cabinet G (for example, the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board for relaying between various devices connected to the sub-relay board 15214 and the sub-control board 15212.

The medal-less machine 15014 also has a power supply unit 15215 that includes a power supply board 15215a and a power switch 15215b.

The medal-less machine 15014 also has a reel unit 15221, a reset switch 15222, a setting key switch 15223, and a counting switch 15224, which are electrically connected to the main control unit 15211a. These may also be connected to the main control unit 15211a via a door relay board 15213. As long as control is performed smoothly, they may also be connected to the medal count control unit 15211b.

The reel unit 15221 is mainly composed of three reels: 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrical reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the periphery of the reel body, and multiple (for example, 20) patterns are drawn on the reel band at a predetermined interval along the rotation direction of the reel. In addition, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each can rotate vertically at a constant speed. In addition, the reset switch 15222 can detect a reset operation by the manager of the gaming facility. The reset operation is an operation for canceling various error states. In addition, the setting key switch 15223 is used when changing the setting value of the medal-less machine 15014 (for example, six levels of setting 1 to setting 6) (setting change) or when checking the setting of the medal-less machine 15014 (setting check). The counting switch 15224 also detects pressing of a counting button (not shown) that accepts a counting operation (credit settlement operation) for returning credited medals (i.e., the number of medals stored inside the medalless machine 15014) (transferring the number of stored medals to the lending unit 15024).

However, since the medal-less machine 15014 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine, when the counting switch 15224 detects that the corresponding counting button (not shown) has been pressed, data indicating the number of credited medals is sent to the lending unit 15024 via the game ball etc. connection terminal board 15243 (credit settlement is performed).

The medal-less machine 15014 also has a start switch 15231, a 1BET switch 15233, a MAXBET switch 15234, a stop switch board 15235, a door opening/closing switch 15236, and a game information display unit 15237, which are electrically connected to the main control unit 15211a via the door relay board 15213. These may also be connected directly to the main control unit 15211a without going through the door relay board 15213. As long as control is performed smoothly, they may also be connected to the medal count control unit 15211b.

The start switch 15231 detects the operation of the start lever to start a game. The 1BET switch 15233 detects the pressing of the "1BET" button, and the MAXBET switch 15234 detects the pressing of the "MAXBET" button. The stop switch board 15235 is provided corresponding to each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and detects the stop operation of each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R to stop the rotation of each reel. The door opening/closing switch 15236 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, and monitors the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD by turning on when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state and turning off when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state.

The medal-less machine 15014 also has a medal count display unit 15241 that indicates the number of credited medals (i.e., medals stored inside the medal-less machine 15014), which is electrically connected to the medal count control unit 15211b. When the medal count of the stored medals stored inside the medal-less machine 15014 is cleared by operating the lending unit 15024 described later, a specified signal is output to the medal count control unit 15211b, and at this time, the medal count control unit 15211b controls the medal count display unit 15241 based on the signal to display "00000" (number of credits = 0) on the 5-digit 7-segment LED for credit display provided in the medal count display unit 15241.

The medal count display unit 15241 may also be connected to the medal count control unit 15211b via the door relay board 15213. It may also be connected to the main control unit 15211a as long as control is performed smoothly.

The game ball etc. connection terminal board 15243 outputs operation information (e.g., medal insertion signal, medal payout signal, etc.) to the outside. The game ball etc. connection terminal board 15243 is equipped with a connection mechanism (not shown) for connecting the lending unit 15024 and the medal count control unit 15211b.

The medal-less machine 15014 also has a display device 15251, which is electrically connected to the sub-control board 15212. The display device 15251 may be connected to the sub-control board 15212 via the sub-relay board 15214. Here, the display device 15251 is a main display device or a sub-display device that displays performance images, etc.

The medal-less machine 15014 also has a speaker group 15252, an LED drive board 15253, a performance switch 15254, and an operation switch 15255, which are electrically connected to the sub-control board 15212 via the sub-relay board 15214. Note that these may also be directly connected to the sub-control board 15212 without going through the sub-relay board 15214.

The speaker group 15252 is a speaker that outputs sounds such as sound effects and background music. The LED drive board 15253 is a board on which the drive circuits for each LED board 15256 are mounted, and each LED board 15256 is a group of lamps and LEDs that output light related to effects and the like. The effect switch 15254 and the operation switch 15255 detect the pressing of the effect button and operation button operated by the player for effects.

The game information display unit 15237 described above is configured to be able to display various game information, and its display operation is controlled by a main control microprocessor (main control circuit) in the main control unit 15211a. The game information display unit 15237 can be installed in any position as long as it is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be installed on the base of the front door of the medal-less machine 15014.

The game information display unit 15237 is provided with a payout display section for displaying information on the number of game media paid out (the number of game media awarded), for example. The payout display section is composed of a two-digit seven-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player.

In addition, the game information display unit 15237 is provided with LEDs for displaying the number of bets, labeled "START," "REPLAY," "1 BET," "2 BET," and "3 BET," as lamps that indicate game operation information.

For example, when the number of gaming media bets (number of inserted coins) is 0 (all line LEDs are off), pressing the 1 BET button lights up the "1 BET" line LED, pressing the 1 BET button again lights up the "1 BET" and "2 BET" line LEDs, pressing the 1 BET button again lights up all the "1 BET" to "3 BET" line LEDs and lights up the "START" line LED. At this time, each time the 1 BET button is pressed, the value of the number of gaming media stored (number of credits) displayed by the 5-digit 7-segment LED in the medal count display unit 15241 described below is decremented by 1.

For example, when the number of gaming media bets (number of inserted coins) is 0 (all line LEDs are off), pressing the MAX BET button will light up all of the line LEDs for "1 BET" to "3 BET" and also light up the "START" line LED. At this time, with one bet operation, the value of the number of gaming media reserved (number of credits) displayed on the 5-digit 7-segment LED is reduced by 3.

Furthermore, for example, if a replay role is won in the previous game, the "START" and "REPLAY" line LEDs will light up. At this time, the value of the number of game media stored (number of credits) displayed on the 5-digit 7-segment LED will not be subtracted.

The game information display unit 15237 is also provided with an instruction display section for displaying information about the stop operation to be notified to the player in a situation where the information about the stop operation is to be notified to the player (for example, in an AT state). The instruction display section is composed of a three-digit seven-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player.

The pachinko machine 15011 and the pachislot machine 15012 that may be included in the gaming system 15001 of this embodiment have a known configuration and will not be described here. As for the managed gaming machine 15013, since the game is different, the configuration of the switches that detect the pressing of the operation buttons used by the player for the game is different from that of the medalless machine 15014. However, the relationship between the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023 and the managed gaming machine 15013 is similar to that between the lending unit 15024 and the medalless machine 15014 in that information indicating the quantity of electronic data of gaming media is exchanged between the two based on the player's operation, and a detailed description of the configuration of the managed gaming machine 15013 will also be omitted here.

In addition, in the managed gaming machine 15013, the main control board has a main control unit as a gaming control means (gaming control unit) that controls the progress of the game, and a frame control unit as a gaming media management device (gaming media control unit) that controls the management of the gaming media.

In addition, in the managed gaming machine 15013, like the medalless machine 15014 shown in FIG. 254, the main control unit and the frame control unit are mounted on the same main control board, but they may be mounted on separate boards (configured as separate boards) and electrically connected to perform the same functions. In that case, the main control unit is mounted on the main control board, and the frame control unit is mounted on the frame control board.

In the managed gaming machine 15013, for example, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches gaming balls as gaming media from above into the gaming area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the waiting gaming ball in the direction of the launch pad. This causes the gaming ball to move to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the waiting position to the launch pad, which detects the gaming ball moving to the launch pad. When the subtraction sensor detects a gaming ball, the number of balls held is subtracted by one.

In this way, since the game balls as game media are launched from above into the game area, the managed game machine 15013 can avoid so-called return balls (foul balls). The game balls discharged from the game area after rolling around the game area are polished by a ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by a lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged outside the managed game machine 15013, and a certain number of game balls (for example, 50 balls) are configured to circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Alternatively, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism that discharges game balls outside the game machine and a take-in mechanism that takes in the game balls polished outside the game machine into the inside of the game machine may be provided. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a dedicated gutter for taking in, or may be configured to take in the balls from a winning hole provided in the game area.

In the managed gaming machine 15013, since the gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, there is no upper or lower tray for temporarily holding the gaming balls. Since the managed gaming machine 15013 does not discharge the gaming balls to the outside, the player does not actually have the gaming balls in his/her hands, and the number of gaming balls does not actually increase or decrease by playing. In the managed gaming machine 15013, the player starts playing after obtaining balls by loaning them from the managed gaming machine compatible loan unit 15023 (gaming medium handling device). Here, obtaining balls means that the player obtains gaming media for data management purposes. Then, the balls are consumed by the launching device when the gaming balls are launched, and the number of balls in hand decreases. In addition, when the gaming balls pass through each winning hole (starting hole) or the like provided in the playing area, the number of balls in hand is paid out according to the conditions set for each winning hole, and the number of balls in hand increases.

Furthermore, the number of balls held also increases by loaning from the managed gaming machine compatible loan unit 15023. Also, for example, when the game ends and all of the game value (i.e., balls held) stored in the managed gaming machine 15013 is liquidated, or an operation is performed to send some of the balls held to the managed gaming machine compatible loan unit 15023 (for example, touching the "count" button), all or part of the balls held are integrated into the game value managed by the managed gaming machine compatible loan unit 15023, the game value stored in the managed gaming machine 15013 is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls held decreases. Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in a type of gaming machine in which game balls are launched from above the play area, foul balls may occur when game balls are launched from below as in conventional gaming machines. Therefore, in the case of a type of gaming machine in which game balls are launched from below, the number of balls held also increases or decreases depending on whether or not foul balls are generated. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of gaming media" refers to the consumption, lending, and payout of balls held. Additionally, "increase/decrease in gaming media" refers to the increase/decrease in the number of balls held due to consumption, lending, and payout. Additionally, "data related to the increase/decrease in gaming media due to consumption, lending, and payout of gaming media" refers to data related to the decrease in balls held due to game balls being launched, and the increase in balls held due to lending and payout.

The managed gaming machine 15013 has a frame control unit (gaming media management device) and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The frame control unit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of gaming balls through each winning hole, etc. The frame control unit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a gaming ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out as a result is added to the number of balls held. Also, when a gaming ball is released, the number of balls held is subtracted. The frame control unit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023 by the player's operation. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for conversion from the gaming value managed by the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023 to balls held (ball lending) and counting the number of balls held (return). Then, these requests are transmitted to the frame control unit via the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023, and the frame control unit instructs the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023 to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, "game value" refers to, for example, currency/paper money, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., and refers to anything that can be converted into balls by the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023.

The managed gaming machine 15013 may be configured so that the player cannot touch the gaming balls. For example, the managed gaming machine 15013 includes a type of machine that does not circulate the gaming balls in the island equipment but circulates them only in the gaming machine itself, and a type of machine in which the gaming balls circulate in the island equipment but the player cannot touch them.

[1-3. Configuration of rental units]
Next, referring to Fig. 255, the appearance of the lending unit 15024 will be described. Fig. 255 is a perspective view of the lending unit 15024. As shown in Fig. 255, the lending unit 15024 is formed in a vertically elongated box shape, and both the left and right sides of the lending unit 15024 are closed by side panels, and the corresponding gaming machines are arranged adjacent to each other on the left side.

A bill insertion slot 15301 through which the player inserts bills is located on the upper level of the lending unit 15024. Bills inserted through the bill insertion slot 15301 are introduced into the bill validator 15407 (described below) installed inside, where the bills are identified (authenticity and denomination are determined).

In addition, the antenna section of the contactless IC card RW15406 described below is located inside the upper section of the lending unit 15024, and by touching (or presenting at close range) an IC card or a mobile device such as a smartphone associated with a specified value (for example, balance (amount and number of points), owned medals/balls, saved medals, saved balls, electronic money, web money, etc.), the value provided by the player can be received, for example, via NFC communication. A touch guide mark 15304 is located on the front panel of the lending unit 15024, close to the antenna section of the contactless IC card RW15406 (see Figure 256), to guide the player to the touch position of the IC card.

A status indicator lamp 15311 is disposed in the middle of the rental unit 15024, which indicates the status of the rental unit 15024 by color or blinking. The status indicator lamp 15311 is composed of, for example, a full-color LED.

Furthermore, an operation unit 15409 for operation by a player or the like is provided in the middle section of the rental unit 15024. The right end of the operation unit 15409 is held by a hinge or the like on the rental unit 15024 and is rotatable in the direction shown by the arrow 15313, so that a player or the like can adjust the operation unit 15409 to the desired angle when operating or viewing the operation unit 15409. For example, a player or the like can rotate the operation unit 15409 so that it faces directly ahead, and operate and view the operation unit 15409 from directly in front of it.

The operation unit 15409 is configured, for example, with a liquid crystal touch panel capable of detecting touch operations by players, staff, etc., and players, etc. can perform various operations by touching the liquid crystal touch panel. The processing executed by touch operations by players, etc. will be described in detail later. Note that in this embodiment, the operation unit 15409 is configured so that players, staff, etc. give specific instructions to the lending unit 15024 by touching buttons, etc. displayed on the operation unit 15409, but this configuration is merely one example, and instructions can be given to the lending unit 15024 by various other configurations and methods, such as by pressing a button set for each operation (including pressing multiple buttons simultaneously or pressing and holding, etc.), or by voice.

At the bottom of the lending unit 15024 is a card insertion slot 15321 into which the player inserts an IC card. The IC card inserted here is, for example, the player's membership card or visitor card. The IC card inserted through the card insertion slot 15321 is set in the read/write position of the IC card RW 15405, which will be described later, where the contents of the inserted IC card are updated and the contents stored on the IC card are read.

The card insertion slot 15321 is also configured so that, under certain conditions, a new IC card can be ejected from the internal card storage section 15323. In this way, predetermined information is written by the IC card RW 15405 onto the new IC card ejected from the card insertion slot 15321.

Furthermore, a keyhole 15324 is provided at the bottom of the rental unit 15024. A key managed by the amusement facility is inserted into the keyhole 15324, and for example, a staff member of the amusement facility (including persons other than staff, such as an authorized operator) can insert the key into the keyhole 15324 and turn it in a specified direction, causing the rental unit 15024 to enter maintenance mode and displaying a maintenance mode menu on the liquid crystal touch panel of the operation unit 15409.

Next, the configuration of the lending unit 15024 will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the lending unit 15024.

The main CPU (central processing unit) 15401 executes a startup program stored in the ROM (read only memory) 15402 to perform processes such as lending out medals. The ROM 15402 stores the startup program and data described above. The RAM (random access memory) 15403 is a volatile storage area that reads and stores the programs and data stored in the storage unit 15404, executes the programs, and performs processes such as lending out medals. The storage unit 15404 is a non-volatile storage area made of, for example, FRAM (registered trademark), and stores programs and data for performing processes such as lending out medals, and the stored contents are not lost even if the lending unit 15024 is powered off.

The lending unit 15024 is equipped with an IC card RW (reader/writer) 15405. The main CPU 15401 reads the data stored in the IC card inserted from the card insertion slot 15321 shown in FIG. 255 by the IC card RW 15405 and stores it in the memory unit 15404. The main CPU 15401 also acquires predetermined data from the card server 15100, the member server 15110, etc. based on the data stored in the IC card inserted from the card insertion slot 15321. Also, if necessary, the data stored in the IC card is updated and the IC card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. The main CPU 15401 also writes new data to the IC card stored in the card storage unit 15323 under predetermined conditions and ejects the IC card from the card insertion slot 15321. The IC card is, for example, a member card or a visitor card.

In this example, the IC card RW 15405 is configured to be able to transmit a signal indicating the state of the IC card being handled (for example, the state in which the IC card is inserted from the card insertion port 15321 and is set to the read/write position, the state in which the IC card is set to the read/write position, the state in which the IC card is removed from the card storage section 15323 and is set to the read/write position, the state in which the IC card is moved from the read/write position and ejected from the card insertion port 15321, the state in which the IC card is ejected from the card insertion port 15321 and part of the IC card is exposed outside the lending unit 15024, etc.) to the main CPU 15401. The IC card RW 15405 is also configured to be able to detect that an IC card that has been ejected from the card insertion port 15321 and part of which is exposed outside the lending unit 15024 has been removed, and transmit a signal indicating this to the main CPU 15401.

In this example, as described above, the device is configured to detect the state of the IC card being handled, when the IC card is in an ejected state, and when an ejected IC card is removed, but such events may also be detected by, for example, another device connected to the IC card RW15405 or placed in close proximity to the IC card RW15405.

The lending unit 15024 also includes a contactless IC card RW (reader/writer) 15406. The main CPU 15401 reads data from an IC card or smartphone associated with electronic money via the contactless IC card RW 15406 using NFC communication or the like, and stores the balance corresponding to a specified amount as balance data in the memory unit 15404 based on the data thus read (ticket issuing process).

When a bill is inserted through the bill insertion slot 15301 shown in FIG. 255, if the bill identification result is normal, the bill validator (bill identification device) 15407 stores the amount corresponding to the inserted bill as balance data in the memory unit 15404 (ticket issuing process). The bill validator 15407 is also configured to store or transport the identified bill to the outside, while also being able to appropriately discharge the inserted bill from the bill insertion slot 15301 under specified conditions.

The LED section 15408 includes a full-color LED used as the status display lamp 15311 shown in FIG. 255. It also includes an infrared LED used as a monitoring spotlight, and can be configured so that the infrared light from this infrared LED is reflected by the user and captured by the camera 15412. The main CPU 15401 stores the image captured by the camera 15412 in the RAM 15403, and can detect the presence of players and changes based on this image.

Such detection processing is performed constantly, and when the user's status changes to a non-detection (absent) state and an IC card is still inserted in the card insertion slot 15321, or when there is balance data stored in the memory unit 15404, the main CPU 15401 can alert the user who is about to leave by issuing a warning sound or warning voice via the speaker 15411. The warning voice may be a voice such as "You have forgotten your card." In this embodiment, the camera 15412 is optional and may be placed anywhere on the front panel of the lending unit 15024, for example (the camera is not shown in FIG. 255). If the lending unit 15024 has the camera 15412, it can detect a change of player, forgetting to remove an IC card, leaving the balance unattended, etc., as described above.

The lending unit 15024 has an operation unit 15409. As described above, the operation unit 15409 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal touch panel that can detect touch operations by a player, etc., and the player, etc. can perform various operations by touching the liquid crystal touch panel.

The lending unit 15024 has an interface 15410, and communicates with the medalless machine 15014 via this interface 15410 to send and receive data related to lending game media, paying out held and saved balls, and accepting stored medals from the medalless machine 15014. It also receives game information, operation information, and the like from the medalless machine 15014. The lending unit 15024 also receives data indicating the number of stored medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 via the interface 15410 at a specified timing, and can grasp this number of stored medals, for example, in near real time.

The rental unit 15024 also transmits and receives data to and from the card server 15100 via the interface 15410, and transmits data to be sent to the gaming machine information management server of the gaming machine information center to the card server 15100 via the card server 15100 (and Company A's data center), and receives various data, including setting data, from the card server 15100.

Furthermore, the rental unit 15024 is configured to transmit and receive data between the hall computer 15070 via the interface 15410 and the HCBOX 15050.

The main CPU 15401 of the rental unit can also (optionally) periodically capture facial images of the user via the camera 15412 and store them as facial data in the RAM 15403. This process compares the facial image stored last time with the facial image stored this time, and if it is determined that they are not the same person, the main CPU 15401 can determine that the user has changed and perform processing accordingly.

Up to this point, with reference to Figures 254 to 256, we have explained the medalless machine 15014 and the lending unit 15024 that is connected to the medalless machine 15014 and manages the value of the gaming media exchanged between the medalless machine 15014, but from here on, we will focus on the medalless machine 15014 and the lending unit 15024. However, the configuration and features understood from this explanation also apply to the managed gaming machine 15013 and the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023 that is connected to the managed gaming machine 15013 and manages the value of the gaming media exchanged between the managed gaming machine 15013.

[1-4. Hall computer configuration]
Next, the configuration of the hall computer 15070 will be described with reference to Fig. 257. Fig. 257 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the hall computer 15070.

The hall computer 15070 includes a main CPU 15501, a ROM 15502, a RAM 15503, an external storage device 15504, a display 15505, and an interface 15506.

The main CPU 15501 reads out a control program stored in the ROM 15502 and executes a predetermined process. Data used in the process is temporarily stored in the RAM 15503.

The external storage device 15504 stores data related to the management of the gaming facility, as well as game information provided by the gaming machines.

The display 15505 displays data managed by the hall computer 15070, or notifies the occurrence of fraud or abnormalities. This display 15505 is realized, for example, by a liquid crystal display device.

The hall computer 15070 is connected to the HCBOX 15050 via the interface 15506, and the HCBOX 15050 is further connected to the rental unit 15024, enabling data to be sent and received between the hall computer 15070 and the rental unit 15024.

[1-5. Card Server Configuration]
Next, the configuration of the card server 15100 will be described with reference to Fig. 258. Fig. 258 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the card server 15100.

The card server 15100 includes a main CPU 15601, a ROM 15602, a RAM 15603, an external storage device 15604, a display 15605, and an interface 15606.

The main CPU 15601 reads out a control program stored in the ROM 15602 and executes a predetermined process. Data used in the process is temporarily stored in the RAM 15603.

The external storage device 15604 stores data related to the management of owned medals, saved medals, balances, etc. associated with membership cards and visitor cards.

The display 15605 displays data managed by the card server 15100, or notifies the user of the occurrence of fraud or abnormality. This display 15605 is realized, for example, by a liquid crystal display device.

The card server 15100 is connected to the lending unit 15024 via the interface 15606, and exchanges information associated with the membership card and visitor card. The card server 15100 is also connected to the membership server 15110 via the interface 15606, where membership information and balls are managed. Furthermore, the card server 15100 is connected to a management computer (e.g., a management computer at Company A's data center (third-party management server 15120, central management server 15130, gaming machine information processing server 15140)) via the interface 15606, and gaming information related to the gaming facility, etc. is provided to the management computer from the lending unit 15024, etc.

The configurations of the hall computer 15070 and card server 15100 of the gaming system 15001 according to this embodiment have been described with reference to Figures 257 and 258, respectively, and the configuration of the member server 15110 is basically the same as these (although the computer connected to the interface is different). In addition, the management computers (third-party management server 15120, central management server 15130, gaming machine information processing server 15140) of Company A's data center that exchanges data with the gaming system 15001, the gaming machine information management server 15150 of the gaming machine information center (organization A), and the gaming machine information management server 15160 of the gaming machine information center (organization B) are also basically the same in configuration.

[1-6. State transition of rental unit]
Next, a description will be given of state transitions of the lending unit 15024 with reference to Fig. 259. Fig. 259 is a state transition diagram showing state transitions of the lending unit 15024.

As shown in FIG. 259, the rental unit 15024 has four states: "offline state," "open state," "closed state," and "test opening state."

When the power is turned on, the lending unit 15024 performs a process to connect to the card server 15100. If it cannot connect to the card server 15100, it enters an "offline state". If it can connect to the card server 15100, it enters a card server connected state, and transitions to one of the "open state", "closed state", and "test opening state" depending on the state of the card server 15100 at the time of connection. That is, if the card server 15100 is in an open state, the lending unit 15024 transitions to an "open state", if the card server 15100 is in a closed state, the lending unit 15024 transitions to a "closed state", and if the card server 15100 is in a test opening state, the lending unit 15024 transitions to a "test opening state". In the "test opening state", when the card server 15100 is in a test opening state, it is possible to test a specified function in the lending unit 15024.

By a specified process, the connection to the card server 15100 is disconnected from the card server connected state, and when the disconnection is confirmed (for example, when there is no response within a specified period of time to a specified signal sent from the lending unit 15024 to the card server 15100), the lending unit 15024 transitions to an "offline state". Furthermore, if the lending unit 15024 in the "offline state" can confirm the connection to the card server 15100 again (for example, when the lending unit 15024 again sends a specified signal to the card server 15100 and there is a response to this signal within a specified period of time), it becomes connected to the card server and transitions to either an "open state", "closed state", or "test opening state" depending on the state of the card server 15100 at the time of connection.

When the lending unit 15024 is in the "open state", if it receives a closing notification from the card server 15100, it transitions to the "closed state". Also, when the lending unit 15024 is in the "closed state", if it receives an opening notification from the card server 15100, it transitions to the "open state", while if it receives a test opening notification from the card server 15100, it transitions to the "test opening state". Also, when the lending unit 15024 is in the "test opening state", if it receives a test closing notification from the card server 15100, it transitions to the "closed state".

As described above, state transitions of the lending unit 15024 while it is connected to the card server are controlled by notifications from the card server, and transitions from the "open store state" to the "test opening store state" or vice versa are always made via the "closed store state."

The status display lamp 15311 shown in FIG. 255 changes its display mode depending on the status of the rental unit 15024 described above and other factors, for example as follows:

When the power is not turned on, the light is off. When the power is turned on, the light changes in the following order: white, red, yellow, green, purple, and off, and then lights up in a specific color depending on the state of the rental unit 15024.

When in "closed state," if the lending unit 15024 has no remaining balance or medals in hand, the light will be lit in white, and if there are medals remaining stored in the medalless machine 15014, the light will be lit alternately in green and blue.

In the "offline state" or if an error occurs in any other state, the light turns red. Also, in the "open store state" or "test open store state", if the member card has not been inserted or before approval, and the lending unit 15024 has neither a balance nor medals (normal standby state), the light turns light blue. Also, in the "open store state", if a member card is inserted through the card insertion slot 15321, the lending unit 15024 asks the player to enter a password, and if the password entered by the player is authenticated (for example, if the member server 15110 is accessed and the entered password is confirmed to be correct), the light turns yellow.

In any of the "open state", "closed state", "test opening state", or "offline state", if a cleaning card is inserted while cleaning of the IC card RW15405 is being performed, the light will flash blue, and if a membership card is not inserted or has not yet been approved and there is a balance or medals in the rental unit 15024, the light will turn yellow.

Also, for example, when the light is lit in light blue or yellow, if there are no IC cards stored in the card storage section 15323 or the card storage section 15323 is full, the light will change to blinking.

The display mode of the status indicator lamp 15311 of the rental unit 15024 allows players and amusement store staff to easily determine the state of the rental unit 15024, and amusement store staff in particular can take prompt action depending on the display mode of the status indicator lamp 15311.

As described above, this state transition of the lending unit 15024 also applies to the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023.

[1-7. Functions of rental units]
Next, referring to Fig. 260, an outline of the functions of the lending unit 15024 will be described. Fig. 260 shows an operation menu displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the lending unit 15024.

At the top of the operation menu 16001 shown in FIG. 260(A), a status display area 16002 is arranged, which displays information based on the rental type of gaming media (rental rate, type of gaming media (medals [pieces]/game balls [balls])). In this example, "1000 yen/50 pieces" is displayed, which indicates that 50 medals are rented for 1000 yen, a so-called "20 slots". The status display area 16002 also shows a status display icon 16003, which indicates with a color whether or not the card server 15100 is connected. For example, if the card server 15100 is connected (online), the icon is displayed in green, and if not connected (offline), the icon is displayed in red.

The background color of the status display area 16002 changes depending on the status of the card server 15100. For example, the status of the card server 15100 is either "open", "closed", or "test opening" as described above, and the background color of the status display area 16002 changes depending on the status. Note that when the card server 15100 and the rental unit 15024 are not connected and the above-mentioned status display icon 16003 is shown in red, the background color of the status display area 16002 is the same as when the status of the card server 15100 is "open", for example.

An information display area 16004 is located below the status display area 16002, and this area displays the balance and the number of owned and saved medals. Furthermore, if there is no balance, owned or saved medals, a predetermined message is displayed according to the number of IC cards stored in the card storage section 15323. For example, if there are 0 IC cards, the message "Please refill cards" is displayed, if there are 1 to 9 IC cards, the message "Welcome" is displayed, and if there are 10 IC cards, the message "Cards are full, please call a staff member" is displayed. Note that in this embodiment, the number of IC cards that can be stored in the card storage section 15323 is 10.

Further below the information display area 16004 is an operation button area 16005, which displays a "medal loan" button, a "card return" button, a "pay out all medals" button, a "share all medals" button, and a "first break" button. By touching any of these buttons, the player can have the lending unit 15024 carry out the desired process.

The "Medal Loan" button is enabled when there is a balance, i.e., when the balance displayed in the information display area 16004 is not 0, and when the "Medal Loan" button is touched, a specified amount is subtracted from the balance (managed by the lending unit 15024) and the number of medals corresponding to that specified amount are loaned to the medalless machine 15014. This operation causes the lending unit 15024 to send information indicating the number of medals corresponding to the specified amount to the medalless machine 15014, and that number of medals is loaned. As a result, the number of medals held inside the medalless machine 15014 (number of stored medals) increases by the number of medals received from the lending unit 15024. However, if the balance is less than the specified amount described above and the "Medal Loan" button is touched, for example, a message indicating that medals cannot be loaned is displayed in the information display area 16004.

The "Return Card" button is enabled when a member card is inserted in the card insertion slot 15321, and when the "Return Card" button is touched, the member card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. Also, when there is a balance or medals in hand, that is, when at least one of the balance and medals in hand displayed in the information display area 16004 is not 0, touch operation becomes possible (regardless of whether a visitor card is inserted), and when the "Return Card" button is touched, the visitor card (on which the balance and number of medals in hand are written) is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. However, when the balance of the lending unit 15024 is 0 and the total number of medals in the lending unit 15024 and the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 is less than a predetermined number, touching the "Return Card" button displays a message in the information display area 16004 indicating that the card cannot be returned, for example.

The "Pay out medals" button is enabled when there are medals in hand, i.e., when the number of medals in hand displayed in the information display area 16004 is not 0, and touching the "Pay out medals" button subtracts a specified number from the number of medals in hand (managed by the lending unit 15024), and pays out this specified number of medals to the medalless machine 15014. This operation causes information representing the specified number of medals to be sent from the lending unit 15024 to the medalless machine 15014, and this specified number of medals is paid out. As a result, the number of medals held inside the medalless machine 15014 (number of stored medals) increases by the specified number received from the lending unit 15024.

The "Pay out all medals" button is enabled when there are medals in hand, i.e. when the quantity of medals in hand displayed in the information display area 16004 is not 0, and touching the "Pay out all medals" button resets the quantity of medals in hand (managed by the lending unit 15024) to 0, and all medals are paid out to the medalless machine 15014. This operation causes information representing all medals to be sent from the lending unit 15024 to the medalless machine 15014, and all medals are paid out. As a result, the number of medals held inside the medalless machine 15014 (number of stored medals) increases by the (all) quantity received from the lending unit 15024.

The "Share medals" button is enabled when there is a specified number of medals (the minimum number of medals to share), i.e., when the number of medals displayed in the information display area 16004 is equal to or greater than the specified number, and by touching the "Share medals" button, the medal sharing function can be used. The medal sharing function will be explained in detail later.

The "First Break" button is enabled when the rental unit 15024 is in the "Open" state, "Test Open" state, or "Offline" state, and touching the "First Break" button allows the first break function to be used. The first break function will be explained in more detail later.

Figure 260 (B) shows the same operation menu 16001 as that shown in Figure 260 (A), but in this case, a membership card is inserted into the card insertion slot 15321, and the lending unit 15024 accesses the card server 15100 and the membership server 15110 to obtain the balance, possessed medals, and saved medals associated with the membership card, and displays them in the information display area 16004. As a result, the information display area 16004 shows that the balance is 1,000 yen, the number of possessed medals is 0, and the number of saved medals is 500.

Note that here, a "Hide" button is displayed in information display area 16004; this button is for controlling the display of the number of saved medals when a membership card is inserted; when the number of saved medals is displayed, the "Hide" button is displayed. When the "Hide" button is touched, the portion displaying the number of saved medals is displayed as a string such as "****", making it impossible to know the number of saved medals, and at the same time, a "Show" button is displayed to return the display to normal. This operation of hiding the number of saved medals prevents the number of saved medals of a player from being known to other players, which ultimately has the effect of protecting privacy and preventing crime.

In this case, because the number of medals held is 0, the "Pay out all medals held" button and the "Share medals held" button displayed in operation menu 16001 in Fig. 260(A) are disabled (they do not respond when touched), and the buttons are grayed out (for example, the brightness of the buttons is reduced and the display changes from color to black and white (or grayscale)). In Fig. 260(B), this state is represented by hatching the area of the buttons.

The "Pay out held medals" button displayed in the operation menu 16001 in FIG. 260(A) is displayed as a "Replay saved medals" button in the same position in the operation button area 16005. This "Replay saved medals" button is enabled when there are saved medals, that is, when the amount of saved medals displayed in the information display area 16004 is not 0, and when the "Replay saved medals" button is touched, a specified amount is subtracted from the amount of saved medals (managed by the lending unit 15024), and this specified amount of medals is paid out to the medalless machine 15014. This operation causes information representing the specified amount of medals to be sent from the lending unit 15024 to the medalless machine 15014, and this specified amount of medals is paid out. As a result, the number of medals held inside the medalless machine 15014 (number of saved medals) increases by the specified amount received from the lending unit 15024.

In this example, the "Replay saved medals" button and the "Pay out saved medals" button are controlled so that they are not displayed at the same time, and if the number of saved medals and the number of saved medals are both non-zero, the "Pay out saved medals" button is displayed with priority over the "Replay saved medals" button, but it is also possible to control the display of both buttons.

At the bottom of the operation menu 16001, a remaining card number display area 16006 is located, which displays "Number of cards: 5". This indicates the number of cards stored in the card storage section 15323 described above. In the lending unit 15024, when a player inserts a member card into the card insertion slot 15321 to play, the number of cards stored in the card storage section 15323 does not increase or decrease, but if a visitor card is inserted and the balance and number of medals held become 0, the IC card is collected into the card storage section 15323 and the number of cards increases by one, and if no card is inserted and the balance or number of medals held becomes other than 0, a new visitor card must be issued using a card stored in the card storage section 15323, in which case the number of cards decreases by one.

The number of cards stored in the card storage section 15323 changes depending on such a situation, so the staff of the gaming establishment can look at this card number display area 16006 to determine the timing to replenish IC cards in the card storage section 15323. The number of IC cards that can be stored in the card storage section 15323 is, for example, 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 261, another function of the lending unit 15024 will be outlined. FIG. 261 shows an operation menu displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the lending unit 15024. Here, an example of a function that reflects inserted banknotes as the balance (ticket issuing function) will be described.

Figure 261 (A) is an example of an operation menu that is displayed when a player first starts playing. The status display area 16002 displays "1000 yen/50 coins" and also shows the status display icon 16003, but the lending unit 15024 has not yet been operated by the player, and the information display area 16004 displays no information regarding the balance, held medals, or saved medals, and displays "Welcome." In addition, in the operation button area 16005, only the "First break" button is enabled, and the other buttons cannot be touched.

When the player inserts a bill into the bill slot 15301, the balance is increased according to the value of the bill. In the example of FIG. 261(B), 1000 yen is inserted, and accordingly, the information display area 16004 displays the balance as "1000 yen" and the number of medals in possession as "0". Also, at this time, the operation button area 16005 changes so that in addition to the "First break" button, the "Lend medals" button and the "Return card" button are enabled.

In other words, the "medal loan" button is enabled when the balance is equal to or exceeds a predetermined amount, i.e., when the balance displayed in the information display area 16004 is equal to or exceeds a predetermined amount. Here, the "predetermined amount" refers to a balance that is equal to or exceeds the amount consumed in one loan. It is also possible to set the system so that when a bill is inserted through the bill insertion slot 15301 (when the balance is added), the number of medals corresponding to a predetermined set amount is automatically loaned to the medalless machine 15014; if, as a result of this automatic loan, the remaining balance falls below the above-mentioned predetermined amount, the "medal loan" button is disabled at that point.

Also, if you end your game in this state, the "return card" button is enabled so that the remaining balance of 1,000 yen can be stored on the visitor card and a new one can be dispensed.

As shown in Figures 260 and 261, the operation menu 16001 displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the rental unit 15024 is display-controlled so that the player cannot select functions that he or she cannot execute, depending on the situation, such as the contents of the gaming media grasped and managed by the rental unit 15024 and whether or not an IC card is inserted. In addition, the display is controlled so that the contents (text) of the button display are changed depending on the above-mentioned situation. This type of display control allows the player to easily understand the functions that can be selected and the contents of the functions to be selected, and prevents the player from performing meaningless operations.

The configuration of the lending unit 15024 described with reference to Figs. 260 and 261 also applies to the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023 as described above. However, since the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023 exchanges data related to gaming media with the managed gaming machine 15013 that uses gaming balls to play games, for example, the "medal lending" button, "pay out owned medals" button, "pay out all owned medals" button, "share owned medals" button, and "replay saved medals" button displayed in the operation menu 16001 displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the lending unit 15024 are displayed as a "ball lending" button, a "pay out owned balls" button, a "pay out all owned balls" button, a "share owned balls" button, and a "replay saved balls" button, respectively.

In addition, in this embodiment, the medals (stored medals) stored in the medalless machine 15014 are moved from the medalless machine 15014 to the lending unit 15024 by pressing a counting button located on the medalless machine 15014, but it is also possible to configure it so that a "Count" button is located on the operation menu 16001 as shown in Figures 260 and 261, and the stored medals are moved from the medalless machine 15014 to the lending unit 15024 when the player touches this. Also, it is also possible to locate the "Count" button on both the medalless machine 15014 and the operation menu 16001.

Below, we will explain the various functions of the medal-less machine 15014 and the lending unit 15024 in the gaming device and gaming system according to the first embodiment of the present invention, but these functions can also be applied to the managed gaming machine 15013 and the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023 in the same way.

[1-8. Lending/withdrawal abnormality control function]
Next, the lending/payout abnormality control function according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 262 to Fig. 264. Fig. 262 is a conceptual diagram conceptually showing the control when an abnormality occurs when a medal lending command is issued. Fig. 263 is a conceptual diagram conceptually showing the control when an abnormality occurs when a saved medal replay command is issued. Fig. 264 is a conceptual diagram conceptually showing the control when an abnormality occurs when a medal payout command is issued.

(Medal loan)
FIG. 262(A) shows a state in which a player is about to touch the "medal lending" button on the operation menu 16001 (see FIG. 260) displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the lending unit 15024 to lend medals to the medalless machine 15014. When the player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 15301 and the balance is displayed in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001 (see FIG. 260), or when the player inserts a membership card or a visitor card into the card insertion slot 15321 and the balance associated with the IC card is displayed in the information display area 16004, the player touches the "medal lending" button displayed on the operation menu 16001 to instruct the medalless machine 15014 to lend a predetermined number of medals to be lent. The balance is stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024.

The lending unit 15024 then transmits information indicating the number of lent medals described above to the medalless machine 15014, and the medalless machine 15014 adds the received number of lent medals to the number of stored medals stored in the medal count control unit 15211b of the medalless machine 15014, and the game can be played using the medals corresponding to the number of stored medals after the addition. Note that the number of lent medals lent out when the player touches the "medal lending" button can be set in advance (in the lending unit 15024).

At this time, an amount equivalent to the number of loaned medals is subtracted from the balance stored in memory unit 15404. For example, if the number of loaned medals is set to 50 and the amount equivalent to 50 medals is 1,000 yen, 1,000 yen is subtracted from the balance stored in memory unit 15404. In FIG. 262(A), the balance stored in memory unit 15404 is X, and an amount equivalent to the number of loaned medals is subtracted from this X.

When a player inserts a bill into the bill slot 15301, it is possible to set (in the lending unit 15024) to automatically lend out a specified number of medals (automatic lending medal number) (automatic lending at the time of ticket issuance). In this case as well, data indicating the automatic lending medal number is sent to the medalless machine 15014, and an amount equivalent to the automatic lending medal number is subtracted from the balance X stored in the memory unit 15404. The automatic lending medal number may be the same as the number of lending medals described above, or may be set separately in the lending unit 15024.

Figure 262 (B) shows a state in which the player has touched the "medal loan" button, but due to some kind of failure, the medalless machine 15014 is unable to properly add to the number of stored medals based on the information representing the number of loaned medals. There are various types of failures that can occur, such as an abnormality within the loan unit 15024, an abnormality in the communication network between the loan unit 15024 and the medalless machine 15014, an abnormality within the medalless machine 15014, etc.

When such a failure occurs, the balance X stored in the memory unit 15404 is subtracted by an amount equivalent to the number of loaned medals, as shown in FIG. 262(A). However, upon detecting the occurrence of the failure, the loaning unit 15024 adds the number of loaned medals that would have been added as the number of stored medals in the medalless machine 15014 to the number of medals Y stored in the memory unit 15404. The number of loaned medals added as the number of medals in the medalless machine 15014 can then be used as medals in the medalless machine. For example, by touching the "Pay out Loaned Medals" button or the "Pay out All Loaned Medals" button in the operation menu 16001, a specified number of medals to be paid out can be provided to the medalless machine 15014 and a game can be played.

If such a failure occurs, the lending unit 15024 will display a message in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001 of the operation unit 15409, such as "Lending failed. Unpaid medals have been added to your medal inventory."

(Replay saved medals)
FIG. 263(A) shows a state in which a player is about to touch the "Saved medal replay" button on the operation menu 16001 (see FIG. 260(B)) displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the lending unit 15024 to pay out saved medals to the medalless machine 15014. When the player inserts a membership card into the card insertion slot 15321 and the number of saved medals associated with the membership card is displayed in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001 and the number of medals held is 0, the player touches the "Saved medal replay" button displayed on the operation menu 16001 to instruct the medalless machine 15014 to pay out a predetermined number of saved medals (replay medal number). At this time, the number of saved medals is stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024.

The lending unit 15024 then transmits information indicating the above-mentioned number of replay medals to the medalless machine 15014, and the medalless machine 15014 adds the received number of replay medals to the number of stored medals stored in the medal count control unit 15211b of the medalless machine 15014, and the game can be played using the medals corresponding to the number of stored medals after the addition. The number of replay medals paid out when a player touches the "Saved Medal Replay" button can be set in advance (for each player in the member server 15110), and this number of replay medals can be obtained, for example, by accessing the member server 15110 via the card server 15100 based on information obtained from the member card.

At this time, the number of replay medals is subtracted from the number of saved medals Z stored in the memory unit 15404.

Figure 263 (B) shows a state in which the player has touched the "Saved Medal Replay" button, but due to some kind of failure, the medalless machine 15014 is unable to properly add to the number of stored medals based on the information representing the number of replay medals. There are various types of failures that can be considered, such as an abnormality within the lending unit 15024, an abnormality in the communication network between the lending unit 15024 and the medalless machine 15014, an abnormality within the medalless machine 15014, etc.

When such a failure occurs, the number of stored medals Z stored in the memory unit 15404 is subtracted by the number of replay medals as shown in FIG. 263(A), but the lending unit 15024, upon detecting the occurrence of the failure, adds the number of replay medals that would have been added as the number of stored medals in the medalless machine 15014 to the number of possessed medals Y stored in the memory unit 15404. The number of replay medals added as the number of possessed medals can then be used as possessed medals. For example, by touching the "Pay out possessed medals" button or the "Pay out all possessed medals" button on the operation menu 16001, a specified number of payout medals can be provided to the medalless machine 15014 and a game can be played.

If such a failure occurs, the lending unit 15024 will display a message in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001 of the operation unit 15409, such as "Payout failed. Unpaid medals have been added to your medal inventory."

(Paying out medals, etc.)
264(A) shows a state in which a player is about to touch the "pay out owned medals" button on the operation menu 16001 (see FIG. 260) displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the lending unit 15024 to pay out owned medals to the medalless machine 15014. When the player inserts a membership card or visitor card into the card insertion slot 15321 and the number of owned medals associated with the IC card is displayed in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001, or when the number of medals transferred to the lending unit 15024 by pressing the count button of the medalless machine 15014 is displayed as the number of owned medals in the information display area 16004, the player touches the "pay out owned medals" button or the "pay out all owned medals" button displayed on the operation menu 16001 to instruct the medalless machine 15014 to pay out a predetermined number of owned medals (number of paid out medals). At this time, the number of medals held is stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024.

The lending unit 15024 then transmits information indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the medalless machine 15014, and the medalless machine 15014 adds the received number of medals to be paid out to the number of stored medals stored in the medal count control unit 15211b of the medalless machine 15014, and the game can be played using the medals corresponding to the number of stored medals after the addition. Note that the number of medals to be paid out when the player touches the "Pay out held medals" button can be set in advance (in the lending unit 15024).

At this time, the number of medals paid out is subtracted from the number of medals held Y stored in memory unit 15404.

Figure 264 (A) also shows the case where the player touches the "Pay out all medals held" button in the operation menu 16001 (see Figure 260). In this case, for example, consecutive payouts are made in units of the number of medals to be paid out as described above, and this is repeated until all medals held are paid out.

Figure 264 (B) shows a state in which the player has touched the "Pay out held medals" button, but due to some kind of failure, the medalless machine 15014 is unable to properly add to the number of stored medals based on the information representing the number of medals paid out. There are various types of failures that can be considered, such as an abnormality within the lending unit 15024, an abnormality in the communication network between the lending unit 15024 and the medalless machine 15014, an abnormality within the medalless machine 15014, etc.

When such a failure occurs, the number of medals held Y stored in the memory unit 15404 is the number of medals paid out subtracted from it as shown in FIG. 264(A). However, upon detecting the occurrence of the failure, the lending unit 15024 adds the number of medals paid out that would have been added to the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 to the number of medals held Y stored in the memory unit 15404 (i.e., returns it to Y). Thereafter, the number of replay medals added to the number of medals held can be used as medals held. For example, by touching the "Pay out held medals" button or the "Pay out all held medals" button on the operation menu 16001, a specified number of medals paid out can be provided to the medalless machine 15014 and a game can be played.

If a fault occurs when the "Pay out all held medals" button is touched, it is determined that the continuous payouts of the number of medals to be paid out were performed normally up until the fault occurred, and that the number of medals was added normally to the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014. The corresponding number of medals paid out after the fault occurred (i.e., the payout of unpaid held medals) is added to the held medal number Y stored in the memory unit 15404. Furthermore, the payouts of the number of medals to be paid out after the fault is stopped.

If such a failure occurs, the lending unit 15024 will display a message in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001 of the operation unit 15409, such as "Payout failed. Unpaid medals have been added to your medal inventory."

Up to this point, the lending/payout abnormality control function has been described with reference to Figs. 262 to 264, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 also applies to the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023. However, in the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023, the "medal lending" button, "replay saved medals" button, "pay out owned medals" button, and "pay out all owned medals" button displayed on the operation menu 16001 displayed on the operation unit 15409 are processed as the "ball lending" button, "replay saved balls" button, "pay out owned balls" button, and "pay out all owned balls" button, respectively, and information indicating the number of lent balls, number of replay balls, and number of paid out balls is sent to the managed gaming machine 15013, and the information is added to the number of stored balls stored in the gaming medium control unit (frame control unit) of the managed gaming machine 15013.

In addition, due to the above-mentioned lending/payout abnormality control function, even if an abnormality occurs when providing information regarding multiple types of value information (i.e., number of medals held, number of medals saved, etc.) from the lending unit 15024 to the medalless machine 15014 and the information is not provided, the value corresponding to that information is returned to the lending unit 15024, so the player will not suffer any disadvantage as a result and can play with peace of mind.

In addition, the lending unit 15024 performs "medal lending" using the remaining balance, "saving medal replay" using the saved medals, and "paying out owned medals" and "paying out all owned medals" using the owned medals in response to the player's button operation, and provides information related to these (for example, information such as 50 owned medals) to the medalless machine 15014. For example, by making a predetermined setting in the lending unit 15024, when a bill is inserted by the player, information corresponding to a predetermined value based on the amount of the bill is automatically provided to the medalless machine 15014. With the lending/paying out abnormality control function described above, even if an abnormality occurs in the automatic provision of value information, the value corresponding to the value information that would have been provided is returned to the lending unit 15024 as, for example, owned medals.

[1-9. Card return control function]
Next, a card return control function of the lending unit 15024 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 265. Fig. 265 is a flowchart of a process for controlling the return of a card when a card return is instructed by a player.

In the lending unit 15024 according to this embodiment, when a player inserts an IC card (membership card or visitor card) into the card insertion slot 15321, the data on the balance, possessed medals, and saved medals associated with the IC card is input into the lending unit 15024, and by providing this data to the medalless machine 15014 (for example, lending medals, paying out possessed balls, paying out saved balls), the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 is added up, and it becomes possible to play on the medalless machine 15014 using medals according to the number of stored medals.

In addition, the medals acquired in the medalless machine 15014 are stored in the medalless machine 15014 as the number of stored medals, and by pressing the counting button on the medalless machine 15014, the number of stored medals is transferred to the lending unit 15024 as the number of medals held.

When a player has finished playing and has inserted a membership card, the player touches the "Card Return" button on the operation menu 16001 displayed on the operation unit 15409 in order to eject the membership card from the card insertion slot 15321. If certain conditions are met, the membership card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. In addition, when the membership card is ejected, certain data is written to the membership card by the IC card RW 15405.

When a player has inserted a visitor card, if certain conditions are met, such as there being a balance or medals remaining in the lending unit 15024, the visitor card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321 in response to touching the "return card" button. In addition, when the visitor card is ejected, data related to the balance and medals remaining is written to the visitor card by the IC card RW 15405.

If the player has not inserted any IC card, and certain conditions are met, such as there being a balance or medals remaining in the lending unit 15024, a new visitor card will be ejected from the card insertion slot 15321 in response to touching the "return card" button. In addition, when the new visitor card is ejected, data related to the balance and medals remaining is written to the visitor card by the IC card RW 15405.

The following describes in detail the card return control process with reference to the flowchart in Figure 265.

First, in step S5101, the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024 determines whether the "Card Return" button on the operation menu 16001 displayed on the operation unit 15409 has been touched. This determination is repeated until the "Card Return" button is touched (NO in step S5101).

If it is determined that the "Return Card" button has been touched (YES in step S5101), then in step S5102 it is determined whether or not a membership card has been inserted into the card insertion slot 15321. If it is determined that a membership card has been inserted into the card insertion slot 15321 (YES in step S5102), then the process proceeds to step S5103.

In step S5103, it is determined whether there are any stored medals stored in the medalless machine 15014, and if there are any stored medals (YES in step S5103), the message "Please count" is displayed in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001 to instruct the user to electronically transfer the stored medals from the medalless machine 15014 to the lending unit 15024. Then, the process returns to step S5101, and the determination of whether the "return card" button has been touched is repeated again.

When the message "Please count" is displayed, the player presses the count button on the medalless machine 15014 to perform the counting process. This causes the stored medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 to be electronically transferred to the lending unit 15024, the number of stored medals in the medalless machine 15014 becomes zero, and the number of transferred stored medals is added to the number of medals held by the lending unit 15024. The player then touches the "return card" button again.

If there are no medals stored in step S5103 (NO in step S5103), the relevant data stored in the memory unit 15404 is written to the membership card in step S5105, and then the membership card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321 in step S5113.

If it is determined in step S5102 that a membership card has not been inserted into the card insertion slot 15321 (NO in step S5102), the process proceeds to step S5106, where the sum of the number of medals held by the lending unit 15024 and the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined set value, and there are medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 (the number of stored medals is not 0) (YES in step S5106), the process proceeds to step S5104, where the message "Please count" is displayed in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001, as described above.

In step S5102, if it is determined that a member card has not been inserted from the card insertion slot 15321 (NO in step S5102), the situation is divided into whether or not a visitor card has been inserted from the card insertion slot 15321. If a visitor card is inserted from the card insertion slot 15321, the data stored in the visitor card at that time, such as the balance and number of medals held, is moved to the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024, and if there is no data to be stored in the visitor card in the memory unit 15404 when the "return card" button is touched, the visitor card is not ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. Conversely, even if a visitor card has not been inserted from the card insertion slot 15321, if there is data to be stored in the visitor card in the memory unit 15404 when the "return card" button is touched, a new visitor card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321.

Therefore, if it is determined in step S5102 that a membership card is not inserted, there is no need to determine whether a visitor card is inserted or not.

In step S5106, if the sum of the number of medals held by the lending unit 15024 and the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined set value, or if there are no medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 (NO in step S5106), then in step S5107, the relationship between the sum of the number of medals held by the lending unit 15024 and the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 and the predetermined set value is determined, and if the sum of the number of medals held by the lending unit 15024 and the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 is less than the set value and is equal to or greater than 0 (YES in step S5107), proceed to step S5109.

In the case where the determination is NO in step S5107, this is only the case when the number of medals stored is 0 and the number of medals held is equal to or greater than the set value in relation to step S5106. In this case, the process proceeds to step S5108, where the number of medals held, which is equal to or greater than the set value, is written onto the visitor card, and then in step S5113, the visitor card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. Although not shown in the flowchart, in step S5108, if there is no IC card in the card storage section 15323 when attempting to issue a visitor card, the message "No card, please replenish" is displayed in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001, and the arcade staff is prompted to replenish IC cards (same for step S5111).

If the answer in step S5107 is YES, the process proceeds to step S5109, where it is determined whether or not there are any remaining balances or medals of other lending types stored in the lending unit 15024. If the balance and the number of remaining medals of other lending types are both 0 (YES in step S5109), this means that the sum of the number of remaining medals in the lending unit 15024 and the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 is less than a predetermined value, and furthermore, the balance and the number of remaining medals of other lending types are 0, which means that the conditions for issuing a visitor card are not met, and the process proceeds to step S5112, where the message "Cannot return" is displayed in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001.

Here, "other rental types" refers to rental types (rental rates, gaming media) different from those of the medalless machine 15014 connected to the rental unit 15024. For example, if the rental type of the medalless machine 15014 currently being played is "20 slots," the "other rental types" are "5 slots," "1 pachi," "4 pachi," etc.

Here, the number of medals held stored in the lending unit 15024 is the lending type currently being played (for example, "20 slots"). The visitor card stores the balance and the number of medals held for each lending type, but if the determination in step S5109 is YES, all of this data is 0, so there is no data to store on the visitor card, and as a result, the visitor card is not ejected and the message "Cannot be returned" is displayed.

On the other hand, in step S5109, if there is a balance stored in the lending unit 15024 or medals of other lending types (NO in step S5109), a visitor card must be issued to store that data. However, at least either the number of medals held in the lending unit 15024 or the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 remains (but the total is less than a predetermined value), so these data will remain in at least one of the lending unit 15024 and the medalless machine 15014. Therefore, in step S5110, the message "Less than XX medals remaining" is displayed in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001. Then, by touching the "OK" button displayed in this message, the user will proceed to step S5111.

If any medals remain in the lending unit 15024, they can be cleared by the leftover medal clearing process in maintenance mode, which will be described later. Also, if there are any stored medals remaining in the medalless machine 15014, the counting button on the medalless machine 15014 can be pressed to transfer the stored medals to the lending unit 15024, and then the total can be cleared (if there are any medals remaining in the lending unit 15024, the total) by the "leftover medal clearing" process.

In addition, if any medals remain in the lending unit 15024, they can be moved to the IC card by a forced return process in maintenance mode, which will be described later. In addition, if any medals remain in the medalless machine 15014, the counting button on the medalless machine 15014 can be pressed to move the stored medals to the lending unit 15024, and then (if any medals remain in the lending unit 15024, the total amount) can be moved to the IC card by a "forced return" process.

After step S5110, the process proceeds to step S5111, where the balance and the number of medals held of other loan types are written onto the visitor card, and then in step S5113, the visitor card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321.

When the lending unit 15024 is offline and a membership card is inserted through the card insertion slot 15321, the membership card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321 without transferring the membership card data (balance and number of medals held) to the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024.

In addition, when the system transitions to an offline state while a membership card is inserted in the lending unit 15024, the data (balance and number of medals held) transferred from the membership card to the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024 remains in the lending unit 15024, and the membership card with no stored data is ejected from the card insertion port 15321, and the remaining (unused) balance and number of medals held are written to the visitor card, which is then ejected from the card insertion port 15321 (following the membership card).

So far, the control function when returning the card has been explained with reference to FIG. 265, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 also applies to the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023. In the flowchart of FIG. 265, how to control the return of the IC card is determined based on the number of balls held stored in the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023 and the number of balls stored in the managed gaming machine 15013.

The card return control function described above allows the card to be returned only when the appropriateness of discharging the card is recognized, thereby preventing the unnecessary consumption of cards such as IC cards. Furthermore, if there are medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 and it is possible to return the card, the card is discharged after the user is prompted to press the counting button on the medalless machine 15014, thereby preventing the stored medals from being carelessly left in the medalless machine 15014.

Depending on the conditions, it is possible that the card will not be ejected and the medals stored in the lending unit 15024 and the medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 will remain as they are. In such a case, the medals stored in the lending unit 15024 and the medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 can be cleared by performing the leftover medal clearing process or the configuration return process in maintenance mode.

In this embodiment, as described above, a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or other IC card can be used as a visitor card or a member card, and in that case, the card is not ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. For example, when a smartphone or the like is used instead of a player's card, when writing to a member card or a visitor card in FIG. 265 (steps S5105, S5108, and S5111), a message such as "Please touch your smartphone or IC card" is displayed on the operation unit 15409, and when the player approaches (or touches) the touch guide mark 15304 with the smartphone or the like, the non-contact IC card RW 15406 stores the specified data in the memory unit of the smartphone or the like in the above steps S5105, S5108, and S5111, respectively. Then, a message such as "Writing of XX data has been completed" is displayed on the operation unit 15409.

[1-10. Medal sharing function]
Next, the medal sharing function of the lending unit 15024 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 266 to Fig. 269. Fig. 266 and Fig. 267 are flowcharts showing the process of executing the medal sharing function. Fig. 268 and Fig. 269 are diagrams showing screens related to the medal sharing function displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the lending unit 15024.

The medal sharing function realized by the lending unit 15024 in this embodiment is a function that moves medals stored in the lending unit 15024 or medals associated with a membership card to a visitor card based on the player's instructions.

An example of the process for executing the medal sharing function is shown in the flowcharts in Figures 266 and 267. First, in step S5201, the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024 determines whether or not the "medal sharing" button has been touched, and repeats this determination process while it is not touched (NO in step S5201). The "medal sharing" button is the "medal sharing" button shown in the operation menu 16001 shown in Figure 260 (A).

In step S5201, if it is determined that the "Share medals" button has been touched, the process proceeds to step S5202. Although not shown in the flowchart, in step S5201, since this medal sharing function is used to issue a new visitor card, if there is no IC card in the card storage section 15323, the message "No card, please replenish" is displayed in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001. In response to this display, the staff of the game facility replenishes IC cards, and then the process returns to the determination of step S5201.

Next, in step S5202, the sharing instruction screen 16101 shown in FIG. 268 (A) is displayed. The sharing instruction screen 16101 is a screen displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the rental unit 15024. The status display area 16102 and status display icon 16103 displayed here are the same as the status display area 16002 and status display icon 16003 shown in the operation menu 16001.

A shared medal count indication area 16104 is located below the status display area 16102, where the number of owned medals and the number of shared medals are displayed. The shared medal count is the number of medals taken from the owned medals managed by the lending unit 15024 and written onto the visitor card. A player can give this visitor card to another person, allowing the other person to use medals that he or she owned.

The number of shared medals is input by touching the numeric keypad buttons "0" to "9" displayed in the shared medal count designation area 16105 located at the bottom of the shared medal count designation area 16104. In addition, an "All" button is located in the shared medal count designation area 16104, and by touching this "All" button, all of the medals held are set as the number of shared medals.

In addition, a "Cancel" button is located in the shared medal count instruction area 16104. By touching this "Cancel" button, the sharing designation of the owned medals is cancelled, and the display returns to the operation menu 16001 shown in FIG. 260 (A).

Here, in step S5203, it is determined whether or not the "Next" button displayed in the shared medal count designation area 16105 has been touched, and this determination process is repeated while it is not touched (NO in step S5203). If the "Next" button has been touched (YES in step S5203), in step S5204 it is determined whether or not the designated shared medal count exceeds a predetermined minimum value, and if it does not (NO in step S5204), the process proceeds to step S5206, where an error message such as "Less than XX medals, please re-enter" is displayed in a predetermined position in the shared medal count designation area 16104, and then the process proceeds to step S5203, where it waits for the "Next" button on the sharing instruction screen 16101 to be touched.

If the specified number of shared medals exceeds a predetermined minimum value (YES in step S5204), then in step S5205, it is determined whether the specified number of shared medals exceeds the number of medals possessed. If it does (NO in step S5205), then the process proceeds to step S5206, where an error message such as "More medals than possessed, please re-enter" is displayed in a predetermined position in the number of shared medals instruction area 16104, and then the process proceeds to step S5203, where it waits for the "Next" button to be touched on the sharing instruction screen 16101.

If the specified number of shared medals is within the number of owned medals (YES in step S5205), in step S5207, the sharing decision screen 16111 shown in FIG. 268 (B) is displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the lending unit 15024, where the final sharing of owned medals is instructed.

The status display area 16112 and status display icon 16113 displayed here are the same as the status display area 16002 and status display icon 16003 shown in the operation menu 16001. A "Back" button 16114 and a "Cancel" button 16115 are displayed at the bottom of the status display area 16112. Touching the "Back" button 16114 returns to the sharing instruction screen 16101 shown in FIG. 268(A) and allows the user to re-specify the number of shared medals. Touching the "Cancel" button 16115 returns to the operation menu 16001 shown in FIG. 260(A). Note that the behavior based on the "Back" button 16114 and the "Cancel" button 16115 is omitted in the flowchart shown in FIG. 266.

Below the "Back" button 16114 and the "Cancel" button 16115, a sharing confirmation display area 16116 is displayed, which displays the message "Are you sure you want to share your medals?" along with the number of medals held (stored in the lending unit 15024) before the medals were shared ("1,000" in the example of Figure 268 (B)), and the number of medals specified to be shared this time ("300" in the example of Figure 268 (B)).

A "Decide" button 16117 is located at the bottom of the sharing confirmation display area 16116. In step S5208, it is determined whether or not the player touches this "Decide" button 16117, and this determination process is repeated while the player does not touch it (NO in step S5208). If the "Decide" button 16117 is touched (YES in step S5208), in step S5209, it is determined whether or not a membership card has been inserted into the card insertion slot 15321.

If a member card is not inserted (NO in step S5209), in step S5210, the currently specified number of shared medals is written to the visitor card as the number of possessed medals. Also, at this time, the number of possessed medals stored in memory unit 15404 is updated (the number of shared medals is subtracted).

In this way, if a member card is not inserted, for example, if a player inserts a visitor card, the owned medals moved from the visitor card to the lending unit 15024 and stored therein can be the source of the shared medals. In addition, owned medals, etc. acquired by playing on the medalless machine 15014 using the owned medals or balance (the balance of the visitor card, or the balance issued by inserting a bill) stored in the lending unit 15024 and then moved to the lending unit 15024 can also be the source of the shared medals. In addition, if a player does not use any IC card, owned medals, etc. acquired by playing on the medalless machine 15014 using the balance issued by inserting a bill and then moved to the lending unit 15024 can be the source of the shared medals.

Next, in step S5211, the visitor card on which the number of medals held is stored is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321, and in step S5212, the operation menu 16001 is displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the lending unit 15024 (returning to the state before the "Share medals held" button was touched).

When the visitor card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321, if there are still medals remaining in the lending unit 15024 and an IC card is in the card storage section 15323, the player may be prompted to select whether or not to share the medals, and the sharing instruction screen 16101 may be displayed again to continuously instruct the player to share the medals.

If it is determined in step S5209 that a membership card has been inserted through the card insertion slot 15321 (YES in step S5209), the process is as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 267. In step S5221, shared lock information is written to the membership card. This shared lock information includes, for example, the state of the held medals, information identifying the positions of the lending unit 15024 and medalless machine 15014 (row ID, in-row ID, etc.), the device type of the lending unit 15024 (unit type, setting value, identification number, etc.), the setting value and machine number of the medalless machine 15014, etc. Also, at this time, the number of held medals stored in the memory unit 15404 is updated (the number of shared medals is subtracted).

Next, in step S5222, the member card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. Next, in step S5223, the number of shared medals specified this time is written onto the visitor card as the number of possessed medals. At this time, the number of possessed medals stored in the memory unit 15404 is updated (the number of shared medals is subtracted).

In this way, when a membership card is inserted, for example, the source of the shared medals may be the medals that a player has when he or she inserts the membership card and that are associated with the membership card, or the medals that are acquired by playing the medal-less machine 15014 using the balls or balance (the balance on the membership card, or the balance issued by inserting a bill) and that are then transferred to the lending unit 15024.

Next, in step S5224, the visitor card with the number of medals held stored is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321, and in step S5225, the lending unit 15024 transitions to a shared lock state (a state in which only member cards with shared lock information that satisfies the conditions described above are accepted), and in step S5226, a shared lock screen 16121 such as that shown in FIG. 269 is displayed.

The status display area 16122 and the status display icon 16123 displayed on the shared lock screen 16121 in FIG. 269 are similar to the status display area 16002 and the status display icon 16003 shown in the operation menu 16001.

The lock information area 16124 is located below the status display area 16122, where the message "Please insert locked membership card" is displayed.

Next, in step S5227, it is determined whether or not a member card with shared lock information that satisfies the conditions has been inserted. If no member card has been inserted, the process returns to step S5227 and repeats the determination. If no member card has been inserted for a certain period of time, the operation unit can be controlled to display a predetermined message and output a sound as necessary. In this case, the staff of the game arcade can display the maintenance mode menu 16171 in FIG. 274, which will be described later, and touch the "unlock" button to release the shared lock state of the rental unit 15024. When the "unlock" button is touched, the main CPU 15401 of the rental unit 15024 releases the break lock state of the rental unit 15024 (i.e., the loop process of step S5227 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 267 is essentially cancelled and terminated), and at this time, the member information stored in the memory unit 15404 of the rental unit 15024 is cleared, and the operation menu 16001 is displayed on the operation unit 15409. This process resets the rental unit 15024 to a state where other players can play using a membership card or visitor card, or without a visitor card.

If a membership card with shared lock information that satisfies the conditions is inserted (YES in step S5227), in step S5228, the shared lock state of the lending unit 15024 is released, and in step S5229, the shared lock information is deleted from the inserted membership card.

Next, in step S5230, the inserted membership card is accepted. Note that when the inserted membership card was previously inserted, authentication processing was performed by the player entering a password and accessing the card server 15100 and the membership server 15110, and since the membership card stored shared lock information that satisfied the conditions when it was inserted this time, the player does not need to enter a password.

Next, in step S5231, the operation menu 16001 is displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the lending unit 15024 (returning to the state before the "Share Medals" button was touched).

In addition, in step S5224, if there are still medals remaining in the lending unit 15024 after the visitor card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321 and there is an IC card in the card storage section 15323, the player may be prompted to select whether or not to share the medals, and the sharing instruction screen 16101 may be displayed again to continuously instruct the player to share the medals based on the membership card.

Up to this point, the medal sharing function has been explained with reference to Figures 266 to 269, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 also applies to the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023. In the example of Figures 266 to 269, sharing of owned medals was achieved by writing a designated number of shared owned medals from among the owned medals onto the visitor card, but similarly, in the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023, sharing of owned balls can be achieved by writing a designated number of shared owned balls from among the owned balls onto the visitor card.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned medal sharing function allows a player to divide his/her medals with a simple operation and share them (e.g., with other players), which results in flexible management of the value held by the player, improving the convenience of the game and increasing the variety of ways to enjoy it. This sharing function is possible as long as the lending unit 15024 has a predetermined number of medals. Even if no IC card is inserted, for example, medals may be acquired by playing on the medal-less machine 15014 and moved to the lending unit 15024 as medals. When a visitor card (first type storage medium) is inserted, the medals stored in the visitor card are moved to the lending unit 15024, and when a member card (second type storage medium) is inserted, the medals linked to (or stored in) the member card are stored in the lending unit 15024.

In addition, with the medal sharing function described above, multiple players can share their medals by storing their medals on multiple visitor cards and discharging them consecutively through a series of operations.

In this embodiment, the sharing function for owned medals and balls has been described, but a similar function can also be applied to other values such as the balance, saved medals, and saved balls.

In this embodiment, as described above, a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or other IC card can be used as a visitor card or a member card, and in that case, the card is not ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. For example, if a smartphone or the like is used instead of a player's card, the visitor card is not ejected (step S5211) in FIG. 266, and instead, when writing the number of shared medals in step S5210, a message such as "Please touch your smartphone or IC card" is displayed on the operation unit 15409, and when the player then brings the smartphone or the like close to (or touches) the touch guide mark 15304, the non-contact IC card RW15406 stores the number of shared medals in the memory unit of the smartphone or the like, and then the operation unit 15409 displays a message such as "Writing of shared data has been completed."

In the above case, the member card is not ejected (step S5222) or the visitor card is not ejected (step S5211) in FIG. 267, and data is written to the smartphone or the like in the same manner as above. For example, without ejecting the card in step S5222, lock information is written to the smartphone or the like serving as the member card (processing of step S5221), and without ejecting the card in step S5224, the number of shared medals is written to the smartphone or the like serving as the visitor card (processing of step S5222).

In addition, the player can release the shared lock state by having the contactless IC card RW15406 read the smartphone (as a membership card) on which the lock information is written (processing corresponding to steps S5227, S5228, etc.).

[1-11. Closing process control function]
Next, a store closing process control function for controlling the store closing process of the rental unit 15024 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 270. Fig. 270 is a flowchart of the process for executing the store closing process.

As described with reference to FIG. 259, the closing process is a process that transitions the rental unit 15024 to a closed state in response to receiving a closing notification or a test closing notification from the card server 15100.

The store closing process begins when a store closing notice or test store closing notice is received from the card server 15100. The main CPU 15401 first determines in step S5251 whether or not a member's card is inserted in the card insertion slot 15321. If a member's card is inserted (if it is in the read/write position, YES in step S5251), in step S5252, the balance and number of medals held stored in the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024 are written to the member's card. Note that the number of medals stored is updated and managed by the member's server 15110 through communication via the card server 15100, so there is no need to reflect this on the member's card here.

Next, in step S5253, the balance and number of medals held stored in memory unit 15404 are cleared, and in step S5254, the card server 15100 is notified that the balance and number of medals held in memory unit 15404 have been transferred to the membership card.

Next, in step S5255, the membership card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. At this point, the lending unit 15024 outputs a sound such as a beep to notify the user that the membership card has been ejected (step S5261). Then, in step S5262, it is determined whether the membership card has been removed from the card insertion slot 15321, and while the card has not been removed (NO in step S5262), this determination is repeated and the sound output continues.

When the membership card is removed from the card insertion slot 15321 (YES in step S5262), audio output is stopped in step S5263, and then the process proceeds to step S5266.

If no member card is inserted in the card insertion slot 15321 (NO in step S5251), in step S5256 it is determined whether there is a balance in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024. If there is a balance (YES in step S5256), in step S5257 the balance stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is written to the visitor card. If there is no IC card in the card storage unit 15323, the message "No card, please replenish" is displayed in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu 16001, prompting the arcade staff to replenish the IC cards.

Next, in step S5258, the balance and number of medals held stored in memory unit 15404 are cleared, and in step S5259, the card server 15100 is notified that the balance in memory unit 15404 has been moved to the visitor card and that the number of medals held has been cleared without being moved.

Next, in step S5260, the visitor card is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. After this, the process proceeds to step S5261, where the same process as described above is carried out. Note that in this example, if a member card is not inserted from the card insertion slot 15321 (YES in step S5256), the balance in the memory unit 15404 is transferred to the visitor card in the subsequent process, while the number of medals held is cleared without being transferred to the visitor card. However, as in the case where a member card is inserted, this number of medals held may also be written to the visitor card. Also, whether or not to write to the visitor card may be determined depending on the balance or number of medals held.

If there is no balance in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 (NO in step S5256), in step S5264, the number of medals held stored in the memory unit 15404 is cleared, and in step S5265, the card server 15100 is notified that the number of medals held in the memory unit 15404 has been cleared without being transferred.

Next, in step S5266, the status indicator lamp 15311 shown in FIG. 255 is controlled to light up in white to indicate that there is no balance and no medals in the lending unit 15024.

Next, in step S5267, it is determined whether or not there is a number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 (number of stored medals), and if there are stored medals (YES in step S5267), the lending unit 15024 displays a message on the operation unit 15409 or outputs a sound such as a beep to notify the player that there are stored medals in the medalless machine 15014 (step S5268). Note that, in step S5261, a sound such as a beep is output to notify the player that the membership card has been ejected, but here, it is possible to control the output to be a different sound from the sound in that case.

Furthermore, in step S5268, the status display lamp 15311 shown in FIG. 255 is controlled to alternately light up in green and blue, and a message such as "Please press the counting button on the gaming machine to count" is displayed in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the rental unit 15024.

After step S5268, or if it is determined that there are medals stored (NO in step S5267), in step S5269, the lending unit 15024 is transitioned to a closed state.

In the above-mentioned closing process, first, a determination is made as to what should be written on the IC card and whether it needs to be ejected, based on whether a membership card remains and whether there are any remaining balances or medals stored in the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024, and then a determination is made again as to whether there are any medals stored in the medalless machine 15014.

For example, if the membership card remains inserted, the balance and number of medals held stored in the lending unit 15024 are written to the membership card as necessary, a beep is output when the membership card is ejected, and the output of the beep is stopped when the membership card is subsequently removed. In other words, the membership card that remains inserted is automatically ejected without the intervention of the amusement facility staff. Next, if it is determined that there are medals stored in the medalless machine 15014, a beep is output again, and the amusement facility staff intervenes at this point to press the counting button on the medalless machine 15014 and move the stored medals to the medals held in the lending unit 15024, and then, for example, a process to clear the excess balls is performed on the maintenance screen.

However, at the beginning of the above-mentioned closing process, it is determined whether there are any medals stored in the medalless machine 15014, and if the membership card is still inserted, the amusement facility staff can intervene and, by pressing the counting button, transfer the stored medals in the medalless machine 15014 to the membership card via the medals held in the rental unit 15024, and then eject the membership card.

In this case, for example, if the medalless machine 15014 has no stored medals, the lending unit 15024 will eject the membership card and output a beep sound, and if the medalless machine 15014 has stored medals, it will not eject the membership card but will output a beep sound and display the message "Please press the counting button on the gaming machine to count" in the information display area 16004 of the operation menu, allowing the gaming facility staff to intervene.

On the other hand, when a membership card is not inserted, if there is a balance in the lending unit 15024, for example, if the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (or if the sum of the number of medals held in the lending unit 15024 and the number of medals stored is equal to or greater than a predetermined value), a beep sound is output or displayed, causing the amusement facility staff member to press the counting button on the medalless machine 15014, and the balance and medals held in the lending unit 15024, as well as the medals stored in the medalless machine 15014, are stored on the visitor card and then discharged.

So far, the closing process control function has been explained with reference to FIG. 270, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 also applies to the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023. However, in the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023, when a membership card is inserted, the balance stored in the memory section of the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023 (including the balls held by the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023 and the reserved balls stored in the managed gaming machine 15013 in some cases) is stored in the visitor card and then discharged.

The above-mentioned closing process control function also alerts rental units 15024 with a membership card still inserted, and rental units 15024 with no membership card inserted but with remaining balances or medals remaining, by outputting a sound or turning on a lamp, allowing arcade staff to easily identify rental units 15024 that require attention. Also, for medalless machines 15014 with remaining medals, a message indicating this is displayed on the corresponding rental unit 15024, allowing arcade staff to easily identify such medalless machines 15014.

In this embodiment, the rental unit 15024 performs the closing process (the process of transitioning to a closed state) in response to receiving a closing notice or a test closing notice from the card server 15100. However, this configuration in which the closing process is performed upon receiving information that serves as the starting point for the closing process is merely one example, and various gaming devices can start the closing process due to various other triggers.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, when medals remain in the medalless machine 15014, the lending unit 15024 is configured to display a message (step S5268 in FIG. 270). In this case, the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024, for example, accesses the medalless machine 15014 to obtain the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 (storage information), and displays the above message if the number of medals stored is a predetermined number (for example, if it is not 0). For example, when the medalless machine 15014 determines at a predetermined timing that the above-mentioned number of stored medals is a predetermined number, it can send a specific flag (storage information) to the lending unit 15024, and as a result, the lending unit 15024 can be controlled to display the above message based on the flag. In this way, various forms of storage information can be considered as the storage information that the lending unit 15024 obtains from the medalless machine 15014.

[1-12. Data update/restoration processing control function]
Next, a data update/restoration process control function for controlling the data update/restoration process of the lending unit 15024 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 271 to 273. Fig. 271 is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the data update/restoration process in the lending unit 15024. Fig. 272 is a flowchart showing the flow of the data update process in the lending unit 15024. Fig. 273 is a flowchart showing the flow of the data restoration process in the lending unit 15024. Note that the "data" in the data update/restoration process according to this embodiment includes various types of bit strings. For example, it may include setting data, image/audio data, program data, temporary data generated and updated by a program, data used in a program that affects the behavior of the program, and the like.

(Data update process)
The main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024 controls to update predetermined data in relation to control processing (e.g., lending of medals, etc.). For example, as shown in Fig. 271 (A), when data stored in a buffer provided in the RAM 15403 is updated, the updated data is copied to a first area (side A) of the storage unit 15404, which is controlled to maintain the same contents as the entire buffer, and further, the updated data is copied to a second area (side B) of the storage unit 15404, which is controlled to maintain the same contents as the entire side A.

This data update process will be described in more detail with reference to Figures 271(A) and 272. The memory unit 15404 shown in Figure 271(A) is divided into a first area (side A) and a second area (side B), which have the same capacity and configuration. For example, the low address part of the memory unit 15404 is side A, and the high address part is side B. Also, at the end of each of sides A and B, a verification data area is disposed that stores verification data such as CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) data. Here, side A is the main area, while side B is positioned as a backup area.

The buffer of RAM 15403 has the same capacity as each of sides A and B, and the data of side A or side B is stored in the same arrangement. Furthermore, for example, when a first process writes data to the buffer, main CPU 15401 can control a second process that detects the writing of data to the buffer to sequentially perform the following: CRC calculation, copying of the data and CRC to side A, and copying of the data and CRC to side B. Furthermore, the second process may be shared by more processes.

The flow of the update process will now be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 272. This update process is executed when the main CPU 15401 generates or updates specified data. First, in step S5271, the main CPU 15401 writes data to a buffer in the RAM 15403 in relation to control processing (e.g., medal lending, etc.). This process corresponds to the process indicated by arrow (1) in FIG. 271 (A), where, for example, data (Data1) is updated or generated.

Next, in step S5272, a CRC calculation is performed on the entire buffer of RAM 15403, and the CRC data obtained by the calculation is stored in the verification data area of the buffer. This process corresponds to the process indicated by arrow (2) in FIG. 271(A), and the CRC data (indicated as "CRC" in the figure) is shown in the lower right of the buffer. Note that the CRC calculation can be performed by the main CPU 15401, but can also be performed using, for example, a dedicated CRC circuit (cyclic redundancy check (CRC16) circuit). Note that, although CRC data is used here to verify the consistency of the data (to determine whether two data groups match), other verification data can also be used.

Next, in step S5273, the data written to the buffer of RAM 15403 is written (copied) to side A of storage unit 15404, and in step S5274, the CRC data written to the buffer of RAM 15403 is written (copied) to side A of storage unit 15404. This process corresponds to the processes indicated by arrows (3) and (4) in FIG. 271(A), where, for example, data (Data1) is written to side A of storage unit 15404, and CRC data (CRC) is written to side A of storage unit 15404.

Next, in step S5275, the data written on side A of storage unit 15404 is written (copied) to side B of storage unit 15404, and in step S5276, the CRC data written on side A of storage unit 15404 is written (copied) to side B of storage unit 15404. This process corresponds to the processes indicated by arrows (5) and (6) in FIG. 271(A), where, for example, data (Data1) is written to side B of storage unit 15404, and CRC data (CRC) is written to side B of storage unit 15404.

Note that in FIG. 271(A), in addition to Data1, Data2 is also listed, but when Data2 is generated or updated, the update process is performed in the same way as in the case of Data1 described above.

(Data restoration process)
The main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024 controls to restore the entire buffer of the RAM 15403 when the lending unit 15024 is restarted, for example, due to power recovery. For example, as shown in FIG. 271 (B), the data on the A side or the B side stored in the memory unit 15404 is restored by being copied directly to the buffer of the RAM 15403. Note that the RAM 15403 is a volatile storage area, and the contents stored in the RAM 15403 are all lost when the lending unit 15024 is restarted due to a power outage, etc. However, since the memory unit 15404 is a non-volatile storage area, the contents stored in the memory unit 15404 are not lost even in the event of a power outage, etc. Therefore, when the lending unit 15024 is restarted, the contents stored in the buffer of the RAM 15403 are restored from the contents stored in the memory unit 15404.

Such data restoration processing will be described in more detail with reference to Figures 271(B) and 273. The configuration of the RAM 15403 and the storage unit 15404 shown in Figure 271(B) is the same as the configuration described with reference to Figure 271(A).

The flow of the restoration process will now be explained using the flowchart in Figure 273. This update process is executed when the rental unit 15024 is restarted due to a power outage or the like. First, in step S5281, the main CPU 15401 checks the consistency of the entire data stored on side A of the memory unit 15404 using the CRC data stored on side A of the memory unit 15404.

Next, in step S5282, it is determined whether the consistency check using the CRC data is normal or not, and if it is normal (YES in step S5282), in step S5283, all data on side A of storage unit 15404 is copied as is to the buffer of RAM 15403. This process corresponds to the process indicated by arrow (1-1) in FIG. 271 (B), where, for example, all of side A including data (Data1) is copied to the buffer of RAM 15403.

Next, in step S5284, all data on side A of storage unit 15404 is copied as is to side B of storage unit 15404. This process corresponds to the process indicated by arrow (1-2) in FIG. 271(B), where, for example, all of side A including data (Data1) is copied to side B of storage unit 15404.

On the other hand, if the consistency check is not normal (NO in step S5282), in step S5285, all data on side B of storage unit 15404 is copied as is to the buffer of RAM 15403. This process corresponds to the process indicated by arrow (2-1) in FIG. 271 (B), where, for example, all of side B including data (Data1) is copied to the buffer of RAM 15403.

Next, in step S5286, all data on side B of storage unit 15404 is copied as is to side A of storage unit 15404. This process corresponds to the process indicated by arrow (2-2) in FIG. 271 (B), where, for example, all of side B including data (Data1) is copied to side A of storage unit 15404.

In this way, in the data update/restore process of this embodiment, if a power outage occurs before the process of step S5273 shown in FIG. 272 is started, the contents of the buffer in RAM 15403 will be lost upon restart, so the contents stored in the buffer immediately before the power outage will be canceled, and the contents of the buffer will be restored to the contents prior to the update process immediately before the power outage (the contents stored on side A of memory unit 15404).

In addition, if a power outage occurs after the processing of step S5273 shown in FIG. 272 is started and before the processing of step S5274 is completed, the contents of the buffer in RAM 15403 will be lost upon restart, and an inconsistency will occur in the contents stored on side A of memory unit 15404. Therefore, the contents of the buffer will be restored to the contents prior to the update processing immediately before the power outage (the contents stored on side B of memory unit 15404).

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs after the processing of step S5274 shown in FIG. 272 is completed but before the processing of step S5276 is completed, the contents of the buffer in RAM 15403 will be lost due to restart, and an inconsistency will occur in the contents stored on side B of memory unit 15404, so the contents of the buffer will be restored to the contents stored on side A of memory unit 15404. Note that the contents stored on side A of memory unit 15404 are the contents of the most recent update process immediately before the power outage, and in this case, they will be restored to the most recent buffer contents.

In this way, no matter when the power outage occurs, the data update process is performed sequentially as shown in the flowchart in FIG. 272, so that sides A and B of storage unit 15404 do not become inconsistent at the same time, and the contents of the buffer in RAM 15403 can always be restored from either side A or side B of storage unit 15404. In the restoration process shown in FIG. 273, only the CRC data on side A of storage unit 15404 is checked, but as described above, since there is no inconsistency on either side A or side B, if there is an abnormality in the CRC data on side A, it can be determined that the CRC data on side B is normal, and there is no need to check the CRC data on side B.

Also, as described above, whether the most recent update process has been accepted validly or not depends on whether the buffer of RAM 15403 has been restored from side A or side B of memory unit 15404, so the program executed by main CPU 15401 needs to control the resumed update process according to this situation.

In addition, in order to achieve the above-mentioned effects by the data update/restoration process of this embodiment, it is preferable that the data (e.g., Data1 and Data2 shown in FIG. 271) be relatively small in capacity and that the capacity does not increase significantly over time when there is not enough capacity in RAM 15403 or memory unit 15404. For example, data that is not accumulated, such as information on an IC card, or data that is accumulated, such as the operation history of several medals, but the accumulated number is limited or small.

In this example, one CRC data (for example, 2 bytes of CRC data) is provided for each of sides A and B, but if the size of each side exceeds, for example, 4K bytes, it is preferable to divide each side into 4K byte sectors and calculate the CRC data for each sector.

In addition, when each surface is divided into multiple sectors as described above, it is preferable to configure each data so that it is not stored across sectors.

So far, we have explained the data update/restoration processing control function with reference to Figures 271 to 273, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 also applies to the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023.

In addition, in the data update/restoration process control function described above, the contents of RAM 15403 are restored by the version of the normal data from side A or side B of storage unit 15404, so that even if a restart is required due to a power outage or the like, control processing can be safely resumed. In addition, since sides A and B of storage unit 15404 and RAM 15403 are configured with the same size and content, the verification data (CRC data) provided in each can be commonly used. For example, after copying the contents of RAM 15403 to side A of storage unit 15404 in the update process, the CRC data of RAM 15403 is not copied and used as the CRC data of side A of storage unit 15404 without generating CRC data based on the data of side A of storage unit 15404, and this reduces the processing load of main CPU 15401, etc., and simplifies the configuration of data update and restoration processing.

[1-13. Break function]
Next, the rest function of the rental unit 15024 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 274 to FIG. 277. FIG. 274 is a screen displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the rental unit 15024 when the staff of the game arcade transitions the rental unit 15024 to the maintenance mode by a predetermined operation. FIG. 275 is a screen displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the rental unit 15024 when the "first rest" button or the "second rest" button is touched. FIG. 276 is a screen displayed on the operation unit 15409 when the "first rest" button or the "second rest" button is touched and the rental unit 15024 is in a rest lock state. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of controlling the rest function in the rental unit 15024 when a rest is instructed by the operation of a player or a staff member.

The above-mentioned break function has two functions. The first break function is when a player touches the "First Break" button on the operation menu 16001 shown in FIG. 260(A), a break card is ejected from the lending unit 15024, and the lending unit 15024 goes into a break lock state, so that it is controlled not to accept any operation from the player until the ejected break card is inserted.

The other is a second break function in which the rental unit 15024 transitions to maintenance mode through the operation of an amusement facility staff member (including persons other than staff, such as an authorized operator), and when the staff member touches the "Second Break" button on the maintenance mode menu displayed on the operation unit 15409, a break card is ejected from the rental unit 15024, and the rental unit 15024 goes into a break lock state, and is controlled so as not to accept any operation from the player until the ejected break card is inserted.

These two rest functions (first rest function, second rest function) differ not only in who initiates the function, but also in various other respects, such as the conditions for entering the rest lock state and the rest time.

Figure 274 shows an example of a maintenance mode menu. Figure 274 (A) shows a maintenance mode menu 16171 that is displayed on the operation unit 15409 when a staff member or the like transitions the rental unit 15024 to maintenance mode, for example, by inserting a key into the keyhole 15324 of the rental unit 15024 shown in Figure 255 and turning it in a specified direction. The maintenance mode menu 16171 displays a title display section 16172, below which are arranged a tab menu (single) 16173, a tab menu (linked) 16174, and an "Exit" button 16175.

Furthermore, below this is a maintenance menu display area 16176 that is displayed when the tab menu (single) 16173 is touched. This maintenance menu display area 16176 displays buttons for performing single maintenance functions, specifically a "Eject one card" button, a "Eject specified card" button, a "Force return card" button, a "Clear excess balls" button, a "Second break" button 16176a, an "Unlock" button, and a "Check history" button. Also, a "Next" button 16177 is located at the bottom of the maintenance menu display area 16176.

Fig. 274(B) is the same as the maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in Fig. 274(A), but the maintenance menu display area 16176 is different from that in Fig. 274(A). This is the content displayed when the "Next" button 16177 is touched in the maintenance mode menu 16171 in Fig. 274(A). Here, the "Start test shot" button, "End test shot" button, "RW cleaning" button, "Banknote insertion test" button, "Operation status" button, "Setting value information" button, "Restart" button, and "Clear ID setting" button are displayed in the maintenance menu display area 16176. In addition, a "Previous" button 16178 is located at the bottom of the maintenance menu display area 16176, and touching this button transitions to the maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in Fig. 274(A).

When the "Eject one card" button is touched, one IC card for a visitor card stored in the card storage section 15323 of the lending unit 15024 is ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. At this time, the balance and medal information stored in the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is not moved or written. If there are still IC cards stored in the card storage section 15323 after one card has been ejected, the "Eject one card again" button is displayed, and the arcade staff can eject IC cards continuously from the card insertion slot 15321.

When the "Specify Card Eject" button is touched, a screen for specifying the number of IC cards to be ejected is displayed. When the number is specified and ejection is instructed, the specified number of IC cards for visitor cards stored in the card storage section 15323 of the lending unit 15024 are ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. At this time, the balance and medal information stored in the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is not moved or written. It is also possible to specify "all ejection", which ejects all cards stored in the card storage section 15323.

When the "Forced Card Return" button is touched, the visitor card is forcibly ejected from the card insertion port 15321. In this embodiment, for example, if the number of medals held stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024, or the sum of the number of medals held stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 and the number of medals stored in the corresponding medal-less machine 15014, does not reach a predetermined number of medals, the visitor card is not ejected even if the "Card Return" button is touched. However, if the "Forced Card Return" button is touched, the number of medals held stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is moved (written) to the IC card, and then ejected from the card insertion port 15321 as a visitor card.

When the "Clear leftover balls" button is touched, the number of held medals stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is cleared (leftover ball clearing process). Note that, for example, if the number of held medals is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of medals, or if there are medals remaining in the corresponding medalless machine 15014, the leftover ball clearing process is not performed.

When the "Second Break" button 16176a is touched, the rental unit 15024 transitions to a break-locked state, and other players cannot operate it. This operation is performed by the staff of the game establishment, for example, when a player is going to sit down for an extended period of time, such as for a meal break, in order to protect the balance of the rental unit 15024 and the medals held by the player.

When the "Unlock" button is touched, the rental unit 15024, which has transitioned to the break-locked state due to the first break operation by the player or the second break operation by the gaming facility staff, etc., is forcibly released. This operation is performed, for example, when the IC card used to put the rental unit 15024 into the break-locked state is lost.

When the "Check History" button is touched, history information and the like relating to the operation history when operating the lending unit 15024 or the medalless machine 15014 is displayed on the operation unit 15409. For example, the most recent five pieces of history information and the like are displayed. History information may include operations such as inserting a card, issuing a ticket, lending, counting, paying out, replaying, returning, sharing, and clearing leftover balls. In addition, display items such as balance, payout, consumption, and counting are set for each item related to the operation.

Furthermore, in the case of a power outage recovery, two records of historical data (A: data paid out before power outage, B: data re-paid after power outage) are added to the payout display item. For example, in the case of a loan, the items A: Loan (Consumed, Paid, Payout) and B: Loan (Consumed, Payout) are added, in the case of a payout of held balls, the items A: Payout (Paid, Payout) and B: Payout (Payout) are added, and in the case of a replay of saved balls, the items A: Saved payment (Paid, Payout), card number and B: Saved payment (Payout), card number are added.

When the "Start test play" button is touched, a test play mode screen or the like is displayed and the mode transitions to test play mode, and the "Pay out held medals" button can be touched to provide imaginary held medals (e.g., 50 medals) to the medalless machine 15014. This allows the connection operation between the lending unit 15024 and the corresponding medalless machine 15014 to be confirmed. Furthermore, when the "End test play" button is touched, the test play mode ends and, for example, the display returns to the maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in FIG. 274 (B).

When the "RW Cleaning" button is touched, a guide is displayed instructing the user to insert a dedicated cleaning card into the card insertion slot 15321. When the "Execute" button is then touched, the cleaning card is used to clean the IC card contact area associated with the IC card RW15405.

When the "Banknote Insertion Test" button is touched, banknotes can be inserted continuously into the banknote insertion slot 15301 so that operations such as identification of banknotes by the bill validator 15407, storing of banknotes in the banknote storage section, and transport of banknotes to the banknote transport path can be confirmed.

When the "Operation Status" button is touched, an operation status screen is displayed on the operation unit 15409. The operation status screen displays, for example, the number of pulses notified to the hall computer 15070 (number of issued pulses, number of consumed pulses, number of paid out pulses, number of replay pulses, etc.).

When the "Setting Value Information" button is touched, information regarding the setting values of the lending unit 15024 obtained from the card server 15100 is displayed. The setting values are information stored and managed by the card server 15100, and are set for each lending unit 15024. For example, this may include the date and time when the setting values of the card server 15100 were updated, the lending unit type (pachislot, pachinko, smart pachislot, smart pachinko), line ID, in-line ID, store number, machine number, lending payout consumption amount (amount consumed per medal lending), number of lent payout medals (number of medals paid out per medal lending), number of held medals paid out (number of medals paid out per held medal payout), IP address, MAC address, etc.

When the "Restart" button is touched, the rental unit 15024 is restarted. When the "Clear ID Settings" button is touched, the association between the rental unit 15024 and the card server 15100 is dissolved and erased. In this embodiment, the rental unit 15024 and the card server 15100 are managed and associated with each other by a combination of the above-mentioned row ID and in-row ID, but by clearing the values of this row ID and in-row ID, the association between the rental unit 15024 and the card server 15100 is cleared.

When the tab menu (linked) 16174 is touched in the maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in FIG. 274(A) and FIG. 274(B), buttons for performing maintenance functions in linkage (i.e., linked with other rental units 15024) are displayed in the maintenance menu display area 16176. Furthermore, when the "Exit" button 16175 is touched, the maintenance mode of the rental unit 15024 ends, and the display of the operation unit 15409 returns to the display of the operation menu 16001 shown in FIG. 260(A).

The maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in Figures 274(A) and 274(B) is displayed when the lending unit 15024 is in an "open store" state and connected to the card server 15100 (see Figure 259), and in the maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in Figure 276(B), the "Start test play" button, "End test play" button, and "Banknote insertion test" button are disabled (cannot be touched), and the buttons are grayed out (for example, the brightness of the buttons is reduced and the display is changed from color to black and white (or grayscale)). In Figure 274(B), this state is represented by hatching the areas of the buttons.

When the rental unit 15024 is in the "test opening state" and connected to the card server 15100, all buttons shown in the maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in Figures 274 (A) and 274 (B) are valid (however, the "End test play" button is only valid after the "Start test play" button has been touched).

When the lending unit 15024 is in a "closed state" and connected to the card server 15100, the "Second Break" button 16176a, the "Unlock" button, the "Start Test Play" button, the "End Test Play" button, and the "Banknote Insertion Test" button are disabled.

Amusement establishment staff, etc. can start the second break function by touching the "Second Break" button 16176a in the maintenance mode menu 16171 in FIG. 274 (A). Therefore, the player cannot start this second break function himself, and must ask the amusement establishment staff, etc. to start the second break function. However, for both the first and second break functions, the player can insert a break card to release the break lock state of the rental unit 15024.

In the first break function, when the player touches the "First Break" button on the operation menu 16001 displayed on the operation unit 15409, if certain conditions are met, the player can leave the seat for a specified period of time, at which time a break card is ejected so that the player can operate the lending unit 15024 again later. During this absence, the player enters a break lock state in which the balance of the lending unit 15024, the medals held, and the medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 are held, and the player can play again by inserting a break card. During the break lock state, control is exercised so that reception of any items other than the break card or operation of the operation menu cannot be performed.

On the other hand, in the second break function, if an arcade staff member or the like, at the request of a player, switches the rental unit 15024 to maintenance mode and touches the "Second Break" button 16176a, and if certain conditions are met, the rental unit 15024 transitions to a break lock state in the same manner as the first break function, just as if the player or the like had touched the "First Break" button on the operation menu 16001, and the break lock state is released by inserting a break card.

Figure 275 (A) shows the break permission information screen 16131 that is displayed when a first or second break is instructed, the instruction is permitted because it satisfies certain conditions, and the player removes the break card that was ejected from the lending unit 15024.

When a first break is instructed, the display area 16132 displayed on the break permission information screen 16131 displays the same as the status display area 16002 and status display icon 16003 shown in the operation menu 16001 of FIG. 260 (A), and when a second break is instructed, the same as the title display section 16172 shown in the maintenance mode menu 16171 of FIG. 274 (A) is displayed. At the bottom of the display area 16132, a guidance display area 16134 is located, where the message "Please insert the removed card at the end of the break" is displayed.

A display area 16135 for medals in hand, etc. is located below the information display area 16134, and displays the balance and number of medals in hand stored in the lending unit 15024, and the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014. In the display area 16135 for medals in hand, the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 is displayed as "game medals."

Figure 275 (B) shows a break refusal screen 16141 that is displayed when a first or second break is instructed and the instruction is rejected because it does not meet certain conditions.

When a first break is instructed, the display area 16142 displayed on the break refusal screen 16141 displays something similar to the status display area 16002 and status display icon 16003 shown in the operation menu 16001 in FIG. 260 (A), and when a second break is instructed, it displays something similar to the title display area 16172 shown in the maintenance mode menu 16171 in FIG. 274 (A). At the bottom of the display area 16142, a refusal display area 16144 is located, where the message "Break is not currently available" is displayed.

An "OK" button 16145 is displayed at the bottom of the refusal display area 16144. When the "OK" button 16145 is touched, the display of the operation unit 15409 returns to the operation menu 16001 shown in FIG. 260(A) if the first break is instructed, or returns to the maintenance mode menu 16171 if the second break is instructed.

Figure 276 (A) shows a break screen 16151 that is displayed on the operation unit 15409 a predetermined time after the break permission information screen 16131 shown in Figure 275 (A) is displayed. In the display area 16152 displayed on the break screen 16151, if a first break is specified, the same as the status display area 16002 and status display icon 16003 shown in the operation menu 16001 in Figure 260 (A) are displayed, and if a second break is specified, the same as the title display area 16172 shown in the maintenance mode menu 16171 in Figure 274 (A) is displayed.

At the bottom of the display area 16152, a break sign display area 16154 is arranged, where a large sign containing the notation "First break, break in progress" or "Second break, break in progress" is displayed. In this example, the background color of the break sign display area 16154 is green, or a green-based image. In the example of FIG. 276(A), the notation "First break" is displayed when the first break is indicated. By seeing this display on the operation unit 15409, other players can easily recognize that the rental unit 15024 and the corresponding medalless machine 15014 are already being played on.

A remaining time display area 16155 is located below the break sign display area 16154, where the remaining time of the break is displayed. In this embodiment, the break time is set in advance, and the time count begins, for example, when the break card ejected from the lending unit 15024 is removed.

Below the remaining time display area 16155 is a rest card insertion guidance display area 16156, where messages such as "Please insert a rest card" and other error messages are displayed.

Figure 276 (B) shows a time exceeded display screen 16161 that is displayed when a predetermined break time has elapsed after the break screen 16151 shown in Figure 276 (A) is displayed. When a first break is instructed, the display area 16162 displayed on the time exceeded display screen 16161 displays something similar to the status display area 16002 and status display icon 16003 shown in the operation menu 16001 in Figure 260 (A), and when a second break is instructed, the display area 16162 displayed on the time exceeded display screen 16161 displays something similar to the title display area 16172 shown in the maintenance mode menu 16171 in Figure 274 (A).

At the bottom of the display area 16162, a time-over sign display area 16164 is arranged, where a large sign is displayed containing the notation "First break, taking a break, time over" or "Second break, taking a break, time over". In this example, the background color of the taking a break sign display area 16154 is red or a pattern based on red (in FIG. 276(B), the taking a break sign display area 16154 is shown hatched), and is configured to stand out more than the taking a break sign display area 16154 shown in FIG. 276(A). In the example of FIG. 276(B), notation relating to "First break" is displayed when the first break is instructed.

An overtime display area 16165 is located below the time overtime sign display area 16164, which displays the overtime of the break and shows how much time has passed since the preset break time.

A break card insertion guidance display area 16166 is located below the overtime display area 16165, and here the display is the same as the break card insertion guidance display area 16156 on the break screen 16151 shown in FIG. 276 (A).

Next, we will explain the rest function control processing in the rental unit 15024 with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 277.

As described above, the break function in the rental unit 15024 has a first break function instructed by the player and a second break function instructed by a staff member or the like, and the main CPU 15401 determines in step S5301 whether the first break or the second break has been instructed. If neither break has been instructed, this determination is repeated (NO in step S5301).

If the player touches the "First Break" button in the operation menu 16001 displayed on the operation unit 15409, it is determined in step S5301 that the first break function has been selected, and in that case, it is determined in step S5302 whether or not a membership card has been inserted through the card insertion slot 15321. If a membership card has been inserted (YES in step S5302), the process proceeds to step S5307; if a membership card has not been inserted (NO in step S5302), it is determined in step S5303 whether or not the conditions for the first break are met. If the conditions for the first break are met (YES in step S5303), the process proceeds to step S5307.

If the conditions for the first break are not met (NO in step S5303), in step S5304, a break refusal screen 16141 as shown in FIG. 275 (B) is displayed on the operation unit 15409. Thereafter, by touching the "OK" button 16145 on the break refusal screen 16141, the process returns to step S5301, and the operation menu 16001 is displayed on the operation unit 15409. Note that although a specific error message (the reason for not meeting the conditions for the first break) is not displayed on the break refusal screen 16141 in FIG. 275 (B), it may be displayed here.

The above-mentioned first break condition is a condition when the player inserts a visitor card from the card insertion slot 15321 or when no IC card is inserted (i.e., when the player is a visitor), and satisfies all of the following: a predetermined balance in the lending unit 15024; a predetermined number of medals (for example, the total of the number of medals held stored in the lending unit 15024 and the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014, or either one); and medals of another lending type (at least one of the other lending types). Furthermore, since it is necessary to eject the break card, the first break condition is also that the number of IC cards stored in the card storage section 15323 is not 0. Note that when a visitor card is inserted by a player, the visitor card is temporarily stored in the card storage section 15323, so in this case, the number of IC cards stored in the card storage section 15323 is not 0.

When a staff member of the arcade touches the "Second Break" button on the maintenance mode menu 16171 displayed on the operation unit 15409, it is determined in step S5301 that the second break function has been selected, and in that case, it is determined in step S5305 whether or not the conditions for the second break are met. If the conditions for the second break are met (YES in step S5305), the process proceeds to step S5307. If the conditions for the second break are not met (NO in step S5305), in step S5306, a break refusal screen 16141 as shown in FIG. 275 (B) is displayed on the operation unit 15409. Thereafter, by touching the "OK" button 16145 on the break refusal screen 16141, the process returns to step S5301, and the maintenance mode menu 16171 is displayed on the operation unit 15409.

The above-mentioned second break condition is a condition when a staff member of the game establishment touches the "second break" button from the maintenance mode menu 16171 (for example, at the request of a player), and for example, in the lending unit 15024, the IC card is in the read/write position (for example, a member card is inserted from the card insertion slot 15321 and a password input screen is displayed on the operation unit 15409), the first break or the second break is instructed and the lending unit 15024 is in a break lock state, or the lending unit 15024 is in a shared lock state. Furthermore, since it is necessary to eject the break card, the condition for the second break is that the number of IC cards stored in the card storage section 15323 is not 0. Note that if a visitor card is inserted by a player, the visitor card is temporarily stored in the card storage section 15323, so in this case, the number of IC cards stored in the card storage section 15323 is not 0.

If it is determined in step S5301 that the "First Break" button has been touched, the first break function is executed unconditionally if a membership card is inserted, otherwise, if the conditions for the first break are met, in steps S5307 and onwards. Also, if it is determined in step S5301 that the "Second Break" button has been touched, the second break function is executed in steps S5307 and onwards if the conditions for the second break are met.

In step S5307, the lending unit 15024 guides the IC card stored in the card storage section 15323 to the read/write position, where it writes the rest lock information to the IC card, and ejects the IC card from the card insertion slot 15321 as a "rest card" (step S5308). At this time, the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024 stores the current balance, number of medals held, and (if a membership card is inserted) membership information. This membership information has already been authenticated (via the card server 15100, the membership server 15110, etc.) when the membership card was first inserted, by logging in with a password, etc.

When a membership card is inserted through the card insertion slot 15321, the information previously stored on the IC card is moved to the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024, and the card is stored in the card storage section 15323 as an IC card that can be used as any other card. Therefore, when a break card is received while the membership card is inserted, the inserted membership card and the ejected break card are physically the same IC card, but are completely different cards in terms of the recorded content and positioning.

The rest lock information is, for example, information such as the status of held medals (e.g., present: 1, absence: 0), identification information of the lending unit 15024 or the medalless machine 15014 connected to the lending unit 15024 (e.g., identification number, the row ID of the island where it is installed, and the in-row ID, etc.).

Next, in step S5309, it is determined whether the break card ejected from the card insertion slot 15321 has been removed. This determination is repeated until the break card is removed (NO in step S5309). If the break card has been removed (YES in step S5309), a break permission information screen 16131 such as that shown in FIG. 275 (A) is displayed (step S5310).

On the break permission information screen 16131, the medals held display area 16135 displays the balance and number of medals held stored in the lending unit 15024, and the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014.

Next, in step S5311, a predetermined time (e.g., a few seconds) after the break permission information screen 16131 is displayed in step S5309, a break screen 16151 as shown in FIG. 276 (A) is displayed. As a result, the break permission information screen 16131 transitions to the break screen 16151 immediately after being displayed, so the balance and other information displayed in the held medals, etc. display area 16135 of the break permission information screen 16131 is not displayed for a long period of time, effectively preventing anyone other than the player from seeing this information. The time for which the break permission information screen 16131 is displayed can also be adjusted by a setting value.

The break screen 16151 is displayed until a normal break card is inserted into the card insertion slot 15321 of the lending unit 15024. In step S5312, it is determined whether an IC card has been inserted into the card insertion slot 15321, and if not (NO in step S5312), it is determined in step S5313 whether the break time has been exceeded, and if not (NO in step S5313), the process returns to step S5312 and the determination of whether an IC card has been inserted is repeated. However, at this time, the calculated remaining time is displayed in the remaining time display area 16155 of the break screen 16151.

The elapsed time during the break is calculated by, for example, starting to count when the removal of the break card is detected in step S5309, and subtracting the counted elapsed time from the break time. The break time can be set to be different for the first break and the second break, and this setting value is stored in the card server 15100, for example, and obtained from the card server 15100 when the power of the lending unit 15024 is turned on. In this embodiment, the first break is set to a time of a few minutes during which the player leaves his seat for a short time, and the second break is set to a time of 30 minutes to an hour for the player to take a meal break, but various break times can be set for the first break and the second break depending on the operation of the gaming facility.

If it is determined in step S5313 that the break time has been exceeded (YES in step S5313), in step S5314, a time exceeded display screen 16161 as shown in FIG. 276 (B) is displayed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S5312, and the determination of whether or not an IC card has been inserted is repeated. When displaying the time exceeded display screen 16161, the exceeded time is calculated based on the measured elapsed time and the break time, and the calculated elapsed time is displayed in the exceeded time display area 16165 of the time exceeded display screen 16161.

If it is determined in step S5312 that an IC card has been inserted into the card insertion slot 15321 (YES in step S5312), then in step S5315, the rest lock information stored in the inserted IC card is checked to determine whether the rest lock information is normal. As described above, the rest lock information includes identification information for the lending unit 15024 and the medal-less machine 15014, so the lending unit 15024 can determine whether the inserted IC card is normal (i.e., has been ejected from the lending unit 15024) by comparing the rest lock information with the identification information. Therefore, the rest card is only valid for the corresponding lending unit 15024, and it is not possible to play with the lending unit 15024 using other rest cards. Similarly, the rest card cannot be used with other lending units 15024.

If the rest lock information of the inserted IC card is not normal (NO in step S5315), the inserted IC card is ejected in step S5316, and then in step S5317, an error message to the effect that the inserted IC card is not a valid card is displayed for a certain period of time in the rest card insertion guidance display area 16156 of the break screen 16151 shown in FIG. 276 (A) or in the rest card insertion guidance display area 16166 of the time exceeded display screen 16161 shown in FIG. 276 (B). Then, the process returns to step S5312, and the determination of whether or not an IC card has been inserted is repeated. Through the processing from step S5312 to step S5317, the rest lock state is maintained in the lending unit 15024 until a normal rest card is inserted.

If the rest lock information of the inserted IC card is normal in step S5315 (YES in step S5315), the rest lock state of the rental unit 15024 is released in step S5318, and normal card acceptance processing is performed. Note that if the rest lock state is entered with a membership card inserted, as described above, membership information etc. is stored in the memory unit 15404 of the rental unit 15024, and authentication using that membership information has already been completed, so that login using a password, which is normally performed when a membership card is inserted, can be omitted in the card acceptance processing.

In addition, when a certain time has elapsed since the time-over display screen 16161 shown in FIG. 276(B) was displayed, the player is assumed to have abandoned the game midway, and the display of the time-over sign display area 16164 can be controlled to be changed to another display and sound output as necessary. In this case, the staff of the game establishment can display the maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in FIG. 274(A), touch the above-mentioned "unlock" button, and release the rest lock state of the rental unit 15024. When the "unlock" button is touched, the main CPU 15401 of the rental unit 15024 releases the rest lock state of the rental unit 15024 (i.e., the loop process from step S5312 to step S5317 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 277 is essentially cancelled and terminated), and at this time, the member information stored in the memory unit 15404 of the rental unit 15024 is cleared, and the operation menu 16001 is displayed on the operation unit 15409. This process resets the rental unit 15024 to a state where other players can play using a membership card or visitor card, or without a visitor card.

The break lock state can be released not only when the player abandons the game, but also when the player loses the break card or when a problem occurs while in the break lock state.

Up to this point, the break function has been explained with reference to Figures 274 to 277, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 also applies to the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023. Also, in this embodiment, when a membership card is inserted, the break 1 function is available unconditionally, but even in this case, some conditions can be set. Also, the above-mentioned conditions for break 1 and break 2 are just examples, and various other conditions can be set.

In addition, with the rest function described above, the player can take a break (leave his/her seat) by operating the medal-less machine 15014 by himself/herself and set it to an inoperable state, but the player can also take a break (leave his/her seat) by requesting a member of staff at the gaming facility to do the same, providing even greater convenience for the player.

In addition, if a membership card is not inserted, a player needs a certain balance or a certain number of medals in hand to touch the "First Break" button and transition to the game lock state. However, the number of medals in hand at this time is determined by, for example, the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014. As a result, the player does not need to take the trouble of pressing the counting button on the medalless machine 15014 to move the stored medals to the lending unit 15024 in order to take a break, which also contributes to the convenience of the player.

In this embodiment, as described above, a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or other IC card can be used as a visitor card or a member card, and in that case, the card is not ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. For example, if a smartphone or the like is used instead of a player's card, the break card is not ejected (step S5308) in FIG. 277. Instead, when writing the break lock information in step S5307, for example, a message such as "Please touch your smartphone or IC card" is displayed on the operation unit 15409, and when the player then brings the smartphone or the like close to (or touches) the touch guide mark 15304, the contactless IC card RW15406 stores the break lock information in the memory unit of the smartphone or the like, and then a message such as "Writing of break lock information has been completed" is displayed on the operation unit 15409.

In addition, the player can release the rest lock state by having the contactless IC card RW15406 read the smartphone or other device on which the rest lock information is written (processing corresponding to steps S5312, S5315, etc.).

[1-14. Update function]
Next, the update function of the rental unit 15024 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 278 to 280. Fig. 278 is a flowchart showing a procedure for updating software, etc., as necessary, when the rental unit 15024 notifies the device status. Fig. 279 is a flowchart showing a procedure for updating software, etc., as necessary, when the rental unit 15024 and the card server 15100 start communication between the network. In Figs. 278 and 279, the processing of the rental unit 15024 and the card server 15100 are displayed in parallel. Fig. 280 is a diagram for explaining the directory configuration of the rental unit 15024 and the switching of the current directory.

(Updates in device status notifications/responses)
278, the update function of the rental unit 15024 will be described. The main CPU 15401 of the rental unit 15024 transmits an equipment status notification to the card server 15100 at regular intervals (step S5331), and when the card server 15100 receives the equipment status notification from the rental unit 15024, it transmits a corresponding equipment status response to the rental unit 15024 (step S5332).

The device status notification sent by the rental unit 15024 and the device status response sent by the card server 15100 contain version information of the software related to the device. For example, the device may be the rental unit 15024 or the medalless machine 15014, and in this case, the software is software for controlling these devices, and the version information is, for example, the version of the individual software or the version of the entire software (a build or bound piece of software, or a package software including multiple pieces of software).

In addition, other possible devices include devices included in the rental unit 15024 (for example, IC card RW15405, contactless IC card RW15406, bill validator 15407, etc. as shown in FIG. 256), and external devices and equipment connected to the rental unit 15024. In this case, the version information is the version of the software (including firmware) of the device.

When the lending unit 15024 receives an equipment status response from the card server 15100, in step S5333, it compares the version information in the equipment status notification with the version information in the equipment status response, and determines whether the version information managed by the lending unit 15024 and the version information managed by the card server 15100 for each common device match (step S5334).

If it is determined in step S5334 that no device has a different software version (YES in step S5334), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a device has a different software version (NO in step S5334), the lending unit 15024 downloads the target software (determined to have a different version) from the card server 15100 and updates the software stored in the lending unit 15024. In this embodiment, the latest software is always stored in a specified memory area of the card server 15100, and if the software of the lending unit 15024 and the software of the card server 15100 are different versions, it is necessary to update the software of the lending unit 15024 with the software of the card server 15100, which is the latest software.

Then, in order to update the software, the lending unit 15024 sends a download start notification to the card server 15100 in step S5335, and upon receiving the download start notification from the lending unit 15024, the card server 15100 sends a download start response to the lending unit 15024 in step S5337.

When the lending unit 15024 receives a download start response from the card server 15100, in step S5338, it accesses the card server 15100 and downloads the update file using a specified protocol.

Next, in step S5340, the lending unit 15024 determines whether the download was successful, and if successful (YES in step S5340), in step S5341, a file check is performed. This file check, for example, uses verification data (e.g., md5 data) included in the downloaded update file to verify whether the update file was downloaded normally.

In step S5342, it is determined whether the file is normal, and if it is normal (YES in step S5342), in step S5344, the update file is unzipped and the unzipped software is copied (replacing the old version of the software). Note that in this example, a file check is performed on the update file before it is unzipped, but a file check may be performed after unzipping. Also, if the update file contains multiple software programs and some of the software programs are different versions from those of the card server 15100, only the different versions of the software are copied.

When the software copy is completed in step S5344, the lending unit 15024 transmits a download completion notification to the card server 15100 in step S5345. As described above, the lending unit 15024 transmits device status notifications to the card server 15100 at regular intervals, but is controlled not to transmit the notification even if the timing for transmitting the device status notification arrives between the time when the download start notification is transmitted in step S5335 and the time when the download completion notification is transmitted in step S5345.

When the card server 15100 receives a download completion notification from the rental unit 15024, in step S5346, it sends a download completion response to the rental unit 15024.

When the rental unit 15024 receives a download completion response from the card server 15100, in step S5347, if the rental unit 15024 is in an open state, it transitions to a closed state and restarts. By restarting in this manner, the rental unit 15024 starts up with software that has been updated to the latest version. In addition, devices etc. included in the rental unit 15024 are also restarted with software or firmware that has been updated to the latest version.

If the download of the update file fails (NO in step S5340) or if the file is not normal (NO in step S5342), the download is retried. In step S5343, it is determined whether the number of retries is less than three. If the number of retries is less than three (YES in step S5343), the process returns to step S5335 and downloads the update file again (retry). Note that in step S5343, if the number of retries is less than three (YES in step S5343), the process may be controlled to wait for a randomly determined time between 30 and 60 seconds, for example, before executing the process of step S5335.

In step S5343, if the number of retries is three or more (NO in step S5343), the process ends and returns to the normal sequence. Through this process, downloading of the update file from the card server 15100 is repeated until it fails three consecutive times, and if it fails three consecutive times, the process continues with the old version of the software. Note that if the number of retries is three or more (NO in step S5343), the process proceeds to step S5347, and the lending unit 15024 can also be controlled to be restarted.

In addition, if the download fails three consecutive times, the subsequent exchange of device status notification and device status response will result in a version mismatch again. At this time, if the software version identified by the device status response from the card server 15100 is the same as when the download failed three consecutive times, control can be performed to return to the normal sequence without downloading the update file.

In addition, if the download fails three consecutive times, the version will again be inconsistent due to the subsequent exchange of device status notification and device status response, but if the device is rebooted after three consecutive failures, it is possible to control the device to download the update file, and the number of retries at this time can be set to three or some other number.

In this embodiment, if the download fails three consecutive times (effectively, if the download fails or an abnormality occurs in the file), the retry is stopped, but this upper limit is merely an example, and other numbers can be set as appropriate. Also, here, the retry is stopped if the download fails or an abnormality occurs in the file three consecutive times, but the number of download failures and the number of file abnormalities can be managed separately, and an upper limit can be set for each.

(Updates in communication start notifications/responses)
279, another update function of the lending unit 15024 will be described. The main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024 transmits a communication start notification to the card server 15100, for example, at startup (step S5361), and when the card server 15100 receives the communication start notification from the lending unit 15024, it transmits a corresponding communication start response to the lending unit 15024 (step S5362).

The communication start notification sent by the lending unit 15024 and the communication start response sent by the card server 15100 each contain version information such as the message format version. In this embodiment, if the version information of the two does not match, the system is controlled to update the specified data.

When the lending unit 15024 receives a communication start response from the card server 15100, in step S5363, it compares the version information in the communication start notification with the version information in the communication start response and determines whether the two version information match (step S5364).

If it is determined in step S5364 that the version information matches (YES in step S5364), the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the version information differs (NO in step S5364), the lending unit 15024 downloads specified data from the card server 15100 and updates the data stored in the lending unit 15024. In this embodiment, the data to be downloaded are the main program, kernel, and script that control the processing of the lending unit 15024. In this example, the latest versions of these data are always stored in a specified storage area of the card server 15100, and if the version information of the communication start notification and the version information of the communication start response differ, it is necessary to update the data of the lending unit 15024 with the latest data stored in the card server 15100.

Then, in order to update the data, the lending unit 15024 sends a download start notification to the card server 15100 in step S5365, and upon receiving the download start notification from the lending unit 15024, the card server 15100 sends a download start response to the lending unit 15024 in step S5367.

When the card server 15100 receives the communication start notification sent by the lending unit 15024 in step S5361, it can determine whether the version information in the communication start notification and the version information in the communication start response match. If the version information in the communication start notification and the version information in the communication start response do not match, the lending unit 15024 is controlled to ignore messages other than the communication start notification, download start notification, and download completion notification. After that, when the card server 15100 receives a communication start notification with matching version information from the lending unit 15024, the control to ignore those messages is released.

When the lending unit 15024 receives the download start response from the card server 15100, in step S5368, it accesses the card server 15100 and downloads the update file using a specified protocol.

Next, in step S5370, the lending unit 15024 determines whether the download was successful, and if successful (YES in step S5370), in step S5371, a file check is performed. This file check, for example, uses verification data (e.g., md5 data) included in the downloaded update file to verify whether the update file was downloaded normally.

In step S5372, it is determined whether the file is normal, and if it is normal (YES in step S5372), in step S5374, the update file is decompressed and the decompressed data is copied (replacing the data of the old version). Note that in this example, a file check is performed on the update file before it is decompressed, but a file check may also be performed after decompression. Also, as described above, the update file contains various data such as the main program, kernel, and script, and the data is copied only if the versions of this data and the data of the corresponding rental unit 15024 are different.

When the lending unit 15024 completes copying the data in step S5374, it sends a download completion notification to the card server 15100 in step S5375. If the card server 15100 receives a download completion notification from the lending unit 15024, it sends a download completion response to the lending unit 15024 in step S5376.

When the rental unit 15024 receives a download completion response from the card server 15100, in step S5377, if the rental unit 15024 is in an open state, it transitions to a closed state and restarts. By restarting in this manner, the rental unit 15024 starts up with data updated to the latest version, and each process of the rental unit 15024 is controlled by the latest main program, kernel, scripts, etc.

If the download of the update file fails (NO in step S5370) or if the file is not normal (NO in step S5372), the download is retried. In step S5373, it is determined whether the number of retries is less than three. If the number of retries is less than three (YES in step S5373), the process returns to step S5361 and the communication start notification is sent again (retry). Note that in step S5373, if the number of retries is less than three (YES in step S5373), the process may be controlled to wait for a randomly determined time between 30 and 60 seconds, for example, before executing the process of step S5361.

In step S5373, if the number of retries is three or more (NO in step S5373), the process ends and returns to the normal sequence. Through this process, downloading of the update file from the card server 15100 is repeated until it fails three consecutive times, and if it fails three consecutive times, the process continues with the old version of data. Note that if the number of retries is three or more (NO in step S5373), the process can also proceed to step S5377 and control is performed to restart the lending unit 15024.

In addition, if the download fails three consecutive times, the version information will again mismatch due to the subsequent exchange of communication start notifications and communication start responses. At this time, if the version information obtained from the communication start response from the card server 15100 is the same as that obtained after three consecutive failures, control can be exercised to return to the normal sequence without downloading the update file.

In addition, if the download fails three consecutive times, the version information will again mismatch due to the subsequent exchange of communication start notifications and communication start responses. However, if the device is restarted after three consecutive failures, it can be controlled to download the update file, and the number of retries at this time can be set to three or some other number.

In this embodiment, if the download fails three consecutive times (effectively, if the download fails or an abnormality occurs in the file), the retry is stopped, but this upper limit is merely an example, and other numbers can be set as appropriate. Also, here, the retry is stopped if the download fails or an abnormality occurs in the file three consecutive times, but the number of download failures and the number of file abnormalities can be managed separately, and an upper limit can be set for each.

(How to store update data)
Next, a method of storing update data in the rental unit 15024 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 280. In this embodiment, the specified data stored in the rental unit 15024 is updated based on an update file downloaded from the card server 15100 by the method shown in Fig. 278 and Fig. 279, or by other methods. In this way, if a power outage occurs while the data of the rental unit 15024 is being updated, or if the data is updated to data that interferes with the operation of the rental unit 15024, the data related to the operation of the rental unit 15024 is held in a two-sided configuration (i.e., a configuration that always has two versions) so that it can be immediately switched to the previous normal version of data.

Figure 280 (A) shows an example of a directory structure in a UNIX (registered trademark)-based OS. For example, the memory unit 15404 of the rental unit 15024 of this embodiment can have such a directory structure.

In FIG. 280(A), "/" indicates the root directory, and under this root directory, for example, the directories "dev", "home", "proc", and "var" are located. Under the "dev" directory, for example, device-related system files are stored, under the "home" directory, for example, system scripts such as startup scripts are stored, under the "proc" directory, for example, system files such as kernels are stored, and under the "var" directory, for example, data related to the operation of the rental unit 15024 is stored.

Under the directory "var", "program_data" and "program_files" are located, and under "program_data", for example, program setting data and various data that is stored and read by executing a program are stored. Under "program_files", there are further directories "versionA" and "versionB", and these two directories store data related to the operation of the rental unit 15024 in a two-sided configuration.

The "versionA" and "versionB" directories have the same structure, and each directory contains the directories "bin", "scripts", "firmware", and "resource". The "bin" directory stores, for example, programs (binary files) that control the operation of the rental unit 15024, the "scripts" directory stores, for example, scripts related to the operation of the rental unit 15024, the "firmware" directory stores, for example, firmware for each device equipped in the rental unit 15024, and the "resource" directory stores, for example, content data (images, audio data, etc.) related to the operation of the rental unit 15024.

When software or other data is updated based on an update file downloaded from the card server 15100, for example, the data placed under the directory "versionA" (e.g., PGM1, SC1, etc.) is updated as the latest data, and the data placed under the directory "versionB" is the previous data copied from the directory "versionA" at the time of the current update.

In this embodiment, as described above, the data in the directory "versionA" is the latest data, but it is also possible to alternate between the directory "versionA" and the directory "versionB" to be updated at each update timing.

Figures 280(B) and 280(C) show three-line input examples for the above-mentioned types of OS. In the example in Figure 280(B), the "cd" command on the first line sets the current directory to the "bin" directory under the "versionA" directory. The "PGM1" statement on the second line sets the current directory, and launches the "PGM1" program stored in "bin" in the "versionA" directory. After that, the "../scripts/SC1" on the third line is a command to launch the script "SC1" by specifying a relative directory, which launches the "SC1" script stored in "scripts" in "versionA".

Similarly, in the example of Figure 280 (C), the "cd" command on the first line sets the current directory to the "bin" directory under the "versionB" directory. The "PGM1" statement on the second line sets the current directory, and launches the "PGM1" program stored in "bin" in the "versionB" directory. After that, "../scripts/SC1" on the third line is a command to launch the script "SC1" by specifying a relative directory, which launches the "SC1" script stored in "scripts" in "versionB".

In this way, by changing the settings of the current directory, it is possible to easily use programs and the like stored in a two-sided configuration. For example, as described above, if the directory "versionA" is normally managed as the latest version, then each time the rental unit 15024 is started, the programs and scripts contained in the directory "versionA" are executed by, for example, executing the "cd" command as shown in FIG. 280(B) using the startup script. Here, for example, if a power outage or other failure occurs when updating data in the directory "versionA" at the time of update, the data in the directory "versionA" becomes incomplete, and therefore, when the rental unit 15024 is restarted, the startup script is changed to change the current directory by executing the "cd" command as shown in FIG. 280(C), thereby allowing the programs and scripts contained in the directory "versionB" to be executed.

In this manner, in this embodiment, by storing data related to the operation of the rental unit 15024 in a dual-sided configuration in duplicate, it is possible to control the operation of the rental unit 15024 using a different version of data simply by changing the current directory. Note that while restarting the unit after a power outage is given as an example here, in various other scenarios, it is possible to easily switch versions of programs and data by switching the current directory.

Up to this point, the update function has been explained with reference to Figures 278 to 280, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 also applies to the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023. Note that, although a specific type of OS has been explained as an example here, the OS of the lending unit 15024 is not limited to this type of OS. As long as it has the function of being able to dynamically set the current directory as described above and to effectively switch data such as programs to be executed using a two-sided configuration, any OS can be adopted as the OS of the lending unit 15024.

In addition, with the update function described above, the rental unit 15024 can determine whether or not an update file needs to be downloaded based on the response information returned from the card server 15100, triggered by the device status notification sent by the rental unit 15024 to the card server 15100 at regular intervals and the communication start notification sent to the card server 15100 at startup, etc. Therefore, when it is necessary to change data including the program of the rental unit 15024, the operator of the gaming system 15001 can efficiently distribute the data to multiple rental units 15024 simply by storing the data in the card server 15100.

In addition, the update file downloaded from the card server 15100 to the lending unit 15024 may contain multiple files, but the updating (copying) of the files stored in the lending unit 15024 based on the update file is performed selectively only on files with different versions, thus avoiding meaningless copying, thereby shortening the processing time and reducing the processing load on the main CPU 15401, etc.

In this embodiment, the update file is not limited to a single file, but may be a collection of multiple files and data, and may include data in various other formats.

[1-15. Check function in maintenance mode]
Next, the check function in the maintenance mode of the rental unit 15024 of this embodiment will be described.

(Check at the start of the test run)
As shown in Fig. 259 and Fig. 274, when the rental unit 15024 is in a test opening state, the "Start test play" button is displayed in an enabled state in the maintenance mode menu, and when a staff member of the game arcade touches this "Start test play" button, the number of medals required for the test play is loaned (information regarding value information is provided to the medalless machine 15014), and the game enters a test play mode in which a trial play (test play) can be performed. In this case, a test play mode notification is sent to the card server 15100 to notify that the rental unit 15024 (medalless machine 15014) has entered the test play mode.

However, if the "Start test play" button is touched and there is at least one of a remaining balance and medals in the rental unit 15024, an error message to that effect is displayed on the operation unit 15409, for example, and the game is controlled so that the game cannot be switched to test play mode.

In addition, even if the member card remains inserted in the card insertion slot 15321 of the rental unit 15024, or if the member card has been inserted through the card insertion slot 15321 and is in the reading position (i.e., the password entry screen is displayed), an error message to that effect is displayed on the operation unit 15409, and control is exercised so that the user cannot switch to the trial mode. Note that, although an error message is displayed on the operation unit 15409 in this example, other methods of notification can be used, such as audio output to the speaker 15411.

Furthermore, if there are medals stored in the medal-less machine 15014 corresponding to the lending unit 15024, an error message to that effect will be displayed on the operation unit 15409, and the machine will be controlled so that it cannot switch to the trial mode.

Therefore, the staff of the gaming establishment must resolve the problems with the rental unit 15024 and the medal-less machine 15014 described above, and then touch the "Start trial play" button again.

(Check when clearing end balls)
As shown in Figures 259 and 274, when the lending unit 15024 is in an open state, a test opening state, or a closed state, the maintenance mode menu displays the "clear leftover balls" button in an enabled state, and when an arcade staff member or the like touches this "clear leftover balls" button, the number of medals stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 can be cleared (leftover ball clearing process).

In this embodiment, "leftover balls" basically refers to the number of medals (e.g., one or two) that cannot be effectively used by the medalless machine 15014, but if more than that number remain as held medals, they are also included in "leftover balls". These leftover balls can be cleared by touching the "leftover balls clear" button. Also, if the number of held medals stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the leftover ball clearing process is controlled so that it cannot be performed. In this case, a message for final confirmation of the leftover ball clearing process may be displayed (e.g., on the operation unit 15409), and the held medals may be cleared if the "OK" button is touched to agree to the clearing.

However, if the "Clear End Balls" button is touched and there is a remaining balance in the lending unit 15024, then, for example, an error message to that effect is displayed on the operation unit 15409, and control is exercised so that the end balls cannot be cleared. Also, if there are no medals in hand to be cleared, an error message is naturally displayed, and control is exercised so that the end balls clearing process cannot be carried out. Note that, although an error message is displayed on the operation unit 15409 in this example, other methods of notification can be used, such as audio output to the speaker 15411.

In addition, if a member card remains inserted in the card insertion slot 15321 of the lending unit 15024, or if a member card has been inserted into the card insertion slot 15321 and is in the reading position (i.e., the password entry screen is displayed), an error message to that effect is displayed on the operation unit 15409, and the end ball clearing process is prevented from being performed.

Furthermore, if other lending types of medals are stored in the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024, an error message to that effect is displayed (for example, on the operation unit 15409), and the end ball clearing process is prevented from being performed.

In addition, if there are medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 corresponding to the lending unit 15024, an error message to that effect (for example, "Please press the counting button on the gaming machine to count") is displayed on the operation unit 15409, and the end ball clearing process cannot be performed in this state. In this case, the staff of the gaming facility, etc., presses the "Count" button on the medalless machine 15014 to move the stored medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 to the medals held by the lending unit 15024, and then touches the "End Ball Clear" button.

In addition, if a message is displayed (for example, on the operation unit 15409), the staff of the gaming establishment must resolve the problem with the rental unit 15024 indicated in the message and then touch the "Clear Excess Balls" button again.

So far, we have explained the check functions in maintenance mode, such as the check at the start of a trial play and the check when the end balls are cleared, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 also applies to the managed gaming machine lending unit 15023.

In addition, with the above-mentioned check function in the maintenance mode, when the "Start test play" button is touched to play in the test play mode, if there is any information about value information (left by the player) remaining in the rental unit 15024 or the medalless machine 15014, the test play is prevented from being performed, and an announcement is made to notify the player. This allows the staff at the game establishment to be aware of such a condition and easily carry out maintenance work in the appropriate procedure, such as resolving the condition before performing a test play.

In addition, even if the "clear leftover balls" button is touched to reset the number of held medals stored in the lending unit 15024 to zero, if there are more than a specified number of held medals (left by the player) remaining in the lending unit 15024 or if there are stored medals remaining in the medal-less machine 15014, the system is controlled so that the leftover balls cannot be cleared as is, and an announcement is made to notify the player, so that the staff at the amusement facility can be sure of such a situation and can easily carry out maintenance work following appropriate procedures, such as resolving the situation before clearing the leftover balls.

[1-16. Check function when inserting a card]
Next, with reference to Figures 281 to 283, the check function when inserting a card in the lending unit 15024 of this embodiment will be described.

If a balance is stored in the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024, and if a balance is stored on the IC card (membership card or visitor card) inserted through the card insertion slot 15321 of the lending unit 15024, and the total of both balances exceeds a specified amount (for example, 10,000 yen), this is displayed on the operation unit 15409, and the IC card is simply ejected. This situation is shown in Figure 281 (A).

In addition, if the balance is stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 and the balance is stored in the IC card (membership card or visitor card) inserted from the card insertion port 15321 of the lending unit 15024, if the total of the balances is less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, 10,000 yen), the balance and number of medals stored in the IC card are cleared, and the balance and number of medals are added to the balance and number of medals in the memory unit 15404, respectively, and the movement of the balance and medals is notified to the card server 15100. Note that if the IC card is a visitor card, the IC card is stored in the card storage unit 15323 so that it can be reused. This situation is shown in FIG. 281 (B), where the balance in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is 7,000 yen after the balance of the IC card is added.

Also, as described above, when the balance is stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024, if multiple IC cards (e.g., visitor cards) having a balance and medals are inserted consecutively, the balance and medals stored in the memory unit 15404 can be configured to be added each time they are inserted (however, the upper limit of the balance after addition must be the predetermined upper limit amount described above). Here, the number of IC cards that can be inserted consecutively cannot exceed the number of cards that can be stored in the card storage unit 15323, but in addition to this condition, a limit may be set in advance on the number of cards that can be inserted consecutively. This situation is shown in FIG. 282 (A), where the balance in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is 9,000 yen, which is the sum of the balances of multiple IC cards. Also, the number of medals in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is 1,050, which is the sum of the medals of multiple IC cards.

On the other hand, when a balance is stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024, even if an IC card with a balance is inserted, the card can be controlled to be discharged with an error message displayed without adding up the balance. In addition, the response can be changed depending on whether the IC card is a member card or a visitor card. For example, when a balance is stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024, if a visitor card with a balance is inserted, the balance can be added up, but when a member card with a balance is inserted, the card is controlled to be discharged with an error message (for example, "Balances cannot be combined") displayed without adding up the balance. In this example, an error message is displayed on the operation unit 15409, but other methods of notification can be used, such as audio output to the speaker 15411. Figure 282 (B) shows a situation in which the balance in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 and the balance of the member card cannot be added up when the member card is inserted. As described above, the balance can also be managed in units such as "points".

In addition, when the balance is not stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024, and when a visitor card that has no balance and stores the number of medals held is inserted, the number of medals held is stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024, and in this case, it is possible to configure the system so that multiple visitor cards in this state are inserted in succession and the number of medals held is added up in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024. Figure 283 shows a situation in which multiple visitor cards are inserted in succession, and as a result, the number of medals held is added up and the number of medals stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is 3,800.

So far, we have explained the check function when inserting a card with reference to Figures 281 to 283, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 also applies to the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023.

In addition, with the above-mentioned card insertion check function, when an IC card is inserted, the value information stored on the IC card is stored (moved) in the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024 according to certain rules, so that the player can avoid situations where they inadvertently move the value information on the IC card, such as the balance or medals they have, or become confused about how to use it.

In this embodiment, as described above, a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or other IC card can be used as a visitor card or a member card, and a predetermined amount can be inserted into the lending unit 15024 using a smartphone or the like. In this case, the card is not inserted or ejected from the card insertion slot 15321. For example, when a smartphone or the like is used instead of a player's card, a message such as "Please touch your smartphone and IC card" is displayed on the operation unit 15409, and when the player approaches (or touches) the touch guide mark 15304, information on the balance, medals held, and medals saved stored in the smartphone or the like is read, and, for example, a predetermined amount or number of medals held is added to the lending unit 15024. Here, the amount or number of medals added to the lending unit 15024 may be a quantity set in advance, or may be a quantity specified by the player using the operation unit 15409. Then, a message such as "XX yen has been added to the balance" or "XX medals have been added" is displayed on the operation unit 15409, and the process ends.

[1-17. Ticket issuing function]
Next, the ticket issuing function of the lending unit 15024 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 284. Fig. 284 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of the ticket issuing function in the lending unit 15024.

The ticket issuing function is a function that newly (or additionally) grants the amount of the bill inserted by the player to the lending unit 15024. Also, when the IC card is ejected, the data of the amount granted to the lending unit 15024 is transferred to this IC card.

The main CPU 15401 of the dispensing unit 15024 first receives a signal from the bill validator 15407 in step S5391 to determine whether or not a bill has been inserted into the bill slot 15301, and repeats this determination process until a bill has been inserted (NO in step S5391). If it is determined that a bill has been inserted (YES in step S5391), then in step S5392, the denomination of the inserted bill is determined, and the value of the inserted bill (issued amount) is determined.

Next, in step S5393, it is determined whether the sum of the balance stored in memory unit 15404 of rental unit 15024 and the ticket issuance amount determined in step S5392 exceeds a predetermined amount (e.g., 10,000 yen), and if it does not exceed the predetermined amount (NO in step S5393), in step S5394, the balance stored in memory unit 15404 is updated to the sum of the balance and the ticket issuance amount.

Next, in step S5395, it is determined whether the balance stored in memory unit 15404 of lending unit 15024 has been updated from 0 yen to an amount other than 0 yen, and if it has been updated from 0 yen to an amount other than 0 yen (YES in step S5395), in step S5396, the ticket issue amount and ticket issue date stored in memory unit 15404 are updated. Otherwise (NO in step S5395), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step S5397.

Next, in step S5397, a ticket issuing completion notification is sent to the card server 15100, and a ticket issuing amount notification is sent to the HCBOX 15050. Next, in step S5398, the balance stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is updated from 0 yen to an amount other than 0 yen, and it is determined whether the automatic lending function is ON. If this condition is met (YES in step S5398), automatic lending processing is performed in step S5399. This automatic lending processing is a process in which, when a bill is inserted by the player, a predetermined consumption amount (loan disbursement consumption amount) is consumed from the balance stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024, and a predetermined number of medals (loan disbursement medal number) corresponding to the consumption amount is lent to the medalless machine 15014. Basically, this is the same process as when the "Medal Loan" button is touched on the operation menu 16001, but it is also possible to set the number of medals to be loaned to the medalless machine 15014 to be different from the number of medals when the "Medal Loan" button is touched. This process causes a consumption completion notification to be sent to the card server 15100, and a consumed medal count notification to be sent to the HCBOX 15050.

The ON/OFF of the automatic lending function and the number of lent/paid medals are set in advance. These setting values are stored in, for example, the card server 15100, and are obtained from the card server 15100 when the lending unit 15024 is started and stored in the lending unit 15024. The setting value of the number of lent/paid medals is also used to determine the number of medals to be provided to the medalless machine 15014 when the "medal lending" button or the "payout of owned medals" button is touched in the operation menu 16001. The setting value of the number of lent/paid medals can also be set to a different number for each lending unit 15024 (i.e., for each medalless machine 15014). For example, a different number of lent/paid medals can be set for each model or genre of the corresponding medalless machine 15014, or for other specified classifications, or individually.

In addition, the number of medals loaned and paid out when the "Medal Loan" button or "Own Medal Payout" button is touched can be set to be different from the number of medals loaned and paid out used in the automatic loan function.

If the conditions are met in step S5393 (YES in step S5393), the process proceeds to step S5400, where the inserted bill is ejected from the bill slot 15301 and, if necessary, an error message such as "Charging more than 10,000 yen is not possible" is displayed on the operation unit 15409.

If the conditions are not met in step S5398 (NO in step S5398) or after steps S5399 and S5401, the process ends without doing anything. When determining the denomination in step S5392, the bill validator 15407 also determines whether the bill is genuine. If the bill validator 15407 determines that the bill is genuine, and if the lending unit 15024 is of a bill storage type, it stores the bill in the bill storage section, and if the lending unit 15024 is of a bill transport type, it sends the bill to the transport path and controls the bill transport machine so that the bill is transported to the outside. If the bill validator 15407 cannot identify the inserted bill or determines that the bill is not genuine, it discharges the bill, for example, from the bill insertion slot 15301.

The lending unit 15024 of this embodiment can also be equipped with a ticket issuing function that allows a deposit to be made by bringing an IC card (electronic money card) linked to electronic money close to the touch guide mark 15304 (see FIG. 255) and reading the data stored in the IC data with the contactless IC card RW 15406 (see FIG. 256).

In this case, the lending unit 15024 can be configured to withdraw the above-mentioned lending and dispensing consumption amount from the electronic money each time the electronic money card is touched to the touch guide mark 15304, and provide the medalless machine 15014 with a predetermined number of medals (number of lending and dispensing medals) corresponding to that consumption amount. In such a configuration, the player can provide the medalless machine 15014 with a predetermined number of medals simply by holding (touching) the electronic money card over the lending unit 15024.

When issuing a ticket, the player can select the deposit amount displayed on the operation unit 15409 and then hold the electronic money card over the lending unit 15024. For example, the player can select the desired deposit amount from displays such as the "500 yen" button, the "1000 yen" button, and the "2000 yen" button, and then touch the electronic money card to the touch guide mark 15304, so that the selected deposit amount is added to the balance of the lending unit 15024. In addition, as described above, the automatic lending function can be set to ON at this time, and when the electronic money card is touched, a predetermined consumption amount (lend payout consumption amount) can be consumed from the balance of the lending unit 15024, and a predetermined number of medals (lend payout medal number) corresponding to the consumption amount can be lent to the medal-less machine 15014.

In addition, when depositing money into the lending unit 15024 using an electronic money card or the like, the system can be configured so that a pre-defined amount (e.g., 1,000 yen) is added to the balance of the lending unit 15024 without the player having to specify the amount to be deposited.

So far, the ticket issuing function has been explained with reference to FIG. 284, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 also applies to the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023, and by inserting bills, the balance of the memory section 15404 of the managed gaming machine compatible lending unit 15023 is credited, and a predetermined number of balls (gaming balls) can be provided to the managed gaming machine 15013 by the automatic lending function or the "ball lending" button.

In addition, with the above-mentioned ticket issuing function, when a deposit is made by inserting a bill or the like, a predetermined number of medals are automatically loaned to the medalless machine 15014, so that the player can skip the loan process (for example, the process of touching the "medal loan" button) once after the deposit process, which is convenient for the player. In addition, for the gaming facility, the number of medals automatically provided to the medalless machine 15014 after the deposit process can be adjusted, so that the number of medals consumed by the player and the way the game progresses can be partially controlled.

In addition, in this embodiment, deposits using paper money and electronic money cards are exemplified, but the deposit method is not limited to these methods, and various other deposit methods can be adopted.

In this embodiment, as described above, a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or other IC card can be used as a visitor card or a member card, and a predetermined amount can be inserted into the lending unit 15024 using a smartphone or the like. For example, when a player uses a smartphone or the like instead of inserting bills from the bill insertion slot 15301, a message such as "Please touch your smartphone with your IC card" is displayed on the operation unit 15409, and when the player brings the smartphone or the like close to (or touches) the touch guide mark 15304, information regarding the amount (electronic money, WEB money, etc.) stored in the smartphone or the like is read, and the predetermined amount is added to the lending unit 15024. The amount added to the lending unit 15024 here may be an amount set in advance, or may be an amount specified by the player using the operation unit 15409. Then, a message such as "XX yen has been added to the balance" is displayed on the operation unit 15409.

[1-18. Donation function]
Next, the donation function of the lending unit 15024 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 285 and Fig. 286. Fig. 285 is a conceptual diagram for explaining a situation in which "end balls" are generated by playing with the lending unit 15024. Fig. 286 is a conceptual diagram for explaining a system configuration when a donation is made in this embodiment.

The donation function in this embodiment allows the player to instruct the player to donate medals stored in the rental unit 15024. Also, the donation function in this embodiment allows the player to instruct the settlement machine 15080 or other device to donate medals read from a visitor card or the like.

Now, referring to FIG. 285, we will explain how medals are managed in the lending unit 15024 and the medalless machine 15014 when playing on the medalless machine 15014 (i.e., how data representing the number of medals is stored).

In the lending unit 15024 shown in FIG. 285, a bill is first inserted and the balance becomes 1000 yen, and then the "medal lending" button is touched on the operation menu 16001 (see FIG. 260) displayed on the operation unit 15409. If the number of medals lent out in one medal lending is set to 50 according to the "number of medals paid out for lending" described above, the balance is consumed and 50 medals (worth 1000 yen) are provided to the medalless machine 15014, and the balance stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 becomes 0.

In the medal-less machine 15014, to which 50 medals have been provided from the lending unit 15024, these medals are managed as stored medals (so-called credits), and the number of stored medals increases from 0 to 50. If the player now presses the "MAX BET" button for one game, three medals are consumed, and the number of stored medals decreases from 50 to 47. The player then operates the start lever and stops the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this example, it is assumed that a "jackpot" occurs at this point, and 102 medals are obtained as a result of that game. The number of stored medals then increases from 47 to 149.

If the player subsequently plays the medal-less machine 15014 repeatedly, three of the stored medals will be consumed each time. In this case, since there is no win during the game (the number of medals won is zero), the number of stored medals will ultimately be two. This means that the player cannot play a new game again, and two of the stored medals will remain unused.

Most medal-less machines are slot machines that are designed to only accept three medals, and if there are two or fewer medals stored, the medals cannot be used up. As described above, the medal-less machine 15014 of this embodiment has a "1 BET" button, and one game can be played with one medal, but such games using one medal are only possible in certain circumstances, and generally, medals less than three will remain unused (indicated by the X in the bottom right of Figure 285).

The one or two medals remaining as stored medals in the medalless machine 15014 can be moved by the player to the medals held in the lending unit 15024 by pressing the "Count" button on the medalless machine 15014. If the player has inserted a membership card into the lending unit 15024, the player can touch the "Return card" button and those few medals will be stored as medals held on the membership card, allowing the player to use the medals held on the membership card to play on other gaming machines.

However, if a player who does not have a membership card has medals in the rental unit 15024, even if the player touches the "Card Return" button, the visitor card will not be ejected unless the number of medals held is a specified number or more, and the player will not be able to use the medals on another gaming machine. The specifications for this control when returning the card are as described with reference to FIG. 265. For example, the visitor card will not be ejected unless there are a number of medals equivalent to the price of the card. The number of medals held to eject a visitor card (the specified number mentioned above) is a number greater than 2.

Therefore, even if a player who does not have a membership card moves the one or two medals remaining in the medalless machine 15014 to the lending unit 15024, the player cannot use them elsewhere. Therefore, a player who has no intention of resuming play at that machine by inserting new bills has no motivation to go to the trouble of moving the one or two medals remaining in the medalless machine 15014 to the lending unit 15024, and as a result, the one or two medals often remain in the medalless machine 15014. Also, for example, when the player's own medals are provided to the medalless machine 15014 by touching the "pay out owned medals" button, even if one or two medals remain in the lending unit 15024 as the remaining medals, this situation tends to be left unattended because there is no way to use the medals.

For the gaming establishment, if one or two medals are left as reserve medals in the medalless machine 15014 or as held medals in the rental unit 15024, the next player will be unable to use the medalless machine 15014 (or will be hesitant to use it), resulting in a drop in operating rate, which is an undesirable situation, and therefore staff etc. need to reset this situation (clear the excess balls) as soon as possible.

Clearing leftover balls by staff etc. leads to an increased workload. In other words, if there are no stored medals in the medalless machine 15014, the staff must use the key to display the maintenance mode menu (see FIG. 274) and then touch the "clear leftover balls" button, and if there are stored medals in the medalless machine 15014, the staff must press the "count" button on the medalless machine 15014 to move the stored medals to the medals held in the lending unit 15024, and then touch the "clear leftover balls" button in maintenance mode.

In such a situation, this embodiment provides a configuration that allows players to donate one or two of the unused medals described above.

As shown in FIG. 286, in this embodiment, a "Donate" button is provided in the operation menu 16001 of the operation unit 15409 in the lending unit 15024, allowing the player to donate medals. For example, if there are no medals remaining in the medalless machine 15014, the player touches the "Donate" button in that state to instruct the lending unit 15024 to donate the medals it holds. On the other hand, if there are medals remaining in the medalless machine 15014, the player presses the "Count" button on the medalless machine 15014 to move the stored medals to the medals held in the lending unit 15024, and then touches the "Donate" button to instruct the lending unit 15024 to donate the medals it holds.

In this case, when the "Donate" button is touched on the operation menu 16001, a donation menu may be displayed, where the number of medals to be donated and the donation destination may be specified, and then the "OK" button may be touched to execute the donation. The number of medals to be donated may be, for example, a number specified by the player, a predetermined number, or a number selected from a number of predetermined numbers. The donation destination may be, for example, an organization, institution, group, or other organization that receives donations, or may be a donation destination specified by the gaming establishment.

In addition, when instructing a donation on the menu displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the lending unit 15024, if there are medals remaining in the medalless machine 15014, a message may be displayed instructing the user to press the "Count" button on the medalless machine 15014 before making a donation, and the user may be configured so that donations cannot be made until the "Count" button on the medalless machine 15014 is pressed to reset the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 to zero. This configuration can further reduce the possibility of medals being left in the medalless machine 15014, thereby reducing the workload of game arcade staff and the like.

The configuration can also allow players to make donations when they can take out medals from the rental unit 15024 using a visitor card. As described above, if there are a predetermined number or more of medals in the rental unit 15024, those medals can be moved to the visitor card and taken out, and if there are medals of a different rental type in the visitor card inserted by the player, those medals can be taken out even if there are fewer than the predetermined number of medals in the player's current possession.

In this way, even if a player can take out the medals held in the rental unit 15024 using a visitor card, depending on the number of medals held, they may not be able to be exchanged for special prizes and may have to be exchanged for small prizes. In such cases, some arcades allow players to donate the small prizes exchanged (such as sweets), but such small prizes require a certain amount of storage space and they also need to be aware of their expiration date, so cash is easier to handle for the recipient of the donation.

In this regard, in this embodiment, even in such a case, donations can be made in cash. For example, as shown in FIG. 286, the player can instruct the player to make a donation by inserting the visitor card into the settlement machine 15080, specifying the number of medals to be donated and the donation destination on the donation instruction screen, and touching the "Donate" button, etc. As with the above, various patterns are possible for the number of medals to be donated and the donation destination. In this case, the donation instruction screen may be configured to allow the player to specify which loan type of medals to donate (multiple loan types can also be specified). With this configuration, the settlement machine 15080 can settle the cash according to the balance stored in the visitor card, and can instruct the player to donate the medals they have.

In addition, in FIG. 286, an example of making a donation by reading the visitor card with the settlement machine 15080 is shown, but donation instructions can be given using various gaming devices in the amusement arcade, such as the ball handling machine 15090 and the prize exchange POS terminal. Furthermore, it is possible to read the data on the membership card with these devices and instruct the player to donate the medals and saved medals of each lending type associated with the membership card. As with the above, various patterns can be considered for the number of medals to be donated, the donation destination, and the lending type. For example, when the number of medals held is read from the visitor card at the prize exchange POS terminal, it is possible to specify the exchange of general prizes and to donate the remaining fractional amount, or to reduce the number of general prizes and donate the remaining medals, or to make a donation with all medals held.

As shown in FIG. 286, when a donation instruction is given via the lending unit 15024, the settlement machine 15080, etc., "donated medal number data" including the number of donated medals related to the donation instructed by the player is sent to, for example, the card server 15100. This "donated medal number data" also includes the lending type corresponding to the medals to be donated, and may also include the donation destination described above.

When the card server 15100 receives "donation medal count data" from the lending unit 15024, settlement machine 15080, etc., it tallies the data at a specified time, for example, after closing time or once a month, and converts the medal count into an amount according to the lending type corresponding to each donated medal count. The conversion rate at this time is, for example, the exchange rate for special prizes (cash). In addition, it generates transfer instruction data according to the corresponding donation destination. Such transfer instruction data is generated for each donation destination, and the transfer amount can be increased or decreased as necessary (for example, by deducting transfer fees and system usage fees, or adding interest).

The card server 15100 then transmits the generated transfer instruction data to a specified financial institution server 15170, where the designated donation amount is transferred from the gaming establishment account to the donation recipient account. Note that this transfer process is merely a simple example, and for example, in the case of transfer processing at different financial institutions, the transfer instruction data is transmitted to the Zengin System, which processes domestic exchange transactions between financial institutions online.

So far, the donation function has been described with reference to Figures 285 and 286, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 also applies to the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023. However, unlike the medal-less machine 15014, the managed gaming machine 15013 does not have a situation where one or two game balls remain unused. However, the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023 may still have balls that cannot be moved to the visitor card or balls that become end balls in prize exchanges, so it is necessary to clear the end balls, and the donation function of this embodiment can effectively reduce the workload of the gaming facility staff, etc.

Note that, with conventional gaming machines (pachinko machines 15011, pachislot machines 15012), it is easy to move medals and balls (although this depends on the regulations of each gaming establishment), but with the lending unit 15024 and the managed gaming machine lending unit 15023, it is not possible to move leftover medals/balls, and if these are left unattended, the gaming establishment staff must clear the leftover balls.

In addition, in the case of conventional gaming machines (pachinko machine 15011, pachislot machine 15012), if a donation box was installed in the gaming parlor, donations could be easily made by placing leftover balls in the box. However, the lending unit 15024 and the managed gaming machine lending unit 15023 do not allow such donations, and the donation function of this embodiment can solve this problem.

The donation function described above also allows the player to give instructions to donate one or two unused medals, thereby satisfying the player's desire to contribute to society. Furthermore, by the player donating one or two medals remaining in the rental unit 15024 or medal-less machine 15014, the workload (related to clearing leftover balls) of the game arcade staff can be reduced.

Furthermore, the player may donate a number of medals, for example, a number specified by the player, a predetermined number, or a number selected from multiple predetermined numbers. This configuration allows the player to make a more meaningful contribution to society.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, when the "Donation" button is touched in the operation menu 16001, if there are medals remaining in the medalless machine 15014, the donation cannot be made as is, and a message to the effect that the donation should be made after pressing the "Count" button on the medalless machine 15014 is displayed. In this case, the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024, for example, accesses the medalless machine 15014 to obtain the number of medals stored (storage information) in the medalless machine 15014, and displays the above message if the number of medals stored is a predetermined number (for example, if it is not 0). However, for example, when the medalless machine 15014 determines at a predetermined timing that the above-mentioned number of medals stored is a predetermined number, it can also transmit a specific flag (storage information) to the lending unit 15024, and as a result, the lending unit 15024 can be controlled to display the above message based on the flag. In this way, various forms of storage information can be considered as the storage information that the lending unit 15024 obtains from the medalless machine 15014.

[1-19. Refill medal function]
Next, the automatic medal replenishment function of the lending unit 15024 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 287 to Fig. 290. Fig. 287 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the automatic medal replenishment function of the lending unit 15024. Fig. 288 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing the automatic medal replenishment function shown in Fig. 287. Fig. 289 is a conceptual diagram for explaining another automatic medal replenishment function in the lending unit 15024. Fig. 290 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing the automatic medal replenishment function shown in Fig. 289.

Figure 287 shows an overview of the automatic medal replenishment function, which automatically controls the replenishment of medals (reserved medals) to the medalless machine 15014 based on the balance stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024.

As shown in FIG. 287, when a player inserts a bill into the bill slot 15301 of the lending unit 15024 (for example, inserting two 1,000 yen bills in succession), 2000 yen is stored as the balance in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024. At this time, if the automatic lending function described above is set to ON, the automatic lending function at the time of ticket issuance becomes effective, and the "number of lent and paid-out medals" (in this example, 50 medals (worth 1000 yen)) is automatically lent to the medalless machine 15014. The medalless machine 15014, which receives the data on the number of lent and paid-out medals, manages the medals as stored medals (so-called credits), and the number of stored medals increases from 0 to 50.

When the player presses the "MAX BET" button on the medal-less machine 15014 for one play, three medals are consumed and the number of stored medals is reduced from 50 to 47. The player then operates the start lever and stops the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R. If this play is then repeated, three stored medals will be consumed each time, and in this example, let's say there was no win. Then, the number of stored medals will be reduced to 20.

If the automatic medal replenishment function is set to ON, when the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 falls to 20, the lending unit 15024 detects this and automatically replenishes (lends) the "number of medals to be paid out for lending" (in this example, 50 medals (worth 1,000 yen)) to the medalless machine 15014 from the balance stored in the memory unit 15404. The medalless machine 15014 receives the data on the number of medals to be paid out for lending and manages these medals as retained medals, and as a result, the number of retained medals increases from 20 to 70 (three medals are then immediately consumed through play, bringing the number of retained medals to 67).

If the player continues to play after that, three medals will be consumed at a time, leaving 19 medals, and then the number will drop below 20 again. However, since the balance in the lending unit 15024 is now zero, the medals cannot be automatically replenished, and the number of medals stored will decrease with further play, until finally only one medal remains.

Figure 288 shows a flowchart showing the procedure for processing the automatic medal replenishment function described in Figure 287. As described above, when the automatic medal replenishment function is set to ON, this process is started when the lending unit 15024 monitors the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 and the number of medals stored falls to 20 or less. However, for the sake of convenience, it is assumed here that this process starts when the player starts playing and the "medal lending" button or the "medal payout" button is touched for the first time, or when the automatic lending function is ON and a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 15301 (in Figure 287, 50 medals are provided by the automatic lending function when the bill is inserted).

First, in step S5421 of FIG. 288, the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024 determines whether the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 exceeds 20, and repeats this determination until it exceeds 20 (NO in step S5421). If it exceeds 20 (YES in step S5421), then in step S5422, it determines whether the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 is 20 or less, and repeats this determination until it is 20 or less (NO in step S5422). If it is 20 or less (YES in step S5422), then in step S5423, it determines whether the balance stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount.

Here, the predetermined amount is, for example, an amount corresponding to a preset "number of loaned medals to be paid out." If it is determined in step S5423 that the balance is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount (YES in step S5423), then in step S5424, the number of medals equal to the predetermined amount (for example, as shown in FIG. 287, the predetermined amount is 1000 yen and the number of medals is 50) is provided to the medal-less machine 15014's stored medals (data representing the number of medals is sent to the medal-less machine 15014). Note that here, if the balance is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount, the number of medals equal to the predetermined amount (for example, the "number of loaned medals to be paid out") is replenished from the balance. However, even if the balance is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals that can be provided is calculated so as to use up as much of the predetermined amount as possible, and these medals can be provided to the medal-less machine 15014.

Next, in step S5425, a predetermined amount is subtracted from the balance stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 (for example, as shown in FIG. 287, the 1,000 yen used by automatic replenishment is subtracted from the balance, leaving 0 yen). After step S5425, or if it is determined in step S5423 that the balance is less than the predetermined amount (NO in step S5423), the process returns to step S5421 and a determination is made as to whether the number of stored medals exceeds 20.

In the case shown in FIG. 287, the stored medals are replenished by 50 medals in step S5424, so when the process returns to step S5421, a YES judgment is immediately made, and in step S5422, the process waits for the number of stored medals to fall to 20 or less.

In this embodiment, the number of stored medals exceeds 20 at one time, and then the stored medals are automatically replenished when it falls below 20; however, this setting of the number of stored medals is merely an example, and the stored medals can be replenished at various other times. Also, here, the number of medals replenished to the stored medals at one time is set as the "number of lent and paid out medals" used when the "medal loan" button or "held medal payout" button is touched, or when the automatic loan function is ON, but it is also possible to determine a unique number of replenished medals as part of the automatic medal replenishment function.

The ON/OFF of the automatic medal replenishment function and the number of medals to be lent and paid out related to this function can be set in advance. These setting values are stored in the card server 15100, for example, and are obtained from the card server 15100 when the lending unit 15024 is started and stored in the lending unit 15024. The setting value of the number of medals to be lent and paid out can also be set to a different number for each lending unit 15024. For example, a different number of medals to be lent and paid out can be set for each model or genre of the corresponding medalless machine 15014, or for other specified classifications. The ON/OFF of the automatic medal replenishment function and the number of medals to be lent and paid out related to this function can also be configured to be set by the player himself, for example, using the operation menu 16001 displayed on the operation unit 15409.

Figure 289 shows an overview of the automatic medal replenishment function, which automatically replenishes medals (as stored medals) to the medalless machine 15014 from the balance stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 or from medals in hand.

As shown in FIG. 289, in the initial state, the lending unit 15024 has a balance of 2,000 yen and 80 retained medals stored in the memory unit 15404. Here, the "Pay out retained medals" button is touched in the operation menu 16001 of the operation unit 15409, and the number of medals set in the number of lending and paying out medals (50 in this case) is provided to the medalless machine 15014 (i.e., data representing 50 medals is sent to the medalless machine 15014), and the medalless machine 15014 manages the medals as stored medals (so-called credits), and the number of stored medals increases from 0 to 50.

When the player presses the "MAX BET" button on the medal-less machine 15014 for one play, three medals are consumed and the number of stored medals is reduced from 50 to 47. The player then operates the start lever and stops the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R. If this play is then repeated, three stored medals will be consumed each time, and in this example, let's say there was no win. Then, the number of stored medals will be reduced to 20.

If the automatic medal replenishment function is set to ON, when the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 falls to 20, the lending unit 15024 detects this and attempts to automatically replenish the medalless machine 15014 with the "number of medals to be lent and paid out" (50 medals in this example) from the medals stored in the memory unit 15404. However, since only 30 medals remain in the medalless machine 15014, 30 medals are lent to the medalless machine 15014. The medalless machine 15014 receives data representing the total number of remaining medals, 30 medals, and manages these medals as retained medals, and as a result, the number of retained medals increases from 20 to 50 (then, 3 medals are immediately consumed through play, and the number of retained medals becomes 47).

After that, as play continues, three medals are consumed at a time, leaving 20 medals remaining again. At that time, the lending unit 15024 detects this and automatically replenishes (lends) the "number of lent payout medals" (50 medals (1,000 yen) in this example) from the balance stored in the memory unit 15404 to the medalless machine 15014, and the medalless machine 15014, having received the data on the number of lent payout medals, manages those medals as stored medals, and as a result, the number of stored medals increases from 20 to 70 (three medals are then immediately consumed through play, leaving the number of stored medals at 67).

In this way, in this embodiment, if the lending unit 15024 has medals on hand, it first replenishes the medalless machine 15014 with the medals on hand, and when the number of medals on hand reaches 0, if there is a balance, it then uses the balance to replenish medals.

After that, as the game continues, the stored medals are consumed by three at a time, leaving 19 medals, and the number is again below 20 medals. At that time, the lending unit 15024 detects this and automatically replenishes (lending) the "number of loaned dispensing medals" (50 medals (1,000 yen) in this example) to the medalless machine 15014 from the balance stored in the memory unit 15404. The medalless machine 15014, which has received the data on the number of loaned dispensing medals, manages the medals as stored medals, and as a result, the number of stored medals increases from 19 to 69 (immediately after that, three medals are consumed through play, and the number of stored medals becomes 66). After that, as the game continues, the stored medals are consumed by three at a time, leaving 18 medals, and the number is again below 20 medals. However, at this time, the balance in the lending unit 15024 is 0, so the stored medals cannot be automatically replenished, and the number of stored medals decreases with subsequent play, and finally the number of stored medals becomes 0.

Figure 290 shows a flowchart showing the procedure for processing the automatic medal replenishment function described in Figure 289. As described above, when the automatic medal replenishment function is set to ON, this process monitors the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 in the lending unit 15024, and is started when the number of medals stored falls below 20. However, for the sake of convenience, it is assumed here that this process starts when the player starts playing and the "medal lending" button or "medal payout" button is touched for the first time, or when the automatic lending function is ON and a bill is inserted into the bill slot 15301 (in Figure 289, the "medal payout" button is touched and the number of medals stored increases from 0 to 50).

First, in step S5441 of FIG. 290, the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024 determines whether the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 exceeds 20, and repeats this determination until it exceeds 20 (NO in step S5441). If it exceeds 20 (YES in step S5441), then in step S5442, it determines whether the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 is 20 or less, and repeats this determination until it is 20 or less (NO in step S5442). If it is 20 or less (YES in step S5442), then in step S5443, it determines whether there are any medals stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 (i.e., whether it is greater than 0).

If the number of medals held is greater than 0 (YES in step S5443), in step S5448, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 50 medals as shown in FIG. 289) is provided to the medalless machine 15014's stored medals (data indicating the number of medals is sent to the medalless machine 15014). Note that if there is not the predetermined number of medals, only a certain number is provided to the medalless machine 15014's stored medals.

Next, in step S5449, a predetermined number is subtracted from the number of medals held stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 (for example, as shown in FIG. 289, the 30 medals used by automatic replenishment are subtracted from the number of medals held, leaving 0 medals remaining (however, in this case, the remaining 30 medals are subtracted, not the predetermined number)). After step S5449, the process returns to step S5441 to determine whether the number of medals held exceeds 20.

If it is determined in step S5443 that the number of medals held stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is 0 (NO in step S5443), it is determined in step S5444 whether the balance is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount.

Here, the predetermined amount is, for example, an amount corresponding to a preset "number of loaned medals to be paid out." If it is determined in step S5444 that the balance is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount (YES in step S5444), then in step S5445, the number of medals equal to the predetermined amount (for example, as shown in FIG. 289, the predetermined amount is 1000 yen and the number of medals is 50) is provided to the medal-less machine 15014's stored medals (data representing the number of medals is sent to the medal-less machine 15014). Note that here, if the balance is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount, the number of medals equal to the predetermined amount (for example, the "number of loaned medals to be paid out") is replenished from the balance. However, even if the balance is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals that can be provided is calculated so as to use up as much of the predetermined amount as possible, and these medals can be provided to the medal-less machine 15014.

Next, in step S5446, a predetermined amount is subtracted from the balance stored in the memory unit 15404 of the lending unit 15024 (for example, as shown in FIG. 289, the 1,000 yen used in the first automatic replenishment is subtracted from the balance leaving 1,000 yen, and the 1,000 yen used in the second automatic replenishment is subtracted from the balance leaving 0 yen). After step S5446, the process returns to step S5441 to determine whether the number of stored medals exceeds 20.

In the case shown in FIG. 289, the number of stored medals is (basically) replenished to 50 medals by steps S5448 and S5445, so when the process returns to step S5441, a YES judgment is immediately made, and in step S5442, the process waits for the number of stored medals to fall to 20 or less.

In this embodiment, unlike the examples in Figures 287 and 289, when the lending unit 15024 has a balance and medals, it first uses all of the medals it has and then replenishes from the balance, but this can be done in any order, and it is also possible to replenish from the medal with the largest remaining value, or to replenish alternately. Also, when a player plays using a membership card, the saved medals can be used to replenish the stored medals. In this case, a specified number of medals are provided to the medalless machine 15014 from the saved medals, just as when "Replay saved medals" is touched on the operation menu 16001 displayed on the operation unit 15409.

In addition, in the case where the lending unit 15024 has a mixture of balance and saved medals, possessed medals and saved medals, or balance, possessed medals and saved medals, the priority of which of these medals is to be provided to the medalless machine 15014 can be set in advance to be fixed or adjusted according to specified conditions.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stored medals are automatically replenished when the number of stored medals exceeds 20 and then falls below 20, but this setting of the number of stored medals is merely an example, and the stored medals can be replenished at various other times. Also, here, the number of medals replenished to the stored medals at one time is set to the "number of lent and paid out medals" used when the "medal loan" button or "held medal payout" button is touched, or when the automatic loan function is ON, but it is also possible to determine a unique number of replenished medals as part of the automatic stored medal replenishment function.

The ON/OFF of the automatic medal replenishment function and the number of medals to be lent and paid out related to this function can be set in advance. These setting values are stored, for example, in the card server 15100, and are obtained from the card server 15100 when the lending unit 15024 is started and stored in the lending unit 15024. The setting value for the number of medals to be lent and paid out can also be set to a different number for each lending unit 15024. For example, a different number of medals to be lent and paid out can be set for each model or genre of the corresponding medalless machine 15014, or for other specified classifications.

The automatic medal replenishment function for stored medals can be turned on or off, and the number of medals lent out and paid out for this function can be configured to be set by the player himself, for example, using the operation menu 16001 displayed on the operation unit 15409. The player can also set different numbers of medals lent out and paid out for each of the balance, possessed medals, and saved medals. The player can also set an upper limit (for example, up to 60% of possessed medals can be used for the automatic replenishment function) and a lower limit (for example, up to 1,000 possessed medals can be used for the automatic replenishment function) for the number of medals available (the amount of money corresponding to the number of medals) for each of the balance, possessed medals, and saved medals for the automatic medal replenishment function for stored medals.

You can also selectively specify which of your balance, medals you have, and medals you want to use for the automatic replenishment function, or which ones you want to use.

So far, the automatic medal replenishment function has been explained with reference to Figures 287 to 290, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 can be similarly applied to the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023. For example, the balance, held balls, and saved balls stored in the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023 are provided as saved balls for the managed gaming machine 15013 under specified conditions.

In addition, with the above-mentioned automatic medal replenishment function, when the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 falls below 20, for example, the lending unit 15024 automatically provides a predetermined number of medals, so that the player does not need to take the trouble of touching "medal lending" in the operation menu 16001 when the number of medals stored becomes low, improving convenience. In addition, it is possible to set a priority order for which value information to consume and provide medals to the medalless machine 15014 among the value information such as the balance (amount and number of medals), the number of medals held, and the number of medals stored that can be managed and stored by the lending unit 15024, and it is possible to set at least one of the upper and lower limits of use for each value of value information, so that overspending and addiction can be effectively prevented.

In addition, the terms "automatic" and "automatically controlled" in the automatic replenishment function are intended to mean that the automatic control is used even when a gaming device such as the rental unit 15024 performs a certain judgment or other process as a result of some operation being performed by a player or administrator.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 288 etc., the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024, for example, accesses the medalless machine 15014 to obtain the number of medals stored (storage information) in the medalless machine 15014 and determines whether the number of stored medals satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, whether it exceeds 20). However, for example, the medalless machine 15014 may determine whether the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied at a predetermined timing, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied, send a specific flag (storage information) to the lending unit 15024, so that the lending unit 15024 ultimately determines whether the number of stored medals satisfies the predetermined condition. In this way, various forms of storage information can be considered for the lending unit 15024 to acquire from the medalless machine 15014.

[1-20. Business status update function]
Next, the business status update function of the gaming system 15001 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 291. Fig. 291 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing of the business status update function in the gaming system 15001, and shows the processing of two lending units (15024-1, 15024-2) and the card server 15100 in parallel.

Note that in FIG. 291, the processing of two rental units (15024-1, 15024-2) is shown, but this is an example for the purpose of easy understanding. In reality, for example, such processing related to the card server 15100 is performed for all rental units 15024 placed in an amusement facility.

As shown in FIG. 291, when it is time for the gaming establishment to open, the card server 15100 enters an open state and executes an opening process (step S5461). Here, the opening process of the card server 15100 controls the two rental units (15024-1, 15024-2) to transition from a closed state to an open state (see FIG. 259).

In the store opening process, card server 15100 first sends an opening instruction notification (client request to update business status from closed to open) to rental unit 15024-1 and rental unit 15024-2 respectively (step S5461a), and then receives opening instruction responses sent from rental unit 15024-1 and rental unit 15024-2 (step S5461b). The opening instruction notification includes, for example, request type = business status update, and server status (including opening number, open flag = ON).

When the rental unit 15024-1 receives an open store instruction from the card server 15100 in step S5462, in response to this open store instruction, it sends an open store instruction response to the card server 15100 in step S5463, and then transitions from a closed state to an open state in step S5464.

Similarly, rental unit 15024-2 also receives an open store instruction from card server 15100 in step S5465, and in response to this open store instruction, sends an open store instruction response to card server 15100 in step S5466, and then transitions from a closed state to an open state in step S5467.

When it is time for the gaming establishment to close, the card server 15100 enters a closed state and executes a closing process (step S5468). During this closing process, the two rental units (15024-1, 15024-2) are each controlled to transition from an open state to a closed state (see FIG. 259).

In the closing process, card server 15100 first sends a closing instruction notification (client request to update business status from open to closed) to rental unit 15024-1 and rental unit 15024-2 respectively (step S5468a), and then receives closing instruction responses sent from rental unit 15024-1 and rental unit 15024-2 (step S5468b). The closing instruction notification includes, for example, request type = business status update, and server status (including open store number, closed flag = ON).

When the rental unit 15024-1 receives a closing instruction from the card server 15100 in step S5469, in response to this closing instruction, it sends a closing instruction response to the card server 15100 in step S5470, and then transitions from an open state to a closed state in step S5471.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 291, after the rental unit 15024-2 transitions to the open store state in step S5467, for some reason it is in an offline state and unable to communicate with the card server 15100. In step S5468a, if the closing instruction notice sent to the rental unit 15024-2 cannot be sent normally, or if there is no closing instruction response from the rental unit 15024-2 for a specified period of time, the card server 15100 detects that an abnormality has occurred in the rental unit 15024-2 and communication is impossible (offline state). Note that, as described below, the card server 15100 is supposed to receive device status notices from the rental unit 15024 at specified time intervals, so it may be possible to detect the offline state of the rental unit 15024-2 before the timing of sending the closing instruction notice.

When the rental unit 15024-2 recovers from the abnormal state and starts up normally, it sends a communication start notification to the card server 15100 in step S5472, as shown in FIG. 291. When the card server 15100 receives the communication start notification from the rental unit 15024-2 in step S5468c, it sends a communication start response to the rental unit 15024-2 in step S5468d. This communication start response includes, for example, the server status (including the opening number and closed flag = ON).

When the rental unit 15024-2 receives a communication start response from the card server 15100 in step S5473, it transitions from an open state to a closed state in step S5474.

In this way, in the gaming system 15001, in a "business status mismatch" situation where the lending unit 15024-2 is started and sends a communication start notification while the card server 15100 is in the closing process, the synchronization process shown in FIG. 291 (i.e., a series of processes such as steps S5468c, S5468d, S5472, S5473, and S5474 to match the business status of both) is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned synchronization process is also performed when the opening numbers managed by both the card server 15100 and the lending unit 15024 do not match. The opening number is a number that is counted up by one when, for example, the card server 15100 or the lending unit 15024 transitions to an open status.

So far, the business status update function has been explained with reference to FIG. 291, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 can be similarly applied to the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023. For example, the above-mentioned business status update function can be realized between the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023 and multiple managed gaming machines 15013.

[1-21. Setting update function]
Next, the setting update function of the gaming system 15001 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 292. Fig. 292 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing the setting update function in the gaming system 15001, in which the processing of the lending unit 15024 and the card server 15100 are shown in parallel.

Note that while FIG. 292 shows processing for one rental unit 15024, this is merely an example for the purpose of easy understanding, and in reality, for example, such processing for the card server 15100 is performed for all rental units 15024 located in an amusement facility.

Figure 292 shows how, in a gaming system 15001 in which the latest setting information is stored in the card server 15100, each lending unit 15024 obtains and updates the setting information from the card server 15100.

When the power of the rental unit 15024 is first turned on, an online initialization sequence as shown in FIG. 292 is executed only once at the beginning. In the online initialization sequence, first, in step S5491, the main CPU 15401 of the rental unit 15024 sends a communication start notification to the card server 15100. In step S5492, the card server 15100, which has received the communication start notification from the rental unit 15024, sends a communication start response corresponding to the communication start notification to the rental unit 15024.

The communication start response includes the setting update time. This setting update time is information that the card server 15100 manages and stores for each lending unit 15024, and is, for example, a relative time from a specific date and time. When any of the multiple setting values is updated in the card server 15100, the update date and time is managed as the setting update time for all of the multiple setting values.

When the lending unit 15024 receives a communication start response from the card server 15100, in step S5493, it compares the setting update time stored in the lending unit 15024 with the setting update time included in the communication start response. The setting update time of the lending unit 15024 is the time received from the card server 15100 as the setting update time of a setting value when the setting value was previously updated with data received from the card server 15100, and here, when the setting value stored in the lending unit 15024 is updated, the setting update time is updated with the setting update time received from the card server 15100.

If the setting update times of both units match (YES in step S5493), this means that no update of the setting value has occurred, and the online initialization sequence is terminated without any action. On the other hand, if the setting update times of both units do not match (NO in step S5493), a setting acquisition request is sent to the card server 15100 in step S5494 to indicate that the setting value has been updated in the card server 15100. Upon receiving the setting value acquisition request from the lending unit 15024, the card server 15100 sends a setting acquisition response corresponding to the setting acquisition request to the lending unit 15024 in step S5495.

The setting acquisition request is configured to include no information other than the data indicating this request. The setting acquisition response includes, for example, a setting update time as well as multiple setting values. At least one of these multiple setting values is updated at the setting update time, but in this example, all other setting values are also included in the setting acquisition response. This setting acquisition response can also be configured to include only the setting values that were actually updated at the setting update time.

When the lending unit 15024 receives the setting acquisition response from the card server 15100, in step S5496, it uses the setting values contained in the setting acquisition response to update the setting values and setting update time stored in the lending unit 15024, and terminates the online initialization sequence.

After that, as shown in FIG. 292, each lending unit 15024 repeatedly transmits an equipment status notification to the card server 15100 at regular intervals to notify the card server 15100 of the status of the lending unit 15024, the status of the inserted IC card, etc. (step S5497). In step S5498, the card server 15100, which receives the equipment status notification from the lending unit 15024, transmits an equipment status response corresponding to the equipment status notification to the lending unit 15024.

The device status response includes a setting update time, similar to the communication start response described above. This setting update time is information that the card server 15100 manages and stores for each rental unit 15024, and is, for example, a relative time from a specific date and time. When any of the multiple setting values is updated in the card server 15100, the update date and time is managed as the setting update time for all of the multiple setting values.

When the lending unit 15024 receives the device status response from the card server 15100, in step S5499, it compares the setting update time for multiple setting values (or one setting value) stored in the lending unit 15024 with the setting update time included in the device status response. The setting update time of the lending unit 15024 is the time received from the card server 15100 as the setting update time for a setting value when the setting value was previously updated with data received from the card server 15100, and here, when the setting value stored in the lending unit 15024 is updated, the setting update time is updated with the setting update time received from the card server 15100.

If the setting update times of both are the same (YES in step S5499), this means that no update of the setting value has occurred, so the device sends an equipment status notification without doing anything, and then, after a certain period of time has passed, executes sending of a crisis state notification again. On the other hand, if the setting update times of both are not the same (NO in step S5499), a setting acquisition request is sent to the card server 15100 in step S5500 to indicate that the setting value has been updated in the card server 15100. Upon receiving the setting value acquisition request from the lending unit 15024, the card server 15100 sends a setting acquisition response corresponding to the setting acquisition request to the lending unit 15024 in step S5501.

The setting acquisition request is configured to include no information other than the data indicating this request. The setting acquisition response includes, for example, a setting update time as well as multiple setting values. At least one of these multiple setting values is updated at the setting update time, but in this example, all other setting values are also included in the setting acquisition response. This setting acquisition response can also be configured to include only the setting values that were actually updated at the setting update time.

When the rental unit 15024 receives a setting acquisition response from the card server 15100, in step S5502, it uses the setting values included in the setting acquisition response to update the setting values and setting update time stored in the rental unit 15024, sends an equipment status notification, and then, after a certain period of time has elapsed, sends a crisis status notification again.

In this way, each of the rental units 15024 determines whether or not it is necessary to update the setting values once during the online initialization sequence when communication with the card server 15100 is started, and then multiple times (repeated at regular intervals) during the device status notification transmission process, and if necessary, updates its own setting values with the setting values obtained from the card server 15100. In this embodiment, a common process for updating the setting values to the latest version is performed during processes with different timing, namely the online initialization sequence and the device status notification transmission process.

This configuration allows the setting values for each rental unit 15024 to be updated instantly; for example, an operator or manager of an amusement facility can update the setting values of the target rental unit 15024 on the card server 15100 without having to access the rental unit 15024 (physically or via a network) to update the setting values.

So far, the setting update function has been explained with reference to FIG. 292, but as mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 can be similarly applied to the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023. For example, the above setting update function can be realized between the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023 and multiple managed gaming machines 15013.

[1-22. Interlocking maintenance function]
Next, the linked maintenance function of the gaming system 15001 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 293 to 295. The linked maintenance function is a function for executing a maintenance function in a linked mode linked with other rental units 15024. Fig. 293 shows a screen displayed on the operation unit 15409 of the rental unit 15024 when a staff member of the gaming facility transitions the rental unit 15024 to a maintenance mode by a predetermined operation. Fig. 294 is a conceptual diagram conceptually showing processing by the linked maintenance function. Fig. 295 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of the linked maintenance function in the gaming system 15001.

Figure 293 shows a maintenance mode menu 16201 that is displayed when the tab menu (linked) 16174 is touched in the maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in Figure 274. This maintenance mode menu 16201 shows a menu related to the linked maintenance function.

The maintenance mode menu 16201 displays a title display section 16202, below which are a tab menu (single) 16203, a tab menu (linked) 16204, and an "Exit" button 16205.

Furthermore, below this is a maintenance menu display area 16206 that is displayed when the tab menu (linked) 16204 is touched. This maintenance menu display area 16206 displays buttons for executing the linked maintenance function, specifically a "Eject one card" button, a "Eject specified card" button, a "Check history" button, a "RW cleaning" button, a "Banknote insertion test" button, a "Start trial play" button, a "Cancel" button, a "Operation status" button, a "Settings information" button, and a "Restart" button.

The maintenance mode menu 16201 shown in FIG. 293 is displayed when the lending unit 15024 is in a "closed state" and connected to the card server 15100 (see FIG. 259), and the "Insert banknote test" button and the "Start trial shot" button are disabled (cannot be touched), and the buttons are grayed out (for example, the brightness of the buttons is reduced and the display is changed from color to black and white (or grayscale)). In FIG. 293, this state is represented by hatching the area of the buttons.

In addition, when the lending unit 15024 is in the "open store state" and connected to the card server 15100 (see FIG. 259), only the "Cancel" button can be selected, and when the lending unit 15024 is in the "test open store state" and connected to the card server 15100 (see FIG. 259), the "Insert banknote test" button, "Start trial play" button, and "Cancel" button can be selected.

The functions executed by each button displayed in the maintenance mode menu 16201 are basically the same as those of the corresponding buttons shown in the maintenance mode menu 16171 in the stand-alone mode of FIG. 274, but in this case, when a button is touched in the maintenance mode menu 16201 displayed on the operation unit 15409 of one rental unit 15024, that function is applied to all rental units 15024 belonging to the specified group.

For example, when the "Eject one card" button is touched, one IC card for a visitor card stored in the card storage section 15323 of the rental unit 15024 is ejected from the card insertion port 15321, and this operation is performed for each rental unit 15024 belonging to the specified group. This linked maintenance function eliminates the need for game arcade staff to perform maintenance operations on each rental unit 15024, resulting in a significant reduction in the workload.

However, as in the case when the "RW Cleaning" button is touched, there are some operations that require inserting a dedicated cleaning card into each rental unit 15024 and touching the "Execute" button on the guidance display. Nevertheless, it leads to a reduction in the workload in any case, as it is possible to display the maintenance mode menu 16171 individually (by inserting a key into the keyhole 15324) and eliminate the need to touch the "RW Cleaning" button.

In addition, in the standalone mode, the test mode started by touching the "Test Play Start" button is ended by touching the "Test Play End" button, but in the linked mode, the test play mode started in multiple lending units 15024 by touching the "Test Play Start" button is ended by touching the "Cancel" button. In addition, the banknote insertion test mode started by touching the "Banknote Insertion Test" button is also ended by touching the "Cancel" button.

Furthermore, when the operation unit 15409 of each rental unit 15024 is in the linked mode and, for example, a maintenance mode menu 16171 as shown in FIG. 274 is displayed, touching the "Cancel" button (on one rental unit 15024) will end the display of that maintenance mode menu 16171 and transition to the operation menu 16001 as shown in FIG. 260. This is the same as the state in which, for example, touching the "Exit" button 16175 is simulated on the maintenance mode menu 16171 in FIG. 274.

Figure 294 illustrates a card server 15100 and multiple rental units 15024 connected to it. Note that in this example, the display of the medal-less machines 15014 connected to each rental unit 15024 has been omitted. The rental units 15024 in Figure 294 are rental units (15024-1a to 15024-1d) with row ID = 1, rental units (15024-2a to 15024-2d) with row ID = 2, and rental units (24-3a to 24-3d) with row ID = 3.

In the example of FIG. 253, multiple medal-less machines 15014 are arranged on one island, and a corresponding lending unit 15024 is connected to each medal-less machine 15014. In one island, multiple pairs of medal-less machines 15014 and corresponding lending units 15024 are arranged in a row, and another pair is arranged back-to-back in a row. The above-mentioned row IDs refer to such rows, and in the example shown in FIG. 294, island A is configured to include a pair (a pair of medal-less machines 15014 and corresponding lending units 15024) belonging to row ID=1 and a pair (a pair of medal-less machines 15014 and corresponding lending units 15024) belonging to row ID=2, and the pair belonging to row ID=1 and the pair belonging to row ID=2 are arranged back-to-back. Island B is configured to include a pair belonging to row ID=3 (a pair of medalless machine 15014 and corresponding rental unit 15024) and a pair belonging to row ID=4 (a pair of medalless machine 15014 and corresponding rental unit 15024), and the pair belonging to row ID=3 and the pair belonging to row ID=4 are arranged back to back.

Figure 294 shows the processing that occurs when an instruction operation is performed from rental unit 15024-1a in this configuration (for example, touching the "Eject one card" button on the maintenance mode menu 16201 in the linked mode). When an instruction operation is performed from rental unit 15024-1a, a linked maintenance request corresponding to that instruction operation is sent to card server 15100, and card server 15100, which receives this linked maintenance request, determines that the sending rental unit 15024 is the result of an instruction operation on rental unit 15024-1a.

Next, the card server 15100 obtains the group ID of the group to which the loan unit 15024-1a belongs from the setting value stored in the card server 15100 itself, and further identifies the loan unit 15024 that belongs to that group ID. Here, it is assumed that groups are configured by row ID, and the loan unit 15024 with row ID = 1 belongs to the group with group ID = 1, the loan unit 15024 with row ID = 2 belongs to the group with group ID = 2, the loan unit 15024 with row ID = 3 belongs to the group with group ID = 3, and the loan unit 15024 with row ID = 4 belongs to the group with group ID = 4.

Then, the card server 15100 uses the linked maintenance function to send a client request (related to linked maintenance) to the rental units (15024-1a to 15024-1d) in the same group as the rental unit 15024-1a (i.e., group ID = 1), and as a result, each rental unit 15024 ejects one card in response to the instruction operation of the rental unit 15024-1a. This is the same process as when the "eject one card" button is touched on the maintenance mode menu 16201 of each rental unit (15024-1a to 15024-1d). In this way, by using the linked maintenance function, it is possible to omit the operation of displaying the maintenance mode menu 16171 individually (by inserting a key into the keyhole 15324) and touching the "eject one card" button by simply performing an operation on one rental unit 15024, thereby reducing the workload of the game arcade staff, etc.

In addition, for a rental unit 15024 (for example, rental unit 15024-1a in this case) for which an instruction operation has been performed in linked mode by a staff member of the amusement facility, the rental unit 15024 may be operated in standalone mode by an instruction operation by the staff member of the amusement facility, rather than by a client request from the card server 15100.

This linked maintenance function causes the same processing as when the "Eject one card" button is touched to be performed on the rental units (15024-1a to 15024-1d) with group ID = 1, as described above. If there are IC cards in the card storage section 15323, the IC cards are all ejected from the card insertion slots 15321 at once, and if there are no IC cards in the card storage section 15323, a message to the effect that there are no cards to be ejected is displayed on the operation unit 15409.

In this example, each column is associated with one group (a group that enables instruction operations in the linked mode), but the group may be expanded to multiple column IDs, or may be limited to a specific lending unit 15024 in one column ID. Furthermore, lending units 15024 that belong to various column IDs may be individually selected and grouped, regardless of whether they belong to a column or not. Such associations between group IDs and lending units 15024 are managed and stored in the card server 15100, for example, as setting values, as described above.

In addition, on the operation unit of the card server 15100, the maintenance mode menu 1201 for the linked mode can be displayed, and specific linked maintenance functions can be executed by touching, for example, the "banknote insertion test" button, the "trial start" button, and the "cancel" button.

Figure 295 shows the processing flows of the card server 15100, rental unit 15024-1a, rental unit 15024-1b, and rental unit 15024-2a shown in Figure 294. First, when a staff member of the gaming facility or the like issues an instruction operation related to the linked maintenance function in the rental unit 15024-1a (for example, touching the "eject one card" button in the maintenance mode menu 1201 in the linked mode) (step S5521), in step S5522, a linked maintenance request is sent to the card server 15100.

When card server 15100 receives the linked maintenance request from lending unit 15024-1a, it responds by sending a linked maintenance response in step S5523. The linked maintenance request includes, for example, a type indicating the instruction operation described above (for example, "eject one card," which is one of the linked maintenance functions), and the linked maintenance response includes data indicating whether the request was successful. Lending unit 15024-1a receives the linked maintenance response from card server 15100 in step S5524.

The card server 15100 then, in step S5525, sends a client request corresponding to the linked maintenance response received in step S5523 to the lending unit 15024-1a, which in turn receives the client request in step S5526. This client request includes, for example, a type that represents the instruction operation described above (for example, "eject one card," which is one of the linked maintenance functions).

The lending unit 15024-1a receives the interlocking maintenance response in step S5524, and if the contents indicate successful acceptance, it goes into an interlocking wait state and waits to receive a client request from the card server 15100. If a client request cannot be received in step S5526 even after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the interlocking maintenance response in step S5524, this may indicate a fault in the card server 15100 or the network, etc., and the interlocking wait state is cancelled, and an error notification is sent to the operation unit 15409, etc.

When the lending unit 15024-1a successfully receives the client request in step S5526, it sends a client request response corresponding to the received client request to the card server 15100 in step S5527, and then executes linked maintenance processing (for example, "eject one card," which is one of the linked maintenance functions) in step S5528.

When card server 15100 receives the client request response from lending unit 15024-1a in step S5529, it sends a client request to lending unit 15024-1b, which is in the same group as lending unit 15024-1a, in step S5530. This client request, like the one sent to lending unit 15024-1a, includes a type indicating the instruction operation described above (for example, "eject one card," which is one of the linked maintenance functions).

When the lending unit 15024-1b successfully receives a client request in step S5531, it sends a client request response corresponding to the received client request to the card server 15100 in step S5532, and then executes linked maintenance processing (for example, "eject one card," which is one of the linked maintenance functions) in step S5533.

When the card server 15100 receives the client request response from the lending unit 15024-1b in step S5534, it then sends a client request to other lending units 15024 that are in the same group as the lending unit 15024-1a (in the example shown in FIG. 294, lending units 15024-1c and 15024-1d), but the other lending units 15024 are omitted here.

As described above, the rental unit 15024-1a that sent the linked maintenance request (i.e., the arcade staff or the like gave instructions in the linked mode) goes into a linkage waiting state when it receives a linked maintenance response, and then executes the linked maintenance process when it receives a client request. However, other rental units 15024 in the group (e.g., rental unit 15024-1b) execute the linked maintenance process when they receive a client request, even if they are not in a linkage waiting state.

In the example of FIG. 295, after receiving a client request response from rental unit 15024-1a, a client request is sent to rental unit 15024-1b. However, for example, in step S5525, at the same time that the client request is sent to rental unit 15024-1a, a client request may also be sent to other rental units 15024 in the group (rental units 15024-1b to 15024-1d).

In addition, although FIG. 295 shows rental unit 15024-2a, since it is not in the same group as rental unit 15024-1a, it is not affected at all by instruction operations in the linked mode on rental unit 15024-1a.

So far, we have explained the linked maintenance function with reference to Figures 293 to 295. As described above, the above configuration of the gaming system 15001 including the rental unit 15024 can be realized as a configuration of the gaming system 15001 including the managed gaming machine compatible rental unit 15023.

[1-23. Operation menu GUI control function]
Next, referring to Figures 296 and 297 in addition to Figures 260 and 261 described above, the operation menu GUI control function for the rental unit 15024 in an open state will be described.

As explained in FIG. 260, the "Medal Loan" button displayed in the operation button area 16005 of the operation menu 16001 is enabled (touch operation is possible) when the balance stored in the memory section 15404 of the loan unit 15024 is greater than 0 (i.e., when the balance displayed in the information display area 16004 is not 0).

As explained in relation to FIG. 260, the "Return Card" button displayed in the operation button area 16005 of the operation menu 16001 is enabled when a membership card is inserted through the card insertion slot 15321. Also, if the balance or number of medals stored in the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is not 0 (i.e., if at least one of the balance and number of medals displayed in the information display area 16004 is not 0), touch operation is enabled regardless of whether a visitor card is inserted or not.

As explained in relation to FIG. 260, the "Pay out held medals" button displayed in the operation button area 16005 of the operation menu 16001 is enabled when the number of held medals stored in the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is not 0 (i.e., when the number of held medals displayed in the information display area 16004 is not 0).

As explained in relation to FIG. 260, the "Pay out all medals" button displayed in the operation button area 16005 of the operation menu 16001 is enabled when the number of medals stored in the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is not 0 (i.e., when the number of medals displayed in the information display area 16004 is not 0).

As explained in relation to FIG. 260, the "Share medals" button displayed in the operation button area 16005 of the operation menu 16001 is enabled when the number of medals stored in the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (i.e., when the number of medals displayed in the information display area 16004 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number).

As explained in FIG. 260, the "First Break" button displayed in the operation button area 16005 of the operation menu 16001 is always enabled for operation.

As explained in relation to FIG. 260, the "Replay saved medals" button displayed in the operation button area 16005 of the operation menu 16001 is enabled when there are saved medals associated with the inserted membership card in the lending unit 15024. As shown in FIG. 260(B), this button is displayed in place of the "Pay out saved medals" button shown in FIG. 260(A) when there are saved medals.

In this way, each operation button displayed in operation button area 16005 of operation menu 16001 is judged as to whether its operation is valid or not according to the conditions, and if it is valid, it is (basically) displayed in high-luminance color, whereas if it is invalid, it is displayed in grayscale (low-luminance black and white) in the same position and is controlled so that it does not respond when touched.

However, even if an operation button is displayed in a high-brightness color, further conditions are checked after touching, and as a result, a message to the effect that the operation cannot be performed may be displayed in the information display area 16004. For example, the "return card" button can be touched if the balance or number of medals held stored in the memory section 15404 of the lending unit 15024 is not 0, but if the balance of the lending unit 15024 is 0 and the sum of the number of medals held in the lending unit 15024 and the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 is less than a predetermined number, for example, a message to the effect that the card cannot be returned is displayed in the information display area 16004.

Figure 296 shows the button displays of the operation menu (16001a to 16001d) for each pattern of the balance and number of medals held stored in the lending unit 15024, and the number of medals stored associated with the membership card.

In the operation menu 16001a of FIG. 296(A), the patterns of a balance (1000 yen), no owned medals, and no saved medals are shown. At this time, since there are no owned medals or saved medals, the "Pay out owned medals" button, the "Pay out all owned medals" button, and the "Share owned medals" button are all disabled (not responding when touched), and these buttons are grayed out (for example, the brightness of the button is reduced and the display is changed from color to black and white (or grayscale)). In FIG. 296(A), this state is represented by displaying the area of the button with diagonal hatching. The other buttons are enabled, and are highlighted with high-intensity color display. In FIG. 296(A), this state is represented by displaying the area of the button with no hatching.

In the operation menu 16001b in FIG. 296(B), the following patterns are shown: balance (1000 yen), possessed medals (250 medals), and no saved medals. At this time, there is a balance and possessed medals, but no saved medals, so the "Delivery possessed medals" button is displayed and all buttons are selectable. However, here, there are two ways to provide medals to the medalless machine 15014: the balance and possessed medals. In this case, the "Medal loan" button is displayed as a somewhat inconspicuous non-highlighted display (for example, a color display with a medium brightness and a whitish finish) so that providing medals using possessed medals is prioritized (recommended) over the balance. In FIG. 296(B), this state is represented by displaying the area of the button in vertical hatching. The other buttons are highlighted.

In the operation menu 16001c of FIG. 296(C), the following patterns are shown: balance (1000 yen), no owned medals, and saved medals (1000 medals). At this time, because there are saved medals, the "Replay saved medals" button is displayed, and because there are no owned medals, the "Pay out all owned medals" button and the "Share owned medals" button are disabled and are displayed with diagonal hatching. Also, here, there are two ways to provide medals to the medalless machine 15014: balance and saved medals, and in this case, the "Medal loan" button, although selectable, is displayed in a somewhat inconspicuous, unhighlighted display (here, displayed with vertical hatching) so that providing medals using saved medals is prioritized (recommended) over the balance.

In the operation menu 16001d of FIG. 296(D), the following patterns are shown: remaining balance (1000 yen), possessed medals (500 medals), and saved medals (1000 medals). At this time, since there are saved medals, the "Saved medal replay" button is displayed. Also, since there are possessed medals, the "Share possessed medals" button is enabled. Also, here, there are three ways to provide medals to the medal-less machine 15014: remaining balance, possessed medals, and saved medals. In this case, the "Saved medal replay" button is displayed instead of the "Delivery possessed medals" button, and the "Delivery all possessed medals" button is disabled, so that possessed medals cannot be used. Also, to give priority (recommendation) to providing medals using saved medals rather than the remaining balance, the "Medal loan" button is selectable, but is displayed in a somewhat inconspicuous, unhighlighted display (here, displayed with vertical line hatching).

In this way, in this embodiment, the operation buttons that can be operated in the operation menu are adjusted according to the balance, number of medals held, and number of saved medals held by the player. Furthermore, when medals can be provided in multiple ways, the operation buttons are displayed in three display modes to guide the player to perform operations in the order of saved medals, owned medals, and balance (loaning using medals). That is, the operation buttons that are prioritized (recommended) are highlighted, while operation buttons that cannot be selected are set and displayed in gray out, and further, certain operation buttons are displayed in an unhighlighted state so as to draw attention to the other highlighted operation buttons that can be selected. Note that various variations can be provided regarding the three display modes of the operation buttons and the priority order of the medal provision methods, and the embodiment shown here is merely one example.

Furthermore, when the "Hide" button for saved medals is touched in operation menu 16001c of FIG. 296(C), the "Hide" button changes to a "Show" button, and the display of "1000 medals" indicating the number of saved medals changes to "**** medals", as shown in operation menu 16001e of FIG. 297(A). This is to prevent the player from considering the existence of saved medals in the current game, and also to prevent other players from knowing the number of saved medals. Note that when the number of saved medals is displayed as "**** medals" in operation menu 16001e, anyone who sees it can tell how many medals the player has saved.

In addition, as shown in operation menu 16001e of Figure 297 (A), when the "Hide" button changes to the "Show" button by the player's operation, it is treated as if no saved medals exist, so the "Replay saved medals" button shown in operation menu 16001c of Figure 296 (C) changes to "Pay out saved medals" and becomes grayed out and inoperable, and in connection with this, the "Medal loan" button changes from unhighlighted to highlighted.

Furthermore, when the "Hide" button for saved medals is touched in operation menu 16001d of FIG. 296(D), the "Hide" button changes to a "Show" button, as shown in operation menu 16001f of FIG. 297(B), and the display of "1000 medals" indicating the number of saved medals changes to a display of "**** medals." This is to prevent the player from considering the existence of saved medals in the current game, and also to prevent other players from knowing the number of saved medals. Note that when the number of saved medals is displayed as "**** medals" in operation menu 16001f, anyone who sees it can tell how many medals the player has saved.

Also, as shown in operation menu 16001f in Figure 297 (B), when the "Hide" button changes to the "Show" button by the player's operation, it is treated as if there are no saved medals, so the "Replay saved medals" button shown in operation menu 16001d in Figure 296 (D) changes to "Pay out all medals" (remains highlighted), and in connection with this, the "Pay out all medals" button changes from being grayed out to being highlighted.

In this way, in this embodiment, the player (who plays using a membership card) can choose whether or not to play using saved medals, and if playing with saved medals is not selected, the number of saved medals can be prevented from being displayed. Furthermore, depending on whether or not saved medals are used, the operation buttons that can be operated in the operation menu are adjusted, and the display mode of the operation buttons is also adjusted. Note that various variations can be provided regarding the display mode of such operation buttons, and the embodiment shown here is merely one example.

So far, we have explained the operation menu GUI control function with reference to Figures 260, 261, 296, and 297. As mentioned above, the above configuration of the lending unit 15024 can be realized as the configuration of the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023.

As described above, the functions of the lending unit 15024, the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023, and the gaming system 15001 according to the 18th embodiment have been described with reference to Figures 253 to 297, but the configurations for realizing these functions are merely examples, and the technical ideas of the present application can be embodied by various other configurations. Furthermore, the lending unit 15024, the managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023, or the gaming system 15001 can be configured by appropriately combining the configurations for realizing each function described up to this point.

In addition, at least a portion of the configurations described in the first to seventeenth embodiments can be applied as necessary to the functions and configurations of the rental unit 15024, the managed gaming machine-compatible rental unit 15023, and the gaming system 15001 of this embodiment.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
The controlled gaming machine 15013 in the gaming system according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the above-mentioned Figures 7 and 8.

[2-1. Game flow]
Fig. 7 is an example of a game flow. Fig. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a game state. Note that the game flow shown in Fig. 7 is not a control flow but a flow that can be grasped by appearance.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters one of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole), the frame control unit performs a payout control process for the game ball. Pachinko games include special symbol games using special symbols and normal symbol games using normal symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process for a special symbol is performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting hole, and whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state is determined. The normal symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process for a normal symbol is performed based on the passage of a game ball into a passing gate, and whether or not to open a winning hole (for example, the second starting hole) is determined by operating a normal electric device. In the rest of this specification, "special symbol games" may be referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used in a broad sense, and for example, normal symbol games and games with effects that use operation units such as effect buttons are also included in "games."

In the following description of this specification, one special pattern game is defined as the period from when the variable display of the special pattern begins until this variable display ends and the result of the special pattern hit determination process is definitively displayed (derived) (more specifically, until the special pattern determination time has passed). However, if the game is controlled to a big hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the end of the big hit game state. Note that in one managed gaming machine 15013, a small hit is not included in the result of the special pattern hit determination process, but in another managed gaming machine 15013 in which a small hit is included in the result of the special pattern hit determination process, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the end of the small hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived and the game is controlled to a small hit game state.

When a stop display mode indicating a jackpot in a special symbol game is derived to the first special symbol display unit (not shown) or the second special symbol display unit (not shown), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which a special electric device (not shown) is operated to keep a jackpot winning hole (not shown) open for a predetermined time (e.g., up to 30,000 msec), and the possibility of winning a prize in the jackpot winning hole is relatively increased.

In addition, when a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win is output to the normal symbol display unit (not shown) in a normal symbol game, a winning hole (e.g., the second starting hole) is opened by the operation of a normal electric device (not shown), and the possibility of winning in the second starting hole, for example, is relatively increased.

The games that can be played in a pachinko game are not limited to special symbol games and normal symbol games, and new games other than these may also be playable.

The following provides an overview of the game flow for special symbol games and regular symbol games.

[2-1-1. Special symbol game]
As shown in Figure 7, the special pattern game mainly includes a special pattern start winning process which is carried out when there is a winning (passing) through the first start port or the second start port, and a special pattern control process which is carried out based on the establishment of the start condition for the special pattern.

When a game ball enters the first or second start port, a special symbol start winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (e.g., various random number values such as a random number value for determining a jackpot, a random number value for a pattern, a random number value for reaching a reach, and a random number value for selecting a performance) are extracted (obtained) from various counters for special symbols (e.g., a counter for determining a jackpot, a counter for determining a pattern, etc.). Each extracted random number value is held as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even when the special symbol control process is being executed.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start conditions for the special symbol are met. When the start conditions for the special symbol are met, a special symbol hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not there is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol's jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine the stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped is determined by referring to the random number value for pattern determination extracted from the special symbol's pattern determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variable flag is on, the probability variable control is executed. In the hit determination process for the special symbol described above, if the probability variable flag is off, it is determined to be a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variable flag is on, it is determined to be a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as the "jackpot probability."

The high probability flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM (e.g., corresponding to the main RAM mounted on the main control board 15211 of the medalless machine 15014), and is a flag for managing whether or not high probability control is executed. When the high probability flag is on, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is executed (e.g., in this embodiment, a high probability time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the high probability flag is off, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is not executed (e.g., a normal game state or a low probability time-saving game state).

Next, a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern) is determined by referencing the random number, the result of the special symbol winning judgment process described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed as described above. Then, a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined, a presentation pattern determination process is then performed to determine the presentation pattern. Then, based on the results of the presentation pattern determination process, presentation control process is performed for display presentation such as decorative symbols and character presentations displayed in the display area of the display device, and sound presentation such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker. The presentation control process is performed by a sub-CPU (e.g., corresponding to the sub-CPU mounted on the sub-control board 15212 of the medalless machine 15014).

Then, when the special symbol variable display control process and the presentation control process are completed and a jackpot has been hit, a jackpot game control process is carried out. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-jackpot game state is carried out. In this case, the game state transitions depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if the jackpot type is one in which both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are set to on, the game transitions to a high-probability time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends.

On the other hand, if there is no big win, i.e., if it is a miss, the special symbol game ends. Note that, in the above-mentioned one managed gaming machine 15013, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but in the above-mentioned other managed gaming machine 15013 in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small win, a small win game control process is performed when a small win is won. Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, if there is a time-saving hit, which will be described later, the game will transition to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the conditions for starting the special symbol are met, the various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

If a game ball enters the start hole during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start entry process is executed. Also, the special symbol start information extracted when the game ball enters the start hole (for example, various data such as random numbers such as a random number value for determining a jackpot, a random number value for the special symbol, a random number value for reaching a target, and a random number value for selecting a performance) is held until the start condition for the special symbol is met.

In addition, in the above-mentioned one managed gaming machine 15013, a total of up to eight pieces of start information for special patterns can be reserved, consisting of four pieces of start information for the first special pattern and four pieces of start information for the second special pattern, but the number of start information for special patterns that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to reserve more start information for the first special pattern than start information for the second special pattern, or it may be possible to reserve more start information for the second special pattern than start information for the first special pattern.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, a look-ahead performance function may be provided in which a look-ahead judgment is made to judge the result (whether or not a "jackpot" has been won) and the fluctuation pattern prior to the hit judgment process of the special pattern based on the start information extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the start hole between the time when the special symbol enters the start hole and the start condition of the special symbol is established, based on the start information extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the start hole, and a predetermined performance is performed based on the result of this look-ahead judgment. Note that the above look-ahead judgment may be made before or after the start information extracted when the game ball enters the start hole is reserved.

[2-1-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal pattern game mainly includes a normal pattern start passing process which is performed when the game ball passes through the passing gate, and a normal pattern control process which is performed based on the establishment of the normal pattern start condition.

When a game ball passes through the passing gate, a normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, start information for the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit) is extracted (obtained) from the hit determination counter for the normal symbol, and the extracted start information is reserved.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU (e.g., corresponding to the main CPU mounted on the main control board 15211 of the medalless machine 15014) judges whether the start condition for the normal symbol is met. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU refers to the normal symbol hit judgment random number value extracted from the hit judgment counter for the normal symbol, executes the normal symbol hit judgment process to determine whether or not the "normal symbol hit" is reached, and then executes the variation pattern determination process. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU refers to the result of the winning judgment process for the normal symbol and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, and executes a variable display control process that controls the variable display of the normal symbol, and a performance control process that performs a predetermined performance. Note that there are cases where the performance control process is not executed.

Then, when the variable display control process for the normal symbol and the performance control process are completed, the main CPU judges whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating a "normal winning symbol" has been output to the normal symbol display section. If it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has been output, the main CPU executes a normal winning symbol game control process. In this normal winning symbol game control process, the normal electric device is operated, and the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole in this embodiment) is opened so that the game ball can enter (pass through) the winning hole or it is easy to open the winning hole. On the other hand, if it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has not been output, the main CPU does not execute the normal winning symbol game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a game state where time-saving control is not executed (for example, a normal game state), the probability of deriving a stop display mode indicating a normal win may be set to 0. The time-saving control corresponds to at least one of the following controls: special symbol shortening control, which shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and electric support control, which operates a normal electric role to increase the frequency with which the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole in this embodiment) is opened, compared to when time-saving control is not executed. This time-saving control may be a control that performs both special symbol shortening control and electric support control, or a control that performs only one of special symbol shortening control and electric support control.

Electric support control is a control that improves the time-saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "normal pattern hit", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the normal electric role (number of times to open, opening time, wait time). The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of the game ball entering the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole in this embodiment), and refers to the winning probability of "normal pattern hit", the variable display time of the normal pattern, and/or the opening pattern of the normal electric role (number of times to open, opening time, wait time, etc.). In addition, improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier for the game ball to enter the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole in this embodiment). In other words, when the electric support control is executed, compared to when the electric support control is not executed, the winning probability of "normal pattern hit" is increased, the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and/or winning by the normal electric role is made easier (number of times to open, opening time is extended, wait time is shortened, etc.).

Then, each time the normal symbol start conditions are met, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

If a game ball passes through a passing gate during normal symbol control processing, normal symbol start passing processing is executed. In addition, normal symbol start information (for example, a random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit, etc.) extracted when a game ball passes through a passing gate is held until the start condition for the normal symbol is met.

The variable display of normal symbols will start in the order they were reserved, and when the start conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display will be performed for the earliest reserved start information of the reserved normal symbols.

The method for extracting various random numbers (for example, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot, the design random number value for the first special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is in reach, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is a jackpot, the design random number value for the second special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is in reach, and the random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is in reach, etc.) may be a soft random number method that generates random numbers within a specified range (width) by executing a program on the main CPU, or a hard random number method that extracts random numbers from a counter in a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a specified interval.

[2-1-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the game state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot game state and a jackpot game state. In the non-jackpot game state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when a jackpot is derived as a result of the hit determination process of the special symbol, the game state transitions from the non-jackpot game state to the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed even in the jackpot game state. Note that the explanation of the small jackpot game state will be omitted.

Non-jackpot game states can be broadly divided into low-probability states in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and high-probability game states in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high.

The high probability game state includes a high probability time-saving game state (high probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed. Note that, although not included in the high probability game state in the above-mentioned managed gaming machine 15013, as shown in FIG. 8, a high probability non-time-saving game state in which time-saving control is not executed (high probability, low base state) may also be included in the high probability game state.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability, low base) in which time-saving control is not executed, and a time-saving game state (low probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time-saving play state includes time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C.

The A time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a player can transition after a specific jackpot game state ends, and the A time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when a transition to the jackpot game state occurs. When the A time-saving game state ends due to a specified number of special symbol games being played, the game will generally transition to the normal game state.

The B time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a player can enter when, for example, a jackpot game state ends and the variable display of special symbols begins in a non-high probability game state (i.e., a game state in which the probability flag is off), or when the number of times the special symbols are variable displayed (e.g., a ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1,000 times), starting from when the RAM is cleared (described below). The B time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when a transition is made to the jackpot game state. When the B time-saving game state ends as a result of a specified number of special symbol games being played, the game will generally transition to the normal game state.

The time-saving C game state is a time-saving game state that can be entered when the result of the special symbol hit determination process performed in the low probability state is a "time-saving hit" and the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived, and the time-saving C game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games determined by winning the "time-saving hit" are played or when a transition is made to a jackpot game state. When the time-saving C game state ends by playing the specified number of special symbol games, as a general rule, a transition is made to a normal game state. Note that, for example, if multiple time-saving game states overlap, even if the specified number of special symbol games are played, the time-saving C game state continues rather than transitioning to a normal game state.

In this specification, whether or not multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the time-saving game states are said to "overlap" when the transition conditions to the time-saving game state are satisfied in the time-saving game state, or when the transition conditions to multiple time-saving game states are satisfied simultaneously. When multiple time-saving game states overlap, the main CPU internally operates all of the overlapping time-saving game states, that is, the overlapping time-saving game states are internally operated in parallel, which is said to be "executed in an overlapping manner." However, even if the main CPU internally executes multiple time-saving game states in an overlapping manner, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control that corresponds to one of the time-saving game states. In other words, even when multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, the player will understand that the game is controlled to one of the multiple time-saving game states.

Next, we will explain how the game state changes.

Even if the game is controlled in the normal game state, the time-saving game state (time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, time-saving game state C), or the high probability game state (for example, the high probability time-saving game state), if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a jackpot, the game will transition to the jackpot game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, depending on the game specifications, it is possible to transition to any of the following game states: normal game state, time-saving game state, and high-probability game state (e.g. high-probability time-saving game state). However, the time-saving game state to which you can transition when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled to a high probability game state, except for some managed game machines 15013 such as so-called ST machines and loop machines, there is no transition from the high probability game state to a time-limited game state or a normal game state. Similarly, there is no transition from the time-limited game state or the normal game state to the high probability game state unless the jackpot game state is passed through.

When controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to transition to the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C, but it is not possible to transition to the time-saving game state A without passing through the jackpot game state. However, when a specified number of special symbol games are played in the time-saving game state A, the game transitions to the normal game state, so it is possible to transition from the time-saving game state A to the normal game state. Note that, regardless of whether the game is controlled to the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C, the game transitions to the normal game state when a specified number of special symbol games are played, so it is also possible to transition from the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C to the normal game state.

Next, we will explain how to transition between time-saving play states.

When controlled in the time-saving game state A, the number of time-saving plays that can be performed in the time-saving game state A is set to a number less than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition for the time-saving game state B, so there is no transition from the time-saving game state A to the time-saving game state B. Also, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state B to the time-saving game state A. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the time-saving game state A is a "time-saving hit," the transition condition for the time-saving game state C is met, so the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state C may overlap. However, as described above, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state C to the time-saving game state A.

When controlled to the B time-saving game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving game state is met, and the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state may overlap. Also, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state may overlap.

When controlled to the C time-saving play state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving play state is met, and the C time-saving play state and the C time-saving play state may overlap.

[2-2. Receiving time-saving signals]
In the managed gaming machine 15013 as described above, for example, when it is possible to enter the C time-shortened gaming state (1) or the C time-shortened gaming state (2) in a low probability of special symbols (a low probability state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the hit determination process for special symbols is relatively low) or a low probability of normal symbols (a low probability state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the hit determination process for normal symbols is relatively low) after the end of the time-shortened gaming state, if the C time-shortened gaming state (1) is entered, a time-shortened signal is not output as a signal to be output outside the managed gaming machine 15013, and a time-shortened signal can be output outside the managed gaming machine 15013 only if the C time-shortened gaming state (2) is entered.

Here, the C time-saving game state (1) is a time-saving game state in which, for example, when a winning judgment process for a normal pattern is executed based on the passage of a game ball through a passing gate, and when a winning judgment is made, a normal electric device is operated to open a winning port (for example, the second starting port), the probability of the normal electric device being in a long-term open state (long-open winning probability) is low or such a probability does not exist. Also, the C time-saving game state (2) is a time-saving game state in which, for example, when a winning judgment process for a normal pattern is executed based on the passage of a game ball through a passing gate, and when a winning judgment is made, a normal electric device is operated to open a winning port (for example, the second starting port), the probability of the normal electric device being in a long-term open state (long-open winning probability) is high.

The managed gaming machine-compatible lending unit 15023 associated with such a managed gaming machine 15013 is configured, depending on the function of such managed gaming machine 15013, to not receive a time-saving signal from the managed gaming machine 15013 and not perform processing in response to such a time-saving signal when the C time-saving gaming state (1) is selected. On the other hand, when the C time-saving gaming state (2) is selected, to receive a time-saving signal from the managed gaming machine 15013 and perform a predetermined processing in response to the received time-saving signal.

As for the data lamp 15040 as shown in FIG. 253, if the corresponding managed gaming machine 15013 wins the C time-saving gaming state (1), the time-saving signal is not received from the managed gaming machine 15013, and data display processing based on such a time-saving signal is not performed. On the other hand, if the C time-saving gaming state (2) is won, the data lamp 15040 is configured to receive a time-saving signal from the managed gaming machine 15013 and to perform data display processing based on the received time-saving signal.

In addition, at least a portion of the configurations described in the first to eighteenth embodiments can be applied to the functions and configurations of the managed gaming machine 15013 according to this embodiment, as necessary.

The following provides additional information about the configuration of the gaming device and gaming system according to the 18th embodiment described above, as well as the effects of that configuration.

<Appendix D-1>
In recent years, enclosed pachinko gaming machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced onto the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, JP 2020-89447 A describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a lending operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

However, there is a demand for more efficient management of information about gaming machines and gaming devices in gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in JP 2020-89447 A). There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and gaming facility staff.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming device that can optimally manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an amusement device that is easy to use for players, amusement arcade staff, etc.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

(D-1-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024) provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (e.g., a medal-less machine 15014),
A storage information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024) capable of acquiring storage information (e.g., the number of medals held, flags, etc.) stored in the gaming machine, which is information related to value information (e.g., balance, medals held, medals saved, etc.);
a predetermined information providing means (e.g., a main CPU 15401 of a lending unit 15024) capable of providing predetermined information, which is information related to value information (e.g., information such as the number of medals held, 50), to the gaming machine;
The predetermined information providing means includes:
A gaming device characterized by controlling the gaming machine to provide specified information depending on the storage information acquired by the storage information acquisition means (for example, when the number of stored medals falls below 20).

(D-1-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, the device has a specific information storage means (e.g., a storage unit 15404) capable of storing specific information (e.g., balance (amount and number of points), number of medals held, number of medals saved, etc.) which is information related to multiple types of value information,
The predetermined information providing means includes:
A priority order that determines which type of value information is to be provided to the gaming machine from among the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, and/or
At least one of an upper limit and a lower limit of the use of each type of value information can be set.

(D-1-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A storage information acquisition means for acquiring storage information (number of medals held, flags, etc.) stored in the gaming machine, which is information related to value information;
a predetermined information providing means for providing, to the gaming machine, predetermined information which is information related to value information and is to be provided to the gaming machine;
The predetermined information providing means includes:
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system 15001) characterized by controlling the gaming machine to provide predetermined information in accordance with the accumulated information acquired by the accumulated information acquisition means.

The present invention provides a gaming device and gaming system that can optimally manage information about gaming machines, etc.

The present invention also provides gaming devices and gaming systems that are easy to use for players, gaming facility staff, and others.

<Appendix D-2>
In recent years, enclosed pachinko gaming machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced onto the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, JP2020-89447A describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a lending operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

However, there is a demand for more efficient management of information about gaming machines and gaming devices in gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in JP 2020-89447 A). There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and gaming facility staff.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming device that can optimally manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an amusement device that is easy to use for players, amusement arcade staff, etc.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

(D-2-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A value information storage means (e.g., a storage unit 15404) capable of storing value information (e.g., a balance, a number of medals held, a number of medals saved, etc.);
and a usage restriction control means (e.g., the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024) that controls to restrict the usage of the value information when a predetermined instruction (e.g., an instruction to touch a "Donate" button displayed on the operation menu 16001 of the operation unit 15409) is given,
The value information stored in the value information storage means can be controlled so that if the value related to the value information is a predetermined set value, it cannot be moved to the storage medium (for example, if a player does not have a membership card, a small number of medals cannot be moved to a visitor card);
The usage restriction control means is a gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024, a settlement machine 15080, etc.) that is characterized by controlling the use of the value related to the value information (e.g., sending donation medal number data to a card server 15100) when the specified instruction is given and the value information cannot be moved to the storage medium.

(D-2-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, a predetermined information providing means (for example, the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024) capable of providing predetermined information, which is information related to value information (for example, the number of medals held is 50, etc.), to the gaming machine;
and a storage information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024) capable of acquiring storage information (e.g., the number of medals held, flags, etc.) stored in the gaming machine, which is information related to value information;
When the total value calculated based on the value information stored in the value information storage means and the accumulated information acquired by the accumulated information acquisition means is the predetermined set value, the value information and accumulated information relating to the total value cannot be moved to the storage medium (for example, when the total number of medals stored in the lending unit 15024 and the number of medals accumulated in the medalless machine 15014 is small, the value information and accumulated information cannot be moved to the visitor card).
The usage restriction control means is configured to control the usage restriction of the total value when the specified instruction is given and the value information related to the total value and the value information related to the accumulated information cannot be moved to the storage medium (for example, when a player presses the counting button of the medalless machine 15014 to add the accumulated medals to the held medals stored in the lending unit 24, and transmit the held medal number after the addition to the card server 15100 as donation medal number data).

(D-2-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A value information storage means capable of storing value information;
a use restriction control means for controlling the use of the value information so as to restrict its use when a predetermined instruction is given,
The value information stored in the value information storage means can be controlled so as not to be moved to a storage medium when a value related to the value information is a predetermined set value;
The usage restriction control means is a gaming system (e.g., gaming system 15001) characterized in that, when the specified instruction is given and the value information cannot be moved to the storage medium, it controls to restrict the use of the value related to the value information.

The present invention provides a gaming device and gaming system that can optimally manage information about gaming machines, etc.

The present invention also provides gaming devices and gaming systems that are easy to use for players, gaming facility staff, and others.

<Appendix D-3>
In recent years, enclosed pachinko gaming machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced onto the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, JP2020-89447A describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a lending operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

However, there is a demand for more efficient management of information about gaming machines and gaming devices in gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in JP 2020-89447 A). There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and gaming facility staff.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming device that can optimally manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an amusement device that is easy to use for players, amusement arcade staff, etc.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

(D-3-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024) provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (e.g., a medal-less machine 15014),
A specific information storage means (e.g., a storage unit 15404) capable of storing specific information (balance (amount and number of points), number of medals held, number of medals saved, etc.) which is information related to multiple types of value information (balance, medals held, medals saved, etc.);
and a predetermined information providing means (e.g., a main CPU 15401 of a lending unit 15024) capable of providing predetermined information, which is information related to value information (e.g., the number of medals held is 50), to the gaming machine;
A gaming device characterized by being controlled so that, when the specified information is not provided to the gaming machine due to an abnormality (e.g., an abnormality within the lending unit 15024, an abnormality in the communication network between the lending unit 15024 and the medalless machine 15014, an abnormality within the medalless machine 15014, etc.), the specific information corresponding to the specified information is stored in the specific information storage means as specific information (e.g., the number of held medals) related to a specified type of value information (e.g., held medals), regardless of what type of value information the specific information corresponding to the specified information related to before it was provided (for example, when an abnormality occurs when a medal is instructed to be loaned from the balance, the number of held medals corresponding to the amount corresponding to the medal loan is added and stored in the lending unit 15024, and when an abnormality occurs when a command is given to replay the saved medals, the number of held medals corresponding to the number of saved medals is added and stored in the lending unit 15024).

(D-3-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A specific information storage means capable of storing specific information (balance (amount and number of points), number of medals held, number of medals saved, etc.) which is information related to multiple types of value information (balance, medals held, medals saved, etc.);
a predetermined information providing means for providing predetermined information, which is information related to value information, to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system 15001) characterized in that, when the specified information is not provided to the gaming machine due to an abnormality, the specified information providing means controls so that specific information corresponding to the specified information is stored in the specific information storage means as specific information relating to a specified type of value information, regardless of what type of value information the specific information corresponding to the specified information related to before it was provided.

The present invention provides a gaming device and gaming system that can optimally manage information about gaming machines, etc.

The present invention also provides gaming devices and gaming systems that are easy to use for players, gaming facility staff, and others.

<Appendix D-4>
In recent years, enclosed pachinko gaming machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced onto the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, JP 2020-89447 A describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a lending operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

However, there is a demand for more efficient management of information about gaming machines and gaming devices in gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in JP 2020-89447 A). There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and gaming facility staff.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming device that can optimally manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an amusement device that is easy to use for players, amusement arcade staff, etc.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

(D-4-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024) provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (e.g., a medal-less machine 15014),
A storage medium receiving unit (e.g., a card insertion slot 15321, etc.) capable of receiving a storage medium (e.g., an IC card such as a membership card or a visitor card) capable of storing value information (e.g., a balance (amount and number of points), a number of medals held, a number of medals saved, etc.);
A value information storage means (e.g., a storage unit 15404) capable of storing value information;
A predetermined information providing means (e.g., the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024) capable of providing predetermined information, which is information related to value information (e.g., the number of medals held is 50), to the gaming machine;
A storage information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024) capable of acquiring storage information (e.g., the number of medals held, flags, etc.) stored in the gaming machine, which is information related to value information;
a storage control means (e.g., main CPU 15401 of rental unit 15024) capable of controlling to store predetermined value information (e.g., value information stored in memory unit 15404) in a storage medium accepted by the storage medium acceptance means or in another storage medium under predetermined conditions (e.g., when a membership card is inserted into card insertion slot 15321, specific information stored in memory unit 15404 is stored in the storage medium under a first condition, and when a visitor card is inserted into card insertion slot 15321 or when no card is inserted, specific information stored in memory unit 15404 is stored in the storage medium under a second condition);
A gaming device, wherein the predetermined conditions include value information stored in the value information storage means and accumulated information acquired by the accumulated information acquisition means.

(D-4-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The storage control means
The predetermined value information can be controlled to be stored in the storage medium according to the relationship between a total value calculated based on the value information stored in the value information storage means and the storage information acquired by the storage information acquisition means, and a predetermined value (for example, when the sum of the number of medals held stored in the lending unit 15024 and the number of medals stored in the medalless machine 15014 is 50 or more);
The storage medium to be stored is the storage medium of a predetermined type when the storage medium receiving means receives the storage medium of the predetermined type (for example, when a visitor card is inserted into the card insertion slot 15321, or when a mobile terminal, IC card, etc. is read by the non-contact IC card RW 15406, etc.),
If no storage medium is received by the storage medium receiving means, the storage medium is assumed to be a storage medium (a new visitor card) that has been held within the gaming device.

(D-4-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
a storage medium receiving means capable of receiving a storage medium capable of storing value information;
A value information storage means capable of storing value information;
a predetermined information providing means capable of providing predetermined information, which is information related to value information, to the gaming machine;
A storage information acquisition means for acquiring storage information about value information stored in the gaming machine;
a storage control means capable of controlling the storage medium accepted by the storage medium acceptance means or another storage medium to store predetermined value information under predetermined conditions;
A gaming system, characterized in that the predetermined conditions include value information stored in the value information storage means and accumulation information acquired by the accumulation information acquisition means.

The present invention provides a gaming device and gaming system that can optimally manage information about gaming machines, etc.

The present invention also provides gaming devices and gaming systems that are easy to use for players, gaming facility staff, and others.

<Appendix D-5>
In recent years, enclosed pachinko gaming machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced onto the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, JP2020-89447A describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a lending operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

However, there is a demand for more efficient management of information about gaming machines and gaming devices in gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in JP 2020-89447 A). There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and gaming facility staff.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming device that can optimally manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an amusement device that is easy to use for players, amusement arcade staff, etc.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

(D-5-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024) provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (e.g., a medal-less machine 15014),
A storage medium receiving means (e.g., a card insertion slot 15321) capable of receiving a storage medium capable of storing value information (e.g., balance (amount and number of points), number of medals held, number of medals saved, etc.) (e.g., a visitor card capable of storing the balance, number of medals held, etc., or a membership card capable of storing information for accessing the balance, number of medals held, number of medals saved, etc.);
A value information storage means (e.g., a storage unit 15404) capable of storing value information;
A sharing control means (e.g., a main CPU 150401 of the lending unit 15024) for controlling the sharing of value information,
The sharing control means can control the storage of a specified quantity of the value information stored in the value information storage means in at least one first type storage medium (e.g., a visitor card) in response to a predetermined operation (e.g., an operation of touching a "share medals" button or the like in an operation menu 16001 displayed on the operation unit 15409),
A gaming device characterized in that it is capable of controlling whether or not to enable play on the gaming machine after controlling the storage of value information in the first type of storage medium depending on predetermined conditions (for example, whether or not a membership card is inserted).

(D-5-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The shared control means includes:
When a second type storage medium (e.g., a membership card) that can store different information from that of a first type storage medium is accepted by the storage medium acceptance means, before the storage is performed on the first type storage medium, the second type storage medium is put into a state in which it has not been accepted by the storage medium acceptance means (e.g., a state in which lock information has been written to the membership card and then ejected from the card insertion port 15321, or a state in which lock information has been written by touching a predetermined position on a rental unit 15024, such as a smartphone used as a membership card, and the completion of the writing has been notified),
The gaming machine is configured to be controllable so that play on the gaming machine is not possible (for example, a shared lock screen 16121 is displayed on the operation unit 15409 and control is performed to prevent play) until the second type storage medium is accepted by the storage medium accepting means again (for example, a state in which value information is written onto a visitor card and then ejected from the card insertion port 15321, or a state in which value information is written by a smartphone or the like used as a visitor card touching a predetermined position on the rental unit 15024 and the completion of the writing is notified) after the first type storage medium is not accepted by the storage medium accepting means (for example, a state in which a member card is inserted again into the card insertion port 15321 while the shared lock screen 16121 is displayed, or a state in which a smartphone or the like used as a member card touches a predetermined position on the rental unit 15024 while the shared lock screen 16121 is displayed).

(D-5-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
a storage medium receiving means capable of receiving a storage medium capable of storing value information;
A value information storage means capable of storing value information;
a sharing control means for controlling sharing of value information,
the shared control means is capable of controlling, in response to a predetermined operation, to store a specified quantity of part of the value information stored in the value information storage means in at least one first type storage medium;
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system 15001) characterized in that it is possible to control whether or not to enable play on the gaming machine after controlling storage to be performed on the first type of storage medium according to specified conditions.

The present invention provides a gaming device and gaming system that can optimally manage information about gaming machines, etc.

The present invention also provides gaming devices and gaming systems that are easy to use for players, gaming facility staff, and others.

<Appendix D-6>
In recent years, enclosed pachinko gaming machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced onto the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, JP 2020-89447 A describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a lending operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

However, there is a demand for more efficient management of information about gaming machines and gaming devices in gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in JP 2020-89447 A). There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and gaming facility staff.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming device that can optimally manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an amusement device that is easy to use for players, amusement arcade staff, etc.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

(D-6-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024) provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (e.g., a medal-less machine 15014),
A storage information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024) capable of acquiring storage information (e.g., the number of medals held, flags, etc.) stored in the gaming machine, which is information related to value information;
A store-closing control processing means (e.g., a main CPU 15401 of the rental unit 15024) that controls the store-closing process;
The closing control processing means includes:
A gaming device characterized in that, when performing a store-closing process to execute a store-closing process (including, for example, when receiving information that is the starting point of the store-closing process, such as receiving a store-closing notification from a card server 100), if it is determined that the gaming machine is storing value information based on the stored information acquired by the stored information acquisition means, the gaming device can be controlled to make a predetermined notification (for example, turning on a lamp or displaying a message).

(D-6-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
Further, the device has a value information storage means (e.g., a storage unit 15404) capable of storing value information,
The closing control processing means includes:
When performing the store-closing process to execute the store-closing process, the device is configured to clear specific value information (e.g., the number of medals held) stored in the value information storage means under predetermined conditions (e.g., when a membership card is not inserted, etc.).

(D-6-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A storage information acquisition means for acquiring storage information regarding value information stored in the gaming machine;
A store closing control processing means for controlling a store closing process,
The closing control processing means includes:
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system 15001) characterized in that, when performing a closing process to execute a closing process, if it is determined that the gaming machine is storing value information based on the storage information acquired by the storage information acquisition means, the gaming system can be controlled to make a predetermined notification.

The present invention provides a gaming device and gaming system that can optimally manage information about gaming machines, etc.

The present invention also provides gaming devices and gaming systems that are easy to use for players, gaming facility staff, and others.

<Appendix D-7>
In recent years, enclosed pachinko gaming machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced onto the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, JP2020-89447A describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a lending operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

However, there is a demand for more efficient management of information about gaming machines and gaming devices in gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in JP 2020-89447 A). There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and gaming facility staff.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming device that can optimally manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an amusement device that is easy to use for players, amusement arcade staff, etc.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

(D-7-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024) that is provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (e.g., a medal-less machine 15014) and performs a predetermined control process,
A first storage means (e.g., a RAM 15403) capable of temporarily storing data related to the predetermined control processing;
A second storage means (e.g., a storage unit 15404) including a first storage area (e.g., an A side) and a second storage area (e.g., a B side);
A data restoration means (e.g., a main CPU 15401 of the rental unit 15024) for restoring the data stored in the first storage means,
The data recovery means includes:
At the time of startup, if data in one of the storage areas (for example, the first storage area) included in the second storage means is normal, the data in the one of the storage areas is copied to the first storage means;
The gaming device then copies the data in one of the memory areas to another memory area (e.g., a second memory area).

(D-7-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
the data of the first storage means, the data of the first storage area, and the data of the second storage area are each configured with the same size and the same content, and each data includes verification data (e.g., CRC data) for determining whether the data is normal or not;
when at least a part of the data in the first storage means is updated, the verification data included in the data is updated based on the updated data part;
The update data portion and the verification data are configured to be copied to the first storage area and the second storage area, respectively.

(D-7-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A first storage means capable of temporarily storing data relating to a predetermined control process;
a second storage means including a first storage area and a second storage area;
a data recovery means for recovering the data stored in the first storage means,
The data recovery means includes:
At the time of startup, if the data in one of the storage areas included in the second storage means is normal, copying the data in the one of the storage areas to the first storage means;
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system 15001) characterized in that the data in one memory area is then copied to the other memory area.

The present invention provides a gaming device and gaming system that can optimally manage information about gaming machines, etc.

The present invention also provides gaming devices and gaming systems that are easy to use for players, gaming facility staff, and others.

<Appendix D-8>
In recent years, enclosed pachinko gaming machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced onto the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, JP2020-89447A describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a lending operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

However, there is a demand for more efficient management of information about gaming machines and gaming devices in gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in JP 2020-89447 A). There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and gaming facility staff.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming device that can optimally manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an amusement device that is easy to use for players, amusement arcade staff, etc.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

(D-8-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024) provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (e.g., a medal-less machine 15014),
A storage medium receiving means (e.g., a card insertion slot 15321) capable of receiving a storage medium capable of storing value information (e.g., balance (amount and number of points), number of medals held, number of medals saved, etc.) (e.g., a visitor card capable of storing the balance, number of medals held, etc., or a membership card capable of storing information for accessing the balance, number of medals held, number of medals saved, etc.);
and a game lock control means (e.g., the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024) capable of transitioning the gaming machine to a game lock state in which play on the gaming machine is not possible (e.g., a state in which the break screen 16151 shown in FIG. 276(A) is displayed on the operation unit 15409 and the operation unit 15409 cannot be operated until a break card is inserted again),
The game lock control means includes:
In response to a first operation by the player (e.g., an operation of touching a "First Break" button on the operation menu 16001 displayed on the operation unit 15409), control is performed under a first condition so that predetermined information (e.g., lock information) is stored in a storage medium accepted by the storage medium acceptance means (a member card or visitor card inserted through the card insertion slot 15321, or a smartphone touched to a predetermined position on the rental unit 15024, etc.) or in another storage medium (a newly issued visitor card);
Transition to the gaming lock state,
When the storage medium storing the predetermined information is accepted by the storage medium acceptance means (for example, when a member card or visitor card is inserted through the card insertion slot 15321, or when a smartphone or the like used as a member card or visitor card is touched to a predetermined position on the rental unit 15024, etc.), the game lock state is released,
A gaming device characterized in that the first condition can be controlled to differ depending on whether the storage medium accepting means accepts a specific type of storage medium (e.g., a membership card) (for example, if a membership card is inserted, the game is unconditionally locked, and otherwise, a balance of more than a predetermined amount is stored in the lending unit 15024).

(D-8-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The game lock control means includes:
In response to a second operation (for example, touching the "Second Break" button in the maintenance mode menu 16171 displayed on the operation unit 15409) by a user other than the player (for example, a staff member of an amusement facility), the game is configured to transition to the game lock state under a second condition different from the first condition (for example, when none of a plurality of conditions including a condition that an IC card is in a read/write position in the rental unit 15024 is satisfied).

(D-8-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
a storage medium receiving means capable of receiving a storage medium capable of storing value information;
A game lock control means for transitioning the game machine to a game lock state in which the game machine cannot be played,
The game lock control means includes:
in response to a first operation by a player, under a first condition, control is performed so as to store predetermined information (lock information) in the storage medium accepted by the storage medium acceptance means or in another storage medium (a newly issued visitor card);
Transition to the gaming lock state,
When the storage medium storing the predetermined information is received by the storage medium receiving means, the game lock state is released;
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system 15001) characterized in that the first condition can be controlled to vary depending on whether the storage medium receiving means has received a specific type of storage medium.

The present invention provides a gaming device and gaming system that can optimally manage information about gaming machines, etc.

The present invention also provides gaming devices and gaming systems that are easy to use for players, gaming facility staff, and others.

<Appendix D-9>
In recent years, enclosed pachinko gaming machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced onto the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, JP2020-89447A describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a lending operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

However, there is a demand for more efficient management of information about gaming machines and gaming devices in gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in JP 2020-89447 A). There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and gaming facility staff.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming device that can optimally manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an amusement device that is easy to use for players, amusement arcade staff, etc.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

(D-9-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024) provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (e.g., a medal-less machine 15014),
An information receiving means (e.g., the main CPU 15401 of the rental unit 15024) for receiving response information (e.g., a device status response) transmitted in response to first information (e.g., a device status notification) transmitted to a server (e.g., the card server 15100);
A file management means (e.g., a main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024) for managing stored files (e.g., program files stored in the lending unit 15024 that control the operation of the lending unit 15024, etc.),
The file management means includes:
when the first information and a predetermined portion of the response information (e.g., version information (in the case of a device status notification or device status response) or version information of a message format (in the case of a communication start notification or communication start response)) do not match, control is performed so as to download an update file from the server by transmitting second information (e.g., a download start notification) to the server;
A gaming device characterized in that, for files among the stored files that are different in version from the corresponding file of the update file, the files are updated to the corresponding file of the update file, and then the device is controlled to be restarted.

(D-9-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
When downloading of the update file has failed or when the downloaded update file is invalid, the file management means is capable of controlling to retry downloading of the update file by transmitting the first information or the second information to the server again (for example, a download start notification which is the second information (in the case of a device status notification/device status response) or a communication start notification which is the first information (in the case of a communication start notification/communication start response));
The number of retry attempts for the download is limited to a predetermined number (for example, three retry attempts).

(D-9-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
an information receiving means for receiving response information transmitted in response to the first information transmitted to the server;
A file management means for managing the stored files,
The file management means includes:
When a predetermined portion of the first information and the response information does not match, second information is transmitted to the server, thereby controlling to download an update file from the server;
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system 15001) characterized in that, for files among the stored files that are different in version from the corresponding file of the update file, the files are updated to the corresponding file of the update file, and then the system is controlled to be restarted.

The present invention provides a gaming device and gaming system that can optimally manage information about gaming machines, etc.

The present invention also provides gaming devices and gaming systems that are easy to use for players, gaming facility staff, and others.

<Appendix D-10>
In recent years, enclosed pachinko gaming machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced onto the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, JP2020-89447A describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a lending operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

However, there is a demand for more efficient management of information about gaming machines and gaming devices in gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in JP 2020-89447 A). There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and gaming facility staff.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming device that can optimally manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an amusement device that is easy to use for players, amusement arcade staff, etc.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

(D-10-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024) provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (e.g., a medal-less machine 15014),
A value information storage means (e.g., a storage unit 15404) capable of storing value information (e.g., a balance (amount and number of points), a number of medals held, a number of medals saved, etc.);
A storage information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024) capable of acquiring storage information (e.g., the number of medals held, flags, etc.) stored in the gaming machine, which is information related to value information;
A maintenance control means (e.g., the main CPU 15401 of the rental unit 15024) capable of performing operations in a maintenance mode (e.g., operations that can be performed by touching each button displayed on the maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in FIG. 274) in response to operations by users other than players (e.g., staff of an amusement facility);
and a notification means (e.g., a display device (operation unit 15409), a speaker 15411, a lamp (LED unit 15408), etc.) capable of notifying predetermined information,
The maintenance control means includes:
determining whether or not an operation can be performed in the maintenance mode based on at least one of the value information stored in the value information storage means and the storage information acquired by the storage information acquisition means;
A gaming device, characterized in that, when it is determined that operation in the maintenance mode is not possible, the notification means can be controlled to give a predetermined notification.

(D-10-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The operation in the maintenance mode is an operation in a test play mode in which the user can play a test game on the gaming machine (for example, an operation in the test play mode that can be performed by touching a “Test Play Start” button displayed on the maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in FIG. 274 ),
If it is determined that the value information stored in the value information storage means or the value calculated based on the accumulated information is a predetermined value (for example, if there is either a balance or held medals remaining in the lending unit 15024, or if there are accumulated medals remaining in the medalless machine 15014), the device is configured to be controlled so that operation in the trial mode is not possible.

(D-10-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The operation in the maintenance mode is a clear operation capable of clearing the value information stored in the value information storage means (for example, an operation of resetting the number of held medals stored in the lending unit 15024 to zero by touching the “Clear Excess Balls” button displayed in the maintenance mode menu 16171 shown in FIG. 274 ),
If the value based on the specific value information stored in the value information storage means is a first predetermined value (for example, if the number of medals held stored in the lending unit 15024 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number), or if the value calculated based on the storage information is a second predetermined value (for example, if stored medals remain in the medalless machine 15014), the clear operation is controlled so that it cannot be performed.

(D-10-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A value information storage means capable of storing value information;
A storage information acquisition means for acquiring storage information (number of medals held, no flag) stored in the gaming machine, which is information related to value information;
A maintenance control means capable of performing an operation in a maintenance mode in response to an operation by a user other than a player;
A notification means capable of notifying predetermined information,
The maintenance control means includes:
determining whether or not an operation can be performed in the maintenance mode based on at least one of the value information stored in the value information storage means and the storage information acquired by the storage information acquisition means;
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system 15001) characterized in that, when it is determined that operation in the maintenance mode is not possible, the notification means can be controlled to give a predetermined notification.

The present invention provides a gaming device and gaming system that can optimally manage information about gaming machines, etc.

The present invention also provides gaming devices and gaming systems that are easy to use for players, gaming facility staff, and others.

<Appendix D-11>
In recent years, enclosed pachinko gaming machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced onto the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, JP2020-89447A describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a lending operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

However, there is a demand for more efficient management of information about gaming machines and gaming devices in gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in JP 2020-89447 A). There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and gaming facility staff.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming device that can optimally manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an amusement device that is easy to use for players, amusement arcade staff, etc.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

(D-11-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024) provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (e.g., a medal-less machine 15014),
A value information storage means (e.g., a storage unit 15404) capable of storing value information (e.g., a balance (amount and number of points), a number of medals held, a number of medals saved, etc.);
a storage medium receiving means (e.g., a card insertion slot 15321) capable of receiving a storage medium capable of storing value information (e.g., a membership card or a visitor card);
A value information management means (e.g., a main CPU 15401 of the lending unit 15024) for managing the value information stored in the value information storage means,
The value information includes first value information (e.g., the number of medals held, etc.) corresponding to a predetermined unit of game medium, and second value information (e.g., the balance, etc.) other than the first value information,
The value information management means includes:
A gaming device characterized in that when the storage medium is accepted by the storage medium acceptance means (for example, when a membership card or visitor card is inserted through the card insertion slot 15321, or when a visitor card or a smartphone used as a membership card is touched to a predetermined position on the rental unit 15024), whether or not the value information stored in the storage medium can be added to the value information stored in the value information storage means is determined based on predetermined conditions including the type of the storage medium (for example, whether the accepted storage medium is a membership card or a visitor card).

(D-11-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
Further, the device has a notification means (for example, an operation unit 15409 or a speaker 15411) capable of notifying predetermined information,
The value information management means includes:
When a specific type of storage medium (e.g., a membership card) in which the second value information is stored is accepted by the storage medium accepting means, and when the second value information (e.g., a balance) is stored in the value information storage means, the notification means is configured to control the notification means to make a predetermined notification.

(D-11-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A value information storage means capable of storing value information;
a storage medium receiving means capable of receiving a storage medium capable of storing value information;
a value information management means for managing the value information stored in the value information storage means,
the value information includes first value information corresponding to a unit of a predetermined game medium and second value information other than the first value information,
The value information management means includes:
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system 15001) characterized in that, when the storage medium is accepted by the storage medium acceptance means, whether or not the value information stored in the storage medium can be added to the value information stored in the value information storage means is determined based on predetermined conditions including the type of the storage medium.

The present invention provides a gaming device and gaming system that can optimally manage information about gaming machines, etc.

The present invention also provides gaming devices and gaming systems that are easy to use for players, gaming facility staff, and others.

<Appendix D-12>
In recent years, enclosed pachinko gaming machines and medal-less slot machines have been introduced onto the market as gaming machines. These gaming machines are connected to an external gaming medium handling device (gaming device) via a specified interface for two-way communication. The gaming medium handling device electromagnetically manages the gaming media lent to the gaming machine and the gaming media acquired by the gaming machine, and information related to the gaming medium is exchanged between the gaming machine and the gaming machine, rather than actual gaming media such as game balls or medals.

For example, JP 2020-89447 A describes that a gaming medium handling device connected to a gaming medium management device installed in a gaming machine such as an enclosed pachinko gaming machine or a medal-less slot machine can be provided with an insertion slot for valuable items such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, a lending operation means, etc.

The game flow at that time is as follows: for example, the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, a predetermined amount of value is subtracted based on the operation of the lending operation means, and the game media corresponding to the subtracted value is increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and if more game media are required, repeats the operation of the lending operation means. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player performs a return operation, which causes the game media management device to transmit the number of acquired game media to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded from the insertion port. At this time, the game media management device also clears the number of game media stored in itself when it transmits the number of game media.

However, there is a demand for more efficient management of information about gaming machines and gaming devices in gaming devices (for example, gaming media management devices such as those disclosed in JP 2020-89447 A). There is also a need for gaming devices that are easy to use for players and gaming facility staff.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming device that can optimally manage information about gaming machines and gaming devices.

Another object of the present invention is to provide an amusement device that is easy to use for players, amusement arcade staff, etc.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming device and gaming system.

(D-12-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming device (e.g., a rental unit 15024) provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (e.g., a medal-less machine 15014),
A deposit means for accepting deposits from a player (for example, a bill insertion slot 15301 into which bills are inserted, a non-contact IC card RW15406 for reading electronic money information, etc.),
A value information storage means (e.g., a storage unit 15404) capable of storing value information relating to the value deposited by the deposit means;
and a predetermined information providing means (e.g., a main CPU 15401 of a lending unit 15024) capable of providing the gaming machine with predetermined information on value information corresponding to at least a part of the value information stored in the value information storage means (e.g., information such as 50 lending medals),
The gaming device is characterized in that the specified information providing means is capable of controlling whether or not to provide the specified information (e.g., information indicating the number of medals to be loaned out from the balance added by the deposit) to the gaming machine when a deposit is made by the deposit means, in accordance with a pre-set first setting (e.g., a setting provided from a card server 15100 connected to the loan unit 15024).

(D-12-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The predetermined information providing means determines the predetermined information (e.g., the number of medals to be lent at one time) to be provided to the gaming machine according to a second setting (e.g., a setting provided from a card server 15100 connected to the lending unit 15024) that is set in advance,
The first setting and the second setting are configured to be able to be set for each gaming machine.

(D-12-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A deposit means for accepting deposits from players;
a value information storage means capable of storing value information relating to the value deposited by the deposit means;
a predetermined information providing means for providing a gaming machine with predetermined information relating to value information corresponding to at least a part of the value information stored in the value information storage means,
A gaming system (e.g., gaming system 15001), characterized in that the specified information providing means is capable of controlling whether or not to provide the specified information to the gaming machine when a deposit is made by the deposit means, in accordance with a first setting that has been set in advance.

The present invention provides a gaming device and gaming system that can optimally manage information about gaming machines, etc.

The present invention also provides gaming devices and gaming systems that are easy to use for players, gaming facility staff, and others.

15001 Gaming system 15011 Pachinko machine 15012 Pachislot machine 15013 Managed gaming machine 15014 Medalless machine 15021 Gaming ball lending unit 15022 Gaming medal lending unit 15023 Lending unit compatible with managed gaming machine 15024 Lending unit (lending unit compatible with medalless machine)
15070 Hall computer 15100 Card server 15110 Member server

Claims (2)

A gaming device provided in correspondence with a gaming machine,
A value information storage means capable of storing value information;
A storage information acquisition means for acquiring storage information about value information stored in the gaming machine;
A maintenance control means capable of performing an operation in a maintenance mode in response to an operation by a user other than a player;
A notification means capable of notifying predetermined information,
The maintenance control means includes:
determining whether a predetermined operation can be performed in the maintenance mode based on at least one of the value information stored in the value information storage means and the storage information acquired by the storage information acquisition means;
When a predetermined operation cannot be performed in the maintenance mode, the notification means can be controlled to give a predetermined notification,
the predetermined operation is a clear operation capable of clearing the value information stored in the value information storage means,
A gaming device characterized in that when a value based on specific value information stored in the value information storage means is a first predetermined value, or when a value calculated based on the accumulated information is a second predetermined value, the device is controlled so that the clear operation cannot be performed. A value information storage means capable of storing value information;
A storage information acquisition means for acquiring storage information about value information stored in the gaming machine;
A maintenance control means capable of performing an operation in a maintenance mode in response to an operation by a user other than a player;
A notification means capable of notifying predetermined information,
The maintenance control means includes:
determining whether a predetermined operation can be performed in the maintenance mode based on at least one of the value information stored in the value information storage means and the storage information acquired by the storage information acquisition means;
When a predetermined operation cannot be performed in the maintenance mode, the notification means can be controlled to give a predetermined notification,
the predetermined operation is a clear operation capable of clearing the value information stored in the value information storage means,
A gaming system characterized in that when a value based on specific value information stored in the value information storage means is a first predetermined value, or when a value calculated based on the accumulated information is a second predetermined value, the system is controlled so that the clear operation cannot be performed.

Images